COST AND MANAGEMENT MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

STUDY MATERIAL

EXECUTIVE PROGRAMME

COST

COSTCOST

COST AND

AND AND

AND MANAGEMENT

MANAGEMENT MANAGEMENT

MANAGEMENT

ACCOUNTING

ACCOUNTINGACCOUNTING

ACCOUNTING

MODULE 1

PAPER 2

ICSI House, 22, Institutional Area, Lodi Road, New Delhi 110 003

tel 011-4534 1000, 4150 4444 fax +91-11-2462 6727

email info@icsi.edu website www.icsi.edu

TIMING OF HEADQUARTERS

Monday to Friday

Office Timings – 9.00 A.M. to 5.30 P.M.

Public Dealing Timings

Without financial transactions – 9.30 A.M. to 5.00 P.M.

With financial transactions – 9.30 A.M. to 4.00 P.M.

Phones

4150444,45341000

Fax

011-24626727

Website

www.icsi.edu

E-mail

info@icsi.edu

Laser Typesetting by Delhi Computer Services, Dwarka, New Delhi, and

Printed at M.P.Printers/October, 2015/5000

EXECUTIVE PROGRAMME

COST AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

Finance and accounting have assumed much importance in today’s competitive world of business

wherein corporate organisations have to show the true and fair view of their financial position. Thus,

the application of accounting in the business sector has become an indispensable factor. Company

Secretary has to provide the complete and accurate information about the financial operations of the

company to management for decision making. This emphasises that the books of account are to be

maintained accurately, up-to-date and as per the norms.

The subject ‘Cost and Management Accounting’ is very important and useful for optimum

utilisation of existing resources. These are branches of accounting and had been developed due to

limitations of financial accounting. It is an indispensable discipline for corporate management, as the

information collected and presented to management based on cost and management accounting

techniques helps management to solve not only specific problems but also guides them in decision

making. Keeping in view the importance of this subject, various topics on Cost and Management

Accounting have been prescribed in the syllabus of CS Executive Programme with the objective of

acquainting the students with the basic concepts used in cost accounting and management

accounting having a bearing on managerial decision-making.

The entire paper has been discussed in twelve study lessons. In starting four study lessons we

have discussed about the basic of cost accounting, material, labour and overheads costing. Further

we have highlighted the concept of activity based costing, cost records, different costing systems.

Thereafter study focuses on the marginal costing, standard costing, budgeting & its applications for

decision making in business. At last we have discussed about cost accounting records, cost audit and

analysis & interpretation of financial statements.

In this study every efforts has been made to give a comprehensive coverage of all the topics

relevant to the subject. In all study lessons the requisite theoretical framework for understanding the

practical problems in the subject has been explained and wherever necessary practical illustrations

have been given to facilitate better understanding. At the end of each study lesson a brief about the

lesson have been given under the caption ‘Lesson Round Up’ as well a good blend of theoretical and

practical questions have been given under the caption ‘Self Test Questions’ for the practice of

students to test their knowledge. In fact, this being a practical paper, students need to have good

theoretical knowledge and practice to attain the requisite proficiency and confidence.

This study material has been published to aid the students in preparing for the Cost and

Management Accounting paper of the CS Executive Programme. It is part of the education kit and

takes the students step by step through each phase of preparation stressing key concepts, pointers

and procedures. Company Secretaryship being a professional course, the examination standards are

set very high, with emphasis on knowledge of concepts, applications, procedures and case laws, for

which sole reliance on the contents of this study material may not be enough.

Therefore, in order to supplement the information/contents given in the study material, students

are advised to refer to the Suggested Readings mentioned in the study material, e-bulletin, Business

Dailies and Journals.

In the event of any doubt, students may write to the Directorate of Academics and Professional

Development in the Institute for clarification at acad[email protected]du.

(iv)

Although due care has been taken in publishing this study material yet the possibility of errors,

omissions and/or discrepancies cannot be ruled out. This publication is released with an

understanding that the Institute shall not be responsible for any errors, omissions and/or discrepancies

or any action taken in that behalf.

Should there be any discrepancy, error or omission noted in the study material, the Institute shall be

obliged if the same are brought to its notice for issue of corrigendum in the `e-bulletin’.

The Institute has decided that the examination for this paper under new syllabus from December

2014 session in the Optical Mark Recognition (OMR) format, whereby students are required to answer

multiple choice question on OMR sheet by darkening the appropriate choice by HB Pencil. One mark

will be awarded for each correct answer. Negative marking for wrong answers attempted by the

candidates will be implemented w.e.f. December, 2015 session of examination in the ratio of 1:4, i.e.

deduction of one (1) mark for every four (4) wrong answers and total marks obtained by the

candidates in the paper would be rounded up to next whole number. Further, the negative marks

would be limited to the extent of marks secured for correct answers so that no candidate shall secure

less than zero mark.

The specimen OMR sheet is appended at the end of the study material. There is practice test

paper in the study to acquaint students with the pattern of examination. These are for practice purpose

only, not to be sent to the institute.

(v)

EXECUTIVE PROGRAMME

SYLLABUS

FOR

MODULE 1 - PAPER 2: COST AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING (100 Marks)

Level of Knowledge: Working Knowledge

Objective: To acquire knowledge and understanding of the concepts, techniques and practices of cost

and management accounting and to develop skills for decision making.

Detail Contents:

1. Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

• Cost Accounting: Evolution, Meaning, Objectives and Scope

• Concepts of Costs , Classifications and Elements of Cost

• Cost Centre and Cost Unit

• Methods and Techniques of Costing

• Cost Accounting Standards

• Installation of a Costing System

• Practical Difficulties in Installing a Costing System

• Role of Cost Accountant in Decision Making

• Management Accounting: Evolution, Meaning, Objectives and Scope

• Tools and Techniques of Management Accounting

• Relationship of Cost Accounting, Financial Accounting, Management Accounting and

Financial Management

• Conflicts in Profit versus Value Maximisation Principle

• Role of Management Accountant in Decision Making

2. Material Cost

• Materials Control – Concept and Techniques

• Procurement Procedures and Documentation: Methods of Purchasing; Procedure of

Purchases, Stores and Issue of Material; Stock Verification

• Methods of Pricing of Material: FIFO, LIFO, Simple Average, Weighted Average

• Accounting and Control of Material Losses, Wastage, Scrap, Spoilage and Defectives

• Inventory Management: Techniques of fixing of minimum, maximum and reorder levels,

Economic Order Quantity, ABC Analysis ; Stock Verification and Perpetual Inventory

3. Labour Cost

• Meaning and Classification of Labour Costs

• Accounting and Control of Labour Costs

• Time Keeping and Time Booking

• Attendance and Payroll Procedures, Time Recording, Overtime and Idle Time

• Labour turnover and Remedial Measures

• Efficiency Rating Procedures; Remuneration Systems and Incentive Schemes

(vi)

4. Direct Expenses and Overheads

• Direct Expenses: Meaning, Nature, Collection, Classification and Treatment of Direct and

Indirect Expenses

• Overheads: Meaning, Nature, Collection and Classification Functional Analysis: Factory,

Administration, Selling, Distribution, Research and Development

• Behavioural Analysis: Fixed, Variable, Semi variable and Step Cost Allocation,

Apportionment, Absorption and Control of Overheads

• Preparation of Cost Sheet

5. Activity Based Costing (ABC)

• Meaning, Importance, Characteristics

• Elements and Steps involved

• ABC vs. Traditional Costing

• Uses and Limitations

6. Cost Records

• Cost Ledgers – Integrated Accounts and Non-Integrated Accounts

• Reconciliation of Cost and Financial Accounts

7. Costing Systems

• Unit and Output Costing

• Job Costing: Job Cost Cards, Collecting Direct Costs, Allocation of Overheads and its

Applications

• Batch Costing: Features and Applications

• Contract Costing: Features, Distinction between Job and Contract Costing, Progress

Payments, Retention Money, Escalation Clause, Contract Accounts, Accounting for

Material, Accounting for Plant Used in a Contract, Contract Profit and Accounting Entries

• Process Costing: Features, Applications and Types of Process Costing,Process Loss,

Abnormal Gains and Losses, Equivalent Units, Inter-Process Profit, Joint Products, By-

Products and Accounting

• Service Costing: Features and Applications, Unit Costing and Multiple Costing,

Application, Identification of Cost Unit and Cost Determination and Control

8. Marginal Costing

• Meaning, Advantages, Limitations and Applications

• Breakeven Analysis

• Cost-Volume Profit Analysis

• P/V Ratio and its Significance

• Margin of Safety

• Absorption Costing: System of Profit Reporting and Stock Valuation

• Difference between Marginal Costing and Absorption Costing

• Income Measurement under Marginal Costing and Absorption Costing

9. Standard Costing

• Definition, Significance and Applications

• Various Types of Standards

• Installation of Standard Costing System-for Material, Labour, and Overhead

(vii)

• Variance Analysis for Materials, Labour and Overheads and Accounting Treatment of

Variances

• Benchmarking for Setting of Standards

• Variance Reporting to Management

10. Budget, Budgeting and Budgetary Control

• Budget Concept, Manual

• Fixed and Flexible Budgets

• Preparation and Monitoring of Various Types of Budgets

• Budgetary Control System: Advantages, Limitations and Installation

• Zero Base Budgeting

• Programme and Performance Budgeting

11. Cost Accounting Records and Cost Audit

• Nature and Scope of Cost Audit

• Cost Accounting Records and Cost Audit under Companies Act, 2013

• Purpose, Scope and Advantages of Cost Audit

• Implementing Authorities of Cost Audit

• Cost Audit Techniques and Programmes

• Cost Audit Report

• Cost Auditor – Appointment, Rights and Responsibilities

12. Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

• Financial Statements: Nature, Attributes, Objectives, Importance, Limitations

• Recent Trends in Presenting Financial Statements

• Financial Statements Analysis: Types, Methods, Objectives, Limitations

• Ratio Analysis: Accounting, Uses, Classification, Advantages, Limitations

• Cash Flow Statement

• Fund Flow Statement

• Difference between Cash Flow and Fund Flow Statement

• Management Reporting

(viii)

LIST OF RECOMMENDED BOOKS

MODULE I

PAPER 2: COSTAND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

Recommended Readings and References:

1. N.S. Zad : Cost & Management Accounting Taxmann

Publications Pvt. Ltd.

2. Deepak Jain : Cost & Management Accounting Taxmann

Publications Pvt. Ltd.

3. S.P. Jain & K.L. Narang : Cost and Management Accounting;

Kalyani Publishers, 23, Daryaganj,

New Delhi-110 002.

4. V.K. Saxena& C.D. Vashist : Cost and Management Accounting;

Sultan Chand & Sons, 23, Daryaganj

New Delhi -110 002.

5. M.N. Arora : Cost and Management Accounting (Theory and

Problems); Himalaya Publishing House,

Ramdoot, Dr. BhaleraoMarg, Kelewadi,

Girgaon, Mumbai-400 004.

6. S.N. Maheshwari : Cost and Management Accounting;

Sultan Chand & Sons, 23, Daryaganj

New Delhi -110 002.

7. I.M. Pandey : Management Accounting;

Vikas Publishing House (P) Ltd.

A-22, Sector 4, Noida – 201 301

8. Ravi M. Kishore : Advanced Management Accounting;

Taxmann’s, Taxmann Publication (P) Ltd.

59/32, New Rohtak Road, New Delhi – 110 005.

9. M.Y. Khan & P.K. Jain : Theory and Problems of Management and Cost

Accounting; McGraw-Hill Education (India) Ltd.

B-4, Sector 63, Gautam Budh Nagar,

Noida – 201 301.

10. JawaharLal : Cost Accounting; McGraw-Hill Education (India) Ltd.

B-4, Sector 63, GautamBudh Nagar,

Noida – 201 301.

11. C.T. Horngren : Cost and Management Accounting - A Managerial

Emphasis; Pearson Education Asia,

482, F.I.E. Patparganj, Delhi-110 092.

(ix)

12. B.M. Lall Nigam & I.C. Jain :

Cost Accounting Principles and Practice;

Prentice Hall of India, M-97, Connaught Circus,

New Delhi-110 001.

13. Drury Colin :

Management and Cost Accounting; International

Thomson Business Press, London.

14. K.S. Thakur :

Cost Accounting – Theory & Practice;

Excel Books, A-45, Naraina, Phase-I,

New Delhi-110028.

15 B.M. Lall Nigam and I.C. Jain

Cost Accounting Principles and Practice - PHI

Learning Private Limited

16 Ashish K. Bhattacharyya

Principles and Practice of Cost Accounting- PHI

Learning Private Limited

(x)

ARRANGEMENT OF STUDY LESSONS

PAPER 2: COSTAND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING (100 Marks)

Lesson No. Subject

1. Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

2. Material Cost

3. Labour Cost

4. Direct Expenses and Overheads

5. Activity Based Costing (ABC)

6. Cost Records

7. Costing Systems

8. Marginal Costing

9. Standard Costing

10. Budget, Budgeting and Budgetary Control

11. Cost Accounting Records and Cost Audit

12. Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

PRACTICE TEST PAPER

EXECUTIVE PROGRAMME

COST AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

CONTENTS

LESSON 1

INTRODUCTION TO COST AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

Page

Learning Objectives … 1

Concepts of Cost ... 2

Evaluation of Cost Accounting … 3

Costing, Cost Accounting and Cost Accountancy ... 3

Objectives of Cost Accounting ... 4

Importance of Cost Accounting ... 5

Scope of Cost Accounting … 6

Classifications of Costs ... 7

Cost Centre and Cost Unit ... 15

Methods of Costing ... 16

Techniques of Costing ... 18

Cost Accounting Standards … 19

Installation of a Costing System ... 21

Practical Difficulties in Installing a Costing System ... 23

Role of Cost Accounting in decision making … 24

Management Accounting ... 25

Objective of Management Accounting ... 27

Nature of Management Accounting ... 28

Scope of Management Accounting ... 28

Tools and Techniques of Management Accounting ... 29

Difference between Financial Accounting and Cost Accounting ... 31

Difference between Financial Accounting and Management Accounting ... 32

Difference between Cost Accounting and Management Accounting ... 33

Limitations of Management Accounting ... 34

Conflicts in Profit versus Value Maximization Principle … 35

Role of Management Accountant in Decision Making ... 36

LESSON ROUND-UP ... 37

SELF-TEST QUESTIONS ... 37

(xii)

LESSON 2

MATERIAL COST

Page

Learning Objectives … 41

Inventory Control ... 42

Objectives of Inventory Control ... 42

Techniques of Inventory Control ... 42

Procurement Procedure & Documentation … 61

Methods of Purchasing ... 62

Purchase Procedure ... 63

Pricing of Stores Receipts ... 65

Store-keeping ... 68

Functions of Store-keeping ... 69

Classification and Codification of Materials ... 69

Issue of Materials ... 70

Material (Stores) Requisition Note ... 70

Bill of Materials ... 70

Stock Verification … 71

Method of Pricing of Material Issues ... 72

Pricing of Material Returns ... 88

Material Transfer Note ... 89

Accounting of Material Losses ... 89

Control of Material Losses ... 92

Inventory Management … 96

LESSON ROUND-UP ... 96

SELF-TEST QUESTIONS ... 97

LESSON 3

LABOUR COST

Learning Objectives … 103

Labour Cost … 104

Classification of Labour Cost … 104

Accounting and Control of Labour Cost … 105

Time Recording … 106

Time Keeping … 106

Time Booking … 107

Attendance and Payroll Procedure … 108

(xiii)

Page

Overtime ... 109

Idle Time ... 110

Labour Turnover ... 112

Labour Remuneration System ... 117

Basic Methods of Remuneration ... 118

Incentive Schemes ... 121

Classification of Incentive Schemes ... 122

Indirect Monetary Incentive Schemes ... 128

Other Non-monetary Incentive Schemes ... 130

Miscellaneous Topics ... 142

LESSON ROUND-UP ... 144

SELF-TEST QUESTIONS ... 144

LESSON 4

DIRECT EXPENSES AND OVERHEADS

Learning Objectives … 147

Direct Expenses ... 148

Indirect Expenses ... 149

Overheads ... 150

Collection of Overheads ... 150

Classification of Overheads ... 151

Procedure for Accounting and Control of Overheads … 158

Allocation of Overheads ... 159

Apportionment of Overheads ... 160

Absorption of Overheads ... 166

Methods of Absorbing Production Overheads ... 167

Over or Under Absorption of Overheads ... 176

Treatment of Factory Overheads ... 177

Treatment of Administrative Overheads ... 178

Treatment of Selling and Distribution Overheads ... 180

Control of Overheads ... 183

Preparation of Cost Sheet … 185

LESSON ROUND-UP ... 186

SELF-TEST QUESTIONS ... 187

(xiv)

LESSON 5

ACTIVITY BASED COSTING

Page

Learning Objectives … 189

Introduction of Activity Based Costing … 190

Meaning of Activity Based Costing … 190

Basics of Activity Based Costing … 191

Evolution of Activity Based Costing … 191

Distinction between traditional absorption costing and Activity Based Costing … 192

Objectives of Activity Based Costing … 192

Terminology of Activity Based Costing … 193

Stages in Developing Activity Based Costing … 193

Different Types of Activities … 195

Importance of Activity Based Costing … 195

Uses of Activity Based Costing … 196

Limitations of Activity Based Costing … 197

LESSON ROUND-UP ... 203

SELF-TEST QUESTIONS ... 203

LESSON 6

COST RECORDS

Learning Objectives … 207

Cost Ledger

Introduction … 208

Non-Integrated Accounting System … 208

— Principal Ledgers … 208

— Control Accounts … 209

— Entries to record transaction … 209

Advantages of non-integrated accounting … 211

Limitations of non-integrated accounting … 212

Integrated Accounting System … 212

Benefits of Integrated Accounting System … 212

Pre-requisites for an Integrated Accounting System … 212

Essential features of Integral Accounting … 213

Reconciliation of Cost and Financial Accounts

Need for Reconciliation … 218

Causes of Difference … 219

I. Items Shown only in Financial Accounts … 219

II. Items Included in Cost Accounts Only … 220

III. Over or Under Absorption of Overheads … 220

(xv)

Page

IV. Adoption of Different Basis of Valuation of Stock … 220

V. Different Methods of Charging Depreciation … 220

VI. Abnormal Gains and Losses … 221

Preparation of Reconciliation Statement or Memorandum Reconciliation Account … 221

LESSON ROUND-UP ... 230

SELF-TEST QUESTIONS ... 230

LESSON 7

COSTING SYSTEM

Learning Objectives … 237

Single/Output/Unit Costing … 238

Cost Sheet … 238

Production Account … 240

Job Costing … 246

— Meaning … 246

— Features … 246

— Basic Principles & Special Terms … 247

— Applications … 249

— Advantages and Limitations … 249

Batch Costing … 252

— Features … 252

— Difference between Job Costing and Batch Costing … 252

— Applications … 253

Contract Costing … 254

— Distinction between job and contract costing … 254

— Specific aspects and recording of transactions of contract costing … 254

— Profits on Incomplete Contract (Based on AS-7-Revised 2002) … 262

Process Costing … 266

— General Principles of Process Costing … 266

— Features of Process Costing … 266

— Applications of Process Costing … 267

— Comparison between Job Costing and Process Costing … 267

— Advantages and Limitations of Process Costing … 268

— Accounting for Element of Cost … 269

— Cost of Process … 270

— Process Losses … 271

— Inter Process Profit … 278

— Valuation of Work in Progress (Equivalent Production) … 280

— By-Products and Joint Products … 290

(xvi)

Page

— Accounting for By-Products … 290

— Accounting for Joint Products … 291

— Co-Products … 293

Service Costing … 295

— Features of Service Costing … 296

— Applications of Service Costing … 296

— Unit Costing and Multiple Costing … 296

— Cost Unit … 297

— Transport Costing … 297

— Bailer House Costing … 300

— Canteen Costing … 301

— Hospital Costing … 302

LESSON ROUND-UP ... 313

SELF-TEST QUESTIONS ... 314

LESSON 8

MARGINAL COSTING

Learning Objectives … 321

Marginal Costing ... 322

Features of Marginal Costing … 322

Advantages of Marginal Costing … 322

Limitations of Marginal Costing … 323

Break-even Analysis/Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis ... 324

Objectives of Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis ... 325

Advantages of Break-even Analysis ... 326

Limitations of Break-even Analysis ... 326

Uses of Cost Volume Profit Analysis … 327

Contribution ... 327

Marginal Cost Equation … 328

Profit-Volume Ratio ... 328

Margin of Safety ... 329

Methods for Determining Break-even Points ... 330

Break-even Chart … 337

Profit-Volume Chart … 338

Applications of Marginal Costing ... 339

Composite Break-Even Point ... 349

Absorption Costing … 358

System of Profit Reporting … 358

Difference between Absorption Costing and Marginal Costing ... 359

(xvii)

Page

Income Measurement under Marginal and Absorption Costing ... 360

Pricing Decisions (Discriminating Price and Differential Selling) ... 364

LESSON ROUND-UP ... 371

SELF-TEST QUESTIONS ... 373

LESSON 9

STANDARD COSTING AND VARIANCE ANALYSIS

Learning Objectives … 377

Standard Costing ... 378

Definition and Meaning of Standard Costing ... 378

Significance/Advantages of Standard Costing ... 379

Applications Standard Costing … 380

Various Types of Standards ... 381

Standard Costing System … 382

Installation of a Standard Costing System … 382

Functions of a Standard Costing System … 382

Features of a Standard Costing System … 383

Standard Cost for Material, Labour and Overhead … 383

Direct Materials Standards ... 383

Standard Cost for Direct Labour ... 384

Standard Overhead Rates ... 384

Standard Administration Costs ... 385

Standard Costs for Selling and Distribution ... 385

Variance analysis ... 385

Material Cost Variance ... 389

Labour Cost Variance ... 398

Overhead Cost Variances ... 405

Variable Overhead Variance … 406

Fixed Overhead Variance … 408

Accounting Treatment of Variance … 413

Bench Marking for setting of a standards … 414

Reporting of Variances to Management ... 415

LESSON ROUND-UP ... 415

SELF-TEST QUESTIONS ... 417

LESSON 10

BUDGET, BUDGETING AND BUDGETARY CONTROL

Learning Objectives … 419

Budget ... 420

Budgeting … 420

(xviii)

Page

Budgetary Control ... 420

Forecast and Budget ... 421

Objectives of Budgetary Control ... 422

Advantages of Budgetary Control ... 422

Limitations of Budgetary Control ... 423

Preliminaries for the Adoption of a System of Budgetary Control ... 424

Installation of Budgetary Control System ... 424

Preparation and Monitoring of various types of Budgets … 429

Zero Base Budgeting ... 443

Difference between Traditional Budgeting and Zero-base Budgeting … 444

Advantages of Zero Base Budgeting … 444

Programme Budgeting … 445

Performance Budgeting ... 445

LESSON ROUND-UP ... 446

SELF-TEST QUESTIONS ... 447

LESSON 11

COST ACCOUNTING RECORDS AND COST AUDIT

Learning Objectives … 449

Cost Audit … 450

Provisions of Companies Act, 2013 pertaining to Cost Accounting Records … 450

Provisions of Companies Act, 2013 pertaining to Cost Audit … 450

Purpose of Cost Audit … 452

Scope of Cost Audit … 453

Advantages of Cost Audit … 453

Appointment of Cost Auditor … 454

Rights and Responsibilities of Cost Auditor … 455

Implementing Authorities of Cost Audit … 456

Cost Audit Techniques … 456

Cost Audit Programme … 457

Cost Audit Report … 458

LESSON ROUND-UP … 459

SELF-TEST QUESTIONS … 459

LESSON 12

ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Learning Objectives … 461

Financial Statements ... 462

Nature of Financial Statements ... 462

Attributes of Financial Statements ... 463

(xix)

Page

Objectives of Financial Statements ... 465

Importance of Financial Statements ... 466

Limitations of Financial Statements ... 467

Recent Trends in Presenting Financial Statements ... 468

Analysis of Financial Statements ... 469

Objectives of Financial Statement Analysis ... 470

Limitations of Financial Statement Analysis ... 470

Types of Financial Statement Analysis ... 471

Methods of Analysing Financial Statements ... 472

Ratio Analysis … 479

Accounting Ratios ... 479

Uses of Ratio Aalysis … 480

Classification of Ratios ... 481

Advantages of Ratio Analysis ... 496

Limitations of Ratio Analysis ... 496

Cash Flow Statement … 514

Classification of Cash Flows ... 515

Special Items ... 516

Preparation of a Cash Flow Statement ... 518

Reporting of Cash Flows from Operating Activities ... 518

Format of Cash Flow Statement ... 523

Usefulness of Cash Flow Statement ... 525

Fund Flow Statement … 537

Meaning and Definition of Fund Flow Statement … 538

Steps for Preparation of Fund Flow Statement … 539

Difference between Cash Flow and Fund Flow … 551

Management Reporting … 551

Role of Management Information System … 552

LESSON ROUND-UP … 553

SELF-TEST QUESTIONS … 553

Practice Test Paper

Practice Test Paper ... 561

Specimen OMR Answer Sheet

Lesson 1

Introduction to Cost and

Management Accounting

•

Concept of Cost

•

Evolution of Cost Accounting

•

Costing, Cost Accounting and Cost

Accountancy

•

Objectives, Importance and Scope of cost

accounting

•

Classifications and Elements of Cost

•

Cost Centre and Cost Unit

•

Methods and Techniques of Costing

•

Cost Accounting Standards

•

Installation of a Costing System

•

Practical Difficulties in Installing a Costing

System

•

Role of Cost Accountant in Decision

Making

•

Management Accounting and its Evolution,

Meaning, Objectives, Nature and Scope

•

Tools and Techniques of Management

Accounting

•

Relationship of Cost Accounting, Financial

Accounting, Management Accounting and

Financial Management

•

Limitations of Management Accounting

•

Conflicts in Profit versus Value

Maximisation Principle

•

Role of Management Accountant in

Decision Making

•

Lesson Round Up

•

Self-Test Questions

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

Accounting information is important for every

business which will serve the needs of variety of

interested parties. To satisfy the needs of all

interested parties a sound accounting system is very

necessary. Accounting may be divided into three

parts i. financial accounting ii. cost accounting iii.

management accounting.

Financial accounting is mostly concerned to record

the business transactions in books of accounts so

that final accounts can be prepared.

Cost accounting developed to help the internal

management in decision making. The information

provided by cost accounting acts as a managerial

tool so that business can utilise the available

resources at optimum level.

Management accounting is an extension of

management aspects of cost accounting. It provides

the information to management so that planning,

organizing, directing and controlling of business

operations can be done in an orderly manner.

Therefore the objective of the lesson is to enable the

student to understand the meaning and purpose of

cost and management accounting. What are the

various methods and technique of cost accounting so

that various information can be provided to

management for decision making.

After going through this lesson the students will be

able to

1.

Understand the nature, scope and utility of cost

accounting, management accounting and cost

accounting standards.

2.

Understand how cost accounting arises out of the

need to make business decisions.

3.

Difference between cost accounting, management

accounting and financial accounting.

4.

To familiarize with costing terminology.

Management Accounting is concerned with the information which is useful to Management.

LESSON OUTLINE

EP-CMA

2

CONCEPTS OF COST

Cost is the amount of resource given up in exchange for some goods or services. The resources given up

are money or money’s equivalent expressed in monetary units.

The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants, London defines cost as “the amount of

expenditure (actual or notional) incurred on, or attributable to a specified thing or activity”.

This activity of a firm may be the manufacture of a product or the rendering of a service which involves

expenditure under various heads, e.g., materials, labour, other expenses, etc. A manufacturing organisation

is interested in ascertaining the cost per unit of the product manufactured while an organisation rendering

service, e.g., transport undertaking, canteen, electricity company, municipality, etc., is interested in

ascertaining the costs of the service it renders. In its simplest form, the cost per unit is arrived at by dividing

the total expenditure incurred by the total units produced or the quantum of service rendered. But this

method is applicable if the manufacturer produces only one product. If the manufacturer produces more than

one product, it becomes imperative to split up the total expenditure between the various products so that the

cost of each product can be ascertained separately. Even if only one product is manufactured, it may be

necessary to analyse the cost per unit of each item of expenditure that goes to make up the total cost. The

problem becomes more complicated where a multiplicity of products is produced and it is necessary to

analyse the cost per unit of each product into various items of expenditures that make up the total cost.

For a consumer cost means price. For management cost means 'expenditure incurred' for producing a

particular product or rendering a particular service. The process of ascertaining the cost is known as

costing. It consists of principles and rules governing the procedure of finding out the costs of goods/

services. It aims at ascertaining the total cost and also per unit cost. For instance, in transport companies the

total cost for the period is ascertained and used to find out the cost per passenger/mile. i.e. the cost of

carrying one passenger for one mile. It provides for analysis of expenditure in such a way that the

management gets complete idea about even the smallest item of cost.

It is necessary to specify the exact meaning of “cost”. When the term is used specifically, it is modified with

such terms as prime cost, fixed cost, sunk cost, etc. Each description implies a certain characteristic which is

helpful in analysing the cost. It helps cost accounting in achieving its three basic objectives namely-cost

ascertainment, cost control and cost presentation.

A cost must always be studied in relation to its purpose and conditions. Different costs may be ascertained

for different purposes and under different conditions. Work-in-progress is valued at factory cost, while stock

of finished goods may be valued at cost of production. Even if the purpose of the study of cost is the same,

different conditions may lead to variation in cost. The cost per unit of a product is sure to vary with an

increase in the volume of output since the amount of fixed expenses to be borne by each unit of output

decreases.

It is also important to note here that there is no such thing as an exact cost or true cost because no figure of

cost is true in all circumstances and for all purposes. Most of the costing information is based on estimates;

for example, the amount of overheads is generally estimated in advance; it is distributed over cost units,

again on an estimated basis using different methods. Many items of cost of production are handled in an

optional manner which may give different costs for the same product without going against the accepted

principles in any way. Depreciation is one such item, the amount of which will vary in accordance with the

method of depreciation being used. Thus, to arrive at an absolutely correct cost may be quite difficult unless

one waits for a long time by which time the costing information may lose all its value.

Lesson 1 Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

3

EVOLUTION OF COST ACCOUNTING

The history of accounting is as old as civilization. It is the process of identifying, measuring, recording and

communicating economic information, capable of being expressed in terms of money. The utility of

accounting information lies in its ability to reduce uncertainty. The information has to be relevant, verifiable,

quantifiable and free from bias.

Prior to the industrial revolution, businesses were small and characterized by simple market exchanges

between individuals and organizations. In those times there was a need of accurate book keeping though not

that much of cost accounting.

However, the industrial revolution in the 18

th

century brought large sized process industries performing single

activities (e.g. textiles, railways etc.). During this period, there was a lack of market for intermediary products

because of which cost information gained importance as a tool for measuring efficiency of different

processes. But the concept of prime cost was used around 1875 by some Industrialists. The period, 1880 AD

-1925 AD saw the development of complex product designs and the emergence of multi activity diversified

corporations like Du Pont, General Motors etc. It was during this period that scientific management was

developed which led accountants to convert physical standards into cost standard, the latter being used for

variance analysis and control. In 1913 J.L. Nicholson published a book “Cost Accounting Theory and

Practice” from New York.

During World War I and II the social importance of cost accounting grew with the growth of teach country's

defend expenditure. In the absence of competitive markets for most of the required to fight war, the

Governments in several countries placed cost-plus contracts under which the price to be paid was the cost of

production plus an agreed rate of profit. The reliance on cost information by the parties to defence contracts

continued after World War II as well. Even today, most of the government contracts are decided on a cost

plus basis.

COSTING, COST ACCOUNTING AND COST ACCOUNTANCY

Costing

Costing is the techniques and processes of ascertaining costs. These techniques consist of principles and

rules which govern the procedure of ascertaining cost of products or services. The techniques to be followed

for the analysis of expenses and the processes of different products or services differ from industry to

industry.

The main object of costing is the analysis of financial records, so as to subdivide expenditure and to allocate

it carefully to selected cost centers, and hence to build up a total cost for the departments, processes or jobs

or contracts of the undertaking.

Cost Accounting

Cost accounting may be regarded as ``a specialised branch of accounting which involves classification,

accumulation, assignment and control of costs.

The Costing terminology of C.I.M.A. London defines cost accounting as

``The establishment of budgets, standard costs and actual costs of operations, processes, activities or

products, and the analysis of variances, profitability or the social use of funds”.

`Wheldon defines cost accounting as “classifying, recording and appropriate allocation of expenditure for

EP-CMA

4

determination of costs of products or services and for the presentation of suitably arranged data for purposes

of control and guidance of management”. It is thus, a formal mechanism by means of which costs of products

or services are ascertained and controlled.

Cost accounting is different from costing in the sense that the former provides only the basis and information

for ascertainment of costs. Once the information is made available, costing can be carried out arithmetically

by means of memorandum statements or by method of integral accounting.

Cost Accountancy

Cost Accountancy has been defined as “the application of costing and cost accounting principles, methods

and techniques to the science, art and practice of cost control and the ascertainment of profitability. It

includes the presentation of information derived there from for the purpose of managerial decision making”.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

OBJECTIVES OF COST ACCOUNTING

Cost accounting aims at systematic recording of expenses and analysis of the same so as to ascertain the

cost of each product manufactured or service rendered by an organisation. Information regarding cost of

each product or service would enable the management to know where to economise on costs, how to fix

prices, how to maximise profits and so on. Thus, the main objects of cost accounting are the following:

(1) To analyse and classify all expenditures with reference to the cost of products and operations.

(2) To arrive at the cost of production of every unit, job, operation, process, department or service and

to develop cost standard.

(3) To indicate to the management any inefficiencies and the extent of various forms of waste, whether

of materials, time, expenses or in the use of machinery, equipment and tools. Analysis of the

causes of unsatisfactory results may indicate remedial measures.

(4) To provide data for periodical profit and loss accounts and balance sheets at such intervals, e.g.,

weekly, monthly or quarterly, as may be desired by the management during the financial year, not

only for the whole business but also by departments or individual products. Also, to explain in detail

the exact reasons for profit or loss revealed in total, in the profit and loss account.

(5) To reveal sources of economies in production having regard to methods, types of equipment,

design, output and layout. Daily, weekly, monthly or quarterly information may be necessary to

ensure prompt and constructive action.

(6) To provide actual figures of cost for comparison with estimates and to serve as a guide for future

estimates or quotations and to assist the management in their price-fixing policy.

State whether the following statement is “True” or “False”

Costing and Cost Accounting are the same thing:

• True

• False

Correct answer: False

Lesson 1 Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

5

(7) To show, where standard costs are prepared, what the cost of production ought to be and with

which the actual costs which are eventually recorded may be compared.

(8) To present comparative cost data for different periods and various volumes of output.

(9) To provide a perpetual inventory of stores and other materials so that interim profit and loss account

and balance sheet can be prepared without stock taking and checks on stores and adjustments are

made at frequent intervals. Also to provide the basis for production planning and for avoiding

unnecessary wastages or losses of materials and stores.

(10) To provide information to enable management to make short-term decisions of various types, such

as quotation of price to special customers or during a slump, make or buy decision, assigning

priorities to various products, etc.

IMPORTANCE OF COST ACCOUNTING

The limitations of financial accounting have made the management to realise the importance of cost

accounting. Whatever may be the type of business, it involves expenditure on labour, materials and other

items required for manufacturing and disposing of the product. The management has to avoid the possibility

of waste at each stage. It has to ensure that no machine remains idle, efficient labour gets due incentive, by-

products are properly utilised and costs are properly ascertained. Besides the management, the creditors

and employees are also benefited in numerous ways by installation of a good costing system. Cost

accounting increases the overall productivity of an organisation and serves as an important tool, in bringing

prosperity to the nation. Thus, the importance of cost accounting can be discussed under the following

headings:

(a) Costing as an Aid to Management

Cost accounting provides invaluable aid to management. It provides detailed costing information to the

management to enable them to maintain effective control over stores and inventory, to increase efficiency of

the organisation and to check wastage and losses. It facilitates delegation of responsibility for important

tasks and rating of employees. For all these, the management should be capable of using the information

provided by cost accounts in a proper way. The various advantages derived by the management from a good

system of costing are as follows:

1. Cost accounting helps in periods of trade depression and trade competition - In periods of

trade depression, the organisation cannot afford to have losses which pass unchecked. The

management must know the areas where economies may be sought, waste eliminated and

efficiency increased. The organisation has to wage a war not only for its survival but also continued

growth. The management should know the actual cost of their products before embarking on any

scheme of price reduction. Adequate system of costing facilitates this.

2. Cost accounting aids price fixation - Although the law of supply and demand to a great extent

determines the price of the article, cost to the producer does play an important role. The producer

can take necessary guidance from his costing records in case he is in a position to fix or change the

price charged.

3. Cost accounting helps in making estimates - Adequate costing records provide a reliable basis

for making estimates and quoting tenders.

EP-CMA

6

4. Cost accounting helps in channelising production on right lines - Proper costing information

makes it possible for the management to distinguish between profitable and non-profitable activities.

Profits can be maximised by concentrating on profitable operations and eliminating non-profitable

ones.

5. Cost accounting eliminates wastages - As cost accounting is concerned with detailed break-up of

costs, it is possible to check various forms of wastages or losses.

6. Cost accounting makes comparisons possible - Proper maintenance of costing records provides

various costing data for comparisons which in turn helps the management in formulation of future

lines of action.

7. Cost accounting provides data for periodical profit and loss account - Adequate costing

records provide the management with such data as may be necessary for preparation of profit and

loss account and balance sheet at such intervals as may be desired by the management.

8. Cost accounting helps in determining and enhancing efficiency - Losses due to wastage of

materials, idle time of workers, poor supervision, etc., will be disclosed if the various operations

involved in the production are studied carefully. Efficiency can be measured, costs controlled and

various steps can be taken to increase the efficiency.

9. Cost accounting helps in inventory control - Cost accounting furnishes control which

management requires in respect of stock of materials, work-in-progress and finished goods.

(b) Costing as an Aid to Creditors

Investors, banks and other money lending institutions have a stake in the success of the business concern

and are, therefore, benefited immensely by the installation of an efficient system of costing. They can base

their judgment about the profitability and future prospects of the enterprise on the costing records.

(c) Costing as an Aid to Employees

Employees have a vital interest in their employer’s enterprise in which they are employed. They are

benefited by a number of ways by the installation of an efficient system of costing. They are benefited,

through continuous employment and higher remuneration by way of incentives, bonus plans, etc.

(d) Costing as an Aid to National Economy

An efficient system of costing brings prosperity to the business enterprise which in turn results in stepping up

of the government revenue. The overall economic development of a country takes place as a consequence

increase in efficiency of production. Control of costs, elimination of wastages and inefficiencies led to the

progress of the industry and, in consequence of the nation as a whole.

SCOPE OF COST ACCOUNTING

The Scope of Cost Accounting Is Very Wide and Includes:

(a) Cost Ascertainment: The main function of cost accounting is the ascertainment of cost of product or

services rendered. It includes collection, analysis of expenses and measurement of production at

different stages of manufacture. The collection, analysis and measurement requires different

methods of costing for different types of production such as Historical costs, Standard costs,

Process cost, Operation cost etc.

Lesson 1 Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

7

It can be done in two ways, namely

(i) Post Costing, where the ascertainment of cost is done based on actual information as recorded

in financial books.

(ii) Continuous Costing, where the process of ascertainment is of a continuous nature i.e. where

cost information is available as and when a particular activity is completed, so that the entire

cost of a particular job is available the moment it is completed.

(b) Control of Costs: In the era of competition, the goal of every business is to sustain; in costs at the

lowest point with efficient operating conditions. To sustain, It is essential to examine each individual

item of cost in the light of the services or benefits obtained so that maximum utilisation of the money

expended or- it may be recovered. This requires planning and use of standard for each item of cost

for locating deviations, if any, and taking remedial measures.

(c) Proper matching of cost with revenue: In cost accounting manager prepares monthly or quarterly

statements to reflect the cost and income data identified with the sale of that period.

(d) Aids to Management Decision-making: Decision-making is a process of choosing between two or

more alternatives, based on the resultant outcome of the various alternatives. A Cost Benefit

Analysis also needs to be done. All this can be achieved through a good cost accounting system

CLASSIFICATION OF COSTS

The different bases of cost classification are:

(1) By time (Historical, Pre-determined).

(2) By nature or elements (Material, Labour and Overhead).

(3) By degree of traceability to the product (Direct, Indirect).

(4) Association with the product (Product, Period).

(5) By Changes in activity or volume (Fixed, Variable, Semi-variable).

(6) By function (Manufacturing, Administrative, Selling, Research and development, Pre-production).

(7) Relationship with accounting period (Capital, Revenue).

(8) Controllability (Controllable, Non-controllable).

(9) Cost for analytical and decision-making purposes (Opportunity, Sunk, Differential, Joint, Common,

Imputed, Out-of-pocket, Marginal, Uniform, Replacement).

(10) Others (Conversion, Traceable, Normal, Avoidable, Unavoidable, Total).

1. Classification on the Basis of Time

(a) Historical Costs: These costs are ascertained after they are incurred. Such costs are available

only when the production of a particular thing has already been done. They are objective in nature

and can be verified with reference to actual operations.

(b) Pre-determined Costs: These costs are calculated before they are incurred on the basis of a

specification of all factors affecting cost. Such costs may be:

(i) Estimated costs: Costs are estimated before goods are produced; these are naturally less

accurate than standards.

EP-CMA

8

(ii) Standard costs: This is a particular concept and technique. This method involves:

(a) setting up predetermined standards for each element of cost and each product;

(b) comparison of actual with standard to find variation;

(c) pin-pointing the causes of such variances and taking remedial action.

Obviously, standard costs, though pre-determined, are arrived with much greater care than estimated costs.

2. By Nature or Elements

There are three broad elements of costs:

(1) Material: The substance from which the product is made is known as material. It can be direct as

well as indirect.

Direct material: It refers to those materials which become a major part of the finished product and

can be easily traceable to the units. Direct materials include:

(i) All materials specifically purchased for a particular job/process.

(ii) All material acquired and latter requisitioned from stores.

(iii) Components purchased or produced.

(iv) Primary packing materials.

(v) Material passing from one process to another.

Indirect material: All material which is used for purposes ancillary to production and which can be

conveniently assigned to specific physical units is termed as indirect materials. Examples, oil,

grease, consumable stores, printing and stationary material etc.

(2) Labour: Labour cost can be classified into direct labour and indirect labour.

Direct labour: It is defined as the wages paid to workers who are engaged in the production process

whose time can be conveniently and economically traceable to units of products. For example, wages

paid to compositors in a printing press, to workers in the foundry in cast iron works etc.

Indirect labour: Labour employed for the purpose of carrying tasks incidental to goods or services

provided, is indirect labour. It cannot be practically traced to specific units of output. Examples,

wages of store-keepers, foreman, time-keepers, supervisors, inspectors etc.

(3) Expenses: Expenses may be direct or indirect.

Direct expenses: These expenses are incurred on a specific cost unit and identifiable with the cost

unit. Examples are cost of special layout, design or drawings, hiring of a particular tool or equipment

for a job; fees paid to consultants in connection with a job etc.

Indirect expenses: These are expenses which cannot be directly, conveniently and wholly

allocated to cost centre or cost units. Examples are rent, rates and taxes, insurance, power, lighting

and heating, depreciation etc.

It is to be noted that the term overheads has a wider meaning than the term indirect expenses. Overheads

include the cost of indirect material, indirect labour and indirect expenses. overheads may be classified as

(a) production or manufacturing overheads, (b) administration overheads, (c) selling overheads, and (d)

distribution overheads.

Lesson 1 Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

9

The various elements of cost can be illustrated by the following chart:

Elements of Cost

Material Labour Other expenses

Direct Indirect Direct Indirect Direct Indirect

Prime Cost Overheads

Production/Manufacturing Administration Selling Distribution

overheads overheads overheads overheads

3. By Degree of Traceability to the Products

Cost can be distinguished as direct and indirect.

Direct Costs: The direct costs are those which can be easily traceable to a product or costing unit or cost

center or some specific activity, e.g. cost of wood for making furniture. It is also called traceable cost.

Indirect Costs : The indirect costs are difficult to trace to a single product or it is uneconomic to do so. They

are common to several products, e.g. salary of a factory manager. It is also called common costs.

Costs may be direct or indirect with respect to a particular division or department. For example, all the costs

incurred in the Power House are indirect as far as the main product is concerned but as regards the Power

House itself, the fuel cost or supervisory salaries are direct. It is necessary to know the purpose for which

cost is being ascertained and whether it is being associated with a product, department or some activity.

Direct cost can be allocated directly to costing unit or cost center. Whereas Indirect costs have to be

apportioned to different products, if appropriate measurement techniques are not available. These may

involve some formula or base which may not be totally correct or exact.

4. Association with the Product

Cost can be classified as product costs and period costs.

Product Costs: Product costs are those which are traceable to the product and included in inventory values.

In a manufacturing concern it comprises the cost of direct materials, direct labour and manufacturing

overheads. Product cost is a full factory cost. Product costs are used for valuing inventories which are shown

in the balance sheet as asset till they are sold. The product cost of goods sold is transferred to the cost of

goods sold account.

Period Costs: Period costs are incurred on the basis of time such as rent, salaries, etc., include many

selling and administrative costs essential to keep the business running. Though they are necessary to

generate revenue, they are not associated with production, therefore, they cannot be assigned to a product.

They are charged to the period in which they are incurred and are treated as expenses.

Selling and administrative costs are treated as period costs for the following reasons:

(i) Most of these expenses are fixed in nature.

(ii) It is difficult to apportion these costs to products equitably.

EP-CMA

10

(iii) It is difficult to determine the relationship between such cost and the product.

(iv) The benefits accruing from these expenses cannot be easily established.

The net income of a concern is influenced by both product and period costs. Product costs are included in

the cost of the product and do not affect income till the product is sold. Period costs are charged to the

period in which they are incurred.

5. By Changes in Activity or Volume

Costs can be classified as fixed, variable and semi-variable cost.

Fixed Costs: The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants, London, defines fixed cost as “ the cost

which is incurred for a period, and which, within certain output and turnover limits, tends to be unaffected by

fluctuations in the levels of activity (output or turnover)”.

These costs are incurred so that physical and human facilities necessary for business operations, can be

provided. These costs arise due to contractual obligations and management decisions. They arise with the

passage of time and not with production and are expressed in terms of time. Examples are rent, property-

taxes, insurance, supervisors’ salaries etc.

It is wrong to say that fixed costs never change. These costs may vary depending on the circumstances. The

term fixed refer to non-variability related to the relevant range. Fixed cost can be classified into the following

categories for the purpose of analysis:

(a) Committed Costs: These costs are incurred to maintain certain facilities and cannot be quickly

eliminated. The management has little or no discretion in this cost, e.g., rent, insurance etc.

(b) Policy and Managed Costs: Policy costs are incurred for implementing particular management

policies such as executive development, housing, etc. Such costs are often discretionary. Managed

costs are incurred to ensure the operating existence of the company e.g., staff services.

(c) Discretionary Costs: These are not related to the operations and can be controlled by the

management. These costs result from special policy decisions, new researches etc., and can be

eliminated or reduced to a desirable level at the discretion of the management.

(d) Step Costs: Such costs are constant for a given level of output and then increase by a fixed

amount at a higher level of output.

Y

50

40

30

20

10

X

0 10 20 30 40 50

Relevant Range

Production Units (in thousands)

Lesson 1 Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

11

Variable Cost: Variable costs are those costs that vary directly and proportionately with the output e.g. direct

materials, direct labour. It should be kept in mind that the variable cost per unit is constant but the total cost

changes corresponding to the levels of output. It is always expressed in terms of units, not in terms of time.

Management decisions can influence the cost behaviour patterns. The concept of variability is relative. If the

conditions upon which variability was determined changes, the variability will have to be determined again.

Semi-fixed (Semi-Variable) costs: Such costs contain fixed and variable elements. Because of the variable

element, they fluctuate with volume and because of the fixed element; they do not change in direct

proportion to output. Semi-variable costs change in the same direction as that of the output but not in the

same proportion. Depreciation is an example; for two shifts working the total depreciation may be only 50%

more than that for single shift working. They may change with comparatively small changes in output but not

in the same proportion.

Y

5

4

3

Variable Cost

2

Semi Variable

1 Cost

Fixed Cost

X

0 1 2 3 4 5

Production Units (in thousands)

6. Functional Classification of Costs

A company performs a number of functions. Functional costs may be classified as follows:

(a) Manufacturing/production Costs: It is the cost of operating the manufacturing division of an

undertaking. It includes the cost of direct materials, direct labour, direct expenses, packing (primary)

cost and all overhead expenses relating to production.

(b) Administration Costs: They are indirect and covers all expenditure incurred in formulating the

policy, directing the organisation and controlling the operation of a concern, which is not related to

research, development, production, distribution or selling functions.

(c) Selling and Distribution Cost: Selling cost is the cost of seeking to create and stimulate demand

e.g. advertisements, market research etc. Distribution cost is the expenditure incurred which begins

with making the package produced available for dispatch and ends with making the reconditioned

packages available for re-use e.g. warehousing, cartage etc. It includes expenditure incurred in

EP-CMA

12

transporting articles to central or local storage. Expenditure incurred in moving articles to and from

prospective customers as in the case of goods on sale or return basis is also distribution cost.

(d) Research and Development Costs: They include the cost of discovering new ideas, process,

products by experiment and implementing such results on a commercial basis.

(e) Pre-production Cost: When a new factory is started or when a new product is introduced, certain

expenses are incurred. There are trial runs. Such costs are termed as pre-production costs and

treated as deferred revenue expenditure. They are charged to the cost of future production.

7. Relationships with Accounting Period

Costs can be capital and revenue.

Capital expenditure provides benefit to future period and is classified as an asset. On the other hand,

revenue expenditure benefits only the current period and is treated as an expense. As and when an asset is

written off, capital expenses to that extent becomes cost. Only when capital and revenue is properly

differentiated, the income of a particular period can be correctly determined. It is not possible to distinguish

between the two under all circumstances.

8. Controllability

Cost can be Controllable and Non-Controlable.

Controllable Cost: The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants defines controllable cost as “cost

which can be influenced by its budget holder”.

Non-Controllable Cost: It is the cost which is not subject to control at any level of managerial supervision.

The difference between the terms is very important for the purpose of cost accounting, cost control and

responsibility accounting.

A controllable cost can be controlled by a person at a given organisational level. Controllable cost are not

totally controllable. Some costs are partly controllable by one person and partly by another e.g., maintenance

cost can be controlled by both the production and maintenance manager. The term “controllable costs” is

often used to mean variable costs and non-controllable costs as fixed.

Belkaoni has mentioned the following fallacies about controllable costs:

(i) All variable costs are controllable and fixed are not.

(ii) All direct costs are controllable and indirect costs are not.

(iii) All long-term costs are controllable.

Sometimes the time factor and the decision making authority can make a cost controllable. If the time period

is long enough, all costs can be controlled. Proper delegation helps in establishing clear responsibility and

controllability. But all costs can be controlled by one or another person. The authority and responsibility of

cost control is delegated to different levels, though the managing director is responsible for all the costs.

9. Costs for Analytical and Decision Making Purposes

(a) Opportunity Costs: Opportunity cost is the cost of selecting one course of action and the losing of

other opportunities to carry out that course of action. It is the amount that can be received if the

asset is utilised in its next best alternative.

Lesson 1 Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

13

Edwards, Hermanson and Salmonson define it as “the benefits lost by rejecting the best competing

alternative to the one chosen. The benefit lost is usually the net earnings or profit that might have

been earned from the rejected alternative”

Example: Capital is invested in plant and machinery. It cannot be now invested in shares or

debentures. The loss of interest and dividend that would be earned is the opportunity cost. Another

example is when the owner of a business foregoes the opportunity to employ himself elsewhere.

Opportunity costs are not recorded in the books. It is important in decision making and comparing

alternatives.

(b) Sunk Costs: A sunk cost is one that has already been incurred and cannot be avoided by decisions

taken in the future. As it refers to past costs, it is called unavoidable cost. The National Association

of Accountants (USA) defines a sunk cost as “an expenditure for equipment or productive resources

which has no economic relevance to the present decision making process”. This cost is not useful

for decision making as all past costs are irrelevant. CIMA defines it as the past cost not taken into

account in decision making.

It has also been defined as the difference between the purchase price of an asset and its salvage

value.

(c) Differential Cost: Differential cost has been defined as “the difference in total cost between

alternatives, calculated to assist decision making”. Differential cost is the increase or decrease in

total costs resulting out of:

(a) Producing and distributing a few more or few less of products;

(b) A change in the method of production/distribution;

(c) An addition or deletion of a product or a territory; and

(d) The selection of an additional sales channel.

The differential cost between any two levels of production is the difference between the marginal

costs at these two levels and the increase or decrease in fixed costs, if any. These costs are usually

‘specific purpose costs’ as they are determined for a particular purpose and under specific

circumstances.

Incremental cost measures the addition in unit cost for an addition in output. This cost need not be

the same at all levels of production. It is usually expressed as a cost per unit whereas the

differential cost is measured in total. The former applies to increase in production and is restricted to

the cost only, whereas the differential cost has a comprehensive meaning and application in the

sense that it denotes both increase or decrease.

Differential costs is useful in planning and decision making and helps to choose the best alternative.

It helps management to know the additional profit that would be earned if idle capacity is used or

when additional investments are made.

(d) Joint Costs: The processing of a single raw material results in two or more different products

simultaneously. The joint products are not identifiable as different types of product until a certain

stage of production known as the split-off point is reached. Joint costs are the costs incurred upto

the point of separation. One product may be of major importance and others of minor importance

which are called by-products.

Bierman and Djckman define it as: “Joint costs relate to a situation in which the factors of production

EP-CMA

14

by their basic nature result in two or more products. The jointness results from there being more

than one product, and these multi-products are the result of the methods of production or the nature

of raw material and not of a decision by management to produce both”.

The National Association of Accountants defines it as follows:

“Joint costs relate to two or more products produced from a common production process or

element-material, labour or overhead or any combination thereof or so locked together that one

cannot be produced without producing the other”.

Joint costs can be apportioned to different products only by adopting a suitable basis of

apportionment.

(e) Common Costs: Common costs are those costs which are incurred for more than one product, job,

territory or any other specific costing object. They are not easily related with individual products and

hence are generally apportioned.

The National Association of Accountants defines the term as “the cost of services employed in the

creation of two or more outputs which is not allocable to those outputs on a clearly justified basis”.

It should be kept in mind that management decisions influence the incurrence of common costs e.g.

rent of the factory is a common cost to all departments located in factory.

(f) Imputed Costs: Some costs are not incurred and are useful while taking decision pertaining to a

particular situation. These costs are known as imputed or notional costs and they do not enter into

traditional accounting systems.

Examples: Interest on internally generated funds, salaries of owners of proprietorship or

partnership, notional rent etc.

(g) Uniform Costs: They are not distinct costs as such. Uniform costing signifies common costing

principles and procedures adopted by a number of firms. They are useful in inter-firm comparison.

(h) Marginal Costs: It is the aggregate of variable costs, i.e., prime cost plus variable overheads. Thus,

costs are classified as fixed and variable.

(i) Replacement Costs: This is the cost of replacing an asset at current market values e.g. when the

cost of replacing an asset is considered, it means the cost of purchasing the asset at the current

market price is important and not the cost at which it was purchased.

(j) Out of Pocket Cost: It involves payment to outsiders i.e. gives rise to Cash Expenditure as

opposed to such costs as depreciation which don’t involve any cash expenditure. Such costs are

relevant for price fixation during recession or when make or buy decision is to be made.

10. Other Costs

(i) Conversion Cost: It is the cost of a finished product or work-in-progress comprising direct labour

and manufacturing overhead. It is production cost less the cost of raw material but including the

gains and losses in weight or volume of direct material arising due to production.

(ii) Normal Cost: This is the cost which is normally incurred at a given level of output in the conditions

in which that level of output is achieved.

(iii) Traceable Cost: It is the cost which can be easily associated with a product, process or

department.

Lesson 1 Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

15

(iv) Avoidable Costs: Avoidable costs are those costs which under the present conditions need not

have been incurred.

Example: (a) Spoilage in excess of normal limit; (b) Unfavourable cost variances which could have

been controlled.

(v) Unavoidable Costs: Unavoidable costs are those costs which under the present conditions must

be incurred.

(vi) Total Cost: This is the sum of all costs associated to a particular unit, or process, or department or

batch or the entire concern. It may also mean the sum total of material, labour and overhead. The

term total cost however, is not precise, it needs to be made precise by using terms that indicate the

elements of cost included.

(vii) Value Added: Strictly, it is not cost. It means the selling price of the product/service less the cost of

materials used in the product or the service. Often depreciation is also deducted for ascertaining

“value added”.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

COST CENTRE AND COST UNIT

A cost accountant has to ascertain cost by cost centre or cost unit or by both.

Cost Centre

According to the Chartered Institute of Management Accountants, London, cost centre means, “a production or

service location, function, activity or item of equipment whose costs may be attributed to cost units”. Cost centre

is the smallest organisational sub-unit for which separate cost collection is attempted. Thus cost centre refers to

one of the convenient unit into which the whole factory organisation has been appropriately divided for costing

purposes. Each such unit consists of a department or a sub-department or item of equipment or, machinery or

a person or a group of persons. For example, although an assembly department may be supervised by one

foreman, it may contain several assembly lines. Sometimes each assembly line is regarded as a separate cost

centre with its own assistant foreman. Take another example, in a laundry, activities such as collecting, sorting,

marketing and washing of clothes are performed. Each activity may be considered as a separate cost centre

and all costs relating to a particular cost centre may be found out separately.

Cost centres may be classified as follows :

(i) Productive, Unproductive and Mixed Cost Centres: Productive cost centres are those which are

actually engaged in making the products - the raw materials are handled here and converted into

saleable products. In such centres both direct and indirect costs are incurred, machine shops,

welding shops, and assembly shops are examples of production cost centres in an engineering

factory. Service or unproductive cost centres do not make the products but are essential aids to the

productive centres. Examples of such service centres are those of administration, repairs and

maintenance, stores and drawing office departments. Mixed cost centres are those which are

A cost which does not involve any cash outflow is called_______ or

____________

Correct answer: Notional cost, Imputed cost

EP-CMA

16

engaged some on productive and other lines on service works. For instance, a tool shop serves as

a productive cost centre when it manufactures dies and jigs for specific order, but serves as

servicing cost centre when it does repairs for the factory.

(ii) Personal and Impersonal Cost Centre: A personal cost centre consists of a person or a group of

persons. An impersonal cost centre is one which consists of a department, plant or item of

equipment (or group of these).

(iii) Operation and Process Cost Centre: In case a cost centre consists of those machines and/or

persons which carry out the same operation is termed as operation cost centre. If a cost centre

consists of a continuous sequence of operations it is called process cost centre.

The determination of a suitable cost centre is very important for ascertainment and control of cost. The

manager in charge of a cost centre is held responsible for control of cost of his cost centre.

Cost Unit

The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants, London, defines a unit of cost as “a unit of product or

service in relation to which costs are ascertained”. A cost unit is a devise for the purpose of breaking up or

separating costs into smaller sub-divisions. These smaller sub-divisions are attributed to products or services

to determine product cost or service cost or cost of time spent for a particular job etc. We may for instance

determine the cost per ton of steel, per tonne kilometre of a transport service or cost per machine hour. The

forms of measurement used as cost units are usually the units of physical measurements like number,

weight, area, length, value, time etc. Unit selected should be unambiguous, simple and commonly used.

Following are some examples of cost unit:

Industry/Product Cost unit

Automobile Number

Brick works 1000 bricks

Cement Tonne

Transport Tonne - Kilometre

Passenger - Kilometre

Chemicals Litre, gallon, kilogramme, tonne

Steel Tonne

Sugar Tonne

The selection of suitable cost centres or cost units for which costs are to be ascertained in an undertaking

depends upon a number of factors which are listed as follows:

(i) Organisation of the factory.

(ii) Conditions of incidence of cost.

(iii) Requirements of the costing system i.e. suitability of the units of centres for cost purposes.

(iv) Availability of information.

(v) Management policy regarding making a particular choice from several alternatives.

METHODS OF COSTING

The general fundamental principles of ascertaining costs are the same in every system of cost accounting,

but the methods of analysis and presenting the costs vary from industry to industry. Different methods are

used because business enterprises vary in their nature and in the type of products or services they produce

or render.

Lesson 1 Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

17

Job Costing

It refers to a system of costing in which costs are ascertained in terms of specific jobs or orders which are not

comparable with each other. Industries where this method of costing is generally applied are printing press,

automobile garage, repair shop, ship-building, house building, engine and machine construction, etc.

Contract Costing

Although contract costing does not differ in principle from job costing, it is convenient to treat contract cost

accounts separately. The term is usually applied to the costing method adopted where large scale contracts

at different sites are carried out, as in the case of building construction.

Batch Costing

This method is also a type of job costing. A batch of similar products is regarded as one job and the cost of

this complete batch is ascertained. It is then used to determine the unit cost of the articles produced. It

should, however, be noted that the articles produced should not lose their identity in manufacturing

operations.

Terminal Costing

This method is also a type of job costing. This method emphasises the essential nature of job costing, i.e. the

cost can be properly terminated at some point and related to a particular job.

Operation Costing

This method is adopted when it is desired to ascertain the cost of carrying out an operation in a department,

for example, welding. For large undertakings, it is frequently necessary to ascertain the cost of various

operations.

Process Costing

Where a product passes through distinct stages or processes, the output of one process being the input of

the subsequent process, it is frequently desired to ascertain the cost of each stage or process of production.

This is known as process costing. This method is used where it is difficult to trade the item of prime cost to a

particular order because its identity is lost in volume of continuous production. Process costing is generally

adopted in textile industries, chemical industries, oil refineries, soap manufacturing, paper manufacturing,

tanneries, etc.

Unit or Single or Output or Single-output Costing

This method is used where a single article is produced or service is rendered by continuous manufacturing

activity. The cost of whole production-cycle is ascertained as a process or series of processes and the cost

per unit is arrived at by dividing the total cost by the number of units produced. The unit of costing is chosen

according to the nature of the product. Cost statements or cost sheets are prepared under which various

items of expenses are classified and the total expenditure is divided by total quantity produced in order to

arrive at unit cost of production. This method is suitable in industries like brick-making, collieries, flour mills,

cement manufacturing, etc. This method is useful for the assembly department in a factory producing a

mechanical article e.g., bicycle.

Operating Costing

This method is applicable where services are rendered rather than goods produced. The procedure is same

as in the case of single output costing. The total expenses of the operation are divided by the units and cost

EP-CMA

18

per unit of service is arrived at. This method is employed in railways, road transport, water supply

undertakings, telephone services, electricity companies, hospital services, municipal services, etc.

Multiple or Composite Costing

Some products are so complex that no single system of costing is applicable. It is used where there are a

variety of components separately produced and subsequently assembled in a complex production. Total cost

is ascertained by computing component costs which are collected by job or process costing and then

aggregating the costs through use of the single or output costing system. This method is applicable to

manufacturing concerns producing motor cars, aeroplanes, machine tools, type-writers, radios, cycles,

sewing machines, etc.

Departmental Costing

When costs are ascertained department by department, the method is called “Departmental Costing”.

Usually, for ascertaining the cost of various goods or services produced by the department, the total costs

will have to be analysed, say, by the use of job costing or unit costing.

TECHNIQUES OF COSTING

The following techniques of costing are used by the management for controlling costs and making

managerial decisions:

Historical (or Conventional) Costing

It refers to the determination of costs after they have been actually incurred. It means that cost of a product

can be calculated only after its production. This system is useful only for determining costs, but not useful for

exercising any control over costs. It can serve as a guidance for future production only when conditions

continue to be the same in future.

Standard Costing

It refers to the preparation of standard costs and applying them to measure the variations from standard

costs and analysing the variations with a view to maintain maximum efficiency in production. What is done in

this case is that costs of each article are determined before-hand under current and anticipated conditions,

but sometimes they are determined before-hand under normal or ideal conditions. Then actual costs are

compared with the pre-determined costs and deviations known as variances are noted down. Thereafter, the

reasons for the variances are ascertained and necessary steps are taken to prevent their recurrence.

Marginal Costing

It refers to the ascertainment of marginal costs by differentiating between fixed costs and variable costs and

the effect on profit of the changes in volume or type of output. In this case, only the variable costs are

charged to products or operations while fixed costs are charged to profit and loss account of the period in

which they arise.

Uniform Costing

A technique where standardized principles and methods of cost accounting are employed by a number of

different companies and firms, is termed as uniform costing. This helps in comparing performance of one firm

with that of another.

Lesson 1 Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

19

Direct Costing

The practice of charging all direct costs to operations, process or products leaving all indirect costs to be

written off against profits in the period in which they arise, is termed as direct costing.

Absorption Costing

The practice of charging all costs both variable and fixed to operation, process or products or process is

termed as absorption costing.

Activity Based Costing

In a business organization, Activity-Based Costing (ABC) is a method of assigning the organization's

resource costs through activities to the products and services provided to its customers. It is defined as a

technique of cost attribution to cost units on the basis of benefits received from indirect activities, e.g.

ordering, setting up, assuring quality. ABC involves identification of costs with each cost driving activity and

making it as the basis of apportionment of costs over different products or jobs on the basis of the number of

activities required for their completion. It is basically used for apportionment of overheads costs in an

organisation having products that differ in volume and complexity of production. Under this technique, the

overhead costs of the organisation are identified with each activity which is acting as a cost driver i.e. the the

cause for incurrence of overhead cost. Such cost drivers may be purchase orders issued, quality inspections,

maintanance requests, material receipts, inventory movements, power consumed, machine time, etc. Having

identified the overhead costs with each cost centre, cost per unit of cost driver can be ascertained. The

overhead costs can be assigned to jobs on the basis of number of activities required for their completion.

This is generally used as a tool for understanding product and customer cost and profitability. As such, ABC

has predominately been used to support strategic decisions such as pricing, outsourcing and identification

and measurement of process improvement initiatives.

ABC principles are used: (i) to focus management attention on the total cost to produce a product or service,

and (ii) as the basis for full cost recovery. Support services are particularly suitable for activity-based

resourcing because they produce identifiable and measurable units of output.

Activity-Based Costing encourages managers to identify which activities are value added—those that will

best accomplish a mission, deliver a service, or meet a customer demand. It improves operational efficiency

and enhances decision-making through better, more meaningful cost information.

COST ACCOUNTING STANDARDS

Cost Accounting Standards (CAS) had been issued by the Institute of Cost Accountants of India (ICAI). The

Preface to Cost Accounting Standards issued by the ICAI has set out the following objectives to be achieved

through CAS:

(a) To provide better guidelines on standard cost accounting practices;

(b) To assist cost accountants in preparation of uniform cost statements;

(c) To provide guidelines to bring standard approach towards maintenance of cost accounting records

under various statutes;

(d) To assist the management to follow the standard cost accounting practices in the matter of

compliance with statutory obligations; and

(e) To help Indian industry and the government towards better cost management.

EP-CMA

20

Financial accounting standards control accounting policies of companies to protect investors' interest. They

protect investors from window dressing of financial statements and bring transparency, consistency and

uniformity in financial reporting and thus improve the capital market efficiency. The needs for financial

accounting standards are well understood by all user groups. But it is not so in case of cost accounting

standards. There are reasons for the same.

Cost accounting principles and practise evolved over years to fulfil needs of managers. They are the primary

users of cost (and revenue) information. They need cost information for planning and control and ask for

specific cost information that they require. A cost accounting system generates information primarily for

internal use.

Government and regulators are also users of cost information. Regulators use cost information to protect the

interest of customers. For example cost information is important to assess whether a service/goods provider

is cross subsidising different services /goods or different customer segments.

Thus, in the process of formulating standards, the standard-setting bodies benchmark the Indian practices

with global practices and select the best practices from diverse practices available globally. Therefore, the

CAS improves cost accounting practices and the body of knowledge available in India.

The Institute of Cost Accountants of India, recognizing the need for structured approach to the measurement

of cost in manufacture or service sector and to provide guidance to the user organizations, government

bodies, regulators, research agencies and academic institutions to achieve uniformity and consistency in

classification, measurement and assignment of cost to product and services, has constituted Cost

Accounting Standards Board (CASB) with the objective of formulating the Cost Accounting Standards. The

Board has so far released 15 Cost Accounting Standards and document on Generally Accepted Cost

Accounting Principles (GAAP), which are as under:

COST ACCOUNTING STANDARDS

CAS No Title Objective

CAS1 Classification of Cost For preparation of Cost Statements.

CAS2 Capacity Determination For determination of capacity.

CAS2

(Revised 2012)

Capacity Determination

To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and

methods of determination of capacity with reasonable

accuracy.

CAS3 Overheads

For Collection, Allocation, Apportionment and Absorption

of overheads.

CAS3

(Revised 2011)

Overheads

To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and

methods of determining the overheads with reasonable

accuracy.

CAS4

Cost of Production for

Captive Consumption

To determine the assessable value of excisable goods

used for captive consumption.

CAS5

Average (equalized) Cost of

Transportation

To determine averaged/equalized transportation cost.

CAS6 Material Cost

To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and

methods of determining the material cost with reasonable

accuracy in an economically feasible manner.

Lesson 1 Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

21

CAS7 Employee Cost

To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and

methods of determining the Employee cost with

reasonable accuracy.

CAS8 Cost of Utilities

To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and

methods of determining the Cost of Utilities with

reasonable accuracy.

CAS9 Packing Material Cost

To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and

methods of determining the Packing Material Cost with

reasonable accuracy.

CAS10 Direct Expenses

To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and

methods of determining the Direct Expenses with

reasonable accuracy.

CAS11 Administrative Overheads

To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and

methods of determining the Administrative Overheads with

reasonable accuracy.

CAS12

Repairs And Maintenance

Cost

To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and

methods of determining the Repairs and Maintenance

Cost with reasonable accuracy.

CAS13 Cost of Service Cost Centre

To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and

methods of determining the Cost of Service Cost Centre

with reasonable accuracy.

CAS14 Pollution Control Cost

To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and

methods of determining the Pollution Control Costs with

reasonable accuracy.

CAS15

Selling & Distribution

Overheads

To bring uniformity and consistency in the principles and

methods of determining the selling and distribution

overheads with reasonable accuracy.

INSTALLATION OF A COSTING SYSTEM

A cost accounting system is a system that accumulates costs, assigns them to cost objectives and reports

cost information. It ascertains product profitability and helps management in planning and control of business

operations.

A system has to be designed to suit the needs of an organisation. Costing can be employed in any industry

whether it is manufacturing industry or other industries like public utility, public services, construction

companies, agriculture, mining etc.

As a system designer, the cost accountant should be able to perceive the needs of the management at

various levels and design such a system as will meet those needs promptly, effectively and efficiently. The

“needs” are concerned with the following:

(i) The objective: The system will naturally differ according to what is expected from the costing

system. The system will be simple if the objective is merely to fix prices; it will have to provide

detailed information if the aim is to measure efficiency, control, etc. If the law requires installation of

the costing system, the legal requirements must obviously be kept in mind.

(ii) Decision-Making Points: The levels of management which require information will determine the

EP-CMA

22

quantum and format of information that the costing system will have to provide. The periodicity of

the various reports will be similarly determined.

(iii) Significant Operations: Costing must obviously pay greater attention to those areas which account

for the bulk of expenditure. Mostly, it is production but, in quite a few cases, selling and distribution,

accounts for greater expenditure than production; in such a case the system must devote greater

care to selling and distribution.

(iv) Uncontrollable Items: Sometimes the law provides for a certain course of action; for example

sugar must be packed in new gunny bags. Costing must not try to change this. Sometimes

managements may decide to adopt a particular course for various reasons, for example, purchasing

an item only from a particular firm. Obviously, it will be no use trying to alter this.

To install a sound costing system in an organisation is not an easy task. The costing for each firm must be so

designed as to meet its earlier needs. It should be ensured first that the following pre-requisites for installing

a sound costing system are present in the organisation:

(a) The organisational set up should be clear cut regarding authority and responsibility of different

individuals.

(b) The management of the organisation should extend full support to the system.

(c) The co-operation of the members of the staff and of the workers in general should be ensured. They

should have the real spirit and enthusiasm to operate the system.

(d) If financial records can yield all the necessary costing information, it is not necessary to have a

separate costing department. Usually, however, a separate costing department is essential or

desirable but its strength will depend upon the needs of the management and the volume and

complexity of transactions or events to be recorded and handled.

The following are the essential considerations which would govern the installation of a sound costing in an

organisation in general:

Executive Side: The memorandum and articles, organisation chart, delegation of powers etc.

Accounting Side: Financial accounting records, last audited accounts etc.

Internal Control Side: The existing forms, registers, number of copies etc.

Technical side and Others:

(i) The size, layout and organisation of the factory should be studied.

(ii) The methods of purchase, receipt, storage and issue of materials should be examined and modified

if necessary.

(iii) The method of paying wages should be studied.

(iv) The management requirements and their attitude towards cost accounting should be kept in view.

(v) The cost of installing and operating the system should be economical.

(vi) The nature, method, process and stages of production, the quantities and qualities of each product

should be examined.

(vii) The system should suit the organisation.

(viii) Forms and records should involve minimum clerical work and cost.

Lesson 1 Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

23

(ix) The system should enable prompt reporting to the various levels of management.

(x) The system should so designed that cost can be effectively controlled.

(xi) The staff in the cost accounting department should have the ability to produce required cost data.

The persons using the reports should be able to understand and use the information.

(xii) The adoption of cost accounting systems and practices followed by other firms in the industry

facilitates inter unit and inter-firm comparisons.

(xiii) A suitable unit of cost should be selected so that the cost is meaningful. For example, in a steel mill,

the unit is “tonne” and in a company producing refrigerators, the unit is each refrigerator. In a

transport company, the unit is “tonne-km” i.e., the effort in hauling one tonne of goods for one

kilometre.

(xiv) External factors e.g. government regulations affect the frequency, volume and structure of the cost

accounting system.

Any proposed changes should suit other departments and should dislocate production schedule. Other

points to be noted are :

(a) Accuracy: Cost accounts must be accurate and correct otherwise they will prove to be misleading.

(b) Equity: Allocation of indirect expenses to a particular class of output, department or job should be

fair and equitable.

(c) Simplicity: As cost accountants are highly analytical, there is a tendency towards complexity.

Needless, elaboration should be scrupulously avoided and care must be taken to keep them as

simple as possible. Careful choice should be made of the cost unit i.e. the quantity for which cost

will be computed e.g. a tonne of steel, a kg. of yarn etc.

(d) Elasticity: The cost accounting system should be elastic and capable of adapting itself to altered

circumstances.

(e) Comparability: The records must be maintained in such a manner that the result of one period can

be compared with the results of any other period. The records of the past must act as a guide for

the future.

(f) Promptness: Prompt recording of the relevant figures in analytical form is the sine qua non of

costing. Arrangements should be made for the prompt supply of records by the various departments

relating to raw material, stores, labour etc., and the data thus obtained, are promptly analysed and

recorded.

(g) Observance of instructions: The costing staff must carefully obey the instructions given to them

and even slight deviations must be permitted.

(h) Periodical results: In order to derive maximum benefit, it is advisable to have the results prepared

periodically so that actual cost can be compared with estimated costs.

(i) Reconciliation with financial accounts: The whole system should be so maintained as to make

reconciliation with financial accounts easy and simple.

PRACTICAL DIFFICULTIES IN INSTALLING A COSTING SYSTEM

1. Lack of support from top management: Many a times, the cost accounting system is introduced without

the support of the top management in all the functional areas. Even managing director or chairman often

introduces such system without consulting the departmental heads. This results in opposition from the

various managers as they consider it is an interference on their activities.

EP-CMA

24

2. Resistance from the existing staff: The existing financial accounting staff may offer resistance to the

cost accounting system because of a feeling of their being declared redundant under the new system.

3. Non-cooperation at other levels of organisation: The foreman, supervisors and other staff may also

resent the additional paper work and may not co-operate in providing the basic data which is absolutely

essential for the success of the system.

4. Shortage of trained staff: There may be shortage of cost accountants to handle the work of cost

analysis, cost control and cost reduction. The work of the costing department can not be handled with the

availability of trained staff.

5. Heavy costs: The costing system will involve heavy costs unless it has been suitably designed to suit

specific requirements.

To overcome this difficulties the following points are suggested:

1. Before the installation of a costing system, there must be firm commitment to the system on the part

of the top management.

2. The existing accounting staff should be impressed about the need to supplement the existing

financial accounting system.

3. The employees should be properly educated regarding the benefits which can be obtained from

such a system.

4. The existing staff working in the accounts department must be properly trained in costing methods

and techniques.

5. The costing system should be installed and operated according to the requirements of a specific

case, so that it may not entail heavy cost to the organisation.

6. There should be proper supervision after installation and continuous efforts on the part of the cost

accountant to make the system successful and to achieve the desired objectives.

ROLE OF COST ACCOUNTANT IN DECISION MAKING

The outlook of modern business is such that all enterprises-whether large or small, manufacturing or non-

manufacturing, public or private, profit or nonprofit-require a wide variety of cost data in making day-to-day

operating decisions. Thus, for the modern cost accountant, the positive emphasis on analysis and

interpretation) requires involvement in the dynamic phase of business-the current period and the future. The

dynamic phase is concerned primarily with planning (i.e., selecting objectives and the means for their

attainment) and controlling (i.e., achieving conformity to established plans). Cost Accountants collect,

assimilate, collate and analyse all financial information related to an organization. Their main role is to

ensure that managerial decisions are within cost prescriptions. They need to give a prediction about financial

performance of any project. For this cost accountant considers many factors such as the cost of raw

material, labour, transport and overheads, among others. He will be responsible for planning and executing

effective management information and control systems, inventory control incorporating mathematical models,

investment analysis, project management, internal audit, cost audit etc.

Cost Accountant plays one of the most important roles in the organization

Cost accountant analyst performs one of the most important roles in the entire organization. It is really

imperative that the companies pay a great emphasis on the job of an accountant analyst. Cost

accountancy deals with the preparation of the various reports for the knowledge of the internal stakeholder.

Lesson 1 Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

25

All the decisions that are taken by the company management regarding the future of the company are based

on the financial reports that are prepared by the cost accountants.

Cost Accountant performs action as under:

1. To analyze material, labour and the overhead expenses

2. To reconcile daily productions with accounting transactions

3. To coordinate with R&D for production of new items

4. To Assist the controller in developing cost improvement opportunities

5. To prepare the new product costing as well as do the gross profit analysis for the marketing in order

to determine the feasibility and profitability before presenting the samples and pricing to the

customers.

MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

INTRODUCTION

In every business enterprise, various transactions and events take place every day; sales are effected,

purchases are made, expenses are met or incurred, payments are received and made, assets are sold and

acquired. These events, arising out of the decisions and actions of management, exercise their effects and

impact on the operational efficiency and position of the enterprise. Most of these transactions and events

have money values or can be measured and expressed in money values. Since they affect the operation and

position of the enterprise, they need to be measured, recorded, analysed and reported to the management,

so that the management can evaluate their effect upon the enterprise.

As compared with financial accounting and cost accounting, management accounting is a later development.

Management accounting links management with accounting. All such information that is useful to the

management is the subject matter of management accounting. Any information required for decision making

is the concern of management accounting. Management accounting, unlike financial accounting, provides

information for internal users, though the basic data come from the same accounting system i.e., financial

accounting and cost accounting systems.

Management accounting collects and provides accounting, cost accounting, economic and statistical

information to the men at various managerial levels to assist them in the performance of managerial

functions and their evaluations. It is the development and application of various techniques of recording,

analysis, interpretation and presentation, making the financial, costing, and other data active and effective in

the performance of managerial functions, viz., planning, decision-making and control. It should be noted that

management accounting makes use of not only accounting techniques but also of statistical and

mathematical techniques. Management accounting is forward looking and should, therefore, be able to treat

economic information and data to make it suitable for use by the management.

Evolution of Management Accounting

Managerial accounting has its roots in the industrial revolution of the 19th century. During this early period,

most firms were tightly controlled by a few owner-managers who borrowed based on personal relationships

and their personal assets. Since there were no external shareholders and little unsecured debt, there was

little need for elaborate financial reports. In contrast, managerial accounting was relatively sophisticated and

EP-CMA

26

provided the essential information needed to manage the early large scale production of textile, steel, and

other products. After the turn of the century, financial accounting requirements grow rapidly because of new

pressures placed on companies by capital markets, creditors, regulatory bodies, and federal taxation of

income. Many firms needed to raise funds from increasingly widespread and detached suppliers of capital.

To tap these vast reservoirs of outside capital, firms' managers had to supply audited financial reports.

Because outside suppliers of capital relied on audited financial statements, independent accountants had a

keen interest in establishing well defined procedures for corporate financial reporting. As a consequence, for

many decades, management accountants increasingly focused their efforts on ensuring that financial

accounting requirements were met and financial reports were released on time. The practice of management

accounting stagnated. In the early part of the century, as product line expanded operations became more

complex, forward looking companies saw a renewed need for management-oriented reports that was

separate from financial reports. But in most companies, management accounting practices up through

themid-1980s were largely indistinguishable from practices that were common prior to World War I. In recent

years, however, new economic forces have led to many important innovations in management accounting

Definition of Management Accounting

The management accounting team of Anglo-American Council on Productivity defined management

accounting as:

“The presentation of accounting information in such a way as to assist management in the creation of policy

and in day to day operation of an understanding”.

American Accounting Association defines management accounting as under:

“The application of appropriate techniques and concepts in processing historical and projected economic

data of an entity to assist management in establishing plans for reasonable economic objectives and in the

making of rational decisions with a view towards these objectives”.

J Batty defines:

“Management accounting is the term used to describe accounting methods, systems and techniques which

coupled with special knowledge and ability, assists management in its task of maximising profits or

minimising losses.”

Brown and Howard define:

“Management accounting is that aspect of accounting which is concerned with the efficient management of a

business through the presentation of management of such information as will facilitate efficient and

opportune planning and control.”

Robert Anthony has defined management accounting thus:

“Management accounting is concerned with accounting information which is useful to management”

According to CIMA, London: “Management accounting is an integral part of management concerned with

identifying, presenting and interpreting information used for: (a) formulating strategy; (b) planning and

controlling activities; (c) decision taking; (d) optimising the use of resources; (e) disclosure to shareholders

and others external to the entity; (f) disclosure to employees; (g) safeguarding assets.

The above involves participation in management to ensure that there is effective: (i) formulation of plans to

meet objectives (strategic planning); (ii) formulation of short-term operation plans (budgeting/profit; planning);

(iii) acquisition and use of finance (financial management) and recording of transaction (financial accounting

Lesson 1 Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

27

and cost accounting); (iv) communication of financial and operating information; (v) corrective action to bring

plans and results into line (financial control); (vi) reviewing and reporting on systems and operations (internal

audit, management audit)."

If the meaning of ‘managing’ and ‘accounting’ are understood, the definition of management accounting

becomes quite clear. The main objective of the management is to manage the company following a managing

pattern comprised of formulation of plan, allocation of responsibilities for implementing the plan, organising

procedures to assist in the execution of the plan, and control of the performance. To assist in this process, the

accounting system provides to the management the following information viz. (1) data designed to assist in the

formulation of a plan covering all business functions, (2) transform the project in quantitative terms with sources

available to finance the project costs; (3) devise workable standards of performance matching to the

responsibilities and measure the performance and assist in the revision/modification of the plan.

An analysis of the above definitions enables us to define management accounting as the processing and

presenting of accounting, cost accounting and other economic data, both historical and projected, in such a

way as would assist in the performance evaluation of managerial functions, viz. planning, decision-making

and control. Processing and presenting of the data involves the use of techniques of cost accounting,

budgetary control, standard costing, break-even analysis, ratio-analysis, funds and cash flow analysis, etc.

OBJECTIVE OF MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

The fundamental objective of management accounting is to assist the management in carrying out its duties

efficiently so that maximize profits or minimize losses of management. It includes computation of plans and

budgets covering all aspects of the business. Example: production, selling, distribution, research and

finance. Management accounting systematic allocate responsibilities for implementation of plans and

budgets. It analysis of all transactions, financial and physical, to enable effective comparison to be made

between the forecasts and actual performance.

The main objectives of management accounting are as follows:

1. To formulate Planning and policy

Planning involves forecasting on the basis of available information, setting goals; framing polices determining

the alternative courses of action and deciding on the program of activities. It facilitate the preparation of

statements in the light of past results and gives estimation for the future.

2. To interpretation of financial documents

Management accounting is to present financial information to the management. Financial information must

be presented in such away that it is easily understood. It presents accounting information with the help of

statistical devices like charts, diagrams, graphs, etc.

3. To assist in Decision-making process

Management accounting makes decision-making process more scientific with the help of various modern

techniques. Information/figure relating to cost, price, profit and savings for each of the available alternatives

are collected and analyzed accordingly which will provide a base for taking sound decisions.

4. To help in control

Management accounting is a helpful for managerial control. Management accounting tools e.g. standard

EP-CMA

28

costing and budgetary control are helpful in controlling performance. Cost control is affected through the use

of standard costing and departmental control is made possible through the use of budgets. Performance of

each and every individual is controlled with the help of management accounting.

5. To provide report

Management accounting keeps the management fully informed about the latest position of the concern

through reporting. It helps management to take proper and quick decisions. It informs the performance of

various departments regularly to the top management.

6. To Facilitate Coordination of Operations

Management accounting provides tools for overall control and coordination of business operations. Budgets

are important means of coordination.

NATURE OF MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

The following aspects are considered as the nature of management accounting:

(i) Management accounting is a decision making system: Management accounting provides

accounting information in such a way as to assist management in the creation of policy and in the

day-to-day operations. Though management accountant is not taking any decision but provides

data which is helpful to management in decision making. It communicates a great variety of facts in

a systematic and meaningful manner.

(ii) Management accounting is futuristic: Management accounting unlike the financial accounting, deals

with the future. It helps in planning the future-because decisions are always taken for the future

course of action. In the decision making process management accounting provides selective and

fruitful information out of the data collected.

(iii) Management accounting is a technique of selective nature: Management accountant takes into

account only those data from the financial statement and communicates to the management which

is useful for taking decisions.

(iv) Management accounting analyses different variables: Management accounting helps in analysing

the reasons for variations in profit as compared to the past period. It analyses the effects of different

variables on the profits and profitability of the concern.

(v) Management accounting does not set particular formats for information: It provides necessary

information to the management in the form which may be more useful to the management in taking

various decisions on different aspects of the business.

SCOPE OF MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

Management accounting includes financial accounting and extends to the operation of a system of cost

accountancy, budgetary control and statistical data. While meeting the legal and conventional requirements

regarding the presentation of financial statements, (profit and loss account, balance sheet and cash flow

statements) it stresses emphasis upon the establishment and operation of internal controls. The scope of

management accounting, inter alia includes:

1. Formation, installation and operation of accounting, cost accounting, tax accounting and information

systems. Management accountant has to construct and reconstruct these systems to meet the

changing needs of management functions.

2. The compilation and preservation of vital data for management planning. The accounts and the

Lesson 1 Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

29

document files are repository of vast quantities of details about the past progress of the enterprise,

without which forecasts of the future is very hazardous for the enterprise. The management

accountant presents the past data in such a way as to reflect the trends of events to the

management. He is supposed to give his assessment of anticipated changes in relevant areas.

Such information provides effective assistance in the planning process. At times the management

accountant may be called upon to associate with and even supervise the actual planning process

alongwith other members of the management team.

3. Providing means of communicating management plans to the various levels of organisation. This,

on the one hand ensures the coordination of various segments of the enterprise plans and on the

other defines the role of individual segments in the whole plan and assists the management in

directing their activities.

4. Providing and installing an effective system of feed-back reports. This would enable the

management in its controlling function. By pin-pointing the significant deviations between actual and

expected activities, and by adhering to the principles of selectivity and relevance, such reports help

in the installation and operation of the system of ‘management by exceptions’. The management

accountant is expected to analyse the deviation by reasons and responsibility and to suggest

appropriate corrective measures in deserving cases.

5. Analysing and interpreting accounting and other data to make it understandable and usable to the

management. It is only through such analysis and clarification that the management is enabled to

place the various data and figures in proper perspective in the performance of its functions. Such

analysis assists management in the location of responsibilities and to effect necessary changes in

the organisational set up to achieve the objectives of the enterprise in a more efficient manner.

6. Assisting management in decision-making by (a) providing relevant accounting, other data and (b)

analysing the effect of alternative proposals on the profits and position of the enterprise.

Management accountant helps the management in a proper understanding and analysis of the

problem in hand and presentation of factual information obviously in financial terms.

7. Providing methods and techniques for evaluating the performance of the management in the light of

the objectives of the enterprises, thus assisting in the implementation of the principle of

management by objectives.

8. Improving, modifying and sharpening the effectiveness of co-existing techniques of analysis. The

management accountant should always think of increasing the practicability of existing techniques.

He should be on the lookout for the development of new techniques as well.

Thus, management accounting serves not only as a tool in the hands of management, but also provides for a

technique of evaluating the performance of the management itself. It operates as a double-edged sword

assisting the management in proper performance of its functions of planning, decision-making and control,

and at the same time, enabling the owners and other interested parties to evaluate and appraise the

management of the enterprise.

TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES OF MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

A number of tool and techniques have been used under management accounting to help management in

achieving the desired goals. For this the management accountant normally uses the following tool and

techniques:

(i) Financial Planning: Financial planning is the process of deciding in advance about the financial

activities necessary for the organisation to achieve the desired objectives. It includes determining

EP-CMA

30

both long term and short term financial objectives, formulating financial policies and developing the

financial procedures etc. Financial policies may relate to the determination of the capital

requirement, sources of funds, determination and distribution of income, use of debt and equity

capital and the determination of the optimum level of investment in various areas.

(ii) Financial Statement Analysis: Financial statements are analysed to make data more meaningful.

Comparative statement analysis, common size statement analysis, trend analysis, ratio analysis,

cash flow analysis etc. are the major techniques of financial statement analysis used in

management accounting.

(iii) Decision Making: Management accounting helps the management through the techniques of

marginal costing, differential costing, capital budgeting, cash flow analysis, discounted cash flow

etc. to select the best alternative which will maximise the profits of the business.

(iv) Control Techniques: Management should ensure that the plan formulated by it has been

translated into action. Standard costing and budgetary control techniques are useful control

techniques used by management.

(v) Statistical and Graphical Techniques: Management accountant uses various statistical and

graphical techniques in order to make the information more meaningful and presentation of the

same in such a form so that it may help the management in decision making. The techniques of

linear programming, statistical quality control, investment chart, sales and earning chart etc. are of

vital use.

(vi) Reporting: Management accountant prepares the necessary reports for providing information to the

different levels of management by proper selection of data to be presented, organisation of data or

selecting the appropriate method of reporting.

RELATIONSHIP OF COST ACCOUNTING, FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING, MANAGEMENT

ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Cost Accounting has been developed because of the limitations of Financial Accounting from the outlook of

management control and internal reporting. Financial accounting executes the function of exposing a true

and fair overall picture of the results or activities carried on by an enterprise during a period (via statement of

profit and loss) and its financial position at the end of the year (via balance sheet). Also, on the basis of

financial accounting, effective control can be exercised on the property and assets of the enterprise to

ensure that they are not misused or misappropriated. To that extent financial accounting helps to assess the

overall progress of a concern, its strength and weaknesses by providing the figures relating to several

previous years.

Data provided by Cost and Financial Accounting is further used for the management of all processes

associated with the efficient acquisition and deployment of short, medium and long term financial resources.

Such a process of management is known as Financial Management. The objective of Financial Management

is to maximize the wealth of shareholders by taking effective Investment, Financing and Dividend decisions.

Investment decisions relate to the effective deployment of scarce resources in terms of funds while the

Financing decisions are concerned with acquiring optimum finance for attaining financial objectives.

The last and very important 'Dividend decision' relates to the determination of the amount and frequency of

cash which can be paid out of profits to shareholders. On the other hand, Management Accounting refers to

managerial processes and technologies that are focused on adding value to organizations by attaining the

effective use of resources, in dynamic and competitive contexts. Hence, Management Accounting is a

Lesson 1 Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

31

distinctive form of resource management which facilitates management's 'decision making' by producing

information for managers within an organization.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING AND COST ACCOUNTING

Both financial accounting and cost accounting are concerned with systematic recording and presentation of

financial data. Financial accounting reveals profits and losses of the business as a whole during a particular

period, while cost accounting shows, by analysis and localisation, the unit costs and profits and losses of different

product lines. The main difference between financial accounting and cost accounting are summarised below:

(1) Financial accounting aims at safeguarding the interests of the business and its proprietors and

others connected with it. This is done by providing suitable information to various parties, such as

shareholders or partners, present or prospective creditors etc. Cost accounting on the other hand,

renders information for the guidance of the management for proper planning, operation, control and

decision making.

(2) Financial accounts are kept in such a way as to meet the requirements of the Companies Act,

Income-tax Act and other statues. On the other hand cost accounts are generally kept voluntarily to

meet the requirements of management. But now the Companies Act has made it obligatory to keep

cost records in some manufacturing industries.

(3) Financial accounting emphasizes the measurement of profitability, while cost accounting aims at

ascertainment of costs and accumulates data for this very purpose.

(4) Financial accounts disclose the net profit and loss of the business as a whole, whereas cost

accounts disclose profit or loss of each product, job or service. This enables the management to

eliminate less profitable product lines and maximise the profits by concentrating on more profitable

ones.

(5) Financial accounting provides operating results and financial position usually gives information

through cost reports to the management as and when desired.

(6) Financial accounts deal mainly with actual facts and figures, but cost accounts deal partly with facts

and figures and partly with estimates.

(7) In case of financial accounts stress is on the ascertainment and exhibition of profits earned or

losses incurred in the business. In cost accounts the emphasis is more on aspects of planning and

control.

(8) Financial accounting is concerned with historical records, while cost accounting is concerned with

historical cost but also with pre-determined cost

(9) Financial accounts are concerned with external transactions i.e. transactions between the business

concern on one side and third parties on the other. These transactions form the basis for payment

or receipt of cash. While cost accounts are concerned with internal transactions which do not form

the basis of payment or receipt of cash.

(10) The costs are reported in aggregate in financial accounts but costs are broken into unit basis in cost

accounts.

(11) Financial accounts do not provide information on the relative efficiencies of various workers, plants

and machinery while cost accounts provide valuable information on the relative efficiencies of

various plants and machinery.

(12) Financial reports (profit and loss account and balance sheet) are prepared periodically – quarterly,

EP-CMA

32

half yearly or annual basis. But cost reporting is a continuous process and may be daily, weekly,

monthly etc.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

Financial accounting and management accounting both appear to be similar in as much as both study the

impact of business transactions and events of the enterprise and report and interpret the results thereof.

Both provide information for internal as well as external use. But management accounting, although having

its roots in financial accounting differs from the latter in the following respects.

1. Financial accounting deals with the business transactions and events for the enterprise as a whole.

Management accounting, in addition to the study of events in relation to the enterprise as a whole

takes organisation in its various units and segments and attempts to trace the impact and effect of

the business transactions and events through its various divisions and sub-divisions. Thus, while

the financial statement - profit and loss account, balance sheet and cash flow statements reveal the

overall performance and position of the enterprise. Management accounting reports emphasise on

the details of operational costs, inventories, products, process and jobs. It traces the effect and

impact of the business transactions and events on costs, inventories, processes, jobs and products.

2. Financial accounting is attached more with reporting the results and position of the business to

persons and authorities other than management - Government, creditors, investors, owners, etc. At

times, financial accounting follows window-dressing tactics in order to project a better than actual

image of the enterprise. Management accounting is concerned more with generating information for

the use of internal management and hence the information reflects the real or really expected

position.

3. Financial accounting is necessarily historical. It records and analyses business events long after

they have taken place. Management accounting analyses the events as they take place and also

anticipates such events for the future. Thus, it uses data which generally has relevance to the

future.

4. Since financial accounting data is historical in nature, it is more precise than the management

accounting data, which generally reflects the expected future, and hence could only be an

estimation. This provides the necessary rapidity to management accounting information.

5. The periodicity in reporting financial accounts is much wider than in case of management

accounting. In financial accounting, generally, results are reported on year to year basis. In

management accounting, weekly, fortnightly and even monthly reporting is used.

6. Financial accounting has to be governed by the “generally accepted principles”. This is so because,

it has to cater for the informational needs of the outsiders. It has to stick to the generally accepted

methods of presentation of such information. Regarding the contents and form of information,

financial accounting has to abide by the legal provisions also. Management accounting has not to

worry about such legal and/or conventional constraints and the “generally accepted principles”. It is

free to formulate its own rules, procedures and forms, because the information it generates is solely

for internal consumption. In management accounting fixed assets may be stated at appraisal

values, overhead costs may be omitted from inventories or revenues may be recorded before

realisation. Generally accepted principles of financial accounting do not permit such accounts. What

is important in management accounting is the usefulness of the information for managerial functions

rather than its general acceptability. The form and content of management accounting information

differs according to the needs and purpose.

Lesson 1 Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

33

7. Financial accounting is a must in case of joint stock companies to meet the statutory provisions of

company law and tax laws. Even in case of sole proprietorship and partnership firms financial

accounting becomes a necessity for tax purposes. Management accounting, on the other hand, is

entirely optional and its forms and contents depend upon the outlook of the management.

8. Financial statements prepared under financial accounting consists of monetary information only.

Management accounting statements in addition to monetary information also consist non-monetary

information, viz., quantities of materials consumed, number of workers, quantities produced and

sold and so on.

9. Financial statements are required to be published and audited by statutory auditors. Management

accounting statements are for internal use and thus neither published nor audited.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN COST ACCOUNTING AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

Cost accounting and management accounting both are internal to the organisation. Both have the same

objectives of assisting management in its functions of planning, decision-making, controlling and techniques

like budgetary control, standard costing and marginal costing owe their existence to cost accounting and

have slipped into the kitbag of the management accountant. There is a good deal of overlapping in their

functions. However, the two systems can be differentiated on the following grounds:

1. Cost accounting is concerned more with the ascertainment, allocation, distribution and accounting

aspects of costs. Management accounting is concerned more with impact and effect aspect of

costs.

2. Cost accounting data generally serves as a base to which the tools and techniques of management

accounting can be applied to make it more purposeful and management oriented. Whereas, the

management accounting data is derived both, from the cost accounts and financial accounts.

3. The management accountant places the data in a wider perspective than the cost accountant. This

accounts for a greater degree of relevance and objectivity in management accounting than in cost

accounting. It is the management accountant who is supposed to have a clear idea regarding the

items and types of costs required to analyse and decide specific business problems and the effect

of such costs on alternate solutions. A cost accountant is definitely helpful in collecting such costing

data for the management accountant.

4. In the organisational set-up, management accountant generally is placed at a higher level of

hierarchy than the cost accountant.

5. The approach of the cost accountant is much narrower than that of a management accountant, who

may have to use certain economic and statistical data along with the costing data to enable the

management to be more accurate the precise in its functions of planning, decision-making and

control.

6. Management accounting, in addition to the tools and techniques, like variable costing, break-even

analysis, standard costing, etc., available to cost accounting, also makes use of other techniques

like cash flow, ratio analysis, etc., which are not within the scope of cost accounting.

7. Management accounting includes both financial accounting as well as cost accounting. It also

embraces tax planning and tax accounting. Cost accounting does not include financial accounting

and has nothing to do with tax accounting.

8. Management accounting is concerned equally with short-range and long-range planning and uses

EP-CMA

34

highly sophisticated techniques like sensitivity analysis, probability structures, etc., in the planning

and forecasting prices. Cost accounting is more concerned with short-term planning. Evaluation of

capital investment projects is the speciality of management accountant.

9. Management accounting is concerned, both, with assisting management in its functions, as well as

evaluating the performance of the management as an institution. Cost accounting is concerned

merely with assisting in management functions and does not provide for the evaluation of the

performance of management.

10. Cost accounting is mostly historical in its approach and it projects the past. Management accounting

is futuristic in its approach. Management accounting is more predictive in nature than cost

accounting.

11. Cost accounting system can be installed without management accounting. While management

accounting cannot be installed without a proper cost accounting system.

LIMITATIONS OF MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

The management accountant has the responsibility of producing and providing dependable accounting and

other relevant data for the use of management. The data provided, if it has to be really effective in the

management process, must be: (1) relevant and precise, (2) consistent and comparable, (3) presented in an

appropriate and understandable form, (4) provided at appropriate time intervals, and (5) provided to meet the

needs of various levels of management. The management accountant is expected to keep in mind the above

points while producing his product. However, the information and reports presented by management

accountant still suffers from the following limitations:

(1) Different meaning of the same term: In accounting different terms carry different meanings under

different set of circumstances and conditions. Such meanings and figures may superficially

resemble one another and a person who is not, familiar with them may easily become confused or

frustrated. The most common source of confusion is the word ‘cost’. There are historical costs, full

costs, direct costs, variable costs, standard costs, original costs, residual costs, net costs,

differential costs, opportunity costs, estimated cost and incremental costs. Some of these terms are

synonymous, others are not exactly synonymous through resembling each other, still others,

although not synonymous at all, may be used as if they were synonymous. In order to avoid such

confusion and misunderstanding, the management accountant should in approaching a specific

problem, define, as carefully and clearly as possible, the meaning in which such words are being

used. He should as far as possible be consistent in prescribing the meanings to such terms.

(2) Approximations: Management accounting data cannot be completely accurate in all respects. A

good deal of approximation is involved in the compilation and preparation of such data. The smaller

the time gap between the happening and reporting of an event, the greater will be the

approximation. In addition, in the working out of the estimates and future costs, approximation has

to be resorted to. Even in case of historical data, the cost and time required for accuracy may be

prohibitive and compel the management accountant to do some approximations. Therefore, while

using the information provided by the management accountant, the management must be aware of

the degree of approximation. The management accountant should follow a consistent practice in

matters of approximations.

(3) Incompleteness of the data: Management accountant can provide only the quantitative data as far

as available, to the management. Business problems and their decisions often require additional

quantitative as well as qualitative data which may be outside the purview of the management

Lesson 1 Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

35

accountant. For example, the management accounting data will not disclose the extent to which the

quality and utility of a product is affected by the changes in materials or methods of production. The

management should guard itself against the belief that problems could be completely solved by

numerical analysis. The management accountant should point out as far as possible, the qualitative

factors relevant for decision-making in each case.

(4) Importance of proper management action: A management accountant may provide information and

figures in most appropriate form to the management. But figures themselves are nothing more than

marks on pieces of paper, and by themselves they accomplish nothing. Anything that the business

accomplishes is the result of action of the people. Figures can only assist people in the organisation

in various ways. It is the management and the people in the organisation who are to use the figure

by understanding their language and act accordingly. The same set of figures, if not acted upon by

the management, becomes useless or if misunderstood by the management, may lead to unwise

actions.

CONFLICTS IN PROFIT VERSUS VALUE MAXIMISATION PRINCIPLE

A process that businesses undergo to determine the best output and price levels in order to maximize its

income. The business will usually adjust influential factors such as production costs, sale prices, and output

levels as a way of reaching its profit goal. There are two main profit maximization methods used, and they

are Marginal Cost-Marginal Revenue Method and Total Cost-Total Revenue Method. In economics, profit

maximization is the short run or long run process by which a firm determines the price and output level that

returns the greatest profit.

The wealth maximization is now redefined as value maximization, since the goal of management is to

maximize the present wealth of the owners, i.e., equity shareholders of a company. A company’s equity

shares are actively traded in the stock exchanges, the wealth of the equity shareholders is represented in

market value of the equity shares. The prime goal of the organisation is to maximize the market value of

equity shares of the company. The shareholders wealth is maximized only when the market value of the

shares is maximized.

The modern approach of management accounting focuses on wealth maximization rather than profit

maximization. This gives a longer term horizon for assessment, making way for sustainable performance by

businesses. A narrow-minded person or business is mostly concerned about short term benefits. A short

term horizon can fulfil objective of earning profit but may not help in creating wealth. It is because wealth

creation needs a longer term horizon Therefore, management emphasizes on wealth maximization rather

than profit maximization. For a business, it is not necessary that profit should be the only objective; it may

concentrate on various other aspects like increasing sales, capturing more market share etc, which will take

care of profitability. So, we can say that profit maximization is a subset of wealth and being a subset, it will

facilitate wealth creation.

Giving priority to value creation, managers have now shifted from traditional approach to modern approach

that focuses on wealth maximization. This leads to better and true evaluation of business. For e.g., under

wealth maximization, more importance is given to cash flows rather than profitability. As it is said that profit is

a relative term, it can be a figure in some currency, it can be in percentage etc. For e.g. a profit of ` 2 crore

cannot be judged as good or bad for a business, till it is compared with investment, sales etc. Similarly,

duration of earning the profit is also important i.e. whether it is earned in short term or long term.

In wealth maximization, major emphasizes is on cash flows rather than profit. So, to evaluate various

alternatives for decision making, cash flows are taken under consideration. For e.g. to measure the worth of

EP-CMA

36

a project, criteria like: “present value of its cash inflow – present value of cash outflows” (net present value) is

taken. This approach considers cash flows rather than profits into consideration and also use discounting

technique to find out worth of a project. Thus, maximization of wealth approach believes that money has time

value.

At times, wealth maximization may create conflict, known as agency problem. This describes conflict between

the owners and managers of firm. As, managers are the agents appointed by owners, a strategic investor or the

owner of the firm would be majorly concerned about the longer term performance of the business that can lead

to maximization of shareholder’s wealth. Whereas, a manager might focus on taking such decisions that can

bring quick result, so that he/she can get credit for good performance. However, in course of fulfilling the same,

a manager might opt for risky decisions which can put the owner’s objectives on stake.

Hence, a manager should align his/her objective to broad objective of organization and achieve a trade-off

between risk and return while making decision; keeping in mind the ultimate goal of management i.e. to

maximize the wealth of its current shareholders

ROLE OF MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTANT IN DECISION MAKING

Depending upon the company situation - size, nature and organisational set up and his own capabilities and

position in the company, the management accountant may be required to perform various and varied

functions. The importance and effectiveness of his function would also depend upon the confidence reposed

in him by the top management and the functional managers. His functions generally embrace each and

every activity of the management which can be summarized as follows:

1. Management Accountant establishes, coordinates and administers plans to facilitate the forecasting

of sales, expense budgets and cost standards that will permit profit planning, capital budgeting and

financing.

2. He will formulate accounting policy and procedures. Operating data and special reports must be

prepared so that the performance can be compared with plans and standards, and any variance

between actual operations and pre-determined standards can be analysed for corrective actions by

management. Such comparisons between actual and expected activities should help the

management in proper fixation of responsibility and also in the evaluation of the various functional

and divisional heads.

3. Management Accountant is responsible for the protection of the business assets to the extent

possible by external controls, internal auditing and insurance coverage.

4. He will be responsible for tax policies and procedures and will supervise and coordinate the reports

required by various authorities.

5. Management Accountant must continually be aware of economic and social forces as well as the

effect of governmental policies and actions on business activities.

An analysis of the above list (obviously not exhaustive) of functions, reflects the status of a management

accountant. He is the principal officer incharge of the accounts of the company. He shall be responsible to

the Board of directors for the maintenance of adequate accounting procedures and records on the operation

of the business. He shall be responsible to the president or the chairman of the board with respect to the

administration of his office. He shall perform such other duties and functions as may from time to time be

assigned to him by the president or chairman of the board or the Board of directors. Thus, in his broad

functional activities, the management accountant is responsible to the policy making group of top

management, whereas, in his administrative activities he is responsible to the top executive officer.

Lesson 1 Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

37

LESSON ROUND UP

•

Cost is the amount of expenditure (actual or notional) incurred on, or attributable to a specified thing or activity.

•

Costing is the techniques and processes of ascertaining costs.

•

Cost accounting is the establishment of budgets, standard costs and actual costs of operations, processes, activities

or products, and the analysis of variances, profitability or the social use of funds.

•

Principles of cost accounting are - cost should be related to its cause; cost should be charged only after it has been

incurred; the convention of prudence should be ignored; abnormal costs should be excluded from cost accounts;

past costs not to be charged to future period; principles of double entry should be applied wherever necessary.

•

Costing is an aid to management, creditors, employers and national economy.

•

Costs have been classified by - time, nature or elements, degree of traceability to the product, association with the

product, changes in activity or volume, function, relationship with accounting period, controllability, cost for analytical

and decision-making purposes, etc.

•

Cost centre means, a production or service location, function, activity or item of equipment whose costs may be

attributed to cost units.

•

Cost unit is a unit of product or service in relation to which costs are ascertained.

•

Techniques of costing includes - historical or conventional costing, standard costing, marginal costing, uniform

costing, direct costing, absorption costing, and activity based costing.

•

Methods of costing covers - job costing, contract costing, batch costing, terminal costing, operation costing, process

costing, unit costing, operating costing, multiple or composite costing, departmental costing, etc.

•

Cost Accounting Standards (CAS) had been issued by the Institute of Cost Accountants of India. Till date 15 CAS

had been released.

•

Management accounting is an integral part of management concerned with identifying, presenting and interpreting

information used for: (a) formulating strategy; (b) planning and controlling activities; (c) decision taking; (d) optimising

the use of resources; (e) disclosure to shareholders and others external to the entity; (f) disclosure to employees; (g)

safeguarding assets.

•

The tools and techniques of management accounting includes - financial planning, financial statement analysis,

marginal costing, differential costing, capital budgeting, cash flow analysis, standard costing and budgetary control,

techniques of linear programming, statistical quality control, investment chart, sales and earning chart, etc.

•

Financial accounting, cost accounting and management accounting are distinct from each other.

SELF TEST QUESTIONS

1. “The term ‘cost’ must be qualified according to its context”. Discuss this statement referring to

important concepts of cost.

2. Distinguish between costing and cost accounting or Costing’ and ‘cost accounting’ are the same.

3. “Financial accounting treats costs very broadly while the cost accounting does this in much greater

detail” Explain this statement and state the limitations of financial accounting.

4. Define costing and discuss the objectives of cost accounting. What are the methods of costing that

are used in cost accounting ?

5. Cost accounting assists: (a) in controlling efficiency; (b) in pricing products; and (c) in providing a

basis for operating policy. Amplify these points, giving reasons for your views.

EP-CMA

38

6. State the advantages that may be derived from a sound system of cost accounting.

7. What do you mean by elements of cost ? Discuss the various elements of cost.

8. Define and explain the terms (a) cost centre and (b) cost unit.

9. You have been asked to design a system of cost accounting for installation in a factory. Describe

the essentials that should be considered before you design such a system.

10. Write note on the following, indicating in which kinds of industries or undertakings, the different

methods could be suitably applied:

(i) Single or output costing

(ii) Process costing

(iii) Operating Costing

11. What methods of costing would you apply in the following industries ? State how cost should be

ascertained in each case ?

(i) Building,

(ii) Colliery,

(iii) Soap works,

(iv) Motor cars,

(v) Radio sets,

(vi) Ship building.

12. State, with reason in brief whether the following statements are true or false :

(i) Cost Accounting is not needed by a non-profit organisation such as a hospital.

(ii) Notional costs and imputed costs mean the same thing.

(iii) Rent on owned building is included in cost accounts (June, 2009).

(iv) Notional costs are not included while ascertaining costs.

(v) Conversion costs and overheads are interchangeable terms.

(vi) The method of costing used in a refinery is “operating costing”. (December,2010)

(vii) Cost reduction is cost control. (December, 2008)

(viii) Cost accounting is a branch of financial accounting. (December, 2008)

(ix) In cost accounting, like financial accounting, absolute accuracy is aimed at.

(x) All materials and stores such as lubricating oil, will be direct.

(xi) Opportunity cost is recorded in the books of account. (December,2010)

[True : (ii), (iii) only].

13. Explain briefly the meaning, nature and scope of management accounting.

14. Discuss the importance and limitations of management accounting for managerial decision-making.

15. Explain the tools and techniques of management accounting.

16. Distinguish between

(a) Cost accounting and management accounting (June,2011)

(b) Management accounting and financial accounting

(c) Bin Card and Store Ledger (June, 2011)

Lesson 1 Introduction to Cost and Management Accounting

39

17. “Management accounting is concerned with accounting information which is useful to management”.

Comment.

18. Explain briefly the role of a management accountant.

19. What are the limitations of management accounting? How can these limitations be eliminated?

20. The costing method in which fixed factory overheads are added to inventory is —

(a) Direct costing

(b) Marginal costing

(c) Absorption costing

(d) Activity based costing

21. Re-write the following sentences after filling-in the blank spaces with appropriate word(s)/figure(s)

(a) A responsibility centre in which a manager is accountable for costs only is called _____________.

(June 2011)

(b) ______________ expenses are excluded from cost. (June 2010)

(c) ____________ costs are not useful for decision making as all past costs are irrelevant.

(December, 2010) (Answer: (a) cost centre (b) notional (c) sunk)

22. Explain the significance of decision-making costs. Briefly explain the various type of costs used by

the management in decision-making. (June, 2011)

EP-CMA

40

Lesson 2

Material Cost

• Inventory Control:

- Objectives

- Technique

• Procurement Procedures and

Documentation

• Methods of Purchasing

• Procedure of Purchases,

• Pricing of Store Receipt

• Store keeping and its functions

• Classification and Codification of

Materials

• Stock Verification

• Methods of Pricing of Material:

- Cost Price Method

- Average Price Method

- Notional Price Method

• Pricing of Material Return

• Accounting of Material Losses:

- Wastage, Scrap, Spoilage and

Defectives

• Control of Material Losses

• Inventory Management:

• Lesson Round Up

• Self Test Questions

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

Material is very important part of the cost of a

product. In some cases, it constitutes 80% of the

total cost of the product. It is very important to have a

effective inventory management system. Good

inventory management is essential since it is

responsible for planning and controlling inventory

from the raw material stage at a company to the

inventory of delivered finished goods.

The objectives of the lesson are to help the user:

1. Learn about inventory management

policies and objectives.

2. Use inventory management tools and

techniques.

3. Review financial analysis of inventory

management.

After going through this lesson, one should be able

to–

1. Understand what is meant by an inventory.

2. Identify some of the advantages and

disadvantages of keeping inventory in an

operation.

3. Understand the basic principles behind the

quantitative approaches to deciding how

much inventory to keep.

4. Describe the limitations of traditional

quantitative models of inventory decision

making.

5. Identify the two main approaches to

managing inventory on an on-going basis.

“Inventory is a very expensive asset that can be replaced with a less expensive asset called ‘information’. In order to do

this, the information must be timely, accurate, reliable, and consistent. When this happens, you carry less inventory,

reduce cost and get products to customers faster.’’ – J.David Viale

LESSON

OUTLINE

EP-CMA

42

INVENTORY CONTROL (MATERIAL CONTROL)

Inventory control is the systematic control and regulation of purchase, storage and usage of materials in such

a way as to maintain an even flow of production and at the same time avoiding excessive investment in

materials. Efficient material control reduces loses and wastages of materials that otherwise pass unnoticed.

Inventory control is the core of materials management. The need and importance of material varies in direct

proportion to the idle time cost of men and machinery and the urgency of requirements. If men and

machinery in the factory could wait and so could customers, materials would not lie in want for then and no

inventories, need be carried. But it is highly uneconomical to keep men and machines waiting and the

requirements of modern life are so urgent that they cannot wait for materials to arrive after the need for them

has arisen. Hence firms must carry materials.

Because materials constitute a significant part of the total production cost of a product and since this cost is

controllable to some extent, proper planning and controlling of inventories are of great importance. Material

control is a planned method of determining what to indent, so that purchasing and storing cost are minimum

without affecting production or sales. Without proper control, materials have a tendency to grow beyond

economic limits. Funds are tied up unnecessarily in surplus stores and stocks, productive operations are

stalled, and finances of the plant are severely strained. Lack of control over material also leads to excessive

consumption and wastage as operatives are liable to become careless with irrational supply of materials.

OBJECTIVES OF INVENTORY CONTROL

Scientific control of materials should serve the following purposes:

(i) To provide continuous flow of required materials, parts and components for efficient and

uninterrupted flow of production.

(ii) To minimise investment in inventories keeping in view operating requirements.

(iii) To provide for efficient store of materials so that inventories are protected from loss by fire and theft

and handling time and cost are kept at a minimum.

(iv) To keep surplus and obsolete items to minimum.

It might seem obvious that inventory control is efficient as long as material level is going down. Materials

should increase or decrease in amount and time as related to sales requirements and production schedules.

Responsibility for control of materials is that of the top management, though decisions in this regard might

well be based upon the combined judgment of the production manager, controller, the sales manager and

the purchasing manager. This is desired in view of the financial considerations involved in the problem and

also because of need for coordinating the different kinds of materials and conflicting view points of different

departments. For example, sales manager, purchasing executive and production manager usually favour,

though for different reasons, the policy of carrying larger amount of stock whereas the financial manager will

prefer to keep investment in material at the lowest possible level. However, in a large number of

organisations material control is generally made the specific responsibility of purchasing department.

TECHNIQUES OF INVENTORY CONTROL

The following are the common techniques of inventory control:

(i) Min-max Plan

Lesson 2

Material Cost

43

(ii) The Two-bin System

(iii) Order Cycling System

(iv) ABC Analysis

(v) Fixation of various levels

(vi) Use of Perpetual Inventory System and Continuous Verifications

(vii) Use of Control Ratios

(viii) Review of Slow and Non-moving Items.

(i) MIN-MAX PLAN

It is one of the oldest methods of material control. Under this plan the analyst lays down a maximum and

minimum for each stock item keeping in view its usage, requirements and margin of safety required to

minimize risks of stock-outs. The minimum level establishes the reorder point and order is placed for that

quantity of material which will bring it to the maximum level.

The method is very simple and based upon the premise that minimum and maximum quantity limits for

different items can fairly be well defined and established. Considerations like economic order quantity and

identification of high value and critical items of stock for special management attention are not cared for

under this plan.

(ii) THE TWO-BIN SYSTEM

The basic procedure used under this system is that for each item of stock, two piles, bundles, or bins are

maintained. The first bin stocks that quantity of material which is sufficient to meet its usage during the period

that elapses between receipt of an order and the placing of the next order. The second bin contains the

safety stock and also the normal amount used from order to delivery date. The moment stock contained in

the first bin is exhausted and the second bin is tapped, a requisition for new supply is prepared and

submitted to the purchasing department. Since no bin-tag (quantity record of materials) card is maintained,

there is absence of perpetual material record under this bin.

(iii) ORDER CYCLING SYSTEM

In the order cycling system, quantities in hand of each item or class of stock is reviewed periodically say, 30,

60 or 90 days. If in the course of a scheduled periodic review it is observed that the stock level of a given

item will not be sufficient till the next scheduled review keeping in view its probable rate of depletion, an order

is placed to replenish its supply. Review period will vary from firm to firm and also among different materials

in the same firm. Critical items of stock usually require a short review cycle. Order for replenishing a given

stock item, is placed to bring it to some desired level which is often expressed in relation to number of day’s

or week’s supply.

The scheduled periodic review plan does not consider differences in rates of usage for different items of

stock with the result that items whose usage has declined will have surplus stock whereas for some items

rate of depletion might have increased to the extent that their stock is exhausted much before the next

review date. Moreover, the system tends to make procurement and purchasing activities reach their peak

around the review dates.

EP-CMA

44

(iv) ABC ANALYSIS

With the numerous parts and materials that enter into each and every industrial product, material control

lends itself, first and foremost, to a problem of analysis. Such analytical approach is popularly known as ABC

analysis (Always Better Control), which is believed to have originated in the `General Electric Company’ of

America. ABC plan is based upon segregation of materials for selection control. It measures the money

value, i.e., cost significance of each material item in relation to total cost and material value. The logic behind

this kind of analysis is that the management should study each item of stock in terms of its usage, lead time,

technical or other problems and its relative money value in the total investment in inventories. Critical, i.e.,

high value items deserve very close attention, and low value items need to be devoted minimum expense

and effort in the task of controlling inventories.

Under ABC analysis, the different items of stock may be ranked in order of their average material investment

or on the basis of their annual rupee usage. The important steps involved in segregating materials or

inventory control are:

(i) Find out future use of each item of stock in terms of physical quantities for the review forecast

period.

(ii) Determine the price per unit for each item.

(iii) Determine the total project cost of each item by multiplying its expected units to be used by the

price per unit of such item.

(iv) Beginning with the item with the highest total cost, arrange different items in order of their total cost

as computed under step (iii) above.

(v) Express the units of each item as a percentage of total costs of all items.

(vi) Compute the total cost of each item as a percentage of total costs of all items.

If it is convenient different items may be classified into only three categories and labelled as A, B, and C

respectively depending upon whether they are high value items, middle value items or low value items. If

need be, percentage of different items may be plotted on a chart. The entire working of ABC analysis may be

explained with the help of the following simplified example:

Example

ABC Analysis

Items Unit % of total Cost per unit Total Cost % of total cost

`

1 400 4 50.00 20,000 25.0

2 600 6 40.00 24,000 30.0

3 1,000 10 14.00 14,000 17.5

4 1,200 12 10.00 12,000 15.0

5 2,800 28 2.00 5,600 7.0

6 4,000 40 1.10 4,400 5.5

10,000 100.0 80,000 100.0

]

A

]

B

]

C

]

A

]

B

]

C

Lesson 2

Material Cost

45

100

55%

A 32.5%

B

12.5%

C

0 10% 22% 68% 100%

Percent of total units

Graphical Presentation of ABC Plan

(v) FIXATION OF VARIOUS LEVELS

Fixation of Norms of Inventory Holdings

Either the top management or by Materials department set the norms for inventories. The top management

usually sets monitory limits for investment in inventories. The materials department has to allocate this

investment to the various items and ensure the smooth operation of the concern. A number of factors enter

into consideration in the determination of stock levels for individual items for the purpose of control and

economy. Some of them are:

1. Lead time for deliveries.

2. The rate of consumption.

3. Requirements of funds.

4. Keeping qualities, deterioration, evaporation etc.

5. Storage cost.

6. Availability of space.

7. Price fluctuations.

8. Insurance cost.

9. Obsolescence price.

10. Seasonal consideration of price and availability.

11. EOQ (Economic Order Quantity), and

12. Government and other statuary restriction

Any decision involving procurement storage and uses of item will have to be based on an overall

appreciation of the influence of the critical ones among them. Material control necessitates the maintenance

of inventory of every item of material as low as possible ensuring at the same time, its availability as and

EP-CMA

46

when required for production. These twin objectives are achieved only by a proper planning of inventory

levels. It the level of inventory is not properly planned, the results may either be overstocking or under

stocking. If a large stock of any item is carried it will unnecessarily lock up a huge amount of working capital

and consequently there is a loss of interest. Further, a higher quantity than what is legitimate would also

result in deterioration. Besides there is also the risk of obsolescence if the end product for which the

inventory is required goes out of fashion. Again, a large stock necessarily involves an increased cost of

carrying such as insurance, rent handling charges. Under stocking which is other extreme, is equally

undesirable as it results in stock outs and the consequent production holds ups. Stoppage of production in

turn, cause idle facility cost. Further, failure to keep up delivery schedules results in the loss of customers

and goodwill. These two extreme can be avoided by a proper fixation of two important inventory level viz, the

maximum level and the minimum level. The fixation of inventory levels is also known as the demand and

supply method of inventory control. Generally the organisation fixes following stock levels:

(a) Maximum Level: This represents the minimum quantity above which stocks should not be held at

any time.

(b) Minimum Level: This represents the minimum quantity of stock that should be held at all times.

(c) Danger Level: Normal issues of stock are usually stopped at this level and made only under

specific instructions.

(d) Ordering Level: It is the level at which indents should be placed for replenishing stocks.

(e) Ordering Quantity: It is the quantity that is ordered.

(a) Maximum Level:

It is normally a matter of policy. The various factors that should be taken into consideration are:

(a) Capital Outlay: Investment to be made in stores, raw materials and other bulk items is an important

consideration.

(b) Available storage space for material.

(c) Storage and insurance cost of material.

(d) If certain goods are subject to obsolescence, the spare parts and components etc. of such products

stocked should be limited.

(e) Consumption of material periodically i.e. monthly, annually.

(f) Lead time for delivery of material.

(g) Certain goods are seasonal in nature and can be purchased only during specific period. Hence

maximum level will be fixed for each season.

(h) Price advantage arising out of bulk purchases should be availed.

(i) The Economic Order Quantity also influences the maximum level.

Maximum stock level can be computed as follows:-

Maximum stock level = Re-order level + Re-ordering quantity –

(Minimum consumption x Minimum re-order period).

Lesson 2

Material Cost

47

(b) Minimum Level

The minimum level is also a matter of policy and is based o :

(a) Consumption of material periodically i.e. monthly, annually.

(b) Lead time for delivery of material.

(c) The production requirement.

(d) The minimum quantity that could be advantageously purchased.

(e) If an item is made to order then no minimum level is necessary.

The minimum stock level can be computed as follows:

(c) Danger or Safety Level

Material consumption varies from day to day, week to week and hence accurate forecasting is not possible.

A safety or reserve stock is kept to avoid stock-out. The desirable safety stock level is that amount which

minimises stock-out costs and also the carrying costs.

This level is a level of stock between the minimum level and nil stock. It is calculated for those items which

can be utilised for multiple orders or products. The store-keeper usually does not issue once the danger level

is reached. Usually priority is given to some order/product for the use of these items. This level is fixed up

specially for control of production so that priority items can be produced.

This level is sometimes fixed above the minimum level. In this case, this level is preventive. If the level is

below the minimum level, this level is corrective.

The safety stock level can be computed as follows:

(d) Ordering Level

The annual consumption of an item and the time lag between ordering and receiving can be collected from

past records. Based on these facts and policies, the ordering level and ordering quantity can be calculated,

as follows:

Ordering level = Minimum level + Consumption during time lag period

OR

Maximum consumption x Maximum re-order period.

OR

Maximum consumption x Lead time + Safety Stock

Safety stock level = Ordering level – (Average rate of consumption ×

××

× Re-order period)

OR

(Maximum rate of consumption - Average rate of consumption) ×

××

× Lead time

Minimum level = Re-order level - (Normal consumption x Normal re-order period).

EP-CMA

48

The ordering level should be fixed so that when an indent is placed at the ordering level, the stock reaches

the minimum level when the replenishment is received. The ordering level is calculated from the following

factors:

(a) The expected usage

(b) The minimum level

(c) The lead time.

The order point is calculated keeping in mind the worst conditions so that minimum stock is always

maintained.

Illustration 1

Materials X and Y are used as follows:

Minimum usage − 50 units each per week

Maximum usage − 150 units each per week

Normal usage − 100 units each per week

Ordering quantities X = 600 units

Y = 1,000 units

Delivery period X = 4 − 6 weeks

Y = 2 − 4 weeks

Calculate for each material (i) Maximum level (ii) Minimum level and (iii) Ordering level.

Solution:

Material X

Ordering level = Maximum usage x Maximum delivery period

= 150 x 6

= 900 units.

Minimum level = Ordering level - (Normal usage x Normal delivery period)

= 900 − (100 x 5)

= 400 units

Maximum level = (Ordering level + Ordering quantity) −

(Minimum usage x Minimum delivery period)

= 900 + 600 − (50 x 4)

= 1,500 − 200

= 1,300 units

Material Y

Ordering Level = Maximum usage x Maximum delivery period

= 150 x 4 = 600 units

Minimum Level = Ordering level − (Normal usage x Normal delivery

period)

= 600 − (100 x 3) = 300 units.

Lesson 2

Material Cost

49

Maximum Level = (Ordinary level + Ordering quantity) - (Minimum usage x Minimum delivery period)

= 600 + 1,000 − (50 x 2)

= 1,600 − 100 = 1,500 units.

Normal delivery period hass been computed as follows:

Material X =

2

64

+

= 5 weeks

Material Y =

2

42

+

= 3 weeks

(e) Ordering Quantity or Economic Ordering Quantity

The basic problems of material control are two viz., what quantity of an item should be ordered at a time and

when should an order be placed. While deciding economic ordering quantity, the efforts are directed to

ascertain the ideal order size. While deciding the ideal order size, factors such as material carrying charges

and the ordering cost associated with the placement of purchase orders are to be considered; the total of

both has to be minimised. The material carrying charges include interest on the capital invested in the stores

of materials, rent for the storage space, salaries and wages of the store-keeping department, any loss due to

pilferage and deterioration, stores insurance charges, stationery, etc. used by the stores, taxes on

inventories, etc. Ordering costs may include rent for the space used by the purchasing department, the

salaries and wages of officers and staff in the purchasing department, the depreciation on the equipment and

furniture used by the department, postage, telegraph charges and telephone bills, the stationery and other

consumables required by the purchasing department, any travelling expenditure incurred, and the costs of

inspection etc., on receipt of material.

The optimum ordering quantity, i.e., the quantity for which the cost of holding plus the cost of purchasing is

the minimum is known as Economic ordering Quantity and is calculated by the following formula:

While deciding the question as to what should be the economic ordering quantity one has to ensure that the

cost incurred should be minimum. An ideal order size, therefore, is at the quantity where the cost is minimum

i.e., cost of holding the stock and ordering cost intersect each other. This is graphically shown hereunder:

E O Q

U P

S

. . .=

×2

Where,

E.O.Q. = Economic Ordering Quantity

U = Annual consumption (units) during the year

P = Cost of placing an order

S = Annual cost of storage of one unit.

EP-CMA

50

Order Quantity (Units)

Illustration 2

Ace Ltd. manufactures a product and the following particulars are collected for the year ended March, 2013:

 Monthly demand (units) 250

 Cost of placing an order (`) 100

 Annual carrying cost (` per unit) 15

 Normal usage (units per week) 50

 Minimum usage (units per week) 25

 Maximum usage (units per week) 75

 Re-order period (weeks) 4–6

You are required to calculate:

(i) Re-order quantity

(ii) Re-order level

(iii) Minimum level

(iv) Maximum level

(v) Average stock level.

Solution:

(i) Re-order Quantity =

S

PU ×2

Lesson 2

Material Cost

51

Where, U = Annual consumption (units) during the year

P = Cost of placing an order

S = Annual carrying cost per unit

=

15

100.Rs600,22

`

××

= 186 units (approx.)

Note: Since normal usage is 50 units per week the annual consumption of the year is = 52 weeks x

50 = 2,600 units.

(ii) Re-order level = Maximum Re-order period or Maximum delivery period x Maximum usage = 6

weeks x 75 = 450 units.

(iii) Minimum level = Re-order level – (Normal usage x Average delivery period or Normal re-order

period)

= 450 units – (50 units x 5 weeks) = 200 units.

(iv) Maximum level = (Re-order level + Re-order quantity) - (Minimum usage x Minimum delivery period

or Minimum re-order period)

= (450 units + 186 units) – (25 units x 4 weeks) = 536 units.

(v) Average stock level = [(Maximum level + Minimum level) ] ÷ 2

2

200536 unitsunits +

= 368 units.

Or Average stock level = Minimum level + 1/2 Reorder quantity

= 200 units + 1/2 x 186 = 293 units.

Illustration 3

A factory requires 1,500 units of an item per month. The cost of each unit is `27. The cost per order is `150

and material carrying charge works out to 20% of the average material. Find out the economic order quantity

(EOQ) and ascertain the number of orders to be placed per year. Would you accept a 2% price discount on a

minimum supply of 1,200 units?

Solution:

When No Discount is Available

Annual requirement 1500 units × 12 = 18,000 units

40.5

000,00,54

27of%20

150000,182

S

PU2

EOQ =

××

=

××

=

`

000,00,10=

= 1000 Units

No. of orders per year = 18000 ÷ 1000 = 18 orders

If discount is given (original price – 2% discount)

Cost price = `27 – 0.54 = ` 26.46

EP-CMA

52

When 2% Price Discount is Available

No of orders to be placed: 18000 ÷ 1200 = 15 orders

Material carrying cost : 20% of ` 26.46 = `5.292

Total cost without discount = ordering cost + carrying cost + purchase price

= 18 x 150 + ½ x 1000 x 5.40 + 18000 x 27

= 2700 + 2700 + 4,86,000

= `4,91,400

Total cost with 2% discount = 15 x 150 + ½ x 1200 x 5.292 + 18000 x 26.46

= 2250 + 3175.20 + 4,76,280

= `4,81,705.20

Since the total cost is less with 2% discount, the proposal may be accepted.

Illustration 4

A company manufacturers 5,000 units of a product per month. The cost of placing an order is `100. The

purchase price of the raw material is ` 10 per kg. The re-order period is 4 to 8 weeks. The consumption of

raw materials varies from 100 kg. to 450 kg. per week. The average weekly consumption being 275 kg. The

carrying cost of inventory is 20% per annum.

Assuming 52 weeks in a year, you are required to calculate —

(i) Re-order quantity;

(ii) Maximum level;

(iii) Minimum level; and

(iv) Average level.

Solution:

(i) Re-order quantity (ROQ) =

AnnumPerUnitPerCostCarrying

Cost OrderingReqAnnual2 ××

Annual Req = Weekly Req × 52 = 275 × 52 = 14,300

Ordering Cost = 100

Carrying Cost = 20% per annum

= 20% × 10

= 2

ROQ =

2

100143002 ××

= 1.196 Kg.

Lesson 2

Material Cost

53

(ii) Reorder Level (ROL) = Maximum Usage × Maximum Reorder Period

Reorder Period = 4 to 8 weeks

Maximum Reorder Period = 8 Weeks

Consumption = 100 Kg. to 450 Kg.

Maximum Consumption = 450 Kg.

Reorder Level = 450 × 8 = 3,600 Kg.

Maximum Level = ROL + ROQ – (Minimum usage × Minimum Reorder Period)

= 3,600 + 1,196 – (100

× 4)

= 4,796 – 400

= 4,396 Kg.

(iii) Minimum Level = ROL – (Normal usage × Normal Reorder Period)

Normal Usage = (Maximum Usage + Minimum Usage)/2

= (450 + 100)/2

= 275

Normal Reorder Period = (Maximum Period + Minimum Period)/2

= (4 + 8)/2

= 6

Minimum Level = 3600 – ( 275 ×6)/2

= 1,950 Kg.

(iv) Average Level = (Maximum Level + Minimum Level)/2

= (4,396 + 1,950)/2

= 3173 Kg.

Or = Minimum Stock Level + ½ of 1,196 = 2,548 Kg.

Illustration 5

Following information is given:

Cost of placing a purchase order ` 20

No. of units to be purchased during the year 5,000 Nos.

Purchase price per unit inclusive of transport cost ` 50

Annual Storage cost per unit ` 5

Details of lead time:

— Average 10 days

— Maximum 15 days

— Minimum 6 days

— For emergency purchase 4 days

Rate of Consumption per day:

— Average 15 days

— Average 20 days

Calculate:

(i) Re-ordering level

(ii) Re-order quantity

EP-CMA

54

(ii) Maximum level

(iv) Minimum level

(v) Danger level

Illustration 6

Pooja Pipes Ltd. uses about 75,000 valves per year and the usage is fairly constant at 6,250 valves per

month. The valve costs Rs. 1.50 per unit when bought in large quantities; and the carrying cost is estimated

to be 20% of average inventory investment on an annual basis. The cost to place an order and process the

delivery is Rs. 18. It takes 45 days to receive delivery from the date of an order and a safety stock of 3,250

valves is desired.

You are required to determine (i) The most economical order quantity and frequency of orders; (ii) the re-

order point; and (iii) the most economical order quantity if the valves cost Rs. 4.50 each instead of Rs. 1.50

each.

Solution:

(i) Economic Order Quantity (EOQ)=

S

PU2 ×

Where -

U = Annual requirement = 75,000 Units

P = Ordinary Cost = ` 18 per order

S = Carrying Cost per unit per annum = 20% of average inventory

=

30.0

18000,752 ××

= 3,000 units

Working Note:

Total Carrying Cost =

100

20`1.5075,000 ××

Carrying Cost per unit = ` 22,500/75,000 = `0.30

Frequency of Orders:

Number of order per year = 75,000/3,000 = 25 orders

Or Orders may be placed in every 14.6 days, i.e. 365/25 = 14.6 days

(ii) Re-order point = (Lead Time × Normal usage) + safety stock

= (1.5 months × 6,250 units per month) + 3,250 units = 12,625 units

(iii) EOQ when the cost per value is `4.50

=

90.0

18000,752 ××

= 1732 units

Total Carrying Cost =

100

204.5075,000 ××

`

= ` 67,500

Carrying Cost per unit = ` 67,500/75,000 = ` 0.90

Lesson 2

Material Cost

55

Illustration 7

XYZ Ltd. are the manufactures of tyre tubes for cars. The following are the details of their operations during

the current financial year:

Ordering cost (per order) ` 100

Inventory carrying cost (per annum) 20%

Cost of tubes (per tube) ` 500

Normal usage (tubes per week) 150

Minimum usage (tubes per week) 50

Maximum usage (tubes per week) 200

Lead time to supply (weeks) 6-8

You are required to calculate:

(i) Economic order quantity. If the supplier is willing to supply quarterly 1,500 units at a discount of 5

per cent, is it worth accepting?

(ii) Re-order level

(iii) Maximum level of stock

(iv) Minimum level of stock

Solution:

(i) EOQ =

C

2AB

=

100Rs.

100Rs.units7.8002 ××

= 124.89 or 125 units

A = 150 tubes per week x 52 weeks = 7,800 units

C = Rs. 500 per tube x 20% = Rs. 100 per unit per year

(b) Statement showing comparative total cost when order is placed on EOQ basis and when it is placed

on quarterly basis, (supplying 1,500 units at 5 per cent discount)

When order is placed on Particulars

EOQ basis 1,500 units

1. Annual requirements (units) 7,800 7,800

2. Order size (in units) 125 1,500

3. No. of orders (1÷2) 62.4 5.2

4. Cost per order ` 100 ` 100

5. Total ordering cost (3×4) ` 6,240 ` 520

6. Cost per unit (tube) ` 500 ` 475

7. Cost of tubes (1×6) ` 39,00,000 ` 37,05,000

8. Average inventory (2/2) units 62.5 750

9. Carrying cost per unit per annum ` 100 ` 95

10. Total carrying cost (8×9) ` 6,250 ` 71,250

11. Total costs (5+7+10) ` 39,12,490 ` 37,76,770

EP-CMA

56

Since total costs are lower when discounts are offered, it is worth accepting to place order of 1,500 units on

quarterly basis.

(ii) Re-order Level

Maximum ordering period (in weeks) x Maximum usage per week = 8 weeks x 200 tubes = 1,600 tubes

(iii) Maximum level of stock

Re-order level + Re-order quantity - (Minimum usage, in week x Minimum lead time in weeks)

= 1,600 tubes + 125 tubes - (50 tubes x 6 weeks) = 1,725 tubes – 300 tubes = 1,425 tubes

(iv) Minimum Level of stock

Re-order level - (Normal usage x Average lead time) = 1,600 tubes – (150 tubes x 7)

= 550 tubes

(vi) Perpetual inventory system and continuous stock verification

The perpetual inventory system is intended as an aid to material control. It is a system of stock control

followed by stores department. The system follows a method of recording stores by which information about

each receipt, issue and current balance of stock is always available.

The Institute of Cost and Management Accountants of England and Wales, defines perpetual inventory as "A

system of records maintained by the controlling department, which reflects the physical movement of stocks

and their current balances."

According to Weldon, "Perpetual inventory system is a method of recordings stores balances after every

receipt and issue, to facilitate regular checking and obviate closing down of work for stock-taking."

Thus, it is a system of ascertaining current balance after recording every receipt and issue of materials

through stock records. An important point which should be kept in mind is that the perpetual inventory is

usually checked by a programme of continuous stock-taking. Perpetual inventory means the system of it

cords whereas continuous stock-taking means the physical checking of those records with actual stocks. '

Perpetual inventory system comprises of:

(a) Comparison of Bin Cards (quantitative perpetual inventory) and Stores Ledger Accounts

(quantitative-cum-valued perpetual inventory),

(b) Continuous Stock-Taking (Physical perpetual inventory)

(a) Comparison of Bind Cards and Stores Ledger Account

Bin card is maintained by the store-keeper and stores ledger account is maintained by stores accountant.

Each item of stores is recorded at these places simultaneously. Normally the balances shown by the two

records tally. However, there may arise some differences between these two records due to the following

reasons:

(i) Omission of an item of store in bin card or stores ledger account.

(ii) Wrong posting of an item of store either in bin card or in stores ledger account.

(iii) Arithmetical error in working out their balances. Therefore, the balances of the two records should

be reconciled at frequent intervals and correct balances should be drawn.

(b) Physical Stock Verification

The perpetual inventory system is not complete without a systematic procedure for physical verification of

Lesson 2

Material Cost

57

stores. The correctness of balances as shown in the bin card or stores ledger account should be verified by

means of physical stock verification. Physical stock verification may be conducted in the following two ways:

(i) Periodic stock verification

(ii) Continuous stock verification

(i) Periodic stock verification: It refers to a system where physical stock verification is normally done

periodically, i.e., once or twice in a year. Under this method, value of stock is determined by

physical counting of the stock on a particular date, usually at the end of the year.

(ii) Continuous stock verification: This system comprises of counting and verifying i number of items at

random daily throughout the year so that all items of stores are verified several times during the

year. Notice of the particular stock to be verified each clay is given to the store-keeper only on the

date of actual verification.

Advantages of Perpetual Inventory System

(i) Easy detection of errors - Errors and frauds can be easily detected at an early date. It helps in

preventing their occurrence.

(ii) Better control over stores- The system exercises better control over all receipts and issues in such a

manner so as to give a complete picture of both quantities and values of stock in hand at all times.

(iii) No interruption of production process- Production process is not interrupted as the physical

verification of stock is made on a planned and regular basis.

(iv) Acts as internal check- Under the system, records are made simultaneously in the bin cards and

stores ledger accounts which acts as a system of internal check for detection of errors as and when

they are committed.

(v) Investment in materials kept under control - The investment in materials is kept at a minimum level

as the actual stock is continuously compared with the maximum level and minimum level.

(vi) Early detection of loss of stock- Loss of stock due to shrinkage, evaporation, accident, fire, theft,

etc. can be easily detected.

(vii) Accurate and up-to-date accounting records- Due to continuous stocktaking, the store-keeper and

stores accountant become more vigilant in their works and they maintain accurate and up-to-date

records.

(viii) Easy to prepare interim accounts- It is possible to prepare periodical profit and loss account and

balance sheet without physical stock-taking being made.

Availability of correct stock data- Correct stock data is readily available for settlement of insurance claims.

Disadvantages of excessive Stock are avoided - The following disadvantages of excessive stock are

avoided:

(a) Loss of interest on capital locked up in stock.

(b) Loss through deterioration.

(c) Risk of obsolescence.

(xi) Employment of specialised staff - Since the work is spread throughout year, whole time specialised

staff can be engaged for the purpose.

(xii) Moral check on employees - The system acts as a moral check on the employees working in the

stores which increases their efficiency.

Such losses increase the cost of production. These losses may be in the form of wastage scrap, defective

and spoilage. The problems of waste, scrap, spoilage or defectives materials must arise in almost all

EP-CMA

58

manufacturing industries. There is no uniformity the meaning and accounting treatment of waste, scrap,

spoilage and defective However, steps should be taken to minimise the discrepancy so that efficiency can

increased and proper material control is ensured.

Bin Card

A bin card is a quantitative record of receipts, issues and closing balances of items of stores. Each item is

accompanied by a separate bin card. The bin card is posted as and when a transaction takes place. Only

after the transaction is recorded, the items are received/issued. On receipt of materials, the quantity is

entered in the bin card from the goods received note in the receipt column and the issues to various

departments in the issue column. The balance quantity is calculated and recorded.

The various levels indicated in a bin card enables the store-keeper to requisition materials as and when

required. Sometimes quantity on order and quantity reserved is also noted separately.

Code No.: Level of Stock

Description: Maximum:

Unit of Quantity: Minimum:

Location Code: Danger:

Ordering:

Ordering Qty:

Date Doc.

No.

Receipts Issues Balance On

Order

Reserved

BIN CARD

Stores Ledger

The store ledger is maintained to record all receipt and issue transactions in respect of materials. The

quantities and the values are entered in the receipts, issues and balance columns. Additional information

regarding quantity on order and quantity reserved may be recorded. Separate sheets for each item or

continuous stores ledger may be maintained. The sheets should be serially numbered to obviate the risk of

removal or loss.

Code No.: Maximum Level: Suppliers’ Name

Description: Minimum Level: 1.

Substitute: Danger Level: 2.

Location Code: Ordering Level: 3.

Ordering Quantity:

Receipts Issues Balance On Order Reserved Date

Doc.

No.

Qty. Rate Value Doc.

No.

Qty. Rate Value Qty. Rate Value P.O.

No.

Qty. G.R.

No.

Qty.

STORES LEDGER

Lesson 2

Material Cost

59

Difference between Bin Card and Stores Ledger

Bin Card Stores Ledger

(a) It is a quantity record (a) It is a record of quantity and value.

(b) It is kept inside the stores (b) It is kept outside the stores.

(c) It is maintained by the store keeper (c) It is maintained by the accounts department

(d) The postings are done before the transactions (d) The postings are done after the transactions

take place take place.

(e) Each transaction is individually posted (e) Transactions may be posted periodically

and in total.

Reconciliation of Bin Card and Stores Ledger

Though there should not be any difference between the balances shown in the Bin Card and Stores Ledger,

differences may arise due to the following reasons:

(a) Arithmetical error in working out the balances.

(b) Posting in the issue column when it should have been posted in the receipts column.

(c) Non-posting of a voucher either in the Bin Card or the Stores Ledger.

(d) Posting in the wrong Bin Card or Stores Ledger sheet.

(e) Material may be issued or received on loan/approval. They may be entered in the Bin Card for the

purpose of record. These transactions do not find a place in Stores Ledger.

The differences should be reconciled at regular intervals.

Continuous Physical Stock Verification

The stores accounts reveal what the balances should be and a physical verification reveals the actual stock

position.

Under this system of verification, the total number of man-days available for verification is calculated. The

items to be verified per man-day is selected by classifying the various items into groups depending upon the

time required. The stock verification staff plan the programme and divide the work among themselves. The

plan is such that all the items are verified in the year. Items of small value may be verified twice or more in a

year. Bulky items are usually verified when stocks are comparatively low.

There is an element of surprise and sometimes the stock verifier knows of the items to be verified only on the

actual date of verification. Stock not recorded should not be mixed up with the stock. After counting or

weighing the results are recorded.

Reasons for Surpluses and Deficiencies in Stock-taking and Accounting thereof

Differences in stock arise occasionally. The difference in the stock verification sheet should be verified with

the bin card balance. There may be differences between the Stores Ledger and the Bin Card. But the Bin

Card reflects the stock in hand and hence no adjustment is needed. The balance in Stores Ledger and Bin

Card should be reconciled first.

A surplus/deficiency should be kept at the minimum. A deficiency may be due to malpractices in stores while

EP-CMA

60

surplus may encourage malpractices. Wherever possible preventive measures should be taken to prevent

their recurrence in future.

The difference may be analysed as follows:

SURPLUS OR DEFICIENCY

Apparent Real

Abnormal Normal

Avoidable Unavoidable

If there is difference between the Bin Card and physical stock, it may be due to clerical mistake in posting

and casting in the Bin Card or due to inaccuracies in measuring standards and conversion ratios used. This

difference is apparent and either the Bin Card has to be corrected or the stocks re-verified.

The first stage of analysis is to distinguish between the differences due to normal and abnormal causes.

Differences are abnormal when they are beyond the control of the stores management and hence written off,

e.g., fire, riot, burglary, etc. If the differences are due to normal causes, the stores management should take

effective steps to prevent them.

Differences due to normal causes may be avoidable or unavoidable. Some of the avoidable causes are:

(i) Incorrect measurement of issues

(ii) Carelessness in material handling

(iii) Improper storage of material

(iv) Pilferage, theft etc.

(v) Stores misplaced

(vi) Errors in stock-taking.

The storekeeper is responsible for all differences arising out of avoidable causes and he should ensure that

adequate steps are taken to reduce and eliminate the differences. Sometimes, even though the store

keeping is efficient, some surplus or deficiency occur. These are called unavoidable. The storekeeper should

be able to foresee the nature, the magnitude of the differences and lay down proper accounting methods.

Some of the unavoidable causes are:

(i) Handling losses arising out of issuing in small units, e.g., starch powder in bags.

(ii) Loss or gains arising out of atmospheric conditions; certain chemicals gain in weight and others lose

weight.

(iii) Gains that arise due to seasoning and preservation of materials when specially processed, e.g.,

wooden and leather items are seasoned in oil.

Lesson 2

Material Cost

61

Accounting of Surpluses and Deficiencies

(i) Apparent differences need no adjustment. Either the Bin Card is corrected or the stocks are re-

verified.

(ii) Differences due to abnormal causes are written off to profit and loss account and do not form part of

manufacturing cost.

(iii) Differences due to avoidable causes should be valued and adjusted through the stores consumption

account and recovered in cost as an item of stores overhead expenses.

(iv) Differences due to unavoidable causes get accounted for as a part of the material cost itself.

Through past observations, the loss or gain percentage is worked out. Whenever material is issued,

adjustment is made by this percentage. Stocks are adjusted in a similar manner. This percentage

should be reviewed and corrected periodically.

Any difference between the anticipated and actual difference is noted on a stores adjustment note and the

difference is transferred to overhead or the Costing Profit and Loss Account or Profit and Loss Account as

the case may be.

(vii) Use of Control ratio

(a) Inventory turnover ratio: It helps management to avoid capital being locked up unnecessarily. This ratio

reveals the efficiency of stock-keeping.

Inventory turnover ratio is given by the formula:

periodtheduringheldstockaverageofCost

consumedmaterialofCost

Cost of average stock =

2

stockclosingofCoststockopeningofCost +

The inventory turnover ratio can be calculated (in days) as follows:

ratioturnoverInventory

periodtheduringDays

This will reveal the number of days for which the stocks are held.

(b) Input-output ratio: It is the ratio of the quantity of input of material to production. This ratio enables

comparison of actual consumption and standard consumption, indicating whether the usage of material is

favorable or adverse.

(viii) Review of slow and non-moving items

The money locked up in inventory is money lost to the business. If more money is locked up, lesser is the

amount available for working capital and the cost of carrying inventory also increases.

Stock turnover ratio should be as high as possible. Loss due to obsolescence should be eliminated or these

items used in some profitable work. Slow moving stocks should be identified and speedily disposed of. The

speed of movement should be increased. The turnover of different items of stock can be analysed to find out

the slow moving stocks.

Materials become useless or obsolete due to changes in product, process, design or method of production,

slow moving stocks have a low turnover ratio. Capital is locked up and cost of carrying have to be incurred.

Hence management should take effective steps to minimise losses

EP-CMA

62

PROCUREMENT PROCEDURES & DOCUMENTATION

Procurement is the purchase of goods and services at the best possible price to meet a purchaser’s demand

in terms of quantity, quality, dimensions and site. It means that the goods/services are appropriate and that

they are procured at the best possible cost in terms of quality and quantity, time, and location. Every

business should define procurement processes intended to promote fair and open competition while

minimizing exposure to fraud and collusion.

Every business/firm has standard procurement procedures for getting goods or services.

These procedures cover all aspects of the procurement cycle, including the selection of the supplier, contract

negotiations, order placement and payment. All firms have procurement procedures and they are used to

control spending activity, ensure appropriate approvals are in place and reduce the risk of overpayment. An

appropriate approval procedure is to limit access to the purchase order forms and require signed

authorization from a competent person. This separation of the goods recipient and the approval is designed

to ensure that a competent person generally senior person is aware of the order and can confirm that the

materials are required for business purpose.

In short we can say procurement procedure includes:

• Planning,

• Standards determination,

• Specifications development,

• Selection of supplier

• Value analysis,

• Funding,

• Price determination,

• Supply contract administration,

• Inventory control and stores, and

• Disposals and other related functions.

PROCUREMENT DOCUMENTATION

Documents which are involved in the procurement are called procurement documents. Procurement

documents serve an important aspect of the organizational element in the project process. It is a kit which is

used in process bidding and submitting project proposals and the facets of work that make up a project. In a

simple way, these are the contractual relationship between the purchaser and the supplier of goods or

services.

The procurement documents will differ according to type of contract which will be executed. Basically

procurement documents include of all documents that serve as invitations to tender, solicit tender offers and

establish the terms and conditions of a contract. Generally these documents may be required for procuring

any good/services, which as are under:

Lesson 2

Material Cost

63

Request for Proposal (RFP): It is an early stage in a procurement process. Purchaser issues an invitation

to supplier for submitting a proposal on a particular goods or service often through a bidding process.

Request for Information (RFI): A request for information (RFI) is a standard business process whose

purpose is to collect written information about the capabilities of various suppliers. Normally it follows a

format that can be used for comparative purposes. It is a proposal requested from a prospective seller or a

service provider to determine what products and services are potentially available in the marketplace to meet

a buyer's needs and to know the capability of a seller in terms of offerings and strengths of the seller.

Request For Quotation (RFQ): A request for quotation (RFQ) is a standard business process whose

purpose is to invite suppliers into a bidding process to bid on specific products or services. RFQ, generally

means the same thing as IFB (Invitation For Bid). An RFQ typically involves more than the price per item.

Information like payment terms, quality level per item or contract length are possible to be requested during

the bidding process. These may serve as a binding contract.

Offers: This type of procurement documents are bids, proposals, and quotes made by potential suppliers to

prospective clients.

Contracts: Contracts refer to the final signed agreements between clients and suppliers.

Amendments/Modifications: This refers to any changes in solicitations, offers and contracts. Amendments/

Modifications have to be in the form of a written document.

METHODS OF PURCHASING

Purchasing is an art. Wrong purchases increase the cost of materials, store equipments and the finished

goods. Hence, it is imperative that purchases should be effectively, efficiently and economically performed.

The methods of purchasing can be broadly classified as centralised and localised purchasing.

Centralized Purchasing

In a large organisation, manufacturing units are many. In such cases centralized purchasing is beneficial.

Centralised purchasing means that all purchases are made by a single purchase department. The

advantages are:

(i) Specialised and expert knowledge is available.

(ii) Advantages arise due to bulk purchases.

(iii) The cost of purchasing can be reduced and selling price can be lowered.

(iv) As there is good knowledge of market conditions, greater control can be exercised.

(v) When materials have to be imported, it is advantageous to centralise the buying.

(vi) Economy and ease in compilation and consultation of results.

(vii) It can take advantage of market changes.

(viii) Investment in inventories can be reduced.

(ix) Other advantages include undivided responsibility, consistent buying policies.

The factors to be considered when decision regarding centralisation has to be taken are geographical

separation of plants, homogeneity of products, type of material bought, location of supplies etc.

EP-CMA

64

Decentralisation of Purchases

In decentralised purchasing, each department or branch makes its own purchases. The advantages of

localised purchasing are:

(i) Each plant may have its own particular need. This can be given special attention.

(ii) Direct contact can be established with suppliers.

(iii) The time lag between indenting and receiving materials can be reduced.

(iv) Technical requirements of each plant can be ascertained.

PURCHASE PROCEDURE

Though different concerns adopt different practices regarding details recorded, forms and records used. The

routine followed for the purchase of materials is usually the same. The steps may be enumerated as follows:

(i) Indenting for materials

(ii) Issuing of tenders and receiving quotations

(iii) Placing of order

(iv) Inspecting stores received

(v) Receiving the stores accepted in inspection

(vi) Checking and passing bills for payment.

Indenting for Materials

The stores department prepares indents for the purchase of materials and sends it to the purchase

department. The indents may be for replenishment of stocks or for a special job. The former are called

regular indents and the latter special indents.

Regular indents are prepared periodically and placed when the ordering level for different items of stocks are

reached. The quantity indented is equal to the ordering quantity fixed for each item. The special indents are

based on the demands received either from the planning or production department. They should be certified

by the department originating it. They are purchased as and when required. Every document is usually linked

with the previous and succeeding transaction to facilitate back references.

Issue of Tenders to Suppliers

The purchase department issue tenders to suppliers or publish them in papers. The suppliers quote their terms

of price and delivery/payment. After the last date for receipt of quotations is over, the tenders are opened and a

comparative statement is prepared. Tenders are prepared in triplicate. Of them, two are sent to the suppliers

and one is retained with the purchase department. The supplier mentions his terms in the original.

While considering the tenders, the reliability of the supplier has to be taken into account. The quality of goods

and time taken to deliver the goods on previous occasions should be checked. The financial stability and

capacity to deliver goods should be ensured.

Sometimes purchases may be made without inviting quotations. The circumstances are when prices are

controlled, or purchases are made under long-term contracts, or catalogue prices are available or when there

is a cost plus contract. If, purchase is made under cost plus profit basis, the cost composition and

reasonableness of price should be checked.

Lesson 2

Material Cost

65

Placing of Purchase Orders

Normally six copies of purchase orders are made. The supplier, stores, inspection department, store

accounting section, purchase department and progress department are sent one copy each.

The purchase order has legal and accounting significance. From legal point of view, it binds both the parties

to the terms of the contract. From accounting point of view, it signifies the amount which has to be spent. It

signifies the stores department to accept the goods and the accounts department to accept the bill.

A.B.C. CO. LTD.

MATERIALS PURCHASE ORDER

Order No.: Indent No.: Store Receipt No.:

Date: Quotation No.: Inspection Note No.:

To

..........................

This is in response to your quotation against our Tender No.:.............................. The terms and conditions

mentioned overleaf will be applicable. Please supply the following items at the prices indicated below:

Sl. No. Description Stores Code

No.

Specification Quantity Unit Price

Terms of Delivery: Please send bill to:

Terms of Payment:

Special Conditions: For A.B.C. Co. Ltd.

SPECIMEN OF PURCHASE ORDER

Inspection

The supplier delivers goods at the place specified. Two delivery challans are prepared by the supplier one of

which is returned. It is a proof of delivery. After receiving the goods, the inspection department or production

department or maintenance department (as the case may be) is intimated.

The quality of materials should be in accordance with the standards. The inspector should examine the

various points to be checked, the standard expected, tolerances allowed and method to be followed. After

inspection, as inspection note has to be prepared in triplicate, one copy is sent to the supplier, one to the

stores and one to the inspection department.

Receiving Stores

The stores department prepares a Stores Receipt Note for the quantity of stock accepted in inspection. After

issuing of the Stores Receipt, the storekeeper is responsible for the stocks. The stores receipt is the

document for the posting of receipts in Bin Card and the Stores Ledger. It is prepared in quadruplicate. The

suppler, stores accounting section and purchase department are sent one copy each and one copy is

retained with the stores. The supplier encloses this copy along with his bill. The stores accounting section

prices the note on the basis of the purchase order.

EP-CMA

66

Checking and Passing of Bills for Payment

Bills received by the purchase department are forwarded to the Stores Accounting Section to check the

authenticity regarding quantity and price and the arithmetical accuracy. Special items included in the bills,

e.g., freight, packing charges are verified with the purchase order. The bill is later passed for payment.

PRICING OF STORES RECEIPTS

Stores have to be valued carefully. All expenses incurred to receive and store the material forms part of the

cost. The purchase price comprises of elements such as cost of raw material/item, sales-tax, cash discount,

freight and delivery charges, etc. It will not be possible to calculate the exact cost as some items of expenses

have low values and there is inconvenience in computing the cost. Generally all the items of cost except the

basic raw material cost is charged to a “Stores Receiving and Handling Charges Account” and recovered as

a percentage of stores consumed.

Items of expenses can be classified as follows:

(a) Sales-tax and Other Taxes: Sales tax is usually a small percentage of the basic value. If it is

added to the cost of material, it increases clerical work and fractional figures may be there. For

convenience it is accumulated under one account and is recovered through the stores receiving and

handling charges account.

Other charges can be excise duty, custom duty, octroi etc.

(b) Cash Discount: It is an inducement/incentive offered by the supplier so that dues can be settled

promptly. As it is a financial decision, it should not be included in costs. The company can take

advantage of the discount provided it is in conformity with the company’s policy. But the discount is

lost if payment is not made in time. Since there is uncertainty regarding the credit, it is better to

account for the discount separately.

(c) Trade and Quantity Discounts: Since it is deducted from the invoice price, there is no difficulty in

accounting.

(d) Joint Purchase Cost: Sometimes, several materials or several grades of materials are purchased.

Different grades may be used for different production orders, if all issues are priced at the same

rate, there will over/under statement of costs.

Hence each grade of material is entered in different Bin Cards, and valued at current prices. The

incidental costs are apportioned to the various grades according to the market price for each.

(e) Extra/Spare Parts: Sometimes spare parts are given by suppliers for which no charges are made.

These should be properly accounted for. As no value is given, it reduces the unit cost of the goods.

(f) Receiving, Loading, Inspection, Storage, Material Accounting Charges: These expenses

cannot be easily allocated to the materials. Hence, it is recovered as an overhead either on the

basis of material consumed or as general overhead. Sometimes allocation rates are determined.

(g) Transport Costs, Freight and Delivery Charges: If materials transported and handled are bulky,

then these costs can be ascertained separately for each item and included in the cost of material. If

it is incurred collectively for many items, it is recovered through the Stores Receiving and Handling

Charges Account. Another method is to pre-determine the transport cost for each material and add

it to the cost of materials purchased. Any difference between the amount allocated and actuals is

adjusted by transferring it to the Costing Profit and Loss Account.

(h) Receiving and Handling Expenses: These are the expenses incurred after materials are delivered

Lesson 2

Material Cost

67

and till they are stored. These expenses are recovered as a percentage of value of stores

consumed through the Stores Receiving and Handling Charges Account. If these expenses are

recovered as a percentage of purchases, we are capitalising the expenses. Part of the expenses

will form part of value of unconsumed stock. But it is not a good accounting practice to carry it over

from period to period. Hence, it is preferable to recover it as a percentage of consumption.

Cost of Containers: There may be following four cases;

(i) Boxes are issued free of cost but sold at a price;

(ii) Their value is included in the invoice price but they are not returnable;

(iii) It is charged separately though the full value is recoverable from the supplier;

(iv) The recoverable value is lesser than the price charged.

If the containers are not returnable, the material is issued at a price which includes this cost. When the empty

containers have a disposal value, the sale price is credited to overhead. Alternatively, it can be deducted

from the invoice price of the container.

Under the third method, the empty containers are returned and entered in the material return notes. The

credit is given to the production order to which it was earlier charged.

If the containers are returnable, the containers are kept as a temporary charge/ loan. There should be entries

to record the receipt/return of the containers. If full credit is not given, the difference should be charged to the

cost of the material.

Provisional Pricing of Receipts

There is a time lag between the date of supplying material and the date of submitting the bill. Pricing cannot

be done unless the bill is presented as the bill gives costs of transport charges, taxes, etc.

But the receipts have to be valued. The price can be ascertained from the purchase order and the past

actuals. Escalation clause, if any, has to be taken into account.

Receipts provisionally priced should be recorded so that adjustments can be made when actual prices are

available.

Illustration 6

One parcel containing two important materials was received by a factory and the invoice pertaining to the

same discloses the following information:

`

Material-I 500 kgs. @ `2.00 per kg. 1,000.00

Material-II 600 kgs. @ `1.60 per kg. 960.00

Insurance 39.20

Sales Tax 98.00

Freight etc. 55.00

Due to mishandling in the factory’s store a loss of 10 units of material-I and 6 units of material-II was noted.

What rate would you adopt, for issuing these vital components to the jobs? Also give your changed rate, if a

provision of 10% is to be kept for probable risk of obsolescence.

EP-CMA

68

Solution:

Material-I kgs. Material-II kgs.

` `

Material Price 1,000 500 960.00 600

Insurance (value) 20 19.20

Sales tax (value) 50 48.00

Freight (weight) 25 30.00

1,095 500 1,057.20 600

(–) Loss due to mishandling

(normal loss) 10 6

Total 1,095 490 1,057.20 594

Rate of issue = `1,095 ÷ 490 = `2.23 (approx.) for material-I.

= `1,057.20 ÷ 594 = `1.78 (approx.) for material-II.

Revised Rate for issue

Material.-I Material-II

(kgs.) (kgs.)

Qty. available for issue 490 594.0

Less: 10% provision for obsolescence 49 59.4

Effective quantity for issue 441 534.6

∴ Revised rate for issue = `1,095 ÷ 441 = `2.48 (approx.) for Material-I

= `1,057.20 ÷ 534.6 = `1.98 (approx.) for Material.-II

Illustration 7

A consignment was received from a foreign supplier, containing four types of material. The invoice reveals

the following :

`

Material A 2,000 kgs. @ `2.00 per kg. 4,000.00

Material B 1,000 kgs. @ `3.00 per kg. 3,000.00

Material C 1,500 kgs. @ `4.00 per kg. 6,000.00

Material D 500 kgs. @ `4.50 per kg. 2,250.00

Freight paid by supplier 1,000.00

Expenses incurred by importer 1,600.00

Duty paid by the importer 610.00

Insurance 152.50

Lesson 2

Material Cost

69

Loss due to breakage was recorded as follows:

Material A - 20 kgs.; Material B - 20 kgs.; Material C - 45 kgs.; and Material D - 10 kgs.

Provision of 10% is made for evaporation and minor losses due to seasonal variations. Calculate the rate at

which these should be issued.

Solution:

Insurance and duty have been apportioned on the basis of value, whereas freight and other expenses have

been apportioned on the basis of weight.

A B C D

`

Units

`

Units

`

Units

`

Units

Material cost 4,000

2,000

3,000

1,000

6,000

1,500

2,250.00

500

Insurance 40

30

60

22.50

Freight 400

200

300

100.00

Expenses paid by

importer

640

320

480

160.00

Duty 160

120

240

90.00

Total 5,240

3,670

7,080

2,622.50

(–) Loss due to

breakage

20

45

10

5,240

1,980

3,670

980

7,080

1,455

2,622.50

490

Rate of issue 2.65

3.74

4.87

5.35

(–) 10% provision

for evaporation

198

98

145.5

49

5,240

1,782

3,670

882

7,080

1,309.5

2,622.50

441

Rate of issue

after providing for

loss

2.94

4.16

5.40

5.95

STORE-KEEPING

Storekeeping is a service function. Storekeeping is the function of receiving materials, storing them and

issuing these to workshops or departments.

The stores department is under the control of a person known as storekeeper. The storekeeper is a

custodian of all the items kept in the store. The stores should be spacious, well lit and well equipped so that

costs can be minimised and service can be provided effectively.

The main objectives of store-keeping are:

(i) To protect stores against losses.

(ii) To keep goods ready for delivery/issue.

(iii) To provide maximum service at minimum cost.

(iv) To avoid over-stocking and under-stocking.

(v) To facilitate perpetual inventory.

EP-CMA

70

FUNCTIONS OF STORE-KEEPING

The function of store-keeping may be summarised as follows :

(a) Receipt of material into storage: Materials should be received unloaded, inspected and then

moved to stores. The storekeeper classifies the materials, stores it in appropriate places and

records the receipts in proper books.

(b) Record keeping: The stores records should be maintained in an efficient and orderly manner so

that materials can be easily located and information can be obtained for various departments.

(c) Storage of materials: The stores should provide maximum protection and safety and accessibility

and utilize minimum space. Suitable storage device should be installed.

(d) Maintaining stores: To keep the stores in the desired condition over a period of time depends on

the nature of the material, length of time in storage, rates of deterioration. Special covering or

periodic lubrication is necessary to prevent damage due to atmospheric conditions.

(e) Issuing stores: This function should be performed most efficiently, promptly and accurately. All

issues should be properly recorded. All issues should be duly authorised and procedures laid down

should be duly followed.

(f) Co-ordination with materials control: The storekeeper is partly responsible for such co-

ordination. Much depends on the type of production, size of the company, the organisation

structure, etc.

(g) Ensure that all transactions are posted in the Bin Card and that the Bin Card is up-to-date.

(h) All items should be in its proper place.

(i) Maintenance of stores at required levels.

(j) Neatness in stores to facilitate physical verification.

(k) Co-ordination and supervision of staff in the stores department.

(l) Periodical review of various scales, measuring instruments, conversion ratios etc.

(m) Protect stores from fire, rust, erosion, dust, theft, weather, heat, cold, moisture and deterioration etc.

CLASSIFICATION AND CODIFICATION OF MATERIALS

For facilitating identification of materials, each item of stores is given a distinct name. Similar items are

divided into sub-groups and a number of sub-groups are classified under major groups. Stores are usually

classified either by nature or usage of stores.

Codification is the procedure for assigning symbols for each item in accordance with a proper plan.

The advantages of codification are:

(i) Lengthy descriptions are replaced by a simple code.

(ii) Hence, it economises space in forms and reduces clerical work.

(iii) Ease in identification of stores.

(iv) It is comprehensive.

(v) It facilitates mechanised accounting.

(vi) Secrecy of description can be maintained.

(vii) It ensures clarity.

Lesson 2

Material Cost

71

ISSUE OF MATERIALS

While issuing materials, the following points should be kept in mind:

(a) Planning of material requirement: All requirements of materials should be thoroughly planned.

The bill of materials gives estimates of different items of stores required.

(b) Requisition of materials: Based on the quantities mentioned in the bill of materials, materials are

requisitioned. Materials should not be issued in excess of standards. If necessary, an additional bill

of materials can be issued by competent authority.

(c) Internal audit of issues: All issues should be audited. Any excess/shortfall in issues should be

explained and accounted for.

(d) Control of wastage: Actual wastage should not exceed the standard wastage fixed. Wastages

should be examined and any variance should be reported.

(e) Issues of sundry items: Certain stores are required in various departments. Either the requirement

can be budgeted or order can be placed strictly on the basis of requirement.

MATERIAL (STORES) REQUISITION NOTE

A material requisition note is a formal written demand or request usually from the production department to

the stores for the supply of specified materials, stores etc. It authorises the stores keeper to issue the

requisitioned materials and record the same in the bin card. It contains information about the description,

code, quantity of material and job or work order for which it is needed. It also contain columns for calculating

the cost of material issues. Generally a material requisition note is prepared in triplicate. One copy is sent to

the stores, one copy to the costing department and the third copy is retained by the department making the

requisition for its future reference. A specimen of material requisition note is given below:

Material Requisition Note

Department_______________________ No.______________________

Job/work order No.________________ Date_____________________

S.No. Description Code No. Quantity Rate ` Amount ` Remarks

Foreman Storekeeper Cost Accountant

BILL OF MATERIALS

A bill of materials is a comprehensive list of materials with specifications, material codes and quantity of each

material required for a particular job, process or service. Substitute materials which may be used when the

original materials are not available also indicated in the bill of materials. It is prepared by the production

planning department or engineering department. It is a method of documenting materials required for

execution of the specified job or work. A bill of materials acts as an authorisation to the stores department in

procuring the materials and all materials listed on the bill are sent to the production department. Generally

four copies of a bill of materials are prepared. One copy is sent to the stores department, one copy to the

purchase department, one copy to the costing department and the fourth copy is retained by the production

planning department for future reference. The following advantages may be derived from a bill of materials:

(a) It serves as an advance intimation to stores department about the raw material requirement.

(b) Suitable action for purchase of materials can be taken on the basis of the bill of materials.

EP-CMA

72

(c) It is a good control measure on materials cost.

(d) It serves the purpose of an indent or purchase requisition upon the purchase officer for the

purchase of materials required for a particular job.

(e) The material cost to be charged to a particular unit, job or process can be easily determined before

hand.

(f) It helps in submission of tenders and quotations.

(g) It also serves as a work order to the production department and a document for computing the cost

of material for a particular job or work order to the cost department.

A specimen of the bill of materials is as follows:

Bill of Materials

Job/work order No.________________ No.______________________

Description of job_________________ Date_____________________

Details of Issue S.No. Description Code No.

Date Rate ` Amount `

Remarks

Prepared by

Checked by Stores department Cost department

Notes:

(i) Details of issues regarding date and quantity will be filled by the stores department.

(ii) Rate and amount columns will be completed by the cost department.

STOCK VERIFICATION

Stock verification is the process of checking/verifying the stock physically held in warehouse in terms of

quantity and quality. It is required to provide an audit of existing stock valuation. It is also the source of stock

discrepancy information. Stock verification may be performed as an intensive annual check or may be done

continuously by means of a cycle count. In short it refers to the process of physically checking the quantities

of different items of material available in stock in a warehouse and tallying these physically available

quantities with the quantities shown in stores stock records.

Depending on timing of physical check of the quantity in stock, different types of stock verification can be

designed. The common types of stock verification systems are as under:

Periodic stock verification: It is done at predetermined periodical intervals, e.g. many businesses do their

stock verification just before the financial year end (i.e. March 31) so that the final accounts of the business

will reflect the accurate position of stocks. In this system all items in the stock is divided in 12 groups and a

particular month is fixed for stock verification of the items in the group. Consequently every item in store gets

verified once a year, in different month. It allows the workload of stock verification to be divided evenly

throughout the year.

Perpetual stock Verification: In this system the stock of every item is verified every time there is an issue

or receipt transaction for the item. This means a much stricter control over physical stock.

Lesson 2

Material Cost

73

METHOD OF PRICING OF MATERIAL ISSUES

When materials are issued to production department, a difficulty arises regarding the price at which materials

issued are to be charged. The same type of material may have been purchased in different lots at different

times at several different prices. This means that actual cost can take on several different values and same

method of pricing the issue of materials must be selected.

There are numerous methods of pricing issues. They may be classified as follows:

I. Cost Price Methods II. Average Price Method III. Notional Price Methods

(a) Specified Price (a) Simple Average (a) Standard Price

(b) First-in First-out (FIFO) (b) Weighted Average (i) Current Standard

(c) Last-in First-out (LIFO) (c) Periodic Simple Average (ii) Basic Standard

(d) Highest-in First-out (HIFO) (d) Moving Simple Average (b) Inflated Price

(e) Base Stock (e) Moving Weighted Average (c) Market Price

(i) Replacement Price

(ii) Realisable Price

I. Cost Price Methods

(a) Specified Price (Identifiable) Method

Sometimes materials are purchased to be utilised in a particular job or issues can be identified with a

particular receipt. In these cases, the actual purchase price can be charged. This method can be adopted

when prices are stable or when the materials are covered by price control orders. This method has limited

application only.

(b) First-in First-out (FIFO) Method

This method is based on the assumption that materials which are purchased first are issued first. It uses the

price of the first batch of materials purchased for all issues until all units from this batch have been issued. In

other words the materials are issued at the oldest cost price listed in the stores ledger account and thus, the

materials in stock are valued at the price of the latest purchases. It should be noted that the assumption of

FIFO is only for accounting purpose i.e. the physical flow of materials need not necessarily be in the order of

the flow of cost, though normally materials would be expected to move out of stock on approximately a FIFO

basis because oldest stocks are usually used up first.

Example

Receipts

20th Oct. 500 kgs. @ 5.00 per kg.

23rd Oct. 250 kgs. @ 5.50 per kg.

Issues

25th Oct. Issue of 600 kgs. will be valued as follows:

500 kgs. @ `5 per kg.

100 kgs. @ `5.50 per kg.

EP-CMA

74

Advantages:

(i) It is a good inventory management system since the oldest units are used first and inventory

consists of the latest stock.

(ii) It is logical.

(iii) It is easy to understand and operate.

(iv) It facilitates inter-firm and intra-firm comparisons.

(v) Valuation of inventory and cost of finished goods is consistent and realistic.

Disadvantages:

(i) The cost of production is not linked to the current prices.

(ii) If prices are rising, production cost is understated. But if stock turnover rate is high, the inventory

will reflect current prices. The effect of current market prices is not revealed in issues when prices

are rising.

(iii) It does not present the true picture when many lots are purchased at different prices. The

calculation become complicated.

(iv) The pricing of material returns is difficult.

(v) High inflation creates problems in replacing used materials, this aspect is not dealt with in FIFO.

(vi) Usually more than one price has to be adopted for a particular issue.

(vii) Cost comparisons between two batches of production becomes difficult when issues are priced

differently.

(c) Last-in First out (LIFO) Method

The principle adopted is that the materials used in production is from the latest purchase. The inventory is

priced at the oldest costs. As the method applies the current cost of materials to the cost of units, it is also

known as the replacement cost method. It is the most significant method in matching cost with revenue in the

income determination procedure.

Example

Assuming the same facts as given under FIFO, the issues will be valued as follows:

250 kgs. @ `5.50 per kg.

350 kgs. @ `5.00 per kg.

Advantages:

(i) It is simple and useful when transaction are few.

(ii) It is a good method of avoiding tax.

(iii) It is a systematic method. It matches current costs with current revenues in a better way.

(iv) It reveals real income in times of rising prices.

(v) It minimises unrealised inventory gains and losses and tends to stabilise reported operation profits

especially when the industry is prone to sharp price fluctuations.

Lesson 2

Material Cost

75

Disadvantages:

(i) When rates of material receipts are highly fluctuating, the method becomes complicated.

(ii) More than one price may have to be adopted for an issue.

(iii) Cost of different batches vary greatly, making inter-firm and intra-firm comparison difficult.

(iv) The stocks require to be adjusted during falling prices.

(v) Unless purchases and sales occur in equal quantities the current costs cannot be easily matched

with current revenue.

(vi) The company can time the purchases to cause high or low costs thus changing reported income at

will.

(vii) Existing profit sharing and bonus can be effected by an accounting change. Employees will have

difficulty in understanding the cause for these changes.

(d) Highest-in First-out (HIFO) Method

The principle adopted is that costliest materials are issued first, Inventory is valued at the lowest possible

price. The method requires detailed records. It is mainly used for monopoly products or cost plus contracts.

When stocks are undervalued, a secret reserve is created.

(e) Base Stock Method

A certain minimum stock of a material is always carried and is priced at the original cost (usually at the

lowest purchase price). The portion of stock above this level is issued and priced under any one of the

methods.

The disadvantages of this method is that the stock may be under valued and hence the computation of return

on capital will not be reliable.

II. Average Price Methods

(a) Simple Average Method

The simple average is the average of prices ignoring the quantities involved. It can be used when the prices

are normally stable and the stocks purchased are in equal quantities or the stock value is small. It is

calculated by dividing the total rates of materials by the number of rates of prices. A new average is worked

out after every receipt.

Example:

Assuming the facts given in FIFO the average will be:

`

2

5.55 +

= `5.25 per kg.

(b) Weighted Average Method

In this method, the total quantities and total costs are taken into account while calculating the average price.

It is calculated after every purchase by adding the quantity received to the stock in hand and the cost of this

purchase to the cost of stock in hand. The total cost is divided by the total quantity to arrive at the value. This

method avoids price fluctuations and reduces the number of calculations and gives an acceptable figure for

stock.

EP-CMA

76

Example

The weighted average will be calculated as follows (with previously given data):

600

1005.55005 ×+×

= `5.083

Advantages:

(i) It is logical and consistent.

(ii) Changes in prices do not affect issues and inventory.

(iii) The values reflect actual costs.

Disadvantages

(i) It involves considerable amount of clerical work.

(ii) When prices change frequently, it is inconvenient and complex.

(iii) As it is not the actual price, it is not realistic.

(c) Periodical Simple Average Method

Some companies may price materials by taking average of the prices of all receipts during a period, e.g., a

month, a week, etc. for the subsequent period. Only those prices - relevant to the period is taken into

account. Purchases made during the period and closing stock are taken into account.

Example

The receipts during the month were at the rates of ` 5, ` 5.50, ` 6 and ` 4.50. The periodic simple average

will be:

PricesofNumberTotal

MaterialsofPricesTotal

=

4

50.4650.55 +++

= ` 5.25

Disadvantages:

(i) Pricing of issues ignores heavy fluctuations in price during the current period.

(ii) it is not an exact cost method.

(iii) It involves heavy clerical work.

(d) Periodic Weighted Average Method

The average price is calculated periodically and not every time the material is received. It is calculated by

dividing the total value of materials purchased during a period by the total quantity purchased.

Example

If the total receipts during a month is 1,000 kg. costing `25,000, the periodic weighted average will be

000,1

000,25`

= ` 25 per kg.

Lesson 2

Material Cost

77

Advantages:

(i) Clerical costs are reduced.

(ii) It is useful in process costing.

(iii) The issue price is not affected by short-term fluctuations.

Disadvantages:

(i) At the end of the accounting period, heavy clerical work is involved.

(ii) Violent fluctuations are ignored till the end of the period.

(iii) Closing stock can be erroneously valued and nil stock may have a residual value.

(e) Moving Simple Average Method

In this method, periodic simple average prices are further averaged. By dividing periodic average prices by

the number of periods taken, the moving average is calculated. The period chosen should cover the period in

which the material is issued.

The value of closing stock may be under valued or over valued. When prices are rising, the issue price

worked out is lower than the periodic average prices for the period concerned and vice versa.

Example

Month Periodic Average Price Moving Average Price

(`

``

`) (`

``

`)

January 2.50

February 2.60 2.60

March 2.70 2.72

April 2.85 2.85

May 3.00 3.03

June 3.25

(f) Moving Weighted Average Method

The material issue price is calculated by dividing the total of the periodic weighted average prices for a

number of periods by the total number of such periods.

III. Notional Price Methods

(a) Standard Price Method

The price of issues for each item is pre-determined for a stated period taking into account all the factors

affecting price, e.g., market trends, transportation costs, etc. Standard prices are determined for each

material. All issues and inventory are kept at the standard price. These should be revised from period to

period.

Standard can be basic or current standard. The basic standard is fixed for long periods and it gives the ideal

price. It assists forward planning. Current standard keeps costs of the products adjusted to prevailing trends

in markets. Basic standard on the other hand, helps to study trends in production costs over a period.

EP-CMA

78

The difference between standard and actual is transferred to the purchase price variance account.

Advantages:

(i) It simplifies accounting as only quantities are recorded.

(ii) As only one rate is adopted, inconsistency is avoided.

(iii) It helps to determine purchase efficiency. If actual cost is more than the standard than there is

unfavourable purchasing efficiency and vice versa.

(iv) It is simple to operate.

(v) It provides stability to the costing system.

Disadvantages:

It does not reflect the actual or expected cost but only a target.

(b) Inflated Price Method

Inflated price includes carrying costs, losses due to evaporation etc. It aims to recover full costs of materials

purchased.

(c) Market Price Method

Materials may be issued at the replacement price. The replacement price is the cost of the same type of

materials in the market at any given time.

Advantages:

(i) It measures results correctly and accurately as current revenues are matched against current costs.

(ii) It differentiates between holding gains and operating gains.

(iii) A realistic and competitive selling price can be determined.

Disadvantages:

(i) In the absence of a market price, replacement price cannot be determined.

(ii) As it is not based on actual cost, they may increase the confusion and complication in accounting.

The replacement price is used in respect of items used in manufacturing whereas the realisable price is used

for items kept in stock.

The realisable price is useful for calculating the issue price of obsolete and slow-moving stores. If issues are

priced at current market price, price reduced due to bulk purchases, are not reflected.

The market price method introduces elements of uncertainty and involves excessive classical labour to

maintain records of latest prices for various items.

Selection of Material Pricing Method

The various method of pricing issues have merits and demerits. The choice of any method depends on many

factors which can be summarised as under :

(i) the frequency of purchases.

(ii) price fluctuations and its range.

Lesson 2

Material Cost

79

(iii) method of stock valuation.

(iv) customs and practices followed in the industry, whether uniform costing system is being followed.

(v) stock turnover rate.

(vi) percentage cost of raw materials to total cost of products.

(vii) economic order quantity.

(vii) effect of pricing method on tax payable.

(ix) the accuracy required and the accuracy which would be obtained.

(x) clerical work involved.

(xi) costing system adopted.

(xii) traceability of issue to purchase lot.

(xiii) frequency of receipts and issues.

(xiv) whether standard costing system is adopted.

(xv) the nature of business.

(xvi) the possibility of using different methods for different classes of items.

In addition to the above, the following factors have to be satisfied:

(i) The purchase cost is covered.

(ii) The issue price reflects the market price,

(iii) There is no significant variation in cost from period to period, and

(iv) The system does not necessitate heavy adjustment at the time of valuing closing stock.

Illustration 8

Following is the information by XYZ company Ltd. Related to first week of December, 2013:

The transactions in connection with the materials are as follows:

Days Receipts Issues

Units Rate per unit ` (units)

1st 40 15.00

2nd 20 16.50

3rd - - 30

4th 50 17.10 -

5th - - 20

6th - - 40

Calculate the cost of materials issued under (i) FIFO METHOD; (ii) LIFO method; and (iii) Weighted average

method of issue of materials nad value of closing stock under the above methods.

EP-CMA

80

Solution:

(i) Cost of materials issued and value of closing stock under FIFO Method

` `

December 3, 2013: issued 30 units @ ` 15 per unit 450

December 5, 2013: issued 10 units @ ` 15 150

issued 10 units @ ` 16.50 165 315

December 6, 2013: issued 10 units @ ` 16.50 165

Issued 30 units @ ` 17.10 513 678

Closing stock: 20 units @ ` 17.10 342

(ii) Cost of materials issued and value of closing stock under LIFO Method:

` `

December 3, 2013: issued 20 units @ `16.50 330

Issued 10 units @ `15.00 150 480

December 5, 2013: issued 20 units @ ` 17.10 342

December 6, 2013: issued 30 units @ ` 17.10 513

Issued 10 units @ ` 15.00 150 663

Closing stock: 20 units @ ` 15.00 300

(iii) Cost of materials issued and value of closing stock under Weighted Average Method

`

December 3, 2013: issued 30 units =

2040

50.16201540

+

×+× ``

i.e. 30 x `15.50

465

December 5, 2013: issued 20 units @ Rs. 16.50

5030

10.175050.1530.,.

+

×+× ``ei

330

December 6, 2013: issued 40 units @ Rs. 16.50 660

Closing stock: 20 units @ Rs. 16.50 330

Illustration 9

From the following you are required to prepare a statement showing the issues made under LIFO method:

Date Opening Balance 100 units at `10 each

1 Received 200 units at `10.50 each

2 Received 300 units at `10.60 each

4 Issued 400 units to Job A vide MR No. 3

6 Issued 120 units to Job B vide MR No. 4

7 Received 400 units at `11 each

10 Issued 200 units to Job C vide MR No. 5

12 Received 300 units at `11.40 each

13 Received 200 units at `11.50 each

15 Issued 400 units to Job D vide MR No. 6

Lesson 2

Material Cost

81

Solution:

STORES LEDGER ACCOUNT

Receipts Issues Balance

Date P.O.

No.

Qty. Rate

(`)

Amount

(`)

Date M.R.

No.

Qty. Rate

(`)

Amount

(`)

Qty. Rate

(`)

Amount

(`)

100

10.00 1,000

1st

200 10.50 2,100 100

10.00 1,000

200

10.50 2,100

2nd

300 10.60 3,180 100

10.00 1,000

200

10.50 2,100

300

10.60 3,180

4th 3 (400)

300

10.60 3,180

100

10.00 1,000

100

10.50 1,050

100

10.50 1,050

6th 4 (120)

100

10.50 1,050

80

10.00 800

20

10.00 200

7th

400 11.00 4,400

80

10.00 800

400

11.00 4,400

10th 5 200

11.00 2,200

80

10.00 800

200

11.00 2,200

12th

300 11.40 3,420

80

10.00 800

200

11.00 2,200

300

11.40 3,420

13th

200 11.50 2,300

80

10.00 800

200

11.00 2,200

300

11.40 3,420

200

11.50 2,300

15th 6 (400)

80

10.00 800

200

11.50 2,300

200

11.00 2,200

200

11.40 2,280

100

11.40 1,140

CLOSING STOCK: 380 Units, Value: `4,140.

EP-CMA

82

Illustration 10

Prepare a statement showing the pricing of issues, on the basis of (a) Simple Average, and (b) Weighted

Average Methods from the following information pertaining to material ‘X’.

Date

1 Purchased 100 units @ `10.00 each.

2 Purchased 200 units @ `10.20 each.

5 Issued 250 units to Job A vide MR No. 1

7 Purchased 300 units @ `10.50 each

10 Purchased 200 units @ `10.80 each

13 Issued 200 units to Job B vide MR No. 2

18 Issued 200 units to Job C vide MR No. 3

20 Purchased 100 units @ `11.00 each.

25 Issued 150 units to Job D vide MR No. 4.

Solution:

SIMPLE AVERAGE METHOD

STORES LEDGER ACCOUNT

Receipts Issues Balance

Date P.O

No.

Qty. Rate

(`)

Amount

(`)

Date M.R

No.

Qty. Rate

(`)

Amount

(`)

Qty. Amount

(`)

1st 100 10.00 1,000 100 1,000

2nd 200 10.20 2,040 300 3,040

5th 1 250

2

201010 .+

2,525 50 515

7th 300 10.50 3,150 350 3,665

10th 200 10.80 2,160 550 5,825

13th 2 200

3

801050102010 ... ++

2,100 350 3,725

18th 3 200

2

80105010 .. +

2,130 150 1,595

20th 100 11.00 1,100 250 2,695

25th 4 150

2

00118010 .. +

1,635 100 1,060

CLOSING STOCK: 100 Units, Value: ` 1,060.

Lesson 2

Material Cost

83

WEIGHTED AVERAGE METHOD

Receipts Issues Balance

Date P.O

No.

Qty. Rate

(

`

)

Amount

(

`

)

Date M.R

No.

Qty. Rate

(

`

)

Amount

(

`

)

Qty. Rate

(

`

)

Amount

(

`

)

1

st

100 10.00 1,000 100 10.00 1,000.00

2

nd

200 10.20 2,040 300 10.13 3,040.00

5th 1 250 10.13 2,533.30 50 10.13 506.70

7

th

300 10.50 3,150 350 10.45 3,656.70

10th 200 10.80 2,160 550 10.58 5,816.70

13

th

2 200 10.58 2,116.00 350 10.58 3,700.70

18th 3 200 10.58 2,116.00 150 10.58 1,584.70

20th 100 1,100 1,100 250 10.74 2,684.70

25th 4 150 10.74 1,611.00 100 10.74 1,073.70

CLOSING STOCK: 100 Units, Value: `1073.70.

Rate =

300

0403,

= `10.13 Rate =

550

708165 .,

= `10.58

Rate =

350

706563 .,

= `10.45 Rate =

250

706842 .,

= `10.74

Illustration 11

The stock of material in hand on 1st April, 2013 was 400 units at `50 per unit. The following receipts and

issues were recorded. Prepare a Stores Ledger Account under ‘Base Stock Method’ both by adopting FIFO

and LIFO Methods, Base stock being 100 units.

Date

2 April Purchased 100 units @ `55 each

6 April Issued 400 units

10 April Purchased 600 units @ `60 each

13 April Issued 500 units

20 April Purchased 500 units @ ` 65 each

25 April Issued 600 units

10 May Purchased 800 units @ `70 each

12 May Issued 500 units

13 May Issued 200 units

15 May Purchased 500 units @ `75 each

12 June Issued 400 units

15 June Purchased 300 units @ `80 each.

EP-CMA

84

Solution:

Base Stock with FIFO and LIFO Stores Ledger Account No......... Maximum No...............

Material.......................................... Bin No.......................................... Minimum No..................

Code.............................................. Location........................................ Base Stock = 100 units

Type and size............................... Folio.............................................

Receipts Issues Balance

Date

P.O.

No.

Qty.

Rate

(

`

)

Amt.

(

`

)

Date

M.R.

No.

Quantity

FIFO

Rate

(

`

)

LIFO

Rate

(

`

)

FIFO

Amt. (

`

)

LIFO

Amt. (

`

)

Quantity

FIFO

Rate

(

`

)

LIFO

Rate

(

`

)

FIFO

Amt. (

`

)

LIFO

Amt. (

`

)

1st

Apr.

Bal.

B/d

400

50 50 20,000

20,000

2nd

Apr.

- 100

55

5,500

400

50 50 20,000

20,000

100

55 55 5,500

5,500

6th

Apr.

- 400

300

50 50 15,000

15,000

100

50 50 5,000

5,000

100

55 55 5,500

5,500

10th

Apr.

- 600

60

36,000

100

50 50 5,000

5,000

600

60 60 36,000

36,000

13th

Apr.

- 500

60 60 30,000

30,000

100

50 50 5,000

5,000

100

60 60 6,000

6,000

20th

Apr.

- 500

65

32,500

100 100

50 50 5,000

5,000

100 500

60 65 6,000

32,500

500 100

65 60 32,500

6,000

25th

Apr.

- 600

500

65 65 32,500

32,500

100

50 50 5,000

5,000

100

60 60 6,000

6,000

10th

May

- 800

70

56,000

100

50 50 5,000

5,000

800

70 70 56,000

56,000

Lesson 2

Material Cost

85

12th

May

- 500

70 70 35,000

35,000

100

50 50 5,000

5,000

300

70 70 21,000

21,000

13th

May

- 200

70 70 14,000

14,000

100

50 50 5,000

5,000

100

70 70 7,000

7,000

15th

May

- 500

75

37,500

100 100

50 50 5,000

5,000

100 500

70 75 7,000

37,500

500 100

75 70 37,500

7,000

12th

June

- 400

100

70 75 7,000

30,000

100 100

50 50 5,000

5,000

300

75 22,500

200 100

75 75 15,000

7,500

100

70

7,000

15th

June

- 300

80

24,000

100 100

50 50 5,000

5,000

200 300

75 80 15,000

24,000

300 100

80 75 24,000

7,500

100

70

7,000

Base Stock: Closing Stock of Material (FIFO) 600 units = `44,000

(LIFO) 600 units = `43,500

Illustration 12

Prepare Stores Ledger Account showing pricing of material issues on Replacement Price basis, from the

following particulars:

Opening Balance 400 units @ `4 each.

10th March Received 100 units @ `4.10 each.

15th March Issued 300 units to job XY vide M.R. No. 1

17th March Received 200 units @ `4.30 each.

20th March Issued 250 units to job AB vide M.R. No. 2.

25th March Received 400 units @ `4.50 each.

26th March Issued 200 units to job JK vide M.R. No. 3.

27th March Received 100 units @ `4.60 each.

30th March Issued 300 units to job PQ vide M.R. No. 4.

Replacement price on various dates: 15th March `4.20; 20th March `4.40; 26th March `4.60 and 30th March

`4.80.

EP-CMA

86

Solution:

STORES LEDGER ACCOUNT

Material.......................................... Bin No...................................... Folio..............................

Size................................................ Code......................................... Maximum No................

Location......................................... Minimum No.................

Receipts Issues Balance

Date P.R.

No.

Qty. Rate

(`)

Amt.

(`)

Date P.R.

No.

Qty. Rate

(`)

Amt.

(`)

Qty. Amt.

(`)

1st

Mar.

400 1,600

10th

Mar.

- 100 4.10 410 - - - - - 500 2,010

- - - - - 15th

Mar.

1 300 4.20 1,260 200 750

17th

Mar.

- 200 4.30 860 - - - - - 400 1,610

- - - - - 20th

Mar.

2 250 4.40 1,100 150 510

25th

Mar.

- 400 4.50 1,800 - - - - - 550 2,310

- - - - - 26th

Mar.

3 200 4.60 920 350 1,390

27th

Mar.

- 100 4.60 460 - - - - - 450 1,850

- - - - - 30th

Mar.

4 300 4.80 1,440 150 410

Closing Stock: 150 Units; Value ` 410.

Illustration 13

Stocks are issued at standard price and the following transactions occurred in a specific material:

Date

April

2013

1 Stock 10 tons at `240 per ton

4 Purchased 5 tons at `260 per ton

5 Issued 3 tons

Lesson 2

Material Cost

87

12 Issued 4 tons

13 Purchased 3 tons at `250 per ton

19 Issued 4 tons

26 Issued 3 tons

30 Purchased 4 tons at `280 per ton

30 Issued 3 tons

The debit balance of price variation on 1st April 2013 was `20. Show the stock account for the material for

the month of April indicating how would you deal with the difference in material price variance, while

preparing the Profit and Loss Account for the month.

Solution:

Calculation of Standard Price

`

Value of Opening stock = 10 x `240 2,400

Add: Price variance, not yet transferred to Costing P & L A/c 20

Total value of 10 tons 2,420

∴ Standard price for issue per ton = `242

STORE LEDGER ACCOUNT

Material.......................................... Bin No.............................. Maximum No................................

Code.............................................. Location............................ Minimum No.................................

Type and size............................... Folio.................................

Receipts Issues Balance

Date P.O.

No.

Qty. Rate

(

`

)

Amount

(

`

)

Date M.R.O.

No.

Qty. Rate

(

`

)

Amount

(

`

)

Qty. Amount

(

`

)

1st

Apr.

Bal. - - - - - - - - 10

tons

2,400

4th

Apr.

- 5 tons 260 1,300 - - - - - 15

tons

3,700

- - - - - 5th

Apr.

- 3 tons 242 726 12

tons

2,974

- - - - - 12th

Apr.

- 4 tons 242 968 8 tons 2,006

13th

Apr.

- 3 tons 250 750 - - - - - 11

tons

2,756

- - - - - 19th

Apr.

- 4 tons 242 968 7 tons 1,788

EP-CMA

88

- - - - - 26th

Apr.

- 3 tons 242 726 4 tons 1,062

30th

Apr.

- 4 tons 280 1,120 - - - - - 8 tons 2,182

- - - - - 30th

Apr.

- 3 tons 242 726 5 tons 1,456

12 3,170 17 4,114

Note: As the issues are priced at standard rate of `242 per ton the difference on account of this policy,

between actual and standard value of closing stock, would be transferred to Costing Profit and Loss Account

and would be debited to Material Price Variance.

Closing stock - Standard 5 tons @ `242 = `1,210

Actual 5 tons = `1,456

∴ Difference (Adverse) = ` 246

Material Control A/c Dr. 4,114

Material Price Variance A/c Dr. 246

To Cost Ledger A/c 4,360

Illustration 14

Using the following data, compute (i) Closing Inventory and (ii) Cost of sales under ‘current purchasing

power’ (CPP) method assuming that the firm is following LIFO method of inventory valuation:

Inventory as on 1/04/2013: ` 2,40,000

Purchases during 2013: ` 14,40,000

Inventory as on 31/03/2014: ` 3,60,000

Price index as on 01/04/2013: 100

Price index as on 31/03/2014: 130

Average price Index for 2013: 120

Solution:

The converted amount of closing stock under CPP considering LIFO method :

Value of Closing Stock = `3,60,000

Out of the above, `2,40,000 is deemed to be from the opening stock and the balance `1,20,000 from the

current purchases since LIFO method is being followed.

Relevant conversion factor for `2,40,000

= `2,40,000 x 130/100 = `3,12,000

The conversion factor for the balance `1,20,000

= `1,20,000 x 130/120=`1,30,000

Lesson 2

Material Cost

89

Value of closing Stock under CPP = `3,12,000 + `1,30,000 = `4,42,000

Calculation of Cost of Sales under CPP when LIFO method of inventory valuation is used:

Historical Conversion Converted

Cost Basis Factor Amount

` `

Inventory as on 01/04/2013 2,40,000 130/100 3,12,000

Add: Purchases 14,40,000 130/120 15,60,000

Total 16,80,000 18,72,000

Less: Closing Inventory as

calculated above 3,60,000 4,42,000

13,20,000 14,30,000

PRICING OF MATERIAL RETURNS

Some materials issued to a job may be left over. These should be returned to the stores. A Material Return

Note is prepared in triplicate. The jobs should be charged correctly and materials should not be lying around.

Hence, these notes are prepared.

The rate adopted depends upon the nature of material returned. If the material is unused, it should be

returned at the price originally charged and if the price is not available, then at the latest issue price. If the

material is scrap/cut pieces, then the price will be related to the utility value of the material. If the firm is

following the average price method, the return should be recorded at the original price but a new price has to

be calculated for further issues.

MATERIAL TRANSFER NOTE

Surplus material drawn against one job can be used in another instead of transferring it to the stores. These

transfers are recorded in Material Transfer Note to charge individual jobs correctly.

The material transferred is, no doubt, in its original condition. Hence, it should be valued at the original issue

price. If the price is not available, then it is priced at the latest issue price.

PQR CO. LTD.

MATERIAL TRANSFER NOTE

From S.No.:

Cost Centre: Date:

To

Cost Centre:

Transfer from Job No.:_______________ to Job No._________________

Stores Code

No.

Description Unit Qty. Rate Value Remarks

_____________ ______________ _______________

Sent by Received by Store Accountant

EP-CMA

90

SPECIMEN OF MATERIAL TRANSFER NOTE

ACCOUNTING OF MATERIAL LOSSES

Losses of materials may arise during handling, storage or during process of manufacture. Such losses may

be classified into two categories, i.e. normal loss and abnormal loss. Normal loss is that loss which has

necessarily incurred and thus is unavoidable. Examples:

− Loss by evaporation

− Loss due to loading and unloading

− Loss due to breaking the bulk, etc.

Normal losses of material cannot be completely avoided but may be controlled to a limited extent.

Abnormal loss is that loss which arises due to inefficiency in operations, mischief, carelessness, etc.

Examples –

− Theft or pilferage

− Breakage

− Fire, accident, flood, etc.

− Use of inaccurate instruments

− Improper storage, etc.

Accounting Treatment

As a principle, all normal losses which are necessarily incurred are treated as a part of the cost and

abnormal losses should not be included in the cost. In order to absorb normal material losses in cost, the

rates of usable units are inflated so that such losses are absorbed. Alternatively, normal material loss is

transferred to factory overhead. However abnormal loss of material are charged to Costing Profit and Loss

account.

Materials losses may arise in the form of waste, scrap, spoilage or defectives.

Waste

Waste comprises of invisible loss, visible loss that cannot be collected and also the unsaleable portion of the

collected loss. Waste is excluded from output quantity. Examples of waste are smoke, dust, gases, slag, etc.

In certain cases, the waste involves further costs of disposing it, e.g., cost incurred for disposal of effluent,

obnoxious gases etc.

Accounting Treatment

Standards are established for waste. Actual wastage is recorded and variation from standards are reported.

(i) Normal Waste: This is unavoidable and uncontrollable and treated as part of the product cost. The

wastage cost is borne by the good units.

(ii) Abnormal Waste: It is valued as if the output is good. This cost is transferred to the Costing Profit and

Loss Account.

Sometimes a demand may arise for the waste, e.g., it may be used as a substitute raw material. The selling

price has to be suitably fixed on the basis of the market value of the raw material substituted.

Lesson 2

Material Cost

91

Scrap

Scrap represents the unusable loss which can be sold. It is a residue which is measurable and has a minor

value. It may result from the processing of materials, obsolete stock or defective parts. The sale value is

credited to the concerned department which produced it. If the value is negligible, it is credited to the Costing

Profit and Loss Account.

Scrap may arise in the form of turnings, boring’s, filings etc. from metal; sawdust in timber industry, off-cuts

and cut pieces in leather industry.

A committee may be constituted which classifies the various types of scrap, calculates their value and

quantity and also determine the method of use/disposal.

Accounting Treatment

(i) Where the scrap has negligible value, it is charged to good units. Income is credited to other

income.

(ii) The sale value can be reduced from the material cost.

(iii) If the scrap has very little value, only a quantity record need be kept.

(iv) The cost is calculated by reducing the sale price by the selling cost and this sum is taken as a credit

to the production overhead account.

(v) Scrap arising in one job may be used in another. Such transfers should be properly recorded on

material transfer notes.

The actual quantity of scrap is compared with the standard quantity. Excess scrap is investigated so that

corrective action can be taken. At the designing stage, such a type, form and shape of material are chosen

which will minimise the waste/scrap. Best equipments should be used and personnel should be properly

trained.

Spoilage

Spoilage are those materials or components which are so damaged in the manufacturing process that they

cannot be repaired or reconditioned. Some spoilage may be sold as seconds. If they are badly spoiled they

can be sold as waste or scrap. Spoiled units do not attain the quality required and it is not economic to

correct them.

Spoilage occurs due to some defect in operations or materials. Sometimes the entire production in a batch

may have to be rejected or a part of it may be rejected.

Accounting Treatment

(i) Loss due to spoilage can be debited to the job/product/process in which it occurred.

(ii) It may be charged to factory overheads so that the loss is borne by all products.

(iii) Abnormal loss which is unexpected but controllable should be transferred to the Costing Profit and

Loss Account.

If spoilage occurs on a specific job/special order, it is charged to that job itself. Sometimes loss is prorated on

the basis of percentage of scrap anticipated from each job.

The method of apportionment of spoilage between normal and abnormal is explained below:

Total input 5,000 units

EP-CMA

92

Normal spoilage 5% of input

Total spoiled units 550 units

Total Cost `10,000

Sale value of spoilage `0.50 per unit

Standard output Input less 5% of Spoilage

4,750 units

Cost of abnormal spoilage

7504

300525000010

,

).(,

×

−

300

7504

12500010

×

−

,

7504

3008759

,

×

= `623.68

Net cost of abnormal spoilage `623.68 – (300 x 0.50) = `473.68

The cost of abnormal spoilage is charged to Costing Profit and Loss Account and sale value is credited to

Costing Profit and Loss Account.

The cost of normal spoilage is charged as product cost.

Units Cost of production =

5500005

6862312500010

−

,

.,.Rs

=

4504

322519

,

.,.Rs

= `2.0789

Defectives

Defectives are that portion of the process loss which can be converted into a finished product by incurring

more material and labour expenses. The additional expenses are added to the cost of manufacture and the

rectified units to total units. Imperfections may arise because of sub-standard materials, bad workmanship,

inadequate inspection, lack of plans, etc. It should be ensured that the benefit resulting from rectification is

more than the cost incurred on rectifications.

Rectification of defective units may be done by the department in which it was produced. In larger concerns a

separate Department may be set up for this purpose.

Accounting Treatment

(i) Defectives inherent in the manufacturing process are classified as normal and treated in the

following manner:

(a) The loss is charged to good products.

(b) The additional cost of rectification is charged to factory overheads and apportioned to various

goods as part of the factory overhead.

(c) If a particular department is responsible for the additional cost of rectification, it can be charged

to that department.

Lesson 2

Material Cost

93

(ii) If the defective units can be traced to a specific job/order, the additional costs can be charged to

that job/order.

(iii) If the defectives are abnormal and due to uncontrollable factors, the additional costs are charged to

Costing Profit and Loss Account.

In many concerns, inefficient and bad workmanship results in defective units. To minimise defective work,

suitable financial and non-financial incentives based on the quantity or percentage reduction in defective

work should be provided.

CONTROL OF MATERIAL LOSSES

While designing a control system, controllable and uncontrollable losses should be distinguished. The

system should determine standard levels which can be attained. Losses may be uncontrollable in the short-

term but controllable over a period of time. Moreover, it takes time to control a new process. The various

levels should be frequently reviewed. Losses can be minimised by proper storage, proper handling,

maintenance of suitable inventory levels etc.

A control system should calculate and report production and data regarding waste, scrap, spoilage and

defectives should be regularly collected. Periodic reports help to evaluate performance and also in taking

corrective action. Standards should be set. Variances of actuals from standards should be examined so that

it can be effectively controlled.

The control of losses can be exercised at three levels:

(i) Occurrence

(ii) Recovery, handling and storage

(iii) Disposal.

Control Over Occurrence

Losses are incurred due to nature of the product, quality control, method of production etc. The causes may

be summarized as follows:

(a) Labour-related causes: Lack of training errors committed by machine operator, inadequate

supervision, damage caused by handling carelessness, fatigue etc.

(b) Causes related to manufacturing method: Defective equipments, pitfall in design, machine jams,

trials and adjustments, overloading and excessive utilisation of resources, problems associated with

new products, standards set etc.

(c) Materials related causes: Defective materials, obsolescence, evaporation, deterioration.

(d) Others: Strict inspection, thefts, etc.

Control Over Recovery Handling and Storage

As soon as stores are received they should be handled and stored properly. Different types of losses should

be identified at different stages of production. Items to be rectified should be identified. Good handling and

proper storage protect goods from damage, theft and misappropriation.

Control over Disposal

To maximise the sales value of waste, scrap, spoilage etc. the following points are to be considered :

(i) make the goods ready for sale

EP-CMA

94

(ii) select the best buyer

(iii) control the quantities of losses.

Bids may be obtained and prices obtained should be comparable with market prices.

Physical control should be exercised over the quantities of scrap, spoilage leaving the factory and the

quantities produced, repaired and sold must be continuously reviewed.

Illustration 15

2,000 kgs. of Art Board valued at `8,000 were issued for the manufacture of medium sized cartons. The

following details were collected:

(a) 2,400 Nos. medium sized cartons weighing 0.50 kg. each were manufactured.

(b) 480 kg. of offcuts were used for the manufacture of small sized carton. This would have amounted

to `1,000.

(c) 320 medium sized cartons were damaged and rectification costs came up to `160.

(d) 120 kg. of offcuts were sold as scrap for `20.

You are required to calculate the cost of one medium sized carton assuming that there are no opening or

closing stocks.

Solution:

Quantity Value

(Kgs.) (

`

)

Input 2,000 8,000

Less: offcuts transferred to small size cartons 480 1,000

1,520 7,000

Less: value of scrap sold 120 20

1,400 6,980

Add: cost of rectification ____ 160

1,400 7,140

Less: waste in process 40

Cost of 2,720 medium sized cartons 1,360 7,140

Cost per carton =

720,2

140,7

`

= `2.62

Notes:

(1) Calculation of waste in process : Each carton weighs 0.5 kg. Total medium sized cartons produced

are 2,720. This means that quantity should be 2,720 x 1/2 = 1,360 Kgs. The balance quantity is

presumed to be normal waste in process.

(2) The waste in one process may be used in another. The credit given to the process where loss

occurs depends upon the utility value of this material for the process in which it is used, i.e., the

value if it is directly purchased from the market.

Lesson 2

Material Cost

95

Illustration 16

A company draws up the standard cost of a product as follows:

` ` `

Direct Materials 12

Direct Wages:

Dept. A 3 hours 15

Dept. B 2 hours 12

Dept. C 5 hours 20 47

Factory Overhead:

Dept. A 18

Dept. B 18

Dept. C 40 76

Factory Cost 135

Administration Cost 12

Selling Cost 15

Distribution cost 18

Total 180

Net Profit 20

Selling Price 200

Factory overhead is absorbed by means of departmental hour rates. Analysis of these overheads reveal that

in each department a rate of `2 per hour is required to absorb the variable portion, the balance being of a

fixed nature. As a general rule, all production is of first class quality.

After a batch of 1,000 units has been processed through all three departments, inspection reveals that half

are faulty. The faulty products can be rectified by completely re-processing through departments B and C.

Alternatively, they can be sold for `20 each.

Present figures which indicate to management the most economic method of dealing with the faulty products.

Solution:

Time taken for original processing and rectification:

Dept. A 3 x 1,000 = 3,000 hrs.

B 2 x 1,000 + 2 x 500 = 3,000 hrs.

C 5 x 1,000 + 5 x 500 = 7,500 hrs.

Fixed Cost

Dept. A `18 - (`2 x 3 hrs) = `12 per unit

B `18 - (`2 x 2 hrs) = `14 per unit

C `40 - (`2 x 5 hrs) = `30 per unit

Alternative 1

Cost of production (includes reprocessing cost) `

Direct material 1,000 x `12 12,000

Wages and factory overhead:

EP-CMA

96

Dept. A 3,000 x ` (5+2) + 1,000 x `12 33,000

B 3,000 x ` (6+2) + 1,500 x `14 45,000

C 7,500 x ` (4+2) + 1,500 x `30 90,000

1,80,000

Administrative, selling and distribution overhead for 1,000 units 45,000

Loss on non-recovery of 500 units re-processed 22,500 67,500

Total Cost 2,47,500

Sales 1,000 @ `200 each 2,00,000

Loss 47,500

Alternative 2

Cost of production of 1,000 units of which 500 units are disposed off:

Sales 500 x 200 + 500 x 120 `1,60,000

Cost 1,000 x 180 `1,80,000

Loss ` 20,000

The second alternative is better as the loss involved is less.

INVENTORY MANAGEMENT

First of all we should know the meaning of inventory. Inventory is an idle stock of physical goods that contain

economic value which are held in various forms by an organization in its custody awaiting packing,

processing, transformation, use or sale in a future point of time. Any organization which is into production,

trading, sale and service of a product will necessarily hold stock of various physical resources to aid in future

consumption and sale. The organizations hold inventories for various reasons, e.g. speculative purposes,

functional purposes, physical necessities etc.

Inventory of materials occurs at various stages and departments of an organization. A manufacturing

organization holds inventory of raw materials and inventory of semi-finished goods at various stages in the

plant with various departments. Finished goods inventory is held at plant, FG Stores, distribution centers etc.

Organizations also hold inventories of spare parts to service the products. Defective products, defective parts

and scrap is also a part of inventory.

Inventory management is the process of efficiently supervision the constant flow of units into and out of an

existing inventory. This process usually involves controlling the transfer in of units in order to prevent the

inventory from becoming too high, or too low that could put the operation of the company into difficulty.

Competent inventory management also seeks to control the costs associated with the inventory.

Inventory management plays a significant role in determining the:

• What should purchase

• How much should purchase

• Where from should purchase

• Where should store

Lesson 2

Material Cost

97

Objective of Inventory Management

• To ensure timely delivery of inventory for production

• To avoid over or under level of stock

• To maintain investment in inventories at optimum level

• To minimize the loss in inventory control

In addition to maintaining control of the volume and movement of various inventories, inventory management

also makes it possible to prepare accurate records that are used for accessing any taxes due on each

inventory type. Without precise data regarding unit volumes within each phase of the overall operation, the

company cannot accurately calculate the tax amounts. This could lead to underpaying the taxes due and

possibly incurring stiff penalties in the event of an independent audit.

LESSON ROUND UP

•

The materials are of two types, namely:

(i) direct materials, and (ii) indirect materials.

•

The methods of purchasing can be classified as centralised and localised purchasing, centralised purchasing

means that all purchases are made by a single purchase department while in localized purchasing each

department or branch makes its own purchases.

•

The routine followed for the purchase of materials may involve: indenting for materials, issuing of tenders and

receiving quotations, placing of order, inspecting stores received, receiving the stores, and checking and

passing bills for payment.

•

Storekeeping is the function of receiving materials, storing them and issuing these to workshops or

departments.

•

Inventory control is the systematic control and regulation of purchase, storage and usage of materials in such

a way as to maintain an even flow of production and at the same time avoiding excessive investment in

inventories.

•

ABC analysis is a value based system of material control, in which materials are analysed according to their

value so that costly and more valuable materials are given greater attention and care.

•

Economic Ordering Quantity (EOQ) is that size of the order which gives maximum economy in purchasing

any material and ultimately contributes towards maintaining the material at the optimum level and at minimum

cost.

•

Perpetual inventory system is a method of recording stores balances after each receipt and issue to facilitate

regular checking and obviate closing down for stock taking.

•

Materials are issued to production department on cost price, average price or notional price methods.

•

Losses of materials may be either normal loss or abnormal loss.

•

Materials losses may arise in the form of waste, scrap, spoilage or defectives.

SELF TEST QUESTIONS

1. Define inventory control. Why is inventory control necessary?

2. Distinguish between direct material and indirect material.

3. What are the requisites of a good inventory control system?

EP-CMA

98

4. What are the different methods of controlling inventory ?

5. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of centralised purchasing of raw materials.

6. Explain what is ‘minimum level’, ‘maximum level’, ‘ordering level’, quantity. How are they determined?

7. Explain ABC analysis. What are its merits ?

8. Perpetual inventory is a method of maintaining records, whereas continuous stock taking involves

physical checking of those records with actual stock. Comment.

9. Re-write the following sentences after filling-in the blank spaces with appropriate word(s)/figure(s) :

(a) Quantitative records of receipts, issue and balance items of material in stores are entered in

___________ .(June-2012)

(b) Two important opposing factors in fixing the economic order quantity are __________ and

Carrying Cost.(June-2012)

(c) The process of physical verification of stores throughout the year is known

as_______________.

(d) The three categories of inventory for a manufacturer are raw material, work-in-process and

__________.(December-2010)

(e) A system that keeps a running and continuous record that tracks inventories and cost of goods

sold on day-to-day basis is called ___________.

[bin-card, Ordering cost, Perpetual Inventory system, finished goods, Perpetual Inventory system]

10. Define and explain the following terms and the treatment given in Cost Accounts:

(a) Waste

(b) Scrap

(c) Spoilage

(d) Defectives.

11. Write the most appropriate answer from the given options in respect of the following :

The annual demand is 1,000 units. The unit price is ` 10 per unit.

The carrying cost of inventory is 10% and the ordering cost is `5 per order. The economic order lot

to be ordered is —

(a) 100 units

(b) 800 units

(c) 200 units

(d) 400 units. (June-2012)

Continuous stock taking is a part of —

(a) Annual stock taking

(b) Perpetual inventory

(c) ABC Analysis

(d) None of the above. [(a) 100, (b) Perpetual inventory]

Lesson 2

Material Cost

99

12. From the following records regarding material calculate (i) the re-order level, (ii) the maximum stock

level, and (iii) the minimum stock level.

Re-order quantity 6,000 units

Minimum stock (for emergencies) 5 weeks

Average delivery time 4 weeks

Maximum stock level 20 weeks

Average consumption per week 400 units

Minimum consumption in 4 weeks 1,200 units

13. Two components X and Y are used as follows:

Normal usage 50 units each per week

Minimum usage 25 units each per week

Maximum usage 75 units each per week

Re-order quantity X: 400 units; Y: 600 units

Re-order period X: 4 to 6 weeks; Y: 2 to 4 weeks.

Calculate for each components: (1) the re-order level, (2) the minimum level, (3) the maximum level,

and (4) the average stock level.

14. From the following transactions, prepare separately the Stores Ledger Accounts, using the following

pricing methods: (i) the FIFO, (ii) the LIFO.

January 1 Opening balance 100 units @ `5 each

January 5 Received 500 units @ `6 each

January 20 Issued 300 units

February 5 Issued 200 units

February 6 Received 600 units @ `5 each

March 10 Issued 300 units

March 12 Issued 250 units

15. The following receipts and issues of materials were made during the month of January.

January 1 Opening stock 80 units @ `1.00 each

January 7 Received from vendors 40 units @ `1.10 each

January 12 Received from vendors 60 units @ `1.20 each

January 22 Received from vendors 72 units @ `1.25 each

January 4 Issued 60 units

January 9 Issued 40 units

January 14 Issued 40 units

EP-CMA

100

January 30 Issued 80 units

Prepare the Stores Ledgers maintained under (i) the FIFO, (ii) the LIFO methods.

16. The following transactions took place in respect of a material item during the month of March:

Date Receipt Qty. Rate Issue Qty.

March 2 200 2.00

March 10 300 2.40

March 15 250

March 18 250 2.60

March 20 200

Prepare the Stores Ledger Sheet, pricing the issue at the simple average rate and the weighted

average rate.

17. Stocks are issued at the standard price and debit balance of variance amount before transfer to

Costing Profit and Loss Account was `500. The following purchases and issues were made during

the month of April:

April 1 Opening Balance 100 units @ `90.00 per unit

April 5 Purchased 500 units @ `85.00 per unit

April 6 Issued 60 units

April 12 Issued 375 units

April 23 Issued 65 units

April 30 Purchased 250 units @ `80.00

Find out the standard price for the issue and prepare the Stores Ledger Account. Also calculate the

material price variance.

18. After inviting tenders two quotations are received as follows:

(a) `1.20 per unit.

(b) `1.10 per unit plus `3,000 fixed charges to be added irrespective of units ordered.

Advise with your arguments on whom orders should be placed and what quantity is to be ordered.

The following additional information may be of interest:

Units

Present Stock 35,000

Average Monthly Requirement 10,000

Maximum Level 80,000

Minimum Level 30,000

(Sales tax to be ignored in both cases).

19. The following discrepancies have been reported by the company’s internal auditor. Suggest the

action to be taken by the management:

Lesson 2

Material Cost

101

(a) Large deficiencies in important items of stores.

(b) Accumulation of stocks in the departments due to excess requisitioning.

(c) Items purchased but not issued, resulting in increased stock value.

20. Different methods are used for the verification of physical stores depending upon the nature of the

item involved. Detail the method you would adopt for verification of the following stock:

(a) 200 tons of coal.

(b) 40,000 gallons of oil in tanks.

(c) 15,000 yards of belting in rolls.

(d) 2,000 nos. of bolts in bags.

(e) 500 kilos of leather rings part of which is dry and the balance is soacked in oil.

21. During the year, your company has purchased and received 1,500 tons of bulky raw materials which

is stored in the factory yard. Issues have been recorded amounting to 1,200 tons. Physical stock-

taking at the accounting year end reveals only 200 tons in stock. How would you deal in your cost

records with the deficit of 100 tons in physical stocks? What procedure would you instal to ensure

that deficit will not occur in the future?

22. A consignment consisted of two chemicals A and B. The invoice gave the following data:

`

Chemical A - 4,000 kgs. @ `2.50 per/kg. 10,000

Chemical B - 3,200 kgs. @ `3.25 per/kg. 10,400

Sales Tax 816

Railway Freight 384

Total cost 21,600

A shortage of 200 kgs. in A and 128 kgs. in B was noticed due to breakage. What is the stock rate

you would adopt for pricing issues assuming a provision of 5% towards further deterioration? (A:

`2.94 per kg.; B: `3.76 per kg.)

23. The following is an extract of the record of receipt and issues of sulphur in a chemical factory during

February:

1 Opening balance 500 tons @ `200

3 Issued 70 tons

4 Issued 100 tons

8 Issued 80 tons

13 Received from supplier 200 tons @ `190

14 Returned from Deptt. 15 tons

16 Issued 180 tons

20 Received from supplier 240 tons @ `190

24 Issued 300 tons

EP-CMA

102

25 Received from supplier 320 tons @ `190

26 Issued 115 tons

27 Returned from Deptt. 35 tons

28 Received from supplier 100 tons @ `190

Issues are to be priced on the principle of ‘First-in First-out’. The stock verifiers of the factory had

found a shortage of 10 tons on the 22nd and left a note accordingly. Draw up a priced stores ledger

card for the material showing the above transactions. (Stock on 28th Feb., 555 tons; `1,05,450)

24. X Ltd. has purchased and issued the materials in the following order:

Unit Unit Cost

`

1st January Purchased 300 3

4th January Purchased 600 4

6th January Issued 500

10th January Purchased 700 4

15th January Issued 800

20th January Purchased 300 5

23rd January Issued 100

Ascertain the quantity of closing stock as on 31st January and state what would be its value (in

each case) if issues were made under the following methods:

(i) Average cost.

(ii) First-in First-out.

(iii) Last-in First-out.

(Weighted average = `2,218/-; FIFO `2,300/-; LIFO `1,900/-).

25. A plastic factory buys and uses a component for production at `10 per unit. Annual requirement is

20,000 units. The carrying cost of inventory is 10% per annum and ordering cost is `40 per order.

The purchase manager argues that as the ordering cost is very high, it is advantageous to place a

single order for the entire annual requirement. He also says that if we order 20,000 units at a time,

we can get a 3% discount from the supplier. You are required to evaluate this proposal and make

your recommendations.

Lesson 3

Labour Cost

•

Meaning and Classification of Labour

Costs

•

Accounting and Control of Labour Costs

•

Time Recording:

– Time Keeping and its method

– Time Booking and its method

•

Attendance and Payroll Procedures,

•

Overtime and its causes, disadvantages,

accounting treatment and control

•

Idle Time and its causes, accounting

treatment and control

•

Labour turnover, its causes and effect

•

Measurement, Cost Control and

Treatment of Labour Turnover

•

Remedial Steps to minimise Labour

Turnover

•

Labour Remuneration System

•

Basic Method of Remuneration system

•

Incentive scheme and its classification

•

Indirect monetary incentive schemes

•

Miscellaneous Topics

•

Lesson Round Up

•

Self Test Question

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

Labour cost is a very important constituent of total

cost of any product/services. It is very necessary to

account for labour cost properly so that we may able

to analyze it and control the avoidable part of labour

cost. After going through this lesson, one should be

able to understand:

1. The need of labour cost control.

2. The classification of labour cost.

3. The meaning of various components of

labour cost i.e. idle time cost, overtime

premium, labour turnover cost.

4. Meaning of labour turnover, its reasons

and remedial measures.

5. Calculation of labour turnover ratio.

6. Accounting treatment of overtime

premium, labour turnover cost and idle time

cost.

7. Various incentive schemes i.e. Rowan

Plan, Halsey system etc.

Labour Costs include besides wages paid to the workers all other benefits which accrue to the workers on account of

their employment with the organisation.

LESSON OUTLINE

EP-CMA

104

LABOUR COST

Labour cost is a significant element of cost specially in an organisation using more manual operations. It is

the cost of human endeavour in the product and requires coordinated efforts for its control. The management

objective of keeping labour cost as low as possible is achieved by balancing productivity with wages. Low

wages do not necessarily mean low labour cost. Low labour cost is possible by giving substantial increase in

wages against corresponding increase in productivity. The gain is reflected both in labour cost as well as in

overheads expense per unit, since overheads are distributed over larger volume. Again, the productivity of

labour is quite flexible. Given right type of motivation and incentive, it can reach amazing scale. It does not

have any limitation like machines. Labour cost is a vital factor not only affecting the cost of production but

also industrial relations of the organization. No organization can expect to attract and attain qualified and

motivated employees unless it pays them fair remuneration. Employee remuneration therefore influences

vitally the growth and profitability of the company. For employees remuneration is more than a means of

satisfying their physical needs. Wages and salaries have significant influence on our distribution of income,

Consumption savings employment and prices. Thus employee remuneration is a very significant issue from

the viewpoint of employer’s employees and the nation as whole.

CLASSIFICATION OF LABOUR COST

The total labour cost can be classified as follows:

(a) Direct labour costs;

(b) Indirect labour costs.

Direct Labour Cost

It refers to all labour expended in altering the construction, composition, conformation or condition of the

product. The wages paid to skilled and unskilled workers for his labour can be allocated specifically to the

particular product or the process as the case may be. In any manufacturing process or department, the

workers employed may be of the following two categories:

(i) Those who are directly engaged on the production or in the carrying out of an operation or process;

(ii) Those who are assisting in the process by way of supervision, maintenance, transportation of

materials, etc.

The workers coming under the first category constitute direct labour and the wages paid to them are called

direct wages. In a factory, where production of a number of products is undertaken or in a jobbing concern,

workers are given job cards on which they note the time devoted to each job or product. These job cards are

then analysed job wise so that the wages attributable to each job can be computed.

Direct labour cost is that portion of wages or salaries which can be identified with and charged to a single

costing unit. It can be easily identified with and charged to a single costing unit as there is a direct

relationship with the product/process. Direct labour cost can be easily calculated and is quite significant in

amount.

Indirect Labour Costs

It refers to labour expended that does not alter the construction, conformation, composition or condition of

the product, but which contributes generally to such work and to the completion of the product and its

progressive movement and handling up to the point of dispatch. In other words, labour employed for the

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

105

purpose of carrying out tasks incidental to goods produced or services provided is regarded as indirect

labour. Wages or salaries paid to foremen, supervisors, inspectors, clerks, store-keepers, managers,

accountants, salesmen, directors, etc., are examples of indirect labour cost.

These costs are not easily identifiable with particular units of cost. Indirect labour cost can be classified as

that expended in production departments and that in service departments. (bulk of the labour cost in a

production department will be direct). The classification should enable control over such costs and

codification of indirect labour accounts.

Need for distinguishing between direct and indirect labour cost:

The distinction has to be made

(a) for calculating accurate labour cost and thus provide a basis for strict control;

(b) for facilitating calculation of labour efficiency;

(c) for proper allocation of overheads;

(d) for introduction of incentive schemes;

(e) for inter-unit comparison; and

(f) for estimating total labour costs.

ACCOUNTING AND CONTROL OF LABOUR COST

Accounting for labour by a manufacturer usually involves three activities:

(1) Time keeping;

(2) Computation of total payroll; and

(3) Allocation of payroll costs.

These activities must be performed before the payroll is recorded in the accounting records. In a large

organisation, the control of labour cost involves the coordinated efforts of the following departments :–

(a) Personnel department — This department is responsible for manpower planning, recruitment,

training, maintaining records of staff and workmen and reporting to chief inspector of factories and

to top management on performance, overtime, absenteeism, leave, etc.

(b) Industrial engineering department — This department prepares plans and specifications of each

job, supervises production activities, undertakes time and motion studies, performs job-analysis,

etc.

(c) Time-office — This department is primarily responsible for collection of data relating to attendance,

time spent on jobs or process by the workmen, and providing information on attendance and leave

to Payroll department.

(d) Payroll department — This department is responsible for computing total and net earnings of each

worker, preparation of payroll and maintenance of various records relating to payroll.

(e) Cost department — This department collects and classifies all cost data relating to labour

utilisation by departments, and allocates them to respective job or process as per available

documents.

EP-CMA

106

TIME RECORDING

Recording of time has two purposes - time-keeping and time-booking. It is necessary for both type of

workers: direct and indirect. It is necessary even if the workers are paid on piece basis.

Time-keeping is necessary for the purpose of recording attendance and for calculating wages. Time-booking

means a record from the utilisation point of view; the purpose is cost analysis and cost apportionment.

Record keeping is correct when time-keeping and time-booking tally.

TIME-KEEPING

The purpose of time-keeping is to provide basic data for:

(i) pay-roll preparation;

(ii) finding out the labour cost of a job/product/service;

(iii) attendance records to meet statutory requirements;

(iv) determining productivity and controlling labour cost;

(v) calculating overhead cost of a job, product or service;

(vi) to maintain discipline in attendance;

(vii) to distinguish between normal and over-time, late attendance and early leaving; and

(viii) to provide internal check against dummy workers.

The time-keeping office records the attendance of workers. Depending on the number of workers, a separate

department may be established or it may form part of the personnel department.

Wages paid on the piece rate basis also require that attendance be recorded for the following reasons:

(a) Records of attendance is necessary for statistical purposes.

(b) If overhead rates are based on labour rates, time recording is necessary.

(c) Output will decrease if attendance is unchecked. There may be more idle time and production

schedules may not be followed.

(d) Some workers may not be punctual. This will affect the morale of the workers.

(e) It is necessary to ensure that production hours have been properly utilised.

(f) It provides data for calculating bonus and overtime.

(g) Labour costs can be allocated on this basis.

(h) For calculating dearness allowance, it is necessary.

(i) For ascertaining payment under certain schemes of benefits, e.g., P.F., Pension, etc.

(j) For calculating leave with pay, etc.

METHODS OF TIME KEEPING

Various methods of time keeping are available, which may be grouped under manual and mechanical

methods, as under:

(1) Manual methods:

(a) Attendance register method: An attendance register is kept at the entrance of the factory gate

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

107

in this method. The in and out timing are noted, either by the worker himself or by a staff of the

time office. Later, entries are made to the individual attendance records of the workmen.

(b) Disc method: Under this method, metal discs bearing employee’s numbers allotted by the

personnel department are placed on hooks on a board provided either at the gate or at the

entrance of the department. On entering the factory, the worker removes the disc bearing his

number from the board and places it in a box kept for this purpose. The box is taken away as

soon as normal reporting time is over. A worker coming late will pick up the disc and put it in the

“Late” box provided in the department. Such late box is normally changed every half an hour

upto the maximum late attendance time allowed. The timekeeper records the attendance in the

register on the basis of these discs.

(2) Mechanical methods:

The attendance cards are used in time clocks installed at the entrance of the factory. On entering

the factory, the worker takes his card from ‘OUT’ racks and press it inside the clock, which will print

arrival time in ‘IN’ column. He then places it in ‘IN’ rack of the department where he reports for duty.

Late attendance is normally reported in red ink. Similarly, when the employee leaves the factory, he

collects the card from the ‘IN’ rack and punches the time in the clock and keeps it in the ‘OUT’ rack.

It is necessary that the timekeeping staff are present at the time of punching the cards to supervise

the procedure. The clock cards are Collected by the timekeeping staff daily or weekly for recording

in Statutory Attendance Register. Correct recording of attendance time is very important where

wages are paid on the basis of time worked. Where payment is made by results, such as, by piece

rate method, it would still be necessary to record correctly the ‘in’ and ‘out’ timings.

TIME-BOOKING

The objectives of time-booking are:

(i) to apportion overheads against jobs;

(ii) to calculate the labour cost of jobs done;

(ii) to ascertain idle time for the purpose of control;

(iv) to find out that the time during which a worker is in the factory is properly utilised;

(v) to evaluate labour performance, to compare actual and budgeted time;

(vi) to determine overhead rates of absorbing overhead expenses under the labour hour and machine

hour methods;

(vii) to calculate wages and bonus provided the system of payment depends on the time taken.

METHOD OF TIME-BOOKING

Different methods used for time booking are:

(1) Daily Time Sheets

(2) Weekly Time Sheets

(3) Job Cards

Daily Time Sheets

Under this method, a daily time sheet is provided to each worker on which time spent by him on various work

EP-CMA

108

orders is mentioned. This method can be conveniently used if the worker works on various jobs of short

duration like in maintenance jobs. But this method is disadvantages also as it involves considerable paper

work.

Weekly Time Sheets

In this method time is recorded for all the jobs done during the week instead of recording the work done for a

day only. One sheet is allotted to each worker. It involves less paper work. These types of weekly time

sheets are useful for intermittent types of jobs like construction work.

Job Card

Job Card is a method of recording details of time with reference to the jobs or work orders undertaken by the

workers. This method facilitates the computation of labour cost with reference to jobs or work orders. Job

cards may be of two types, one, which is a job order cost card, and contains information regarding material

consumption as well as time spent by operators. The other one is, in effect, a job ticket, which is issued to an

operator by the supervisor and contains only the operation details. When the operator starts the work, he

records the time either manually or through time recording clock on the card.

ATTENDANCE AND PAYROLL PROCEDURE

PREPARATION OF PAYROLLS

The payroll is a record which shows details of the gross wages earned by each worker in a particular period,

the deductions made and the net wages payable. The payroll can be prepared at weekly, fortnightly or

monthly periods. It can be prepared departmentwise or shiftwise.

The payroll records contain information regarding:

(a) Department

(b) Wage period

(c) Workers’ ticket number

(d) Workers name

(e) Normal hours worked

(f) Overtime

(g) Output in the period

(h) Rate of wages/hour

(i) Rate of wages/unit

(j) Total basic wages

(k) Dearness Allowance (DA)

(l) Bonus

(m) Deductions from Wages

(n) Net wages.

The labour cost charged to costs is the gross wages of the worker and the employer’s contribution to the

Provident Fund and ESI etc.

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

109

The preparation of payroll involves three steps, viz.

(a) Collection of basic data;

(b) Determining the wages payable;

(c) Preparing the actual payroll.

The attendance of time-rated workers can be verified from the clock cards. Production can be verified from

piece work tickets and job card for piece rated workers.

The cost department checks the particulars and calculates the gross wages, the deductions to be made and

the net wages payable.

A wage ticket is then prepared for each worker. This enables the worker to verify the amount of wages and

also acts as an identification at the time of payment.

A denominational analysis of the money required by different departments or shifts is prepared. The required

amount is withdrawn in the required denominations.

The wages of each worker is put in an envelope and paid in the concerned department in the presence of the

departmental manager.

Some companies have a practice of preparing a pay slip of each worker, which may be handed over to the

worker in advance of the actual payment of wages. The pay slip shows basic wages and details of various

allowances like house rent allowance, dearness allowance and other payments like, overtime, bonus etc.

and various deductions on account of P.F. contributions, income-tax, recovery of loans, and any other

deduction. The net amount payable is shown after making all these adjustments.

OVERTIME

Overtime refers to the situation when a worker works beyond his normal working hours. The overtime rate is

always higher than the normal rate and is usually double the normal rate. The Factories Act and Shops and

Establishments Act have fixed the normal working hours, defined what constitutes overtime, the rate of

overtime and maximum hours of overtime.

Overtime consists of two elements viz. the normal cost and the extra payment or premium. The premium is

known as overtime cost. The normal cost is allocated to the Production Order or cost centre/unit on which

the worker is working. The treatment of overtime cost varies according to the circumstances.

Causes of Overtime

Overtime arises due to the following circumstances:

(a) for working due to seasonal rush;

(b) for making up time lost due to unavoidable reasons;

(c) for completing a job or order within a specified period as requested by the customer;

(d) for working due to policy decisions, i.e. when there is general pressure of work and labour shortage

etc.

Disadvantages of Overtime

(a) Output is not proportionate to the extra time taken. Hence, there is decrease in productivity.

(b) It increases labour cost.

EP-CMA

110

(c) If overtime is done during night, it increases lighting cost.

(d) Go slow tactics may be adopted during normal working hours to necessitate overtime.

(e) Workers may treat overtime wages as a part of normal wages and resist discontinuance of overtime.

(f) If the work is distributed unevenly, the workers may feel discontented.

(g) It affects the health of workers.

(h) Overtime over a long period leads to fatigue and increase in defective products.

Overtime is helpful in clearing backlog of work and in emergencies or when it is necessitated by uncontrollable

causes. Existing resources are fully utilised.

Treatment of Overtime premium in Cost Accounting

In cost accounting the treatment of overtime premium will be as follows:

1. If the overtime is resorted to at the desire of the customer, then the entire amount of overtime

including overtime premium should be charged to the job directly.

2. If it is due to a general pressure of work to increase the output, the premium as well as overtime

wages may be charged to general overheads.

3. If it is due to the negligence or delay of workers of a particular department, it may be charged to the

concerned department.

4. If it is due to circumstances beyond control, it may be charged to Costing Profit & Loss Account.

Steps for Controlling Overtime

Important steps for controlling overtime work are as follows :

(a) Entire overtime work should be duly authorised after investigating the reasons for it.

(b) Overtime cost should be shown against the concerned department. Such a practice should enable

proper investigation and planning of production in future.

(c) If overtime is a regular feature, the necessity for necessity for recruiting more men and adding a

shift should be considered.

(d) If overtime is due to lack of plant and machinery or other resources, steps may be taken to install

more machines, or to resort to sub-contracting.

(e) If possible an upper limit may be fixed for each category of workers in respect of overtime.

IDLE TIME

When workers are paid on time basis there is usually a difference between the time for which the workers

are paid and the time actually spent by them in production. The loss of time for which the employer pays but

obtains no direct benefit is termed as idle time.

In other words, Idle time cost represents the wages paid for the time lost, i.e., time during which the worker

was idle.

Causes of idle time

The causes of idle time can be classified into the following groups:

(i) According to controllability

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

111

(ii) According to functions.

(i) According to the controllability classification, the causes are:

(a) Normal idle time such as time lost between gate and place of work, time interval between one job

and another, rest pauses, tea break, tool setting time, time taken to adjust machines etc.

(b) Abnormal idle time due to break downs, scarcity, non-availability of raw materials, negligence of

supervision, strikes or lockouts.

The idle time may be due to avoidable causes i.e., the causes can be controlled and due to unavoidable

causes, i.e., the causes beyond control.

Normal idle time occur due to unavoidable causes and abnormal idle time occur due to avoidable causes.

The classification according to functions, the functional causes of idle time are analysed as the treatment

depends on the causes affecting idle time. The causes can be classified as follows:

(a) Productive causes;

(b) Administrative causes; and

(c) Economic causes.

(a) The productive causes can be listed as follows:

(i) machine breakdown;

(ii) unutilised manpower;

(iii) waiting for work;

(iv) power cuts;

(v) waiting for tools/raw materials;

(vi) waiting for instructions.

Time lost due to the causes mentioned above can be controlled internally. Proper planning helps control.

All engineering organisations should prepare a report showing lost and setting time. The departments in

which time was lost can be identified and effective remedial measures taken. It is charged as an item of

departmental overhead.

(b) Idle time arising due to administrative causes are:

(i) Poor planning,

(ii) Delayed/unproper instructions,

(iii) Unutilised capacity due to management decisions.

Idle time arising due to these uncontrollable causes can not be controlled. It is recovered as a part of general

works overhead.

(c) Idle time arising due to economic causes are:

(i) lack of demand resulting in unutilised capacity,

(ii) lock outs and strikes,

EP-CMA

112

(iii) non-dismissal of workers in the off-season in the case of seasonal industries.

Such idle time is not a part of cost of production. It is directly transferred to Costing Profit and Loss Account.

Accounting Treatment of Idle Time

Idle time cost arising due to normal and unavoidable causes should be charged as overheads and those due

to abnormal causes should be charged to Costing Profit and Loss Account.

Normal idle time such as loss in tool setting etc. can be charged at inflated rate. Jobs are charged at inflated

rate.

Control of Idle Time

Idle time arising due to normal and controllable causes can be controlled by proper planning but those

arising due to abnormal causes cannot be controlled. Idle time is bound to occur due to setting up of tools for

various jobs, time interval between two jobs, time to travel from factory gate to work place.

Idle time can be eliminated/minimised by taking the following steps:

(i) Production should be properly planned in advance;

(ii) Purchasing/requisitioning of materials in time;

(iii) Proper maintenance of machines;

(iv) Utilising man power effectively.

Responsibility for controlling idle time should be properly defined and fixed. The different causes should be

properly analysed by a detailed break up under each head.

Person/department responsible for the idle time should be identified and remedial steps should be taken.

LABOUR TURNOVER

It is a common feature in any concern that some employees leave the concern and others join it. Workers

change the job either for personal betterment or for better working conditions or due to compulsion. Labour

turnover is the ratio of the number of persons leaving in a period to the average number employed. It is the

change in the composition of the labour force in an organisation. It can be measured by relating the

engagements and losses in the labour force to the total number employed at the beginning of the period. All

the losses must be taken into account regardless of the cause for leaving.

Example

If 20 employees leave an organisation in a year and the average labour force is 400, then the labour turnover

is 5%.

An index or norm may be fixed depending on the usual labour turnover in the industry or the labour turnover

in the past. The rate of labour turnover depends on a number of factors like the nature of the industry, its

size, location, nature of labour etc. A high labour turnover must be investigated. A low labour turnover points

out the lack of flexibility or it may be due to inefficient workers not willing to leave the organisation.

Labour turnover reduces the labour productivity and increases costs. Hence, it should be kept at a minimum

level.

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

113

Causes of Labour Turnover

Causes of labour turnover: The main causes of labour turnover in an organisation/industry can be broadly

classified under the following three heads:

a. Personal Causes

b. Unavoidable Causes, and

c. Avoidable Causes

(a) Personal causes are those which induce or compel workers to leave their jobs such causes

includes the following:

i. Change of jobs for betterment.

ii. Premature retirement due to ill health or old age.

iii. Domestic problems and family responsibilities.

iv. Discontentment over the jobs and working environment.

In all the above cases the employee leaves the organisation at his will and, therefore, it is difficult to

suggest any possible remedy in the first three cases. But the last one can be overcome by creating

conditions leading to a healthy working environment. For this, officers should play a positive role and

make sure that their subordinates work under healthy working conditions.

(b) Unavoidable causes are those under which it becomes obligatory on the part of management to

ask some or more of their employees to leave the organisation, such causes are summed up as

listed below :

i. Seasonal nature of the business;

ii. Shortage of raw materials, power, slack market for the product etc :

iii. Change in the plant location;

iv. Disability, making a worker unfit for work;

v. Disciplinary measures;

vi. Marriage (generally in the case of women).

(c) Avoidable causes are those which require the attention of management on a continuous basis

so as to keep the labour turnover ratio as low as possible. The main causes under this case are

indicated below;

i. Dissatisfaction with job, remuneration, hours of work, working conditions, etc

ii. Strained relationship with management, supervisors or follow workers;

iii. Lack of training facilities and promotional avenues;

iv. Lack of recreational and medical facilities;

v. Low wages and allowances.

Proper and timely management actions reduce the labour turnover appreciably so far as avoidable

causes are concerned.

Effects of Labour Turnover

It increases cost of production due to the following reasons:

(i) Cost of selecting/replacing workers

EP-CMA

114

(ii) Cost of training imparted to new workers

(iii) Production planning cannot be properly executed and this results in production loss

(iv) Loss due to defectives and wastage

(v) Loss due to mishandling of tools, equipments, breakages, etc.

Measurement of Labour Turnover

Method Labour turnover

Separation Rate Method

period the during workersof number Average

period given a during Separation

(The average of workers is calculated by taking a simple

average of workers at the beginning and end of the period.)

Net Labour Turnover Rate Method or

Replacement Method

100

period the during force workingAverage

period given a during tsreplacemen of Number

×

Labour Flux Rate Method

100

period) given the during workforceof number (Average

employeesnew of Number

period given a during

separation of Number

period a during

×













+













Costs of Labour Turnover

The cost of labour turnover can be either preventive costs or replacement costs. Preventive costs are

incurred to keep the workers satisfied and discourage them from leaving the concern. Replacement costs are

incurred for recruiting and training labour and the loss arising due to wastages, reduced productivity of new

labour force.

Examples of Preventive Costs

(i) costs of providing medical services;

(ii) personnel administration cost;

(iii) cost of labour welfare activities;

(iv) costs incurred for providing pension, provident fund and retirement schemes.

Examples of Replacement costs

(i) Decline in output due to inexperience of new workers.

(ii) Decline in quality due to the lack of experience of new workmen.

(iii) Loss of output during the time lost while recruiting new workers.

(iv) Cost of recruitment/selection.

(v) Cost of training.

(vi) Cost of tool, equipment and machine breakages.

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

115

(vii) Waste, scrap and defectives arising due to lack of experience of new workers.

(viii) Cost of accidents, compensation paid, damage to property, assets etc.

Remedial steps to minimise labour turnover

The following steps are useful for minimising labour turnover.

1. Exit Interview: An interview may be arranged with each outgoing employee to ascertain the reasons

of his leaving the organisation.

2. Job analysis and evaluation: Before recruiting workers, job analysis and evaluation may be carried

out to ascertain the requirements of each job.

3. Scientific system of recruitment, placement and promotion: The organisation should make use of a

scientific system of recruitment selection, placement and promotion for employees.

4. Enlightened attitude of management : The management should introduce the following steps for

creating a healthy working atmosphere. Service rules should be framed, discussed and approved

among management and workers, before their implementation. Provide facilities for education and

training of workers. Introduce a procedure for settling workers grievance.

5. Use of Committee: Issues like control over workers handing their grievances etc., may be dealt by

a committee, comprising of members from management and workers.

Treatment of Labour Turnover

The various methods of treating labour turnover are:

(a) Preventive costs are treated as overhead expenses and apportioned to departments on the basis of

number of persons employed in each department.

(b) Replacement costs may arise either due to faults of departments or due to faulty management

policy. In the first case the cost is charged as overhead to the concerned department. In the latter

case, the overhead cost is apportioned to different departments, on the basis of number of persons

employed in each department.

Illustration 1

The cost accountant of Akash Ltd. has computed labour turnover rates for the quarter ended 31st March,

2013 as 20%, 10% and 6% respectively under ‘flux method’, ‘replacement method’ and ‘separation method’.

If the number of workers replaced during that quarter is 80, find out the number of (i) workers left and

discharged; and (ii) workers recruited and joined including replacements.

Solution:

Working Note:

Average number of workers on roll:

roll on workersof No. Average

tsreplacemen of No.rate Turnover Labour

method) treplacemen (Under

=

OR

rollonskerworofnumberAverage

80

100

10

=

EP-CMA

116

OR Average No. of workers on roll =

800

10

10080

=

×

(i) Workers left and discharged:

100

roll on workersof No. Average

)S(sseparationof.No

rate turnover Labour

method) n(Separatio

×=

OR

48

800100

6

== Sor

S

Hence the number of workers left and discharged = 48

(ii) No of workers recruited and joined:

)methodFlux(

rollonskerworof.NoAverage

)A(Accessionsof.No)S(sseparationof.No

rateturnoverLabour

+

=

11248

100

00016

800

48

10

20

=−=

+

=

,

Aor

A

No. of workers recruited and joined (including replacement) = 112

Illustration 2

The management of Twin sharing limited wants to have an idea of the profit lost/foregone as a result of

labour turnover last year.

Last year sales accounted to ` 66,000,000 and the P/V Ratio was 20%. The total number of actual hours

worked by the direct labour force was 3.45 lakhs. As a result of the delays by the Personnel Department in

filling vacancies due to labour turnover, 75,000 potential productive hours were lost. The actual direct labour

hours included 30,000 hours attributable to training new recruits, out of which half of the hours were

unproductive. The costs incurred consequent on labour turnover revealed on analysis the following :

Settlement cost due to leaving ` 27,420

Recruitment costs `18,725

Selection costs `12,750

Training costs `16,105

Assuming that the potential production lost due to labour turnover could have been sold at prevailing prices,

ascertain the profit foregone/lost last year on account of labour turnover

Solution

Statement of Profit foregone as a result of labour turnover of M/s. SS Ltd.

`

Contribution foregone 3, 00,000

(Refer to working note 5)

Settlement cost due to leaving 27,420

Recruitment costs 18,725

Selection costs 12,750

Training costs 16,105

Total profit foregone 3,75,000

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

117

Working Note:

1. Actual productive hours 3,30,000

(Actual hours worked – Unproductive training hours)

(3,45,000 hrs. – 15,000 hrs.)

2. Sales per productive hour (`20)

(Total Sales/Actual productive hours)

(`66,00,000/3,30,000 hrs.)

3. Potential productive hours lost 75,000

4. Sales foregone (`) 15,00,000

(75,000 hours × ` 20)

5. Contribution foregone (`) 3,00,000

P/V ratio × Sales foregone)

(20% × `15,00,000)

LABOUR REMUNERATION SYSTEM

Objectives of an Ideal Remuneration System

An ideal wage system is required to achieve the following objectives:

(1) The wage system should establish a fair and equitable remuneration.

(2) A sound wage system helps to attract qualified and efficient worker by ensuring an adequate

payment.

(3) It assists to improve the motivation and moral of employees which in turn lead to higher productivity.

(4) It enables effective control of labour cost.

(5) An Ideal wage system helps to improve union-management relations. It should reduce grievances

arising out of wage inequities.

(6) It should facilitate job sequences and lines of promotion wherever applicable.

(7) An ideal system seeks to project the image of a progressive employer and to comply with legal

requirements relating to wages and salaries.

Principles of an Ideal Remuneration System

The following principles should be adopted for an ideal wage system

1. Differences in pay should be based on differences in job requirements.

2. Follow the principle of equal pay for equal work.

3. The scheme should be based on work study, and the work contents of various jobs should be

stabilized.

4. Recognize individual differences in ability and contributions.

EP-CMA

118

5. The scheme should not be very costly in operation.

6. The scheme should be flexible.

7. The scheme should encourage productivity.

8. The scheme should not undermine co-operation amongst the workers.

9. The scheme should be sufficient to ensure for the worker and his family reasonable standard of

living.

BASIC METHODS OF REMUNERATION SYSTEM

(1) Time Rate System

The time rate or day rate is related to the hours of wage and is commonly used. The wage rate can be fixed

on hourly, daily, weekly, fortnightly or monthly basis depending on the nature of his skill.

This method can be applied in the following circumstances:

(a) The quality of work is more important;

(b) The output of a worker cannot be measured;

(c) Where output of a worker is not in his control;

(d) Where the work can be closely supervised;

(e) Where increase in output is negligible compared to the incentive.

Advantages of Time Rate System

The advantages of time rate system are:

(a) It is simple and easy to understand;

(b) It is recognised by trade unions as all workers are paid alike;

(c) It involves less clerical expenditure;

(d) A steady income is assured;

(e) As there is no hurry, tools and materials are handled carefully. Wastage is minimised.

Disadvantages of Time Rate System

(a) It does not encourage initiative;

(b) Labour cost may rise thereby decreasing profit. This may be caused by decrease in productivity;

(c) Standards for labour are difficult to set;

(d) Production may decrease thus upsetting production schedules, creating production bottlenecks and

increasing cost per unit;

(e) Labour cost cannot be estimated for the purpose of quotations;

(f) It creates more idle time;

(g) This system encourages inefficiency;

(h) It requires close supervision to ensure that employees are working.

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

119

A few variations of this system are in use. They are:

(a) High Wage Plan: Compared to the wage rate prevailing in the region, a higher time rate is fixed. This is

done to attract efficient workers so that output is high. To enable the workers to achieve the standard,

suitable working conditions are created.

Unsuitable or inefficient workers are taken off the scheme.

The employer benefits because overheads and wage costs per unit are reduced.

This scheme is suitable when high quality and productivity are required. But it should be possible to set up

standards and measure the output.

The advantages are:

(a) reduces supervision;

(b) simple and inexpensive (because of lower labour cost per unit);

(c) attracts skilled workers;

(d) increases productivity;

(e) decreases wages and overhead cost per unit.

(b) Different Time Rates: For different levels of efficiency, different rates are fixed. For efficiency upto the

standard level, normal wages are paid and for efficiency beyond the standard level, the rate is gradually

increased. This is similar to differential piece rate system.

(c) Measured Day Work (Graduated): The hourly rates are divided into two parts. One part is the fixed part

which depends on the nature of the job and the other part is variable depending on the merit rating and cost

of living.

This system is very complicated. The calculations involved increase when the workers change jobs

frequently. Merit rating may be arbitrary. There is multiplicity of rates. The workers do not easily understand

the system. Because of all these factors this system is not popular.

(2) Payment by Results

Payment by results is a method of paying wages which depends on the output or units produced by the

worker. The worker can increase his income by producing more units. The main classifications of payment

by results are:

(i) payment is directly proportionate to the worker’s production; for example, straight piece work

system;

(ii) payment proportionately increases as the production increases, like the differential piece-work

system;

(iii) the rate of payment decreases as output increases e.g. premium bonus methods;

(iv) the payment varies at different levels of production like the accelerated premium method.

(a) Piece Rate System

The wages are paid on the basis of the output of workers, i.e., on the basis of quantity of output. It is simple

EP-CMA

120

and common method of wage payment. The worker is paid on the basis of his work, not taking into account

the time involved.

The wage is calculated as follows:

Wage = Number of units produced x Rate per unit.

The piece rate can be applied in the following cases:

(a) the work is of standard or repetitive nature;

(b) piece rate can be easily fixed;

(c) there is uninterrupted flow of work;

(d) it is necessary for the employer to get maximum production; and

(e) quantity of output depends on effort and does not require skill.

The piece rate can be fixed by determining the time required to complete a piece. This can be done from

past experience or estimation or time and motion study. In case the job is new, a few trial runs can enable

fixation of piece rates. After this, the time is correlated to the wage rate to determine the piece rate.

Merits of Piece Rate System

(a) A worker becomes an expert by continuously doing the work. Thus he can earn more.

(b) It increases efficiency.

(c) It reduces costs.

(d) Idle time is automatically controlled.

(e) The reward is related to effort. Efficiency is recognized.

(f) Quotations can be easily made as cost per unit is known.

(g) Supervision can be reduced as workers are paid according to performance.

(h) Workers endeavor to increase production by discovering new techniques of producing goods.

Demerits of Piece Rate System

(a) Quality may be sacrificed to increase production.

(b) Wastage may be high if not properly supervised.

(c) It necessitates more supervision and inspection so that units attain the standard quality.

(d) In order to maximize output, the workers may use machines and tools recklessly.

(e) If work stops due to machine break down, power failure etc., the workers may feel insecure.

(f) The workers’ health may be affected due to over-strain.

(g) The inefficient and less efficient people may feel frustrated.

(h) Lack of ready market may cause over production and surplus.

(i) Determination of piece rate is difficult.

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

121

(b) Piece Rate with Guaranteed Time Rate

A certain level of output is determined. Workers are paid on the basis of output. If the output is less than the

standard, the worker is paid on time rate basis.

Thus, this system incorporates the merits of the time rate and piece rate system and eliminates the demerits

of them.

But it is very complicated and misunderstandings may arise.

INCENTIVE SCHEMES

Both time rate and piece rate systems have their merits and demerits. Incentive system attempts to combine

the good aspects of both systems. The main objective of incentive plan is to induce a worker to produce

more to earn a higher wage. Producing more in the same period of time should result in higher pay for the

worker. Because if greater number of units produced, it should also result in a lower cost per unit for fixed

factory cost and also for labour cost.

A good incentive plan should have the following characteristics:

(1) It should be simple and easy to understand;

(2) Operating cost of the system should be low;

(3) It should permit less supervision;

(4) The time lag between effort and and reward should be minimum;

(5) It should be fair to the employees and employer;

(6) The standard set should be attainable;

(7) Performance above standard should be well rewarded;

(8) It should be flexible;

(9) The premium should be large enough to induce workers to work hard;

(10) All workers should be given equal opportunity to earn;

(11) It should facilitate the budgetary control and standard cost systems;

(12) Inspection should be good;

(13) Good working conditions must be available;

(14) The system should be introduced on a permanent basis and should not be ambiguous;

(15) No rate cutting should be permitted and an individual’s earnings should not be curtailed;

(16) There should be uniformity of reward for same amount of effort;

(17) Indirect workers should also be included.

Advantages of Incentive Schemes

(1) Less supervision is required;

(2) The employee morale is high because they can earn more;

(3) There is increased productivity;

EP-CMA

122

(4) Increased production reduces cost;

(5) Labour cost can be estimated;

(6) It is possible to set standards for labour with accuracy;

(7) There is maximum utilization of resources;

(8) A task is done in the most economical manner which reduces labour cost.

Disadvantages of Incentive Schemes

(1) If rates are not uniform for same type of jobs, it causes discontent.

(2) Quality may deteriorate and may be sacrificed in order to increase quantity.

(3) It involves more calculations.

(4) The workers may not adhere to the safety precautions in order to increase production. Hence

accidents may occur.

(5) The workers’ health may be affected due to over-strain.

(6) There may be apprehensions regarding rate cutting.

(7) Inefficient workers may envy the efficient ones which may cause unrest.

(8) Unskilled workers sometimes earn more than skilled workers if the latter have to work on time basis.

CLASSIFICATION OF INCENTIVE SCHEMES

Incentive schemes can be classified as follows:

(a) Differential piece rate

(b) Premium bonus schemes

(c) Group bonus plans

(d) Bonus schemes for indirect workers.

(A) DIFFERENTIAL PIECE RATE

Efficient and inefficient workers are distinguished. More than one piece rate is determined. Standards are set

for each operation or job. Efficient workers, i.e., those who attain or better the standard set are given a higher

rate and inefficient ones are given a lower rate. Hence, there is encouragement to improve the performance.

As the level of output increases the piece rate also increases. This ratio may be proportionate or

proportionately less or more than the increase in output. Hence output is maximised.

This system is suitable where:

(a) the methods of working are standardised;

(b) the workers do the same job over a long period;

(c) the nature of work is repetitive;

(d) output of each person can be measured;

(e) the standard time for each job can be determined with precision.

The advantage of this scheme is that workers are encouraged to increase their efficiency and earn higher

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

123

wages. But the system is complicated and difficult to understand. It is expensive to operate. A stage may be

reached when the increased labour cost will equalise the benefit arising due to reduced overhead.

Taylor’s Differential Piece Rate System

F.W. Taylor (known as the father of scientific management) originated this scheme. No minimum wage is

guaranteed. The standard output is determined on the basis of time and motion studies. Wages are

calculated on the basis of two widely different piece rates. Those attaining or crossing the standard get a

higher piece rate and those not attaining it get a lower rate.

The lower rate is based on 83% of the day wage rate. This rate is applicable to those who don’t attain the

standard. The higher rate is based on 125% of the day rate and an incentive of 50% of the day rate.

The efficiency of a worker can be determined either by comparing standard time and actual time taken or by

comparing actual output and standard output.

Hence, this system penalises the slow worker and rewards the efficient one. This principle is based on the

fact that slow production increases the cost of production.

If the wage rate is = `0.50 per unit

The low piece rate will be = 0.50 x 83% = `0.415 per unit

The high piece rate will be = 125% x `0.50 + 50% x `0.50

= `0.875 per unit.

Merrick’s Differential Rate Scheme (Multiple Piece Rate System)

This is a modification of the Taylor’s scheme. This system smoothens the sharp differences in Taylor’s

scheme by determining 3 gradual rates. It does not guarantee time rate but each one is paid according to his

efficiency.

Efficiency level Piece rate

Upto 83% Normal rate

83% to 100% 110% of normal rate

Above 100% 120% of normal rate.

The performance below standard is not penalised.

Gantt’s Task and Bonus Plan

Under N.L. Gantt’s scheme, time wages are guaranteed to every worker. Standards are set. Bonus is

generally 20% at 100% efficiency. If a worker takes the standard time to perform the task (100% efficiency),

he is given wages for standard time and bonus of 20% on wages earned. If the worker completes the task in

less than standard time he is given wages for the standard time (for actual output) and a bonus of 20% of the

wages for the standard time. A high piece rate may also be offered for performance above 100% efficiency.

Baum’s Differential Scheme (Milwakee Scheme)

It is a combination of Halsey and Taylor’s differential piece rate system. This system provides incentives at

different levels of efficiency.

(B) PREMIUM BONUS PLANS

All the gains of efficient workers and all the losses of inefficient workers benefit the employer under the time

rate system. Under the piece rate system, it is the workers who gain or lose.

EP-CMA

124

Under the premium bonus system, the gains are shared by the employer and employees in agreed

proportions. Apart from the minimum guaranteed wages, the efficient workers get bonus which depends on

the time saved. The standard is determined scientifically. The various incentive schemes should be chosen

keeping in mind the nature of the work, with the consent of trade unions in order to make it successful.

These plans regulate the speed of work so that the pace of work is not slow and at the same time it is not

fast. Basically, there are two types of plans. Under the constant sharing plans, the proportion of sharing is

constant at all levels of efficiency, but under variable sharing plans, it varies with the time saved.

Emerson’s Efficiency (or Empiric) System

Though minimum daily wages is guaranteed, efficiency is also rewarded. Standard is set based on the time

and motion study.

Bonus is payable when efficiency reaches 66-2/3% and increases as the output increases.

Levels of Efficiency Piece Rate

66-2/3% Guaranteed time rate

90% Time rate + 10% as bonus

100% Time rate + 20% as bonus

above 100% Time rate + 20% as bonus +

additional bonus of 1% for every increase

of 1% beyond 100% efficiency

The bonus is usually calculated on the efficiency achieved for all the jobs in a wage period taken together.

Efficiency % =

period a in jobs all doing for taken Time

period a in done jobs all for time Standard

× 100

Slow work is avoided and work is done at a uniform rate.

But under this scheme, the incentive for efficiency beyond the standard is not appreciable.

Halsey plan

Under this plan originated by T.A. Halsey, time rate is guaranteed. Standard time and work are

predetermined. The bonus is 50% of the standard time saved.

Total wages = Time taken x Hourly rate + 1/2 (Time saved) x Hourly rate.

Halsey Weir plan

The bonus under this plan is 33-1/3% of the standard time saved.

Total wages = Time taken x Hourly rate + 33-1/3% (Time saved) x Hourly rate

Rowan Plan

The time rate is guaranteed under the plan originated by J. Rowan. The percentage of bonus to the wages

earned is that which the time saved bears to the standard time.

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

125

Total wages = Time taken x Hourly rate +

takenTime

time Standard

savedTime

×













x Hourly rate

Comparison of Halsey and Rowan Plan

If the worker finishes the work in half the time fixed for it, the result under Rowan and Halsey plan will be

same. If the time saved is less than 50% of the standard time, the Rowan plan is better. If time saved is

greater than 50% of the standard time, the Halsey plan is better.

Bedauxe Point System

Under the scheme originated by C.E. Bedauxe, time wages is guaranteed. Earnings increase after the

worker attains 100% efficiency level. Standard time and standard work is measured in terms of Bedauxe

points, which are also known as B’s. ‘B’ means a standard work performed in a standard minute. In other

words, one ‘B’ unit represents the amount of work which an average worker can do under normal conditions

in one minute allowing for the relaxation needed. Workers get a bonus which is equal to 75% of B’s saved.

Bonus = B’s saved ×

Thus, if a person gets 90 B’s and hourly rate is `1.20, then his bonus will be:

B’s saved = 90 − 60 = 30 B’s

Bonus = 30 ×

100

75

60

201

×

.

= 45 paise

If bonus is given to the extent of the value of the entire time saved, then the scheme will be called the 100%

Bedauxe Scheme. But if nothing is mentioned, it is assured that it is 75% Bedauxe Scheme.

Under 75% Bedauxe Scheme, the labour cost increases till 100% efficiency and then starts declining. Under

the 100% Bedauxe Scheme, the labour cost remains constant after the 100% level is reached.

Hayne’s Scheme

Time wages are guaranteed. The standard time is set in terms of standard man minutes called ‘manits’. A

manit means a standard work performed in a standard minute. Bonus is given for the time saved. The value

of the time saved is shared by the worker and foreman in the ratio of 5 : 1 if the work is standardised and

repetitive in nature. Otherwise, the ratio of sharing between worker, employer and supervisor will be 5 : 4 : 1.

The labour cost falls until 100% efficiency is reached. Thereafter, it falls at a decreasing rate if work is non-

standardised or remains constant if the work is standardised.

Barth’s Scheme

This scheme does not guarantee wages. Under this scheme,

Total wages = Hourly rate

Total wages is higher for less efficient people. As the efficiency increases, the earnings decrease. Hence,

this plan is suitable for beginners and trainees. Since it is complicated, workers cannot understand it.

Moreover, it does not encourage efficient workers.

100

75

60

×

rateHourly

Standard time Time taken×

EP-CMA

126

Diemer Scheme

It is a combination of Halsey’s and Gantt’s schemes. A straight line increasing incentive is given beyond

100% efficiency.

Accelerated Premium Systems

Increments of bonus increase at a faster rate as production increases. This scheme provides a strong

incentive to increase efficiency at all levels. Though labour cost per unit decreases, it may rise at a very high

level of output.

The formula for calculating wages differ from one concern to another. To understand the scheme, graph of

y=0.6x2 may be used, where y = wages and x = efficiency.

If x is 1 1.5 2 2.5 3

y will be 0.6 1.35 2.4 3.75 5.4

Calculation can be expressed in percentages also.

This scheme is complicated. It is difficult for workers to understand it. This scheme should not be used where

quality of output is important.

It is most suitable for foremen and supervisors. This scheme will encourage them to get higher production

from their workers.

(C) GROUP BONUS PLANS

There are certain jobs which have to be performed collectively by a group of workers. The ultimate

production depends on the efficiency of the whole group. Under group bonus plans, payment is made by

results to all the workers in the group. Bonus may be shared equally or in different proportion according to

the levels of skill required. These proportions may be based on time rates or some previously agreed ratios.

These plans may increase production and reduce costs per unit. It creates team spirit. But efficient and

inefficient workers are rewarded alike. Efforts and rewards are not properly linked.

These plans can be used where:

(a) it is required to reward both direct and indirect workers;

(b) output depends on team work;

(c) it is desirous to create team spirit; and

(d) it is not possible to measure the output of an individual person.

The incentive can be made attractive by:

(a) creating small groups;

(b) forming a group where degree of skill required does not vary widely; and

(c) making the group independent of any other group, machines, etc.

Advantages of group bonus plans

(a) There is more co-operation and team work;

(b) Inspection and supervision can be reduced as every worker is concerned about output;

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

127

(c) There is self-discipline;

(d) Production increases;

(e) Cost of production decreases and also the spoiled and defective goods;

(f) It simplifies payroll and cost accounting.

Disadvantages of group bonus plans

(a) The amount of bonus given is too insignificant.

(b) No distinction is made between efficient and inefficient workers.

(c) Time gap between effort and reward is very wide.

The following are some of the group bonus plans:

(i) Priestman Production Bonus Plan

For each department, the standard output and standard time are calculated. Bonus is payable to the

department in which actual output is greater than standard output. The bonus is given on the basis of the

percentage by which actual output exceeds the standard output.

(ii) Cost Premium System

Payment is made on an agreed basis, for any costs saved, for the factory as a whole. Bonus is dependent on

output and also the economy effected in the use of materials and services. But this system is not very

common and there is no direct relation between the incentive and the efforts of the workers.

(iii) Rucker’s Plan (Share of Production Plan)

The ratio of earning and added value is calculated. Added value is the change in the market value because

of change in form, availability or location of the product. Any reduction in this ratio increases the wages.

(iv) Scanlon Plan

This is similar to Rucker’s plan but the meaning of ‘added value’ is different. Bonus depends on the ratio

between earnings and production achieved at selling price.

(v) Towne Gain Sharing Plan

Bonus depends on the reduction in labour cost as compared to the standard set. In addition to wages

earned, half of any saving in cost is paid to workers and supervisors.

(D) BONUS SCHEME FOR INDIRECT WORKERS

Production cannot be increased by giving incentives to direct workers only. It is necessary to have the

cooperation of indirect workers to attain maximum efficiency. Indirect workers are equally important and

should be given incentives.

It is difficult to introduce an incentive scheme for indirect workers because standards cannot be set easily,

efficiency is difficult to measure and actual output cannot be determined in relation to set standards.

Inspite of the difficulties, the purposes of establishing an incentive scheme are the following:

(a) to reduce costs by increasing departmental efficiency;

EP-CMA

128

(b) to avoid discrimination among different types of workers. It is illogical to reward the efficiency of

direct workers and not to reward the efficiency of indirect workers;

(c) to create team spirit;

(d) to avoid labour unrest and dissatisfaction among indirect workers;

(e) to reward good work;

(f) to increase the efficiency of providing services to direct workers;

(g) to reduce waste, scrap idle time;

(h) in certain cases, work of direct workers depends on the services provided by the indirect workers.

Inefficiency of indirect workers due to lack of incentives will affect the efficiency of the direct

workers.

The following points should be kept in mind while introducing an incentive scheme:

(a) It should be able to achieve all round efficiency.

(b) It should relate rewards to efforts.

(c) The bonus should be payable at some regular intervals.

(d) It should be introduced for a certain period.

Indirect workers can be grouped for facilitating the introduction of a suitable incentive scheme. Indirect

workers can be associated with direct workers, e.g., supervisor, material handling workers, internal transport

workers, etc. Bonus in this case, can be linked to the output of direct workers as they help to increase the

production. The bonus can be a percentage of the average bonus earned by direct workers.

Indirect workers provide some general services, e.g., canteen staff, cleaners, etc. Their bonus can be based

on the output of a department, output of the entire organisation, merit rating, job evaluation, percentage of

bonus for direct workers or high time-rates.

Sometimes, bonus of indirect workers can be related to the total production of the department of cost centre.

In case of higher levels of production, higher rate of bonus are applicable. This system is better as the bonus

of one person is not dependent on the efforts of another but on the total production.

INDIRECT MONETARY INCENTIVE SCHEMES

Profit Sharing

Henry R. Seagar has defined profit sharing “as an agreement freely entered into, by which employee

receives a share, fixed in advance, of the profits.”

The workers get a share in the profit of the undertaking in a certain agreed percentage which is in addition to

the normal wages of the workers. The profit percentage is predetermined and may be given in cash or in the

form of shares. The percentage is often governed by the Payment of Bonus Act. If profit is given in the form

of shares, it is called co-partnership.

Advantages of Profit Sharing

The advantages of profit sharing are:

(a) Relations between labour and management improve because labour take interest in management.

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

129

(b) This method assumes that every worker contributes towards profit. It is applicable to all workers

irrespective of their efficiency. There is better employer-employee relationship.

(c) Labour morale is boosted. Hence, there is industrial peace.

(d) The employees get a share of profit, capital and control of the management. This creates a sense of

belonging to the company and the workers contribute to the welfare of the company. Materials and

plant will be handled with care, thus minimising loss and wastage.

(e) As bonus is given annually there will be low labour turnover.

(f) There is a direct relationship between profits and bonus. The workers try to increase bonus by

increasing efficiency and production.

(g) There is greater co-operation and better team spirit.

(h) Because of this scheme, quality workers are attracted to the industry.

Disadvantages of Profit Sharing

(a) The workers may not be satisfied as there is uncertainty of profits inspite of the efforts taken.

(b) Labour unions also oppose the scheme as it may alienate the workers from unions.

(c) Profits depend on many factors. Many are beyond the control of the workers and are not directly

related to their efforts.

(d) Apportionment of profit on a suitable basis is difficult.

(e) Once the workers are used to bonus, non-payment of bonus in a year may give rise to discontent.

Fluctuations in bonus also create bad industrial relations.

(f) The workers may not trust the figures presented by the employer and resort to strikes.

(g) The efficiency of worker may not increase as they have to wait for the year end to get reward for

their efforts.

(h) The efficiency may be adversely affected as both efficient and inefficient workers are treated alike.

(i) The employers object to this scheme as the workers share the profits but not the losses.

Co-partnership

Sometimes labour is given a share of the profit in the form of shares. This form of profit-sharing is called

labour co-partnership. It gives the labour a permanent interest in the future of their organisation. Hence, this

scheme is also known as co-ownership.

Though the employees get part of the capital and profits accruing thereon, these shares may or may not

carry the voting rights. The employees may freely deal with these shares or a few restrictions may be placed

on them. Sometimes, employers may be given a loan to buy the company’s shares.

Advantages of Co-partnership

(a) Because the employees have a share in the capital, they have a greater sense of belonging and

hence they evince more interest in the concern.

(b) It reduces labour turnover.

(c) As the employees contribution to the profit of the concern is recognised, their morale is high.

EP-CMA

130

Disadvantages of Co-partnership

(a) Efforts and rewards are not properly related.

(b) The importance of incentive is reduced as date of payment is too far.

(c) It does not differentiate between efficient and inefficient workers.

(d) Misunderstanding between employee and employer may arise because employees cannot verify

the shares allotted to them.

OTHER NON-MONETARY INCENTIVE SCHEMES

These are also known as psychological incentives. This benefit is given to all employees in the organisation.

These are provided free or employees may partially contribute towards them. These benefits are not given

for any specific job done rather these are conditions and terms of employment. Examples of non-monetary

incentives are:

(a) Health and safety benefits.

(b) Favorable working conditions.

(c) Cheap grains.

(d) Housing facility.

(e) Subsidised canteen.

(f) Sports and recreational facilities.

(g) Welfare measures.

(h) Medical facilities for the individual and family.

(i) Education (free or subsidised) to employees and their dependents.

(j) Leave travel facilities

(k) Pension, contribution to P.F., gratuity.

(l) Subsidized excursions and tours.

(m) Free tea, milk, snacks etc.

(n) Free uniforms, protective clothing etc.

Because some of the incentives are obligatory under law or given as matter of convention, they cannot be

called incentives even though the employer incurs extra expenses to provide them.

The merits of the scheme are:

(a) A good reputation is created for the undertaking and hence best labour is attracted.

(b) It reduces labour turnover.

(c) It reduces absenteeism.

(d) It encourages employees’ loyalty to the concern.

(e) It makes the employment attractive.

(f) It helps to build a happy, contended and satisfied staff.

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

131

Illustration 3

Three workers  X, Y and Z - work in a factory. The following particulars apply to them:

Normal rate per hour

`

4.00

Piece rate

`

3.00 per unit

Standard 2 units per hour

In a 40 hour week, the production of the workers is as follows:

X 50 units

Y 80 units

Z 120 units

Calculate the earnings of the workers under (a) Taylor differential piece rate system, (b) Merrick differential

piece rate system, and (c) Gantt’s task bonus system. Also show cost per unit under these methods.

Notes:

(a) The two rates under Taylor’s system have been found as follows:

Low piece rate = 83% of

`

3.00 =

`

2.50 (approx.)

High piece rate = 175% of

`

3.00 =

`

5.25

(b) Below standard time, wages are guaranteed under Gantt’s task bonus system. At standard, 20%

bonus is allowed in time wages and above standard, wages are allowed for standard time for actual

output with a bonus of 20% of time wages has been allowed.

Solution:

Taylor System Merrick System Gantt System Workers Output

(Units)

Effici-

ency (%)

Earnings

`

Cost per

Unit `

Earnings

`

Cost per

Unit `

Earnings

`

Cost per

Unit `

X 50 62.5 125 2.50 150 3.00 160 3.20

Y 80 100 420 5.25 264 3.30 192 2.40

Z 120 150 630 5.25 432 3.60 288 2.40

Illustration 4

In a factory Bedaux Point Premium System is in operation. The following are the particulars with regard to a

job in a factory:

Allowed time for the job 600 minutes (or B’s)

Time taken 480 minutes (or B’s)

Rate

`

12.00 per hour

Calculate bonus and earnings.

Solution:

Earnings (When 75% scheme is adopted)













×

+×=

60

RP

100

75

RT

EP-CMA

132

00.12

60

480600

100

75

00.128 ×













−

+×=

=

`

96.00 +

`

18.00

=

`

114.00

Earnings (When 100% scheme is adopted)













×

+×=

60

RP

100

75

RT

00.12

60

120

00.128 ×+×=

=

`

96.00 +

`

24.00 =

`

120

(T = 480 mts ÷ 60 = 8 hours)

Illustration 5

The following particulars apply to a particular work situation:

Standard time allowed 6 hours

Rate per hour Re. 10.00

Actual time taken by

Worker P - 8 hours

Worker Q - 6 hours

Worker R - 4 hours

Calculate the wages of the workers under Barth Premium System. Also calculate labour cost per hour.

Solution:

Remuneration under Barth Premium System will be calculated as follows:

Total wages =

)timeStandardtakenTime( ×

Hourly Rate

Worker P’s remuneration:

(

68 ×

)10.00 =

`

69.30

Worker Q’s remuneration:

(

66 ×

)10.00 =

`

60.00

Worker R’s remuneration:

(

64 ×

)10.00 =

`

49.00

Labour cost per hour

Total wages paid =

`

178.30

No. of hours worked = 18 hrs.

Labour cost per hour =

`

178.30 ÷ 18 =

`

9.90.

Illustration 6

From the following information, calculate the bonus and earnings under Emerson Efficiency Bonus Plan:

Standard output in 12 hours ... 48

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

133

Actual output in 12 hours ... 42

Time rate

`

7.50 per hour

If the actual output is 60 units, what will be amount of bonus and earnings?

Solution:

Under Emerson Efficiency Bonus Plan earnings will be calculated as follows:

E = T x R + P (T x R)

P (bonus percentage) will vary as follows:

Efficiency Bonus

(i)

Below 66-2/3% efficiency Time wages. No bonus.

(ii)

66-2/3% to 100% efficiency A bonus increasing from 0.01% to 20% above basic

wages on 100% efficiency.

(iii)

Over 100% A bonus of 20% above basic wages plus 1% for

each 1% increase in efficiency.

Efficiency in terms of output =

output Standard

outputActual

× 100

=

48

42

× 100 = 87.5%

Bonus percentage at 87% efficiency is 7.56 and at 88% efficiency is 8.32, given in Emerson Bonus

Percentage Table. Thus at 87.5% efficiency we can take bonus percentage as 7.94 (average of 7.56 and

8.32%). Bonus will, therefore, be

=

5.712

100

94.7

××

=

`

7.15

Earnings = 12 × 7.5 +













×× 5.712

100

94.7

= 90.00 + 7.15 =

`

97.15

(b) If the actual output in 12 hours is 60 units, efficiency will be:

= 125%

Bonus percentage = 20% + (125 − 100) x 1%

= 20 + 25 = 45%

Bonus =

100

45

x 12 x 7.5 =

`

40.50

Earnings = 12 × 7.5 +

= 90.00 + 40.50 =

`

130.5

100

48

60

×













×× 5.712

100

45

EP-CMA

134

Illustration 7

The existing incentive system of a certain factory is:

Normal working week 5 days of 9 hours plus 3 late shifts of

3 hours each

Rate of payment Day work =

`

10.00 per hour

Late shift =

`

15.00 per hour

Additional bonus payable

`

25.00 per day shift

`

15.00 per late shift

Average output per operative

for 54 hours week i.e., including

3 late shifts 120 articles

In order to increase output and eliminate overtime it was decided to switch on to a system of payment by

results. The following information is obtained:

Time rate (as usual)

`

10.00 per hour

Basic time allowed for 15 articles 5 hours

Piece-work rate Add: 20% to piece

Premium Add: 50% to time

You are require to show:

(i) hours worked;

(ii) weekly earnings;

(iii) number of articles produced; and

(iv) labour cost per article for one operative under the following systems:

(a) Existing time rate.

(b) Straight piece-work.

(c) Rowan system.

(d) Halsey-Weir.

Assume that 135 articles are produced in a 45-hour week under (b), (c) and (d) and that the worker earns

half the time saved under the Halsey-Weir System. The additional bonus under the existing system will be

discontinued in the proposed incentive scheme.

Solution:

(a) Existing Time Rate

`

Weekly wages: 45 hrs. @

`

10.00 per hour 450.00

9 hrs. @

`

15.00 135.00

Day shift bonus 5 x 25.00 125.00

Late shift bonus 3 x 15.00 45.00

755.00

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

135

(b) Peice Rate System

`

Basic time: 5 hours for 15 articles

∴ Cost of 15 articles 50.00

Add: 20% 10.00

60.00

Rate per article

`

60.00 ÷ 15 =

`

4.00

Articles produced in a week = 45 x 15/5 = 135

Hence, earnings = 135 x

`

4.00 =

`

540.00

(c) Rowan Premium System

Basic time = 5 hrs. for 15 articles

Adding 50% = 7.5 hrs. for 15 articles

∴ Time for producing one article = 7.5 ÷ 15 = 30 mts.

∴ Time allowed for 135 articles = 67.5 hrs.

Actual time taken for 135 articles - 45 hrs.

∴ E = RT +

= 45 × 10 +

= 450 + 150 =

`

600

(d) Halsey-Weir Premium System

E = RT + 50% (S − T) × R

= 45 × 10 + 50% (67.5 − 45) × 10

= 450 + 112.5 =

`

562.5

The other requirements of the question have been shown in the following table:

Methods

(a) (b) (c) (d)

(i) Hours worked 54 45 45 45

(ii) Weekly earnings (

`

) 755 540 600 562.5

(iii) Articles produced 120 135 135 135

(iv) Labour cost per article (

`

) 6.29 4.00 4.44 4.17

Illustration 8

In a factory guaranteed wages at the rate of

`

18.00 per hour are paid in a 48-hour week. By time and motion

study it is estimated that to manufacture one unit of a particular product 20 minutes are taken. The time

allowed is increased by 25%. During one week Abraham produced 180 units of the product. Calculate his

wages under each of the following methods: (a) Time rate, (b) Piece-rate with a guaranteed weekly wage, (c)

Halsey premium bonus and (d) Rowan premium bonus.

RT

S

TS

××













−

1045

5.67

45 5.67

××













−

EP-CMA

136

Solution:

(a) Time Rate:

E = T x R

= 48 x 18.00 =

`

864.00

(b) Piece Rate:

E = N x R, where N means number of units produced

and R means rate per unit.

= 180 x 7.5 =

`

1,350

Rate per unit will be found as follows:

Time taken 20 minutes

Incentive allowance 25% 5 minutes

Standard time to manufacture one unit 25 minutes

Rate per minute =

60

00.18

`

=

`

0.3

Rate per unit =

`

0.3 x 25 =

`

7.5

(c) Halsey Premium Bonus Plan:

E = T x R + ½ (S – T) x R

= 48 x 18.00 + ½ (75 – 48) x 18.00

= 864.00 + 243 =

`

1,107.00

Standard time:

One unit takes 25 minutes

180 units should take 180 x 25 = 4,500 minutes

or

75

60

500,4

=

hours

(d) Rowan Premium Bonus Plan:

E = T x R +

S

TS

−

x T x R

= 48 x

`

18.00 +

75

27

x 48 x

`

18.00

=

`

864.00 +

`

311.00 =

`

1175.00

Illustration 9

A worker under the Halsey Plan of remuneration has a day rate of

`

1,200 per week of 48 hours, plus a cost

of living bonus of

`

10 per hour worked. He is given an 8-hour task to perform, which he accomplishes in 6

hours. He is allowed 30% of the time saved as premium bonus. What would be his total hourly rate of

earnings, and what difference would it make if he were paid under the Rowan Plan?

Solution:

Standard Time : 8 hours

Time taken : 6 hours

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

137

Standard Wages :

Day rate =

`

1200 for 48 hours =

`

25 per hour

Cost of living bonus =

`

10 per hour

Premium bonus = 30% of time saved

Under Halsey Method :

Wages for 6 hours @

`

25 per hour

`

150

Cost of living bonus for 6 hours @

`

10 per hour

`

60

Bonus : (Time saved x Rate x 30%) = 2 x

`

25 x 30%

`

15

Earnings for 6 hours

`

225

Hourly rate =

`

225/6 =

`

37.5

Under Rowan Method:

Wages for 6 hours @

`

25 per hour

`

150.00

Cost of living bonus for 6 hours @

`

10 per hour

`

60.00

Bonus : (Time saved/Standard Time ) x Time taken Hourly Rate

= (2 /8) x 6 x 25 =

`

37.50

Earnings for 6 hours

`

247.50

Hourly rate =

`

247.5/6 =

`

41.25

Under Rowan plan the worker would get

`

3.75 more per hour.

Illustration 10

Calculate total monthly remuneration of three workers X, Y and Z from the following data:

(a) Standard production per month per worker - 1,000 units.

Actual production during the month

X - 850 units, Y - 750 units and Z - 950 units.

(b) Piece work rate

`

1.00 per unit (actual production).

(c) Additional production bonus is

`

50 for each percentage of actual production exceeding 80% over

standard (e.g., 79% nil, 80% nil, 81% -

`

50, 82% -

`

100 and so on).

(d) Dearness pay fixed

`

200 per month.

Solution:

Standard production 1,000 units

X’s actual production = 850 units

X’s production efficiency =













1000

850

100 = 85%

Y’s actual production = 750 units

Y’s production efficiency =













1000

750

100 75%

EP-CMA

138

Z’s actual production = 950 units

Z’s production efficiency =













1000

950

100 = 95%

X will be entitled to a bonus of

`

50 x 5 =

`

250

Z will be entitled to a bonus of

`

50 x 15 =

`

750

Y will get no bonus as his production efficiency is below 80%.

The earnings of the workers will be as follows:

X Y Z

`

Piece wage (850x

`

1.00) (750x

`

1.00) (950x

`

1.00)

=850 =750 =950

Bonus 250 — 750

Dearness Allowance 200 200 200

1,300 950 1,900

Illustration 11

A manufacturer introduces new machinery into his factory with the result that production per worker is

increased. The workers are paid by results, and it is agreed that for every 2% increase in average individual

output, an increase of 1% on the rate of wages will be paid. At the time the machinery is installed, the selling

price of the products falls by 8-1/3%.

Show the net saving in production costs which would be required to offset the losses expected from reduced

turnover and bonus paid to workers.

1st period 2nd period

Number of workers 175 125

Number of articles produced 8,400 7,000

Wages paid

`

16,800

Total Sales

`

37,800

Solution:

Sales value of 8,400 articles = 37,800

Sales value of 7,000 articles =

0007

4008

80037

,

×

=

`

31,500

Fall in sales value = 31,500 ×













×

100

1

3

25

=

`

2,625

175 workers produce = 8,400 units

125 workers will produce =

125

×

175

`8400

But the actual production is 7,000 units = 6,000 units

Increase in labour efficiency =

100

0006

0001

×

,

= 16.667%

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

139

Increase in wage rate will be 16.667% ÷ 2 = 8.33%

Wages for 175 workers =

`

16,800

Wages for 125 workers =

175

80016,

× 125

=

`

12,000

Increase in wages =

100

1

3

25

000,12 ××

`

=

`

1,000

Hence, total consists of:

`

(a) Fall in sales values 2,625

(b) Increase in wages 1,000

3,625

Therefore, net saving in production costs will have to be

`

3,625.

Illustration 12

From the following comparative statements of the years 2012 and 2013:

(a) Find out whether the year 2013 showed an overall better performance or otherwise:

(b) Possible causes of difference:

2012 2013

Wages incurred

`

2,80,000

`

5,10,000

Units produced 16,000 25,000

Average number of workers 225 400

(Assume production of only one quality and same machinery conditions in both years).

Solution:

(Better performance implies increase in labour productivity, which can be expressed as output per man).

2012 2013 % change

Average wage per man

`

1,244

`

1,275 (+) 2.5

Annual output per man (units) 71.2 62.5 (–) 12.09

Labour cost per unit

`

17.5

`

20.40 (+) 16.57

Output per man decreased by 12.09%, labour cost per unit increased by 16.57%, which may be due to

general rise in wages which has gone up by 2.5%.

Illustration 13

A factory undertakes production to customers’ specifications. Worker ‘A’ was entrusted with the production of

100 units of product “X” in 50 hrs. and worker ‘B’ was asked to produce 50 units of produce “Y” in 100 hrs.

The ruling rate of wages is

`

2.50 per hour which is guaranteed irrespective of standard of efficiency. If the

work given is finished within the time allotted the workers get

`

3 per hour for time taken. Time saved is

rewarded by an incentive bonus at 50% of wages earned per hour. A completes the job in 40 hrs. and B in

60 hrs.

Assuming that the prevailing overhead rate is

`

5 per labour hour, indicate the impact of the system of wages

coupled with the incentive scheme on the profits of the company as compared to a straight piece rate at

`

3

EP-CMA

140

per hour.

The fixation of hourly rates is understood to provide for a saving of 20% of the time fixed when the work is

carried out by an efficient worker under normal conditions.

Have you any comments to make on the basis of the rate fixation in these circumstances?

Solution:

Cost of Conversion of Products X and Y

l. Straight Piece Rate

Product X Product Y

(100 units) (50 units)

Time allowed 50 hrs. 100 hrs.

Wages @

`

3 per hour

`

150

`

300

Overhead @

`

5 per hour on 40 hours and

80 hours respectively (on the assumption

that there will be a saving of 20% in the time

allowed for the jobs)

`

200

`

400

`

350

`

700

ll. Incentive Bonus System if adopted by the Company

`

Wages for time taken @

`

3 per hour 120 180

Incentive bonus @

`

1.50 per hour of time saved 15 60

Total wages 135 240

Overhead @

`

5 per hour of time taken 200 300

Cost of conversion 335 540

Saving

15

160

The company will save in terms of costs if Incentive Bonus System is introduced.

(i) When there is no incentive system

Product X Product Y

(100 units) (50 units)

Time allowed 50 hrs. 100 hrs.

Labour @

`

3 per hour

`

150

`

300

Overhead for time allowed @

`

5 per hour

`

250

`

500

Labour and overhead cost at normal hours

at straight piece rate

`

400

`

800

(ii) When there is incentive system

Time allowed 40 hrs. 60 hrs.

Wages @

`

3 per hour

`

120

`

180

Bonus

`

15

`

60

Total Wages

`

135

`

240

Overhead @

`

5 per labour hour taken

`

200

`

300

Total Cost

`

335

`

540

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

141

Illustration 14

The following particulars of Soni & Co. relate to the year ending 31st March, 2013 for 30 workers:

`

Basic wages 50,000

Dearness allowance 25,000

Night shift allowance 9,600

Overtime allowance 7,000

PF deposit 12,000

ESI contribution 2,808

Recovery towards house rent 10,200

Recoveries against supply of goods 16,000

Expenditure for employees’ amenities 4,730

PF is paid in equal share by the employer and employee. Contribution to ESI is in proportion of 7:5 by the

employer and employee respectively. The workers are entitled to 5% of the total days worked as leave on full

pay. The number of days worked in a year is 300. Normal idle time is 5%. Assuming that all the items are

evenly spread over all the days in a year find out total wages, total cash payment to workers and per hour

per labour wages. The daily working hours are 8.

Solution:

Calculation of Total Cash Payment

Total wages paid to 30 workers in 2012-13

`

Wages

50,000

D.A.

25,000

Night shift allowance

9,600

Over time allowance

7,000

91,600

Less : Deduction :

P.F. 6,000

ESI 1,170

Rent Recovery 10,200

Recovery of provisions 16,000

33,370

Total Cash Payment

58,230

Total Wages :

Base Wages, DA, etc.

91,600

PF contribution (Employer’s share)

6,000

ESI Contribution (Employer’s share)

1,638

Expenditure on amenities

4,730

Total Wages

1,03,968

Cost per man-hour

No. of hours worked during the year: 300 x 8 x 30

72,000

Less :

5% leave with pay :

3,600

5% for idle hours (5% of 72,000-3,600) 3,420

7,020

64,980

Cost per man–hour = 1,03,968 ÷ 64,980 =

`

1.60

EP-CMA

142

MISCELLANEOUS TOPICS

Holiday Pay

Employees are entitled to certain holidays. Certain compulsory holidays are declared by the Government

while others are decided by agreement between the management and the workers.

Though these costs are unproductive, they are treated as part of production costs. The two methods of

charging these overheads are:

(a) They can be treated as overheads and charged to the output for the year.

(b) The direct labour cost can be inflated to cover this cost.

Night Shift Allowance

Workers are sometimes asked to work at night to clear the heavy work load. Additional payment is made for

night shifts and this extra cost is charged to general works overhead. When night shift is worked at the

specific request of the customers, such extra cost is charged to that job and the selling price is suitably

inflated.

Fringe Benefits

According to Hoge “a fringe is a labour cost which is in addition to the regular wage, salary for the time

worked. A fringe may accrue from company policy, a bilateral agreement or legal requirements. It may take

the form of monetary payments, services, privileges, benefits or awards. It represents pay for hours not

worked or extra pay for hours worked. It is a labour cost for which no tangible return may be apparent to the

employer but which in turn provides the employee with extra pay, added security or more desirable working

conditions.” Examples are insurance facilities, pension facilities, medical benefits, etc.

The treatment can be as follows:

(i) Recover fringe benefits as direct charge by using inflated or supplementary labour cost rate.

(ii) If it can be identified with departments, treat it as departmental overhead.

(iii) If identification is not possible, treat it as general overhead.

Leave with Pay

Leave with pay benefit is given to workers, e.g., casual leave, earned leave or privilege leave, sick leave, etc.

These can be availed when necessary. They can also be accumulated for some years or encashed. It is

treated in the same way as holiday pay.

Learner’s Wages

Learner’s wages can be treated as direct labour if it can be identified with the jobs/product. Most of the firms

prefer to treat them as overheads as learners take more time than a trained worker and the jobs will be

unnecessarily loaded if treated as direct labour.

Training Cost

Training schemes are available in almost all manufacturing organisations. This cost includes salaries of

teaching staff, trainees, cost of tools, materials, etc., The total cost of the training section can be apportioned

to various production departments on the basis of trainees in each department.

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

14

3

The training section can be credited with any productive work done by the trainees and the corresponding

amount is debited to the concerned production order.

Casual Workers

A casual worker is one who is not a regular employee of the concern. This situation arises when there is an

emergency or somebody is on leave. The quality of work done may not be upto the requisite standard due to

lack of training. Hence, a person engaged once should be engaged again if he works satisfactorily. Work

done by them should be duly certified.

Time sheets can also be maintained and their work properly checked. This cost is treated as an overhead

cost.

The steps to be followed while appointing casual workers are:

(a) Records of appointments and discharge should be maintained.

(b) Such workers should be appointed only after the relevant executive has approved it.

(c) The Time Keeping Department and Wages Department should be sent a copy of the appointment

letters to record attendance and facilitate wage payment.

(d) The time to do jobs should be matched with attendance time.

(e) The time keeping department and wages department should be intimated in case of dismissal or

termination of service of the casual workers.

Out Workers

Sometimes workers perform their duties outside the company’s premises on behalf of the organisation.

Hence, the work done and payment made has to be controlled.

Workers may work at their homes either with their tools or with the tools provided by the company. Control

can be exercised in the following ways:

(i) The delivery of work should be within the stipulated time.

(ii) Issue or return of material should be properly controlled.

(iii) Finished product should be carefully inspected and defective or sub-standard work should be

rejected.

Workers can be sent to site to perform their work. They are known as site workers. Examples are workers

employed in construction work, gas and electricity concerns, etc. When a large number of employees are

engaged in site work, strict control should be exercised on attendance and wage payment. Time recorded

can be checked at the gate and the daily record of attendance can be sent to the accounting department

showing the number of workers employed. The period of employment and rates of wages should be

determined in advance. These should not be increased or altered without the sanction of the head office.

Wages should be calculated in the head office and the head office staff should make the payment. Issue of

identity card facilitates identification and avoids the inclusion of dummy workers. Works manager must pay

surprise visits to the site to check the attendance.

The site labour can also be controlled by estimating the total labour cost and the time required for each job

and comparing the total expenditure from period to period.

EP-CMA

144

LESSON ROUND UP

•

Direct labour cost is that portion of wages or salaries or salaries which can be identified with and charged to a single

cost unit.

•

Indirect labour costs are costs which are not identifiable with particular units of costs.

•

The term remuneration is used to cover the total monetary earnings of employees which includes wages according

to time or piece basis and other financial incentives.

•

Under time rate system of wage payment workers are paid according to time for which they work.

•

Under piece rate system wages are paid according to quantity of work done.

•

Incentive wage plans is a compromise between time rate and piece rate systems and incentives are provided to

workers to work hard. The employer as well as the workers share the benefit of time saved and both labour and

overhead costs are reduced.

•

Labour turnover is the rate of change in the composition of the labour force in an organization.

•

Idle time represents the time lost by workers who are paid on time basis.

•

The payroll is a record which shows details of the gross wages earned by each worker in a particular period, the

deductions made and the net wages payable. The payroll can be prepared at weekly, fortnightly or monthly periods.

It can be prepared department wise or shift wise.

SELF TEST QUESTIONS

1. Define labour. What is direct labour? What is indirect labour? Give examples. Explain how they are

treated in cost accounts.

2. Explain the different methods of time recording for workers.

3. What are the factors that you will take into account before adopting a particular system of wage

payment?

4. Explain the term “efficiency of labour”.

5. Discuss the various incentive schemes, their merits and demerits.

6. Discuss the various bonus systems.

7. What is profit sharing? How is it different from co-partnership?

8. What is idle time? Give its treatment in cost accounts.

9. Write short notes on:

(a) Labour turnover

(b) Idle time

(c) Overtime

(d) Casual workers

(e) Site workers.

10. Describe the preparation of payroll in a factory. What precautions will you take at the time of paying

wages?

Lesson 3 Labour Cost

145

11. Standard output in 10 hours is 240 units; actual output in 10 hours is 264 units. Wages rate is

`

10

per hour. Calculate the amount of bonus and total wages under Emerson Plan.

12. X, the proprietor of a small engineering workshop producing speciality product by employing 5

skilled workers is considering the introduction of some incentive scheme-either Halsey scheme or

Rowan scheme-of wage payment for increasing the labour productivity to cope with the increased

demand for the product by about 25%. He feels that if the proposed incentive scheme could bring

about an average 20% increase over the present earnings of the workers, it would act as a sufficient

incentive for them to produce more and he has accordingly given this assurance to the workers.

As a result of this assurance, an increase in productivity has been observed as revealed from the

following figures for the current month:

Hourly rate of wages (guaranteed)

`

5.00

Average time for producing 1 piece by one worker as

per the previous performance (X desires that this

time be considered as time allowed for the purpose

of incentive scheme) 2 hours

No. of working days in the month 25

No. of working hours per day for each worker 8

Actual production during the month 625 pieces

You are required to:

(a) Calculate effective rate of earnings per hour under Halsey scheme and Rowan scheme.

(b) Calculate the savings to X in terms of direct labour cost per piece under the above schemes.

(c) Advise X about the selection of the scheme to fulfill his assurance.

13. Calculate the normal and overtime wages payable to a workman from the following data:

Days Hours worked

Monday 8 hrs.

Tuesday 10 hrs.

Wednesday 9 hrs.

Thursday 11 hrs.

Friday 9 hrs.

Saturday 4 hrs.

Normal rate -

`

5.00 per hour

Normal working hours - 8 hours per day.

Overtime rate - Upto 9 hours in a day at single rate and over 9 hours in a day at double rate;

OR

Upto 48 hours in a week at single rate and over 48 hours at double rate, whichever is more

beneficial to the workmen.

14. An employee working under a bonus scheme saves 4 hours in a job for which the standard time is

32 hours. Calculate the rate per hour worked and wages payable for the time taken under the

following alternative scheme (award rate is

`

10 per hour).

EP-CMA

146

(a) Employee receives an increase in the hourly rate based on percentage that the time saved

bears to the time set.

(b) A bonus of 10% on award rate is payable when standard time (namely, 100% efficiency) is

achieved plus a further bonus of 1% on award rate for each 1% in excess of 100% efficiency.

Lesson 4

Direct Expenses and Overheads

•

Meaning and Nature of Direct Expenses

•

Accounting treatment and control of Direct

Expenses

•

Meaning and Nature of Indirect Expenses

•

Accounting Treatment of Indirect

Expenses

•

Meaning, Collection and Classification of

Overheads

•

Functional Analysis:

- Factory Overheads

- Administration Overheads

- Selling & Distribution Overheads

- Research & Development Overheads

•

Behavioural Analysis:

- Fixed Overheads

- Variable Overheads

- Semi variable Overheads/ Step Cost

•

Methods of segregating semi-variable

costs into fixed and variable costs

•

Advantages of classification of overheads

into fixed and variable

•

Procedure For accounting and control of

overheads

•

Allocation of Overheads

•

Apportionment of Overheads

- Primary distribution

- Secondary Distribution

•

Methods of Re-apportionment or Re-

distribution

•

Absorption of Overheads

•

Methods Of Absorbing Production

Overheads

•

Over Or Under Absorption Of Overheads

•

Treatment of factory overheads,

Administrative & Selling & distribution

overheads

•

Control of Overheads

•

Preparation of Cost Sheet

•

Lesson Round Up

•

Self-Test Questions

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

An overhead cost is defined as `expenditure on

labour, materials or services that cannot be

economically identified with a specific saleable cost

unit’. Overhead cost comprises indirect material,

indirect labour and indirect expanses. The indirect

nature of overheads means that they need to be

‘shared out’ among the cost units as fairly and as

accurately as possible.

The first stage in the analysis of overheads is the

selection of approximate cost centres. The selection

will depend on a number of factors including the level

of control required and the availability of information.

The next stage in the analysis is to determine the

overhead cost for each cost centre. This is achieved

through the process of allocation and apportionment.

Cost allocation is possible when we can identify a

cost as specifically attributable to a particular cost

centre. Cost apportionment is necessary when it is

not possible to allocate a cost to a specific cost

centre. In this case the cost is shared out over two

or more cost centres according to the estimated

benefit received by each cost centre.

After completing this chapter, one should be able to :

1. Prepare cost estimates for allocation and

apportionment of overheads, including

between reciprocal service departments.

2. Calculate direct, variable and full costs of

products, services and activities using

overhead absorption rates to trace indirect

costs to cost units.

3. Explain the use of cost information in

pricing decisions, including marginal cost

pricing and the calculation of `full cost’

based prices to generate a specified return

on sales or investment.

“Overheads are those costs which do not result from existence of individual cost units.” —Harper

LESSON OUTLINE

EP-CMA

148

DIRECT EXPENSES

Expenses may be defined as “the costs of services provided to an undertaking and the notional costs

of the use of owned assets”.

Direct expenses are those expenses which are directly chargeable to a job account. Direct expenses may be

defined as those expenses which are easily identifiable and attributable to the individual units or jobs. All

expenses other than the direct material or direct labour which are incurred for a particular product or process

are termed as direct expenses. Expenses which can be identified with a territory, a customer or product can

be considered as direct expenses. Expenses in relation to a department may be direct but are indirect in

relation to the product.

*Direct expenses are defined as “costs, other than materials or wages, which are incurred for a specific

product or salable service.”∗

∗∗

∗

There is no hard and fast rule regarding classification of expenses into direct and indirect. Direct expenses

are specific charges directly attributable while the indirect expenses are apportioned on suitable basis. Some

items by nature are direct but treated as indirect because the amounts chargeable are either of small or

negligible value. It is difficult and costly to analyse them and hence treated as indirect expenses, e.g. nuts,

screws, thread, glue, etc.

Nature of Direct Expenses

Direct expenses is directly attributed to cost unit/cost center. It includes all direct cost except the direct

material and direct labour.

Types of Direct Expenses are as under:

(i) Royalties if it is charged as a rate per unit.

(ii) Hire charges of plant if used for a specific job.

(iii) Sub-contract or outside work, if jobs are sent out for special processing.

(iv) Salesman’s commission if it is based on the value of units sold.

(v) Freight, if the goods are handled by an outside carrier whose charges can be related to individual

units.

(vi) Travelling, hotel and other incidental expenses incurred on a particular contract.

(vii) Cost of making a design, pattern for a specific job.

(viii) Cost of any special process not forming part of the normal manufacture like water proofing for

canvas cloth.

Accounting Treatment of Direct Expenses

Direct expenses are chargeable expenses and are debited to Direct Expenses Account in financial books.

∗

The term ‘direct expenses’ has been excluded from prime cost as per latest CIMA terminology, i.e. according to CIMA, prime cost is

“the total cost of direct material and direct labour”.

Lesson 4 Direct Expenses and Overheads

149

Accounts are prepared in columnar form so that the analysis can be made and the expenses can be related

to the specific job/contract.

In cost accounting records, the direct expenses account is credited and the concerned account is debited.

The cost department should verify from the accounts department that the expenses are properly booked.

These expenses should not be mixed up with overheads.

Control of Direct Expenses

Items under this head are few. They form a small part of the total cost. Such costs are controlled by fixing

standards. The actual should be compared with the standard. The causes of variations, if any, should be

ascertained and necessary corrective action should be taken.

INDIRECT EXPENSES

Indirect expenses are expenses other than direct expenses. These refer to those expenses which cannot be

directly, conveniently and wholly allocated to cost centres or cost units. E.g. factory rent & insurance, power,

general repairs etc.

Nature of Indirect Expenses

Indirect costs are “those which are incurred for common or joint objectives and therefore cannot be identified

readily and specifically with a particular cost unit/cost centre.

A few examples of such expenses are as follows:

(i) Rent, rates and insurance of factory and office.

(ii) Depreciation, repairs and maintenance of plants, machinery, furniture, building etc.

(iii) Power, fuel, lighting, heating of factory and office.

(iv) Advertising, legal charges, audit fees, bad debts, etc.

Expenses excluded from costs

The following types of items are not included in cost of production or sales:

(a) Matters of pure finance including interest paid and received, dividend received on investments, rent

received, profit or loss on sale of investments or company’s property, transfer fees received etc.

(b) Appropriation of profits including income-tax paid, dividends paid, transfer to sinking fund, general

reserve, excessive depreciation, goodwill or other fictitious assets written off, etc.

Notional Expenses

Expenses that are usually incurred should be included in costs even if a particular firm is not required to pay

for such expenses. Rent for own premises is an example. If a firm occupies its own buildings, it does not pay

any rent for this, but for costing purposes, an appropriate amount of rent should be included in costs.

Accounting Treatment of Indirect Expenses

Indirect expenses may or may not be allocated. For example, office administrative costs are indirect

expenses, but are rarely allocated to anything, unless it is corporate overhead and is being allocated to

subsidiaries. These types of indirect expenses are charged to expense in the period incurred. Indirect

expenses that are factory overhead will be allocated to those units produced in the factory during the same

period that the indirect expenses were incurred, and so will eventually be charged to expense when the

products to which they were allocated are sold.

EP-CMA

150

REVIEW QUESTIONS

OVERHEADS

Overhead may be defined as the cost of indirect material, indirect labour and such other expenses, including

services, as cannot be conveniently charged direct to specific cost centres or cost units. It should be noted

that direct costs(materials, labour, etc.) are associated with individual jobs or products. Indirect expenses or

overheads are not associated with individual jobs or products; they represent the cost of the facilities

required for carrying on the operations.

CIMA, London defines overhead as “Expenditure on labour, materials or services which can not be

economically identified with a specific saleable cost unit”.

In modern industrial undertakings, overheads are a very large proportion of the total cost and, therefore,

good deal of attention has to be paid to them. It will be a big mistake to pay attention only to direct cost. The

problem in respect of overheads arises from the facts that the amount of overheads has to be estimated and

that too before the concerned period begins (since it is only continuous costing that is found useful) and that,

the amount has to be distributed over the various cost units, again on an estimated basis.

COLLECTION OF OVERHEADS

When classification of overheads on some scientific and consistent basis is complete, overheads are

regularly collected i.e. estimated under standing order code numbers allotted to them. For the collection of

overhead expenses the following are some of the primary documents used:-

(i) Stores requisitions

(ii) Job cards or tickets

Overheads

Indirect

materials

Indirect

wages

Indirect

Expenses

Re-write the following sentence after filling-in the blank spaces with

appropriate word:

Royalties payable on use of Patents, Copyrights etc. is an example of

___________

Correct answer: Direct (chargeable) Expenses

Lesson 4 Direct Expenses and Overheads

151

(iii) Invoices or purchase voucher

(iv) Salary or pay bills

(v) Cash book

(vi) Subsidiary records.

Indirect materials originate in store requisitions. Each stores requisitions note specifies the standing order

number and the department for which the stores are drawn. The departmentalisation is done at sources. A

material issue analysis sheet is prepared from store requisitions. At the end of each month, the total of these

items is charged or debited to Factory Overhead Control Account and credited to Stores Ledger Control

Account.

Indirect labour is obtained in the first place, from the time cards and pay rolls. Wages paid to workers against

each standing order number can be obtained from the time tickets or job cards. From the time tickets, the

wages analysis sheet is prepared each month and at the end of the month, the total is debited to Factory

Overhead Control Account and credited to the Wages account.

Indirect expense can come from several sources such as cash book, factory journals or vouchers. In the

case of cash outlays, the entry may come from the cash book. Expenses such as depreciation and other

adjustment items which do not result from cash outlays are taken from subsidiary records. At the end of the

period, the total of factory overheads would be debited to Factory Overhead Control Account and credited to

the Cost Ledger Control Account.

Some expenses such as power, lighting, heating, rent, etc. may not be solely applicable to factory overheads,

but should be apportioned between Factory expenses, Selling expenses and Administration expenses.

Each item of overheads may be seen and proper estimate of the amount for the coming period may be

prepared. Another way, more expeditious, is to analyse the total overheads into fixed and variable and then

arrive at the estimate by adjusting the variable amount by the expected change in output and the fixed

amount by such changes as employment of more people, increments, etc.

CLASSIFICATION OF OVERHEADS

The process of classification of overheads involves:

(a) the determination of the classes or groups in which the costs are sub-divided; and

(b) the actual process of classification of the various items of expenses into one or another of the

groups.

The classification of overheads expenditure depends upon the type and size of a business and the nature of

the product or service rendered.

Generally overheads are classified on the following basis:

(1) Functional analysis

(2) Behavioural analysis

1. Functional Analysis

Overheads can be divided into the following categories on functional basis:

(a) Manufacturing or production or factory overheads: Manufacturing overheads includes all

EP-CMA

152

indirect costs (indirect material, indirect labour and indirect expenses) incurred for operation of

manufacturing or production division in a factory. It is also know as, factory overheads, works

overheads, factory cost or works cost etc.

(b) Administration overheads: It is the sum of those costs of general management, secretarial,

accounting and administrative services, which cannot be directly related to the production,

marketing, research or development functions of the enterprise. Administration overheads include

the cost of formulating the policy, directing the organisation and controlling the operations of an

undertaking which is not related directly to production, selling, distribution, research or development

activity or function.

(c) Selling and distribution overheads: Selling overheads is the cost of seeking to create and

stimulate demand and of securing orders. It comprises the cost to products of distributors for

soliciting and recurring orders for the articles or commodities dealt in and of efforts to find and retain

customers. Distribution overhead is the expenditure incurred in the process which begins with

making the packed product available for dispatch and ends with the making the reconditioned

returned empty package, if any, available for re-use. It includes expenditure incurred in transporting

articles to central or local storage. It also comprises expenditure incurred in moving articles to and

from prospective customer as in the case of goods on sale or return basis. In case of gas, electricity

and water industries distribution means pipes, mains and services which may be regarded as

equivalent to packing and transportation.

(d) Research and development overheads: Research overhead is incurred for the new product, new

process of manufacturing any product. The development overhead is incurred for putting research

result on commercial basis.

Examples of different types of overheads

Production Administration Selling and Distribution Research and

Development

(1) (2) (3) (4)

(a)

Indirect materials:

Lubricants, cotton

waste, stationery,

repair materials, etc.

Indirect materials:

Office stationery and

printing

Indirect materials:

(i) Stationery and

printing

(ii) Catalogues

(iii) Price list etc.

Indirect materials:

(i) Stationery and

printing

(ii) Cost of raw material

used in research

(b)

Indirect labour,

salaries and wages

of:

Indirect labour,

salaries of:

Indirect labour,

salaries and

commission of:

Indirect labour,

salaries and

commission of:

(i) Supervisors,

foremen and

chargehands

(ii) Inspectors

(iii) Storekeepers

(iv) Maintenance

(i) Office clerks

(ii) Secretaries

(iii) Accountants

(iv) Executives

(v) Managers and

General Manager

(i) Salesmen

(ii) Travellers

(iii) Agents

(iv) Demonstrators and

technical advisors to

customers

(i) Staff engaged in

research and

development

Lesson 4 Direct Expenses and Overheads

153

labours

(v) Tool room

(vi) Operators

(vi) Employees of

drawing office

(vii) Watch and ward

staff

(viii) Welfare staff

(ix) Works clerical

staff

(x) Works executives

including works

managers, etc.

(vi) Directors, etc. (v) Sales manager

(c)

Indirect Expenses: Indirect Expenses: Indirect Expenses: Indirect Expenses:

(i) Rent, rates and

insurance of

factory

(ii) Power, lighting

and heating of

factory

(iii) Depreciation,

repairs and

maintenance of

plant, machinery,

factory furniture

and fixture and

factory buildings

(iv) Welfare expenses

like canteen,

medical,

recreation service

etc.

(i) Rent, rates and

insurance of

office

(ii) lighting, heating

and cleaning of

office

(iii) Depreciation,

repairs and

maintenance of

office, furniture,

equipment and

buildings

(iv) Sundry

expenses like

legal charges

audit fees etc.

(i) Rent, rates and

insurance of

showroom, sales

office, finished

goods, godown, etc.

(ii) Advertising

expenses

(iii) Expenses on

consumers service,

after sales service

etc.

(iv) Sundry expenses

like discount, bad

debts etc.

(i) Rent, rates and

insurance of

research center

(ii) Subscription to

research

associations

(iii) Depreciation, repairs

and maintenance of

building and

research equipment,

plant etc.

(iv) Patent fees

2. Behavioural Classification

Based on the behavioual patterns, overheads can be classified into the following categories:

(i) Fixed overheads

(ii) Variable overheads

(iii) Semi-variable overheads.

EP-CMA

154

Fixed Overheads:

Fixed overheads expenses are those which remain fixed in total amount with increases or decreases in

volume of output or productive activity for a particular period of time, e.g. managerial remuneration, rent of

building, insurance of building, plant etc. Fixed overhead costs remain the same from one period to another

except when they are deliberately changed, e.g. increments granted to staff. The incidence of fixed overhead

on unit cost decreases as production increases and vice versa.

Fixed overheads are stated to be uncontrollable in the sense that they are not influenced by managerial

action. However, it should be noted that an expenditure is fixed within specified limit relating to time or

activity. In a hypothetical organisation no expenditure remains unchanged for all time. Therefore, it is true to

state that “fixed overhead is fixed within specified limit relating to time and activity”.

Variable Overheads:

Variable overhead costs are those costs which vary in total in direct proportion to the volume of output. For

instance, if the output increases by 5%, the variable expenses also increase by 5%. Correspondingly, on a

decline of the output it will also decline proportionately. Examples are indirect material and indirect labour.

Variable overhead changes in total but its incidence on unit cost remains constant.

Semi-variable Overheads/ Step Cost:

These overhead costs are partly fixed and partly variable. They are known as semi-variable overheads

because they contain both fixed and variable element. Semi-variable overheads do not fluctuate in direct

proportion to volume. They are also called Step Costs It may remain fixed within a certain activity level, but

once that level is exceeded, they vary without having direct relationship with volume changes. Examples are

depreciation, telephone charges, repair and maintenance of buildings, machines and equipment etc.

Semi-variable expenses usually have two parts—one fixed and other variable. For instance depreciation

usually depends on two factors—one time (fixed) and other wear and tear (variable). The two together make

depreciation (as a whole) semi-variable. An analytical study thus can make it possible for all semi-variable

expenses to be split up into two parts. Fundamentally, therefore, there are only two types of expenses—fixed

and variable.

Methods of segregating semi-variable costs into fixed and variable costs

Separation of semi-variable cost into fixed and variable can be done by applying any of the following

methods:

(i) Graphical Presentation Method: Under this method, a good number of observations in respect of the

total costs at different levels of activity or output are plotted on a graph with the output on the X-axis and their

corresponding costs on the Y-axis. Then by judgment a line of ‘best fit’ which passes through all or most of

Lesson 4 Direct Expenses and Overheads

155

the points is drawn. Points falling far behind the line are erratic and are not considered for this purpose. The

point at which the cost line touches the Y-axis is taken to be the fixed element of cost. From this point a line

parallel to X-axis is drawn to represent fixed cost line. The variable cost, at any level of output, is derived by

deducting this fixed cost element from the total cost.

Illustration 1

You are given the following information:

Month Output Units Indirect Expenses (

`

)

April 1,500 6,000

May 1,800 6,600

June 2,100 7,200

July 2,820 8,640

August 2,220 7,440

Plot the above information on the graph to draw a ‘line of best fit’.

Solution:

8,000

Variable cost

6,000

Indirect 4,000

expenses

(

`

) Fixed cost

2,000

500 1,000 1,500 2,000 2,500 3,000

Output (Units)

(ii) Least square method: In this method ‘line of best fit’ is drawn for a number of observations with the help

of statistical method. This method uses the linear equation y=mx+c, where ‘m’ represents the variable

EP-CMA

156

element of cost per unit, ‘c’ represents the total fixed cost, ‘y’ represents the total cost and ‘x’ represents the

volume of output. The relationship between fixed and variable cost can be illustrated on the basis of the

above example.

Month Units of

Output

Indirect

Expenses

(

`

)

Deviation of

output from

the mean

(2088)x

Deviation of

expenses

from the

mean

(7176)y

x

2

xy

April 1,500 6,000 – 588 – 1176 3,45,744

6,91,488

May 1,800 6,600 – 288 – 576 82,944

1,65,888

June 2,100 7,200 + 12 + 24 144

288

July 2,820 8,640 +732 +1464 5,35,824

10,71,648

August 2,220 7,440 +132 + 264 17,424

34,848

∑ =x

2

9,82,080

∑

=

xy

19,64,160

Variable charges:

2

x

xy

∑

=

080829

1606419

,,

= `2

Fixed expenses = Mean expenses – (Mean output × Variable charges per unit)

= `7,176 - (2,088 x `2)

= `7,176 - 4,176

= `3,000

The line on the graph will, therefore, be represented by:

y = mx + c

y = 2x + 3,000 where,

y = total cost, x = number of units.

(iii) High and low points method: Under this method the output at two different levels i.e. high or low point

is compared with the amount of expenses incurred at these different periods. The example above can be

worked out as follows:

Output Indirect

Expenses

`

Highest 2,820 8,640

Lowest 1,500 6,000

Difference 1,320 2,640

Variable cost per unit =

320,1

640,2`

= `2 per unit.

Lesson 4 Direct Expenses and Overheads

157

(iv) Analytical method: Under this method, the degree of variability is estimated for each item of semi-

variable expenses. For instance, some semi-variable expenses may have 20% variability while others may

vary to the extent of 70%.

(v) Comparison by period or level of activity method: Under this method output and expenses at two

levels are compared. Fixed overhead remain fixed and variable overhead can be obtained by the following

formula:

Change in

the amount

of expens

es

Change in activity or quantity

Advantages of classification of overheads into fixed and variable

(i) Effective cost control: The classification of expenses into fixed and variable helps in controlling

expenses. Fixed expenses are incurred by management decisions and are incurred irrespective of the

output, hence it is more or less uncontrollable. Variable expenses vary with the volume of activity and the

responsibility for incurring this expenditure is determined in relation to output.

(ii) Preparation of budget estimates: Unless a distinction between fixed and variable expenses is made, it

would not possible to prepare a flexible budget in a given period on the basis of different levels of activity.

For instance in March 2013, the output of the factory is 2,000 units and the expenses are as follows:

`

Fixed 10,000

Variable 8,000

Semi-variable (40% fixed) 9,000

27,000

In April 2013, the output is likely to increase by 500 units. In this case the budget or estimate expenses will

be as follows:

`

Fixed 10,000

Variable

500,2

000,2

000,8

×

`

10,000

Fixed (40% of ` 9,000) 3,600

Variable

500,2

000,2

000,9

×

− 3,600``

6,750

30,350

(iii) Ascertaining Marginal Cost: Decision Making: A number of decisions of management depend upon a

comparison of (a) the extra amount that would have to be spent if an additional activity is undertaken or an

alternative course is adopted, and (b) measurement of the benefits resulting therefrom. The extra amount

that will have to be spent will only be the variable costs (including materials, labour and variable expenses)

and not fixed expenses. Therefore, a distinction between fixed and variable expenses is essential. Marginal

costs (or variable costs) afford a number of advantages, in fixing prices in a special market, for a special

customer and during a slump or a period of depression, decision on make or buy, shut down or continue etc.

The main principle is that if the price available is above the variable or marginal cost, profits would increase

or losses would decrease because of additional units sold. This is because fixed expenses would not

increase.

EP-CMA

158

Suppose, a factory having a capacity of 10,000 units per month produces and sells 8,000 units @ `20 each,

the total costs being:

`

Variable 1,00,000

Fixed 40,000

1,40,000

On a sale of 8,000 units @ `20 (total sales `1,60,000), there would be a profit of `20,000. If another 2,000

units can be sold @ `15, say to the Government, the profit would increase to `25,000. Thus:

`

Variable Costs

00010

0008

000001

,

,,

×

1,25,000

Fixed Costs 40,000

1,65,000

Sales: 8,000 units @ `20 1,60,000

2,000 units @ `15 30,000 1,90,000

Profit 25,000

Profit maximisation is possible only if marginal and fixed costs are distinguished. The advantages of marginal

costs will be discussed in a later study.

PROCEDURE FOR ACCOUNTING AND CONTROL OF OVERHEADS

The procedure for accounting and control of overheads involves the some steps which is described as under:

An overview of the overhead apportionment rate

Classification of

Overheads

Collection of

Overheads

Distribution of overheads

to production and service

cost centers

Re-distribution from

service cost center to

production cost centers

Absorption of overheads

by production units

Lesson 4 Direct Expenses and Overheads

159

ALLOCATION AND APPORTIONMENT OF OVERHEADS (DEPART-MENTALISATION OF

OVERHEADS)

Most of the manufacturing process functionally are different and performed by different departments in a

factory. Where such a division of functions has been made, some of the departments would be engaged in

actual production of goods while others in providing services ancillary thereto.

For the efficient working, a factory is divided into a number of sub-divisions. Such sub-divisions are referred

to as departments. In other words, departmentalisation of overhead means dividing the factory into several

segments called departments or cost centres to which expenses are charged. This sub-division is done in

such a manner so that each department represents a division of activity of the organisation such as repairs

department, power department, tools department, stores department, cost department, cash department, etc.

The following factors are taken care of while dividing an organisation into number of departments:

(i) Every manufacturing process is divided into its natural divisions in order to maintain natural flow of

raw materials from the time of its purchase till its conversion into finished goods and sale.

(ii) The sequence of operations are taken into consideration while determining the location of various

departments.

(iii) Division of responsibility as far as possible should be clear, without ambiguity and dual control.

The departments in a factory can be broadly categorised into the following types:

(i) Producing or manufacturing departments: A manufacturing or producing department is one in

which manual/machine operations and other process of production of articles or commodities take

place. The number of such departments will depend upon the nature of industry, type of work

performed and the size of the factory.

(ii) Service departments: These departments are not directly engaged in production but they render

special type of service for the benefit of other departments.

(iii) Partly producing departments: In every organisation a few departments such that it is not

possible to place these departments into a particular category, since they fall within the purview of

both categories, i.e. producing and service departments. For example, if a toolroom manufactures

some special tools for utilisation in the main job orders, it is acting as a productive department

though it is a service department.

Advantages of Departmentalisation:

(i) It segregates factory overhead costs and computes the total cost of each service departments.

(ii) It makes possible the establishments of control to keep costs at a minimum.

(iii) Ascertainment of cost of different departments helps in computing the cost of different jobs or

products which pass through these departments.

ALLOCATION OF OVERHEADS

After having collected the overheads under proper standing order numbers the next step is to arrive at the

amount for each department or cost centre. This may be through allocation or absorption. According to the

Chartered Institute of Management Accountants, London, cost allocation is “that part of cost attribution which

charges a specific cost to a cost centre or cost unit”. Thus, the wages paid to maintenance workers as

obtained from wages analysis book can be allocated directly to maintenance service cost centre. Similarly

indirect material cost can also be allocated to different cost centres according to use by pricing stores

requisitions.

EP-CMA

160

APPORTIONMENT OF OVERHEADS

Apportionment refers to the distribution of overheads among departments or cost centres on an equitable

basis. In other words, apportionment involves charging a share of the overheads to a cost centre or cost unit.

CIMA, London has defined it as “that part of cost attribution which shares costs among two or more cost

centres or cost units in proportion to the estimated benefit received, using a proxy”. Apportionment is done in

case of those overhead items which cannot be wholly allocated to a particular department. For example, the

salary paid to the works manager of the factory, factory rent, general manager’s salary etc. cannot be

charged wholly to a particular department or cost centre, but will have to be charged to all departments or

cost centres on an equitable basis.

1. Primary distribution of overheads

Primary distribution of overhead involves allocation or apportionment of different items of overhead to all

departments of a factory. This is also known as departmentalisation of overheads. While making primary

distribution the distinction between production departments and service departments disregarded since it is

of little use. The distribution of different items of overhead in different departments is attempted on some

logical and reasonable basis.

Basis of apportioning overhead expenses: It is stated that the total overhead expenses of a department

comprises direct overhead expenses incurred in the departments itself as well as the apportioned overhead

expenses of other service departments. Expenses directly incurred in the departments which are jointly

incurred for several departments have also to be apportioned e.g. expenses on rent, power, lighting,

insurance etc. In other words, common expenses have to be apportioned or distributed over the departments

on some equitable basis. The following basis are most commonly used for apportioning items of overhead

expenses among production and service departments.

Basis Items of Overheads

1. Floor area Rent, rates and taxes paid for the building, air

conditioning, etc.

2. No. of employees or wages of each

department

Group insurance, canteen expenses, E.S.I.

contribution, general welfare expenses, compensation

and other fringe benefits, supervisions etc.

3. Capital values Insurance and depreciation of plants, machinery and

equipments.

4. Direct labour hours Works manager’s remuneration, general overtime

expenses, cost of inter-department transfers etc.

5. No. of light points Electric light

6. Horse power of machines or machine

hours

Electric power

7. Audit fee Sales or total cost

8. Value or weight of direct material Stores overheads

9. Weight, volume, tonne, mile. Delivery expenses

Lesson 4 Direct Expenses and Overheads

161

2. Re-apportionment of service department overheads (Secondary Distribution)

Normally products do not pass through service departments, but service departments do benefit the

manufacture of products. Therefore, it is logical that product cost should bear and equitable share of the cost

of service departments. The process of redistribution of the cost of service departments among the

production departments is known as secondary distribution.

Criteria for secondary distribution

(i) Service or use method: Under this method overheads are distributed over various production

departments on the basis of service received. The greater is the amount of service received by a

production department, the greater should be the share to be apportioned to that department. This

criterion has greatest applicability in cases where overhead costs can be easily and directly traced

to departments receiving the benefits. Since this method is based upon the extent of the benefit

received by a department, the expenses are equitably apportioned. This method is considered to be

fair as it takes into account the time element and consistent results.

(ii) Analysis or survey: In certain cases it may not be possible to measure exactly the extent of benefit

which the various departments receive as this may vary from period to period. Therefore, overheads

are apportioned on the basis of analysis and survey of existing conditions. This basis of

apportionment includes arbitrary elements.

(iii) Ability to pay: This method presumes that higher the revenue of a production department, higher

should be the proportionate charge for services. This method is simple to apply but it is generally

considered inequitable because it penalises the efficient and profitable units of a business to the

advantage of the inefficient ones.

(iv) Efficiency or incentive method: This basis facilitates scientific distribution of service department

cost to production departments. Under this method the apportionment of expenses is made on the

basis of production targets. If the target is exceeded the unit cost reduces indicating a more than

average efficiency. Opposite is the effect if the assumed levels are not reached. Thus, the

department whose sales are increasing is able to show a greater profit and thereby is able to earn

greater goodwill and appreciation of the management.

(v) General use of indices: If data relating to actual services rendered can not be obtained in some

situations this method is adopted. The index selected is closely related to assured flow of service

department cost to production departments. For instance, the service of cost accounting department

can be apportioned to production departments on the basis of number of employees in each

department.

Following is a list of basis, which are frequently used for apportionment of cost of service departments

among production departments:

Service department costs Basis of apportionment

1. Maintenance department Hours worked for each department.

2. Employment/personnel department

Rate of labour turnover or number of employees in each

department.

3. Payroll or time department Direct labour hours, machine hours number of employees.

4. Stores keeping department No. of requisitions, quantity or value of materials.

EP-CMA

162

5. Welfare department No. of employees in each department.

6. Internal transport service Truck hours, truck mileage or tonnage.

7. Building service department Relative area of each department.

8. Power house Floor area, cubic contents.

Methods of Re-apportionment or Re-distribution

At first expenses of all departments are compiled without making a distinction between production and

service departments but, then, the expenses of the service departments are apportioned among the

production departments on a suitable basis. It is also possible that expenses of one service department may

also be apportioned in part to another service department to arrive at the total expenses incurred on the

latter department, which will then be distributed among production department.

Following are the methods of re-distribution of service department costs to production departments:

(i) Direct distribution method: Under this method, the cost of service department are directly

apportioned to production departments, without taking into consideration any service from one

service departments to another service department.

(ii) Step method: In this method the cost of most serviceable department is first, apportioned to other

service departments and production departments. The next service department is taken up and its

cost is apportioned and this process is going on till the cost of last service department is

apportioned. The cost of last service department is apportioned among production departments

only.

(iii) Reciprocal service method: This method gives cognizance to the fact that where there are two or

more service departments, they may render service to each other and therefore these inter-

departmental services are to be given due weight in distributing the expenses of service

departments. There are three methods available for dealing with inter service department transfer :

(a) Simultaneous equation method: Under this method, the true cost of service departments are

ascertained first with the help of simultaneous equations. These are then distributed among the

production departments on the basis of given percentages.

(b) Repeated distribution method: According to this method service department costs are

apportioned over other departments, production as well as service according to the agreed

percentages and this process is repeated until the total costs of the service departments are

exhausted or the figures become to small to be considered for further apportionment.

(c) Trial and error method: In this method the cost of one service department is apportioned to

another service department. The cost of another service department plus the share received

from the first service department is again apportioned to first service department and this

process is continued until the balancing figure becomes nil. For instance, suppose there are two

service departments x and y. These service departments render service to each other. Cost of

service department x will be distributed to service department y. Again cost of service

department y plus the share from service department x will be apportioned to x. The amount so

apportioned to x will continue to be repeated till amount involved becomes negligible.

Lesson 4 Direct Expenses and Overheads

163

Illustration 2

A company’s production for the year ending 30.3.2014 is given below:

Items Production Departments Office Stores Work- Total

P

1

P

2

P

3

shop

Direct Wages

`

20,000 25,000 30,000 - - - 75,000

Direct Materials

`

30,000 35,000 45,000 - - - 1,10,000

Indirect Materials

`

2,000 3,000 3,000 1,000 2,000 2,000 13,000

Indirect Wages

`

3,000 3,000 4,000 10,000 10,000 5,000 35,000

Area in Square Metres 200 250 300 150 100 250 1,250

Book value of Machinery

`

30,000 35,000 25,000 - - 15,000 1,05,000

Total H.P. of Machinery 15 20 25 - - 5 65

Machine Hours Worked 10,000 20,000 15,000 - - 5,000 50,000

General Expenses:

(i) Rent `12,500

(ii) Insurance `1,050

(iii) Depreciation 15% of value of machinery

(iv) Power `3,800

(v) Light `1,250

You are required to prepare an overhead analysis sheet for the departments showing clearly the basis of

apportionment when necessary.

Solution:

Overhead Analysis Sheet

Items Basis of Production Departments Service Departments Total

Apportionment P1 P2 P3 Office Stores Workshop

`

Direct Materials Actual 2,000 3,000 3,000 1,000 2,000 2,000 13,000

Direct Wages Actual 3,000 3,000 4,000 10,000 10,000 5,000 35,000

Rent Area 2,000 2,500 3,000 1,500 1,000 2,500 12,500

Insurance Value of

Machinery 300 350 250 - - 150 1,050

Depreciation -do- 4,500 5,250 3,750 - - 2,250 15,750

Power H.P.

machine 877 1,169 1,462 - - 292 3,800

Light Area 200 250 300 150 100 250 1,250

12,877 15,519 15,762 12,650 13,100 12,442 82,350

Apportionment of

workshop O.H. Machine

hour 2,765 5,530 4,147 - - (-)12,442 -

Apportionment of Direct

Stores O.H. material 3,573 4,168 5,359 - (-)13,100 - -

Apportionment of

Office O.H. Direct

wages 3,373 4,217 5,060 ( - ) 12,650 - -

22,588 29,434 30,328 - - - 82,350

EP-CMA

164

Illustration 3

A factory has two service departments P and Q and three production departments A, B, and C. You are

supplied with the following information:

Particulars Total Production Departments Service departments

A B C P Q

`

Rent 12,000 2,400 4,800 2,000 2,000 800

Electricity 4,000 800 2,000 500 400 300

Indirect labour 6,000 1,200 2,000 1,000 800 1,000

Depreciation of machinery 5,000 2,500 1,600 200 500 200

Sundries 4,500 910 2,143 847 300 300

Estimated working hours 1,000 2,000 1,400 4,000 2600

Expenses of Service Departments P and Q are apportioned as under:

A B C P Q

P 30% 40% 20% — 10%

Q 10% 20% 50% 20% —

You are required to show the apportionment of overheads under different methods of apportioning inter-

service departments overheads and also to work-out the production hour rate recovery of overheads in

departments A, B and C.

Solution:

Department distribution summary

Item Total Production Departments Service Departments

A B C P Q

`

Rent 12,000 2,400 4,800 2,000 2,000 800

Electricity 4,000 800 2,000 500 400 300

Indirect labour 6,000 1,200 2,000 1,000 800 1,000

Depreciation of machinery 5,000 2,500 1,600 200 500 200

Sundries 4,500 910 2,143 847 300 300

31,500 7,810 12,543 4,547 4,000 2,600

(i) Simultaneous equation method:

p = total overhead of Deptt. P

q = total overhead of Deptt. Q

p = 4,000 +

100

20

q ...(i)

q = 2,600 +

100

10

p ...(ii)

So, 10p = 40,000 + 2q ...(iii)

10q = 26,000 + p ...(iv)

Lesson 4 Direct Expenses and Overheads

165

By rearranging

10p - 2q = 40,000 ....(v)

- p + 10q = 26,000 ...(vi)

Multiplying (vi) by 10

10p - 2q = 40,000 ...(vii)

- 10p + 100q = 2,60,000

98q = 3,00,000

q = 3,061

and, p = 4,000 +

5

1

(3,061)

= 4,000 + 612 = 4,612.

Overhead distribution summary

Particulars A B C

(`) (`) (`)

As per distribution summary 7,810 12,543 4,547

Service department P (90% of `4,612) 1,384 1,845 922

Service department Q (80% of `3,061) 306 612 1,531

9,500 15,000 7,000

No. of working hours 1,000 2,500 1,400

Rate per hour 9.50 6.0 5.0

(ii) Repeated distribution method:

Secondary distribution summary

Particulars A B C P Q

(`) (`) (`) (`) (`)

As per summary 7,810 12,543 4,547 4,000 2,600

Service department P 1,200 1,600 800 – 4,000 400

Service department Q 300 600 1,500 600 – 3,000

Service department P 180 240 120 – 600 60

Service department Q 6 12 30 12 – 60

Service department P 4 5 3 – 12

Total 9,500 15,000 7,000

Working hours 1,000 2,500 1,400

Rate per hour 9.50 6.00 5.00

(iii) Trial and error method:

Dept. P (`) Dept. Q (`)

As per summary 4,000 2,600

400 (10% of 4,000 of P)

(20% 3,000 of Q) 600

60 (10% of 600 of P)

(20% 60 of Q) 12

1 (10% of 12 of P)

(4,612) (3,061)

EP-CMA

166

The total cost of service department of P and Q shall subsequently be apportioned to production department

A, B and C.

ABSORPTION OF OVERHEADS

Absorption of overheads refers to charging of overheads to individual products or jobs. The overhead

expenses pertaining to a cost centre are ultimately to be charged to the products, jobs etc. which pass

through that cost centre. For the purpose of absorption of overhead to individual jobs, processes or products,

overheads absorption rates are applied. The overhead rate of expenses for absorbing them to production

may be estimated on the following three basis.

(i) The figure of the previous year or period may be adopted as the overhead rate to be charged on

production in the current year.

(ii) The overhead rate for the year may be determined on the basis of the estimated expenses and

anticipated volume of production or activity.

(iii) The overhead rate for the year may be determined on the basis of normal volume of output or

capacity of the business.

Actual and pre-determined overhead rate: The overhead absorption rate may be computed either based on

actual cost or on the basis of estimated cost:

Actual Overhead Rate

This is also known as historical overhead rate. This rate is obtained by dividing the overhead expenses

incurred during the accounting period by the actual quantum (quantity/value) of the base selected. This rate

is determined as follows:

Actual overhead rate =

periodtheforbasetheofvalueorquantutyActual

periodtheforoverheadActual

This method suffers from the following limitations:

(i) Actual overhead rate cannot be determined until the end of the period.

(ii) Seasonal or cyclical influences cause wide fluctuations in the actual overhead cost and actual

volume of activity.

(iii) Actual cost is generally used for comparison with the predetermined figures for the purpose of

control. Thus, it is useful only when compared with the established norms or standards.

Pre-determined Overhead Rate

Pre-determined overhead rate is determined in advance of the actual production and is computed by dividing

the budgeted overhead expenses for the accounting period by the budgeted base for the period i.e.

Pre-determined overhead rate =

periodtheforbaseBudgeted

periodtheforoverheadBudgeted

This computation of a pre-determined overhead rate is more practical and has the following advantages:

(i) Pre-determined overhead rate facilitates product cost determination immediately after production is

completed.

Lesson 4 Direct Expenses and Overheads

167

(ii) In those concerns where the budgetary control system is in operation, all the data for the purpose of

calculation of pre-determined overhead rate is available without any extra clerical cost.

(iii) It is useful when cost plus contracts are undertaken.

(iv) Cost estimating and competitive pricing offer ideal situations for use of pre-determined overhead

rates.

Blanket and Multiple Overhead Rates

Blanket overhead rate refers to the use of one single or general overhead rate for the whole factory.

The blanket rate is used in those factories :

(a) Where only one major product in continuous process is being produced.

(b) Where several products are produced it can be applied only if:

(i) all products pass through all departments; and

(ii) all products are processed for the same length of time in each department.

This rate is calculated as follows:

Blanket overhead rate =

periodtheforBase

factoryentire the forCostOverhead

When different rates are computed for each producing department, service department, cost centre, each

product or product line, each production factor, and for fixed overhead and variable overhead, then they are

known as multiple rates. It is calculated as under:

Overhead rate =

base ngCorresponi

centre cost each to dapportione and allocated cost Overhead

METHODS OF ABSORBING PRODUCTION OVERHEADS

Before we describe the various methods, it would be better to know how to judge whether a method will give

good results or not. The method selected for charging overheads to jobs or products should be such as will

ensure:

(i) that the total amount charged (or recovered) in a period does not differ materially from the actual

expenses incurred in that period. In other words, there should not be any material over or under-

recovery of overheads; and

(ii) that the amount charged to individual jobs or products is equitable. In case of factory overheads,

this means—

(a) that the time spent on completion of each job should be taken into consideration;

(b) that a distinction should be made between jobs done by skilled workers and those done by

unskilled workers. Usually, the latter class of workers need more supervision, as they cause

greater wear and tear of machines and tools and waste a larger quantity of materials. Hence

jobs done by such workers should bear a correspondingly higher burden for overheads; and

(c) that jobs done by manual labour and those done by machines should be distinguished. It stands

to reasons that no machine expenses should be charged to jobs done by manual labour.

EP-CMA

168

In addition, the method should :

(i) be capable of being used conveniently; and

(ii) yield uniform results from period to period as far as possible any change that is apparent should

reflect a change in the underlying situation, such as substitution of human labour by machines.

Several methods are commonly employed for computing the appropriate overhead rate to be employed. The

common methods are as under:

(1) Percentage of direct materials cost.

(2) Percentage of prime cost.

(3) Percentage of direct labour cost.

(4) Direct labour hour rate.

(5) Machine hour rate.

(6) Combined machine hour and labour hour rate.

(7) Rate per unit of production.

1. Percentage of direct material cost

In this method the cost of direct materials used in the manufacture of a product is used as the base in

absorption of factory overheads. The overhead rate is calculated on the basis of the following formula:

Overhead rate =

cost material Direct

overheadsFactory

× 100

This method gives satisfactory results in the following circumstances:

(i) Where the proportion of overheads to the total cost is significant.

(ii) Where the prices of materials are stable.

(iii) Where the output is uniform i.e. only one kind of article is produced.

Advantages:

(i) The calculation of overhead rate is simple as the cost of direct material is easily available.

(ii) This method is more suitable when prices of materials are fairly stable.

(iii) Overhead cost pertaining to upkeep and handling of materials can be absorbed equitably by this

method.

2. Percentage on prime cost

An actual or pre-determined rate of overhead absorption is calculated by dividing the overheads to be

absorbed by the prime cost incurred or expected to be incurred and expressing the result as a percentage.

This is calculated as follows:

Prime cost percentage rate =

100

costPrime

overheadsfactoryofAmount

×

This method has the advantage of simplicity and is applied because it considers both material and labour

which gives rise to overhead expenses.

Lesson 4 Direct Expenses and Overheads

169

These two methods are generally considered to be unsuitable on account of the following reasons.

(1) Manufacturing overhead expenses are firstly a function of time, i.e., time is the determining factor

for the incurrence and application of manufacturing overhead expenses. The overhead expenses,

specially manufacturing expenses, can in the ultimate analysis be regarded as expenditure incurred

in providing the necessary facilities and services to workers employed in the productive processes.

The question of facilities and services made available to workers naturally is dependent on the

length of the time during which the workers make use of these facilities. It may, therefore, be said

that the job or product on which more time has been spent would entail larger manufacturing

expenses than the job requiring lesser time. This factor is altogether ignored by the first method.

(2) When the overhead cost is allocated as a percentage of direct materials or prime cost, the same is

the determining factor. As a result, when there are two jobs, otherwise absolutely similar and

requiring same operational time but using materials having varying prices, their manufacturing

overhead cost would be different; these should not normally vary if time taken is the same.

The method of apportioning overhead costs on the basis of prime cost also does not take into

consideration the time factor. The fact that the amount includes labour cost over and above

materials cost, does not render the prime cost any more suitable; in fact, the results are liable to be

more misleading because of the cumulative error of using both the labour and materials cost as the

basis of allocation of overhead expenses, on neither of which they are dependent.

(3) There is no close or direct connection between the manufacturing expenses and the direct materials

cost or prime cost of jobs produced.

(4) Since material prices are prone to frequent and wide fluctuations, the amount of manufacturing

overheads recovered, if based on material cost or prime cost, also would fluctuate violently from job

to job and from period to period.

(5) The skill of the workers involved and whether machines were used or not, are ignored.

3. Percentage of direct labour cost

According to this method, the manufacturing overhead expenses are charged as a percentage of the direct

wages incurred on jobs. The formula for computing the percentage rate for a period is as follows:

Manufactur

ing overhe

ad expense

s

Direct wages or labour cost

× 100

The numerator for overhead expenses and the denominator for direct wages may be either an estimated

sum, actual amount or normal amount. As has been stated earlier, overhead rates are usually predetermined

and the use of actual figures is not very common.

This method also fails to give due recognition to the element of time which is of prime importance in the

accounting for and treatment of manufacturing overhead expenses except in so far as the amount of wages

is a product of the rate factor multiplied by the time factor. Thus, the time factor is taken to consideration only

indirectly or partially in the computation of the overhead percentage rate. This method, therefore, cannot be

depended upon to produce very accurate results where the same type of work is performed at the same time

by different type of workers, skilled and unskilled, with varying rates of pay. Also no distinction is made

between jobs done by manual labour and those done by machines.

Inspite of the inaccuracies which may arise under this method, it is widely used in actual practice, because it

is simple and does not involve much calculations; for in costing any job, the labour cost has to be

EP-CMA

170

ascertained anyhow. If, on the other hand, a more scientific method is employed, e.g., the labour hour or the

machine hour rate, which gives proper allowance to the time element, these would introduce more

complexities in the overhead accounting procedure. Thus, the advantage of elimination of a small error in

practice may be a heavy price to pay on account of introduction of complexities aforementioned. Also, under

this method, there is no large over or under recovery of overheads.

Advantages of Percentage of Direct Labour Cost

(i) The method is simple and economical to apply;

(ii) The time factor is given fair recognition;

(iii) Total expenses recovered will not differ much from the estimated figure since total wages paid are

not likely to fluctuate much.

Disadvantages of Percentage of Direct Labour Cost

(i) It gives rise to certain inaccuracies as the time factor is not being given adequate importance;

(ii) Where machinery is used to some extent in the process of manufacture, an allowance for such a

factor is not made; and

(iii) It does not provide for varying skills of workers.

It is possible to consider the time factor fully by ascertaining the factory overheads per productive labour

hour. Suppose the total of direct productive labour hours is 1,50,000 and the factory overheads total

`

3,00,000, then the productive labour hour rate is

`

2.

4. Direct labour hour rate

This method is a distinct improvement on the percentage of direct wages basis, as it fully recognises the

significance of the element of time in the incurring and application of manufacturing overhead expenses. This

method is admirably suited to operations which do not involve any large use of machinery. A direct labour

hour rate is calculated for each category of workers. The expenses incurred, other than wages paid to

workers, on each category of workers are listed and totalled for a period. The figure is divided by the number

of hours to be put in by that category of workers. Thus, full attention will be paid to the skill of the workers for

charging overheads. Productive labour hour rate is a variation of this method. It is computed by dividing the

total factory expenses for a period by the total number of hours put in by all the direct workers during that

period. Thus, this method, though making no allowance for the skill of workers, gives full recognition to the

time factor.

5. Machine hour rate

By the machine hour rate method, manufacturing overhead expenses are charged to production on the basis

of a number of hours a machine or machines are used on jobs or work orders. There is a basic similarity

between the machine hour and the direct labour hour rate methods, in so far as both are based on the time

factor. The choice of one or the other method is conditioned by the actual circumstances of the individual

case. In respect of departments or operations, in which machines predominate and the operators perform

relatively a passive part, the machine hour rate is more appropriate. This is generally the case for operations

or processes performed by costly machines, which are automatic or semiautomatic and where operators are

needed merely for feeding and tending them rather than for regulating the quality or quantity of their output.

In such cases, the machine hour rate method alone can be depended on to correctly apportion the

manufacturing overhead expenses to different items of production. What is needed for computing the

machine hour rate is to divide overhead expenses for a specific machine or group of machines for a period

Lesson 4

Direct Expenses and Overheads

171

by the operating hours of the machine or the group of machines for the period. It is calculated as follows:

Machine hour rate =

periodgivenaduringhoursMachine

overheadsofAmount

Usually, the computation is made on the basis of the estimated expense or the normal expense for the

coming period. Thus, the machine hour rate usually is a predetermined rate. Rate for each individual

machine may be worked out or, where a number of similar machines are working in a group, there may be a

single rate for the whole group.

STEPS FOR CALCULATION OF MACHINE HOUR RATE

The following steps are required to be taken for the calculation of machine hour rate:

(i) Each machine or group of machine should be treated as a cost centre.

(ii) The estimated overhead expenses for the period should be determined for each machine or group

of machines.

(iii) Overheads relating to a machine are divided into two parts i.e. fixed or standing charges and

variable or machine expenses.

(iv) Standing charges are estimated for a period for every machine and the amount so estimated is

divided by the total number of normal working hours of the machine during that period in order to

calculate an hourly rate for fixed charges. For machine expenses, an hourly rate is calculated for

each item of expenses separately by dividing the expenses by the normal working hours.

(v) Total of standing charges and machine expenses rates will give the ordinary machine hour rate.

There are two ways of computing the machine hour rate. According to the

first method

, only indirect

expenses directly or immediately connected with the operation of the machine are taken into account, e.g.,

power, depreciation, repairs and maintenance, insurance, etc.

The rate is calculated by dividing the

estimated total of these expenses for a period by the estimated number of operating hours of the

machines during the period.

It will be obvious, however, that in addition to the expenses stated above there may still be other

manufacturing expenses such as supervision charges, shop cleaning and lighting, consumable stores and

shop supplies, shop general labour, rent and rates, etc., incurred for the department as a whole and, hence,

not charged to any particular machine or group of machines. In order to see that such expenses are not left

out of production costs, one should include a proportionate amount of such expenses, in the expenses of

machines, before proceeding to compute the machine hour rate. Some people even prefer to add the wages

paid to the machine operator in order to get a comprehensive rate for working a machine for one hour. But it

is preferable to include the machine operator’s wages in direct wages.

Generally, all expenses are not allocated to machines; it will be, therefore, necessary to calculate another

rate for charging the general departmental expenses to production.

This second rate

will be calculated on

the basis of direct labour hours or wages. In effect, therefore, both the machine hour and the labour hour

rates will be applied, though separately.

As regards the superiority of one method over the other, it may be considered that the recovery of the direct

machine expenses without the proportion of the departmental expenses is likely to be more accurate than

when these are made part thereof, because the general departmental expenses are not connected with the

actual operation of the machines except remotely. Therefore, when merged with the direct machine

EP-CMA

172

expenses for the purpose of computing the machine hour rate, the resultant rate may not be as accurate or

as it would be otherwise. But the second method has the advantage of simplifying the routine and procedure

of applying manufacturing overheads in as much as only the machine hour rate has to be applied for

charging the general departmental overhead.

Advantages of Machine Hour Rate

(1) Where machinery is the main factor in production, it is usually the best method of charging machine

operating expenses to production.

(2) The under-absorption of machine overheads would indicate the extent the machines have been idle.

(3) It is particularly advantageous where one operator uses several machines (e.g., automatic screw

manufacturing machines) or where several operators are engaged in one machine (e.g., the belt press used

in making conveyor belts).

(4) It is a logical method and takes into consideration the time factor completely.

Disadvantages of Machine Hour Rate

(1) Additional data concerning the operating time of machines, not otherwise necessary, must be recorded

and maintained.

(2) As general data concerning rates for all the machines in a department may be suitable, the computation

of a separate machine hour rate for each machine or group of machines would mean additional work.

(3) It gives inaccurate result if hand labour is equally important.

If production is carried on in different departments having different degrees of mechanisation, the best

method would be the machine hour rate. The machine may be treated as a small department or cost centre

and the total cost for, say, a month may be divided by the effective hours for which the machine is usually

used. Suppose the total cost of running a machine, including, expenses on rent, lighting, insurance,

supervision, depreciation, power, etc. for a month is

`

12,600 and the total number of hours is 200 including

20 for maintenance, the machine hour rate is

`

70 i.e.

180

60012,

. If the machine is used on job for 5 hours, the

job should be charged with

`

350 i.e.

`

70 x 5 as production overheads.

[In small firms however, quite good results are obtained by working out the percentage of factory overheads

to direct wages or by dividing the total factory overheads by the total number of direct labour hours

(productive labour hour rate); production overheads may then be charged to jobs or products using one of

these methods. Office expenses are usually charged as a percentage of works cost].

Illustration 4

Following information is made available from the costing records of a factory:

(i) The original cost of the machine :

`

1,00,000

Estimated life : 10 years

Residual Value :

`

5,000

Factory operates for 48 hours per week : 52 weeks in a year

Allow 15% towards machine maintenance down time.

5% (of productive time assuming unproductive) may be allowed as setting up time.

(ii) Electricity used by the machine is 10 units per hour at a cost of 50 paise per unit.

Lesson 4

Direct Expenses and Overheads

173

(iii) Repair and maintenance cost is

`

500 per month.

(iv) Two operators attend the machine during operations alongwith two other machines. Their total

wages including fringe benefits, amounting to

`

5,000 per month is paid.

(v) Othe overheads attributable to the machine are

`

10,431 per year.

Using above data, calculate machine hour rate.

Solution

Computation of Machine Hour Rate:

Particulars Per Year Per Year

` `

Standing Charges

Wages for Operator (

`

5,000 × 12)/3 20,000

Other Overheads 10,431

Standing charges per hour (30,431/2,015) 15.10

Machine Exoences

[(1,00,000 – 5,000)/10]/2015 4.71

Repair and maintenance (5.00 × 12/2,015) 2.98

Electricity (10 units @ 50 paise) 5.00

Machine Hour Rate 27.79

Working Note:

Calculation of effective machine hours:

Total working hours per year (4 × 52) 2,496

Less: 15% maintenance time 375

2,121

Less: 5% for setting up time 108

Effective time 2,015

Illustration 5

The following information has been collected from the cost records of a small company for the year ended

31st March, 2014:

`

Direct Materials 2,50,000

Direct Labour 2,00,000

Direct Expenses 20,000

Works Overheads 1,60,000

Office Expenses 94,500

The total number of direct labour hours were 1,00,000 involving 40,000 machine hours. What should be the

price quoted for a job involving 2,000 labour hours @

`

3 per hour, 1,000 machine hours and

`

10,000 in

direct materials if the profit desired is 20% on the selling price?

EP-CMA

174

Solution:

It should be realised that three methods for apportioning production overheads are possible in the problem.

These are:

(i) Percentage on Direct Wages: 80%, i.e.,

100

000002

000601

×

,,

(ii) Productive Labour Hour Rate:

`

1.60, i.e.

`

1,60,000 ÷ 1,00,000

(iii) Machine Hours Rate:

`

4.00, i.e.

`

1,60,000 ÷ 40,000.

The total work cost comes to

`

6,30,000; office expenses are

`

94,500. The percentage of office expenses to

works cost is 15%, i.e.,

100

000,30,6

500,94

×

`

.

Statement of Cost of Job No.............

Percentage on Productive Labour Machine

Direct wages Hour rate Hour rate

` ` `

Direct Materials 10,000 10,000 10,000

Direct Labour 6,000 6,000 6,000

Prime Cost 16,000 16,000 16,000

Works Overhead

*

4,800 3,200 4,000

Works Cost 20,800 19,200 20,000

Office Expenses (15% of Works Cost) 3,120 2,880 3,000

23,920 22,080 23,000

Profit (25% on cost, or at 20% on selling price) 5,980 5,520 5,750

Price 29,900 27,600 28,750

One should note that by using a different method a different figure is obtained.

Illustration 6

Calculate the machine hour rate from the following:

`

Cost of machine 18,000

Cost of installation 2,000

Scrap value after 10 years 2,000

Rates and rent for a quarter for the shop 600

General lighting 200 p.m.

Shop supervisor’s salary

`

6,000 per quarter

Insurance premium for a machine 120 p.a.

Estimated repair 200 p.a.

Power 2 units per hour @

`

150 per 100 units

Estimated working hours p.a. 2,000

*

Respectively 80% of 6,000; 1.60 on 2,000 hours and 4.00 on 1,000 hours.

Lesson 4

Direct Expenses and Overheads

175

The machine occupies 1/4th of the total area of the shop. The supervisor is expected to devote 1/6th of his

time for supervising the machine. General lighting expenses are to be apportioned on the basis of floor area.

Solution:

Computation of Machine Hour Rate

Machine No.:

Per year Per hour

` `

Standing Charges:

Rent and Rates - 1/4th 600

General lighting as per floor area - (200x12)/4 600

Supervisor’s Salary (6,000x4)/6 4,000

Insurance premium 120

Total yearly standing charges 5,320

Hourly rate (5,320 ÷ 2,000) 2.66

Machine Expenses:

Depreciation Cost 18,000

Installation 2,000

Total 20,000

Less:

Scrap value 2,000

Amount to be written off 18,000 0.90

Repairs etc. —

`

200/2,000 hours 0.10

Power 2 units @

`

1.5 per unit 3.00

Machine Hour Rate

6.66

6. Combined machine hour and direct labour hour rate

Where the work is done partly by machines and partly by manual labour, a combination of Machine Hour and

Direct Labour Hour Method is used for the purpose of absorbing works expenses. Such expenses as are

inseparable from the running of the machine, are allocated on the basis of the Machine Hour Rate and the

other expenses which are not directly attached to the machines are allocated on the basis of the direct labour

hour basis. In fact, because of inconvenience, it may not be possible to cover all the items included in factory

overheads while computing machine hour and direct labour hour rates. For example, it is likely that such

overhead items as salary of the works manager or the factory clerical staff, stationery, etc. are left out. To

cover such items also there will be need to apply the method of the percentage of wages to overhead

(remaining items only). Suppose the various rates worked out are the following:

Machine A

`

35 per hour

Machine B

`

45 per hour

Skilled workers:

Category 1

`

3.00 per hour

Category 2

`

2.50 per hour

The total wages (direct) for a month come to

`

1,50,000 and the items of overheads not covered while

computing the rates mentioned above totalled

`

22,500 per month. For a job undertaken during the

month, the following information is available:

Time spent: Machine A 10 hours

Machine B 5 hours

EP-CMA

176

Skilled workers:

Category 1 25 hours

Category 2 20 hours

Total of direct wages

`

600

The overheads to be applied to the job will be

`

790 i.e.

`

Machine A 10 hours @

`

35 350

Machine B 5 hours @

`

45 225

Workers

Category 1 25 hours @

`

3.00 75

Category 2 20 hours @

`

2.50 50

"Remaining" overheads (15% on

`

600) 90

790

7. Rate per unit of production

This is also known as unit cost method. Under this method, actual or pre-determined overhead rate is

calculated by dividing the overheads to be absorbed by number of units produced or expected to be

produced. The rate is calculated as under:

Overhead rate =

producedunitsof.No

ensesexpOverhead

This method is very simple. The main limitation of this method is that it is restricted to those concerns which

produce only one item of product or a few sizes, quantities or grades of the same product.

OVER OR UNDER ABSORPTION OF OVERHEADS

Overhead expenses are usually applied to production on the basis of predetermined rates. The

predetermined rates may represent estimated, actual or normal costs. In either case, the amount of

expenses actually incurred and the amount of overheads applied to production will seldom be the same.

Some difference is inevitable. If the actual expenses fall short of the amount applied, there is said to be an

over-absorption of overheads, and, conversely, if the actual expenses exceed the amount applied to

production, it is a case of under-absorption. Such over or under-absorption may also be termed as overhead

variance, the amount of over-absorption being represented by the credit balance on the variance account,

and, conversely, the amount of under- absorption by a debit balance.

Treatment of under-absorption and over-absorption of overheads

The treatment will depend on the causes that led to under or over-absorption. The amount ascribable to

abnormal factors should be charged off to costing profit and loss account, otherwise costs previously arrived

at should be adjusted. The following are the main methods of disposal of under or over-absorption of

overheads.

Use of supplementary rates

Where the amount of under or over-absorption is considerable, the cost of jobs or products is adjusted by

means of a supplementary rate. This rate is determined by dividing the amount of under or overabsorption by

the base that was adopted for absorption. This rate may be positive or negative. The amount of under-

absorption is set right by a positive rate while a negative rate is determined for adjusting over-absorption.

Lesson 4

Direct Expenses and Overheads

177

The amount of under/over-absorption at the end of accounting period is adjusted in work-in-progress,

finished stock and cost of sales in proportion to direct labour hours, or machine hours or the value of the

balances in each of these accounts by use of supplementary rate. Subsidiary records or individual items are

not corrected. The amount so adjusted will be shown in the balance sheet as deductions from the work-in-

progress and finished stock.

Writing of to costing profit and loss account

Where the difference between actual or absorbed overheads is not large, the simple method is to write it off

to the costing profit and loss account. When there is under absorption due to idle facility, the concerned

amount is also written off in this manner, likewise, when there was wasteful expenditure due to lack of control

also.

Carrying of overheads

The balance of under/over-absorbed overheads at the end of the year is transferred to an overhead reserve

or suspense account and is carried forward to the next year account for absorption. This method is

preferably applied when the normal business cycle is more than one year and in the case of new projects

and schemes when the output is low in the initial stages of production and can not bear the entire share of

overhead.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

TREATMENT OF FACTORY OVERHEADS

Generally factory overheads form a substantial portion of the total overheads. It is very important therefore,

that such overheads are properly absorbed over the cost of production.

The following are the steps involved in accounting of overheads :

(i) The overhead expenses incurred by various departments are collected and accumulated under

appropriate standing order numbers in the overhead expenses ledger.

(ii) Allocation of overheads to production and service departments.

(iii) Apportionment of such overheads which can not be allocated.

(iv) Re-appointment of service department expenses to production departments.

(v) The total overhead expenses incurred by steps (i) to (iv) above represents the total overhead cost of

production departments.

(vi) An overhead rate is to be computed for each department on the basis of estimated, actual or normal

expenses and normal rate of working.

Re-write the following sentence after filling-in the blank spaces with

appropriate word:

When the under or over absorbed overheads amount is significant, it should

be disposed off by___________

Correct answer:

Using a supplementary rate

EP-CMA

178

(vii) The departmental overheads are applied or charged to the cost of products manufactured by

different departments at a rate determined in the foregoing manner.

(viii) Periodical comparison of actuals with absorbed expenses to find out under or over absorption of

overheads.

TREATMENT OF ADMINISTRATIVE OVERHEADS

As a class, administrative expenses bear only a remote relationship either to the manufacturing or to the

selling functions. The administrative divisions being responsible only for laying down general policies of the

company, its benefits, by and large, are intangible and hence difficult to measure. Also, administrative

expenses are generally period costs are constant; they are not affected by any fluctuations in the volume of

production of sales activity. A careful watch over the variable administrative expenses, e.g., postage,

stationery, office maintenance and upkeep, office transport, repairs, etc., is nevertheless necessary since top

executives may sometimes overlook the need for exercising strict economy in expenses with which they

themselves are concerned.

There are three distinct methods of accounting for administrative overheads.

Apportioning between production and sales departments

This method recognises only two basic functions of a manufacturing concern, i.e. manufacturing and selling

and distribution. Thus, administrative overheads are apportioned over production and sales departments.

Therefore, each of the department should be charged with the proportionate share of them. When this

method is adopted, administrative overheads lose their identity and get merged with production and selling

and distribution overheads.

Transfer to profit and loss account

As per this method, administrative overheads are concerned with the formulation of policies and thus are not

directly concerned with either the production or the selling and distribution functions. Further administrative

overheads are mainly of fixed costs. Lastly, there appears to be no equitable base to charge administration

overheads to other functions or the products. In view of these arguments, the administrative overheads are

charged to profit and loss account.

Treating administrative overheads as a separate addition to the cost of jobs or products

This method considers administration as a separate function like production and sales and, as such costs

relating to formulating the policy, directing the organisation and controlling the operations are taken as a

separate charge to cost of the jobs or a product, sold along with the cost of other functions. The following

bases may be adopted for such absorption:

(i) Works cost

(ii) Sales value/quantity

(iii) Gross profit on sales

(iv) Units manufactured

(v) Conversion cost.

Illustration 7

The following information has been gathered for a company doing jobbing work only for 2013:

Lesson 4

Direct Expenses and Overheads

179

`

Materials Consumed 4,00,000

Direct Labour 3,00,000

Factory Overheads 2,40,000

Office and Administrative Expenses 94,000

Sales 12,40,800

The company has to quote for a job to be undertaken in February, 2014. It is estimated that the job will

require materials costing

`

30,000 and direct wages for it will be

`

45,000. What should be the quotation?

Solution:

Cost Sheet for 2013

`

Materials Consumed 4,00,000

Direct Labour 3,00,000

Prime Cost 7,00,000

Factory Overheads 2,40,000

Works Cost 9,40,000

Administration Expenses 94,000

Total Cost 10,34,000

Profit (Balancing Figure) 2,06,800

Sales 12,40,800

Some relevant percentages:

(i) Factory overheads to direct labour =

80%100

3,00,000

2,40,000

=×

`

(ii) Administration Expenses to Works Cost =

10%100

9,40,000

94,000

=×

`

(iii) Profit to total cost =

100

10,34,000

2,06,800

×

`

= 20%.

Quotation for Job:

`

Materials 30,000

Direct Wages 45,000

Prime Cost

75,000

Factory Overheads, 80% of

`

45,000 36,000

Works Cost

1,11,000

Administration Expenses 10% of

`

1,11,000 11,100

Total Cost

1,22,100

Profit @ 20% of total cost 24,420

Price (to be quoted) 1,46,520

EP-CMA

180

TREATMENT OF SELLING AND DISTRIBUTION OVERHEADS

Selling costs or overhead expenses are those incurred for the purpose of promoting the marketing and sales

of different products. Distribution expenses, on the other hand, are expenses relating to delivery and

dispatch of goods sold. Examples of selling and of distribution expenses have been considered earlier in this

Study Lesson. From the above, it is clear that the two types of expenses represent two distinct types of

functions. However, it is usual to group together these into one composite class, namely, selling and

distribution overhead, for the purpose of cost accounting. Such a course has the merit of simplicity.

Absorption of selling and distribution expenses

If selling and distribution expenses are small, they may be included in office expenses. If these expenses are

considerable, one of the following magnitudes may be followed:

Percentage of works cost

In this method, on the basis of past year’s experience the percentage of selling expenses to works cost is

ascertained and used for finding out the selling and distribution expenses to be charged to each job or

product. This method can be followed successfully if one product is produced or where selling expenses are

small though various articles are produced. The method will not take into consideration different efforts

involved in selling unless the effort is in the same proportion as the cost of production.

A percentage on the selling price

From an analysis of past year’s accounts one can determine the percentage which normal selling and

distribution expenses bear to the normal turnover. Suppose, on the basis of the previous year’s experience it

is ascertained that selling expenses are 10% of the turnover, and the cost of production is 9,000, then

10100

10

−

i.e.

90

10

or

9

1

of the cost of production will be charged as selling and distribution expenses. This

method can be followed in those cases, where the products are sold at fixed prices and the selling price of

each article is known. If prices fluctuate, the method will not give good results.

An estimated rate per unit

If there is only one product, the total estimated selling expenses can be divided by the total estimated

number of unit to be sold to give the selling on cost per unit. It would be better if constant and variable

expenses are separately treated, if there are more than one product.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

State whether the following statement is “True” or “False”

Administration overheads are recovered as a percentage of works cost:

• True

• False

Correct answer: True

Lesson 4

Direct Expenses and Overheads

181

Illustration 8

In a certain department of a factory there are two shops. Total departmental overheads for a year are

`

1,20,000 and the estimated number of direct labour hour is 24,000 (10 men employed for 48 hours per

week during 50 weeks in the year).

From the particulars given below calculate the prime cost and works cost of a work order No. 54 which

passes through both shops:

(1) Material consumed

`

1,000.

(2) Direct labour hours : Shop A  8 hours @

`

6.00 per hr.

Shop B  5 hours @

`

7.50 per hr.

(3) Works overheads are to be levied by means of a direct hour rate.

Solution:

Calculation of Direct Labour Hour Rate

Direct Labour Hour Rate =

000,24

000,20,1

`

=

`

5.00

Statement of Cost of Work Order No. 54

` `

Material consumed 1,000.00

Direct Labour:

Shop A (8 hours @

`

6.00 per hour) 48.00

Shop B (5 hours @

`

7.50 per hour) 37.50 85.50

Prime Cost 1,085.50

Works Overheads:

Shop A (8 hours @

`

5.00 per hour) 40.00

Shop B (5 hours @

`

5.00 per hour) 25.00 65.00

Works Cost 1,150.50

Illustration 9

The following information is obtained from the records of a factory regarding the execution of two orders for

the same quantity of a commodity:

Materials Wages Sale Price Percentage

of Profit

on Cost of

Production

` ` ` %

First order 25,000 20,000 85,800 10

Second order 36,000 28,000 1,23,760 12

Find out the percentage of Factory Overheads and Office Overheads.

EP-CMA

182

Solution:

The cost of production of the First Order =

`

78,000 being 100/110 of

`

85,800.

The cost of production of the Second Order =

`

1,10,500 being 100/112 of

`

1,23,760.

Let factory overhead be x% on wages and office overhead be y% on factory cost.

Then,

78,000 = 25,000 + 20,000+













100

00020

x

,

+













+ )x,(

y

20000045

100

1,10,500 = 36,000 + 28,000 +













100

00028

x

,

+













+ )x,(

y

28000064

100

33,000 = 200x + 450y + 2xy ...(i)

46,500 = 280x + 640y + 2.8xy ...(ii)

Multiplying equation (i) by 28 and equation (ii) by 20, we get

9,24,000 = 5,600x + 12,600y + 56xy

9,30,000 = 5,600x + 12,800y + 56xy

or − 6,000 = − 200y

or y = 30

By substituting the value of y in equation (i), we get

33,000 = 200x + 13,500 + 60x

or x = 75.

Therefore, the factory overheads are 75% of wages and office overheads are 30% of factory cost.

Illustration 10

Hind Private Ltd. manufactures four sizes of the product ‘Modern Model’ called A, B, C, and D in the

Department. The workers are paid the piece rate of Re. 1.00,

`

1.50,

`

2.00,

`

3.00 per unit of the product

sizes A, B, C and D respectively. Dearness allowance paid to the workers is

`

4.00 per day. Miscellaneous

payments are 20% of the basic wages.

From the following information for the month of January, you are required to find the total cost per unit of

each size of the product ‘Modern Model’:

Product

Size A Size B Size C Size D

Direct Labour (Days) 104 78 52 52

Production (Units) 320 150 70 55

Direct Material (

`

) 250 150 100 125

Overhead Expenses:

`

Indirect Material 500

Indirect Labour 572

Indirect Expenses 429

Lesson 4

Direct Expenses and Overheads

183

Solution:

Statement of total cost per unit of each size

Products Remarks

A B C D

Units Produced 320 150 70 55

Direct Material (a) 0.78 1.00 1.43 2.27

Direct Labour:

Piece rate wages 1.00 1.50 2.00 3.00

*Dearness allowance 1.30 2.08 2.97 3.78

Misc. payment 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.60

Total Direct Labour: (b) 2.50 3.88 5.37 7.38

Prime Cost (a+b) 3.28 4.88 6.80 9.65

Overhead Expenses: Basis of

Apportionment

Indirect Material 0.62 0.80 1.14 1.82 Material Value

Indirect Labour 0.65 1.04 1.49 1.89 Direct Labour

Days

Indirect Expenses 0.49 0.78 1.11 1.42 Direct Labour

Days

Total Overhead (c) 1.76 2.62 3.74 5.13

Totat Cost (a+b+c) 5.04 7.50 10.54 14.78

CONTROL OF OVERHEADS

1. Manufacturing Overheads

Control of manufacturing overhead cost can be best achieved by means of the flexible budget. It provides a

base for comparing the actual overhead with the budgeted overhead adjusted to the level of activity attained.

Fixed budgets may be used for planning purposes. No adjustment is made for actual level of activity

attained. Flexible budgets may be prepared by the following two methods.

(a) Range of activity method of setting flexible budget.

(b) Fixed plus variable rate method of setting flexible budget.

An item wise budget of overhead expenses can be prepared quarterly or monthly to control overheads. The

budget should be based on anticipated production capacity and the past expenses. The fixed and variable

expenses should be segregated. The actual expenses should be ascertained and controlled.

If the budgets are prepared department wise, controlling cost and fixing responsibility is facilitated.

Departmental overhead cost reports should be designed to emphasise the items which can be controlled by

the departmental managers and exclude those items which are non-controllable either directly of indirectly.

Variances in non-controllable items is generally due to a poor system of cost allocation or due to decisions

made by the management. Large non-controllable variances tend to obscure effectiveness of the

departmental managers effort to control cost. Moreover, if there are large number of non-controllable items it

make the report useless: Hence non-controllable items should be excluded.

Approved departures from budget should also be indicated in the performance reports and allowances for

such approved departures should be introduced in variance analysis. In other words, “management by

exception” should be applied for effective control of overhead cost.

EP-CMA

184

Difficulties in controlling overhead costs

A certain amount of authority is usually delegated to lower level of management for controlling certain costs

within their jurisdiction. However, the following difficulties are faced while controlling overheads:

(i) Few overheads are controllable when authority is delegated, as lower levels of management cannot

control all expenses.

(ii) Several causes are jointly controllable by different departments.

(iii) Controllable costs vary with activity level. They tend to be fixed or semi-fixed and indirect with

respect to either the product or departments and non-controllable by lower levels of management.

(iv) The decisions made do not alter the amount of fixed costs as they are long-term costs.

The following steps should be taken to control manufacturing overheads:

(a) Overheads should be properly classified as fixed, variable and semi-fixed.

(b) The overhead cost should be budgeted by each classification and each department.

(c) Actuals and budgeted figures should be compared and necessary action initiated.

(d) Standard costing system should be introduced.

2. Control of Administration Overheads

A major portion of administrative overhead costs is fixed in nature and are incurred due to management

policy. Administration overhead can be classified to two parts, namely, the expenses that varies with volume

of office work and fixed expenses. Fixed overheads e.g. depreciation cannot be controlled at lower levels of

management and can be incorporated in a fixed cost budget for informing the top management.

They are usually non-controllable. Though it is difficult to control such costs, the following methods can be

used to control administration overheads :

(a) Preparing control reports and comparing the results with the past.

(b) Flexible Budget: Budgets are fixed for each items of administration overhead so that periodical

comparisons can be made and responsibility can be fixed and to ensure that the actuals do not

exceed the budgets.

(c) Standard Cost Accounting: The most important problem connected with the administrative overhead

cost is its costing treatment rather than its control because a major portion of the overhead is not

controllable.

3. Control of Selling and Distribution Overheads

It is not easy to identify or link selling and distribution costs with units of production because the costs are

normally incurred after production has been completed.

The incidence of these costs depends upon several factors such as the distance of market, terms of sale,

extent of competition etc.

It is difficult to control such cost because of the following reasons:

(a) capacity of sales organisation cannot be properly defined,

(b) it is difficult to exercise control over customers and competitors,

Lesson 4

Direct Expenses and Overheads

185

(c) strict control cannot be exercised by sales representatives and other field workers,

(d) price fluctuations are determined by many factors besides cost factors,

(e) market potentials and capacity cannot be properly estimated,

(f) the difference between selling and not selling is sometimes not clear.

Such cost can be controlled and reduced by the following :

(i) preparing selling and distribution control reports and cost control reports.

(ii) preparing flexible budgets: The budget should be drafted keeping in mind the potential and

anticipated sales of each product in every region. Many of the selling and distribution expenses can

be budgeted on this basis. Top management estimates and plans certain expenses like

advertisement, credit facilities, sales promotion etc. which cannot be directly linked with sales.

Periodical statements can be prepared. Actuals should be compared with budgeted figures and any

variations should be corrected.

(iii) standard costing.

(iv) comparison with past performance: The expenses incurred in a period can be compared with the

corresponding expenditure incurred earlier. Difference in amounts and percentages to sales can be

verified and corrective action initiated.

PREPARATION OF COST SHEET

Cost sheet is one of the method of unit costing. Detail of cost sheet we will discuss in lesson 7. The format of

cost sheet is as under:-

Cost Sheet for the Period___________________

Production __________ Units

Particulars Amount Amount

Opening Stock of Raw Material

Add: Purchase of Raw materials

Add: Purchase Expenses

Less: Closing stock of Raw Materials

Raw Materials Consumed

Direct Wages (Labour)

Direct Charges

***

Prime cost (1)

***

Add :- Factory Over Heads:

Factory Rent

Factory Power

Indirect Material

Indirect Wages Supervisor Salary

Drawing Office Salary

Factory Insurance

Factory Asset Depreciation

***

Works cost Incurred ***

Add: Opening Stock of WIP ***

EP-CMA

186

Less: Closing Stock of WIP ***

Works cost (2)

***

Add:- Administration Over Heads:-

Office Rent

Asset Depreciation

General Charges

Audit Fees

Bank Charges

Counting house Salary

Other Office Expenses

***

Cost of Production (3)

***

Add: Opening stock of Finished Goods

Less: Closing stock of Finished Goods

***

Cost of Goods Sold

***

Add:- Selling and Distribution OH:-

Sales man Commission

Sales man salary

Traveling Expenses

Delivery man expenses

Sales Tax

Bad Debts

***

Cost of Sales (5)

***

Profit (balancing figure)

***

Sales

***

Notes:-

(1) Factory Over Heads are recovered as a percentage of direct wages

(2) Administration Over Heads, Selling and Distribution Overheads are recovered as a percentage of

works cost.

LESSON ROUND-UP

•

Direct expenses are costs other than materials or wages which are incurred for a specific product or saleable

service.

•

Overhead is the expenditure on labour, materials or services which can not be economically identified with a specific

saleable cost unit.

•

Standing order number is a code number given to a factory overhead item.

•

Allocation of overheads is the process of charging the full amount of overhead costs to a particular cost centre.

•

Apportionment of overheads refers to the allotment of proportions of items of cost to cost centers or cost units.

•

Primary distribution of overhead involves allocation or apportionment of different items of overhead to all

departments of a factory. This is also known as departmentalization of overheads.

•

Secondary distribution of overheads is the process of apportionment of service department overheads among the

production departments.

Lesson 4

Direct Expenses and Overheads

187

•

Absorption of overheads refers to allotment of overheads to cost units.

•

Pre-determined overhead rate is the rate calculated by dividing the budgeted overheads for an accounting period by

the budgeted base for the period.

•

Machine hour rate is the overhead cost for operating the machine for one hour.

•

Unabsorbed of overheads means the amount by which the overhead actually incurred exceeds the overhead

absorbed by the application of a predetermined rate.

SELF-TEST QUESTIONS

1. State the distinction between the two terms in each of the following, giving examples:

(a) Cost allocation and cost apportionment.

(b) Direct cost and indirect cost.

(c) Fixed cost and variable cost.

(d) Indirect expenses and overheads.

2. Distinguish clearly between direct and indirect materials. Under what circumstances may direct

materials be charged indirectly to the product?

3. Distinguish between direct labour and indirect labour. Give four examples of indirect labour that may

arise in a factory.

4. Is it necessary to classify costs as “fixed” and “variable”? Describe briefly how this classification

would be of help in costing?

5. Describe the different components of total cost.

6. What are overheads? How should overheads be classified? To what extent will you include

overhead charges in your valuation of (a) work-in-progress, and (b) finished goods?

7. Distinguish between allocation, apportionment and absorption in connection with factory overhead

expenses.

8. Discuss the reasons for overheads being analysed into fixed and variable components.

9. What are different stages by which overhead expenses are analysed, collected and charged to

product?

10. State the main sources from which overhead expenses are collected in the Cost Accounts.

11. What are the general considerations that should decide your choice of basis for distribution of

overhead costs to departments?

12. What is meant by absorption of overheads? What factors should be considered in obtaining a rate

for absorption of overheads?

13. What are meant by ‘actual overheads’ and ‘recovered overheads’? Under what circumstances

overheads stand under-absorbed or over absorbed? How will you account for the under/over

absorption of overheads?

14. Works overhead expenditure is frequently charged out as a percentage on direct labour. Give two

specific examples (with figures) where this method yields misleading results.

15. What are the principal factors to be considered when fixing a machine hour rate? Give a specimen

computation.

16. In a factory where machine hour rates are used for recovering overhead expenses, state what

information would be necessary to compute these rates?

17. Some of the major problems of cost accounting are associated with the allocation of indirect

EP-CMA

188

expenditure. Why is this so ? Give a brief account of the several methods of allocation known to you

and indicate the circumstances which would lead you to regard each of them in turn as appropriate.

18. A company is having three production departments X, Y and Z and two service departments - boiler-

house and pump-room. The boiler-house has to depend upon the pump-room for supply of water and

pump-room in its turn is dependent on the boiler-house for supply of steam-power for driving the

pump. The expenses incurred by the production departments are: X -

`

6,00,000; Y -

`

5,25,000; and Z

-

`

3,75,000. The expenses for boiler-house are

`

1,75,500 and pump-room are

`

2,25,000.

The expenses of the boiler-house and pump-room are apportioned to the production departments

on following basis:

DEPARTMENT Boiler Pump

X Y Z House Room

Expenses of boiler-house 20% 40% 30% - 10%

Expenses of pump-room 40% 20% 20% 20% -

Show clearly as to how the expenses of boiler-house and pump-room would be apportioned to X, Y

and Z departments?

19. The budgeted working conditions of a cost centre are as follows:

Normal working per week 42 hours

No. of machines 14

Normal weekly loss of hours on maintenance etc. 5 hours per machine

No. of weeks worked per year 48

Estimated annual overheads

`

2,48,640

Estimated direct wage rate

`

8 per hour

Actual results in respect of a week period are:

Wages incurred

`

18,000

Overheads incurred

`

20,400

Machine hours produced 2,000

You are required to calculate:

(i) The overhead rate per machine hour; and

(ii) The amount of under or overabsorption of wages and overheads.

20. Explain any two methods of secondary distribution of Overheads.

Lesson 5

Activity Based Costing (ABC)

•

Introduction

•

Meaning of Activity Based Costing

•

Basic of Activity Based Costing

•

Evolution of Activity Based Costing System

•

Distinction Between Traditional Absorption

Costing & Activity Based Costing

•

Objectives of Activity Based Costing

•

Terminology of Activity Based Costing

•

Stages in developing Activity Based Costing

system

•

Importance of Activity Based Costing

•

Uses of Activity Based Costing

•

Limitation of Activity Based Costing

•

Lesson Round Up

•

Self Test Question

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

Wrong cost analysis leads to wrong decision making.

Traditional cost accounting can be used

appropriately where the organisation has only few

products but when organisation expand their

products offering and these products use different

amount of resources , it become difficult to determine

accurate cost of products by using Traditional

Absorption Costing and use of Activity Based Costing

(ABC) is inevitable in such situations.

Activity-based cost-management systems trace

indirect and support expenses accurately to

individual products, services and customers. ABC

systems use a simple two-stage approach similar to

traditional cost systems. However, instead of using

cost centers for accumulating costs, it uses activities.

After going through this lesson, one should be able

to–

1. Understand about basic concepts of Activity

Based Costing (ABC) and its evolution its

objectives.

2. Know about difference between Traditional

Absorption Costing and Activity Based

Costing.

3. Understand about Cost drivers, its types.

4. Understand about practical uses of Activity

Based costing.

Activity based costing is a modern approach which aims at rectifying the inaccurate cost information.

LESSON

OUTLINE

EP-CMA

190

ACTIVITY-BASED COSTING

INTRODUCTION

The Activity-Based Costing (ABC) is a costing system, which focuses on activities performed to produce

products. ABC is that costing in which costs are first traced to activities and then to products. This costing

system assumes that activities are responsible for the incurrence of costs and create the demands for

activities. E.g. an accounting firm prepares tax returns; a University teaches students. Costs are charged to

products based on individual product's use of each activity. In traditional absorption costing system, costs are

first traced not to activities but to an organizational unit, such as department or plant and then to products. It

means under both, ABC and traditional absorption costing system the second and final stage consists of

tracing costs to the product.

ABC aims at identifying as many costs possible to be subsequently accounted as direct costs of production.

Any cost that is traced to a particular product via its consumption of activity becomes direct cost of the

product. For instance, in conventional costing system, cost of setup and adjustment time is considered as

factory overhead and subsequently assigned to different products on the basis of direct labour hours. But in

ABC, setup and adjustment time is determined for each product and its costs are directly charged to each

product. ABC is generally used as a tool for understanding product and customer cost and profitability.

As global competition intensifies, companies are producing an increasing variety of products and services.

They are finding that producing different products and services places varying demands on their resources.

The need to measure more accurately how different products and services use resources has led companies

such as American Express, Boeing, General Motors, and Exxon Mobil to refine their costing systems. One

of the main ways companies around the globe have refined their costing systems is through activity based

costing.

MEANING OF ACTIVITY BASED COSTING (ABC)

CIMA defines Activity Based Costing as,

‘cost attribution to cost units on the basis of benefit received from indirect activities e.g. ordering,

setting up, assuring quality.’

ABC has also been defined by CAM-1 organisation of Arlinton Texas as

“the collection of financial and operation performance information tracing the significant activities of

the firm to product Costs”.

The features of ABC are as under:

• Activity-based costing (ABC) is a two-stage product costing method that first assigns costs to

activities and then allocates them to products based on the each product’s consumption of

activities.

• The cost pools in the two-stage approach now accumulate activity-related costs.

• An activity is any discrete task that an organization undertakes to make or deliver a product or

service.

• Activity-based costing is based on the concept that products consume activities and activities

consume resources.

• Activity-based costing can be used by any organization that wants a better understanding of the

costs of the goods and services it provides, including manufacturing, service, and even non-

profit organizations.

Lesson 5 Activity Based Costing

191

BASICS OF A B C

ABC assigns costs to products by tracing expenses to “activities”. Each Product is charged based on the

extent to which it used an activity. The primary objective of ABC is to assign costs that reflect/mirror the

physical dynamics of the business provides ways of assigning the costs of indirect support resources to

activities, business processes, customers, products. It recognises that many organisational resources are

required not for physical production of units of product but to provide a broad array of support activities.

Cost of a product is the sum of the costs of all activities required to manufacture and deliver the product.

Products do not consume costs directly. Money is spent on activities which are consumed by product/

services.

Relationship between resources and cost objects

EVOLUTION OF ACTIVITY BASED COSTING SYSTEM

The concepts of ABC were developed in the manufacturing sector of the United States during the 1970’s and

1980’s.During this time, the consortium for advanced manufacturing – International , now known simply as

CAM-I , provided a formative role for studying and formalizing the principles that have become more formally

known as Activity Based Costing.

ABC is developed due to many deficiencies of Traditional Cost systems, which lead to the discovery of the

ABC System. Which are as under:

(i) The present costing system has developed convenient overhead recovery basis and blanket

overhead recovery are acceptable when valuing stocks for financial reporting, but they are

inappropriate when used for decision-making and typical product strategy decisions. Such decisions

have implications. Over 3-5 years and over this period many fixed costs become variable.

(ii) It’s easy to determine accurate costs of products or services when a company has only a few

products. When companies expand their product offerings and these products use different amount

of resources such as supervision, quality control it is more difficult to determine accurate costs of

products. This situation is a main reason why companies use ABC.

(iii) Traditional costing fails to capture cause and effect relationships. If focused on the cost incurred.

(iv) Traditional accounting was confined merely to furnish information at product level. The new

manufacturing technology demands the feedback of performance while production is still in

progress rather than history.

Therefore, in order to overcome the inadequacies of traditional methods of overhead absorption, Activity

Based Costing has been devised.

Resource

Drivers

Cost Object

Activity

Drives

Activities

EP-CMA

192

DISTINCTION BETWEEN TRADITIONAL ABSORPTION COSTING AND ACTIVIY BASED

COSTING

Traditional Absorption Costing Activity Based Costing

Overheads are first related to departments cost

centres (Production and Service Cost Centres)

Overheads are first related to activities or grouped

into Cost Pools.

Only two types of activities viz. Unit Level

Activities and Facility Level Activities are identified.

All levels of activities in the manufacturing cost

hierarchy viz. Unit Level, Batch Level, Product Level

and Facility Level are identified.

This method relates overheads to cost centres i.e.

locations. It is not realistic of the behaviour of

costs.

This method relates overheads to the causal factor

i.e. driver. Thus, it is more realistic of cost behaviour.

Overhead Rates can be used to ascertain cost of

products only.

Activity Cost Driver Rates can be used to ascertain

cost of products and also cost of other cost objects

such as customer segments, distribution channels.

etc.

We can summarise the main difference between ABC and traditional costing by following picture:

•

••

• Traditional allocation method

Costs Products





 Activity-based allocation method

Costs Activities Products

First stage Second stage

OBJECTIVES OF ACTIVITY BASED COSTING

The objectives of Activity Based Costing are as under:

1. To improve product costing

2. To identify non-value adding activities in the production process which might be a suitable focus for

attention or elimination

3. To provide required information for decision making

4. To reduce the frivolous (nonessential) use of common resources

Lesson 5 Activity Based Costing

193

5. To encourage managers to evaluate the efficiency of internally provided services

6, To calculate the full cost of products for financial reporting purposes and for determining cost-based

prices.

TERMINOLOGY OF ACTIVITY BASED COSTING

1. A Cost Object: It is an item for which cost measurement is required e.g. Product, job or a customer.

2. A Cost Driver: In an ABC system, the allocation basis that are used for applying costs to services

or procedures are called cost drivers. It is a factor that causes a change in the cost of an activity.

Few examples of cost driver as under:

3. Unit level cost: Traditionally, cost drivers were viewed only at the unit level. These drivers create

unit-level costs meaning that they are caused by the production or acquisition of a single unit of

product or the delivery of a single unit or service.

4. Batch level cost: Costs are caused by a group of things being made, handled or processed at a

single time are referred to as batch level costs.

5. Product-level cost: A cost caused by the development, production or acquisition of different items

is called a product level or process level cost. These include engineering change orders, equipment

maintenance, product development and scrap, if related to product design.

6. Facility-level cost: Some costs cannot be related to a particular product line. These are instead

related to providing a facility. For e.g. Cost of maintaining a building or plant security or

advertisement promoting the organization.

7. Organizational-level cost: Certain costs are incurred at organizational level for the single purpose

of supporting continuing facility operations. These organizational level costs common to many

different activities and products and services can be prorated among services and products on an

arbitrary basis only. These costs are not product related .thus they should be subtracted from net

product revenues instead of an arbitrary and illogical apportionment.

8. Cost Pool: Costs are grouped into pools according to the activities, which drive them. In this al

costs associated with procurement i.e. ordering, inspection, storing etc would be included in this

cost pool and cost driver identified.

The technique of ABC lays importance on different costs for different costs, which are relevant to a particular

decision.

STAGES IN DEVELOPING ACTIVITY BASED COSTING SYSTEM

Step 1. IDENTIFY RESOURCES

Resources represent the expenditure of an organization. These are the same costs that are represented in a

traditional accounting, ABC links these cost to products, customers or services.

EP-CMA

194

Step2. IDENTIFY ACTIVITIES

Activities represent the work performed in an organization. ABC accounts for the costs based on what

activities caused them to occur. By determining the actual activities that occur in various departments it is

then possible to more accurately relate these costs to customers, products and services.

Step 3. IDENTIFY COST OBJECTS

ABC provides profitability by one or more cost object. Cost object profitability is utilized to identify money-

losing customers to validate separate divisions or business units. Defining outputs to be reviewed is an

important step in a successful ABC implement action.

Step 4. DETERMINE RESOURCE DRIVERS

Resource drivers provide the link between the expenditure of an Organisation and activities performed within

the Organisation.

Step 5. DETERMINE COST (ACTIVITY) DRIVERS

Determination of cost drivers completes the last stage of the model. Cost drivers trace or links the cost of

performing certain activities to cost objects.

Activity Cost Driver Rate =

DriverCostActivity

poolCostActivityofCostToatal )(

Step 6. ASSIGN COSTS TO THE COST OBJECTS

We can use following formula for assigning costs to the cost objects

Costs = Resources Consumed × Activity Cost Driver Rate

Lesson 5 Activity Based Costing

195

DIFFERENT TYPES OF ACTIVITIES

Identification of activities for ABC

Meaning of Activities: Activities comprise of units of work or tasks. For example, purchase of materials is

an activity consisting a series of tasks like purchase requisition, advertisement inviting quotations,

identification of suppliers, placement of purchase order, follow-up etc.

Types of Activities: Activities basically fall into four different categories, known as the manufacturing cost

hierarchy. These categories were first identified by Cooper in 1990 and help to determine the type of activity

cost driver required. The categories are:

Type of Activity Examples

Unit level activities: These are activities for which the

consumption of resources can be identified with the number of

units produced. It is performed each time a unit is produced.

Use of indirect materials/consumables.

Batch level activities: The costs of some activities are driven

by the number of batches of units produced. These are

activities related to setting up of a batch or a production run. It

is performed each time a batch is processed.

Material ordering, Inspection of Products.

Product level activities: The cost of some activiries are

driven by the creation of a new product line and its

maintenance.

Designing the product, Producing parts

specifications and keeping technical

drawings of products.

Facility Level Activities: It must be carried out regardless of

which products are produced. These are activities necessary

for sustaining the manufacturing process and cannot be

directly attributed to individual products

Plant Security, Production Manager’s

Salary and Maintenance of buildings.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

IMPORTANCE OF ACTIVITY BASED COSTING (ABC)

ABC provides information for decision making about product costs and product-line profitability.

Implementation of ABC will emphasis on more precise profit analysis, more accurate costing, better

State whether the following statement is “True” or “False”:

1. Activity-based costing is more expensive to implement than traditional

costing

2. Processing units on machines is a unit-level activity.

3. ABC improves control over overhead costs.

4. Setting up equipment is a batch-level activity.

5. In an ABC each cost pool has its own predetermined overhead rate.

(Answer : All true)

EP-CMA

196

allocation of overhead, improved cost control and cost management. It supports the manager in operating

decisions, such as performance measurement, product design and process improvement. It is also used to

advocate for strategic decisions, such as customer profitability and pricing and product mix. Due to the

increasing accuracy of output costs, ABC information enables managers to make better decisions on

product, product design, process improvement, market segments and customer mix. . It can lead product

designers to decisions on tradeoffs between minimizing cost and desired performance and it provides the

cost information of diverse designs that product designers can compare moreover, using product costing

techniques at the design stage can be combined with target costing since product costs can determine the

mix of products to manufacture and to sell and can evaluate profitability by product group or customer type.

We can summarise the importance of ABC as under:

1. To link the cost to its causal factor – i.e. the Cost Driver

2. To identify costs of activities rather than cost centres

3. To ascertain product costs with greater accuracy by relating overheads to activities

4. To overcome the inherent limitations of traditional absorption costing and use of blanket overhead

rates

5. To assist managers in budgeting and performance measurement

6. To provide the links between the activities, the organizational acts and the resources consumed,

and illustrate the differences between resource consumption and resource provision

7. To help in cost control and cost reduction, as well as improved profitability.

8. To provide valuable economic information to support a company’s operational improvement and

customer satisfaction programs.

9. To furnish many significant benefits over traditional costing techniques

(a) most accurate data about product cost;

(b) more comprehensive cost information for performance measurement;

(c) relevant data for management’s decision-making;

(d) more potential for sensitivity analysis;

(e) providing a model prospect on value-adding organizational transactions and activities

USES OF ACTIVITY BASED COSTING

The areas in which activity based information is used for decision making are as under: -

1. Activity costs: ABC is designed to track the cost of activities, so we can use it to see if activity

costs are in line with industry standards. If not, ABC is an excellent feedback tool for measuring the

ongoing cost of specific services as management focuses on cost reduction.

2. Customer profitability: Though most of the costs incurred for individual customers are simply

product costs, there is also an overhead component, such as unusually high customer service

levels, product return handling, and cooperative marketing agreements. An ABC system can sort

through these additional overhead costs and determine which customers are actually providing a

reasonable profit. This analysis may result in some unprofitable customers being turned away, or

more emphasis being placed on those customers who are contributing more in profits.

Lesson 5 Activity Based Costing

197

3. Distribution cost: Organisation uses a variety of distribution channels to sell its products, such as

retail, Internet, distributors, and mail order catalogs. Most of the structural cost of maintaining a

distribution channel is overhead, so if we can make a reasonable determination of which distribution

channels are using overhead, we can make decisions to alter how distribution channels are used, or

even to drop unprofitable channels.

4. Make or buy: ABC enables the manager to decide whether he should get the activity done within

the firm or outsource the same. Outsourcing may be done if the firm is incurring higher overhead

costs as compared to the outsourcer or vice-versa.

5. Margins: With proper overhead allocation from an ABC system, we can determine the margins of

various products, product lines, and entire subsidiaries. This can be quite useful for determining

where to position company resources to earn the largest margins.

6. Minimum price: Product pricing is really based on the price that the market will bear, but the

marketing manager should know what the cost of the product is, in order to avoid selling a product

that will lose a company money on every sale. ABC is very good for determining which overhead

costs should be included in this minimum cost, depending upon the circumstances under which

products are being sold.

7. Production facility cost: It is usually quite easy to segregate overhead costs at the plant-wide

level, so we can compare the costs of production between different facilities.

LIMITATIONS OF ACTIVITY BASED COSTING

Activity based costing help managers in decision making. However activity based costing has certain

limitations or disadvantages which as are under:

1. Implementing an ABC system requires substantial resources, which is costly to maintain.

2. Activity Based Costing is a complex system which need lot of record for calculations.

3. In small organisation mangers are accustomed to use traditional costing systems to run theirs

operations and traditional costing systems are often used in performance evaluations.

4. Activity based costing data can be easily misinterpreted and must be used with care when used in

decision making. Managers must identify which costs are really relevant for the decisions at hand.

5. Reports generated by this systems do not conform to generally accepted accounting principles

(GAAP). Consequently, an organization involved in activity based costing should have two cost

systems - one for internal use and one for preparing external reports.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

Re-write the following sentence after filling-in the blank spaces with

appropriate word:

(i) _________ uses multiple activity rates.

(ii) Performing periodic maintenance on general use equipment is an

example of a ________.

Correct answer: (i) Activity-based costing (ii) Facility-level activity

EP-CMA

198

Illustration 1

Autolite Private Ltd. an auto repair business, uses activity based costing and accumulates overhead costs in

the following cost pools:

• Human Resources

• Parts management

• Purchasing

• Quality Control

• Equipment set-up

• Training employees

• Assembly department

• Receiving department

You are to find out for each cost pool whether the cost pool would be unit-level, batch-level, product-level or

facility level.

Solution:

Illustration 2

Explain briefly each of the following categories in Activity based Costing by giving at least three examples:

(i) Batch level activities

(ii) Product level activities

(iii) Facility level activities.

Solution

(i) Batch level activities – The cost of some activities (mainly manufacturing support activities) are driven by

the number of batches of units produced. These activities are known as Batch level activities. Examples are:

(I) Material ordering.

ACTIVITY COST POOL HIERARCHY

Human Resources Facility-level

Parts management Product-level

Purchasing Batch-level

Quality Control Unit-level

Equipment set-up Unit-level

Training employees Facility-level

Assembly department Unit-level

Receiving department Batch-level

Lesson 5 Activity Based Costing

199

(II) Machine set up cost.

(III) Inspection of products - like first item of every batch.

(ii) Product level activities – The cost of some activities are driven by the creation of a new product line

and its maintenance. These activities are known as Product level activities. Examples are:

(I) Designing the product.

(II) Producing parts to a certain specified limit.

(III) Advertising cost, if advertisement is for individual products.

(iii) Facility level activities – The cost of some activities cannot be related to a particular product line,

instead they are related to maintaining the building and facilities. These activities are known as Facility level

activities. Examples are:

(I) Maintenance of buildings.

(II) Plant security.

(III) Production manager’s salary.

(IV) Advertising campaigns promoting the company.

Illustration 3

The cost accountant of ABC Manufacturing attended a workshop on activity-based costing and was

impressed by the results. After consulting with the production personnel, he prepared the following

information on cost drivers and the estimated volume for each driver.

Products

A B C

Total

Units produced 25,000 15,000 5,000 45,000

Direct materials

Cost Per Unit in `

40.0 30.0 55.0

Direct labour in ` 15.0 15.0 15.0

Cost driver volume Cost driver

A B C

Total

Number of setups 125 75 50 250

Machine Hours 2,500 1,500 2,000 6,000

Direct labour hours 25,000 15,000 5,000 45,000

Number of

Inspection

50 25 25 100

EP-CMA

200

The cost accountant also determined how much overhead costs were incurred in each of the four activities

as follows:

Activity Overhead costs in

`

``

`

Machining

Setup 1,50,000

Machining 7,50,000

Total of Machining Overhead Cost 9,00,000

Assembly

Assembly 360,000

Inspection 90,000

Total of Assembly Overhead Cost 4,50,000

Total Overhead Cost 13,50,000

Required:

1. Determine the cost driver rate for each activity cost pool.

2. Use the activity-based costing method to determine the unit cost for each product.

Solution:

Activity Cost drive rate

Machining

Setup

`

600 per setup ( =

`

150,000 ÷ 250 setups)

Machining

`

125 per machine hour (=

`

750,000 ÷ 6,000 machine hours)

Assembly

`

8 per direct labor hour (=

`

360,000 ÷ 45,000 direct labor hours)

Inspection

`

900 per inspection (=

`

90,000 ÷ 100 inspections)

In the following table, the total costs are divided by the number of units to arrive at the unit cost for each

product.

A

B

C

Direct Materials in ` 10,00,000

4,50,000

2,75,000

Direct Labour in ` 3,75,000

2,25,000

75,000

Applied Overhead

Set Up cost in ` 600 per setup 75,000

45,000

30,000

Machining cost in` 125 per Machine Hours 3,12,500

1,87,500

2,50,000

Assembly cost in ` 8 per Labour Hour 2,00,000

1,20,000

40,000

Inspection cost in

`

900 per inspection 45,000

22,500

Total Overhead Cost in ` 6,32,500

3,75,000

3,42,500

Total Cost in ` 20,07,500

10,50,000

6,92,500

Number of Units 25,000

15,000

5,000

Unit Cost in ` 80.3

70

138.5

Lesson 5 Activity Based Costing

201

Illustration 4

The Indiana Company produces only two products: a major computer part and cell phones. The company

uses a normal cost system and overhead costs are currently allocated using a plant-wide overhead rate

based on direct labor hours. Outside cost consultants have recommended, however, that the company use

activity-based costing to charge overhead to products.

The company expects to produce 4,000 computer parts and 2,000 cell phones in 2013. Each computer part

requires two direct labor hours to produce and each cell phone requires one-half hour to produce. The direct

material and direct labor costs included in the two products are as follows:

Item Computer Part Cell Phone

Direct Material (per unit) in ` 30 17

Direct labour cost per unit in ` 16 4

Budgeted (Estimated) Total Factory Overhead Data For 2013:

Activity Budgeted Overhead in

`

Estimated Volume Level

Production Setups 80,000 20 setups

Material Handling 70,000 5,000 lbs.

Packaging and Shipping 120,000 6,000 boxes

Total Factory Overhead 270,000

Based on an analysis of the three overhead activities, it was estimated that the two products would require

these activities as follows in 2013

Activity Computer Part Cell Phone Total

Production Setups 5 15 20

Material handling (lbs) 1000 4000 5000

Packaging and Shipping

(boxes)

4000 2000 6000

Required:

1. Calculate the cost of each product using a plant-wide rate based on direct labor hours.

2. Calculate the activity cost rates for (a) setups, (b) material handling and (c) packaging and shipping.

3. Cost out the two products using an activity-based costing system.

Solution

Calculation of Labour Cost per Direct labour Hours (D.L.H)

Item Computer Part Cell Phone

Direct labour cost per unit in ` 16 4

Number of Direct Labour Hour

per unit

2 0.5

Direct Labour Cost per hour 8 8

EP-CMA

202

1. The Cost of Each Product Using a Plant-Wide Rate Based on Direct Labour Hours:

Step 1: Calculation of plant-wide overhead rate:

Total budgeted DLH =

4,000 computer parts x 2 DLH per part + 2,000 cell phones x 0.5 DLH per phone = 9,000 DLH

Over head Rate = Total Budgeted Overhead Dollars/Total Budgeted Direct Labor Hours

= `270,000/ 9,000 DLH

= `30 per DLH

Step 2: Calculation of each product’s cost using a plant-wide rate:

Item Computer Part Cell Phone

Direct Material (per unit) in ` 30 17

Direct labour cost per unit in ` 16 4

Manufacturing overhead @ `30

per labour hour

60 15

Total 106 36

2. The Activity Cost Rates for (1) Setups, (2) Material Handling and (3) Packaging and Shipping:

Activity Budgeted Overhead

in `

Estimated Volume

Levels

Activity cost rates

Production Setups 80,000 20 4000 per setup

Material handling (lbs) 70,000 5000 14 per lbs

Packaging and Shipping

(boxes)

1,20,000 6000 20 per box

3. Cost of the Two Products Using an Activity-Based Costing System:

Item Computer Part Cell Phone

No of item 4,000 2,000

Direct Material cost in ` 1,20,000 34,000

Direct labour cost in ` 64,000 8,000

Production set up cost in ` 20,000 60,000

Material handling cost in ` 14,000 56,000

Packaging and Shipping ` 80,000 40,000

Total Manufacturing Cost For All

Units in `

298,000 198,000

Total Units Produced 4,000 parts 2,000 phones

Total Cost Per Unit in ` 74.50 99

Lesson 5 Activity Based Costing

203

LESSON ROUND-UP

•

The Activity-Based Costing (ABC) is a costing system, which focuses on activities performed to produce products.

ABC is that costing in which costs are first traced to activities and then to products.

•

ABC is developed due to many deficiencies of Traditional Cost systems.

•

In traditional product costing system, costs are first traced not to activities but to an organizational unit, such as

department or plant and then to products.

•

Cost driver is an activity which generate cost. Costs are grouped according to what drives them or causes them to

be incurred.

•

A Cost Object: It is an item for which cost measurement is required e.g. Product , job or a customer.

•

Cost drivers type of Pure Volume, Weighted Volume, Situational, Motivational.

•

Cost pool is created for each activity and such activities are related with each type of product to determine the cost

of such product.

•

Stages in developed ABC system as under:

•

Identify resources

•

Identify activities

•

Identify cost objects

•

Determine resource drivers

•

Determine cost (activity) drivers

•

Assign costs to the cost objects

SELF-TEST QUESTIONS

1. What is Activity Based Costing? Why is it needed?

2. What is a ‘Cost Driver’? What is the role of cost driver in tracing cost to products?

3. Discuss the steps in applying Activity Based Costing?

4. How are activities grouped in a manufacturing company?

5. Distinguish between traditional costing system and activity based costing.

6. What are the benefits of activity based costing?

7. Write the most appropriate answer from the given options in respect of the following :

(i) Company X uses activity-based costing for its two products: Product B and Product D. One of

the activity cost pools is parts administration. The total estimated overhead cost for that pool

was ` 550,000 and the expected activity was 2000 part types. If Product D requires 1200 part

types, the amount of overhead allocated to it would be:

(a) ` 275,000

(b) ` 300,000

(c) ` 330,000

(d) ` 345,000

(ii) Company B uses activity-based costing and has the following activity cost pools and estimated

overhead cost for each pool:

EP-CMA

204

Machine related ` 350,000

Handling material ` 240,000

Processing purchase orders ` 720,000

General factory ` 500,000

The amount of total estimated overhead is:

(a) ` 1,310,000

(b) ` 1,090,000

(c) ` 850,000

(d) ` 1,810,000

[ (i) a, (ii) d]

8. ABC electronics makes audio player model ‘AB 100’. It has 80 components. ABC sells 10,000 units

each month at `3,000 per unit. The cost of manufacturing is `2,000 per unit or `200 lakhs per month

for the production of 10,000 units. Monthly manufacturing costs incurred are as follows:

(

`

Lakhs)

Direct material costs 100.00

Direct manufacturing labour costs 20.00

Machining costs 20.00

Testing costs 25.00

Rework costs 15.00

Ordering costs 0.20

Engineering costs 19.80

200.00

Labour is paid on piece rate basis. Therefore, ABC considers direct manufacturing labour cost as

variable cost.

The following additional information is available for ‘AB 100’

(i) Testing and inspection time per unit is 2 hours.

(ii) 10 per cent of ‘AB 100’ manufactured are reworked.

(iii) It currently takes 1 hour to manufacture each unit of ‘AB 100’

(iv) ABC places two orders per month for each component. A different supplier supplies each

component.

ABC has identified activity cost pools and cost drivers for each activity. The cost per unit of the cost

driver for each activity cost pool is follows:

Manufacturing

Activity

Description of

activity

Cost driver

Cost per unit of cost

driver

1. Machine costs

Machining

components

Machine hours of

capacity

`200

2. Testing costs

Testing components

and finished products.

(Each unit of ‘AB 100’

is tested individually)

Testing hours `125

Lesson 5 Activity Based Costing

205

3. Rework costs

Correcting and fixing

errors and defects

Units of ‘AB 100’

reworked

`1,500 per unit

4. Ordering costs

Ordering of

components

Number of orders `125 per order

5. Engineering costs

Designing and

managing of products

and processes

Engineering hours

`1,980 per engineering

hour

Over a long-run horizon, each of the overhead costs described above vary with chosen cost drivers.

In response to competitive pressure ABC must reduce the price of its product to `600 and to reduce

the cost by at least `400 per unit. ABC does not anticipate increase in sales due to price reduction.

However, if it does not reduce price it will not be able to maintain the current sales level.

Cost reduction on the existing model is almost impossible. Therefore, ABC has decided to replace

‘AB 100’ by a new model ‘AB 200’, which is a modified versions of ‘AB 100’. The expected effect of

design modifications are as follows:

(i) The member of components will be reduced to 50.

(ii) Direct material costs to be lower by `200 per unit.

(iii) Direct manufacturing labour costs to be lower by `20 per unit.

(iv) Machining time required to be lower by 20 per unit.

(v) Testing time required to be lower by 20 per cent.

(vi) Rework to decline to 5 per cent.

(vii) Machining capacity and engineering hours capacity to remain the same.

ABC currently out sources the rework on defective units.

Required:

(i) Compare the manufacturing cost per unit of ‘AB 100’ and ‘AB 200’.

(ii) Determine the immediate effect of design change and pricing decision on the operating to apply

to ‘AB 200’.

Ignore income tax, Assume that the cost per unit of each cost driver for ‘AB 100’ continues to apply

to ‘AB 200’.

EP-CMA

206

Lesson 6

Cost Records

•

Introduction

•

Non-integrated accounting system

– Principal ledgers

– Control accounts

– Entries to record transactions

•

Advantages of non-integrated accounting

•

Limitations of non-integrated accounting

•

Integrated (integral) accounting system

•

Benefits of integrated accounting system

•

Pre-requisites for an integral accounting

system

•

Essential features of integral accounting

•

Reconciliation of cost and financial

accounts

•

Need for reconciliation

•

Causes of differences

•

Reconciliation statement

•

Memorandum reconciliation account

•

Lesson Round Up

•

Self Test Questions

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

Cost Records have a very important role in the

accounting of a manufacturing organisation. Cost

records provide the details about components of cost

of a product or services i.e. material, labour and

overhead. There are two system used in

maintenance of cost records i.e. integrated records

and non- integrated records.

Under non-integrated accounting systems, Financial

Accounting and Inventory/Cost Accounting books/

ledgers are separately maintained.

An Integrated Accounting System would be one

where only a single set of books would contain all the

information of Financial Accounting as well as

Inventory/ Cost Accounting.

Integrated system would be difficult to maintain if

accounts are maintained manually but most available

Computerized Accounting Systems are Integrated

Systems. In integrated system, the problem of

reconciliation of financial accounts and cost accounts

does not arise.

The objective of this lesson is to unable the student

to understand

1. The meaning of Integrated and non integrated

system.

2. Difference between integrated and non

integrated systems.

3. Accounting of cost records under integrated

and non integrated system.

4. Reconciliation of records under non integrated

environment.

“Integrated accounts indicate a set of accounting records which provides financial and cost accounts using a common

input of data for all accounting purpose.” —CIMA, London

LESSON

OUTLINE

EP-CMA

208

INTRODUCTION

Financial accounting system prepares accounts for only the monetary aspects of every business transaction

with keeping certain objectives in mind. Whereas cost accounting system is maintained with a view to

achieve its objectives. All transactions are collected from the same invoices vouchers or receipts which are

also common for financial account. Costs are then classified according to functions, departments, or

products. Though real accounts and nominal accounts are of direct relevance in ascertaining the cost of

products. Personal accounts and cash or bank account are not directly related to cost ascertainment. When

cost accounting system is maintained it involves maintenance of certain bulks for recording day to day

transactions. It is not necessary to maintain cost account under double entry system. In cost accounting, the

cost books are basically maintained under the two systems. I] Non-integral or non- integrated cost

accounting and II] Integral or integrated cost accounting. Where cost and financial accounts are maintained

in a combined way, the system is called as integrated while if the records are maintained separately, the

system is called as non-integrated system of maintaining accounts.

NON-INTEGRATED ACCOUNTING SYSTEM

It is a system of accounting under which separate ledgers are maintained for cost and financial accounts by

Accountants. Under such a system the cost accounts restricts itself to recording only those transactions

which relate to the product or service being provided. Hence items of expenses which have a bearing with

sales or, production or for that matter any other items which are under the factory management are the ones

dealt with in such accounts.

A special feature of the non-integrated system of accounts is its ability to deal with notional expenses like

rent or interest on capital tied up in the stock. The accounting of notional rent facilitates comparisons

amongst factories (some owned and some rented). Similarly, recognition of interest on capital tied up in

stock could help make the stores and works managers aware of the money being blocked because of

holding stock.

Non Integrated Accounting Systems contain fewer accounts when compared with financial accounting

because of the exclusion of purchases, expenses and also Balance Sheet items like fixed assets, debtors

and creditors. Items of accounts which are excluded are represented by an account known as cost ledger

control account.

Principal Ledgers

Subsidiary books maintained under non-integrated system of accounting

The following are some of the subsidiary books maintained under interlocking system of accounting

(1) Stores ledger: It is used to record both the quantity and amount of receipts, issues and balance of

materials and supplies. It consists all store accounts.

(2) Payroll and wage analysis book: It is used to record the wages. The basis for recording the

transactions are (a) clock cards,(b) time tickets, and (c)piece work tickets.

(3) Job ledger: It is used to record the material cost, wages, and overheads incurred in respect of a

job.

Lesson 6

Cost Records

209

(4) Finished goods stock ledger: It is used to record the receipt of finished goods from production

department, the sale and stock of finished goods both in terms of quantity and value.

(5) Standing order ledger: It is used to record overheads incurred.

(6) Debtors’ Ledger: It contains personal accounts of all trade debtors.

(7) Creditors’ Ledger: It contains personal accounts of all trade creditors.

Control Accounts

The following important accounts are maintained under non-integrated accounting system:

(1) General ledger adjustment account: It is also known as cost ledger control account or nominal

ledger control account. In this accounts transactions with only one entry is recorded and contra

appears in financial book. All transactions of income and expenditure which originate in the

financial Accounts must be entered in the ledger for eventual transfer to Cost Accounts and total of

this account will be equal to total of all the balance of the impersonal accounts.

On the credit side of this account are recorded

(a) Opening Balance of materials, work in progress and finished stock,

(b) Expenses of material, wages and overheads on the credit side,

(c) On the debit side returns of materials to the supplier,

(d) Sales income and

(e) on the debit side balancing entries of P&L account and closing stock.

(2) Stores ledger control account: It is debited with purchase of materials for the stores and credited

with issues of material.

(3) Wages control account: In this account the wages accrued and paid and allocation of wages in

this account are recorded.

(4) Work in progress control account: It includes of all direct materials, direct wages, direct

expenses, special purchases and expenses.

(5) Finished goods stock ledger control account: This account represents finished goods stock

ledger transactions in total form.

(6) Selling, distribution, and administration overhead control account: This account represents

selling, distribution and administration overheads.

Entries to Record Transactions under Non-Integrated System

(1) Materials purchased

Stores Ledger Control account Dr

To General Ledger Adjustment a/c

(2) Material purchased for a special job

Work in Progress Control a/c Dr.

To General Ledger Adjustment a/c

EP-CMA

210

(3) For issue of direct materials to production department

Work in Pprogress Control a/c Dr

To Stores Ledger Control account

(4) For issue of indirect materials to production departments

Overhead Control a/c Dr.

To Stores Ledger Control a/c

(5) For returning materials to supplier

General Ledger Adjustment a/c Dr

To Stores Ledger Control a/c

(6) For materials returned from production department

Stores Ledger Control a/c Dr

To Work in Progress Control a/c

(7) For materials transferred from job to job

No entry is passed in control account.

In work in progress ledger the following Entry is passed

Transferee Job a/c Dr

To Transferor Job a/c

(8) For total salary and wages paid

Wages Control a/c Dr.

To General Ledger Adjustment a/c

(9) For allocation of direct and indirect labour

Work in Progress Control a/c Dr.

Overhead Control a/c Dr.

To Wages Control a/c

(10) For recording direct expenses

Work in Progress Control a/c Dr.

To General Ledger Adjustment a/c

(11) For recording overhead incurred and accrued

Overhead Control a/c Dr.

To General Ledger Adjustment a/c

Lesson 6

Cost Records

211

(12) For adjusting under or over absorption overheads

The overhead control account is closed by transferring to overhead suspense account.

(13) For recording finished stock produced

Finished Goods Stock Ledger Control a/c Dr.

To Work in Progress Control a/c

(14) When finished goods are sold at cost

Cost of Sales a/c Dr

To Finished Goods Stock Ledger Control a/c

(15) When finished goods are sold at total sales value

General Ledger Adjustment a/c Dr.

To Costing Profit and Loss a/c

(16) For recording sales returns

Costing Profit and Loss a/c Dr.

To General Ledger Adjustment a/c

(17) For recording total cost to make and sell

Cost of Sales a/c Dr.

To Costing Profit and Loss a/c

(18) For recording under absorption of overheads which is not yet adjusted

Costing Profit and Loss a/c Dr.

To Overhead Suspense a/c

(19) For recording over absorption of overheads which is not yet adjusted

Overhead Suspense a/c Dr.

To Costing Profit and Loss a/c

(20) For recording profit

Costing Profit and Loss a/c Dr.

To General Ledger Adjustment a/c

ADVANTAGES OF NON-INTEGRATED ACCOUNTING

The following are the main advantages of this accounting system:

1. This system tends to coordinate the functions of different selections of the accounts department

since all efforts are integrated and directed towards achievement of one aim that is providing a high

level of efficiency.

2. The accounting procedures can be simplified and the system can be centralised with the object of

achieving a greater control over the organization.

3. The system creates conditions which are eminently suitable for the introduction of mechanized

accounting.

4. There is no possibility of overlooking any expense under the system.

EP-CMA

212

5. As cost accounts are posted straight from the books of original entry, there is no delay in obtaining

the data.

6. There is automatic check on the correctness of the cost data. It ensures that all legitimate

expenditure is included in Cost accounts and reliable and proved data is provided to the

management for its decisions’.

7. Integrated accounting widens the outlook of the accountant.

8. It can be maintained according to convenience as it need not be statutorily maintained.

LIMITATIONS OF NON-INTEGRATED ACCOUNTING

The following are some of the limitations of this accounting system:

1. The Financial transactions other than cost incurred are not recorded in the system.

2. Transactions involving payment other than that of cost are not included in the system E.g: loss on

fixed assets.

3. There is always a diff between the profits reported as per the cost accounting system and the

Financial Accounting System.

INTEGRATED (INTEGRAL) ACCOUNTING SYSTEM

Integrated Accounting is a system in which the accounts are integrated and only a single set of accounts are

maintained for Cost & Financial records. It avoids maintenance of Accounts under cost accounting &

financial accounting. This enables a firm to eliminate separate Profit & Loss Accounts under financial

accounting and cost accounting systems & only one Profit & Loss Accounts are prepared. It provides entire

information for the ascertainment of cost of each unit as well as preparation of a balance sheet as per the

legal requirement of the organisation. It also provides necessary information as required by the costing and

finance department. There is no General Ledger Control A/c is prepared in this system.

BENEFITS OF INTEGRATED ACCOUNTING SYSTEM

The benefits of Integrated Accounting System are as follows:

1. No need for reconciliation as it maintains single set of accounting records.

2. Easy method to maintain accounts and avoid unnecessary complications.

3. There is no possibility of different profit figures being reported in integrated accounting system.

4. There is economy of scale due to the savings in the maintenance of books and general accounting

5. There is saving of time, because two different sets of books need not be maintained

PRE-REQUISITES FOR AN INTEGRAL ACCOUNTING SYSTEM

The following principles shall be taken into consideration while designing such a system:

1. The degree of integration must be determined. Some undertakings find it satisfactory merely to

integrate upto the stage of prime cost or factory cost while other concerns integrate the whole of the

records in which cost and financial accounts cannot be distinguished.

2. The degree of integration will determine the classification of expenditure. The expenditure classified

Lesson 6

Cost Records

213

here according to function as office expenses, selling expenses etc., and not according to nature.

However, control accounts are maintained for each element of cost. A suitable coding system

should be available to serve the accounting purposes of financial and cost accounts.

3. Full details of items posted to the control accounts are supplied to the cost office at convenient

intervals. This information is then dealt with by the cost office in accordance with the system of

costing in force.

4. The amount of detail recorded in the ledger is usually kept to a minimum. Full information regard in

each department or process being contained in tabulators prepared by the cost office. These

tabulations are sometimes referred to as third entries to emphasize that they are not part of double

entry system.

5. For preparation of interim accounts there must be an agreed routine for treatment after accruals,

prepaid expenses and other necessary adjustments.

6. There should be perfect coordination between the staff responsible for the financial and cost

aspects to ensure an efficient processing of accounting documents.

ESSENTIAL FEATURES OF INTEGRAL ACCOUNTING

The following are the essential features of an integral an accounting system:

1. It records financial transitions not normally required for cost accounting be sided recording internal

costing transaction prepayments and accruals are opened.

2. Stores transactions are recorded in the stores control account. This account is debited with the cost

of stores purchased corresponding credit being given to cash or sundry creditors depending

whether the purchase is made for cash or on credit.

3. Wages control account is debited with the wages paid, contra credit is taken in cash or bank

account.

4. Overhead expenses are debited to the overhead control account, corresponding credit being given

to cash or band account or the sundry creditors.

5. Transactions relating to material, labour cost overheads are posted in the stores wages and

overhead control account after making suitable cost analysis and tat the end of the period transfer

of the totals is made to the wok in progress accounts by crediting various control accounts. The day

to day cost analysis made for this purpose is known as making third etc. These entries do not mean

entries in the same sense a entry of transaction in the ledger but such entries are simply a sort of

cash analysis.

6. All advance payments are credited and accruals debited to the respective control account by contra

entries in the prepayments and accrual accounts.

7. Capital asset account is debited and respective control accounts are credited in the process of cost

analysis of capital expenditure.

It is also important to note that integrated accounts are like a hybrid between non-integrated and the financial

system of accounting as in case of the non-integrated system, No personal or real accounts are prepared

and all entries are passed through the general ledger adjustment account. In the financial accounting

system, there is no base of the cost accounting. In the integrated system of accounting, personal and real

accounts are prepared but there exists a base of the cost accounting system

EP-CMA

214

For Example, The same entry when passed through the three systems of accounting look like:

Particulars Financial Integrated Non-Integrated

Material Purchased Purchase A/c… Dr.

To Sundry Cr/Bank A/c

Stores Ledger Control A/c… Dr.

To Sundry Cr/Bank A/c

Stores Ledger Control A/c… Dr.

To General Ledger Adjustment A/c

Payment of Wages Wages A/c Dr.

To Cash/Bank A/c

Wages Control A/c… Dr.

To Cash/Bank A/c

Wages Control A/c… Dr.

To General Ledger A/c

While passing entries in any system of accounting, follow the steps:

1. Visualise the accounting entry in the financial system of accounting;

2. Then replace the cost head, by the head in the costing system of accounting;

3. In case of the non-integrated system, and additional step is replacing any personal or real A/c by

the General Ledger Adjustment A/c.

Illustration 1

Pass Journal Entries in the Cost Books [non-integrated systems] for the following transactions.

(a) Materials worth `50,000 returned to stores from job

(b) Gross total wages paid `96,000.

(c) Employer’s contribution to PF and State Insurance amount to `4000.

(d) Wages analysis book detailed `40,000 direct labour,

(e) `24,000 towards indirect factory labour

(f) `20, 000 towards salaries to office staff and `16,000 for salaries to selling and distribution staff.

Solution:

COST JOURNAL

Particulars Dr.

(Amount in `)

Cr.

(Amount in `)

Stores Ledger Control A/c Dr

To Work-in-progress Control A/c

[Being material returned from stores]

50,000

Wages Control A/c Dr

To General Ledger Adjustment A/c

To Provident Funds and Employees State Insurance A/c

[Being gross total wages paid]

1,00,000

96,000

4,000

Work-in-progress Control A/c Dr

Factory Overheads Control A/c Dr

Office Overheads Control A/c Dr

Selling Overheads Control A/c Dr

To Wages Control A/c

[Being wages allocated]

40,000

24,000

20,000

16,000

1,00,000

Lesson 6

Cost Records

215

Illustration 2

The following figures have been ascertained from the costing records. You are required to pass the

necessary entries in the cost journal. Assume that a system of maintaining control accounts prevails in the

organisation.

`

(1) Purchases 3,90,000

(2) Carriage inwards 5,850

(3) Stores issued 3,58,800

(4) Productive wages 3,46,320

(5) Unproductive wages 1,21,680

(6) Works on cost 3,48,400

(7) Materials used in repairs 3,120

(8) Cost of completed jobs 12,80,630

Solution:

COST JOURNAL

Particulars Dr.

(Amount in `)

Cr.

(Amount in `)

Stores ledger control a/c Dr.

To General Ledger Adjustment a/c

(Being the entry for purchase of materials)

3,90,000

Stores Ledger Control a/c Dr.

To General Ledger Adjustment a/c

(Being carriage inward treated as part of the cost of materials

purchased)

5,850

Work-in-progress Ledger Control a/c Dr.

To Stores Ledger Control a/c

(Being stores issued to production)

3,58,800

Wages Control a/c Dr.

To General Ledger Adjustment a/c

(Being Payment of Wages)

3,46,320

Factory Overhead Control a/c Dr.

To Cost Ledger Control a/c

(Being indirect wages incurred)

1,21,680

Factory Overhead Control a/c Dr.

To Cost Ledger Control a/c

(Being works overhead other than indirect wages)

3,48,400

Factory Overhead Control a/c Dr.

To Stores Ledger Control a/c

(Being materials used in repairs)

3,120

Finished Stock Ledger Control a/c Dr.

To Work-in-progress Ledger Control a/c

(Being completed production transferred to finished stock)

12,80,630

EP-CMA

216

Illustration 3

As at 31st March 2014, the following balances existed in a company’s cost ledger

Dr. Cr.

Stores Ledger Control a/c 6,02,870

Work-in-progress Ledger Control a/c 2,44,730

Finished Stock Ledger Control a/c 5,03,890

Manufacturing Overhead Control a/c 21,050

Cost Ledger Control a/c _______ 13,30,440

13,51,490 13,51,490

During the next three months the following items arose

`

(1) Raw materials purchased 2,46,000

(2) Materials returned to suppliers 5,800

(3) Materials issued to production 2,54,630

(4) Factory wages 1,01,060

(5) Manufacturing overhead incurred 1,83,020

(6) Indirect labour 43,330

(7) Manufacturing overhead charged to production 1,54,400

(8) Cost of sales 3,71,780

(9) Sales returns at cost 10,760

(10) Finished product at cost 4,21,670

Pass the necessary entries, open ledger accounts and prepare trial balance.

Solution:

JOURNAL ENTRIES

Particulars Dr. (Amount in

`

) Cr. (Amount in

`

)

Stores Ledger Control a/c Dr.

To General Ledger Adjustment a/c

(Being materials purchased)

2,46,000

General ledger Adjustment a/c Dr.

To Stores Ledger Control a/c

(Entry for materials returned to suppliers)

5,800

Work-in-progress Ledger Control a/c Dr.

To Stores Ledger Control a/c

(Entry for issue of materials to production)

2,54,630

Wages Control a/c Dr.

To General Ledger Adjustment a/c

(Entry for direct wages incurred)

1,01,060

Lesson 6

Cost Records

217

Work-in-progress Ledger Control a/c Dr.

To Wages Control a/c

(Entry for direct wages charged to production)

1,01,060

Works Overhead Control a/c Dr.

To General Ledger Adjustment a/c

(Entry for works overhead incurred)

1,83,020

Works overhead control a/c Dr.

To General Ledger Adjustment a/c

(Entry for indirect wages incurred)

43,330

Work-in-progress Ledger Control a/c Dr.

To Works Overhead Control a/c

(Entry for overhead charged to production)

1,54,400

General Ledger Adjustment a/c Dr.

To Finished Stock Ledger Control a/c

(Entry for cost of sales)

3,71,780

Finished Stock Ledger Control a/c Dr.

To General Ledger Adjustment a/c

(Entry for sales return)

10,760

Finished Stock Ledger Control a/c Dr.

To Work-in-progress Ledger Control a/c

(Entry for finished goods transferred)

4,21,670

GENERAL LEDGER ADJUSTMENT ACCOUNT

To Stores Ledger Control a/c 5,800

By balance b/d 13,30,440

To Finished Stock Ledger Control a/c 3,71,780

By Stores Ledger Control a/c 2,46,000

To balance c/d 15,37,030

By Wages Control a/c 1,01,060

By Works Overhead Control a/c 1,83,020

By Works Overhead Control a/c 43,330

________

By Finished Stock Ledger Control a/c 10,760

19,14,610

STORES LEDGER CONTROL ACCOUNT

To balance b/d 6,02,870

By General Ledger Control 5,800

To General Ledger Adjustment a/c 2,46,000

By Work-in-progress Ledger Control a/c 2,54,630

_______

By balance c/d 5,88,440

8,48,870

WORKS (MANUFACTURING) OVERHEAD CONTROL ACCOUNT

To General Ledger Control a/c 1,83,020

By balance b/d 21,050

To General Ledger Control a/c 43,330

By Work-in-progress Ledger Control a/c 1,54,400

_______

By balance c/d 50,900

2,26,350

EP-CMA

218

WORK-IN-PROGRESS LEDGER CONTROL ACCOUNT

To balance b/d 2,44,730

By Finished Stock Ledger Control a/c 4,21,670

To Stores Ledger Control a/c 2,54,630

By balance c/d 3,33,150

To Wages Control a/c 1,01,060

To Works Overhead Control a/c 1,54,400

_______

7,54,820

FINISHED STOCK LEDGER CONTROL ACCOUNT

To balance b/d 5,03,890

By Cost Ledger Control a/c 3,71,780

To Work-in-progress Ledger Control a/c

4,21,670

By balance c/d 5,64,540

To General Ledger Adjustment a/c 10,760

_______

9,36,320

TRIAL BALANCE

Dr. Cr.

Stores Ledger Control a/c 5,88,440

Work-in-progress Ledger Control a/c 3,33,150

Finished Stock Ledger Control a/c 5,64,540

Manufacturing Overhead Control a/c 50,900

Cost Ledger Control a/c ________ 15,37,030

15,37,030 15,37,030

RECONCILIATION OF COST AND FINANCIAL ACCOUNTS

NEED FOR RECONCILIATION

The two systems of accounting viz. financial and cost accounts co-exist in the same organisation and they

deal with same basic transactions say, purchases, consumption of materials, wages and other expenses. But

the difference of purpose calls for a difference in approach in collection, analysis and presentation of data to

meet the objective of individual system. Financial accounts are concerned with the ascertainment of profit or

loss for the whole operation of the organisation for a relatively long period usually a year, without being too

much concerned with cost computation, whereas cost accounts are provided for ascertaining the profit or

loss made by manufacturing or product divisions/products for cost comparison and preparation and use of

variety of cost statements. The difference in purpose and approach more often than not results in a different

profit from what is disclosed by the financial accounts and this establishes the need for a reconciliation of

profit between cost accounts and financial accounts.

Thus, reconciliation between the results of the two sets of books is necessary due to the following reasons:

(i) It finds out the reasons for the difference in the profit or loss in cost and financial accounts.

(ii) It ensures the mathematical accuracy and reliability of cost accounts in order to have cost

ascertainment, cost control and to have a check on the financial accounts.

(iii) It contributes to the standardisation of policies regarding stock valuation, depreciation and

overheads.

(iv) It facilitates more coordination and promotes better co-operation, between the activities of financial

and cost sections of the accounting department.

(v) Reconciliation places management in better position to acquaint itself with the reasons for the

variation in profits paying the way for more effective internal control.

Lesson 6

Cost Records

219

CAUSES OF DIFFERENCES

The vital differences between the two branches of accounting are manifested in the variation of the profit

figure of one from the other through the cumulative impact of the following factors:

I. ITEMS SHOWN ONLY IN FINANCIAL ACCOUNTS

There are certain items which are included in financial accounts but find no place in cost accounts. These

may be items of expenditure or appropriation of profit or items of income. The items may be classified as

under:

(a) Purely Financial Charges:

(i) Loss on sale of fixed assets.

(ii) Loss in investments.

(iii) Discount on issue of shares.

(iv) Interest on bank loan, mortgages, debentures etc.

(v) Expenses of the company’s share transfer office.

(vi) Damages payable.

(vii) Penalties and fines.

(viii) Losses due to scrapping of machinery.

(ix) Remuneration paid to the proprietor in excess of a fair reward for services rendered.

(b) Purely Financial Income:

(i) Rent receivable, (when rent is receivable from subletting part of business premises - then it can also

be included in cost accounts).

(ii) Interest received on bank deposits.

(iii) Profit made on sale of investments, fixed assets etc.

(iv) Transfer fees received.

(v) Interest, dividends etc. received on investments.

(vi) Brokerage received.

(vii) Discount, commission etc. received.

(c) Appropriation of Profits:

(i) Donations and charities paid.

(ii) Taxes on income and profits.

(iii) Dividend paid.

(iv) Transfer to reserves and sinking fund.

(v) Additional provision for depreciation of building, plant etc. and for bad debts.

(vi) Amounts written off - goodwill, preliminary expenses, underwriting commission, discount on

debentures issued, organisation expenses etc.

(vii) Capital expenditure, specifically charged to revenue.

EP-CMA

220

II. ITEMS INCLUDED IN COST ACCOUNTS ONLY

There are certain items which are excluded from financial accounts but are included in cost accounts:

(i) Interest on capital employed in production but upon which no interest is actually paid. It is included

in cost books in order to show the nominal (notional) cost of employing the capital rather than

investing it outside the business.

(ii) Charge in lieu of rent where premises are owned.

(iii) Depreciation on asset even when the book value of the asset is reduced to negligible figure.

(iv) Salary of the proprietor where he works but does not charge salary.

III. OVER OR UNDER ABSORPTION OF OVERHEADS

In cost accounts, recovery of overheads is based on an estimate or pre-determined ratio e.g. percentage on

prime cost, percentage on sales etc. which may be more or less than the actual amount incurred. In financial

accounting the actual expenses of overheads are recorded. If overheads are not fully absorbed i.e. the

amount in cost accounts is less than the actual amount, the short fall is called under absorption. On the other

hand, if overhead expenses in cost accounts are more than the actual, it is called over-absorption. Thus

under or over absorption of overheads leads to difference in two accounts. The under recovery or over

recovery of overheads may be carried forward to the next period or may be charged by a supplementary rate

(positive or negative) or transferred to costing profit and loss account. In case, the under recovery or over

recovery of overheads has been carried forward to the next period, the profit as shown by the cost accounts

will be different from the profits as shown by the financial books and adjustments will have to be made on

this account. Some cases, selling and distribution expenses are ignored in cost accounts and as such

costing profit will be higher and thus requiring reconciliation.

IV. ADOPTION OF DIFFERENT BASIS OF VALUATION OF STOCK

(a) Raw Material: In financial accounts, stock of raw material is valued at cost or market price

whichever is less, while in cost accounts stock can be valued on the basis of FIFO or LIFO or any

other method. Thus the value of stock may be different in both the books.

(b) Work-in-progress: Difference may also exist regarding the mode of valuation of work-in-progress.

It may be valued at prime cost or factory cost or cost of production. The most appropriate mode of

valuing is at factory cost in cost accounts. In financial accounts, work-in-progress may be valued

after considering a part of administrative expenses also.

(c) Finished Goods: In financial accounts stock of finished goods is valued at cost or market price

whichever is lower. In cost accounts, finished goods are generally valued at total cost of production.

Thus the method of valuation of stock gives rise to different results in the sets of books.

V. DIFFERENT METHODS OF CHARGING DEPRECIATION

The methods of charging depreciation may be different in cost books as well as in financial books. The

method of providing depreciation under financial accounting is totally governed by Companies Act or tax

provisions so that diminishing balance method or fixed instalment method is generally followed. However in

cost accounts machine hour rate or production hour or unit method may have been followed.

Lesson 6

Cost Records

221

VI. ABNORMAL GAINS AND LOSSES

Abnormal gains or losses may completely be excluded from cost accounts or may be taken to costing profit

and loss account. If it is excluded, costing profit/loss will differ from financial profit/loss and adjustment will be

required. In case, if these are transferred to costing profit and loss account, the profit or loss shown by cost

accounts will agree with the profit or loss of financial accounts. In such a case no adjustment will be required.

Examples of such abnormal gains and losses are, abnormal wastage of materials, e.g. by theft, fire etc., cost

of abnormal idle time, cost of abnormal idle facilities, exceptional bad debts, abnormal gain in manufacturing

through processes etc.

PREPARATION OF RECONCILIATION STATEMENT OR MEMORANDUM RECONCILIATION

ACCOUNT

A Reconciliation Statement or a Memorandum Reconciliation Account should be drawn up for reconciling

profits shown by two set of books. Results shown by any set of books may be taken as the base and

necessary adjustments should be made to arrive at the results shown by the other set of books. The

technique of preparing a reconciliation statement as well as a memorandum reconciliation account is as

under:

RECONCILIATION STATEMENT

When there is a difference between the profits disclosed by cost accounts and financial accounts, the

following steps shall be taken to prepare a Reconciliation Statement:

I. Ascertain the various reasons of disagreement (as discussed above) between the profits

disclosed by two sets of books of accounts.

II. If profit as per cost accounts (or loss as per financial accounts) is taken as the base.

ADD:

(i) Items of income included in financial accounts but not in cost accounts.

(ii) Items of expenditure (as interest on capital, rent on owned premises etc.) included in cost

accounts but not in financial accounts.

(iii) Amounts by which items of expenditure have been shown in excess in cost accounts as

compared to the corresponding entries in financial accounts.

(iv) Amounts by which items of income have been shown in excess in financial accounts as

compared to the corresponding entries in cost accounts.

(v) Over absorption of overheads in cost accounts.

(vi) The amount by which closing stock of inventory is undervalued in cost accounts.

(vii) The amount by which the opening stock of inventory is overvalued in cost accounts.

DEDUCT:

(i) Items of income included in cost accounts but not in financial accounts.

(ii) Items of expenditure included in financial accounts but not in cost accounts.

(iii) Amounts by which items of income have been shown in excess in cost accounts over the

corresponding entries in financial accounts.

(iv) Amounts by which items of expenditure have been shown in excess in financial accounts over

the corresponding entries in cost accounts.

EP-CMA

222

(v) Under absorption of overhead in cost accounts.

(vi) The amount by which closing stock of inventory is overvalued in cost accounts.

(vii) The amount by which the opening stock of inventory is undervalued in cost accounts.

III. After making all the above additions and deductions, the resulting figure will be profit as per

financial accounts.

Note: If profit as per financial accounts (or loss as per cost accounts) is taken as the base, then items added

above shall be deducted and items to be deducted shall be added i.e. the procedure discussed above shall

be reversed.

MEMORANDUM RECONCILIATION ACCOUNT

Reconciliation can also be done by preparing a Memorandum Reconciliation Account. This account is a

memorandum account only and does not form part of the double entry. A specimen form of Memorandum

Reconciliation Account is given below:

Memorandum Reconciliation Account

Particulars

`

Particulars

`

To Financial Expenses: By Profit as per Cost Accounts

Discount By Financial income

Fine and penalties Rent

Bank Interest Interest

Underwriter’s Commission Dividend

Donations Profit on sales of assets

Goodwill written off By Items charged in cost accounts:

To Under-charge of depreciation Interest on own capital

cost accounts Rent on own building

To Under-absorption of overheads By Over-charge of depreciation

To Under-valuation of opening stock in cost accounts

in cost accounts By Over-absorption of overheads

To Over-valuation of closing stock in By Over-valuation of opening stock

cost accounts in cost accounts

To Profit as per Financial Accounts By Under-valuation of closing stock

in cost accounts

Illustration 4

The following is a summary of the trading and profit and loss account of a manufacturing company for the

year ended 31st March, 2014:

(

`

‘000)

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Material consumed 2,740 By Sales (1,20,000 units) 6,000

To Wages 1,510 By Finished stock (4,000 units) 160

Lesson 6

Cost Records

223

To Factory expenses 830 By Work-in-progress:

To Administration expenses 382 Materials 64

To Selling and distribution expenses 450 Wages 36

To Preliminary expenses (written off) 40 Factory expenses 20 120

To Goodwill (written off) 20 By Dividend received 18

To Net profit 326 ____

6,298 6,298

In the cost accounts, the following allocations have been made:

(i) Factory expenses at 20% on prime cost.

(ii) Administration expenses at ` 3 per unit of production.

(iii) Selling and distribution expenses at ` 4 per unit of sales.

You are required to prepare a costing profit and loss account of the company and to reconcile the profit

disclosed with that shown in the financial account.

Solution:

Costing Profit and Loss Account on 31.3.2014

(

`

‘000)

Material consumed 2,740

Wages 1,510

Prime cost 4,250

Factory expenses (20% of prime cost) 850

Total works cost 5,100

Less: Closing work-in-progress

Materials 64

Wages 36

Factory expenses 20 120

Works Cost (Completed units) 4,980

Add: Administration expenses

@ ` 3 (for sales and closing stock)

i.e. ` 3 (1,20,000 + 4,000) 372

Cost of production 5,352

Less: Closing finished stock

(at proportionate cost of production)













× 4000

000,24,1

5352`

173

Cost of goods sold 5,179

Add: Selling and distribution expenses

(1,20,000 @ ` 4 per unit) 480

Cost of Sales 5,659

Net Profit 341

Sales (1,20,000 units @ ` 50) 6,000

Note: Figures are rounded off to the nearest thousands.

EP-CMA

224

Reconciliation Statement

(

`

‘000)

Profit as per Cost Accounts 341

Add: Over absorption of factory expenses

(` 850 - ` 830) 20

Over absorption of selling expenses

(` 480 - ` 450) 30

Dividend received 18 68

409

Less: Under absorption of administration overheads

(` 382 - ` 372) 10

Preliminary expenses written off 40

Goodwill written off 20

Difference in valuation of finished stock 13 83

Profit as per Financial Accounts 326

Illustration 5

The audited final accounts showed a profit of ` 30,500 whereas costing records showed a profit of ` 36,700.

From the following additional information, reconcile the two accounts.

Profit and Loss Account

for the year ended 31st March, 2014

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Opening Stock 5,05,000 By Sales 7,10,000

To Purchases 1,75,000 By Closing Stock 1,80,000

To Direct Wages 80,000

To Factory Overheads 45,000

To Gross Profit c/d 85,000 _______

8,90,000 8,90,000

To Administration expenses 20,300 By Gross Profit b/d 85,000

To Selling expenses 24,500 By Interest Received 1,000

To Distribution expenses 11,200 By Dividend Received 500

To Net Profit 30,500 _____

86,500 86,500

The Cost accounts showed the following:

1. Stock balance of

`

1,85,000

2. Direct wages absorbed

`

82,500

3. Factory overheads absorbed

`

42,000

4. Administration expenses charged @ 3% of sale value

5. Selling expenses charged @ 3% of sales value.

Lesson 6

Cost Records

225

Solution:

Reconciliation of Profit between Cost and Financial Accounts

Particulars

` `

`

Profit as per Financial Accounts 30,500

Add: Difference in valuation of Closing stock 1,85,000

1,80,000 5,000

Factory overheads under absorbed

in Cost Accounts 45,000

42,000 3,000

Selling expenses under charged in

Cost Accounts (3% on ` 7,10,000) 24,500

21,300 3,200 11,200

41,700

Less: Direct wages over

absorbed in Cost Accounts 82,500

80,000 2,500

Administration overheads over-absorbed

in Cost Accounts (3% of ` 7,10,000) 21,300

20,300 1,000

Interest and dividends received - not

Included in Cost Accounts 1,500 5,000

Profit as per Cost Accounts 36,700

Illustration 6

M/s Birla Trader have furnished the following information from financial books for the year ended 31st March,

2014:

Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the year ended 31st March, 2014

` `

To Opening stock By Sales (10,250 units) 7,17,500

(500 units at

`

35 each) 17,500 By Closing stock (250 units at

`

50 each) 12,500

To Materials consumed 2,60,000

To Wages 1,50,000

To Gross Profit 3,02,500 _______

7,30,000 7,30,000

To Factory overheads 94,700 By Gross profit 3,02,500

To Office overheads 1,06,000 By Interest 250

To Selling expenses 55,000 By Rent 10,000

To Bad debts 4,000

To Goodwill written off 5,000

To Net profit 48,050 _______

3,12,750 3,12,750

EP-CMA

226

The cost sheet shows the following:

(a) Cost of materials at

`

26 per unit and labour cost

`

15 per unit produced.

(b) Factory overheads are absorbed at 60% of labour cost.

(c) Office overheads are absorbed at 20% of factory cost.

(d) Selling expenses are charged at `6 per unit.

(e) Opening stock of finished goods is valued at ` 45 per unit and closing stock as in financial books.

You are required to prepare:

(i) a statement showing cost and profit as per cost accounts for the year ended 31st March, 2014, and

(ii) statement showing the reconciliation of profit disclosed in cost accounts with the profits shown in

financial accounts.

Solution:

(i) Cost Statement for the year ending 31st March, 2014

`

Cost of material (10,000 units @

`

26 per unit) 2,60,000

Labour cost (10,000 units @

`

15 per unit) 1,50,000

Prime cost 4,10,000

Factory overhead (60% of labour cost) 90,000

Factory cost 5,00,000

Office overheads (20% of factory cost) 1,00,000

Cost of production 6,00,000

Add: Opening stock: 500 units at

`

45 each 22,500

6,22,500

Less: Closing stock: 250 units at

`

50 each 12,500

Cost of goods sold 6,10,000

Selling overhead (

`

6 unit on 10,250 units) 61,500

Cost of sales 6,71,500

Sales 7,17,500

Profit 46,000

(ii) Reconciliation Statement

` `

Profit as per Cost Accounts 46,000

Add: (i) Income items, i.e. interest and rent not included in

cost accounts 10,250

(ii) Over-valuation of opening stock in cost accounts 5,000

(iii) Over-recovery of selling overheads in cost accounts 6,500 21,750

67,750

Less: (i) Loss items i.e. bad debts and goodwill written off not

included in cost accounts 9,000

(ii) Under-recovery of factory overheads in cost accounts 4,700

(iii) Under-recovery of office overheads in cost accounts 6,000 19,700

Profit as per Financial Accounts 48,050

Lesson 6

Cost Records

227

Illustration 7

During the year ended 31st March, 2014, the profit of a company stood at ` 36,450 as per financial records.

The cost book, however, showed a profit of `51,950 for the same period. You are required to reconcile the

profit as shown by two sets of accounts:

`

(i) Opening stock overstated in cost accounts 3,500

(ii) Closing stock understated in cost accounts 4,600

(iii) Factory overheads under recovered in cost accounts 2,500

(iv) Administration expenses over recovered in cost accounts 750

(v) Selling and distribution expenses under-recovered in cost accounts 1,650

(vi) Depreciation over-recovered in cost accounts 1,500

(vii) Interest on investment not included cost accounts 5,000

(viii) Obsolescence loss in respect of machineries charged in financial accounts 2,450

(ix) Income-tax provided in financial accounts 25,000

(x) Bank interest credited in financial accounts 1,500

(xi) Stores adjustments (debit in financial book) 750

Solution:

Reconciliation Statement

Particulars Amount Amount

` `

Net profit as per financial accounts 36,450

Add: Items not debited in cost accounts:

(i) Obsolescence loss 2,450

(ii) Income tax provisions 25,000

(iii) Stores adjustments 750

28,200

Under recover of factory overheads in cost accounts 2,500

Under recovery of selling and distribution expenses in cost accounts 1,650 32,350

68,800

Less: Items not credited in cost accounts:

(i) Interest on investments 5,000

(ii) bank interest in financial accounts 1,500

6,500

Over recovery of administration expenses 750

Over recovery of depreciation 1,500

8,750

Difference in value of stock:

(i) Opening stock overstated in cost accounts 3,500

(ii) Closing stock understated in cost accounts 4,600 16,850

Net profit as per cost accounts 51,950

EP-CMA

228

The same solution is presented in memorandum form:

Memorandum Reconciliation Account

Dr. Cr.

Particulars Amount Particulars Amount

` `

To Interest on investments 5,000 By Net profit as per financial accounts 36,450

To Bank interest 1,500 By Obsolescence loss 2,450

To Over-recovery of Admn. expenses 750 By Income Tax Provision 25,000

To Over-recovery of depreciation 1,500 By Stores Adjustments 750

To Over statement of opening stock 3,500 By Under recovery of factory overheads 2,500

To Under statement of closing stock 4,600 By Under recovery of selling and

To Net profit as per cost accounts 51,950 distribution expenses 1,650

68,800 68,800

Illustration 8

A manufacturing, trading, profit and loss, and profit and loss appropriation accounts of Tata Limited for the

year ending 31st March, 2014 are as follows:

` ` ` `

To Raw Materials: By Cost of goods manufactured 80,750

Opening Stock 7,100

Add: Purchases 33,850

40,950

Less: Closing Stock 7,450 33,500

To Wages 29,000

To Factory Overhead:

Indirect wages 3,500

Rent and Rates 1,500

Power and fuel 3,000

Depreciation 5,500

Other expenses 5,200 18,700

Works Cost 81,200

Less: Work in Progress

Closing Stock 5,350

Less: Opening Stock 4,900 450 ______

80,750 80,750

To Finished Goods: By Sales 1,20,000

Opening stock 5,200

Manufactured 80,750

85,950

Less: Closing Stock 5,750 80,200

To Gross Profit c/d 39,800 _______

1,20,000 1,20,000

Lesson 6

Cost Records

229

To Administration Overhead: By Gross Profit b/d 39,800

Office Salaries 7,750 By Dividend Received 500

Office Expenses 2,000 9,750

To Selling and

Distribution Overhead:

Salesmen’s salaries 3,000

Selling expenses 500

Distribution expenses 1,500 5,000

To Loss on sale of machinery 400

To Fines 150

To Net Profit for the year 25,000 ______

40,300 40,300

To Income Tax 5,000 By Balance b/d 15,100

To General reserve 2,500 By Net Profit for the year 25,000

To Dividend 6,000

To Goodwill written off 1,500

To Balance c/d 25,100 _____

40,100 40,100

The cost accounts revealed a profit of ` 34,787. In preparing this figure stocks have been valued in cost

accounts as follows:

Opening Closing

Stock Stock

Raw materials 7,050 7,475

Work in progress 4,938 5,300

Administration Overhead has been ignored in cost accounts. Prepare a reconciliation statement.

Solution:

Reconciliation Statement

Particulars

` `

Profits per cost accounts 34,787

Add: Dividend received not credited in cost accounts 500

Difference in stock:

Work in progress - opening 38

Work in progress - closing 50 588

35,375

Less: Administration overhead not-charged in cost accounts 9,750

Loss on sale on machinery 400

Fines 150

Difference in stocks:

(a) Raw materials - opening 50

(b) Raw materials - closing 25 10,375

Profit as per financial accounts 25,000

EP-CMA

230

LESSON ROUND UP

•

There are basically three cost accounting systems 1. Financial Accounting System 2. Non-Integrated Accounting

System 3. Integrated Accounting System

•

Non-integral accounting system where separate accounts books are maintained to record financial and cost

transactions.

•

Non-integral accounting system is also known as ‘Cost Control Accounts’.

•

Two set of accounts books are kept in non-integral system one for recording cost transaction another for financial

transaction.

•

Double entry system is adopted for recording the transactions in both accounts books.

•

Integral system is a system of accounting under which only one set of books of account is maintained to record the

both transactions (cost & financial). It is also known as integrated accounts system. There is no need for cost

ledger and cost ledger control account.

•

Integrated accounts are like a hybrid between non-integrated and the financial system of accounting.

•

In case of the non-integrated system, no personal or real accounts are prepared and all entries are passed through

the General Ledger Adjustment account.

•

In the financial accounting system, there is no base of the cost accounting.

•

In the integrated system of accounting, personal and real accounts are prepared but there exists a base of the cost

accounting system.

•

In non-integral accounting system shows the two different profits due to two separate books of account.

•

Reconciliation statement reconciles the profit as per Cost Accounts with the profit as per Financial Accounts by

showing all causes of differences between the two.

•

Reconciliation places management in better position to acquaint itself with the reasons for the variation in profits

paying the way for more effective internal control.

SELF TEST QUESTIONS

1. What are the main ledgers have been maintained under non-integral accounting system?

2. Give Journal entries for following transactions under non-integrating accounting system:

(a) Material Purchased for stock

(b) Issue of Direct Material to Production Department

(c) Material returned to suppliers.

(d) Total Salary & Wages paid.

(e) Recording sales return

(f) Recording overheads incurred & accrued.

3. Write short notes on ‘Integrated Accounts’.

4. State the essential pre-requisites of integrated accounting system.

5. List three main advantages of integrated accounts.

Lesson 6

Cost Records

231

6. As on 31st March, 2014, the following balances existed in a firm’s Cost Ledger:

Dr. Cr.

` `

Stores Ledger Control A/c 13,01,435

Work-in-Progress Control A/c 1,22,365

Finished Stock Ledger Control A/c 2,51,945

Manufacturing Overhead Control A/c 10,525

Cost Ledger Control A/c ________ 16,65,220

16,75,745 16,75,745

During the next three months the following items arose:

`

Finished product (at cost) 2,10,835

Manufacturing overhead incurred 91,510

Raw materials purchased 1,23,000

Factory Wages 50,530

Indirect Labour 21,665

Cost of Sales 1,85,890

Material issued to production 1,27,315

Sales returned at Cost 15,380

Material returned to suppliers 12,900

Manufacturing overhead charged to production 77,200

You are required to pass the Journal Entries; write up the accounts and schedule the balances,

stating what each balance represents.

7. Cement Ltd. is maintaining separate set of books for financial accounts and cost accounts. You are

required to prepare accounts in cost books and trial balance for the year ended 31

st

March 2014.

– Information Available From Financial Accounts:

– Sales: `3, 30, 000

– Indirect wages: Production `30, 000, Administration `12, 000, Sales and distribution ` 15, 000

– Materials purchased: `1,25, 000

– Direct factory wages: `1, 90, 000

– Production overheads: `79, 000

– Selling and distribution overheads: `56,000

– Administration overheads: `48, 000

The data available from cost accounts for the period include the following:

– Raw materials issued to production as indirect material `18, 000

– Stores issued to production as direct materials `1, 25, 000

– Raw materials of finished production `4, 25, 000

– Cost of goods sold at finished goods stock valuation `4, 00, 000

– Standard rate of production overhead absorption `0.50 per operating hour

EP-CMA

232

– Rate of administration overhead absorption 20% of cost of production

– Rate of sales and distribution overhead absorption 10% of sales

– Actual operating hours worked 2, 40, 000

– There is no balance of stock on 1-4-2013

8. The following figures have been extracted from the cost records of a manufacturing unit:

` `

Stores: Opening Balance 32,000

Purchase of Material 1,58,000

Transfer from work-in-progress 80,000

Issues to work-in-progress 1,60,000

Issues to repare and maintenance 20,000

Deficiencies found in stock taking 6,000

Work-in-progress: opening balance 60,000

Direct wages applied 65,000

Overhead applied 2,40,000

Closing balance of WIP 45,000

Finished product; Entire output is sold at a profit of 10% on actual cost from work-in-progress.

Wages incurred ` 70,000, overhead incurred ` 2,50,000.

Items not included in cost records: Income from investment ` 10,000.

Loss on sale of capital assets `20,000.

Direct wages applied 65,000

Overhead applied 2,40,000

Closing balance of WIP 45,000

Finished product; Entire output is sold at a profit of 10% on actual cost from work-in-progress.

Wages incurred ` 70,000, overhead incurred `2,50,000.

Draw up stores control account, work-in-progress control account, costing profit and loss

account and reconciliation statement.

9. A company operates separate cost accounting and financial accounting systems. The following is

the list of opening balances as on 1-4-2013 in the cost ledger

Debit Credit

` `

Stores Ledger Control a/c 53,375 —

WIP Control account 104,595 —

Finished Goods Control a/c 30,780 —

General Ledger Adjustment a/c 1,88,750

Transactions for the period ended 31-3-2013 are as under:

`

Materials purchased 26,700

Lesson 6

Cost Records

233

Materials issued to production 40,000

Materials issued for factory repairs 900

Factory wages paid (including indirect wages ` 23,000) 77,500

Production overhead incurred 95,200

Production overheads under-absorbed and written off 3,200

Sales 2,56,000

The company’s gross profit is 25% on factory cost. At the end of the quarter, work-in-progress stocks

increased by ` 7,500.

Prepare the relevant control accounts, costing profit & loss a/c, and General ledger adjustment

account to record the above transactions for the period ended 31-3-2014.

10. Give reasons as to why it is necessary to reconcile cost accounts and financial accounts. What is

the procedure to be adopted for their reconciliation?

11. State briefly the treatment of under or over absorption of overheads while reconciling costing profits

with financial profits?

12. Summarised information extracted from the books of a company relating to year ended 31st March,

2014:

— Factory overheads (actual) ` 60,000 of which 60% are fixed.

— Selling and distribution overheads (actual) `12,000 of which 50% are fixed.

— Administration overheads (actual) ` 18,000 are constant for all practical purposes.

— Material and wages costs are ` 2,00,000 and ` 1,00,000 respectively.

— Sales (20,000 units) are ` 4 lakh.

— Normal output during the year was expected to be 16,000 units.

— There is no opening and closing stock of finished product.

On the basis of information given above, you are required to ––

(i) Ascertain the actual amount of profit.

(ii) Prepare a cost sheet and find out estimated profit assuming that the overheads are

absorbed in cost on the basis of normal production.

(iii) Reconcile the above profits by preparing a statement of reconciliation.

13. From the following data, find out the profit as per financial records:

`

Profit as per cost records 70,500

Closing stock under-valued in cost records 10,300

Administration overheads under-recovered in cost records 5,600

Bad debts and preliminary expenses written-off in financial accounts only 7,845

Depreciation overcharged in cost records 3,645

14. Rayon Ltd. made a profit of ` 20,000 during the year ended 31st March, 2014 as per their costing

system, whereas their financial accounts disclose a profit of ` 15,000. From the following Profit and

Loss Account for the year ended 31st March, 2014 as per the financial books, you are required to

prepare a Reconciliation Statement showing the causes for this difference:

EP-CMA

234

Profit and Loss Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Opening Stock 1,00,000 By Sales 1,75,000

To Purchases 80,000 By Closing Stock 80,000

To Direct wages 20,000

To Factory expenses 15,000

To Gross Profit c/d 40,000 _______

2,55,000 2,55,000

To Administrative expenses 10,000 By Gross Profit b/d 40,000

To Selling expenses 15,000

To Net Profit 15,000 ______

40,000 40,000

Costing records show the following:

(a) Stock Ledger closing balance

`

89,000

(b) Direct Labour

`

23,000

(c) Factory overheads

`

13,000

(d) Administration overheads and selling expenses calculated at 8 per cent of the selling price.

15. The following is the audited accounts of a company for the year ended 31st March, 2014

Dr. Cr.

Particulars

`

Particulars

`

To Materials consumed 27,00,000 By Sales (1,00,000 units) 60,00,000

To Wages 15,00,000 By Finished goods (4,000 units)2,00,000

To Factory expenses 9,00,000 By Work-in-progress:

To Administration expenses 4,25,000 Materials 60,000

To Selling and Distribution Wages 25,000

expenses 4,50,000 Factory expenses 15,000 1,00,000

To Preliminary expenses (written off) 50,000

To Goodwill written off 40,000 By Dividend received 20,000

To Net Profit 2,65,000 By Rent received 10,000

63,30,000 63,30,000

The following additional information is supplied. In cost accounts:

(1) Factory expenses have been allocated to production @ 22% on prime cost.

(2) Administration expenses at

`

4 per unit on units produced.

(3) Selling and distribution expenses at ` 4.42 per unit on units sold. ` 2.00 packing cost on

completed units not sold.

Ascertain profit/loss as per cost accounts and reconcile two sets of accounts.

Lesson 6

Cost Records

235

16. From the following figures prepare a reconciliation statement:

`

.

Net profit as per financial records 1,28,755

Net profits as per costing records 1,72,400

Works overheads under recovered in costing 3,120

Administration overheads recovered in excess 1,700

Depreciation charged in financial records 11,200

Depreciation recovered in costing 12,500

Interest received but not included in costing 8,000

Obsolescence loss charged in financial records 5,700

Income tax provided in financial records 40,300

Bank interest credited in financial books 750

Stores adjustments (credit in financial books) 475

Depreciation of stock charged in financial books 6,750

17. The Profit and Loss Account of manufacturing company for the year ended 31st March, 2014 is as

follows:

`

.

`

.

To Material consumed 75,000 By Sales 1,86,000

To Carriage inwards 1,500

To Direct Wages 51,000

To Works expenses 18,000

To Administrative expenses 6,750

To Selling and distribution expenses 9,750

To Debenture interest 1,500

To Net Profit 22,500 _______

1,86,000 1,86,000

The net profit shown by the cost accounts for the year is ` 24,405. Upon a detailed comparison of

the two sets of accounts it is found that:

(a) The amount charged in the cost accounts in respect of overhead charges are as follows:

Works overhead charges ` 17,250, Office overhead charges ` 6,885, Selling and distributing

expenses ` 9,960.

(b) No charge has been made in the cost accounts in respect of debenture interest. You are

required to reconcile the profits shown by the two sets of accounts.

18. From the following Profit and Loss Account, you are required to draw up a Memorandum

Reconciliation Account to ascertain the profit as per cost accounts:

Profit and Loss Account as at 31.3.2014

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Salaries 24,200 By Gross profit 1,15,400

To Rents and taxes 6,000 By Dividend received 600

To Depreciation 5,400 By Miscellaneous income 1,200

EP-CMA

236

To Administration expenses 26,800

To Sales office expenses 20,700

To Advertisement 500

To Loss on sale of assets 2,900

To Fines 200

To Discount on debentures 200

To Net profit before appropriation 30,300 _______

1,17,200 1,17,200

Profit and Loss Appropriation Account

` `

To Income-tax 14,800 By Net Profit 30,300

To Transfer to general reserve 4,000

To Dividend 10,200

To Balance transferred

to Balance Sheet 1,300 ______

30,300 30,300

19. A Bicycle manufacturing company which commenced business on 1st April, 2013 supplies you with

the following information, and asks you to prepare a statement showing the profit per bicycle.

Wages and materials are to be charged at actual costs, works overhead at 80% on wages and

office overhead at 20% on works cost. You are also required to prepare a statement reconciling the

profit as shown by the cost account with the profit shown by the profit and loss account for the year

ended 31st March, 2014.

Two types of bicycles are manufactured, namely Model A and Model B. There were no bicycle in

stock or in the course of manufacture. At the end of the year, the number of bicycles sold during the

year were. Model A: 1,200 and Model B: 840.

The particulars given are as under:

Model A Model B

` `

Material as per bicycle 180 1,100

Wages per bicycle 140 160

Selling price per bicycle 1,200 1,300

Prepare the necessary statement showing the actual profit for the year, if the works indirect

expenses were ` 80,000 and office indirect expenses ` 70,000.

Lesson 7

Costing Systems

•

Unit and Output Costing

•

Production Account

•

Job Costing and its features, basic

principle & special term, applications,

advantages & limitations

•

Batch Costing and its features, difference

between job & batch costing and

applications

•

Contract Costing:

— Distinction between job and contract

costing, specific aspects and recording

of transactions of contract costing

•

Profits on Incomplete Contracts

•

Process Costing and its general principles,

features, applications, difference between

job and process costing, advantage &

limitation

•

Process cost and accounting,

•

Normal loss, Abnormal loss & Abnormal

Gains

•

Inter-Process Profit, Equivalent production

units

•

Joint Products, By-Products and their

accounting

•

Service Costing and its features and

applications, Unit Costing and Multiple

Costing

•

Lesson Round Up

•

Self-Test Questions

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

Cost accounting is the "collection, assignment, and

interpretation of cost". Costing is the process or

activity of determining the costs incurred on various

types of inputs used in the organization and

apportioning it to different products and activities of a

company. Costing is used for many different

purposes such as fixing selling price of products,

analyzing costs associated with different products

and activities to facilitate decisions on product mix

and methods, analysis of costs and profitability for

investment decisions and cost control. There are no

clearly defined classifications of different types of

costing systems used in manufacturing or any other

industry. Every organization has to design a costing

system according to the nature of its products,

operations and the way it intends to use the costing

information.

Some of the well-known and popular costing systems

which are in use today are as follows:

•

Unit or output Costing

•

Job Costing

•

Batch costing

•

Contract costing

•

Process costing

•

Service costing

The actual method used is not as important as

whether the chosen system works. The simpler the

system is, the easier it will be to understand and

implement.

After reading this lesson, the user should be able to

1. Understand the meaning of different costing

system.

2. Use the different costing systems in practical

scenario.

3. Understand the characteristics. Advantages and

limitations of different costing systems.

A costing system is not intended to replace an accounting system. Instead, the systems actually work within the broad

framework of general accounting systems to extract specific data for quick and easy analysis.

LESSON

OUTLINE

EP-CMA

238

INTRODUCTION

Today different business and industry needs different costing systems to meet their individual requirements.

It is not possible to devise a single costing system to fulfil everybody’s needs. Different methods of costing

for different industries depending upon the type of manufacture and their nature have been developed.

Various methods of ascertaining costs are available to suit the business need. But the basic principles are

the same in every method. The choice of a particular method of costing depends on the nature of business of

the concern. There are two basic methods of costing viz. – (a) Specific order or job costing (b) Continuous

operation or process costing Brief description of each of the methods are as follows:

SINGLE/OUTPUT/UNIT COSTING

Unit costing refers to the costing procedure, under which costs are accumulated and analyzed under

different elements of cost and then cost per unit is ascertained by dividing the total cost by number of units

produced. It is ideally used in case of concerns producing a single article on large scale by continuous

manufacture. The units of output are identical. The products are homogenous. Concern using single or

output costing produces basically one product or two or more grades of one product.

It is not necessary to maintain separate cost accounts under this system. as all the information required can

be obtained only by organizing and analyzing the financial accounts. On dividing the total expenditure

incurred by the number of units produced, the cost per unit is ascertained.

This system of costing is suitable for breweries, collieries, cement works, steel, brick making, floor mills etc.

In all these cases the unit cost of the article produced requires to be ascertained.

The information on expenditure incurred on material, labour and direct expenses can be available without

any special difficulty. The works and administration expenses actually incurred also are included in the total

cost. Items of indirect expenses which are paid at periodical intervals are included in cost accounts on the

basis of estimates. Selling and distributing expenses are not included in cost sheets since these have no

connection with the quantity produced, If, however, it is decided to include them, the same also are

estimated on the basis of past experience.

COST SHEET

Cost sheet is a document which provides for the assembly of the detailed cost of a cost centre or cost unit. It

is a periodical statement of cost designed to show in detail the various components of cost of goods

produced like prime cost, factory cost, cost of production, total cost and cost per unit. A specimen of a simple

cost sheet is given below:

Cost Sheet (or Statement of Cost) for the period.........

No. of units produced........

Particulars Total Cost

cost per unit

` `

Direct Materials

Direct Labour

Direct (or Chargeable) Expenses*

Prime cost

Add: Works Overheads

Works Cost

Add: Administrative Overheads

Cost of Production

Add: Selling and Distribution Overheads

Total Cost or Cost of Sales

*

The terms “direct expenses” have been excluded from prime cost as per CIMA terminology i.e. according to CIMA, prime cost is “the

total cost of direct material and direct labour”.

Lesson 7 Costing System

239

If possible the cost sheet should have columns for (i) total cost; (ii) percentage to total cost; (iii) cost per unit;

and (iv) corresponding figures of the pervious period and clear figures for each element of cost.

Treatment of stock

Stock requires special treatment while preparing a cost sheet. Stock may be of raw materials, work-in-

progress and finished goods.

Stock of Raw Materials

If opening stock of raw material, purchase of raw materials and closing stock of raw materials are given,

then, raw material consumed can be calculated as follows:

Opening stock of raw materials 

Add: Purchase of raw materials 

Less: Closing stock of raw materials 

Value of raw materials consumed 

Stock of Work-in-Progress

Work-in-progress is valued at prime cost or works cost basis, but latter is preferred. If it is valued at works or

factory cost then opening and closing stock will be adjusted as follows :

Prime cost —

Add: Factory overheads —

Work-in-progress (beginning) —

Less: Work-in-progress (closing) —

Works cost 





Stock of Finished Goods

If opening and closing stock of finished goods are given, then these must be adjusted before calculating cost

of goods sold:

Cost of production 

Add: Opening stock of finished goods 

Less: Closing stock of finished goods 

Cost of goods sold

USES OF COST SHEET

(i) It gives total cost and cost per unit for a particular period.

(ii) It gives information to management for cost control.

(iii) It provides comparative study of actual current costs with the cost of corresponding periods, thus

causes of inefficiencies and wastage can be known and suitably corrected by management.

(iv) It acts as a guide to manufacture in formulation of suitable and definite policies and in fixing up the

selling price.

ITEMS EXCLUDED FROM COST SHEET

The following items are of financial nature and thus not included while preparing a cost sheet.

(i) Cash discount

(ii) Interest paid

EP-CMA

240

(iii) Preliminary expenses written off

(iv) Goodwill written off

(v) Provision for taxation

(vi) Provision for bad debts

(vii) Transfer to reserves

(viii) Donations

(ix) Income tax paid

(x) Dividend paid

(xi) Profit/loss on sale of assets

(xii) Damages payable at law etc.

PRODUCTION ACCOUNT

If the details of cost sheet or production statement are shown in the form of a ledger account, it is known as

production account. Besides cost of production it also includes selling and distribution expenses. It is

prepared in three parts - the first part gives the cost of production, the second part gives the cost of goods

sold and the third part shows cost of sales or total cost for the period. A specimen of a Production Account is

as follows:

PRODUCTION ACCOUNT

Particulars Amount Particulars Amount

`

To Direct materials — By Prime Cost c/d —

To Direct labour —

To Direct expense —

______ _______

— —

To Prime Cost b/d — By Cost of goods manufactured —

To Works overheads —

Add: Work in progress —

(Opening)

Less: Work in progress —

(closing)

Less: Sale of by-

products or scrap — _____— _______

— —

To Cost of goods manufactured b/d — By Sales —

To Opening stock of finished goods — By Closing stock of finished goods —

To Gross Profit c/d — _______

— —

To Administration overhead — By Gross Profit b/d —

To Selling and distribution overheads —

To Net Profit — ______

— —

Lesson 7 Costing System

241

Example

From the following particulars prepare a Production Account showing all details of cost and their break up

and also calculate gross profit and net profit.

1-9-2013 30-9-2013

`

Stock of Raw Material 75,000 91,500

Stock of Work-in-Progress 28,000 35,000

Stock of Finished Goods 54,000 31,000

`

Direct Expenses 1,500 Sales 2,11,00

Raw Materials Purchased 66,000 Salesmen Salaries and Commission 6,500

Direct Wages 52,500 Office Rent, Rates etc. 2,500

Indirect Wages 2,750 Sundry Office Expenses 6,500

Factory Expenses 25,000 Advertisement 3,500

Depreciation on Plant and Machinery 3,500 Carriage Outwards 2,500

Solution

PRODUCTION ACCOUNT FOR SEPTEMBER, 2013

`

To Materials Consumed: By Prime Cost b/d 1,03,500

Opening Stock of

Raw Material 75,000

Add: Material Purchased 66,000

1,41,000

Less: Closing Stock of

Raw Materials 91,000 49,500

To Direct Wages 52,500

To Direct Expenses 1,500 _______

1,03,500 1,03,500

To Prime Cost b/d 1,03,500 By Cost of Goods Manufactured 1,27,750

To Factory Overheads:

Indirect Wages 2,750

Factory Expenses 25,000

Depreciation of Plant

and Machinery 3,500 31,250

To Work-in-Progress (opening) 28,000

1,62,750

Less: Work-in-Progress (closing) 35,000 _______

1,27,750 1,27,750

To Cost of Goods Manufactured b/d 1,27,750 By Sales 2,11,000

To Opening Stock of Finished Goods 54,000 By Stock of Finished Goods 31,000

To Gross Profit c/d 60,000 _______

2,42,000 2,42,000

EP-CMA

242

To Office Expenses: By Gross Profit b/d 60,250

Rent, Rates etc. 2,500

Sundry Office Expenses 6,500 9,000

To Selling Expenses:

Salesmen’s Salaries and

Commission 6,500

Advertising 3,500

Carriage Outwards 2,500 12,500

To Net Profit 38,750 _____

60,250 60,250

COST SHEET AND PRODUCTION ACCOUNT

The following are the points of distinction between cost sheet and production account:

Cost sheet Production Account

(1) It is prepared as a statement. It is prepared as an account.

(2) Expenses are classified to ascertain prime

cost, factory cost, total cost, etc.

Expenses are not classified.

(3) To enable comparison, figures of previous

period are provided.

No figures of previous period are provided. Hence no

comparison is possible.

(4) It is based on actual and estimated figures

of expenses.

It is based on actual figures.

(5) It is prepared for each job and sometimes

for the whole factory.

It is prepared for each production department.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

Illustration 1

The following particulars have been extracted from the books of a manufacturing company for the month of

March, 2014:

`

Stock of materials as on 1st March, 2013 47,000

Stock of materials as on 31st March, 2013 50,000

Materials purchased during the month 2,08,000

Drawing office salaries 9,600

Counting house salaries 14,000

Re-write the following sentence after filling-in the blank spaces with

appropriate word:

(i) An account giving details of cost of production, cost of sales and

profit made during a particular period is called ________________.

(ii) Unit cost method is used in ___________ (name two industry).

Correct answer: (i) Production account (ii) Brick, Coal

Lesson 7 Costing System

243

Carriage on purchases 8,200

Carriage on sales 5,100

Cash discount allowed 3,400

Bad debts written off 4,700

Repairs of plant, machinery and tools 10,600

Rent, rates, taxes and insurance (factory) 3,000

Rent, rates, taxes and insurance (office) 1,000

Travelling expenses 3,100

Travellers’ salaries and commission 8,400

Productive wages 1,40,000

Depreciation written off on plant, machinery and tools 7,100

Depreciation written off on office furniture 600

Directors’ fees 6,000

Gas and water charges (factory) 1,500

Gas and water charges (office) 300

General charges 5,000

Manager’s salary 12,000

Out of 48 working hours in a week, the time devoted by the Manager to the factory and office was on an

average 40 hours and 8 hours respectively throughout the month. 1,00,000 units were produced and sold;

there was no opening or closing stock of it.

Prepare a cost sheet showing the following:

(i) Cost of Materials Consumed;

(ii) Prime Cost;

(iii) Works Overhead;

(iv) Works Cost;

(v) Office and Administration Overhead;

(vi) Cost of Production;

(vii) Selling and Distribution Overhead; and

(viii) Total Cost or Cost Sales.

Solution

Cost Sheet of............... Manufacturing Co.

For the month of March, 2014

Particulars Total % to Cost

cost total per unit

` ` ` cost `

Stock of materials as on

1st March, 2014 47,000

Add: Purchase of materials 2,08,000

Carriage on purchases 8,200 2,16,200

EP-CMA

244

Total material available

for consumption 2,63,200

Less: Stock of Materials as

on 31st March, 2014 50,000 2,13,200 47.89 2.132

Direct labour or productive wages 1,40,000 31.45 1.400

Prime Cost 3,53,200 79.34 3.532

Add: Works Overheads:

Drawing office salaries 9,600

Repairs of plant, machinery and tools 10,600

Rent, rates, taxes and insurance (factory) 3,000

Depreciation on plant machinery and tools 7,100

Gas and water charges (factory) 1,500

Manager’s salary













× 000,12

48

40

10,000 41,800 9.39 0.418

Works Cost or Factory Cost 3,95,000 88.73 3.950

Add: Office and Administrative Overheads:

Counting house salaries 14,000

Rent, rates, taxes and insurance (office) 1,000

Depreciation on office furniture 600

Directors’ fees 6,000

Gas and water charges (office) 300

General charges 5,000

Manager’s salary













× 000,12

48

8

2,000 28,900 6.49 0.289

Cost of Production 4,23,900 95.22 4.239

Add: Selling and Distribution Overheads:

Carriage on sales 5,100

Bad debts written off 4,700

Travelling expenses 3,100

Traveller’s salaries and commission 8,400 21,300 4.78 0.213

Total Cost or Cost of Sales 4,45,200 100.00 4.452

Note: Cash discount allowed is a matter of pure finance and hence it is excluded from costs.

Illustration 2

The following information has been obtained form the records of ABC Co. Ltd. for the month of January,

2014:

`

Cost of raw materials on 1/01/2014 30,000

Purchase of raw materials during the month 4,50,000

Wages paid 2,30,000

Factory overheads 92,000

Cost of work-in-progress on 1/01/2014 12,000

Cost of raw materials on 30 /01/2014 25,000

Lesson 7 Costing System

245

Cost of work-in-progress on 30 /01/2014 15,000

Cost of stock of finished goods on 1 /01/2014 60,000

Cost of stock of finished goods on 30 /01/2014 55,000

Administration overheads 30,000

Selling and distribution overheads 20,000

Sales 9,00,000

Prepare: (i) Cost sheet showing the cost of production of goods manufactured, and (ii) Statement showing

the cost of sales and the profit earned.

Solution:

Cost Sheet of ABC Ltd. for the month of January, 2014

` `

Direct materials consumed:

Cost of raw materials on 1/01/2014 30,000

Add: Purchases of raw-materials during the month 4,50,000

4,80,000

Less: Cost of raw-materials on 30/01/2014 25,000 4,55,000

Direct Labour - wages paid 2,30,000

Prime Cost 6,85,000

Factory overheads 92,000

7,77,000

Add: Cost of work-in-progress on 1/01/2014 12,000

7,89,000

Less: Cost of work-in-progress on 30/01/2014 15,000

Works Cost or Factory Cost 7,74,000

Administration overheads 30,000

Cost of Production of Goods Manufactured 8,04,000

Statement showing the Cost of Sales and Profit for the month of January, 2014

`

Cost of Stock of finished Goods on 1/01/2014 60,000

Add: Cost of goods manufactured during the month 8,04,000

Cost of total goods available for sale 8,64,000

Less: Cost of stock of finished goods on 30/01/2014 55,000

Cost of Goods Sold 8,09,000

Add: Selling and distribution overhead 20,000

Total Cost or Cost of Sales 8,29,000

Sales Price 9,00,000

Profit during the month 71,000

Notes:

(1) Costs of opening and closing stock of work-in-progress have to be adjusted after the Factory

overhead is added to the Prime Cost but before the Works cost is arrived at since Factory overhead

expenses are also incurred on work-in-progress.

(2) Selling and distribution overhead expenses can be incurred only on the goods sold, but not on the

goods lying in stock.

EP-CMA

246

JOB COSTING

INTRODUCTION

This method of costing is used in Job Order Industries where the production is as per the requirements of the

customer. In Job Order industries, the production is not on continuous basis, rather it is only when order from

customers is received and that too as per the specifications of the customers. Consequently, each job can be

different from the other one. Method used in such type of business organizations is the Job Costing or Job

Order Costing.

The objective of this method of costing is to work out the cost of each job by preparing the Job Cost Sheet. A

job may be a product, unit, batch, sales order, project, contract, service, specific program or any other cost

objective that is distinguishable clearly and unique in terms of materials and other services used. The cost of

completed job will be the materials used for the job, the direct labour employed for the same and the

production overheads and other overheads if any charged to the job.

MEANING

Job costing may be defined as a system of costing in which the elements of cost are accumulated separately

for each job or work order undertaken by an organisation. Industries which manufacture products or render

services against specific orders use job costing or job order method of cost accounting. In the job costing

system, an order or a unit, lot or batch of product may be taken as a cost unit, i.e. a job. Job costing is a

method of costing in which cost units can be separately identified and need to be separately costed. The

primary purpose of job costing is to bring together all the costs incurred for completing a job.

The system of job costing can be sub-divided into two categories viz. (a) Factory job costing and (b) Contract

costing. A variant of job costing system is batch costing in which costs are accumulated for specific batches

of products of a similar type ordered for manufacture.

Job costing is applicable to engineering concern, construction companies, ship-building, furniture making,

machine manufacturing industries, repair shops, automobile garages and such other in factories where jobs

or orders can be kept separately.

As production in a job order system is not a continuous process, careful planning and strict control is

essential to avoid wastage of materials, man-power, machinery and other resources. On receipt of an order,

the production and planning department prepares a suitable design for the product or job. It also prepares a

bill of materials and an operation schedule. A production order is issued giving instructions to the shops to

proceed with the manufacture of the product. This production order (also known as work order or job order

record) constitutes the authority of the work. The production order usually lays down the quantity of materials

required, time allowed for the operations, sale price, customer’s name, shipping instructions, etc. Sometimes

the values of materials and labour are also indicated and then it serves the combined purpose of an order for

manufacture as well as the cost sheet on which the cost of the order is compiled.

Every production order is assigned a number called the job number, job-order number, work order number.

FEATURES

The following are the features of job costing.

• It is a specific order costing

• A job is carried out or a product is produced is produced to meet the specific requirements of the

order

Lesson 7 Costing System

247

• Job costing enables a business to ascertain the cost of a job on the basis of which quotation for the

job may be given.

• While computing the cost, direct costs are charged to the job directly as they are traceable to the job.

• Indirect expenses i.e. overheads are charged to the job on some suitable basis.

• Each job completed may be different from other jobs and hence it is difficult to have standardization

of controls and therefore more detailed supervision and control is necessary.

• At the end of the accounting period, work in progress may or may not exist.

BASIC PRINCIPLES & SPECIAL TERMS

The basic principles, procedures in the accounting of material, labour and overhead costs and other special

features of the job costing system are mentioned below:

Material Costs

An essential requirement of job order cost accounting is that direct materials and their cost must be traced to

and identified with specific jobs or work orders. On receipt of a production order, the shop draws the requisite

materials from stores. The withdrawals of material are made on materials requisitions on the authority of the

bill of materials. The particular job order number for which material is drawn is indicated in each requisition.

Surplus, excess or incorrect materials are returned from the shops to the stores with materials return note.

A daily or weekly analysis of materials requisitions, materials return notes and bills of materials is made and

posted in the materials requisition journal. For cost accounting purposes, a materials issue analysis sheet is

prepared showing the cost of materials issued against the various job order numbers. Direct material cost is

posted on the cost sheet relating to the particular production order while, indirect materials cost is treated as

overhead costs.

Labour Costs

All direct labour costs must be analysed according to individual jobs or work orders. On the authority of

operation schedule, time is booked on time sheets, job cards, time tickets or piece-work cards. The job cards

are valued by the costing department; the wages paid are classified into direct and indirect labour and

booked to production order and standing order numbers respectively. Labour summaries or wages analysis

sheets are prepared for each accounting period; say a week. Amounts on account of overtime, idle time,

shift-differential and fringe benefits may also be included in the wages analysis sheet. Direct labour costs are

posted on the respective cost-sheets and indirect labour is treated as overhead costs.

Manufacturing Overheads

Overhead costs are accumulated against standing order numbers and against cost centres. Overhead rates,

predetermined or actuals as the case may be, are worked out for each centre. The amount of overhead cost

recoverable on each job order is summarised in an Overhead Absorption or Applied Overhead Analysis-

Sheet and is posted on the relevant cost-sheets. Usually, overheads are added only when the job is

complete but, at the end of the accounting period, the amount of overheads which could be applied to

incomplete jobs is ascertained for the purpose of establishing the extent of over or under absorption of

overheads.

Completion of Jobs

Postings of direct material, direct labour and manufacturing overhead costs to the cost-sheet for a job or

production order are made throughout the run of the job or order. On the completion of a job, a job

EP-CMA

248

completion report is sent by the production shop to the Production and Planning Department, with a copy to

the Cost Office. Sometimes, information regarding completion is noted on the production order which is

routed through Cost Office.

The expenditure booked under each element of cost is totalled up and the grand total of cost is arrived at.

Job Account

An account is kept for each job so that its cost and the various components of cost can be readily

ascertained. There can be various forms in which the account may be maintained. The following, therefore,

may be treated as illustrative (all figures are assumed).

Job Account

No..................................................................... Date Commenced.................................................

Brief Particulars................................................ Date Completed………..........................................

........................................................................ Remarks………......................................................

Date Particulars Materials

Wages

Total

Total cost `

2014

May 7 Material analysis

340

Materials consumed 560

“ Wages analysis

410

Wages 970

“ 14 Material analysis

220

Prime Cost 1,530

“ Wages analysis

560

Factory overheads(60% of wages) 582

Works Cost 2,112

Administrative overheads

___

____

10% of works cost 211

560

970

1,530

Total Cost 2,323

Work-in-Progress

The cost of an incomplete job, i.e., a job on which some manufacturing operation is still due is termed as

work-in-progress. If a production order has been only completed by the end of an accounting period, it is

essential that the closing stock of the work-in-progress be determined. Unless this is correctly done, the

profits for the period will be distorted. Determination of work-in-progress is frequently essential where

periodic profit and loss account is required to be prepared for control purposes without reference to the

closure of the accounting period.

Job-ticket/Job card: A job card or job ticket is used to record the time spent on each job, having a specified

work order or job order number. Job cards may be of two types, one, which is a job cost card, and contains

information regarding material consumption as well as time spent by operators. The other one is, in effect, a

job ticket, which is issued to an operator by the supervisor and contains only the operation details. When the

operator starts the work, he records the time either manually or through time recording clock on the card.

The finishing time is recorded when the operation is completed. If there is any break in between, then time

‘out’ and time ‘in’ are also recorded indicating hours not used on job and shall be considered indirect labour

hours. When the job is completed, the operator deposits the card with the supervisor, and collects the next

job ticket. At the end of each day, the time-keeper collects all these cards and records the time for each job

or process or operation. Followings are the feature of job ticket/job cost card:

• It reduces normal idle time.

• It gives clear, logical and suitable information to the costing department.

Lesson 7 Costing System

249

• It provides a very useful link between the production control and costing.

• Job card gives information about number and particulars of job accurately.

• The entries are made by costing officer in card at the time of commencement and completion of the

job.

APPLICATIONS OF JOB COSTING

This method of costing is used in Job Order Industries where the production is as per the requirements of the

customer. In Job Order industries, the production is not on continuous basis, rather it is only when order from

customers is received and that too as per the specifications of the customers. Consequently, each job can be

different from the other one. Method used in such type of business organizations is the Job Costing or Job

Order Costing.

Companies that are likely to use a job costing system have a wide variety of products or services. These

companies include printing shops, accounting firms, equipment companies, and construction companies.

Companies that are likely to use a process costing system have homogeneous products or services. Such

companies include automobile manufactures, food processors, and textile companies. Service industry

companies most likely use a job costing system because each job is likely to have different quantities of

materials and labour.

ADVANTAGES OF JOB COSTING

Job costing offers the following specific advantages :

(i) It helps management to detect which jobs are profitable and which are not. Estimates of cost for

similar work in the future may be conveniently made on the basis of accurate record of job costs.

This assists in the prompt furnishing of price quotations for specific jobs;

(ii) The cost of materials, labour and overhead for every job or product in a department is available

regularly and periodically, enabling the management to know the trend of cost and thus by suitable

comparison, to control the efficiency of operations, materials and machines;

(iii) The adoption of predetermined overhead rates in job costing necessitates the application of a

system of budgetary control of overheads with all the advantages.

(iv) Spoilage and defective work can be easily identified with specific jobs or products so that

responsibility may be fixed on departments or individuals.

(v) Job costing is particularly suitable for cost plus and such other contracts where selling price is

determined directly on the basis of costs.

N.B. Job cost information can be used for estimation of future costs only after careful adjustments for

variations likely to arise over time as well as for any difference in the size of the order. If major economic

changes take place, comparison of cost of a job for one period with that of another becomes meaningless.

Distortion of cost also occurs when the batch quantities are different.

LIMITATIONS OF JOB COSTING

Job costing suffers from certain limitations.

These are as follows.

• It is said that it is too time consuming and requires detailed record keeping. This makes the method

more expensive.

EP-CMA

250

• Record keeping for different jobs may prove complicated.

• Inefficiencies of the organization may be charged to a job though it may not be responsible for the

same.

In spite of the above limitations, it can be said that job costing is an extremely useful method for computation

of the cost of a job. The limitation of time consuming can be removed by computerization and this can also

reduce the complexity of the record keeping.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

Illustration 3

The quantity specified on a production order was 2,000 units of an article in the manufacture of which four

operations were involved. The piece-rates for these four operations were in sequence. ` 20, 25, 20 and 30

per unit. The company recovered factory overhead expenses on the basis of direct labour cost and the

current overhead rate is 80%. The entire quantity of material authorised for the order, viz. 1,000 kgs. @ `

200 per kg. was issued to the shop. Of this 50 kgs. were returned as scrap arising in course of manufacture,

valued at ` 800.

At the year end, the order was incomplete; only 200 units were fully completed and transferred to finished

stock. Stock-taking of the work-in-progress revealed the following position:

Materials in process 650 kgs.

Material in hand, in shop (unprocessed) 200 kgs.

Production in partly completed stage 1,300 units

Extent of work performed:

Upto the first operation 600 units

Upto the second operation stage 400 units

Upto the third operation stage 300 units

Upto the fourth operation stage Nil

Calculate the cost of the work-in-progress at the year end.

Solution:

`

Cost sheet showing cost of work-in-progress

Material Cost

Material in hand 200 kgs. @ ` 200 per kg.

*

40,000

* It is possible to exclude this from the cost of work-in-progress and include in the cost of materials in hand.

Re-write the following sentence after filling-in the blank spaces with

appropriate word:

(i) Labour time on each Job are recorded on a ______ which is then

costed and recorded on the Job Cost Sheet.

(ii) ___________ costing is applied where work is usually carried out

within a factory or workshop which is short duration.

Correct answer:

(i) Job Card (ii) Job

Lesson 7 Costing System

251

Material in process 650 kgs. @ ` 200 per kg.

1,30,000

Less: Proportionate cost of scrap

650

1,29,350

1,69,350

Labour Cost

Operation I - 600 units @ ` 20

12,000

Operation II - 400 units @ ` 45

18,000

Operation III - 300 units @ ` 65

19,500

49,500

Factory overhead 80% on direct labour

39,600

Total cost of work-in-progress

2,58,450

Illustration 4

The Alpha Manufacturing Company processed production through two department (i) Machining and (ii)

Finishing.

Overhead rates are predetermined on the basis of machine hours in the machine department and the direct

labour wages in the finishing department.

The figures for 2013-14 based on which the overhead rates were arrived at are furnished below:

Machining Deptt

Finishing Deptt.

`

Direct labour - wages 36,00,000

40,00,000

Factory overheads 80,00,000

60,00,000

Direct labour hours 24,00,000

50,00,000

Machine hours 20,00,000

5,00,000

The Cost Sheet for Job Order No. 1748 indicates the following:

Machining Deptt

Finishing Deptt.

Material consumed

`50

`7

Direct labour wages

`45

`40

Direct Labour hours 24

35

Machine hours 15

5

Assuming that the production order No. 1,748 consisted of 10 numbers of Part No. P-1865, prepare a cost

sheet showing the unit cost of the part.

Solution:

Job Cost Sheet

Job No. - 1748

Part No. - P-1865

Started on..................... No. of parts produced – 10

Cost for 10

parts of P-1865

Cost

per unit

Amount

Direct Material

`

Machine Department 50

Finishing Department 7

57

5.7

EP-CMA

252

Direct Labour Wages

Machining Department 45

Finishing Department 40

85

8.5

Prime Cost

142

14.2

Factory Overheads













×

000,00,2

000,00,80

hrs. 15

`

60

Finishing Department

Based on direct wages i.e.













× hrs. 40

000,00,40

000,00,60

`

60

120

12.0

Total Cost

262

26.2

BATCH COSTING

This is another form of job costing which is adopted in case of manufacturing of a large number of

components of machines or of other articles. Since a large number of them are manufactured together and

pass through the same process of manufacture, it is convenient to collect their cost of manufacture together.

Separate job cost sheets are maintained for each batch of products. Each batch is allotted a number.

Material requisitions are prepared batchwise, the direct labour is engaged batchwise and the overheads are

also recovered batchwise. Cost of each component in the batch is then determined by dividing the total cost

by the number of articles manufactured.

FEATURE OF BATCH COSTING

Features of batch costing system are as under:

• Batch costing is applied in industries where identical products are produced.

• A batch is a cost unit which consists of a separate, readily identifiable group of product units which

maintains its separate identity throughout the production process.

• The output of batch consists of a number of units and it is not economical to ascertain cost of every

unit of output independently

• The procedure is very similar to job costing:

(a) Each batch is treated a job and costs are calculated for total batch.

(b) On completion of production cost per unit is found as

Cost per unit =

Batch in Units Total

Cost Batch Total

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN JOB COSTING AND BATCH COSTING

Job Costing Batch Costing

It is carried out or a product is produced by specific

orders.

The process of producing the product has a

continuous flow and product is homogeneous.

It is determined for each job. It is compiled on time basis.

Each job is separate and independent of other jobs.

Product lose their individuality as they are

manufactured in a continuous flow

Lesson 7 Costing System

253

APPLICATIONS OF BATCH COSTING

Batch costing is used for calculating total cost of each batch. Batch is small group of units which is produced

for production purposes. We also identify batch of units in our production. All raw material is supplied on

batch basis and other expenses are also paid on the basis of each batch.

For instance, in the drugs industry, producer will make the batch of tablets instead of producing single tablet.

This will be easy to sell that batch in market. So, calculating cost of each batch, we will calculate material

cost per batch, labour cost per batch and other expenses per batch. If we want to calculate cost per unit, we

have to divide total batch cost with total batch units.

It is used in following industries:

1. Manufacturing industry for readymade garment

2. Manufacturing industry for toys

3. Manufacturing industry for tyre & tube

Illustration 5

ABC Limited manufactures ring binders which are embossed with the customers’ own logo. A customer has

ordered a batch of 600 binders. The following illustrate the cost for a typical batch of 100 binders.

`

Direct materials 60

Direct labour 20

Machine set up 6

Design and art work 30

Prime cost 116

Direct employees are paid on a piecework basis.

ABC Limited absorbs production overheads at a rate of 20% of direct wages cost. 5 % is added to the total

production cost of each batch to allow for selling, distribution and administration overheads.

ABC Limited requires a profit margin of 25% of sales value.

The selling price for 600 binders (to the nearest penny) will be:

A. ` 756

B. ` 772.8

C. ` 806.4

D. ` 1008

Solution:

`

Prime cost (` 116 x 6) 696

Overheads (` 20 x 6 x 20%) 24

720

Selling, distribution and admin overheads (180 x 5%) 36

Total cost 756

Selling price (756/75x100) 1008

EP-CMA

254

CONTRACT COSTING

Contract (or terminal) costing, is one form of application of the principles of job order costing. In contract

costing each contract is treated as a cost unit and costs are ascertained separately for each contract. It is

suitable for business concerned with building or engineering projects or structural or construction contracts.

Usually, there is a separate account for each contract. Also the number of contracts undertaken at a time,

generally, not being very large, the Contract Ledger can very well be operated as part of the financial books.

The contract account is debited with all direct and indirect expenditure incurred in relation to the contract. It is

credited with the amount of contract price on completion of the contract. The balance represents profit or loss

made on the contract and is transferred to the profit and loss account. In case, the contract is not completed

at the end of the accounting period, a reasonable amount of profit, out of the total profit made so far on the

incomplete contract, may be transferred to profit and loss account.

DISTINCTION BETWEEN JOB AND CONTRACT COSTING

Contract jobs, while they resemble jobs, have a few distinctive features:

(i) Under job costing, the cost is first allocated to cost centres and then to individual jobs. In contract

costing, most of the expenses are of direct nature, overhead forms only a small percentage of total

expenditure and it represents expenses like share of head office expenses, share of central storage

cost etc.

(ii) Under job costing pricing is influenced by individual conditions and general policy of the

organisation. Under contract costing, pricing is influenced by specific clauses of the contract.

(iii) Unlike job costing, each contract is a cost unit in contract costing.

(iv) Under contract costing, the work is usually carried out at a site other than contractee’s own

premises. Job costing is often applied where jobs are carried out at the contractee’s own premises.

SPECIFIC ASPECTS AND RECORDING OF TRANSACTIONS OF CONTRACT COSTING

The recording procedure of the following items may be noted carefully:

(1) Material: Materials may be purchased in bulk and kept in store for supply to the contract, as and when

required, or these may be purchased and directly supplied to the contract. In the latter case, the cost of

material would be debited directly to the contract. If any materials are transferred from one contract to

another, their costs would be adjusted on the basis of Material Transfer Note, signed both by the transferor

and transferee foreman. In case certain materials charged to contract are returned to stores, the same will be

credited to the contract account. Materials stolen or destroyed by fire will be transferred to profit and loss

account. Materials in hand at the end of the year will appear on the credit side of the contract account.

(2) Labour: All labour actually employed on the site is regarded as direct labour irrespective of the nature of

the task performed by the labour concerned. If it is desired to ascertain the labour cost for a particular job or

work, each person would be provided with a job card upon which he must record the nature of the work

performed by him. On the basis of the analysis of the job cards, labour analysis sheets are prepared for

ascertaining the actual cost of labour on different operations.

If concurrently number of contracts are carried on and workmen are made to divide their time between two or

more contracts, it would be necessary to prepare analysis sheets of labour, for charging to each contract,

wages appropriate thereto.

(3) Direct expenses: The expenses which can be directly charged to different contracts will be posted

Lesson 7 Costing System

255

directly to the respective contracts. These include cost of special tools, cost of design, electric charge,

insurance etc.

(4) Plant used in a contract: The value of plant used on a contract may be either debited to the contract

and the written down value thereof at the end of the year entered on the credit side for closing the contract

account, or only a charge for use of the plant (depreciation) may be debited to the account.

(5) Overhead expenses: In contract, overhead expenses are few and relate only to works or administration

expenses which cannot be directly apportioned to individual contracts. These indirect expenses may be

distributed on several contracts as a percentage of cost of materials or wages paid or the prime cost. If,

however, the contracts are big, the labour hour method is often adopted for distribution of expenses since it

is more efficacious. In making the distribution, the location of the site of the contract is another important

factor to be considered, for contracts situated at a distance are not likely to receive the same supervision as

compared to those which are close. Where such factors are prominent, some sort of quota basis for

distribution of expenses may be followed.

(6) Extras: Where some additional work not stipulated in the contract is carried out, the expenditure on this

additional work should be separately analysed from that charged to the main contract.

If the additional work is quite substantial, it should be treated as a separate contract and a separate account

should be opened for it. If it is not very substantial, expenses incurred up on extra work should appear on the

debit side of the contract account as ‘cost of extra work’, and the extra amount which the contractee has

agreed to pay should be added to the contract price.

(7) Sub-contracts: Generally work of a specialised character e.g. the installation of lifts, special flooring etc.

is entrusted to other contractors by the main contractor. The cost of such sub-contracts is a direct charge

against the contract for which the work has been done.

(8) Escalation clause: Escalation clause is usually provided in the contract as a safeguard against any likely

changes in the price or utilisation of material and/labour. This clause provides that in case prices of items of

raw materials, labour etc. specified in the contract change during the execution of the contract, beyond a

specified limit over the prices prevailing at the time of signing the agreement, the contract price will be

suitably adjusted. The terms of the contract specify the procedure for calculating such adjustment in order to

avoid all future disputes. Thus this clause safeguards the interest of both the contractor and the contractee in

case of fluctuations in the prices of material, labour etc.

(9) Cost plus contract: Cost plus contract is a contract in which the value of the contract is ascertained by

adding a certain percentage of profit over the total cost of the work. This is used in case of those contracts

whose exact cost cannot be correctly estimated at the time of undertaking a work. The profit to be paid to the

contractor may be a fixed amount or it may be a particular percentage of cost or capital employed. These

type of contracts are undertaken for production of special articles not usually manufactured and is generally

employed, when Government happens to be a contractee. Generally, in such contract, contractor and

contractee have clear agreement about the items of cost to be included, type of material to be used, labour

rates for different grades, normal wastages to be permitted and the rate or amount of profit.

Advantage of cost plus contract

(i) Cost plus contract ensures that a reasonable profit accrues to the contractor even in risky projects.

(ii) It simplifies the work offering tenders and quotations.

(iii) It provides escalation clauses and thus covers the contractor from fluctuations in price and

utilisation of elements of production.

EP-CMA

256

(iv) The customer is assured of paying only reasonable amount of profit.

(v) The customer has the right to conduct cost audit so that he can ensure that he is not being cheated

by the contractor.

Disadvantages of cost plus contract system

Inspite of the advantages mentioned above cost plus contract system has the following disadvantages:

(i) Since the contractor is assured of profit margin, he may not take initiative for cost reduction by

affecting economies of production and reducing wastages.

(ii) The ultimate price to be paid by the customer cannot be exactly ascertained until the work is

completed and this creates delay in preparing purchase budget by the customer.

(iii) The customer has to pay not only the resultant high cost but also the resultant high profit. Thus,

customer have to pay substantially for lack of proper attitude (towards cost and efficiency) on the

part of contractor.

(10) Progress payment, Retention money and Architects’ certificate: When a contractor is engaged on a

contract for several years, he cannot afford to block a large amount of funds until the completion of the

contract. Therefore, in case of large contracts the system of progress payment is adopted. The contractee

agrees to pay a part of the contract price from time to time depending upon satisfactory progress of the work.

The progress will be judged by the contractee’s architect, surveyor or engineer who will issue a certificate

stating the value of work so far done and approved by him. Such work is termed as work certified. The terms

of the contract provide that whole of the amount shown by the certificate shall not be paid immediately but a

percentage thereof shall be retained by the contractee until some time after the contract is completed. The

sum retained is called retention money. Usually the contractor may be paid 75% or 80% of the work certified

depending upon the terms of the contract. The object of this retention is to place the contractee in a

favourable position in case the contractor does not fulfil some of the conditions laid down by the contract or

in case of faulty work.

It may quite possible that at the end of a period a part of the work done may remain unapproved because it

has not reached a stipulated stage. Such work which has not been so far approved by the contractee’s

architect or surveyor is termed as work uncertified. The full value of the work certified should be credited to

the contract account and debited to the account of the contractee. Whenever any amount is received from

the contractee cash account is debited and contractee’s account is credited. Until the contract is completed,

amount received from the contractee shows advance payments and is deducted from work in progress in the

balance sheet. When the contract is completed, contractee’s account is debited with the contract price and

the contract account is credited.

(11) Profit on incomplete contracts: At the end of an accounting period it may be found that certain

contracts which have been completed while others are still in process and will be completed in the coming

years. The profit on completed contracts may be safely taken to the credit of the profit and loss account. In

the case of incompleted contracts there are unforeseen contingencies which may lead to heavy fluctuations

in costs and profit. At the same time it does not also seem desirable to consider the profits only on completed

contracts and ignore completely incomplete ones as this may result in heavy fluctuations in the future for

profit from year to year. If profit or loss is not shown in the intermittent years for the work in progress,

contract will show high figure of profit in the year of completion and reverse may be the case in the year in

which a large number of contracts remain incomplete. Therefore, profits on incomplete contracts should be

considered, of course, after providing adequate sums for meeting unknown contingencies. There are no hard

and fast rule regarding calculation of the figures for profit to be taken to the credit of profit and loss account.

Lesson 7 Costing System

257

However, the following rules may be followed:

(i) Profit should be considered in respect of work certified only, work uncertified should always be

valued at cost.

(ii) No profit should be taken into consideration if the amount of work certified is less than 1/4th of the

contract price because in such a case it is not possible to foresee the future clearly.

(iii) If the amount of work certified is 1/4th or more but less than 1/2 of the contract price, 1/3rd of the

profit disclosed as reduced by the percentage of cash received from the contractee, should be taken

to the profit and loss account or

Profit =1/3 x Notional Profit x {Cash received / Work certified}

The balance be allowed to remain as a reserve.

(iv) If the amount of work certified is 1/2 or more of the contract price, 2/3rd of the profit disclosed, as

reduced by the percentage of cash received from the contractee, should be taken to the profit and

loss account.

Profit= 2/3 x Notional Profit x {Cash received / Work certified}

The balance should be treated as reserve.

(v) In case the contract is very much near to completion, if possible the total cost of completing the

contract should be estimated. The estimated total profit on the contract then can be calculated by

deducting the estimated cost from the contract price. The profit and loss account should be credited

with that proportion of total estimated profit on cash basis, which the work certified bears to the total

contract price.

Profit=Estimated total profit x {Work certified / Contract price}

(vi) The whole of loss, if any, should be transferred to the profit and loss account.

That part of the profit which is not credited to the profit and loss account is treated as a reserve against

contingencies and is deducted from the amount of work-in-progress for balance sheet purpose. It is carried

down as a credit balance in the contract account itself, the work-in-progress being represented by the debit

balance in the contract account.

Note: The treatment of profit on incomplete contract will be computed as per specific instruction of problem.

If there is no specific instruction then above rules should be applied.

For Example: If the total profit on a contract for `3,00,000 is `60,000 and the contract is 60%

complete and has been certified accordingly. The retention money is 20% of the certified

value, then the amount of profit that can be prudently credited to Profit and Loss Account may

be calculated as follows :

(1) Apparent profit `60,000

(2) 2/3rd of this is ordinarily suitable for transfer to Profit and Loss Account

(Since the Work certified is more than 50%) `40,000

(3) The percentage of cash received to certified value 80%

(4) The amount of profit determined on cash basis being suitable for transfer to

Profit and Loss Account (80% of `40,000) `32,000

EP-CMA

258

OR

Alternatively the profit to be transferred to the Profit and Loss Account can be:

`60,000 ×

000003

000801

100

80

,,

×

= `28,800

(12) Work-in-Progress: In contract accounts, the value of work-in-progress includes the amount of work

certified and the amount of work uncertified. The work-in-progress account will appear in the assets side of

the balance sheet. The amount of cash received from the contractee and reserve for contingencies will be

deducted out of this amount.

The work-in-progress account can be presented in balance sheet as follows:

Balance sheet as on.............

Assets Amount

Work-in-progress

Balance in contractee’s Account

Add: Work uncertified

Less: Reserve for unrealised profit

Alternatively :

Balance sheet as on.....

Assets Amount

Work-in-Progress:

Value of work certified

Cost of work uncertified

Less: Reserve for unrealised profit

Less: Amount received from the contractee

If the expenditure on incompleted contracts includes the value of plant and materials, these items may be

shown separately in the balance sheet. Thus, instead of showing the total expenditure under the heading of

work-in-progress, expenditure may split up and shown separately in the balance sheet, under the headings

of plant at site, material at site, and work-in-progress.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

Re-write the following sentence after filling-in the blank spaces with

appropriate word:

(i) Contracts are undertaken to ________________ requirements of the

customers.

(ii) _______ costing is applied for Engineering Projects.

(iii) In case of _______ contracts, only portion of the profit is taken to the

Profit and Loss account depending on the extent of work completed

on the contract.

Correct answer: (i) Special (ii) Contract (iii) Incomplete

Lesson 7 Costing System

259

Illustration 6

The following balances were extracted from the books of a building contract on 31st March, 2014 regarding

Contract No. 123:

`

Materials issued to site 6,27,200

Wages Paid 7,34,550

Wages outstanding on 31.3.2014 7,200

Plant issued to site 60,000

Direct charges paid 25,150

Direct charges outstanding on 31.3.2014 2,100

Establishment charges 56,500

Stock of materials at site on 31.3.2014 12,000

Value of work certified on 31.3.2014 16,50,000

Cost of work not yet certified 35,000

Cash received on account of architect’s certificate after deduction by customer

of 5 percent retention money 14,10,750

The work was commenced on April 1, 2013 and the contract price agreed at `24,50,000.

Prepare contract account for the year providing for depreciation of plant of 25 per cent. Calculate the Profit or

Loss in the contract to date and make such provision in the contract account as you consider desirable. Set

out also contractor’s balance sheet so far as it relates to the contract.

Solution:

Contract Account

Dr. Cr.

Particulars ` Particulars `

To Materials to site 6,27,200 By Stock of material at site 12,000

To Wages paid 7,34,550 By Work-in-Progress:

To Wages outstanding 7,200 Work certified 16,50,000

To Direct charges 25,150 Work uncertified 35,000

To Direct charges outstanding 2,100

To Establishment charges 56,500

To Depreciation-Plant 15,000

To National Profit c/d 2,29,300 ________

16,97,000 16,97,000

To Profit and Loss A/c 1,30,700 By Notional Profit 2,29,300













××

100

585

3

2

300292

.

,,

To Work-in-Progress-Reserve 98,600 _______

2,29,300 2,29,300

EP-CMA

260

Balance Sheet as on 31st March, 2014

Liabilities ` Assets `

Wages outstanding 7,200 Stocks of material at site 12,000

Direct charges Plant at site 45,000

Outstanding 2,100 Work-in-Progress:

P&L A/c: Work certified 16,50,000

Profit transferred Work uncertified 35,000

from Contract A/c 1,30,700 16,85,000

Less:

Reserve 98,600

15,86,400

_______

Less:

Cash received 14,10,750 1,75,650

_______ _______

Illustration 7

Three Contracts A, B and C, commenced on 1st January, 1st July and 1st October, 2013 respectively, were

undertaken by the Bharat Contractors and their accounts on 31st December, 2013 showed the following

position:

Contract A Contract B Contract C

`

Contract price 8,00,000 5,40,000 6,00,000

Expenditure:

Raw materials 1,44,000 1,16,000 40,000

Wages paid 2,20,000 2,24,800 28,000

General charges 8,000 5,600 2,000

Plant installed 40,000 32,000 24,000

Materials in hand 8,000 8,000 4,000

Wages accrued 8,000 8,000 3,600

Work certified 4,00,000 3,20,000 72,000

Work finished but not certified 12,000 16,000 4,200

Cash received in respect of work certified 3,00,000 2,40,000 54,000

The plant was installed on the date of commencement of each contract; depreciation is to be taken at 10

percent per annum.

Prepare the Contract Accounts in tabular form and show how they would appear in the Balance Sheet as on

31st December, 2013.

Lesson 7

Costing System

261

Solution:

Contract Accounts

Particulars A B C Particulars A B C

`

To Raw material 1,44,000 1,16,000 40,000 By Material in hand 8,000 8,000 4,000

To Wages paid 2,20,000 2,24,800 28,000 By Plant in hand less

To General charges 8,000 5,600 2,000 depreciation* 36,000 30,400 23,400

To Plant 40,000 32,000 24,000 Work certified 4,00,000 3,20,000 72,000

To Wages accrued 8,000 8,000 3,600 By Work-in-progress:

To Balance c/d 36,000 — 6,000 Work finished

but not certified 12,000 16,000 4,200

By Profit and

_______ _______ _______ Loss A/c _______ 12,000 —

4,56,000 3,86,400 1,03,600 4,56,000 3,86,400 1,03,600

To Profit and Loss A/c By Balance c/d 36,000 — 6,000

36,000 x 2/3 x 3/4 18,000 — —

To Work-in-progress

(Profit in Reserve) 18,000 — 6,000 ______ ______ _____

36,000 — 6,000 36,000 — 6,000

Balance Sheet as on 31st December 2013

`

Profit and Loss A/c: Materials in hand:

Profit on Contract A 18,000 Contract A 8,000

Less:

Loss on Contract B 12,000 6,000

Contract B 8,000

Sundry Creditors: Contract C 4,000 20,000

Wages Accrued Plant in hand:

Contract A 8,000 Contract A 36,000

Contract B 8,000 Contract B 30,400

Contract C 3,600 19,600 Contract C 23,400 89,800

Work-in-Progress:

Contract A 3,94,000

Contract B 3,36,000

Contract C 70,200

8,00,200

Less :

Advances from

contractees:

Contract A 3,00,000

Contract B 2,40,000

Contract C 54,000 _______

5,94,000 2,06,200

*

Depreciation on Plant: Depreciation on plant is to be provided @ 10% p.a., so depreciation only for that period for which plant has

been used will be deducted in order to arrive at the closing value of plant in land.

EP-CMA

262

Workings:

(1) Calculation of depreciation on plant

Contract Cost Contract Depreciation Amount of depreciation Closing

commenced for what balance

on period of Plant

` ` `

A 40,000 1st Jan., 2013 Full year

0004

100

10

00040 ,, =×

36,000

B 32,000 1st July, 2013 6 months

6001

12

6

100

10

00032 ,, =××

30,400

C 24,000 1st Oct., 2013 3 months

600

12

3

100

10

00024 =××,

23,400

(2) Calculation of work-in-progress expenditures

Contracts

A B C

` ` `

Raw materials 1,44,000 1,16,000 40,000

Wages 2,20,000 2,24,800 28,000

General charges 8,000 5,600 2,000

Plant 40,000 32,000 24,000

Wages accrued 8,000 8,000 3,600

Total 4,20,000 3,86,400 97,600

Less:

Materials in hand 8,000 8,000 4,000

4,12,000 3,78,400 93,600

Less:

Plant in hand 36,000 30,400 23,400

Total net expenditure of the period 3,76,000 3,48,000 70,200

Add:

Profit transferred to Profit and Loss A/c 18,000  

Less:

Loss transferred to Profit and Loss A/c  12,000 

Work-in-progress 3,94,000 3,36,000 70,200

PROFITS ON INCOMPLETE CONTRACTS (BASED ON AS 7 – REVISED 2002)

The basic principle of ascertaining profits on incomplete contracts is to give credit to share of profit on the

outcome of a contract which can reasonably be foreseen. In calculating the total estimated profit on the

contract, it is necessary to take into account the total costs to date and the total estimated further costs to

completion and the estimated future costs or rectification and guarantee work, and any other future work to

be undertaken. These are then compared to the total contract price.

The profit taken in any year is calculated on a cumulative basis having regard to profit taken in the earlier

years. The amount to be reflected in the year’s profit and loss account will be the appropriate proportion of

this total profit by reference to the work done to date, less any profit already taken in previous year.

Lesson 7

Costing System

263

Hence, the profit is calculated as follows:

(

`

)

Total contract value ……..

Less:

Costs incurred to date ………

Estimated costs to completion ………

Rectification and guarantee work ……..

Total estimated contract costs ……….

Estimated profit or loss on the contract ……….

The estimated profit should be adjusted in the following formula:

Profit to date =

profitcontractEstimated

cost contractestimatedTotal

completedworkofCost

×

The amount of profit to be recognized in the current period is calculated on cumulative principles as under:

(

`

)

Profit to date ………

Less:

Profit recognized at the end of previous period ………

Profit recognized in current period ………

If a loss is disclosed, then this should be provided in full in the current period.

These general principles have been focused in the Accounting Standard (AS-7) Revised 2002 –

‘Construction Contracts’ issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India. It is stated that when the

outcome of a construction contract can be estimated reliably, contract revenue and contract costs associated

with the construction contract should be recognized as revenue and expenses respectively by reference to

the stage of completion of the contract activity at the reporting date. An expected loss on the construction

should be recognized as an expense immediately.

However when the outcome of a construction cannot be estimated reliably then,

(a) revenue should be recognized only to the extent of contract cost incurred of which recovery is

probable; and

(b) contract costs should be recognized as an expense in the period in which they are incurred.

An expected loss on the construction contract should be recognized as an expense. When it is probable that

total contract cost will exceed total contract revenue the expected loss should be recognized as an expense

immediately.

For Example:

The profit to be recognized as per AS 7 in the current period with regard to the following

information is calculated as under:

Contract price

`

99,00,000

Cumulative figures:

To end of previous period-profit recognized

`

2,25,000

To end of current period-total costs

`

49,50,000

Cost of work certified

`

36,00,000

Estimated future costs to completion

`

27,00,000

Estimated rectification costs 10% of contract price

EP-CMA

264

Answer:

Contract Price

`

99,00,000

Less:

Costs to date

`

49,50,000

Costs to complete 27,00,000

Rectification costs 9,90,000 86,40,000

Estimated contract profit 12,60,000

Profit to date =

×

CostTotalEstimated

CertifiedWorkofCost

Estimated Profit

=

=× 000,60,12

000,40,86

000,00,36

`

5,25,000

Profit in current period =

`

5,25,000 –

`

2,25,000 =

`

3,00,000.

Illustration 8

XYZ contractors obtained a contract to construct a house for

`

8,00,000. Work was started on 1st January,

2013 and it was estimated that contract would take 15 months to complete. Work is proceeding as per

schedule and the details upto 31st December 2013 are as follows:

`

Materials and stores 1,87,000

Wages Paid 2,70,000

Plant hire charges and other expenses 60,000

Establishment charges 54,000

Material unused 11,000

Work Certified 6,00,000

Cash received 5,40,000

Work not yet certified (at cost) 20,000

It is further estimated that the following further expenses will be required to complete the work:

Additional material:

`

25,000; Wages :

`

20,000; Sub Contract cost :

`

50,000;

Plant hire charges :

`

10,000; Establishment Expenses :

`

11,800; and provision for contingencies : 5% of

total cost

You are required to calculate the value of Work in Progress as on 31st December 2013 taking credit for a

reasonable profit and also show the contract account.

Solution:

Dr.

Contract Account as on 31st December, 2013

Cr.

`

To Material and Stores 1,87,000

By Material and stores 11,000

To Wages 2,70,000

By Work in Progress :

To Plant hire charges & expenses 60,000

(a) Work uncertified at cost 20,000

To Establishment expenses 54,000

(b) Value of work certified 6,00,000

To Notional Profit c/d 60,000

_______

6,31,000

To Profit & Loss Account 57,000

By Notional Profit b/d 60,000

To Work in progress (balancing figure) 3,000

______

60,000

Lesson 7

Costing System

265

Statement of Estimated Cost and Estimated Profit

Cost incurred upto 31st December, 2013

`

(

`

1,87,000 +

`

2,70,000 +

`

60,000 +

`

54,000) –

`

11,000 5,60,000

Add :

Additional Estimated Cost

Material (

`

11,000 + 25,000) 36,000

Wages 20,000

Sub-contract cost 50,000

Plant hire charges 10,000

Establishment charges 11,800

Estimated cost before provision 6,87,800

Add:

Provision for Contingencies = (5/95) x 6,87,800 36,200

Estimated total cost 7,24,000

Estimated profit =

`

8, 00,000 – 7, 24,000 =

`

76, 000

Profit to P&L Account

price Contract

certified Work Profit Estimated ×

=

000,57

000,00,8

000,00,6000,76

`=

×

=

Alternatively,

Profit to P&L Account

price Contract

Received Cash Profit Estimated ×

=

300,51

000,00,8

000,40,5000,76

`=

×

=

Value of Work in Progress as on 31st December, 2013 to be shown in Balance Sheet

`

Work in progress :

Value of work certified 6,00,000

Cost of work uncertified 20,000

6,20,000

Less :

Reserve for unrealised profit : 3,000

Amount received from contractee 5,40,000 5,43,000

77,000

Note:

Based on Accounting Standard (AS) – 7, Construction Contracts, the profit to date can be estimated

as under:

`

Total contract price 8,00,000

Less:

Costs to date 5,60,000

Additional estimated cost 1,64,000 7,24,000

Estimated contract profit 76,000

Profit to date

cost total Estimated

Profit Estimated certified workof Cost

×

=

983,62

000,24,7

000,76000,00,6

`

=

×

=

EP-CMA

266

PROCESS COSTING

INTRODUCTION:

Process costing is a form of operations costing which is used where standardized homogeneous goods are

produced. This costing method is used in industries like chemicals, textiles, steel, rubber, sugar, shoes,

petrol etc. Process costing is also used in the assembly type of industries also. In process costing, it is

assumed that the average cost presents the cost per unit. Cost of production during a particular period is

divided by the number of units produced during that period to arrive at the cost per unit.

MEANING OF PROCESS COSTING

Process costing is a method of costing under which all costs are accumulated for each stage of production or

process, and the cost per unit of product is ascertained at each stage of production by dividing the cost of

each process by the normal output of that process.

Definition:

CIMA London defines process costing as “that form of operation costing which applies where

standardize goods are produced”

GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF PROCESS COSTING

1. The majority of items of cost can ordinarily be identified with specific processes and collected and

accumulated separately for each period.

2. Production records of each process are so designed as would show the quantum of production for

each period.

3. The total cost of each process is divided by the total production by the process for arriving at the

unit cost of the article processed.

4. The cost of any normal spoilage or wastage is included in the cost of the total units produced.

Thereby the average cost per unit is increased.

5. As the product travels from one process to another, the cumulative cost thereof in respect of the

processes it has already undergone is transferred to the account of the process it has yet to

undergo.

Features of Process Costing:

(a) The production is continuous

(b) The product is homogeneous

(c) The process is standardized

(d) Output of one process become raw material of another process

(e) The output of the last process is transferred to finished stock

(f) Costs are collected process-wise

(g) Both direct and indirect costs are accumulated in each process

(h) If there is a stock of semi-finished goods, it is expressed in terms of equivalent units

(i) The total cost of each process is divided by the normal output of that process to find out cost per

unit of that process.

A common example of an industry where process costing may be applied is "Sugar Manufacturing Industry".

Lesson 7

Costing System

267

APPLICATIONS OF PROCESS COSTING

Process costing is being used by following Industries as under:

1. Identical Products Industries

Process costing is most often used when manufacturers release identical products. If mass produced

televisions have the same parts, manufacturers can assign consistent prices to the products based on how

much the products cost to manufacture overall.

2. Industries with Multiple Departments

Businesses that have multiple departments usually use process costing so that management can assess the

costs accumulated by each department. For example, one department can take the raw resources and refine

them before turning them into finished parts, another department can assemble the parts and a third

department can test the finished product to assess both quality and safety. Materials might need to be

shipped from one department to another, which may incur additional costs. When the costs of production go

up unexpectedly, process costing can allow management to quickly pinpoint the department responsible for

the increased costs and identify the source of the increased cost.

3. Industries with Interchangeable Parts

Process costing comes into play when a factory manufactures identical parts. For example, a computer

manufacturing plant will create numerous components that are interchangeable among computers of the

same model. Process costing allows manufacturers to sell individual parts separately to computer repair

shops or individual buyers, since the manufacturers know the cost of the separate parts.

4. Industries with Varying Product Features

Products that have multiple extraneous features can benefit from process costing. Manufacturers can

release two versions of the product, with one version costing less but having fewer features and another

product costing more but having more features. For example, a manufacturer might release two coffee pots,

one with a timer and one without. Process costing lets the manufacturer know how much the timer costs to

add to the coffee pot, which enables the manufacturer to gauge how much it must raise the price on the

coffee pot with the timer.

5. Innovative Industries

Process costs are important in industries that have high innovation. For example, manufacturers cannot

determine an appropriate price for a new type of product without knowing how much the product will cost to

manufacture overall. In addition, businesses cannot determine if a product will be profitable until they know

the overall cost so they can estimate the maximum price that customers will pay for the product.

COMPARISON BETWEEN JOB COSTING AND PROCESS COSTING

The type of cost accumulation to be used is determined by the type of manufacturing operations. The

differences between the two methods centre mainly around how costing is accomplished. The product cost

under both method is ascertained by averaging process, size of denominator being different in both the

cases. In job costing costs are applied to specific jobs consisting of a single or joint units, while process

costing is applied to a large number of units.

EP-CMA

268

The main points of distinction between job costing and process costing may be summarised below:

Job costing Process costing

Goods are manufactured only against specific

orders.

Production is of like units in continuous flow.

Costs are accumulated and applied to specific jobs. Costs are accumulated and applied process-wise or

department-wise.

Costs are computed after every job is completed. Costs are computed after the expiry of a particular

cost period.

Different jobs are independent of each other. Production being in a continuous flow, products are

intermingled in such a manner that lots are not

distinguishable.

Products are normally not transferred from one job to

another except in the case of surplus work or excess

production.

Costs are normally transferred from one process to

another. Generally the finished product of the

process becomes the raw material of the next

process until the goods are completely

manufactured.

From the point of view of managerial control, more

attention is needed because production is not in

continuous flow and each job is different.

Because of the standard, mass and continuous

production, managerial control is easier.

Different jobs may or may not have opening or

closing work-in-progress.

As the production is in continuous flow there is

always an opening and closing balance of work-in-

progress.

ADVANTAGES OF PROCESS COSTING

1. Costs are be computed periodically at the end of a particular period

2. It is simple and involves less clerical work that job costing

3. It is easy to allocate the expenses to processes in order to have accurate costs.

4. Use of standard costing systems in very effective in process costing situations.

5. Process costing helps in preparation of tender, quotations

6. Since cost data is available for each process, operation and department, good managerial control is

possible.

LIMITATIONS OF PROCESS COSTING

1. Cost obtained at each process is only historical cost and are not very useful for effective control.

2. Process costing is based on average cost method, which is not that suitable for performance

analysis, evaluation and managerial control.

3. Work-in-progress is generally done on estimated basis which leads to inaccuracy in total cost

calculations.

4. The computation of average cost is more difficult in those cases where more than one type of

products is manufactured and a division of the cost element is necessary.

Lesson 7

Costing System

269

5. Where different products arise in the same process and common costs are prorated to various costs

units. Such individual products costs may be taken as only approximation and hence not reliable.

ACCOUNTING FOR ELEMENTS OF COST

Accounting for Materials

Materials and supplies as in the case of job costing are issued to each process only against authorised

requisitions. At the end of each process or of each costing period, the requisitions are sorted according to

processes and their values listed on a material summary sheet. On the basis of this summary sheet, a

journal entry is passed to debit the various process accounts and the material control account is credited.

Accounting for Labour

In order to account for labour, the first step is identification of each worker with the process in which he is

engaged. If the workers are permanently assigned to the process, such an identification would not pose any

problem as the pay rolls would be prepared in a manner so as to show the wages cost of each process

separately. In that case all that is required is that the pay roll section be notified of permanent transfers of

workers from one process to another.

Where it is necessary to frequently transfer workers from one process to another, it may not be possible to

have a permanent classification of workers according to processes. In such a case, it is necessary to prepare

daily time reports showing the number of employees engaged in each process and, if any worker is required

to divide his time among two or more processes, a transfer form would be used to record his times on

different processes. At the end of the week or that of the costing period, the daily time reports and transfer

forms would be abstracted on a labour summary sheet. On this basis a journal entry would be made, debiting

various process accounts and crediting the wages control account.

Accounting for Overheads

Since normally it is practicable to identify all materials and labour charges with specific processes, the

overhead expenses chargeable to a process ordinarily would not contain cost of indirect materials or labour.

But there still would be several items of expenses that do not relate to any particular process. It would be

necessary to apportion them to various processes on suitable bases. Different bases that are generally

adopted for making such a distribution are stated below:

ITEMS OF EXPENSES BASIS OF DISTRIBUTION

Rent, rates and taxes Area occupied by each process.

Power Meter readings or horse power of plant employed for each process.

Fire insurance Value of asset and the degree of risk involved.

Water, gas, steam, etc. Meter readings or technical estimates.

Depreciation of plant Value of assets employed.

Amounts of manufacturing overheads are, usually debited in totals to a total overhead account entitled

‘Manufacturing Overhead Control Account’. From this account, the total amount is distributed to various

process accounts on the basis of a manufacturing overhead summary sheet. The summary sheet contains a

description of various items of manufacturing overheads and the manner in which the same has been

distributed, i.e. one or other based mentioned above.

EP-CMA

270

An alternative method of distributing the manufacturing overhead that could be followed is to apportion the

total of the overhead expenses in a lump sum to the process on a blanket base, such as the number of units

processed or total labour or operating hours of each process for the period. Such a lump sum distribution is

generally unscientific since the figures are not analytically obtained.

For each process an individual process account is prepared. Each process of production is treated as a

distinct cost centre.

Items on the Debit side of Process A/c

In process Costing, individual process Accounts are prepared for each process. Each process account is

debited with –

(a) Cost of materials used in that process.

(b) Cost of labour incurred in that process.

(c) Direct expenses incurred in that process.

(d) Overheads charged to that process on some pre determined.

(e) Cost of ratification of normal defectives.

(f) Cost of abnormal gain (if any arises in that process)

Items on the Credit side:

Each process account is credited with

(a) Scrap value of Normal Loss (if any) occurs in that process.

(b) Cost of Abnormal Loss (if any occurs in that process)

COST OF PROCESS

The cost of the output of the process (Total Cost less Sales value of scrap) is transferred to the next process.

The cost of each process is thus made up to cost brought forward from the previous process and net cost of

material, labour and overhead added in that process after reducing the sales value of scrap. The net cost of

the finished process is transferred to the finished goods account. The net cost is divided by the number of

units produced to determine the average cost per unit in that process.

Process Account Specimen

Particulars Units

Amount in

`

Particulars Units

Amount in

`

To Basic material XX XXX By Normal Loss XX XXX

To Direct Material XX XXX By Abnormal Loss XX XXX

To Direct labour

To Direct Expenses

To Production overhead

XXX

By Process II (Output

transferred to next

processes)

XX XXX

To Cost of rectification of

defective material

XXX By Finished stock

Account

XX XXX

To Abnormal gains XX XXX

XX XXX XX XXX

Lesson 7

Costing System

271

PROCESS LOSSES

In manufacturing processes, entire input is not getting converted into output. A certain part of input is lost

while processing which is inevitable. Certain production techniques are of such a nature that some loss is

inherent to the production. Wastages of material, evaporation of material are un- avoidable in some process.

But sometimes the Losses are also occurring due to negligence of Labourer, poor quality raw material, poor

technology etc. These are normally called as avoidable losses. Basically process losses are classified into

two categories (a) Normal Loss (b) Abnormal Loss

Normal Loss:

Normal loss is an unavoidable loss which occurs due to the inherent nature of the materials and production

process under normal conditions. It is normally estimated on the basis of past experience of the industry. It

may be in the form of normal wastage, normal scrap, normal spoilage, and normal defectiveness. If the

normal loss units can be sold as a scrap then the sale value is credited with process account. If some

rectification is required before the sale of the normal loss, then the cost of rectification is debited in the

process account. The cost per unit of a process is calculated after adjusting the normal loss. In case of

Normal Loss the cost per unit is calculated by the under given formulae.

Cost of Good Unit =

Units Loss Normal Input

Scrap of value Sale Cost Total

−

Abnormal Loss:

Any loss caused by unexpected abnormal conditions such as plant breakdown, substandard material,

carelessness, accident etc. such losses are in excess of pre-determined normal losses. This loss is basically

avoidable. Thus abnormal losses arrive when actual losses are more than expected losses. Abnormal losses

in calculated as per under given formulae:

Value of Abnormal Loss =

Units in Loss NormalUnits Input

Loss Normal of ValueScrapCost Total

×

−

Units in abnormal loss

Abnormal Process loss should not be allowed to affect the cost of production as it is caused by abnormal (or)

unexpected conditions. Such loss representing the cost of materials, labour and overhead charges called

abnormal loss account. The sales value of the abnormal loss is credited to Abnormal Loss Account and the

balance is written off to costing P & L A/c.

Abnormal Loss Account

Particulars Units Amount in

`

Particulars Units Amount in

`

To Process A/c XX XXX By Bank Account XX XXX

By Costing P & L A/c. XXX

XX XXX XX XXX

Abnormal Gains:

The margin allowed for normal loss is an estimate (i.e. on the basis of expectation in process industries in

normal conditions) and slight differences are bound to occur between the actual output of a process and that

anticipates. This difference may be positive or negative. If it is negative it is called ad abnormal Loss and if it

is positive it is Abnormal gain i.e. if the actual loss is less than the normal loss then it is called as abnormal

gain. The value of the abnormal gain calculated in the similar manner of abnormal loss. The formula used for

abnormal gain is:

EP-CMA

272

The sales values of abnormal gain units are transferred to Normal Loss Account since it arrive out of the

savings of Normal Loss. The difference is transferred to Costing P & L A/c. as a Real gain

Abnormal Gain Account

Particulars Units

Amount in `

Particulars Units

Amount in `

To Normal loss a/c XX XXX By Process A/c XX XXX

To Costing P & L A/c. XXX

XX XXX XX XXX

Illustration 9: (Normal / Abnormal Loss)

Prepare a Process Account and Abnormal Loss Account from the following information.

Input of Raw material 1000 units @

`

20 per Unit

Direct Material

`

4,200/-

Direct Wages

`

6,000/-

Production Overheads

`

6,000/-

Actual output transferred to process II 900 units

Normal Loss 5%

Value of Scrap per unit

`

8/-

Solution:

Process 1 Account

Dr. Cr.

Particulars Units

Amount in `

Particulars Units

Amount in `

To Basic material 1,000

20,000

By Normal Loss 50

400

To Direct Material

4,200

By Abnormal Loss 50

1,884

To direct labour

To Production overhead

6,000

By Process II (Output

transferred to next

processes)

900

39,916

36,200

Working Notes:

Cost of abnormal Loss:

units abnormal

Units Loss Normal units Input

Scrap of value Sales increased Cost Total

×

−

50

501000

40036200

×

−

=

It has been assumed that units of abnormal loss have also been sold at the same rate i.e. of Normal Scrap

Abnormal Loss Account

Particulars Units

Amount in `

Particulars Units

Amount in `

To Process 1 A/c 50

1884

By Bank Account 50

400

By Costing P & L A/c.

1484

50

1884

50

1884

Lesson 7

Costing System

273

Illustration 10: (Normal / Abnormal Loss and Abnormal Gain)

The product of a company passes through 3 distinct process. The following information is obtained from the

accounts for the month ending January 31, 2014.

Particulars Process – A Process – B Process – C

Direct Material 7800 5940 8886

Direct Wages 6000 9000 12000

Production Overheads 6000 9000 12000

3000 units @

`

3 each were introduced to process – I. There was no stock of materials or work in progress.

The output of each process passes directly to the next process and finally to finished stock A/c.

The following additional data is obtained:

Process Output Normal Loss in % Realisable Value of Scrap

Process 1 2,850 5% 2

Process 2 2,520 10% 4

Process 3 2,250 15% 5

Prepare Process Cost Account, Normal Loss Account and Abnormal Gain or Loss Account

Solution:

Process A Account

Dr. Cr.

Particulars Units

Amount in `

Particulars Units

Amount in `

To Basic material 3,000

9,000

By Normal Loss 150

300

To Direct Material

To direct labour

To Production

overhead

7800

6,000

By Process B (Output

transferred to next

processes)

2,850

28,500

3,000

28,800

Process B Account

Dr. Cr.

Particulars Units

Amount in ` Particulars Units

Amount in `

To Process A Account 2,850

28,500

By Normal Loss 285

1,140

To Direct Material

5,940

By Abnormal Loss A/c 45

900

To Direct labour

To Production overhead

9,000

By Process B (Output

transferred to next

processes)

2,520

50,400

2,850

52,440

2,850

52,440

EP-CMA

274

Cost of abnormal Loss:

units abnormal

Units Loss Normal units Input

Scrap of value Sales increased Cost Total

×

−

45

285850,2

1140440,52

×

−

=

``

=

`

20 × 45

=

`

900

Process C Account

Dr. Cr.

Particulars Units

Amount in ` Particulars Units Amount in `

To Process A Account 2,520

50,400

By Normal Loss 378 1890

To Direct Material

8,886

By Abnormal Loss A/C

To Direct labour

To Production overhead

To Abnormal gain

108

12,000

4,104

By Process B (Output

transferred to next

processes)

2,250 85,500

2,520

87,390

2,520 87,390

Cost of abnormal Gain :

units abnormal

Units Loss Normal units Input

Scrap of value Sales increased Cost Total

×

−

=

45

378520,2

1890396,82

×

−

=

``

=

`

38 × 108

=

`

4,104

Abnormal Loss Account

Particulars Units

Amount in

`

Particulars Units

Amount in

`

To Process B A/c 45

900

By Bank Account 45

180

By Costing P & L A/c.

720

45

900

45

900

Abnormal Gain Account

Particulars Units

Amount in

`

Particulars Units

Amount in

`

To Normal loss A/c 108

540

By Process C Account 108

4104

To Costing P & L A/c.

3,564

108

4104

108

4104

Lesson 7

Costing System

275

Normal Loss Account

Particulars Units

Amount in

`

Particulars Units

Amount in

`

To Process A A/c 150

300

By Bank Account

To Process B A/C 285

1140

Process A 150

300

To Process C Account 378

1890

Process B 285

1,140

Process C 270

1,350

By Abnormal Gain

Account

108

540

3,330

Illustration 11

A product is manufactured by passing through three processes A, B and C. In process C a by-product is also

produced which is then transferred to process D where it is completed. For the first week in January, the

actual data included:

Process

A

B

C D

Normal loss of input (%) 5

10

5 10

Scrap value (

`

per unit) 1.50

2.00

4.00

2.00

Estimated sales value of by-product (

`

. per unit) -

-

8.00

-

Output (units) 5,760

5,100

4,370

-

Output of by-products (units) -

-

510

450

Direct materials (6000 units) (

`

) 12,000

-

- -

Direct materials added in process (

`

) 5,000

9,000

4,000

220

Direct wages (

`

) 4,000

6,000

2,000

200

Direct expenses (

`

) 800

1,680

2,260

151

Budgeted production overhead (based on direct wages) for the week is

`

30,500.

Budgeted direct wages for the week is

`

12,200.

You are required to prepare:

(i) Accounts for processes A, B, C and D.

(ii) Abnormal loss and abnormal gain accounts.

Solution:

Process A Account

Particulars Units Amount

Particulars Units

Amount

(`)

To Input 6,000

12,000

By Normal loss A/c (scrap) 300

450

To Direct material added 5,000

By Process B A/c 5,760

31,680

To Direct wages 4,000

(@

`

5.50 per unit)

To Direct expenses 800

To Production overhead 10,000

(250% of direct wages)

To Abnormal gain 60

330

(@

`

5.50 per unit)

6,060

32,130

6,060

32,130

EP-CMA

276

Workings:

(i) Production overhead = 250%













×100

200,12

500,30

`

(ii) Cost per unit:

` Units

Cost 31,800

Input 6,000

Less:

Scrap 450

Less:

Normal loss 300

31,350

5,700

Cost per unit =

`

5.50













`5,700

` 350,31

Process B Account

Particulars Units

Amount

Particulars Units

Amount

(`)

To Process A A/c 5,760

31,680

By Normal loss 576

1,152

To Direct material added

9,000

By Abnormal loss 84

1,008

To Direct wages

6,000

By Process C A/c 5,100

61,200

To Direct expenses

1,680

To Production overhead

15,000

5,760

63,360

5,760

63,360

Working:

(iii) Cost per unit:

`

Units

Cost 63,360

Input 5,760

Less:

Scrap 1,152

Less:

Normal loss 576

62,208

5,184

Cost per unit =

`

12













`5,184

` 208,62

Process C Account

Particulars Units

Amount

Particulars Units

Amount

(`)

To Process B A/c 5,100

61,200

By Normal loss 255

1,020

To Direct material added

4,000

By Finished goods 4,370

69,920

To Direct wages

2,000

By Process D A/c 510

4,080

To Direct expenses

2,260

To Production overhead

5,000

To Abnormal gain 35

560

5,135

75,020

5,135

75,020

Lesson 7

Costing System

277

Working:

(iv) Cost per unit:

`

Units

Cost

74,460

Input

5,100

Less:

Scrap 1,020

Less:

Normal loss 255

By-product 4,080

5,100

By-product 510

765

69,360

4,335

Cost per unit =

`

16













4,335

360,69

`

Process D Account

Particulars Units

Amount

Particulars Units

Amount

(`)

To Process C A/c 510

4,080

By Normal loss 51

102

To Direct material

220

By Finished goods 450

4,950

To Direct wages

200

By Abnormal loss 9

99

To Direct expenses

151

To Production overheads

500

510

5,151

510

5,151

Working:

(v) Cost per unit:

` Units

Cost 5,151

Input 510

Less:

Scrap 102

Less:

Normal loss 51

5,049

459

Cost per unit =

`

11













459

5,049

`

Abnormal Loss Account

Particulars Units

Amount

Particulars Units

Amount

(

`

)

(

`

)

To Process B A/c 84

1,008

By Scrap 84

168

To Process D A/c 9

99

By Scrap By Costing Profit 9

18

and Loss A/c -

921

93

1,107

93

1,107

Abnormal Gain Account

Particulars Units

Amount

Particulars Units

Amount

(`)

To Normal Loss A/c 60

90

By Process A/c 60

330

To Normal Loss A/c 35

140

By Process C A/c 35

560

To Costing Profit

and Loss A/c

660

95

890

95

890

EP-CMA

278

INTER PROCESS PROFITS

Normally the output of one process is transferred to another process at cost but sometimes at a price showing

a profit to the transfer process. The transfer price may be made at a price corresponding to current wholesale

market price or at cost plus an agreed percentage. The advantage of the method is to find out Whether the

particular process is making profit (or) loss. This will help the management whether to process the product or to

buy the product from the market. If the transfer price is higher than the cost price then the process account will

show a profit. The complexity brought into the accounting arises from the fact that the inter process profits

introduced remain a part of the prices of process stocks, finished stocks and work-in-progress. The balance

cannot show the stock with profit. To avoid the complication a provision must be created to reduce the stock at

actual cost prices. This problem arises only in respect of stock on hand at the end of the period because goods

sold must have realized the internal profits. The unrealized profit in the closing stock is eliminated by creating a

stock reserve. The amount of stock reserve is calculated by the following formula.

Illustration 12:

A product passes through three processes before its completion. The output of each process is charged to

the next process at a price calculated to give a profit of 20% on transfer price. The output of Process III is

transferred to finished stock account on a similar basis. There was no work-in-progress at the beginning of

the years. Stock in each process has been valued at prime cost of the process. The following data is

available at the end of 31st March, 2014

Particulars Process A

Process B

Process C Finished Stock in `

Direct Material

20,000

30,000

10,000

Direct Wages

30,000

20,000

40,000

Stock as on 31st March, 2014

10,000

20,000

30,000

15,000

Sales during the year

1,80,000

From above information prepare:

1. Process Cost Account showing the profit at each stage.

2. Actual realized profit and

3. Stock Valuation as would appear in the balance sheet

Solution

Process A Account

Dr. Cr.

Particulars Total in `

Cost in ` Profit in ` Particulars Total in `

Cost in ` Profit in `

To Direct

Material

20,000

-

By Process B

(Transfer

Price)

50,000

40,000

10,000

To Direct

Wages

30,000

-

Less:

Closing

Stock

10,000

-

To Prime Cost 40,000

40,000

Nil

To Gross Profit

( 20% of

Transfer Price

i.e. 25% of

Cost)

10,000

50,000

40,000

10,000

50,000

40,000

10,000

To Stock B/d 10,000

10,000

Nil

Lesson 7

Costing System

279

Process B Account

Dr. Cr.

Particulars Total in ` Cost in ` Profit in ` Particulars Total in `

Cost in ` Profit in `

To Process A 50,000

40,000

10,000

By Process

C (Transfer

Price)

1,00,000

72,000

28,000

To Direct

Material

30,000

To Direct

Wages

20,000

1,00,000

90,000

10,000

Less: Closing

Stock

20,000

18,000

2,000

To Prime Cost 80,000

72,000

8,000

To Gross

Profit ( 20% of

Transfer Price

i.e. 25% of

Cost)

20,000

-

20,000

1,00,000

72,000

28,000

1,00,000

72,000

28,000

To Stock B/d 20,000

18,000

2,000

Process C Account

Dr. Cr.

Particulars Total in `

Cost in ` Profit in `

Particulars Total in `

Cost in ` Profit in `

To Process B 1,00,000

72,000

28,000

By Finished

Stock A/c

(Transfer

Price)

1,50,000

97,600

52,400

To Direct

Material

10,000

-

To Direct

Wages

40,000

-

1,50,000

1,22,000

28,000

Less: Closing

Stock

30,000

24,400

5,600

To Prime Cost 1,20,000

97,600

22,400

To Gross

Profit ( 20% of

Transfer Price

i.e. 25% of

Cost)

30,000

1,50,000

97,600

52,400

1,50,000

97,600

52,400

To Stock B/d 30,000

24,400

5,600

EP-CMA

280

Finished Stock Account

Dr. Cr.

Particulars Total in `

Cost in ` Profit in `

Particulars Total in `

Cost in

`

Profit in `

To Process C 1,50,000

97,600

52,400

By Sales 1,80,000

87,840

92,160

Less: Stock 15,000

9,760

5,240

1,35,000

1,80,000

87,840

92,160

To Gross

Profit

45,000

1,80,000

87,840

92,160

To Stock 15,000

9,760

5,240

Calculation of profit on closing stock

Profit included in stock =

price Transfer

stock of Value price transfer in included Profit

×

Process A = No profit

Process B =













× 20,000

1,00,000

10,000

= 2,000

Process C =













× 30,000

1,50,000

28,000

= 5,600

Finished stock =













× 15,000

1,50,000

52,400

= 5,240

VALUATION OF WORK-IN-PROGRESS

Meaning of Work-in-Progress:

Since in process industries, production is continuous, there may be some incomplete production at the end

of an accounting period. Incomplete units mean those units on which percentage of completion with regular

to all elements of cost (i.e. material, labour and overhead) is not 100%. Such incomplete production units are

known as Work-in-Progress. Such Work-in-Progress is valued in terms of equivalent or effective production

units.

Meaning of Equivalent Production Units:

This represents the production of a process in terms of complete units. In other words, it means converting

the incomplete production into its equivalent of complete units. The term equivalent unit means a notional

quantity of completed units substituted for an actual quantity of incomplete physical units in progress, when

the aggregate work content of the incomplete units is deemed to be equivalent to that of the substituted

quantity. The principle applies when operation costs are apportioned between work in progress and

completed units.

Equivalent units of work in progress = Actual no. of units in progress x Percentage of work completed

Equivalent unit should be calculated separately for each element of cost (viz. material, labour and

overheads) because the percentage of completion of the different cost component may be different.

Lesson 7

Costing System

281

Accounting Procedure:

The following procedure is followed when there is Work-in- Progress

(1) Find out equivalent production after taking into account of the process losses, degree of completion

of opening and / or closing stock.

(2) Find out net process cost according to elements of costs i.e. material, labour and overheads.

(3) Ascertain cost per unit of equivalent production of each element of cost separately by dividing each

element of costs by respective equivalent production units.

(4) Evaluate the cost of output finished and transferred work in progress

The total cost per unit of equivalent units will be equal to the total cost divided by effective units and cost of

work-in progress will be equal to the equivalent units of work-in progress multiply by the cost per unit of

effective production.

In short the following from steps an involved.

Step 1 – prepare statement of Equivalent production

Step 2 – Prepare statement of cost per Equivalent unit

Step 3 – Prepare of Evaluation

Step 4 – Prepare process account

The problem on equivalent production may be divided into four groups.

I. When there is only closing work-in-progress but without process losses

II. When there is only closing work-in-progress but with process losses

III. When there is only opening as well as closing work-in progress without process losses

IV. When there is opening as well as closing work-in progress with process losses

Situation I: Only closing work-in-progress without process losses:

In this case, the existence of process loss is ignored. Closing work-in-progress is converted into equivalent

units on the basis of estimates on degree of completion of materials, labour and production overhead.

Afterwards, the cost pr equivalent unit is calculated and the same is used to value the finished output

transferred and the closing work-in-progress

Situation II: When there is closing work-in-progress with process loss or gain.

If there are process losses the treatment is same as already discussed in this chapter. In case of normal loss

nothing should be added to equivalent production. If abnormal loss is there, it should be considered as good

units completed during the period. If units scrapped (normal loss) have any reliable value, the amount should

be deducted from the cost of materials in the cost statement before dividing by equivalent production units.

Abnormal gain will be deducted to obtain equivalent production.

Situation III: Opening and closing work-in-progress without process losses.

Since the production is a continuous activity there is possibility of opening as well as closing work-in-

progress. The procedure of conversion of opening work-in-progress will vary depending on the method of

apportionment of cost followed viz, FIFO, Average cost Method and LIFO. Let us discuss the methods of

valuation of work-in-progress one by one.

(a) FIFO Method:

The FIFO method of costing is based on the assumption of that the opening work-in-

EP-CMA

282

progress units are the first to be completed. Equivalent production of opening work-in-progress can

be calculated as follows:

Equivalent Production = Units of Opening WIP x Percentage of work needed to finish the units

(b) Average Cost Method:

This method is useful when price fluctuate from period to period. The

closing valuation of work-in-progress in the old period is added to the cost of new period and an

average rate obtained. In calculating the equivalent production opening units will not be shown

separately as units of work-in-progress but included in the units completed and transferred.

(c) Weighted Average Cost Method:

In this method no distinction is made between completed units

from opening inventory and completed units from new production. All units finished during the

current accounting period are treated as if they were started and finished during that period. The

weighted average cost per unit is determined by dividing the total cost (opening work-in-progress

cost + current cost) by equivalent production.

(d) LIFO Method:

In LIFO method the assumption is that the units entering into the process is the last

one first to be completed. The cost of opening work-in-progress is charged to the closing work-in-

progress and thus the closing work-in progress appears cost of opening work-in-progress. The

completed units are at their current cost.

Format of statement of Equivalent Production

Input Output Equivalent Production

Particulars Units Particulars Units Material Labour Overhead

% Units % Units % Units

Opening

Stock

XX

Units

completed

XX XX XX XX XX

Units

introduced

XX

Normal

Loss

XX

Abnormal

Loss

XX XX XX XX XX

Equivalent

units

XX XX XX XX XX XX XX

Statement of Cost per Equivalent units

Elements of Costing Cost in ` Equivalent Units Cost per equivalent Units in `

Material Cost XX XX XX

Labour Cost XX XX XX

Overhead Cost XX XX XX

Statement of Evaluation

Particulars

Element of

Cost

Equivalent

Units

Cost per

equivalent

units in `

Cost in ` Total Cost in `

Units Completed Material XX XX XX XX

Labour XX XX XX XX

Overhead XX XX XX XX

Closing WIP Material XX XX XX XX

Lesson 7

Costing System

283

Labour XX XX XX XX

Overhead XX XX XX XX

Abnormal Loss Material XX XX XX XX

Labour XX XX XX XX

Overhead XX XX XX XX

Illustration 13: (Average Costing)

Prepare a statement of equivalent production, statement of cost, process account from the following

information using average costing method.

Opening Stock 50,000 Units

Material

`

25,000

Labour

`

10,000

Overheads

`

25,000

Units Introduced 2,00,000 Units

Material

`

1,00,000

Wages

`

75,000

Overheads

`

70,000

During the period 1,50,000 units were completed and transferred to Process II.

Closing stock 1,00,000 units.

Degree of completion.

Material 100 %

Labour 50 %

Overheads 40 %

Solution

Format of statement of Equivalent Production

Input Output Equivalent Production

Particulars Units Particulars Units Material Labour Overhead

% Units % Units % Units

Opening

Stock

50,000

Units

completed

1,50,000 100 1,50,000 100 1,50,000 100 1,50,000

Units

introduced

2,00,000

Closing

Stock

1,00,000 100% 1,00,000 50 50,000 40 40,000

2,50,000

Equivalent

units

2,50,000 2,50,000 2,00,000 1,90,000

Statement of Cost

Element Opening Cost Current Cost Total Cost

Equivalent

Units

Cost per unit

Material 25,000

1,00,000

1,25,000

2,50,000

0.50

EP-CMA

284

Labour 10,000

75,000

85,000

2,00,000

0.425

Overhead 25,000

70,000

95,000

1,90,000

0.50

60,000

2,45,000

3,05,000

1.425

Statement of Evaluation

Particulars Units

Cost per unit Cost Total cost

Units introduced and transferred 1,50,000

1.425

2,13,750

Closing Work in progress

Material 1,00,000

0.500

50,000

Labour 50,000

0.425

21,250

Overhead 40,000

0.500

20,000

91,250

3,05,000

Process 1 Account

Particulars Units

Amount in `

Particulars Units

Amount in `

To Opening Stock 50,000

60,000

By Units Completed 1,50,000

2,13,750

To Material 2,00,000

1,00,000

By Closing Stock

91,250

To Labour

75,000

To Overhead

70,000

3,05,000

Illustration 14

Following details are related to the work done in Process ‘X’ Pearson Company during the month of January,

2014:

Opening work-in progress (2,000 units) Value in `

Materials 80,000

Labour 15,000

Overheads 45,000

Materials introduced in Process ‘A’ (38,000 units) 14,80,000

Direct Labour 3,59,000

Overheads 10,77,000

Units scrapped -3000 Units

Degree of Completion

Material 100%

Labour and Overhead 80%

Closing work-in progress: 2,000 units

Degree of Completion

Material 100%

Labour and Overhead 80%

Lesson 7

Costing System

285

Units finished and transferred to Process B 35000 Units, Normal Loss is 5% of total Output including opening

work-in-progress. Scrapped units fetch

`

20 per unit

You are required to prepare:

(i) Statement of equivalent production

(ii) Statement of cost

(iii) Statement of distribution cost, and

(iv) Process ‘A’ Account, Normal and Abnormal Loss Accounts

Solution:

Statement of Equivalent Production

Input Output Equivalent Production

Particulars Units Particulars Units Material Labour & Overhead

Overhead

% Units % Units

Opening

Stock

2,000

Units completed and

transferred to

Process B

35,000

100 35,000

Units

introduced

38,000

Normal Loss 5% 2,000

- -

Abnormal Loss 1,000

100 1,000

80 800

Closing Stock 2,000

100 2,000

80 1,600

40,000

Equivalent units 40,000

38,000

37,400

Statement of Cost

Element Opening Cost

in `

Current Cost

in `

Total Cost in `

Equivalent

Units

Cost per unit

in `

Material 80,000

14,80,000

15,60,000

Less:

Scrap Value

of Normal Loss

40,000

15,20,000

38,000

40

Labour 15,000

3,59,000

3,74,000

37,400

10

Overhead 45,000

10,77,000

11,22,000

37,400

30

45,000

2,45,000

3,05,000

80

Statement of Evaluation

Particulars Units

Cost per unit in ` Cost in `

Total cost in `

Units introduced and transferred 35,000

80

28,00,000

Abnormal Loss

Material 1,000

40

40,000

Labour and Overhead 800

40

32,000

72,000

Closing Work in progress

Material 2,000

40

80,000

Labour & Overhead 1,600

40

64,000

1,44,000

EP-CMA

286

Process A

Particulars Units Amount in `

Particulars Units

Amount in `

To Opening Stock 2,000

1,40,000

By Normal Loss 2,000

40,000

To Material 38,000

14,80,000

By Abnormal Loss 1,000

72,000

To Labour 3,59,000

By Units Completed 35,000

28,00,000

To Overhead 10,77,000

By Closing Stock 2,000

1,44,000

40,000

30,56,000

40,000

30,56,000

Normal Loss A/c

Particulars Units

Amount in `

Particulars Units

Amount in `

To Process A A/c 2,000

40,000

By Bank A/c 2,000

40,000

Illustration 15

During the month of July 2013 in a Industry 2,000 units were introduced into Process I. The cost of the 2,000

units was

`

11,600. At the end of the month 1,500 units had been produced and transferred to Process II;

360 units were still in process; and 140 units had been scrapped. A normal loss of 5% on input is allowed. It

was estimated that the incomplete units (i.e. the work-in-progress) had reached a stage in production as

follows :

Material 75% completed

Labour 50% completed

Production overhead 50% completed

The total cost incurred were (in addition to the 2,000 units):

Direct materials introduced during the process

`

3,080

Direct wages

`

6,880

Production overheads

`

3,440

Units scrapped realized

`

2 each

The units scrapped had passed through the process, so were 100% completed as regards material, labour

and overhead.

Prepare the Process Account and Abnormal Loss Account.

Solution

Statement of Production

Process 1

Equivalent production (Units)

Material Labour Overhead

Input

Units

Output

Units

Qty. % Qty. % Qty. %

2,000

Normal loss 100

-

- -

-

Abnormal Loss A/c

Particulars Units

Amount in `

Particulars Units

Amount in `

To Process A A/c 1,000

72,000

By Bank A/c 1,000

20,0000

By Costing P & L A/C 52,000

72,000

Lesson 7

Costing System

287

Abnormal loss 40

40

100 40

100

Finished

Production 1,500

1,500

100 1,500

100

Work-in-progress 360

270

75 180

50 180

50

2,000

Total 2,000

Equivalent production

1,810

1,720

Statement of Cost

Process 1

Elements of Cost Cost

Equivalent

Cost

Production

per

`

(Units)

unit

Materials:

Units introduced 11,600

Direct 3,080

14,680

Less:

Scrap value of normal loss

200

14,480

1,810

8

Labour: Direct 6,880

1,720

4

Overhead: Production 3,440

1,720

2

Total 24,800

14

Statement of Evaluation

Process 1

Production Elements of cost

Equivalent

production

(units)

Cost

per unit

Cost

Total cost

Abnormal loss Material 40

8

320

Labour 40

4

160

Overhead 40

2

80

560

Finished production Material 1,500

8

12,000

Labour 1,500

4

6,000

Overhead 1,500

2

3,000

21,000

Work-in-progress Material 270

8

2,160

Labour 180

4

720

Overhead 180

2

360

3,240

24,800

EP-CMA

288

Process Account

Units

`

Units

`

To Units introduced 2,000

11,600

By Normal loss 100

200

To Material

3,080

By Abnormal loss 40

560

To Labour

6,880

By Process II 1,500

21,000

To Overhead

3,440

By Work-in-Progress 360

3,240

2,000

25,000

2,000

25,000

Abnormal Loss Account

Units

`

Units

Rs

To Process A/c 40

560

By Cash 40

80

By Costing P & L A/c

480

40

560

40

560

Illustration 16

Opening work-in-process - 1,000 units (60% complete) Cost

`

1,100. Units introduced during the period

10,000 units; Cost

`

19,300. Transferred to next process - 9,000 units.

Closing work-in-process - 800 units (75% complete). Normal loss estimated at 10% of total input including

units in process at the beginning. Scrap realised Re. 1.00 per unit. Scrapped units are 100% complete.

Compute equivalent production and cost per equivalent unit according to FIFO and average cost method.

Also evaluate the output.

Solution:

FIFO Method

Statement of equivalent production and cost per unit

Particulars Input

Particulars Output

Equivalent

Production

Units

units

Percentage

Equivalent

of work done

units

current

During period

Op. work-in-

Op. WIP

process 1,000

completed 1,000

40

400

Units

Completed 8,000

100

8,000

Introduced 10,000

Normal loss 1,100

-

Closing work-

in-process 800

75

600

Abnormal loss 100

100

11,000

9,100

Lesson 7

Costing System

289

Cost of the process (for the period)

`

19,300

Less:

Scrap value of normal loss

200,18

100,1

`

18,200

Cost per equivalent unit

`

18,200 /9,100 =

`

2

Statement of Evaluation

Particulars Equivalent

Cost per

Amount

units

equivalent

units

`

1. Opening WIP completed 400

2.00

800

Add:

Cost of Opening WIP

–

1,100

(Complete Cost of 1,000 units of opening WIP 1,000

1.90

(1,900)

2. Completely processed units 8,000

2.00

16,000

3. Abnormal loss 100

2.00

200

4. Closing WIP 600

2.00

1,200

Average Cost Method

Statement of equivalent production and cost per unit

Output Units

Equivalent

Production

percentage

units

Transferred to next process 9,000

100

9,000

Normal loss 1,100

-

Abnormal loss 100

100

Closing WIP 800

75

600

9,700

Costs

`

Opening work-in-process 1,100

Costs of units introduced 19,300

20,400

Less:

Scrap value realised on normal loss

1,100

`

19,300

Cost per equivalent unit

`

19,300 /9,700 =

`

1.99 (approx)

EP-CMA

290

Statement of Evaluation

Particulars Equivalent

Cost per

Amount

units

equivalent

unit

`

1. Transferred to next process 9,000

1.99

17,910

2. Abnormal loss 100

1.99

199

3. Closing work-in-process 600

1.99

1,191

19,300

BY-PRODUCTS AND JOINT PRODUCTS

By-products are defined as “any saleable or usable value incidentally produced in addition to the main

product”. By-products means secondary or subsidiary products arising in the course of manufacturing the

main product(s). In the process of producing the main product it frequently occurs that materials or other

products emerge which are of smaller value. These are the by-products and even if subsequent processing

enhances their value, the resulting profit will be less than that from the main product; otherwise, of course the

by-product would become the main product and vice-versa. For example, in oil refinery crude oil is

processed but by-products, i.e. bitumen, chemical fertilizer are obtained with the main product-refined oil.

Similarly in coke ovens, gas and tar are incidentally produced in addition to the main product coke. Gas and

tar are therefore treated as by-products.

There are certain industries where two or more products of equal importance are simultaneously produced

such products are regarded as joint products. Joint-products thus represent two or more products separated

in the course of same processing operations, usually requiring further processing, each product being in

such proportion that no single product can be designated as a major product. CIMA has defined it as “two or

more products separated in processing, each having a sufficiently high saleable value to merit recognition as

a main product.”

So joint products imply the following :

(i) They are produced from the same basic raw materials.

(ii) They are comparatively of equal importance.

(iii) They are produced simultaneously by a common process.

(iv) They may require further processing after the point of separation.

Examples of joint products are gasoline, diesel, kerosene, lubricants, tar, paraffin and asphalt obtained from

crude oil. Different grades of lumber resulting from a lumbering operation is another example.

The classification of various products from the same process into joint products and by-products depends

upon the relative importance of the products and their value of the various end-products are almost equal in

importance and their value is also more or less the same, they may be identified as joint products. But, if one

end-product has greater importance and higher value and the other products are of less importance and

rather of low value, the latter may be classified as by-products. It may be noted that the value of some end-

products may be so insignificant as that they may be classified as waste or scrap. Thus by-products are

distinguished from joint products and waste or scrap only in respect of degree of importance and value. Joint

products are produced simultaneously but the by-products are produced incidentally in addition to the main

product.

Lesson 7

Costing System

291

ACCOUNTING FOR BY-PRODUCTS

Accounting for by-products may be classified as follows :

Non-cost or Sales Value Methods

(i) Other income method: In this method the sales value of by-products is credited to profit and loss

account, treating it as other miscellaneous income.

(ii) By-products sales deducted from total cost: Under this method the sale proceeds of the by-products

are treated as deductions from total costs. The sales value is deducted either from the production

costs or cost of sales.

(iii) By-product sales added to the main product sales: In this case all costs incurred on main and by-

products are deducted from the combined sales of the main product and by-products.

(iv) Crediting sales value less administration, selling and distribution expenses: In this method, a portion

of the administration, selling and distribution overhead incurred for disposing of the by-product is

deducted from the sale value for credit to process account.

(v) Crediting sales value less the costs incurred on by-products after split off point: In certain cases it

becomes necessary to perform some further operations on by-products after the split off point, in

order to make it saleable. Credit is given to the process account for sale value less the cost after

split off point.

(vi) Reverse cost method: Under this method, an estimated profit from the sale of by-products, selling

and distribution expenses and further processing cost, after the split off points are deducted from

the sale value of by-products and the net amount is credited to the main product.

Cost methods

(i) Opportunity or replacement cost method:

This method is adopted where by-products are utilised by

the factory itself as input material for some other process. The opportunity cost or replacement cost

which otherwise would have been incurred if the by-products were to be purchased from outside

suppliers is taken as the basis for costing by-products. The process account is credited with the

value of by-products so ascertained.

(ii) Standard cost method:

A standard cost is set on the basis of technical assessment for each by-

product and credit is given to the process account on this basis. Because of the stability of this

method, effective control would be exercised on the cost of the main product.

(iii) Apportionment on suitable basis:

Where by-products are of major significance, cost should be

apportioned on the most suitable basis, i.e. physical measurement, market value etc.

ACCOUNTING FOR JOINT PRODUCTS

Joint products are not identifiable as separate products until a certain point or stage of production is

complete. This stage is known as split off point. Cost incurred prior to the split off point are referred to as joint

costs. Costs incurred after this stage are referred to as separate or subsequent costs. Accounting of joint

products implies the assignment of a portion of the joint cost to each of the joint product. Unless the joint

costs are properly and reasonably apportioned to different joint products produced, the cost of joint products

will vary considerably and this will affect valuation of inventory, pricing of products and profit or loss on sale

of different products. The commonly used methods for apportioning total process costs up to the point of

separation over the joint products are as follows:

(i) Physical unit method

(ii) Average unit cost method

(iii) Survey method

EP-CMA

292

(iv) Contribution margin method

(v) Market value method :

1. At the point of separation

2. After further processing

3. Net realisable value.

Physical unit method

This method is based on the assumption that the joint products are capable of being measured in the same

units. Accordingly joint costs here are apportioned on the basis of some physical base, such as weight or

measure expressed in gallons, tonnes etc. In other words, the basis used for apportioning joint costs over the

joint products is the physical volume of materials present in the joint products at the point of separation. Any

loss arising during the stage of processing is also apportioned over the products on the same basis. This

method cannot be applied if the physical units of the two joint products are different. The main defect of this

method is that it gives equal importance and value to all the joint products.

Average unit cost method

Under this method, total process costs (upto the point of separation) are divided by total units of joint

products produced. On division, average cost per unit of production is obtained. The effect of application of

this method is that all joint products will have uniform cost per unit. Under this method customers of high

quality items are benefited as they have to pay less price on their purchases.

Survey method

This method is also known as points value method. It is based on technical survey of all the factors involved

in the production and distribution of products. Under this method joint costs are apportioned over the joint

products, on the basis of percentage/point values, assigned to the products according to their relative

importance. This method is considered to be more equitable them other methods.

Contribution margin method

According to this method, joint costs are segregated into two parts-variable and fixed. The variable costs are

apportioned over the joint products on the basis of units produced (average method) or physical quantities. In

case the products are further processed after the point of separation, then all variable costs incurred be

added to the variable costs determined earlier. In this way total variable cost is arrived at which is deducted

from their respective sales values to ascertain their contribution. The fixed costs are then apportioned over

the joint products on the basis of the contribution ratios.

Market value method

This is the most popular and convenient method because it makes use of a realistic basis for apportioning joint

costs. Under this method joint costs are apportioned after ascertaining “what the traffic can bear”. In other

words, the products are made to bear a proportion of the joint costs on the basis of their ability to absorb the

same. Market value means weighted market value i.e. units produced x price of a unit of joint product.

(i) Market value at the point of separation or relative market value method:

The adoption of this method involves the following steps:

(a) The physical output of each product is multiplied with the market price at the split off point.

Lesson 7

Costing System

293

(b) The resultant market value of all products are then added.

(c) The percentage of the market value of each product to the total of the market values under (b)

above is found out.

(d) These percentages are used to allocate the total input cost among the joint products.

(ii) Market value after further processing:

Here the basis of apportionment of joint costs is the total sales value of finished products and involves the

same principle as stated in (i) above.

(iii) Net realisable value method:

From the sales value of the joint products (at finished stage) the followings are deducted :

(a) estimated profit margins.

(b) selling and distribution expenses, if any, and

(c) post-split off costs.

The resultant figure so obtained is known as net realisable value of joint products. Joint costs are

apportioned in the ratio of net realisable values. This method is extensively used in many industries.

CO-PRODUCTS

Co-products are particular type of products but produced in different varieties. These products may not

necessarily arise from the same operation or raw materials and may be produced in different quantities

without any co-relation to the others according to the needs of the market. For example, in fan manufacturing

industry, a number of co-products may be produced in different quantities, such as, ceiling fan, table fan,

pedestal fan, cabin fan etc. Similarly, in automobile industry co-products are, cars, jeeps, trucks, buses etc.

Co-products are distinguished from joint products in as much as the quantities of joint products remain in

linear relationship between them whereas co-products are independent ones and may be produced in

different quantities without any co-relationship with others.

Illustration 17

A by-product ‘Kappa’ is derived in the course of manufacturing a product ‘Gamma’. The by-product is further

processed for sale. From the following data available from cost records, prepare an account showing the

cost per kg. of the product ‘Gama’.

Joint expenses Separate expenses

Gamma

Kappa

Materials

`

20,000

`

12,000

`

1,000

Labour 14,000 10,000

4,000

Overheads 5,000 3,000

1,200

The quantities produced during the period under consideration were:

Gamma 400 kgs.

Kappa 100 kgs

The selling price of Kappa was

`

240 per kg. on which the profit earned was estimated at 30% of the selling

price.

EP-CMA

294

Solution:

The cost of production of the main product ‘Gamma’ is to be determined. It is necessary to prepare the cost

of Kappa to the split-off point by applying the reverse cost method.

The cost of by-product ‘Kappa’ up the split-off point is worked out as under:

`

/Kg.

Selling Price 240

Less:

Profit (30% of S.P.)

72

Cost of sales 168

Less:

Cost split-off expenses

`

6,200 /100 =

62

Joint cost of by-product upto split-off point 106

Joint cost of by-product upto split-off point =

`

106 x 100 =

`

10,600

Joint cost of Gamma upto = Total joint cost less joint cost of by split-off point product upto split-off point

`

Materials = 20,000

Labour = 14,000

Overheads = 5,000

39,000

Share of Joint cost of Gamma =

`

39,000 –

`

10,600 =

`

28,400

Gama Product Account

Dr.

Cr.

`

To Joint expenses 28,400

By Cost of production

To Post-separation expenses

400 kg. @

`

133.50

53,400

Materials 12,000

Labour 10,000

Overheads 3,000

53,400

So total cost of production of Gamma is

=

`

53,400

Cost per kg.

= 53,400 /400 or

`

133.50

Illustration 18

In the course of manufacture of the main product ‘A’, by-products ‘X’ and ‘Y’ also emerge. The joint expenses

of manufacture amount to

`

1,19,550. All the three products are processed further after separation and sold

as per details given below :

Main product

By-products

‘A’

‘X’

‘Y’

Sales

`

90,000

60,000

40,000

Cost incurred after separation

`

6,000

5,000

4,000

Profit as percentage on sales 25

20

15

Lesson 7

Costing System

295

Total fixed selling expenses are 10% of total cost of sales which are apportioned to the three products in the

ratio of 1 : 2 : 2.

Prepare a statement showing the apportionment of joint costs to the main product and the two by-products.

If the by-product ‘X’ is not subjected to further processing and is sold at the point of separation for which there is

a market, at

`

58,500 without incurring any selling expenses, would you advise its disposal at this stage?

Show the workings.

Solution:

(i) Statement showing apportionment of joint costs to main product and the two by-products

Main product

By-products

Total

‘A’

‘X’

‘Y’

`

Sales 90,000

60,000

40,000

1,90,000

Less:

Profit

22,500

12,000

6,000

40,500

Cost of sales 67,500

48,000

34,000

1,49,500

Less:

Selling expenses

2,990

5,980

14,950

Cost of production 64,510

42,020

28,020

1,34,550

Less:

Post-separation cost

6,000

5,000

4,000

15,000

Cost at the stage of separation 58,510

37,020

24,020

1,19,550

Note:

The fixed selling expenses are 10% of cost of sales (

`

1,49,500) i.e.

`

14,950. These are apportioned

to main product ‘A’ and by-products ‘X’ and ‘Y’ in the ratio of 1 : 2 : 2.

(ii) Decisional Economics of By-Product ‘X’

Sales at split off stage

Sales after further processing

`

Sales 58,500

60,000

Costs 37,020

42,020

Contribution 21,480

17,980

It is advisable to sell the by-product ‘X’ before processing since the contribution earned is more if the by-

product is not processed further.

Since selling expenses are fixed and do not affect the contribution from the two alternatives, selling

expenses need not be taken into account while working out the economics of the by-product.

SERVICE COSTING

INTRODUCTION

Service Costing or operation costing is normally used in service sector. When the service is not completely

standardized, it is the cost of producing and monitoring a service. It is a method of costing applied to

undertakings which provide service rather than production of commodities. Service may be performed

EP-CMA

296

internally and externally. Services are termed as internal when they have to be performed on inter-

departmental basis in factory itself e.g. Power house services, canteen service etc. Services are termed as

external when they are to be rendered to outside parties. Public utility services like transport, water supply,

electricity supply, hospitals are the best example for the service costing. Thus Service costing is a method of

cost accumulation which is designed to determine the cost of services. Service costing is just a variant of unit

or output costing. Service costs are collected periodically like process cost. The cost of rendering the service

for particular period is related to quantum of services rendered during the particular period to arrive at cost

per unit of service rendered. So the principal of unit costing is used in service costing.

MEANING OF SERVICE COSTING

Service costing is a method of ascertaining the cost of providing or services a service. It is also known as

operation costing CIMA London, defines Service Costing as “that form of operation costing which applies

where standardized services are rendered either by an undertaking or by a service cost renter with in an

undertaking”.

FEATURES OF SERVICE COSTING

The main features of operating costing are as following:

(1) The undertaking which adopts service costing does not produce any tangible goods. These

undertakings render unique services to their customers.

(2) The expenses are divided into fixed and variable cost. Such a classification is necessary to

ascertain the cost of service and the unit cost of service.

(3) The cost unit may be simple or composite. The examples of simple cost units are cost per unit in

electricity supply, cost per litre in water supply, cost per meal in canteen etc. Similarly cost per

passenger kilometers in transport cost per patient-day in hospital, costs per room-day in hotel etc.

are the examples of composite cost unit.

(4) Total cost is averaged over the total amount of service rendered.

(5) Costs are usually computed period-wise. However, in the case of utilization of vehicles, use of road-

rollers etc., the costs are computed order wise.

(6) Service costing can be used for service performed internally or externally.

(7) Documents like the daily log sheet, cost sheet etc. are used for the collection of cost data.

APPLICATION OF SERVICE COSTING

Service costing is very useful in determining the cost of providing servi8ces which became a base for

ascertaining the price of services. Service costing is extensively used in Transport industries. Hotel

industries, electricity company etc.

Service costing helps an organisation in ascertaining

1. Inter-departmental service prices

2. Service cost to be charged from outside clients

3. Benchmarking the processes/operations

4. Tracking and controlling the excess cost

UNIT COSTING AND MULTIPLE COSTING

Unit Costing:

It refers to a costing method which is used when cost units are identical. Cost units that are

identical should have identical costs. It is mainly used where a single product is the cost object. It is mainly

used in mining, quarries and cement industries.

Lesson 7

Costing System

297

Multiple Costing:

It refers to the method of costing followed by a business wherein a large variety of articles

are produced, each differing from the other both in regard to material required and process of manufacture.

In such cases, cost of each article is computed separately by using, generally, two or more methods of

costing.

Cost Unit

Determining the suitable cost unit to be used for cost ascertainment is a major problem in service costing.

Selection of a proper cost unit is a difficult task. A proper unit of cost must be related with reference to nature

of world and the cost objectives. The cost unit related must be simple i.e. per bed in a hospital, per cup of tea

sold in a canteen and per child in a school. In a certain cases a composite unit is used i.e. Passenger –

Kilometer in a transport company.

Examples of Cost Units in different Service Industries:

1. Passenger transport Kilometer

2. Goods transport Ton – Kilometer

3. Hotel Per room per day

4. Hospital Per bed per day

5. Canteen Per item, per meal

6. Water supply Per 1000 liters

7. Electricity Per kilowatt

Operating costs are usually collected under following headings:

1. Fixed or standard charges

2. Semi-fixed or maintenance charges

3. Variable or running charges.

An important feature of operating costing is that mostly such costs are fixed in nature. The operating costs

may be collected for different cost units so that the relevance, and utility of cost data could be understood

e.g. in hospital cost accounting; fixed charges may be apportioned in accordance with the number of

available bed days but variable costs in hospitals may be ascertained in terms of occupied bed days.

(a) Transport Costing

In transport undertakings, the cost unit is normally the tonne-km or passenger-km; but according to the

nature of the undertakings, the organisation may vary the cost unit. It is selected keeping in view the needs

of each concern depending upon the weight, bulk and types of goods carried and distance covered in each

trip. The motor transport costing has the following objectives:

(i) Control of operating and running costs and avoidance of waste of fuel and other consumable

material.

(ii) Cost of running own vehicles may be compared with hired or other forms of transport.

(iii) Facilitates quotation of hiring rates to outside parties who ask for the transport service.

(iv) Cost of running a vehicle may be compared with that of another similar vehicle.

(v) Cost of idle vehicles and lost running time are easily obtained.

EP-CMA

298

(vi) Since transport department is treated as separate department, the cost of services rendered to

other departments can easily be determined.

Composition of costs

The total costs consist of: (i) Standing charges; (ii) Running charges; (iii) Maintenance charges.

Standing charges

1. Licence duty and insurance; 2. Garage costs and administrative expenses; 3. Wages of drivers and

conductors; 4. Depreciation; 5. Tax; etc.

Running (variable) costs:

1. Petrol or diesel; 2. Oil; 3. Grease; etc.

Maintenance charges

1. Repairs and maintenance; 2. Cost of tyres, tubes, batteries, etc.; 3. Garage charges; 4. Overhauling of

vehicles;

The number of cost units is calculated as follows in transport costing:

Number of vehicles x capacity x distance travelled x days x passengers (or weight carried)

Accumulation and control of costs in transport costing are achieved through a daily log sheet and operating

cost sheet. A daily log report is prepared for each vehicle and filled in by the drivers. This is a document

which contains information regarding each journey. The details shown in the log book enable the

management to make suitable allocation of vehicles to avoid waste or idle running capacity. The records also

provide data for the proper allocation of costs and in this respect, these may be compared with the

production details available in a manufacturing concern.

Vehicle Log Book

Vehicle No. : Date :

Make and Specification : Driver :

Registration/Licence No.: Route on which playing :

Date of Purchase :

PARTICULARS OF TRIPS

Trip

No.

From To Dis-tance

K.M.

Goods/

Passengers

Ton/

Kilometer

Time Ac-

tual

Stan-

dard

Re-

marks

Out En-route Out In

Total

Supplies: Time:

Petrol/Diesel: Driver: Details of Delays

Lubricating Oil: Cleaner:

Mechanic:

Lesson 7

Costing System

299

The operating cost sheet or cost statement is also known as the performance statement for each vehicle.

These are prepared on a monthly basis and collect costs from duty log sheet, wage book, repair details etc.

The operating cost sheet acts as a cost control device. The total and per unit cost calculated can be

compared with past figures and performance can be evaluated.

Vehicle Running Cost Sheet

Vehicle No. : Period : Total No. of Trips : Budgeted Actual

Route No. : Total distance run :

Total weight carried :

Total units :

Total hours operated :

Nature of Current Last Month Budgeted Variance

Expenditure Amount Per Amount Per Amount Per

Unit Unit Unit

`

Operating and

Running Costs

Fuel

Lubricating oil

Drivers’ wages

Cleaners’ wages

Mechanics’ wages

Sub-Total

Maintenance Costs

Tyres and tubes

Spares

Repairs

Overheads

Sub-Total

Fixed Costs

Insurance

Licence and taxes

Depreciation

Establishment and

General Charges

Sub-total

Total

EP-CMA

300

(b) Boiler House Costing

Operating costing is also applied in those undertakings engaged in steam production. In large firms, a boiler

house is a service department providing services to production departments. The total costs are obtained for

producing steam. A cost unit is generally in terms of kilograms.

Boiler House Cost Sheet

Month................................... Total Consumption.....................

Total Steam Produced.........................

Items Total cost Cost per 1000 kgs.

(A) Fixed Overheads

Rent, rates etc.

Depreciation of plant

Depreciation of building

Insurance

(B) Maintenance

Meters

Furnace

Service materials

Tools and accessories

(C) Labour Charges

Coal handlers

Ash removers

(D) Fuel

Fuel

Power

(E) Water Charges

Water purchased

Water softening

(F) Supervision and other charges

Foremen

Engineers

General labour

Cleaners

Total

Lesson 7

Costing System

301

(c) Canteen Costing

In most organisations, canteen facilities are provided at subsidy so that food and other items can be provided

at minimum price. The costs are accumulated on a cost sheet which gives the total cost incurred. From the

total cost, the subsidy is deducted to arrive at the net-cost of operating the canteen. After comparing the net

cost with the sales proceeds profit or loss is calculated.

Canteen Cost Sheet

Month................

Items Total Cost Cost per meal

Current Month Previous Month

(A) Provisions

Bread

Biscuits

Cakes

Eggs

Meat

Fish

Vegetables

Milk

Fruits

Others

(B) Labour and Supervision

Supervisor

Cooks

Helpers

Counter clerks

Cleaners

Sweepers

(C) Maintenance

Crockery

Glassware

Towels

Rent

Light

Gas

Insurance

Consumable store

Total Cost

Less: Subsidy

Net Cost

Total Cost

Sales

Profit/Loss

EP-CMA

302

(d) Hospital Costing

The main purpose of hospital costing is to ascertain the cost of providing medical services. For costing

purposes hospital service can be divided into the following categories :

(i) Out-patient department

(ii) Casualty or emergency

(iii) Wards

(iv) Medical service departments, such as, Radiotherapy, X-ray, Pathology etc.

(v) General service departments, such as, power, heating, lighting, catering, laundering, medical

records and administration.

(vi) Other service departments, such as, dispensary, transport etc.

Following units are used in hospital costing:

Out-patient department - per out patient

Casualty - per patient

Wards - per patient - bed per day

Radiotherapy - per course of treatment per day or per person.

Laundry - per 100 articles laundered.

For ascertaining cost figures, a hospital operating cost sheet is prepared.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

Illustration 19

The under given data is supplied by Fair deal travel services, From the following information calculate fare

for passenger Km.

The cost of the Bus

`

4,50,000

Insurance charges 3 % p.a.

Annual tax

`

4500

Garage rent

`

500 p.m.

Annual repairs

`

4800

Expected life of the bus 5 yrs

Value of scrap at the end of 5 years

`

30,000

Route distance 20 km long

Driver’s salary

`

550 p.m.

Re-write the following sentence after filling-in the blank spaces with

appropriate word:

(i) Service costing is also known as _________.

(ii) Boiler house costing is an example of _______ costing.

(iii) Room-day is the cost unit used in _______.

(iv) An electricity supply company uses_____ as cost unit.

Correct answer:

(i), (ii) Operating Costing, (iii) Hotel (iv) Kilowatt hour

Lesson 7

Costing System

303

Conductor’s Salary

`

500 p.m.

Commission to Driver & conductor (shared equally) 10 % of the takings

Stationary

`

250 p.m.

Manager-cum-accountant’s Salary

`

1750 p.m.

Diesel and Oil (for 100 kms) 125

The bus will make 3 rounds trips for carrying on the average 40 passenger’s in each trip. Assume 15 % profit

on takings. The bus will work on the average 25 days in a month.

Solution

Operating Cost Statement

Particulars Amount in `

Standing Charges

Depreciation [

`

(4,50,000-30,000)5] 84,000

Tax 4,500

Stationary 3,000

Manager Salary 21,000

Insurance (3% of

`

4,50,000) 13,500 1,26,000

Maintenance Charges

Garage rent @

`

500 P.M 6,000

Annual repair 4,800 10,800

Variable Charges

Driver salary @

`

550 P.M 6,600

Diesel and Oil @

`

125 for 100 kms

(20*3*2*25*125)/100

3.750

Conductors’ Salary @

`

500 per month 6,000 16,350

Total 1,53,150

Commission to Driver and Conductor (10% of undertaking) 20,420

Profits ( 15% of undertakings) 30,630

Total Takings 2,04,200

Total No. of Km run in a Year = 3 x 2 x 20 x 25 X 12 = 36,000 km

Total No. of passenger km per annum: 360,00 x 40 = 14,40,000

Fare for passengers km

14180.0

000,40,14

200,04,2

Km Passenger

Fare Total

`

===

Illustration 20

Union Transport Company supplies the following details in respect of a truck of 5 tonne capacity :

Cost of truck

`

4,50,000

Estimated life 10 years

Diesel, oil, greese

`

150 per trip each way

Repairs and maintenance 5,000 per month

Drivers’ wages 5,000 per month

EP-CMA

304

Cleaners’ wages

2,500 per month

Insurance

4,800 per year

Tax

2,400 per year

General supervision charges

4,800 per year

The truck carries goods to and from the city covering a distance of 50 km. each way.

In outward trip, freight is available to the extent of full capacity and on return 20% of capacity. Assuming that

the truck runs on an average of 25 days a month, work out:

(a) Operating cost per tonne-km.

(b) Rate per tonne per trip that the company should charges if a profit of 50% on freight is to be earned.

Solution:

Working Notes:

1. Tonne-km per month = 6 tonnes x 50 km x 25 days = 7,500 tonne - km. (5 tonnes on outward trip

and one tonne on return trip)

2. It is assumed that the truck makes only one trip per day.

3. The scrap value of the truck is assessed to be nil.

Depreciation =

`

4,50,000/10=

`

45,000

Union Transport Company

Statement showing operation costs

Cost per month

Per tonne Km.

`

Fixed Costs:

Driver’s wages 5,000

Cleaner’s wages 2,500

Insurance 400

Taxes 200

General supervision 400

8,500

1.133

Variable Costs:

Diesel, oil, grease 7,500

Depreciation 3,750

Repairs and maintenance 5,000

16,250

2.167

(a) Operating Costs

24,750

3.300

(b) Freight rate:

Cost per tonne-km 3.30

Profit per tonne-km 3.30

6.60

Freight per trip (both ways)

`

1,980.

Lesson 7

Costing System

305

Illustration 21

20 Hp unit is required to drive a pump for watering an agricultural farm. Two plans A and B for supplying are

under consideration :

A

B

Purchase and installation

`

10,000

`

4,000

Life in years 4

4

Salvage value 1,000

–

Interest on capital 10%

10%

Maintenance per year

`

3,000

–

Maintenance per hour –

0.50

Operating wages per hour

`

0.20

`

0.60

Power per hour

`

1.00

–

Fuel and oil per hour –

2.00

Assuming that 3 million litres of water is to be pumped in a year and that the pump will pump 1,000 litres in

an hour, find out the cost per 1,000 litres of water under both the plans and find out the number of hours for

which the operating costs of both the machines will be even.

Solution:

Operating Cost Statement

30,00,000 litres of water pumped

Plan A

Plan B

`

Depreciation 2,250

1,000

Interest 1,000

400

Maintenance 3,000

1,500

Operating wages 600

1,800

Power 3,000

-

Fuel and oil -

6,000

____

9,850

_____

10,700

Cost per 1,000 litres

`

3.28

`

3.57

Number of hours in a year = 30,00,000/1,000= 3,000

If the number of hours for which the operating costs of both the machines is even, say, x, then

1.20x + 6,250 (Cost under A) = 3.10x + 1,400 (Cost under B)

whereby x = 2,553 hours (approximately).

EP-CMA

306

Thus, the cost of operating the machine under both the place will be even when they have worked for 2,553

hours.

Illustration 22:

The following information is available from an intensive care unit.

Rent (including repairs)

`

10,000 p.m.

The unit cost consists of 25 beds and 5 more beds can be accommodate when the occasion demands. The

permanent staff attached to the unit is as follows:

2 supervisors each at a salary or

`

2000 per month. 4 nurse each at a salary of

`

1500 per month. 2

ward boys each at a salary of

`

1000 per month.

Though the unit was open for the patients all the 365 days in a year, security of accounts of 2012 revealed

that only 150 days in a year the unit had the full capacity of 25 patients per day and for another 80 days it

had on an average 20 beds only occupied per day. But there were occasions when the beds were full, extra

beds were hired from outside at a charge of

`

10 per bed per day . The total hire charges for the whole year

were

`

8,000. The unit engaged expert doctor from outside to attend on the patients and the fees were paid

on the basis of number of patients attended at time spent by them on an average worked out to

`

20,000 per

month in 2013.

The other expenses for the year were as under.

Repairs and maintenance

`

8,000

Food supplied to patients

`

1,00,000

Janitor and other services for patients

`

25,000

Laundry charges for bed linens

`

40,000

Medicines supplied

`

70,000

Cost of oxygen, x ray etc other than directly born

`

90,000

for treatment of patients (Fixed)

General administration charges allocated to the unit

`

1,00,000

(1) If the unit recovered an overall amount of

`

200 per day on an average from each patient what is the

profit per patient day made by the unit in 2013.

(2) The unit wants to work out a budget for 2014, since the number of patients is very uncertain, annuity the

same revenue and expenses prevail in 2014, work out the number of patient days required break-even.

Solution:

Total Number of patients in Year 2013

Patients at Full /below capacity

150 days at full capacity of 25 = 3,750

80 days at average occupancy of 20 = 1600

Lesson 7

Costing System

307

Extra bed utilized at peak demand

Total money spent on extra beds =

`

8,000

Hiring charges of one bed =

`

10 per bed per day

Extra bed utilized = (

`

8,000/10)

= 800

Total number of Patients handled = 3,750+1,600+800

= 6,150

Statement of Cost and Profit

Particulars Amount in ` Total in `

A. Income Received (6,150 x 200)

12,30,000

B. Variable Cost

Food supplied to patients 1,00,000

Janitor and other services for patients 25,000

Laundry charges for bed linens 40,000

Medicines supplied 70,000

Doctor fee @

`

20,000 per month 2,40,000

Hire charges for extra bed 8,000 4,83,000

Contribution 7,47,000

C. Fixed Cost

Salaries for 2 supervisors @

`

2,000 per month for 12 months 48,000

Salaries for 4 nurses @

`

1500 per month for 12 months 72,000

Salaries of 2 ward boys @

`

1,000 per month for 12 months 24,000

Rent @

`

10,000 per month for 12 months 1,20,000

General Administration Charges 1,00,000

Cost of Oxygen, X rays 90,000

Repair and Maintenance 8,000 4,62,000

Profit

2,85,000

A- Profit = 2,85,000

Profit per patient day =

34.46

150,6

000,85,2

`

=

B- Break even in

`

= Fixed Cost /PV Ratio

PV ratio = (Sales-Variable cost)/Sales

= (

`

12,30,000 –

`

4,83,000)/

`

12,30,000

= 0.6073

BEP = (

`

4,62,000/0.6073)

=

`

7,60,744

No of patients for break even =

`

7,60,744/

`

200

= 3804

EP-CMA

308

Illustration 23

A public health centre runs an Medical Care Unit. For this purpose, it has hired a building at a rent of

`

50,000 per month with the understanding that it would bear the repairs and maintenance charges also.

The Unit consists of 25 beds and 5 more beds can be comfortably accommodated when the occasion

demands. The permanent staff attached to the unit are as follows:

1. Supervisor each at a salary of

`

2,000 p.m.

2. Nurses each at a salary of

`

1,200 p.m.

3. Ward boys, each at a salary of

`

300 p.m.

Though, the unit is open for patients all the 365 days in a year scrutiny of accounts in 2013-14 reveals that

only for 120 days in the year, the unit bed the full capacity of 25 patients per day and for another 80 days, it

had on an average 20 beds occupied per day. But there were occasion when the beds were full, extra beds

were hired at a charge of

`

50 per day and this did not come to more than 5 beds extra above the normal

capacity on any one day. The total hire charges for extra beds incurred for the whole year accounted to

`

20,000.

The unit engaged expert doctors from outside to attend the patients and the fees were paid on the basis of

the number of patients attended and time spent by them which on an average worked out to

`

50,000 per

month in 2013-14.

The other expenses for the year as under:

`

Repairs and maintenance 25,000

Food supplied to patients 88,000

Janitor and other service for patients 25,000

Laundry charges for bed linen 56,000

Medicines supplied 70,000

Cost of Oxygen, X-ray etc. other than

directly borne for treatment of patients 2,08,000

General administrative charges allocated to the unit 98,000

(i) If the unit recovered an overall amount of

`

500 per day on an average from each patient, what is

the profit per patient day made by the unit in 2013-14?

(ii) The unit wants to work on a budget for 2014-15 but the number of patients requiring intensive

medical care is a very uncertain factor. Assuming that the same revenue and expenses prevail in

2014-15, work out the number of patient days required by the unit to break-even.

Solution:

Number of Patient days in 2013-14:

25 beds x 120 days 3,000

20 beds x 80 days 1,600

Extra bed days 400

5,000 Patient days

(Total hire charges of extra beds/charges per bed per day =

`

20,000/

`

50).

Lesson 7

Costing System

309

We have presumed in the solution that the cost of janitor and other services are variable as they are related

to number of patient days. Cost of oxygen, X-ray has been taken as a fixed cost since it has been stated that

this cost is other than costs directly borne for treatment of patients.

Statement of Cost and Profit

`

Income received (

`

500 x 5000 patient days)

25,00,000

Variable costs:

Food 88,000

Janitor services 25,000

Laundry 56,000

Medicines 70,000

Doctors’ fee (50,000 x 12) 6,00,000

Hire charges for extra beds 20,000

8,59,000

Contribution

16,41,000

Fixed Costs:

Salaries (1 x 2,000 + 2 x 1,200 + 2 x 300) x 12 60,000

Rent (50,000 x 12) 6,00,000

Repairs and maintenance 25,000

General administration 98,000

Cost of Oxygen, X-ray etc. 2,08,000

9,91,000

Profit

6,50,000

Profit per patient day =

`

6,50,000/5,000 =

`

130

Break-even Point =

Income Gross

onContributiTotal

CostFixedTotal

×

=

25,00,000

000,41,16

000,91,9

`

×

= `

15,09,750

=

5000

750,09,15

`

= 3,020 Patient day

Illustration 24

Following are the information given by an owner of a hotel. You are requested to advice him that what rent

should be charge from his customers per day so that he is able to earn 25 % on cost other than interest.

(1) Staff salaries

`

80,000 per annum

(2) Room attendant’s salary

`

2 per day. The salary is paid on daily basis and services of room

attendant are needed only when the room is occupied. There is one room attendant for one room.

EP-CMA

310

(3) Lighting, heating and power. The normal lighting expenses for a room if it is occupied for the

whole month is

`

50. Power is used only in winter and normal charge per month if occupied for a

room is

`

20.

(4) Repairs to building

`

10,000 per annum

(5) Linen etc.

`

4,800 per annum

(6) Sundries

`

6,600 per annum

(7) Interior decoration and furnishing

`

10,000 annually

(8) Cost of building

`

4,00,000; rate of depreciation 5 %

(9) Other equipments

`

1,00,000; rate of depreciation 10 %

(10) Interest @ 5% may be charged on its investment of

`

5,00,000 in the building and equipment .

(11) There are 100 rooms in the hotel and 80 % of the rooms are normally occupied in summer and 30

% of the rooms are busy in winter. You may assume that period of summer and winter is six month

each. Normal days in a month may be assumed to be 30.

Solution

Operating Cost Statement

Particulars Amount in

`

Total in

`

Staff Salaries 80,000

Room attendant Salaries ( See working Note) 39,600

Lighting, heating and power( See working Note) 36,600

Repairs to building 10,000

Linen etc. 4,800

Sundries 6,600

Interior decoration and furnishing 10,000

Depreciation 30,000

Interest on investment (5% on

`

5,00,000) 25,000

2,42,600

Add : 25 % profit on cost other than interest (See Working Note)

54,400

Total Cost

2,97,000

Room attendant Salaries

For summers - 100×80%×30×6×2 =

`

28,800

For winter - 100×30%×6×30×2 =

`

10,800

Total =

`

39,600

Lighting, heating and power

Summer - 50×6×100×80% =

`

24,000

Lesson 7

Costing System

311

Winter - 50×6×100×30% =

`

9,000

Power - 20×6×100×30% =

`

3,600

Total =

`

36,600

Depreciation

Building -

`

20,000

Other equipments -

`

10,000

Total -

`

30,000

Profit -

`

(2, 42,600-25,000)*0.25=

`

54,400

No of Room Days

No. of Rooms x Percentage x days in a month x no. of months

Summer: 100 x 80% x 30 x 6 = 14,400

Winter: 100 x 30% x 30 x 6 = 5,400

Total room days = 19,800

Calculation of Room rent per days

Rent per room for one day = Total Cost ÷ No. of room days

= 2, 97,000 ÷ 19,800

=

`

15 per day

Illustration 25

An Iron and Steel Works which generates its own power for the purpose of using the same for running the

factory gives the following information:

(a) Coal-consumed 500 quintals @

`

24 per quintal.

Oil-15 quintals @

`

1,000 per quintal.

Water - 1,00,000 litres @

`

2.00 per 1,000 lts.

Cost of steam boiler

`

60,000, which has a residual value of

`

12,000 and a life of 10 years.

(b) Salaries and wages for generating plant :

3 skilled workers @

`

1,000 p.m.

3 unskilled workers @

`

500 p.m.

(c) Generating plant cost

`

1,50,000, Depreciation @ 10%.

(d) Share of administrative charges 2,050 per month

(e) Salaries and wages for the Boiler House:

EP-CMA

312

5 men @

`

600 p.m.

4 women @

`

600 p.m.

(f) Repairs and maintenance of steam boiler and generating plant

`

1,000 p.m.

(g) No. of units generated 2,00,000

(h) Sale of ash

`

300.

(i) 1/10 of units generated were used by Generating Department itself.

Calculate cost per unit of electricity generated.

Solution:

Cost Sheet of Generating Electricity

` per month

Coal used 500 quintals @

`

24 per quintal 12,000

Oil 15 quintals @

`

1,000 per quintal 15,000

Water 1,00,000 Lts. @

`

2.0 per 1,000 Lts. 200

27,200

Depreciation of steam boiler

27,200

=

×

−

1210

000,12000,60

400

27,600

Less:

Sale of Ash

300

Salaries and wages for boiler house

27,300

5 men @

`

600 p.m. 3,000

4 women @

`

600 p.m. 2,400

5,400

Salaries and wages for generating plant

3 skilled workers @

`

1,000 p.m. 3,000

3 unskilled workers @

`

500 p.m. 1,500

4,500

Repairs and maintenance

1,000

Depreciation on generating plant

=

×

12100

10000,00,5,1

1,250

Share of administrative charges

1,050

40,500

Add:

Cost of electricity used in generation

4,500*

Consumed by Iron and Steel Works = 180,000 units

45,000

Cost per unit

25 paise

Lesson 7

Costing System

313

Working Notes:

*Calculation of Cost of Electricity used in Generation.

Let A be cost of Electricity used and B the total cost of Generation:

∴ B

( )

A500,40

10

1

500,40 ++=

A

Bof

10

1

=

A













++= )A500,40(

10

1

500,40

10

1

100A = 4,05,000 + 40,500 + A

99A = 4,45,500

A =

99

000,45,4

=

`

4,500

LESSON ROUND-UP

•

Unit costing refers to the costing procedure, which is ideally used in case of concerns producing a single article

on large scale by continuous manufacture. The cost units are identical with identical costs. The cost incurred

during a period is divided by the total output for ascertaining the cost per unit.

•

Cost sheet is a document which provides for the assembly of the detailed cost of a cost centre or cost unit.

•

Production account is an account giving details of cost of production, cost of sales and profit made during a

particular period.

•

Job costing ascertains the cost of a job that is produced as per the requirements of the customers.

•

Job costing is a costing system which considers job a cost unit. A job is a cost unit which consists of a single

order or contract.

•

Batch costing system is used when production is in batches.

•

A batch is a cost unit which consists of a separate, readily identifiable group of product units which maintains its

separate identity throughout the production process.

•

Contract costing is that form of specific order costing which applies where work is undertaken as per customers’

special requirements and each order is of long duration.

•

Escalation clause is a provision in the contract for adjustment of prices quoted and accepted , in the event of

specified contingencies.

•

Cost plus contract is a contract where the contractee agrees to pay to the contractor the cost price for the work

done on the contract plus an agreed percentage thereof by way of overhead cost and profit.

•

Work certified is the work approved by the contractee or his nominee on a specific date.

•

Work which has not been so far approved by the contractee or his nominee is known as work uncertified.

EP-CMA

314

•

Process costing method is applicable where the output results from a sequence of continuous or repetitive

operations or processes and products are identical and cannot be segregated.

•

Process costing enables the ascertainment of cost of the product at each process or stage of manufacture.

•

The input will pass through two or more processes before it takes the shape of the output. The output of each

process becomes the input for the next process until the final product is obtained, with the last process giving

the final product.

•

Contract costing is “A form of specific order costing; attribution of costs to individual contracts”.

•

"Contract Costing such jobs take a long time to complete & may spread over two or more of the contractor's

accounting years”.

•

Service Costing is a Method Costing applied to undertaking which provides service rather than production of

commodities.

SELF-TEST QUESTIONS

1. Describe the different components of total cost.

2. Draw up a job cost-sheet for a simple product, to find out the cost of a product.

3. What is cost sheet? In what respect it differs from production account?

4. What is Job Costing?

5. Discuss the nature of contract costing and explain how costs are recorded in contracts.

6. Discuss briefly the principles to be followed while taking credit for profit on incomplete contracts.

7. Explain the terms: (a) escalation clause and (b) cost plus contract.

8. What is operating or service cost? State the industries where is it to be used.

9. State the salient features of service costing?

10. What is meant by process costing? State the industries where is it to be used.

11. Distinguish between ‘ Job Costing’ and ‘Process Costing’ & ‘Job Costing’ and ‘Contract Costing’.

12. Explain normal wastage, abnormal wastage and abnormal gain and state the accounting treatment

of the same.

13. The cost of sales of product A is made up as follows :

`

Materials used in manufacturing 5,500

Materials used in packing materials 1,000

Materials used in selling the product 150

Materials used in the factory 75

Materials used in office 125

Labour required in production 1,000

Labour required for supervision of the management of factory 200

Expenses - direct, factory 500

Expenses - indirect, factory 100

Expenses - office 125

Depreciation - office building and equipment 75

Depreciation - factory 175

Selling expenses 350

Lesson 7

Costing System

315

Freight 500

Advertising 125

Assuming that all the products manufactured are sold, what should be the selling price to obtain a

profit of 25% on selling price ?

Illustrate in a chart form for presentation to your manager, the division of costs for Product ‘A’.

14. From the following particulars of a manufacturing firm, prepare a statement showing: (a) Cost of

Materials Used, (b) Prime Cost, (c) Works Cost, (d) Cost of Production, (e) Cost of Sales, and (f)

Profit Earned.

`

Stocks of materials on 1st January, 2014 40,000

Purchase of materials in January, 2014 11,00,000

Stock of Finished goods on 1st January, 2014 50,000

Stock of work-in-progress on 1st January, 2014 35,000

Productive wages 5,00,000

Works overhead charges 1,50,000

Office and administration overheads 90,000

Selling and distribution overheads 60,000

Stock of materials on 31st January, 2014 1,40,000

Stock of finished goods on 31st January, 2014 60,000

Stock of work-in-progress on 31st January, 2014 25,000

Finished Goods sold in January, 2014 22,50,000

15. In a factory, two types of radios are manufactured viz. Orient and Sujan Models. From the following

particulars, prepare a statement showing cost and profit per radio sold. There is no opening or

closing stock.

Orient Sujan

`

Direct materials 27,300 1,08,680

Direct labour 15,600 62,920

Works overhead is charged @ 80% on labour and office overhead is taken at 15% on works cost.

The selling price of both the radios is

`

1,000 each. 78 Orient radios and 286 Sujan radios were sold.

16. A firm of building contractors began to trade on 1st January, 2012. During the year, the company

was engaged on only one contract. The contract price was

`

50,00,000.

Of the plant and materials charged to the contract, the plant which cost

`

50,000 and materials which

cost

`

40,000 were lost in an accident.

On December 31, 2013, the plant which cost

`

50,000 was returned to the stores the cost of work

done but uncertified was

`

20,000 and the materials costing

`

40,000 were in hand on site.

Charge 10% depreciation of the plant, carry forward by way of reserve one-third of the profit

received and compile the Contract Account and the Balance Sheet from the following Trial Balance

on December 31, 2013.

`

Share capital 12,00,000

Creditors 1,00,000

Cash received on contract (80% of work certified) 20,00,000

EP-CMA

316

Land, buildings, etc. 4,30,000

Bank balance 2,50,000

Charged to contract

Materials 9,00,000

Plant 2,50,000

Wages 14,00,000

Expenses 70,000 ________

33,00,000 33,00,000

(Ans.: P & L A/c

`

1,12,000, Balance sheet total

`

13,22,000)

17. Mr. Sudhir owns a fleet of taxies and the following information is available from the records

maintained by him.

(i) Number of Taxis 10

(ii) Cost of each Taxi

`

2,00,000

(iii) Salary of manager

`

6000 p.m.

(iv) Salary of Accountant

`

5000 p.m.

(v) Salary of cleaner

`

3000 p.m.

(vi) Salary of Mechanic

`

4000 p.m.

(vii) Garage Rent

`

7000 p.m.

(viii) Insurance premium 5%

(ix) Annual Tax

`

6000 per taxi

(x) Drivers Salary

`

4000 p.m.

(xi) Annual Repairs

`

15,000 per taxi

Total life of a taxi is about 2,00,000 kms. A taxi runs in all 3000 kms. in a month of which 25% its

runs empty. Petrol consumption is one liter for 10 kms @

`

40 per liter. Oil and other sundries are

`

10 per 100 kms. Calculate the cost of running a taxi per km.

18. Radisson Hotel has a capacity of 100 single rooms and 20 double rooms. It has a sports centre with

a swimming pool which is also used by persons other than residents of the hotel. The hotel has a

shopping arcade at the basement and a specialty restaurant at the roof top. The following

information is available:

(1) Average occupancy: 75% for 365 days of the year

(2) Current costs are:

Variable cost Fixed cost

Single room 400 200

Double room 500 250

(3) Average sales per day of restaurant

`

1, 00,000; contribution is at 30 %. Fixed cost

`

10, 00,000

per annum.

(4) The sports centre / swimming pool is likely to be used by 50 non-residents daily; average

contribution per day per nonresident is estimated at

`

50; fixed cost is

`

5,00,000 per annum.

(5) Average contribution per month from the shopping arcade is

`

50,000; fixed cost is

`

6,00,000

per annum.

Lesson 7

Costing System

31

7

You are required to find out:

(a) Rent chargeable for single and double room per day, so that there is a margin of safety of 20%

on hire of rooms and that the rent for a double room should be kept at 120% of a single room.

(b) Evaluate the profitability of restaurant, sports centre and shopping arcade separately.

19. The following data are available from the Cost Ledger of Acme Industries for the year 2013:

Plant Maintenance

`

25,000

Lighting 6,300

Depreciation on Plant 8,100

Rates ad Taxes for the Works 3,900

Staff Salaries 32,000

Management Salaries 22,000

Power (for this Plant) 10,600

Rental for Leasehold Equipments 9,600

Indirect Wages 37,100

Rectification Cost of Defectives (Normal) 8,400

Consumable Stores 17,600

Selling Expenses 30,000

General Charges 15,600

Sale Proceeds from Scrap 4,200

During the year total production was 120,000 units. The break-up of prime cost per unit was:

Materials

`

2.20 and Wages

`

1.80. The average selling price was

`

6.75 per unit and entire quantity

produced during produced during the year was sold out.

With effect from January 1, 2014, the selling price was reduced to

`

6.40 per unit. It was envisaged

that production could be enhanced during 2014 by 331/3 per cent without incurring any overtime or

extra-shift work, or additional selling expenses.

You are required to prepare statement showing:

(i) Actual cost and profit for the year 2013

(ii) Estimated cost ad profit for 2014 assuming that the entire production will be sold during the year

Assumption, if any, required to be made in the above exercise should be clearly stated.

(Ans. Sales –

`

8,10,000; per unit

`

6.75; Estimate

`

10,24,000)

20. Usha Engineering Works Ltd. manufactured and sold 1,000 sewing machines in 2013. Following are

the particulars obtained from the records of the company.

Cost of materials

`

80,000

Wages paid 1,20,000

Manufacturing expenses 50,000

Salaries of managerial staff 60,000

Rent, rates and insurance 10,000

Selling expenses 30,000

General expenses 20,000

Sales 4,00,000

EP-CMA

318

The company plans to manufacture 1,200 sewing machines in 2014. You are required to submit a

statement showing the price at which machines would be sold so as to show a profit of 10% on the

selling price. The following additional information is supplied to you:

(a) The price of materials will rise by 20 per cent on the previous year’s level.

(b) Wages rates will rise by 5 per cent

(c) Manufacturing expenses per unit will rise in proportion to the combined cost of material and

wages.

(d) Selling expenses per unit will remain uncharged.

(e) Other expenses will remain unaffected by the rise in output.

(Ans. Per unit

`

425;

`

5,10,000)

21. A company makes two distinct types of vehicles, A and B. The total expenses during a period as

shown by the books for the assembly of 600 of the type A an d 800 of the type B vehicles are as

under :

Materials

`

1,98,000

Direct wages 12,000

Stores 19,800

Running expenses of machine 4,400

Depreciation 2,200

Labour amenities 1,500

Works general overhead 30,000

Administration ad selling overhead 26,800

The other data available to you is:

A: B

Material cost ratio per unit 1: 2

Direct labour ratio per unit 2: 3

Machine utilisation ratio per unit 1: 2

Calculate the cost of each vehicle per unit giving reasons for the bases of apportionment adopted

by you. (Ans. Cost per unit A-

`

138.78; B-

`

264.28)

22. Jolly Shoes Co. manufactures two types of shoes A and B. Production costs for the year ended 31

March, 2014 were:

Direct materials

`

15,00,000

Direct wages 8,40,000

Production overhead 3,60,000

Total 27,00,000

There was no work in progress at the beginning or at the end of the year.

It is ascertained that :

(a) Direct material in type A shoe consists twice as much as that in type B shoes. (b) The direct

wages for type B shoes were 60% of those of type A shoes (c) Production overhead was the same

per pair of A and B type, (d) Administrative overhead for each type was 150% of direct wages (e)

Selling cost was

`

1.50 per pair (f) Production during the year were : Type A 40,000 pairs of which

36,000 were sold; Type B 1,20,000 pairs of which 1,00,000 were sold (g) Selling price was

`

44 for

type A and

`

28 for type B per pair. Prepare a statement showing cost and profit.

(Ans. Per Unit A –

`

44; B -

`

28)

Lesson 7

Costing System

319

23. In respect of a factory the following particulars have been extracted for the year 2013:

Cost of materials

`

6,00,000

Wages 5,00,000

Factory overheads 3,00,000

Administration charges 3,36,000

Selling charges 2,24,000

Distribution charges 1,40,000

Profit 4,20,000

A work order has to be executed in 2014 and the estimated expenses are :

Materials

`

8,000, wages

`

5,000

Assuming that in 2014 the rate of factory overheads has gone up by 20%, distribution charges have

gone down by 10% and selling and administration charges have gone each up by 15% at what price

should the product be sold so as to earn the same rate of profit on the selling price as in 2013?

Factory overheads are based on wages and administration, selling and distribution overheads on

factory cost.(Ans. Total Sales

`

25,20,000; Estimate

`

30,875)

24. Metal Products Company produces a sewing machine that sells for

`

300. An increase of 15% in

cost of materials and of 10% in cost of labour is anticipated. If the only figures available are those

given below, what must be the selling price to give the same percentage of gross profit as before?

(a) Material costs have been 45% of cost of sales (b) Labour costs have been 40% of cost of sales

(c) Overhead costs have been 15% of cost of sales (d) The anticipated increased costs in relation to

the present sales price would cause 35% decrease in the present gross profit. (Ans. Estimate

`

332.25)

25. The following particulars relating to the year 2013 have been taken from the books of a chemical

works manufacturing and selling a chemical mixture

Stock on 1 January 2013 Kg.

`

Raw materials 2,000 2,000

Finished mixture 500 1,750

Factory stores - 7,250

Purchases:

Raw materials 1,60,000 1,80,000

Factory stores 24,250

Sales:

Finished mixture 1,53,050 9,18,000

Factory scrap 8,170

Factory wages 1,78,650

Power 30,400

Depreciation of machinery 18,000

Salaries:

Factory 72,220

Office 37,220

Selling 41,500

EP-CMA

320

Expenses:

Direct 18,500

Office 18,200

Selling 18,000

Stock on 31 December, 2013:

Raw materials 1,200 -

Finished mixture 450 -

Factory stores - 5,550

The stock of finished mixture at the end of 2013 is to be valued at the factory cost of the mixture for

that year. The purchase price of raw materials remained unchanged throughout 2013. Prepare a

Production Statement. (Ans. Estimate

`

9,18,000)

26. M.K Works can produce 60,000 units per annum t its optimum (100%) capacity. The estimated

costs of production are as under:

Direct material

`

3 per unit

Direct labour

`

2 per unit

Indirect expenses:

Fixed

`

1,50,000 per annum

Variable

`

5 per unit

Semi variable

`

50,000 p.a. upto 50% capacity and an extra expenses of

`

10,000 for every 25%

increase in capacity on part thereof .

The factory produced only against orders an not for own stock. If the production programme of the

factory is as indicated below, and the management desires to ensure a profit of

`

1,00,000 for the

year, work out the average selling price at which each unit should be quoted.

First 3 months of the year 50% of capacity

Remaining 9 months 80% of capacity

Ignore selling, distribution and administration overheads.(Ans.Per unit

`

17.24; Total Sales

`

7,50,000)

The full cost theory is based upon assumptions which are far more typical of reality than those based in marginal

costing. – R. Hall and C. Hitch, in Managerial Cost Accounting

Lesson 8

Marginal Costing

•

Introduction

•

Features of marginal costing

•

Advantages of marginal costing

•

Limitations of marginal costing

•

Break-even analysis/cost-volume profit

analysis & its objectives, advantages,

limitations

•

Uses of cost-volume-profit analysis

•

Contribution

•

Marginal cost equation

•

Profit-volume ratio & its significance

•

Margin of safety

•

Methods for determining break even

points:

– Algebraic methods

– Graphic presentation

•

Applications of marginal costing

•

Composite Break Even Point

•

Absorption costing, system of profit

reporting and stock valuation

•

Difference between marginal costing and

absorption costing

•

Income measurement under marginal

costing and absorption costing

•

Pricing decision

•

Lesson Round Up

•

Self-Test Question

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

Marginal costing is not a distinct method of

ascertainment of cost but is a technique which

applies existing methods in a particular manner so

that the relationship between profit & the volume of

output can be clearly brought out. It is an accounting

system where only variable cost or direct cost will be

charged to the cost units. It concentrates on the

controllable aspects of business by separating fixed

and variable costs. Explains to answer various

operating decisions, such as what level of sales is

required to break even, how many units of a product

is to be sold in order to earn a target level of

operating profit etc.

After reading this study one should be able to

understand:

1. Concepts of marginal costing and absorption

costing.

2. Difference between absorption and marginal

costing, advantages, limitations of marginal

costing.

3. How to use break-even analysis for decision

making.

4. Income statement under absorption costing

and marginal costing.

5. Practical applications of marginal costing in

fixation of selling price, Key or limiting factor,

make or buy decisions, selection of a suitable

product mix, effect of change in price, closing

down or suspending activities, maintaining a

desired level of profit.

LESSON

OUTLINE

EP-CMA

322

MARGINAL COSTING

Marginal costing, as one of the tools of management accounting helps management in making certain

decisions. It provides management with information regarding the behavior of costs and the incidence of

such costs on the profitability of an undertaking. Marginal costing is defined as “the ascertainment of

marginal costs and of the effect on profit of changes in volume or type of output by differentiating between

fixed costs and variable costs”. Marginal costing is not a separate costing. It is only a technique used by

accountants to aid management decision. It is also called as “Direct Costing” in U.S.A. This technique of

costing is also known as “Variable Costing”, “Differential Costing” or “Out-of-pocket” costing.

Marginal cost is the cost of one unit of product or service which would be avoided if that unit were not

produced or provided.

According to CIMA Terminology Marginal Costing is the ascertainment of marginal costs and of the effect

on profit of changes in volume or type of output by differentiating between fixed costs and variable costs in

this technique of costing only variable costs are charged to operations, processes or products leaving all

indirect costs to be written off against profits in the period in which they arise.

Thus marginal costing is the accounting system in which variable costs are charged to cost units and fixed

costs of the period are written-off in full against the aggregate contribution. Its special value is in decision-

making. It is a technique of applying the existing methods in a particular manner in order to bring out the

relationship between profit and volume of output.

FEATURES OF MARGINAL COSTING

(a) Costs are separated into the fixed and variable elements and semi-variable costs are also

differentiated like wise.

(b) Only the variable costs are taken into account for computing the value of stocks of work-in-progress

and finished products.

(c) Fixed costs are charged off to revenue wholly during the period in which they are incurred and are

not taken into account for valuing product cost/inventories.

(d) Prices may be based on marginal costs and contribution but in normal circumstances prices would

cover costs in total.

(e) It combines the techniques of cost recording and cost reporting.

(f) Profitability of departments or products is determined in terms of marginal contribution.

(g) The unit cost of a product means the average variable cost of manufacturing the product.

ADVANTAGES OF MARGINAL COSTING

(1) Cost-volume-profit relationship data wanted for profit planning purposes is readily obtained from the

regular accounting statements. Hence management does not have to work with two separate sets

of data to relate one to the other.

(2) The profit for a period is not affected by changes in absorption of fixed expenses resulting from

building or reducing inventory. Other things remaining equal (e.g. selling prices, costs, sales mix),

profits move in the same direction as sales when direct costing is in use.

(3) Manufacturing cost and income statements in the direct cost form follow management’s thinking

Lesson 8 Marginal Costing

323

more closely than does the absorption cost form for these statements. For this reason, management

finds it easier to understand and use direct cost reports.

(4) The impact of fixed costs on profits is emphasised because the total amount of such cost for the

period appears in the income statement.

(5) Marginal income figures facilitate relative appraisal of products, territories, classes of customers,

and other segments of the business without having the results obscured by allocation of joint fixed

costs.

(6) Marginal costing lies in with such effective plans for cost control as standard costs and flexible

budgets.

(7) Marginal costing furnishes a better and more logical basis for the fixation of sales prices as well as

tendering for contracts when business is at low ebb.

(8) Break-even point can be determined only on the basis of marginal costing.

LIMITATIONS OF MARGINAL COSTING

Marginal costing technique has the following limitations:

(1) In marginal costing, costs are classified into fixed and variable. Segregation of costs into fixed and

variable is rather difficult and cannot be done with precision.

(2) Marginal costing assumes that the behaviour of costs can be represented in straight line. This

means that fixed costs remains completely fixed over a period at different levels and variable costs

change in linear pattern i.e. the change is proportion to the change in volume. In real life, fixed costs

are liable to change at varying levels of production especially when extra plant and equipments are

introduced and hence variable costs may not vary in the same proportion as the volume.

(3) Under marginal costing technique fixed costs are not included in the value of stock of finished goods

and work-in-progress. As fixed costs are incurred, these should also form part of the costs of the

product. Due to this elimination of fixed costs from finished stock and work-in-progress, the stocks

are understated. This affects the results of profit and loss account and the balance sheet. Thus,

profit may be unnecessarily deflated.

(4) In the marginal costing system monthly operating statements will not be as realistic or useful as

under the absorption costing system. This is because under this system, marginal contribution and

profits vary with change in sales value. Where sales are occasional, profits fluctuate from period to

period.

(5) Marginal costing fails to give complete information, for example rise in production and sales may be

due to extensive use of existing machinery or by expansion of the resources or by replacement of

the labour force by machines. The marginal contribution of P/V ratio fails to bring out reasons for

this.

(6) Under marginal costing system the difficulties involved in the apportionment and computation of

under and over absorption of fixed overheads are done away with but problem still remains as far as

the under absorption or over absorption of variable overheads is concerned.

(7) Although for short term assessment of profitability marginal costs may be useful, long-term profit is

correctly determined on full costs basis only.

(8) Marginal costing does not provide any standard for the evaluation of the performance. Marginal

contribution data do not reveal many effects which are furnished by variance analysis. For example,

EP-CMA

324

efficiency variance reflects the efficient and inefficient use of plant, machinery and labour and this

sort of valuation is lacking in the marginal cost analysis.

(9) Marginal costing analysis assumes that sales price per unit will remain the same on different levels

of production but these may change in real life and give unrealistic results.

(10) In the age of increased automation and technology advancement, impact of fixed costs on product

is much more than that of variable costs. As a result a system that does not account the fixed costs

is less effective because a substantial portion of the cost is not taken into account.

(11) Selling price under the marginal costing technique is fixed on the basis of contribution. This may not

be possible in the case of ‘cost plus contracts’.

Thus the above limitations indicate that fixed costs are equally important in certain cases.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

BREAK-EVEN ANALYSIS/COST-VOLUME PROFIT ANALYSIS

A fundamental of accounting is that all revenues and costs must be accounted for and the difference

between the revenues and costs is the profit, or loss, of the business. Costs can be classified as either a

fixed cost or a variable cost.

A fixed cost is one that is independent of the level of sales; rather, it is related to the passage of time.

Examples of fixed costs include rent, salaries and insurance.

A variable cost is one that is directly related to the level of sales, such as cost of goods sold and

commissions.

This categorisation of costs into “variable” and “fixed” elements and their relationship with sales and profits

has been developed as “break-even analysis”. This break even analysis is also known as Cost–volume–

profit (CVP) analysis.

Cost–volume–profit (CVP) analysis is defined in CIMA’s Official Terminology as

‘the study of the effects on future profit of changes in fixed cost, variable cost, sales price, quantity

and mix’.

In break even analysis or CVP analysis an activity level is determined at which all relevant cost are

recovered and there is a situation of no profit or no loss. This activity level is called breakeven point.

The break-even point in any business is that point at which the volume of sales or revenues exactly equals

total expenses or the point at which there is neither a profit nor loss under varying levels of activity. The

break-even point tells the manager what level of output or activity is required before the firm can make a

Fill in the blanks:

1. Marginal Costing is also known as____________.

2. ___________ is a variable cost of one unit of a product or a service i.e. a

cost which would be avoided if that unit was not produced.

Correct answer: 1. Variable Costing/Differential Costing/ Out of Pocket

Costing 2. Marginal Cost

Lesson 8 Marginal Costing

325

profit; reflects the relationship between costs, volume and profits. In another words breakeven point is the

level of sales or production at which the total costs and total revenue of a business are equal.

At Break-even point or level, the sales revenues are just equal to the costs incurred. Below Breakeven point

level the firm will make losses, while above this level it will be making profits. This is so because that while

the variable costs vary according to the variations in the volume or level of activity while the fixed costs do

not change.

Below the breakeven point, fixed costs will eat up all excess of sales over variable cost and yet be

unsatisfied, leaving a loss. Above the BEP, excess of sales over variable costs (this excess is known as

contribution) is much more than the fixed costs of the activities and, it, thus leads to profits. Thus in Break

Even analysis or Cost Volume Profit Analysis, it is possible to analyse the effect of changes in volume, prices

and variable costs on the profits of an organization, while taking fixed costs as unchangeable.

The cost-volume-profit (CVP) analysis helps management in finding out the relationship of costs and

revenues to profit. The aim of an undertaking is to earn profit. Profit depends upon a large number of factors,

the most important of which are the cost of manufacture and the volume of sales effected. Both these factors

are interdependent-volume of sales depends upon the volume production, which in turn is related to costs.

Cost, again, is the resultant of the operation of a number of varying factors. Such factors affecting cost are:

(i) Volume of production;

(ii) Product-mix;

(iii) Internal efficiency;

(iv) Methods of production; and

(v) Size of plant; etc.

Analysis of cost-volume-profit involves consideration of the interplay of the following factors:

(i) Volume of sales;

(ii) Selling price;

(iii) Product mix of sales;

(iv) Variable costs per unit; and

(v) Total fixed costs.

The relationship between two or more of these factors may be (i) present in the form of reports and

statements, (ii) shown in charts or graphs, or (iii) established in the form of mathematical deductions.

OBJECTIVES OF BREAK EVEN ANAYSIS/COST-VOLUME-PROFIT ANALYSIS

The objectives of cost-volume profit analysis are given below:

(1) In order to forecast profit accurately, it is essential to know the relationship between profits and

costs on the one hand and volume on the other.

(2) Cost-volume-profit analysis is useful in setting up flexible budgets which indicate costs at various

levels of activity.

(3) Cost-volume-profit analysis is of assistance in performance evaluation for the purposes of control.

For reviewing profits achieved and cost incurred the effects on costs of changes in volume are

required to be evaluated.

EP-CMA

326

(4) Pricing plays an important part in stabilizing and fixing up volume. Analysis of cost-volume-profit

relationship may assist in formulating price policies to suit particular circumstances by projecting the

effect which different price structures have on costs and profits.

(5) As predetermined overhead rates are related to a selected volume of production, study of cost-

volume relationship is necessary in order to know the amount of overhead costs which could be

charged to product costs at various level of operation.

ADVANTAGES OF BREAK-EVEN ANALYSIS

(i) It provides detailed and clearly understandable information. The chart visualises the information

very clearly and a glance at the chart gives a vivid picture of the whole affairs. The information is

presented in a simple form and therefore, is clearly understandable even to a layman.

(ii) The profitability of different products can be known with the help of break-even charts, besides the

level of no-profit no-loss. The problem of managerial decision regarding temporary or permanent

shutdown of business or continuation at a loss can be solved by break-even analysis.

(iii) The effect of changes in fixed and variable costs at different levels of production or profits can be

demonstrated by the graph legibly.

(iv) The break-even chart shows the relative importance of fixed cost in the total cost of a product. If the

costs are high, it induces management to take measures to control such costs.

(v) The economies of scale, capacity utilisation, comparative plant efficiencies can be analysed through

the break-even chart. The operational efficiency of a plant is indicated by the angle of incidence

formed at the intersection of the total cost line and sales line.

(vi) Break-even analysis is very helpful for forecasting, long-term planning, growth and stability.

LIMITATIONS OF BREAK-EVEN ANALYSIS

Though break-even analysis has gradually become service tool for modern financial management, there are

certain objections raised against the utility of break-even analysis:

(i) Fixed costs do not always remain constant.

(ii) Variable costs do not always vary proportionately.

(iii) Sales revenue does not always change proportionately.

(iv) The horizontal axis cannot measure the units sold in as much as many unlike type of products are

sold by the same enterprise.

(v) Break-even analysis is of doubtful validity when the business is selling many products with different

profit margins.

(vi) Break-even analysis is based on the assumption that income is influenced by changes in sales so

that changes in inventory would not directly affect income. If marginal costing is used, this

assumption would hold good but in other cases, changes in inventory will affect income because the

absorption of fixed costs will depend on production rather than sales.

(vii) Condition of growth or expansion in an organisation are not assumed under break-even analysis. In

actual life of any business organisation, the operation undergoes a continuous process of growth

and expansion.

(viii) Only a limited amount of information can be presented in a single break-even chart. If we have to

Lesson 8 Marginal Costing

327

study the changes of fixed costs, variable costs and selling prices, a number of charts will have to

be drawn up.

(ix) Even simple tabulation of the results of costs and sales can serve the purpose which is served by a

break-even chart, hence there is no need of presenting the data through a break-even chart.

(x) The chart becomes very complicated and difficult to understand for a layman, if the number of lines

or curves depicted on the graph are large.

(xi) The chart does not provide any basis for comparative efficiency between different units or

organisations.

USES OF COST-VOLUME-PROFIT ANALYSIS

1. C.V.P. analysis helps in forecasting costs and profits as a result of change in volume.

2. It helps fixing a sales volume level to earn or cover a given revenue, return on capital employed, or

rate of dividend.

3. It assists determination of effect of change in volume due to plant expansion or acceptance of an

order, with or without increase in costs or in other words a quantum of profit to be obtained can be

determined with change in volume of sales.

4. C.V.P. analysis helps in determining relative profitability of each product, line, project or profit plan.

5. Through cost volume-profit analysis inter-firm comparison of profitability can be done intelligently.

6. It helps in determining cash requirements at a desired volume of output, with the help of cash break-

even charts.

7. Break-even analysis emphasises the importance of capacity utilisation for achieving economy.

8. From break-even analysis during severe recession, the comparative effects of a shut down or

continued operation at a loss is indicated.

9. The effect on total cost of a change in the fixed over-head is more clearly demonstrated through

break-even analysis and cost- volume-profit charts.

10. The conditions of a business such as profit potentialities, requirements of capital, financial stability

and incidence of fixed and variable costs can be gauged from a study of the position of the break-

even point and the angle of incidence in the break-even chart.

CONTRIBUTION

If a system of marginal costing is operated in an organisation with more than one product, it will not be

possible to ascertain the net profit per product because fixed overheads are charged in total to the profit and

loss account rather than recovered in product costing. The contribution of each product is charged to the

firm’s total fixed overheads and profit is ascertained. Contribution is the difference between selling price and

variable cost of sales. It is visualised as some sort of a fund or pool, out of which all fixed costs, irrespective

of their nature are to be met, and to each product has to contribute its share. The excess of contribution over

fixed costs is the profit. If the total contribution does not meet the entire fixed cost, there will be loss.

In normal circumstances, selling prices contain an element of profit but there may be circumstances, when

products may have to be sold at cost or even at loss. Therefore, the character of contributions will have the

following composition under different circumstances:

(i) Selling price containing profit:

EP-CMA

328

Contribution = Fixed cost + Profit

(ii) Selling price at cost:

Contribution = Fixed cost

(iii) Selling price at loss:

Contribution = Fixed cost − Loss

MARGINAL COST EQUATION

As we know: Sales-Cost= Profit

or Sales- (Fixed cost + Variable cost)= Profit

or Sales- Variable cost= Fixed cost + Profit

It is known as marginal cost equation. We can convey it as under:

Where S = Sales V= Variable cost

F= Fixed cost P= Profit

PROFIT-VOLUME RATIO

The ratio or percentage of contribution margin to sales is known as P/V ratio. This ratio is also known as

marginal income ratio, contribution to sales ratio, or variable profit ratio. P/V ratio, usually expressed as a

percentage, is the rate at which profit increases with the increase in volume. The formulae for P/V ratio are:

P V ratio/ =

Marginal C

ontributio

n

Sales

Or

Sales Valu

e

-

Variable

Cost

Sales Valu

e

Or

1−

Variable C

ost

Sales Valu

e

Or

Fixed Cost

+

Profit

Sales Valu

e

Or

Change in

Profits

/

Contributi

ons

Change in Sales

(All the above formulae really mean the same thing).

A comparison for P/V ratios of different products can be made to find out which product is more profitable.

S- V= F + P

Lesson 8 Marginal Costing

329

Higher the P/V ratio more will be the profit and lower the P/V ratio, lesser will be the profit. P/V ratio can be

improved by:

(i) Increasing the selling price per unit.

(ii) Reducing direct and variable costs by effectively utilising, men, machines and materials.

(iii) Switching the production to more profitable products showing a higher P/V ratio.

SIGNIFICANCE OF PROFIT-VOLUME (P/V) RATIO

Profit volume (or contribution-sales) ratio is a logical extension of marginal costing. It is the study of the inter-

relationships of cost behaviour patterns, levels of activity and the profit that results from each alternative

combination. The significance of profit volume ratio may be enumerated from the following application which

are as under:

(a) Ascertainment of profit on a particular level of sales volume.

(b) Determination of break-even point.

(c) Calculation of sales required to earn a particular level of profit.

(d) Estimation of the volume of sales required to maintain the present level of profit in case selling

prices are to be reduced by a stipulated margin.

(e) Useful in developing flexible budgets for cost control purposes.

(f) Identification of minimum volume of activity that the enterprise must achieve to avoid incurring

losses.

(g) Provision of data on relevant costs for decisions relating to pricing, keeping or dropping product

lines, accepting or rejecting particular orders, make or buy decision, sales mix planning, altering

plant layout, channels of distribution specification, promotional activities etc.

(h) Guiding in fixation of selling price where the volume has a close relationship with the price level.

(i) Evaluation of the impact of cost factors on profit.

MARGIN OF SAFETY

Margin of safety is the difference between the actual sales and sales at break-even point. Sales beyond

break-even volume brings in profits. Such sales represent a margin of safety. Margin of safety is calculated

as follows:

Margin of safety = Total sales – Break even sales

Margin of safety can also be calculated with the help of P/V ratio i.e.

Margin of safety =

RatioP/V

Profit

Margin of safety can also be expressed as percentage of sales

i.e.

sales

Total

100 safety of Margin ×

EP-CMA

330

It is important that there should be reasonable margin of safety, otherwise, a reduced level of activity may

prove disastrous. The soundness of a business is gauged by the size of the margin of safety. A low margin of

safety usually indicates high fixed overheads so that profits are not made until there is a high level of activity

to absorb fixed costs.

A high margin of safety shows that break-even point is much below the actual sales, so that even if there is a

fall in sales, there will still be a point. A low margin of safety is accompanied by high fixed costs, so action is

called for reducing the fixed costs or increasing sales volume.

The margin of safety may be improved by taking the following steps:

(i) Lowering fixed costs.

(ii) Lowering variable costs so as to improve marginal contribution.

(iii) Increasing volume of sales, if there is unused capacity.

(iv) Increasing the selling price, if market conditions permit, and

(v) Changing the product mix as to improve contribution.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

METHODS FOR DETERMINING BREAK EVEN POINTS

The sales volume which equates total revenue with related costs and results in neither profit nor loss is

called break-even point (BEP). Break-even point can be determined by the following methods:

1. Algebraic methods:

(i) Contribution Margin Approach

(ii) Equation technique

2. Graphic presentation:

(i) Break-even chart

(ii) Profit volume chart

State whether the following statement is “True” or “False”:

B.E.P. is a level where total revenue is equal to total cost:

• True

• False

Correct answer: True

Lesson 8 Marginal Costing

331

1. Algebraic Methods

(i) Contribution Margin Approach

Break-even point (in units) =

unit) per cost Variable unit per price (Selling

costs fixed Total

−

Or =

Total fixe

d costs

Contribution per unit

OR

Break-even point (in `)

Or = Beak-even points (units) × Selling price per unit

(ii) Equation Technique

It is based on an income equation i.e.

Sales – Total costs = Net profit.

Breaking up total costs into fixed and variable,

Sales – Fixed costs – Variable cost = Net profit

Sales = Fixed costs + Variable cost + Net profit

i.e.

SP(S) = FC + VC(S) + P

where

SP = Selling price per unit

S = Number of units required to be sold to break-even

FC = Total fixed costs

VC = Variable cost per unit

P = Net profit (Zero)

SP(S) = FC + VC(S) + Zero

SP(S) = FC + VC(S) + 0

SP(S) – VC(S) = FC

or

S(SP – VC) = FC

S

FC

SP

VC

=

−

=

Fixed Cost

P

/

V Ratio

EP-CMA

332

To calculate the level of sales required to earn a particular level of profit, the formula is:

Required Sales (in `

``

`) =

RatioP/V

profit Desired cost Fixed

+

Illustration 1

A product is sold at a price of `120 per unit and its variable cost is `80 per unit. The fixed expenses of the

business are ` 8,000 per year. Find (i) BEP in ` and units, (ii) profits made when sales are 240 units, (iii)

Sales to be made to earn a net profit of ` 5,000 for the year.

Solution:

`

Selling prices per unit 120

Less: Variable cost 80

Contribution per unit 40

P/V ratio =

Contributi

on

Sales

=

×

=

40

100

120

33

1

3

%

(i) BEP in ` =

FC

P

V ratio

/

BEP in units =

FC

Contribution per unit

=

31

33

8,000

`

=

40

8,000

`

=

1

38,000 ×

`

= 200 units

=

`

24,000

(ii) Contribution per unit

`

40

Total contribution of 240 Units = 240 x 40 =

`

9,600

Less: Fixed Cost for the year =

`

8,000

Profit =

`

1,600

(iii) Required Sales =

=

3

1

000,5000,8 `` +

=

`

13,000 × 3 =

`

39,000.

2 Graphic Presentation

(i) Break-even chart

According to the Chartered Institute of Management Accountants, London the break-even chart means

“a chart which shows profit or loss at various levels of activity, the level at which neither profit nor

loss is shown being termed as the break-even point”.

It is a graphic relationship between costs, volume and profits. It shows not only the BEP but also the effects

of costs and revenue at varying levels of sales. The break-even chart can therefore, be more appropriately

called the cost-volume-profit graph.

FC

+

Desiredpr

ofit

P

/

V ratio

Lesson 8 Marginal Costing

333

Assumptions regarding Break-Even Charts are as under:

(i) Costs are bifurcated into variable and fixed components.

(ii) Fixed costs will remain constant and will not change with change in level of output.

(iii) Variable cost per unit will remain constant during the relevant volume range of graph.

(iv) Selling price will remain constant even though there may be competition or change in volume of production.

(v) The number of units produced and sold will be the same so that there is no operating or closing stock.

(vi) There will be no change in operating efficiency.

(vii) In case of multi-product companies, it is assumed that the sales mix remains constant.

A break-even chart can be presented in different forms.

First Method of Break even chart

On the X-axis of the graph is plotted the volume of productions or the quantities of sales and on the Y-axis

(vertical line) costs and sales revenues are represented. The fixed costs line is drawn parallel to X-axis. The

variable costs for different levels of activity are plotted over the fixed cost line, which shows that the cost is

increasing with the increase in the volume of output. The variable cost line is joined to fixed cost line at zero

volume of production. This line is regarded as the total cost line. Sales values at various levels of output are

plotted from the origin and joined is called the sales line. The sales line will cut the total cost line at a point

where the total costs equal to total revenues and this point of intersection of two lines is known as break-

even point or the point of no profit no loss. The lines produced from the inter-section to Y-axis and X-axis

may give sales value and the number of units produced at break-even point respectively. Loss and profit are

as have been shown in the chart which shows that if production is less than the break-even point, the

business shall be running at a loss and if the production is more than the break even level, there will be

profit. The angle which the sales line makes with total cost line while intersecting it at BEP is called angle of

incidence. A large angle of incidence denotes a good profit position of a company.

Illustration 2

From the following data, calculate the break-even point by means of a break-even chart:

Selling price per unit =

`

15

Variable cost per unit =

`

10

Total fixed cost =

`

1,50,000

Solution:

For plotting the data, we need at least two points - one for plotting the total cost line and other for plotting the

total sales line. Therefore, it will be necessary to presume different levels of output and sales as below:

Output Fixed Variable Total Sales

units costs costs cost

(

`

) (

`

) (

`

) (

`

)

0 1,50,000 — 1,50,000 —

10,000 1,50,000 1,00,000 2,50,000 1,50,000

20,000 1,50,000 2,00,000 3,50,000 3,00,000

EP-CMA

334

30,000 1,50,000 3,00,000 4,50,000 4,50,000

40,000 1,50,000 4,00,000 5,50,000 6,00,000

50,000 1,50,000 5,00,000 6,50,000 7,50,000

60,000 1,50,000 6,00,000 7,50,000 9,00,000

Second Method of Break even chart

This is variation of the first method in which variable cost line is drawn first and thereafter drawing the fixed

cost line above the variable cost line. The later line will be the total cost line. The sales line is drawn as

usual. The added advantage of this method is that contributions at various levels of output are automatically

depicted in the chart.

Lesson 8 Marginal Costing

335

(a) Contribution break-even chart

The chart helps in ascertaining the amount of contribution at different levels of activity besides the break-

even point. In this method, the fixed cost line is drawn parallel to the X-axis. The contribution line is then

drawn from the origin which goes up with the increase in output. The sales line is plotted as usual, but the

question of intersection of sales line with cost line does not arise. The contribution line crosses the fixed cost

line and the point of intersection is treated as break-even point. At this point, contribution is equal to fixed

expenses and there is no profit or loss. If the contribution is more than the fixed expenses, profit will arise

and if the contribution is less than the fixed expenses, loss will arise.

(b) Profit-volume Graph

Profit volume graph is the graphical representation of the relationship between profit and volume. Separate

lines for costs and revenues are eliminated from the P/V graph as only profit points are plotted. It is based on

the same information as is required for the traditional break-even chart and is characterised by the same

limitations. The steps in the construction of profit volume graph are as follows:

(i) Profit and fixed costs are represented on the vertical axis.

(ii) Sales are shown on the horizontal axis.

(iii) The sale line divides the graph into two parts both horizontally and vertically. The area above the

horizontal line is the ‘profit area’ and that below it is the ‘loss area’ at which fixed costs are

represented on the vertical axis below the sale line and profits on the same axis above the sale line.

(iv) Profits and fixed costs are plotted for corresponding sales volume and the points are joined by a line

which is the profit line.

Illustration 3

Y Ltd. represents the following data:

`

Sales 4,00,000

Variable costs 2,40,000

EP-CMA

336

Fixed costs 1,00,000

Net profit 60,000

Draw a profit volume graph.

Solution:

From the above graph the following data can be calculated:

P/V Ratio =

100

Sales

expenses Variable Sales

×

−

100

000,00,4

000,40,2000,00,4

×

−

=

`

``

%40100

000,60,1

=×=

`4,00,000

`

BEP (in

`

) =

RatioP/V

CostFixed

=

40%

1,00,000

`

=

`

2,50,000

Margin of safety (in

`

) =

40%

`

000,60

ratioP/V

Profit

=

`

1,50,000

Illustration 4

From the following figures ascertain the break-even sales and also show the computation by means of a

graph.

`

Sales 20,00,000

Fixed Costs 5,00,000

Variable costs 12,00,000

Lesson 8 Marginal Costing

337

Solution:

`

Sales 20,00,000

Less: Variable Cost –12,00,000

Contribution 8,00,000

P/V Ratio

Sales

onContributi

=

000,00,20

000,00,8

`

=

= 0.40 OR 40%

Break-even sales

RatioP/V

Cost Fixed

=

%40

000,00,5

`

=

`

12,50,000

BREAK-EVEN CHART

Points plotted:

Sales Variable Costs Fixed Costs Total Cost

`

(60% of sales)

`

.

0 0 5,00,000 5,00,000 (C1)

15,00,000 9,00,000 5,00,000 14,00,000 (C2)

EP-CMA

338

PROFIT-VOLUME CHART

(At zero sale loss is

`

5 lakh: at

`

20,00,000 sales, profits is

`

3 lakh (P2). Draw a line to join there two points.

The break-even sale is at the point where it meets the X-axis).

Illustration 5

`

The sales of a company are @

`

200 per unit 20,00,000

Variable cost 12,00,000

Fixed cost 6,00,000

The capacity of the factory 15,000 units

Determine the BEP. How much profit is the company making?

Solution:

Number of Units Presently Sold by Company =

200

20,00,000

`

= 10,000 Units

Variable Cost per Unit =

Units ofNo.

Cost VariableTotal

=

10,000

12,00,000

`

=

`

120

Contribution per Unit = SP – VC

= `

200–

`

120

=

`

80

Lesson 8 Marginal Costing

339

BEP (in Units) =

Unit PeronContributi

Cost Fixed

=

80

6,00,000

`

= 7,500 Units

Profit by the Company = (No. of Units Sold

×

Contribution Per Unit) – Fixed Cost

= (

`

10,000 ×

`

80) –

`

6,00,000

=

`

2,00,000

Illustration 6

Sales are

`

1,50,000, producing a profit of

`

4,000 in period I. Sales are

`

1,90,000, producing a profit of

`

12,000 in period II. Determine the BEP.

Solution:

The Question may be presented in the given format:

Sales Profit

Period 1

`

1,50,000

`

4,000

Period 2

`

1,90,000

`

12,000

PV Ratio =

SaleinChange

ProfitinChange

=

1,50,0001,90,000

4,00012,000

``

−

=

40,000

8,000

`

= 0.2 or 20%

As Profit = Sales

×

PV Ratio – Fixed Cost

4,000 =

`

1,50,000

×

20% – Fixed Cost

Fixed Cost =

`

30,000 –

`

4,000

=

`

26,000

BEP (in

`

) =

RatioPV

CostFixed

=

0.2

26,000

`

=

`

1,30,000

APPLICATIONS OF MARGINAL COSTING

1. Profit planning

2. Evaluation of Performance

EP-CMA

340

3. Make or Buy Decisions

4. Closure of a Department or Discontinuance of a Product

5. Maintaining a Desired Level of Profit

6. Offering Quotations

7. Accepting an Offer or Exporting below Normal Price

8. Alternative Use of Production Facilities

9. Problem of Key Factor

10. Selection of a Suitable Product Mix

1. Profit planning

There are four ways in which profit performance of a business can be improved:

(a) by increasing volume;

(b) by increasing selling price;

(c) by decreasing variable costs; and

(d) by decreasing fixed costs.

Profit planning is the planning of future operations to attain maximum profit or to maintain a specified level of

profit. The contribution ratio (which is the ratio of marginal contribution to sales) indicates the relative

profitability of the different sectors of the business whenever there is a change in selling price, variable costs

or product mix. Due to the merging together of fixed and variable costs, absorption costs fail to bring out

correctly the effect of any such change on the profit of the concern.

Illustration 7

A toy manufacturer makes an average net profit of

`

2.50 per piece on a selling price of

`

14.30 by producing

and selling 60,000 pieces or 60% of the potential capacity. His cost of sales is:

Direct material

`

3.50

Direct wages

`

1.25

Works overhead

`

6.25 (50% fixed)

Sales overhead

`

0.80 (25% variable)

During the current year, he anticipates that his fixed charges will go up by 10%, while rates of direct material

and direct labour will increase by 6% and 8% respectively. But he has no option of increasing the selling

price. Under this situation he obtains an offer for an order equal to 20% of his capacity. The concerned

customer is a special customer.

What minimum price will you recommend for acceptance to ensure the manufacturer an overall profit of

`

1,67,300?

Solution:

Solution to

Particulars Cost at Present in

`

Anticipated cost in Current

Year in

`

No of Units

60,000

Lesson 8 Marginal Costing

341

Sales value

8,58,000 8,58,000

Variable Cost:

Direct Material 3.50

3.71 (3.50 × 106%)

Direct Labour 1.25

1.35 (1.25 × 108%)

Variable Cost

Work overhead

3.125 (6.50 × 50%)

3.125

Sales Overhead

0.600 (0.80 × 25%)

0.600

Total Variable Cost per unit 8.075 8.385

Fixed Cost

60,000 (6.250 – 3.125) Work overhead

= 1,87,500

2, 06,250 (1, 87,500 ×

110%)

60,000 (0.80 × 75%)

Sales Overhead

= 36,000

39,600 (36,000 × 110%)

Total Fixed Cost 2,23,500 2,45,850

Present selling Price 14.30 14.30

Contribution per unit 14.30-8.075 14.30 – 8.385

Contribution in

`

3,73,500 3,54,900

Profit ( Contribution-Fixed Cost) 1,50,000 1,09,050

Profit desired in current year 1,67,300

Increase in profit 58,250

Sales in No of units by increasing the Sales level by 20% =

`

60,000/60% × 80%

=

`

20,000

Additional Variable Cost of 20,000 units =

`

20,000 × 8.385

=

`

1, 67,700

Minimum sales price for 20,000 additional units =

`

(1, 67,700 + 58,250)/20,000

=

`

11.297

Illustration 8

The following data relate to a manufacturing company:

Plant capacity: 4,00,000 units per annum

Present utilisation: 40%

Actuals for the year were:

Selling price

`

50 per unit

Materials cost

`

20 per unit

Variable manufacturing costs

`

15 per unit

Fixed costs

`

27 lakhs

In order to improve capacity utilisation the following proposals are being considered:

Reduce selling price by 10%.

Spend additionally

`

3 lakhs on sales promotion.

How many units should be made and sold in order to earn a profit of

`

5 lakhs per year?

EP-CMA

342

Solution:

Revised selling price (

`

50 less 10%)

`

45 per unit

Variable cost:

Material cost

`

20

Variable manufacturing cost (per unit)

`

15

Total variable cost

`

35 per unit

Contribution

`

10 per unit

Total contribution required:

Fixed costs

`

27,00,000

Additional promotion expenses

`

3,00,000

Profit

`

5,00,000

Total

`

35,00,000

Total number of units to be made and sold to earn a contribution of

`

35,00,000

=

unitperonContributi

onContributiTotal

=

10

000,00,35

`

= 3,50,000 units.

2. Evaluation of Performance

The various section of a concern such as a department, a product line, or a particular market or sales

division, have different revenue earning potentialities. A company always concentrates on the departments

or product lines which yield more contribution than others. The performance of each such sector can be

brought out by means of cost volume-profit analysis or the contribution approach. The analysis will help the

company to take decision that will maximise the profits.

Illustration 9

A business produces three products A, B and C for which the standard variable costs and budgeted selling

prices are as follows:

A B C

` ` `

Direct Material 3 6 8

Direct Wages 4 4 10

Variable overhead 3 5 7

Selling price 18 25 48

In two successive periods, sales are as follows:

A B C

Units Units Units

Period I 10,000 10,000 10,000

Period II 20,000 13,000 5,000

The budgeted fixed overheads amounted to `1,35,000 for each period. In spite of increased sales the profit

for the second period has fallen below that of the 1st period.

Present figures to management to show why this fall in profit should, or should not have occurred.

Lesson 8

Marginal Costing

343

Solution:

Product A Product B Product C Total

Period I Period

II

Period I Period

II

Period I Period

II

Period I Period

II

A Sales (Units) 10,000 20,000 10,000 13,000 10,000 5,000 30,000 38,000

B Selling Price P.U in

`

18 18 25 25 48 48 - -

C Sale value in (

`

’000)

(A

×

B)

180 360 250 325 480 240 910 925

D Variable Cost P.U in

`

10 10 15 15 25 25 50 50

E Variable Cost (

`

’000)

(A

×

D)

100 200 150 195 250 125 500 520

F Contribution (

`

’000) ( C-E) 80 160 100 130 230 115 410 405

G Fixed Overhead (

`

’000) - - - - - - 135 135

H Net Profit (F-G) (

`

’000) - - - - - - 275 270

P/V Ratio 44.4 40 47.9

Comments:

Sales have increased by 8,000 units but the sales value has increased by `15,000. Marginal

costs have increased by `20,000 to meet cost of increased units of production, resulting in the fall of profit by

`5,000.

Product C which yields the highest percentage of contribution to sales is the most profitable line. Product A

comes next and product B is the least profitable of the three.

The unsatisfactory position in Period II is because of unfavourable sales mix as the production of most

profitable line C has been cut down and the less profitable products A and B have been pushed up.

3. Make or Buy Decisions

When the management is confronted with the problem whether it would be economical to purchase a

component or a product from outside sources, or to manufacture it internally, marginal cost analysis renders

useful assistance in the matter. Under such circumstances, a misleading decision would be taken on the

basis of the total cost analysis. In case the proposal is to buy from outside then, what is already being made,

and the price quoted by the outsider should be lower than the marginal cost. If the proposal is to make

something what is being purchased outside, the cost of making should include all additional costs like

depreciation on new plant, interest on capital involved and that cost should be compared with the purchase

price.

Illustration 10

A T.V. manufacturing company finds that while it costs to make component X, the same is available in the

market at `5.75 each, with all assurance of continued supply. The breakdown of cost is:

Materials `2.75 each

Labour `1.75 each

Variable overheads `0.50 each

Depreciation and other fixed cost `1.25 each

`6.25 each

(a) Should the company make or buy the component?

(b) What should be your decision if the supplier offered component at `4.85 each?

EP-CMA

344

Solution:

Marginal cost per unit of component X

Materials `2.75

Labour `1.75

Variable overheads `0.50

Total `5.00

(a) The purchase cost of the above component is `5.75 each. If the company is having spare capacity

which can not be filled with more remunerative jobs, it is recommended that the above component

be manufactured in the company since the marginal cost at `5.00 each is less than the purchase

cost of `5.75.

(b) In the event of purchase cost of `4.85 each being less than the marginal cost of `5.00 each, it is

recommended that the component be bought from the supplier as this results in a saving of `0.15

each. The spare capacity thus available can be utilised for other purposes, as far as possible.

4. Closure of a Department or Discontinuance of a Product

As discussed earlier, marginal costing technique helps in deciding the profitability of a product. It provides

the information in a manner that tells us how much each product contributes towards fixed cost and profit;

the product or department that gives least contribution should be discarded except for a short period. If the

management is to choose some product out of the given ones, then the products giving the highest

contribution should be chosen and those giving the least should be discontinued.

5. Maintaining a Desired Level of Profit

A company has to cut prices of its products from time to time because of competition, Government

regulations and other compelling reasons. The contribution per unit on account of such cutting is reduced

while the industry is interested in maintaining a minimum level of its profits. In case the demand for the

company’s product is elastic, the maximum level of profits can be maintained by pushing up the sales. The

volume of such sales can be found out by marginal costing techniques.

Illustration 11

S. Ltd. manufactures and markets a single product. The following information is available:

`

per unit

Materials 8.00

Conversion costs (variable) 6.00

Dealer’s margin 2.00

Selling price 20.00

Fixed cost `2,50,000

Present sales, 80,000 units

Capacity utilisation: 60 per cent.

There is acute competition. Extra efforts are necessary to sell. Suggestions have been made for increasing

sales:

(i) By reducing sales price by 5%

(ii) By increasing dealers margin by 25% over the existing rate.

Which of the two suggestions you would recommend if the company desires to maintain the present profit?

Give reasons.

Lesson 8

Marginal Costing

345

Solution:

Present marginal cost per unit:

`

Material 8.00

Conversion costs 6.00

Dealer’s margin 2.00

Total

16.00

Contribution per unit = Selling price

−

Marginal cost

= `20.00

−

16.00 = `4.00

Total contribution = `4

×

90,000 = 3,60,000

Profit = Contribution

−

Fixed cost

= `3,60,000

−

`2,50,000 = `1,10,000

Since in both suggestions fixed costs remain unchanged, the present profit can be maintained by keeping

the total contribution at the present level i.e. `3,60,000.

(i) Reducing sales price by 5%

New sales price = (`20.00 `1.00) = `19.00

New dealers margin = 10% of `19.00

= `1.90

Variable costs = `8 + `6 + `1.90 = `15.90

Contribution per unit = `19.00

−

`15.90 = `3.10

Sales (units) required to maintain the present level of profit.

=

10.3

000,60,3

unitperonContributi

oncontributiTotal

`

=

= 1,16,111 units

(ii) Increasing dealer’s margin by 25%

New dealer’s margin = `2 + 25% = `2.50

New variable cost = `8 + `6 + `2.50 = `16.50

Contribution = `20 – `16.50 = `3.50

Sales (units) =

50.3

000,60,3

`

= 1.02,857 units

The second proposal is recommended because the contribution per unit is higher and the sales (in units) are

lower. Lower sales efforts and less finance would be required in implementing the (ii) proposal.

6. Offering Quotations

One of the best ways for sales promotion is to offer quotations at low rates. A company is producing 80,000

units (80% of capacity) and making a profit of `2,40,000. Suppose the Punjab Government has given a

tender notice for 20,000 units. It is expected that the units taken by the Government will not affect the sale of

80,000 units which the company is already selling and the company also wishes to submit the lowest

possible quotation. The company may quote any amount above marginal cost, because it will give an

additional marginal contribution and hence profit.

EP-CMA

346

7. Accepting an Offer or Exporting below Normal Price

Sometimes the volume of output and sales may be increased by reducing the normal prices of additional

sale. In this case the concern should be cautious enough to see that the sale below normal price in additional

markets should not affect the normal market. To be on the safe side the product may be sold under the label

of a different brand. If there is additional sale because of export orders, goods may be sold at a price below

the normal.

Illustration 12

The cost of a manufacturing company for the product is:

`

Materials 12.00

Labour 9.00

Variable expenses 6.00

Fixed expenses 18.00

Total 45.00

The unit of product is sold for `51.00.

The company’s normal capacity is 1,00,000 units. The figures given above are for 80,000 units. The

company has received an offer for 20,000 units @ `36 per unit from a foreign customer.

Advice the manufacturer on whether the order should be accepted. Also give your advice if the order is from

a local merchant.

Solution:

Marginal cost for additional 20,000 units

Per unit For 20,000

units

`

Material 12.00 2,40,000

Labour 9.00 1,80,000

Variable expenses 6.00 1,20,000

Marginal cost

27.00 5,40,000

Additional revenue to be realised 7,20,000

Marginal cost 5,40,000

Net additional revenue (Marginal contribution) 1,80,000

The offer should be accepted because it gives an additional contribution of `1,80,000. The total profit will

also increase by `1,80,000 because fixed expenses have already been recovered from the local market.

Furthersome, the order from the local customer should not be accepted at `36 per unit or at any rate below

the normal price i.e., `45 because it will result in the general reduction of selling prices of the product.

Note: Acceptance of the additional order should not lead to production being in excess of the present

capacity since, in that case, some fixed expenses may also go up substantially. If there is such an increase

in fixed expenses, the increase should also be considered by inclusion in the total additional cost to be

compared with the additional revenue.

8. Alternative Use of Production Facilities

When alternative use of production facilities or alternative methods of manufacturing a product are available,

Lesson 8

Marginal Costing

347

contribution analysis should be used to arrive at the final choice. The alternative which will yield highest

contribution, shall generally and obviously be selected.

9. Problem of Key Factor

The product giving the greatest contribution will be the most profitable. To maximise profit, resources should

be mobilised towards that product which gives the maximum contribution. But contribution is not the only

criterion for deciding profitability. In real life, there may be several factors which may put a limit on the

number of units to be produced even if the products give a high contribution. These factors are equally

important for arriving at managerial decisions because these factors limit the volume of output at a particular

point of time or over a period. these are called key factors, scarce factors, limiting factors, principal budget

factors or governing factors. The limiting factors may be sale, raw material, labour, plant capacity and

availability of capital e.g., for a concern established in a relatively new town, labour may be a key factor or

the concern may find it difficult to acquire an unlimited quantity of raw material because of scarcity or the

quota system, etc. In the later case material will be the key factor. The extent of influence of these factors

should be carefully examined before arriving at a particular decision. Contribution per unit of key factor

should be considered and that course of action should be adopted which gives the highest contribution per

unit of key factor.

Illustration 13

You are given the following information in respect of products X and Y of Bee Cee Co. Ltd.

Product X Product Y

Selling price `42 `33

Direct material `15 `15

Labour hours (50 paise per hour) 18 hours 9 hours

Variable overheads 50% of Direct wages

Show which product is more profitable during labour shortage.

Solution:

Computation of Marginal Contribution

Particulars Product X Product Y

Selling price per unit in ` 42 33

Direct Material per unit in ` 15 15

Labour Hours (A) 18 9

Labour cost per hour (B) in ` 0.50 0.50

Labour cost per unit (A

×

B) in ` 9 4.50

Variable overhead (50% of Labour Cost) in ` 4.50 2.25

Total Variable Cost per unit in ` 28.50 21.75

Contribution per unit in ` 13.50 11.25

Since Labour is in shortage so it will be treated as Key factor and the product which is generating higher

contribution per hour will be preferred.

Contribution per labour hour:

Product X = ` 13.50/18

= ` 0.75

EP-CMA

348

Product Y = ` 11.25/9

= ` 1.25

Since contribution per labour hour for product Y is higher so product Y is more profitable.

10. Selection of a Suitable Product Mix

A concern, which manufactures more than one product, may have to decide in what proportion should these

products be produced or sold. The technique of marginal costing helps to a great extent in the determination

of most profitable product or sales mix. The best product mix is that which yields the maximum contribution.

In the absence of key factor, contribution under various mix will be found out and the mix which gives the

highest contribution will be selected for production.

Illustration 14

A company engaged in plantation activities has 200 hectares of virgin land which can be used for growing

jointly or individually tea, coffee, and cardamom. The yield per hectare of the different crops and their selling

price per kg. are as under:

Yield Selling Price

(kgs.) (

`

per kg.)

Tea 2,000 20

Coffee 500 40

Cardamom 100 250

The relevant cost data are given below:

(a)

Variable cost per kg.:

Tea Coffee Cardamom

(

`

) (

`

) (

`

)

Labour charges 8 10 120

Packing materials 2 2 10

Other costs 4 1 20

Total cost 14 13 150

(b)

Fixed cost per annum:

`

Cultivation and growing cost 10,00,000

Administrative cost 2,00,000

Land revenue 50,000

Repairs and maintenance 2,50,000

Other costs 3,00,000

Total cost 18,00,000

The policy of the company is to produce and sell all the three kinds of products and the maximum and

minimum are to be cultivated per product is as follows:

Maximum Area Minimum Area

(hectares) (hectares)

Tea 160 120

Coffee 50 30

Cardamom 30 10

Calculate the priority of production, the most profitable product mix and the maximum profit which can be

achieved.

Lesson 8

Marginal Costing

349

Solution:

Contribution of different products:

Tea Coffee Cardamom

(

`

) (

`

) (

`

)

Selling price per kg. 20 40 250

Less: Variable cost per kg.:

Labour charges 8 10 120

Packing materials 2 2 10

Other costs 4 1 20

Total variable cost 14 13 150

Contribution per kg. 6 27 100

Contribution per hectare 12,000 13,500 10,000

Rating on the basis of contribution per hectare II I III

(i) Therefore, to maximise profit, subject to other constraints, the order of priority of production would

be Coffee, Tea and Cardamom.

(ii) Optimum product mix:

Area Yield Total

Production

(hectares) (kg./hect.) (kgs.)

(a) Maximum of coffee 50 500 25,000

(b) Minimum of Cardamom 10 100 1,000

(c) Balance of Tea 140 2,000 2,80,000

200 2,600 3,06,000

(iii) Maximum profit

Production Rate Total

(kgs.) (

`

) (

`

)

Contribution from Coffee 25,000 27 6,75,000

Contribution from Cardamom 1,000 100 1,00,000

Contribution from Tea 2,80,000 6 16,80,000

24,55,000

Less:

Fixed Costs 18,00,000

Profit 6,55,000

COMPOSITE BREAK EVEN POINT

A business undertaking may have different manufacturing establishments each having its own production

capacity, and fixed costs but producing the same product. At the same time, the concern as a whole is a unit

having different establishments under the same management. Hence the combined fixed costs have to be

met by the combined BEP sales. In this analysis, there are two approaches namely:

(i) Constant product mix approach.

(ii) Variable product mix approach.

Under the first approach, the ratio in which the products of the various establishments are mixed is constant.

This mix will be maintained at BEP sales also. Under the second approach the product of that establishment

would be preferred where the contribution ratio is higher. The above two approaches are explained by the

following illustration.

EP-CMA

350

Illustration 15

‘A Limited’ has two factories X and Y producing the same article whose selling price is

`

150 per unit. The

following are the other particulars:

Factory X Factory Y

Capacity (unit) 10,000 15,000

Variable cost per unit ` 100 `120

Fixed expenses `3,00,000 `2,10,000

Determine the BEP for the two factories and for the company as a whole assuming

(i) Constant Sales Mix, (ii) Variable Sales Mix.

Solution:

BEP for the two factories separately:

Factory X Factory Y

Contribution per unit `50 `30

Fixed expenses `3,00,000 `2,10,000

∴

Break-even point 6,000 units 7,000 units

=













Unit Per C

Expenses Fixed

50

3,00,000

`

=

30

2,10,000

`

=

Composite BEP:

1. Constant sales mix:

Combined P/V ratio = (2/5 x `50) + (3/5 x `30) =

3

76

100

150

38

=×

`

Combined fixed expenses = `5,10,000

∴ BEP =

76

10035,10,000 ××

`

= `20,13,158

As sales price is uniform, the mix ratio is the capacity ratio itself, i.e., 2 : 3

X = `8,05,263 or 5,369 units

Y = `12,07,895 or 8,052 units

Workings:

Ratios of Sales Mix:

Total units = 10,000 + 15,000 = 25,000

∴ X =

10

000

25 000

,

= 2/5

∴ Y =

15

000

25 000

,

= 3/5

Lesson 8

Marginal Costing

351

2. Variable Sales Mix

As factory X is giving a higher contribution, it shall be used in full, i.e., 10,000 units should be produced here

before production is commenced at Y. This will give a contribution of `5,00,000.

Total fixed expenses for the two factories `5,10,000

Additional contribution required to meet the fixed expenses fully `10,000

Number of units to be produced at Y to produce this contribution 334

Total number of units:

X 10,000

Y 334 10,334

The above discussion could also be applied to an undertaking selling different products each having its own

contribution and sales potential. The composite BEP for the business could be worked out keeping the

product mix constant. This would involve working out a composite P/V Ratio as in the above case.

Illustration 16

The budget of N Ltd. includes the following data for the forthcoming financial year:

(a) Fixed expenses `3,00,000

(b) Contribution per unit Product A - `6;

Product B - `2.50;

Product C - `4

(c) Sales Forecast Product A - 24,000 units @ `12.50

Product B - 1,00,000 units @ `7.00

Product C - 50,000 units @ `10.00

Calculate the combined P/V ratio and combined BEP.

Solution:

Sales mix forecast A = 24,000 x `12.50 = ` 3,00,000

B = 1,00,000 x `7.00 = ` 7,00,000

C = 50,000 x `10.00 = ` 5,00,000

Total `15,00,000

∴ Ratio of sales mix = 3 : 7 : 5

Combined P/V Ratio =

(

/

)

(

/

.

)

(

/

( / . ) ( / ( / )

3

15

6

7

15

2

50

5

15

4)

3 15 12 50 7 15 7) 5 15 10

×

+

×

+

×

× + × + ×

Or

=

(

,

)

, ,

1

44

000

2

50

000

2

00

000

15 00 000

+

=

594

1500

Composite BEP =

Total fixe

d expenses

Composite P / V ratio

=

3

00

000

1

500

594

,

×

= `7,57,575

EP-CMA

352

BEP Sales for the 3 products = A `1,51,515 or 12,121 units

(in the ratio of 3 : 7 : 5) = B `3,53,535 or 50,505 units

= C `2,52,525 or 25,253 units

If we solve this problem on the basis of second alternative, i.e., to change the sales mix so that priority is

given to that product which gives the highest per unit contribution then product A will have to be produced in

full, i.e., 24,000 units and secondly product C. The BEP in that case will be:

Total fixed cost upto BEP = `3,00,000

Sales Total Contribution Total

Per Unit Sales Per Unit Contribution

`

I Priority: Product A 24,000 12.50 3,00,000 6 1,44,000

II Priority: Product C 39,000 10.00 3,90,000 4 1,56,000

6,90,000 3,00,000

Above BEP

Product C 11,000 10.00 1,10,000 4 44,000

Product B 1,00,000 7 7,00,000 2.50 2,50,000

8,10,000 2,94,000

Hence the sales at BEP will be `6,90,000. This is lower than the BEP already worked out by keeping the

sales mix constant.

Illustration 17

The under mentioned information is given below:

(1) The P/V Ratio of a firm is 40%.

(2) The firm wants to increase its selling price by 10%.

(3) The firm’s variable cost is higher now by 5%.

(4) The fixed expenses of the firm have gone up from `2,00,000 to `2,58,500.

Work out the original BEP sales and the revised BEP sales.

Solution:

Original BEP sales

P/V ratio = 40%

Fixed expenses = `2,00,000

Present BEP =

40

1002,00,000 ×

`

= `5,00,000

New sales = 110 (i.e., 10% increase)

Variable cost = 63 (i.e., 5% increase)

Revised P/V ratio =

47

110

100

×

= 42.73%

Lesson 8

Marginal Costing

353

Revised fixed expenses = `2,58,500

Revised BEP =

40

1002,58,500 ×

`

= `6,04,961

Illustration 18

With a view to increase the volume of sales, Ambitious Enterprises has in mind a proposal to reduce the

price of its product by 20%. No change in total fixed costs or variable costs per unit is estimated. The

directors, however, desire the present level of profit to be maintained.

The following information has been provided:

Sales—50,000 units `5,00,000

Variable costs `5 per unit

Fixed Costs `50,000

Advice management on the basis of various calculations made from the data given.

Solution:

Marginal Cost Statement

`

Sales 5,00,000

Less:

Variable Costs 2,50,000

Contribution 2,50,000

Less:

Fixed Costs 50,000

Profit 2,00,000

Profit/Volume Ratio =

Sales

−

×

Variable C

osts

Sales

100

=

5,00,0000

2,50,000-5,00,000

``

× 100

=

5,00,000

2,50,000

`

× 100

= 50%

In the event of reduction in selling price without any corresponding increase in sales volume.

P/V Ratio =

5,00,000

2,50,000-4,00,000

``

× 100

=

4,00,000

1,50,000

`

× 100

= 37.5%

In the view of the fact that the directors wish to maintain the same level of profit after reduction of selling

price as before reduction and it is expected that fixed costs will not change, sales volume required to meet

such a situation would be:

=

Fixed Cost

s

+

Profit

P

/

V Ratio

EP-CMA

354

=

37.5%

2,00,00050,000

``

+

=

75

2

1

100

2,50,000 ××

`

= `6,66,667

= 83,333 units approximately.

Thus, a reduction of 20% in the selling price requires an increase of about 66% in the sales volume.

Armed with this information, the management has to decide between two alternatives of to reduce or not to

reduce the selling price, taking into consideration whether it would be able to measure up to the task of

increasing the sales volume by 66%.

Verification: The conclusion that, with a view to get an approximate sales revenue of `6,66,667, sale of

additional 33,333 units approximately would be required, can be verified as thus:

`

Sales 6,66,667 (approx.)

Less:

Variable Cost (83,333 units @ `5 each) 4,16,665 “

Contribution 2,50,002 “

Less:

Fixed Costs 50,000 “

Profit 2,00,002 “

Illustration 19

A factory produces 300 units of a product per month. The selling price is `120 and variable cost `80 per unit.

The fixed expenses of the factory amount to `8,000 per month. Calculate: (i) the estimated profit in a month

wherein 240 units are produced, (ii) the sales to be made to earn a profit of `7,000 per month.

Solution:

`

Selling price per unit 120.00

Less:

Variable cost per unit 80.00

Contribution per unit 40.00

∴ P/V ratio =

=×=













× 100

120

40

100

price Selling

onContributi

33-1/3%

(i) Profit on sale of 240 units:

Sale of 240 units at ` 120 each ` 28,800

Contribution from the above at 33-1/3% `9,600

Less:

Fixed cost of 1 month `8,000

∴ Profit `1,600

This result can also be arrived at as follows:

No. of units to be sold = 240

Contribution per unit = `40

∴ Contribution from 240 units = 240 × `40

= `9,600

Less:

Fixed cost for the month = `8,000

∴

∴∴

∴

Profit =

`

``

`

1,600

Lesson 8

Marginal Costing

355

(ii) Sales required to earn a profit of

`

``

`

7,000:

Desired sales (in `) =

RatioP/V

profit Desired cost Fixed +

%33.33

000,7000,8

``

+

=

3

1

33

10015,000 ×

`

= `45,000

Desired sales (in units) =

unit per onContributi

profit Desired cost Fixed +

40

000,7000,8

`

``

+

=

= 375 units

Selling price per unit = `120

∴ Total sales = 375 x `120

= `45,000

Illustration 20

There are two plants manufacturing the same products under one corporate management which decides to

merge them.

Following particulars are available regarding the two plants:

Plant I Plant II

Capacity operation 100% 60%

Sales `6,00,00,000 `2,40,00,000

Variable costs `4,40,00,000 `1,80,00,000

Fixed costs ` 80,00,000 ` 40,00,000

You are required to calculate for the consideration of the Board of directors:

(a) What would be the capacity of merged plant to be operated for purpose of break-even?

(b) What would be the profitability on working at 75 per cent of the merged capacity?

Solution:

Note: Sales and variable costs of Plant II must be brought from 60% to 100% before merger of two plants

data at 100% capacity operation.

(a) Calculation of the Capacity of Merged Plant to Break-even at 100% Capacity.

P/V Ratio =

Contributi

on

Sales

× 100

P/V ratio =

2

60

00

000

10 00 000

100

,

, ,

×

= 26 per cent.

EP-CMA

356

Sales at Break-even Point =

Fixed Cost

s

P

/

V Ratio

=

26%

1,20,000

`

= ` 4,61,53,846 (Approx.)

In terms of percentage capacity, sales at break-even point work out to 46.15 per cent approximately.













× 100

0010,00,00,0

64,61,53,84

`

= 46.15%

Workings:

Sales at 100% capacity = `6,00,00,000 +













×

02,40,00,00

60

100

`

= `10,00,00,000

Contribution at 100% capacity = (`6,00,00,000 – `4,40,00,000) +













+ 02,40,00,00

60

100

`

–













+ 01,80,00,00

60

100

`

= (`1,60,00,000) + (`1,00,00,000)

= `2,60,00,000.

(b) Calculation of profit on working at 75% of the merged capacity.

MARGINAL COST STATEMENT

`

Sales (75% of `10,00,00,000) 7,50,00,000

Less:

Variable Costs:

75% of

























×+ 000,00,80,1

60

100

000,40,4 ``

5,55,00,000

Contribution 1,95,00,000

Less:

Fixed Costs 1,20,00,000

Profit 75,00,000

Illustration 21

The budgeted results of X Ltd., include the following:

Sales Amount (in lakhs) Variable Costs as % of Sales Value

A 5.00 60%

B 4.00 50%

C 8.00 65%

D 3.00 80%

E 6.00 _75%

26.00 65.77%

Lesson 8

Marginal Costing

357

Fixed costs for the period are `9 lakhs. You are required to:

(i) Produce a statement showing the amount of loss expected, and

(ii) Recommend a change in sales volume of each product which will eliminate the expected loss

assuming that sale of only one product can be increased at a time.

Solution:

(a) Statement showing the loss expected

Product Sales Variable Cost as %

Sales Value

Variable Cost Contribution P/V Ratio

A 5,00,000

60% 3,00,000

2,00,000

40%

B 4,00,000

50% 2,00,000

2,00,000

50%

C 8,00,000

65% 5,20,000

2,80,000

35%

D 3,00,000

80% 2,40,000

60,000

20%

E 6,00,000

75% 4,50,000

1,50,000

25%

26,00,000

65.77% 17,10,000

8,90,000

34.23%

Contribution `8,90,000

Less:

Fixed Cost `9,00,000

Loss/Under recovery of fixed cost (10,000)

(b) Additional Volume of sales required:

Additional Sales =

RatioP/V

costs fixed ofry Underrecoe

Thus

Product A =

%

40

10,000

`

= ` 25,000

Product B =

%

50

10,000

`

= ` 20,000

Product C =

%

35

10,000

`

= ` 28,571 approx.

Product D =

%

20

10,000

`

= ` 50,000

Product E =

%

25

10,000

`

= ` 40,000

Total =

%23.34

000,10`

= ` 29,214 approx.

EP-CMA

358

The calculations given above clearly shows that, if X Co. Ltd., can increase sales of product A by `25,000 or

that of product E by `40,000 its business operations would touch the break- even point.

Note:

P/V Ratio in respect of different products has been calculated as thus:

Using the formula:

Sales

Variable c

−

ost

Sales

Therefore:

Product A =

5,00,000

000,00,35,00,000

`

`` −

×100 = 40%

Product B =

,00,000

000,00,,00,000

4

24

`

`` −

×100 = 50%

Product C =

8,00,000

000,20,58,00,000

`

`` −

×100 = 35%

Product D =

3,00,000

000,40,23,00,000

`

`` −

×100 = 20%

Product E =

6,00,000

000,50,46,00,000

`

`` −

×100 = 25%

ABSORPTION COSTING

Absorption costing means that all of the manufacturing costs are absorbed by the total units produced. In

short, the cost of a finished unit in inventory will include direct materials, direct labour, and both

variable and fixed manufacturing overhead. As a result, absorption costing is also referred to as full costing

or the full absorption method. Absorption costing is often contrasted with variable costing or direct costing.

Under variable or direct costing, the fixed manufacturing overhead costs are not allocated to the products

manufactured. Variable costing is often useful for management’s decision-making. However, absorption

costing is required for external financial reporting and for income tax reporting. It is also referred to as the

full- cost technique

SYSTEM OF PROFIT REPORTING

Absorption costing is a costing technique that includes all manufacturing costs, in the form of direct

materials, direct labour, and both variable and fixed manufacturing overheads, while determining the cost per

unit of a product.

In the context of costing of a product/service, an absorption costing considers a share of all costs incurred by

a business to each of its products/services. In absorption costing technique; costs are classified according to

their functions. The gross profit is calculated after deducting production costs from sales and from gross

profit, costs incurred in relation to other business functions are deducted to arrive at the net profit. Absorption

costing gives better information for pricing products as it includes both variable and fixed costs.

Absorption costing technique absorbed fixed manufacturing overhead into the cost of goods produced and

are only charged against profit in the period in which those goods are sold. In absorption costing income

statement, adjustment pertaining to under or over-absorption of overheads is also made to arrive at the

profit.Absorption costing is a simple and fundamental method of ascertaining the cost of a product or service.

Lesson 8

Marginal Costing

359

It is based on sharing of all indirect costs and direct cost to cost units/cost centers. Following chart shows the

ascertaining the profit under absorption costing:

STOCK VALUATION

Finished goods inventories are over-stated in absorption costing as it includes one more cost element in

inventory value than under variable costing, i.e the fixed manufacturing cost.

Inventory value under absorption costing

= Direct material+ Direct labour +variable manufacturing costs+ Fixed manufacturing costs

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN ABSORPTION COSTING AND MARGINAL COSTING

Absorption costing Marginal costing

(i) Fixed production overheads are charged to the

product to be subsequently released as a part

of goods sold i.e., it is included in cost per unit.

Fixed production costs are regarded as period

cost and are charged to revenue along with the

selling and administration expenses, i.e., they

are not included while computing cost per unit.

(ii) Profit is the difference between sales and cost

of goods sold.

Profit in marginal costing is ascertained by

establishing the total contribution and then

deducting therefrom the total fixed expenses.

Contribution is the excess of sales over variable

cost.

(iii) Costs are seldom classified into variable and

fixed. Although such a classification is possible,

it fails to establish a cost-volume profit

relationship.

Cost-volume profit relationship is an integral part

of marginal costing studies. Costs have to be

classified into fixed costs and variable costs.

(iv) If inventories increase during a period, this

method will reveal more profit than marginal

costing. When inventories decrease, less profits

are reported because under this method closing

stock is valued at higher figures. Since

inventories are valued at total cost, a portion of

fixed overheads are also included in inventories.

If inventories increase during a period, this

method generally reports less income than

absorption costing; but when inventories

decrease this method reports more net income.

The difference in the net income is due to

difference in accounting for fixed manufacturing

costs as compared to inventory valuation.

EP-CMA

360

(v) Arbitrary apportionment of fixed costs may

result in under or over recovery of overheads.

Since fixed costs are excluded, there is no

question of arbitrary apportionment of fixed

overheads and thus under or over absorption of

overheads.

INCOME MEASUREMENT UNDER MARGINAL COSTING AND ABSORPTION COSTING

Under marginal costing, only factory overheads costs that tend to vary with volume are charged to product

cost in addition to prime cost. While evaluating inventory only direct materials, direct labour and variable

factory overhead are included and are considered as product costs. Fixed factory overhead under direct or

marginal costing is not included in inventory. It is treated as a period cost and charged against revenue when

incurred. Under absorption costing, sometimes called full or conventional costing, all manufacturing costs,

both fixed and variable are charged to product costs. Thus Absorption costing is “a principle whereby fixed

as well as variable costs are allotted to cost units”. It means a system under which cost per unit includes

fixed expenses, especially fixed production overheads in addition to the variable cost.

Profit emerges only after charging all costs minus fixed and variable. In marginal costing also this is true;

only profit is ascertained by charging the fixed expenses costs to contribution.

Contribution is the difference between selling price and marginal costs. Fixed costs are written off against

contribution during the period. Thus:

Selling price − Variable cost = Contribution

Contribution − Fixed costs = Profit

If profit and fixed costs are known,

Fixed costs + Profit = Contribution

This gives us a basic marginal equation:

Sales − Marginal costs = Contribution = Fixed costs + Profit (if there is a

profit) or Sales = Marginal costs + Fixed costs + Profit.

Since the closing stocks do not have any element of fixed costs, profit shown by marginal costing technique

may be different from that shown by absorption costing. When the entire stock is sold, there is no inventory

i.e., neither there is opening nor closing stock, the profit revealed by both the methods will be same. But

when sales and production are out of balance, difference in net profit is reported. When absorption costing is

applied, the fixed manufacturing costs are shifted from one year to another year as a part of the inventory

cost i.e. stock. If a company produces more than it sells in a given period, not all of the current manufacturing

overheads will be deducted from sales i.e., closing stock will include a portion of fixed overheads. In other

words, in absorption costing inventory will be valued at a higher figure; therefore, profit will be more as

revealed by absorption costing than marginal costing. Hence, profits will not necessarily increase with an

increase in sale value. The position will be reverse, in case a company produces less than it sells in a given

period. Thus, marginal costing can produce a net profit figure which is similar than or greater than or equal to

the net profit as shown under absorption costing.

An example illustrating the variations in the results obtained under the two methods is given below:

The basic production data are:

Normal volume of production = 19,500 units per period

Sale price - ` 4 per unit

Variable cost - ` 2 per unit

Lesson 8

Marginal Costing

361

Fixed cost - ` 1 per unit

Total fixed cost = `19,500 (`1 x 19,500 units, normal)

Selling and distribution costs have been omitted.

The opening and closing stocks consist of both finished goods and equivalent units of work-in-progress.

The profit and loss calculated under the two methods for the various periods are as follows:

Period I Period II Period III Period IV Total

Opening stock units   4,500 1,500 

Production units 19,500 22,500 18,000 22,500 82,500

Sales units 19,500 18,000 21,000 24,000 82,500

Closing stock units  4,500 1,500  

Marginal Costing Method

Sales 78,000 72,000 84,000 96,000 3,30,000

Direct cost:

Opening stock

@ `2 per unit   9,000 3,000 

Variable cost

@ `2 per unit 39,000 45,000 36,000 45,000 1,65,000

Closing stock

@ `2 per unit  9,000 3,000  

Cost of goods sold 39,000 36,000 42,000 48,000 1,65,000

Contribution 39,000 36,000 42,000 48,000 1,65,000

Fixed cost 19,500 19,500 19,500 19,500 78,000

Profit 19,500 16,500 22,500 28,500 87,000

Absorption Costing Method

Sales 78,000 72,000 84,000 96,000 3,30,000

Opening stock

@ `3 per unit  - 13,500 4,500 

Cost of production

@ `3 per unit 58,500 67,500 54,000 67,500 2,47,500

Less:

Cost of closing stock

@ `3 per unit  13,500 4,500 — —

Cost of sales (actual) 58,500 54,000 63,000 72,000 2,47,500

Less:

Over-absorbed fixed cost  3,000  3,000 6,000

Add:

Under-absorbed fixed cost  - 1,500  1,500

Profit 19,500 21,000 19,500 27,000 87,000

The above example reveals the following features:

(i) Since there is no opening or closing stock in the accounting period I, the profit under the marginal

costing and absorption costing methods is the same. Production being at the normal level, there is

no under or over-absorption of the fixed costs under the absorption costing method. Marginal

costing does away with the problem of over-absorption or under-absorption of fixed overheads.

(ii) In the accounting period II, the marginal costing method shows a profit of `16,500 and as against

this, the absorption costing method shows profit of `21,000. Under the absorption costing method, a

portion of the fixed cost, instead of being charged against the profit for the period is charged to the

closing stock and carried over to the next period.

EP-CMA

362

(iii) In the accounting period III, the profit calculated in absorption costing is less than that of marginal

costing. This is because when sales exceeds output, a portion of the fixed cost carried over as part

of the opening stock under absorption costing, is charged to the product sold in the current period.

(iv) In the accounting period IV, the profit shown under the absorption costing system is lesser than

under the marginal costing system. This is because the fixed cost pertaining to the opening stock of

1,500 units now sold is brought over to the current accounting period.

(v) In the long run when sales and output tend to equate, there is no difference or very little difference

in the results under the two methods. In the example above the net profit for the four accounting

periods taken together are the same under both the methods.

The relationship shown above may be summarised as follows:

(i) When output is equal to sales i.e. with no opening or closing stock the profit under absorption

costing and marginal costing is equal;

(ii) When output is less than sales i.e. closing stock is less than opening stock, the profit under

marginal costing is greater than the profit under absorption costing;

(iii) When output is greater than sales i.e. closing stock is more than the opening stock, the profit under

the marginal costing is less than the profit under absorption costing.

The differences between the profits revealed by absorption costing and marginal costing can be

computed with the help of the following formula:

=

utilizing for used rDenominato

overhead factory Fixed

×

××

×

(Volume produced – Volume sold)

Or

= (Fixed factory overheads per unit)

×

××

×

(Change in inventory units)

Analysis regarding the net operating income under absorption costing and marginal costing presented

above, although often correct, is not universally valid.

The net operating income under both the methods of costing can be analysed in relation to four methods of

inventory costing: Average costing, FIFO, LIFO and Standard costing. This would show that the usual

generalisations about full and direct costing hold good only under the LIFO and standard costing methods.

Further, under the LIFO and the average costing methods, the results are more complex than those

considered by the usual generalisations which therefore do not apply.

In absorption costing the effects of sales and production are combined, in marginal costing on the other

hand, the emphasis is placed on sales. The cost of one unit of product manufactured is not effected due to

the changes in the level of activities. The variable costs of a unit is assumed to remain constant over certain

ranges of output though both unit variable costs and total fixed cost may change at certain levels of

production. The data used for marginal costing applied to a range of output at which variable costs and total

fixed costs are relatively constant. Variable costs serve as a useful tool in bringing out relationships between

price, cost and volumes. But reliance on variable costing system may make the management think that the

company can operate profitably at low contribution margin, only to find that profit does not come up to

expectations.

Selling below the normal price may help on short term but in the long run this may result in margins that are

not sufficient in relation to resources invested. Thus, both costing method can be useful when applied to

appropriate circumstances.

Lesson 8

Marginal Costing

363

Illustration 22

A company makes and sells a single product. At the beginning of period 1, there is no opening stock of the

product, for which the variable production cost is `4 and the sale price is `6 per unit. Fixed costs are `2,000

per period of which `1,500 are fixed production costs.

The following details are available:

Period 1 Period 2

Sales 1,200 units 1,800 units

Production 1,500 units 1,500 units

What would be the profit in each period using -

(a) Absorption costing. (Assume normal output is 1,500 units per period); and

(b) Marginal costing?

Solution:

(a) Absorption Costing Method

The absorption rate for fixed production overhead is:













500,1

500,1`

units = ` 1 per unit

Period 1 Period 2 Total

` ` ` ` ` `

Sales 7,200 10,800 18,000

Production costs

Variable @ ` 4 6,000 6,000 12,000

Fixed @ `1 1,500 1,500 3,000

` 5 7,500 7,500 15,000

Add:

Opening stock  1,500 

7,500 9,000

Less:

Closing stock 1,500

(300 units @ `5)

Production cost of sales 6,000 9,000 15,000

Other costs 500 500 1,000

Total cost of sales 6,500 9,500 16,000

Profit 700 1,300 2,000

(b) Marginal Cost Method:

Period 1 Period 2 Total

` ` `

Sales 7,200 10,800 18,000

Variable production

Cost 6,000 6,000 12,000

Add:

Opening stock  1,200 

6,000 7,200 12,000

Less:

Closing stock 1,200 — —

EP-CMA

364

Variable production

Cost of sales 4,800 7,200 12,000

Contribution 2,400 3,600 6,000

Fixed cost 2,000 2,000 4,000

Profit 400 1,600 2,000

PRICING DECISIONS (DISCRIMINATING PRICE AND DIFFERENTIAL SELLING)

Under normal circumstances, selling price is based on total cost i.e. production, administration and selling

overheads - fixed as well as variable plus normal profit. In the long term planning selling price must cover all

costs plus a desired profit. There are however, variety of business situations where fixation of selling price

may vary from inclusion of desired profit to selling even below total cost. Marginal costing technique helps in

determining the most profitable relationship between costs, prices and volume of business.

When there is considerable unfilled capacity it may be necessary to accept a lower contribution in order to

provide work in the factory. Alternatively, if there is sufficient order normal price may be quoted and the

contribution obtainable may be high. The aim of the prices fixer is to sell the present and future capacity for

the greatest obtainable contribution. When the capacity is remaining unused, the potential contribution is

being sacrificed and the acceptance of an order with a lower contribution will at least partially meet from fixed

costs being incurred. This amount of contribution would otherwise be lost if the order is refused. In fixing the

lower price than normal, the price fixed must take into consideration the following:

(i) the amount of contributions at the proposed price;

(ii) the possibility of other more remuneration job;

(iii) comparison with normal selling price in order to determine the concession being offered; and

(iv) the possible adverse effect upon the future sales and customer’s confidence in the company’s

pricing or trading policy.

If the selling price is below the marginal cost, loss will be more than the fixed costs because variable

expenses will not be covered fully. Hence efforts should be made to sell the products at a price which is

equal to the marginal cost or more than the marginal cost. Product should be discontinued if the price

obtained is below the marginal cost so that loss may not be more than the fixed costs. But in the following

special circumstances production may be continued even if the selling price is below the marginal cost.

(i) When a new product is introduced in the market: The new product may be sold at a very low price

to make it popular. This is done with the expectation that sale will increase with the passage of time

and cost of production will come down as a result of increase in sales.

(ii) When foreign market is to be explored to earn foreign exchange: Government sometimes allow

import quota against foreign exchange earned and profit from import quota may be much more than

the loss on exporting the product at a price below the marginal cost.

(iii) When the firm has already purchased large quantities of materials: It is appropriate to convert the

material into finished goods and sell these at a price below the marginal cost if the sale of materials

will give rise to loss which is more than the loss incurred if the production is done.

(iv) Closure of business means breaking of business connections with customers and the connections

may be re-established at a heavy expenditure on advertisement and sales promotion and the same

may likely to be retarded because other firms will take advantage of the particular firm’s closure and

Lesson 8

Marginal Costing

365

win over the customers. In such instances, it is better to continue the production and to sell the

product at a price below the marginal cost.

(v) When the sales of one product at a price below the marginal cost will push up the sales of other

profitable product.

(vi) When the employees can not be retrenched.

(vii) When competitors are to be eliminated from the market.

(viii) When goods are of perishable nature. It is better to sell the perishable goods at a price which they

can realise, otherwise these goods will perish and nothing will be realised.

In the case of export orders, besides the usual variable cost, the quotation should take into account, the

following:

(1) Increase in the cost arising out of:

(a) Additional packing cost required for sea-worthiness;

(b) Additional checks for quality (this being vital as goods should not be returned if rejected for

quality);

(c) Freight and insurance charges, if not borne by the purchaser;

(d) Cost of capital blocked, if payment is not made in advance or is delayed.

(2) Cost benefits arising out of:

(a) Exemptions (non-payments) of customs duty;

(b) Exemption of central excise duty on excisable goods or draw-back as per the Central Excise

and Sales Tax Act;

(c) Subsidies from Government;

(d) Saving in Sales promotion expenses and other overheads.

(3) Earning of Foreign Exchange.

Though the principles applicable for pricing exports are much the same as for home markets,

special points to be noted are:

(a) High export price may facilitate reduction of selling price in the home market.

(b) Low export price, as low as marginal cost, may be advocated on grounds of benefits that arise

out of large volume, (recovery of fixed charges) thus increasing profitability.

(c) Export prices even below marginal cost may be advocated with an idea of obtaining from the

Government, import licences for essential raw materials on grounds of having contributed to

export trade and foreign exchange.

(d) Even lower price when goods are dumped in the export market. Dumping is a sales technique

often tried in export markets. Large quantities of merchandise are sold at low prices and before

competitors recover of the shock, these dumped merchandise get a foot hold in the export

market paving its way for future sales, when upward revision of prices may be possible. One

has to be careful that dumped merchandise are not re-exported to compete in the internal

market.

(e) Tax credit on export profits and sales may justify lower export prices.

EP-CMA

366

However, in normal times, pricing should be based on full costs as far as practicable since selling only on the

basis of marginal cost may mean a loss (contribution may be less than the total fixed expenses). Marginal

costing as a basis for fixation of selling price, is suitable only for utilising excess or idle capacity. If any

concessional price is to be offered to a new set of customers, it must not affect the existing market.

MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS & SOLUTIONS

Illustration 23

State, with reasons in brief, whether the following statements are true or false:

(i) When a factory operates at full capacity, fixed cost also becomes relevant for make or buy

decisions.

(ii) Semi-variable costs are ignored in marginal costing.

(iii) ‘Cost volume profit relationship’ is a more comprehensive term than ‘break-even analysis’.

(iv) Margin of safety is the difference of actual sale and standard sale.

(v) Contribution is not only the criterion for deciding profitability.

Solution:

(i) True, (ii) False, (iii) True, (iv) False, (v) True]

Illustration 24

Write the most appropriate answer from the given options in respect of the following:

(i) Product cost under marginal costing include —

(a) Prime cost only

(b) Prime cost and fixed overheads

(c) Prime cost and variable overheads

(d) Material cost and variable overheads.

(ii) Fixed cost per unit increases when ––

(a) Production volume decreases

(b) Production volume increases

(c) Variable cost per unit decreases

(d) Variable cost per unit increases.

(iii) The costing method in which fixed factory overheads are added to inventory is —

(a) Direct costing

(b) Marginal costing

(c) Absorption costing

(d) Activity based costing.

Lesson 8

Marginal Costing

367

(iv) When the sales increase from ` 40,000 to ` 60,000 and profit increases by ` 5,000, the P/V ratio

is—

(a) 20%

(b) 30%

(c) 25%

(d) 40%.

(v) A company which has a margin of safety of ` 4,00,000 makes a profit of ` 80,000. Its fixed cost is `

5,00,000, its break-even sales will be —

(a) ` 20 lakh

(b) ` 30 lakh

(c) ` 25 lakh

(d) ` 40 lakh.

(vi) Absorption means —

(a) Charging of overheads to cost centres

(b) Charging of overheads to cost units

(c) Charging of overheads to cost centres or cost units

(d) None of the above

(vii) Fixed costs remain fixed —

(a) Over a short period

(b) Over a long period and within relevant range

(c) Over a short period and within a relevant range

(d) Over a long period.

Solution:

(i) (c), (ii) (a), (iii) (c), (iv) (c), (v) (c), (vi) (a) or (c), (vii) (c)

Illustration 25

Re-write the following sentences after filling-in the blank spaces with appropriate word(s)/ figure(s) :

(a) At break-even point, the contribution will be equal to __________.

(fixed costs)

(b) Excess of budgeted revenues over the break-even revenue is called__________,

(Margin of

Safety)

(c) When there is no _______, profit figures revealed under marginal and absorption costing are

identical.

(Inventories)

Illustration 26

Metro Service Ltd. is operating at 70% capacity and presents the following information:

Break-even point : ` 200 crore

EP-CMA

368

P/V Ratio : 40%

Margin of safety : ` 50 crore

Metro management has decided to increase production to 95% capacity level with the following

modifications–

— Selling price will be reduced by 8%

— The variable cost will be reduced to 55% on sales.

— The fixed cost will increase by ` 27 crore including depreciation on additions, but excluding interest

on additional capital.

— Additional capital of ` 50 crore will be needed for capital expenditure and working capital.

You are required to calculate –

(i) Sales required to earn `7 crore over and above the present profit and also to meet 20% interest on

additional capital;

(ii) Revised break-even point;

(iii) Revised P/V ratio; and

(iv) Revised margin of safety.

Solution:

Total Sales = Break even sales + Margin of Safety

= ` 200 Crore + ` 50 Crores = ` 250 Crores

P/V Ratio = 40% (given) (100 – PV Ratio)

Variable Cost = 60% of Sales

= ` 250 Crores × 60% = ` 150 Crores

Fixed cost = Break Even Sales × P/V Ratio

= ` 200 Crores × 40% = ` 80 Crores

Total Cost = Variable Cost + Fixed Cost

= ` 150 Crores + ` 80 Crores = ` 230 Crores

Profit = Total Sales – Total Cost

= ` 250 Crores - ` 230 Crores = ` 20 Crores

Illustration 27

A company has annual fixed cost of ` 1,68,00,000. In the year 2013-14, sales amounted to ` 6,00,00,000 as

compared with ` 4,50,00,000 in the preceding year 2012-13. The profit in the year 2013-14 is `42,00,000

more than that in 2012-13. On the basis of the above information, answer the following:

(i) What is the break-even level of sales of the company?

(ii) Determine profit/loss on the forecast of a sales volume of ` 80,00,00,000.

Lesson 8

Marginal Costing

369

(iii) If there is a reduction in selling price by 10% in the financial year 2014-15 and company desires to

earn the same amount of profit as in 2013-14, what would be the required sales volume?

Solution:

(i) P/V Ratio =

Sales in Change

Profits in Change

000,00,450000,00,600

100000,00,42

−

×

=

= 28%

Break Even Sales =

RatioP/V

Costs Fixed

%28

000,00,68,1

=

= ` 600,00,000

(ii) Contribution for Sales Volume of ` 800,00,000 = P/V Ratio × Sales

= 28% × 800,00,000

= ` 224,00,000

Profits = Contribution – Fixed costs

= ` 224,00,000 – ` 168,00,000

= ` 56,00,000

`

(iii) If Selling Price is 100

Variable Cost is (`100 – `28) 72

New Selling Price (`100 -10%) 90

New Contribution (`90 – `72) 18

New P/V Ratio

90

10018 ×

=

= 20%

Contribution for Sales Volume of ` 600,00,000 for the year 2013-14

= P/V Ratio × Sales

= 28% × ` 600,00,000

= ` 168,00,000

Desired Profits = Contribution – Fixed Costs

= ` 168,00,000 – ` 168,00,000

= Nil

Required Sales Volume

RatioP/V

Profits DesiredCosts Fixed +

=

%20

000,00,68,1`

=

= `840,00,000]

EP-CMA

370

Illustration 28

Two manufacturing companies which have the following operating details decided to merge:

Company – I Company – II

Capacity utilization (%) 90 60

Sales (` In lakhs) 540 300

Variable costs (` In lakhs) 396 225

Fixed costs (` in lakhs) 80 50

Assuming that the proposal is implemented, calculate –

(i) Break-even sales of the merged plant and the capacity utilization at that stage.

(ii) Profitability of the merged plant at 80% capacity utilization.

(iii) Sales turnover of the merged plant to earn a profit of ` 75 lakh.

(iv) When the merged plant is working at a capacity to earn a profit of `75 lakh, what percentage

increase in selling price is required to sustain an increase of 5% in fixed overheads?

Solution:

(i) Position of the Merged Plant at 100% capacity

(

`

in lakhs)

Company I

Company I I

Total

Sales

Less:

Variable Costs

Contribution

Less:

Fixed Costs

Profit

600

440

160

80

500

375

125

50

75

1,100

815

285

130

155

P/V Ratio of the merged plant =

100

Sales

onContributi

×

%909.25100

1100

285

=×=

Break ever sales of the merged plant =

RatioP/V

Cost Fixed

=

285

100,1130 ×

= ` 501.75 lakhs

Percent of capacity utilization

%61.45100

100,1

75.501

=×=

Lesson 8

Marginal Costing

371

(ii) Profitability of the merged plant at 80% capacity

`

(Lakhs)

Sales (at 80% capacity i.e., 80% of ` 1,100 lakh) 880

Less:

Variable Costs (80% of ` 815 lakh) 652

Contribution 228

Less:

Fixed costs 130

Profit 98

OR

Total contribution at 80% capacity = 285 lakh × 80% = 228

Less:

Fixed costs 130

Profit 98

Profitability

%14.11100

880

98

=×=

(iii) Sales required to earn a profit of

`

` `

`

75 lakh:

RatioP/V

Profit Desired Costs Fixed +

=

25.909%

lakh 75 lakhs 130 `` +

=

= `791.23 lakh

(iv) Percentage of increase in selling price to sustain 5% increase in fixed overheads:

5% of fixed costs

100

5130 ×

=

= `Rs. 6.5 lakh

Percentage increase in selling price =

%8215.0100

23.791

5.6

=×

LESSON ROUND UP

•

Marginal cost is the cost of one unit of product or service which would be avoided if that unit were not

produced or provided. In other words marginal cost is the amount at any given volume of output by which

the aggregate costs are changed if the volume of output is increased or decreased by one unit.

•

Marginal costing is the accounting system in which variable costs is charged to cost units and fixed costs of

the period are written-off in full against the aggregate contribution. Its special value is in decision-making.

•

Contribution or gross margin is the difference between sales and the marginal cost of sales. Fixed costs are

written off against contribution during the period. Thus:

Selling price – Variable cost = Contribution

Contribution – Fixed costs = Profit

Fixed costs + Profit = Contribution

Sales = Marginal costs + Fixed costs + Profit.

EP-CMA

372

•

Absorption costing is a method of costing by which all direct costs and applicable overheads are charged to

products or cost centres for finding out the total cost of production. Absorbed cost includes production cost

as well as administrative and other costs. It is a principle whereby fixed as well as variable costs are

allotted to cost units, i.e. full costs are charged to production.

•

Profit Volume Ratio (P/V Ratio) is the ratio or percentage of contribution margin to sales. i.e.

P V ratio/ =

Marginal C

ontributio

n

Sales

OR

Change in

Profits

/

Contributi

ons

Change in Sales

•

Break-even analysis is the categorization of costs into variable and fixed elements and their relationship

with sales and profits.

•

Break-even point is the level of activity where total revenue equals the total costs (variable and fixed). It is

that level of activity at which an enterprise makes neither a loss nor any profit. At break-even point, the

sales revenues are just equal to the costs incurred. i.e.

Break-even points (Units) =

Total fixe

d costs

(Selling price per unit - Marginal cost per unit)

OR

=

Total fixe

d costs

Contribution per unit

Break-even point (

`

)

=

Fixed Cost

P

/

V Ratio

OR

= Beak-even points (units)

×

Selling price per unit

•

Break-even chart is graphic presentation showing approximate profit or loss of an organization at different

levels of activity with in a limited range.

•

Cash break-even point is the level of activity where there is neither a cash profit nor a cash loss.

•

Profit volume graph is the graphical representation of the relationship between profit and volume.

•

BEP (%) + Margin of Safety (%)= 100%

•

Variable Cost ratio (%) + P/V Ratio (%) = 100%

•

Margin of safety is the difference between the actual sales and sales at break-even point. Margin of safety

is calculated as follows:

Margin of safety = Total sales - Break even sales

OR

Margin of safety =

Pr

ofit

P

/

V ratio

Margin of safety in percentage:

Margin of

safety

100

Total sale

s

×

Lesson 8

Marginal Costing

373

SELF TEST QUESTIONS

1. Define marginal cost and marginal costing. How variable costs and fixed costs are treated in

marginal costing?

2. What is contribution? How it is related to profits?

3. Explain the role of contribution technique in decision making, giving suitable illustrations.

4. “Fixed costs do not change with changes in volume and it is difficult for management to control

them”. Discuss.

5. “While variable costs are fixed per unit of output, the fixed costs are variable per unit of output

although all costs tend to be variable in the long run”. Explain.

6. What do you understand by P/V ratio? Discuss the importance of P/V ratio and state how P/V ratio

can be improved?

7. What is a break-even chart? What is a profit graph? State the purposes of constructing such charts.

8. Taking suitable data construct a simple break-even chart and show the break-even point, angle of

incidence and margin of safety on the chart.

9. Draw a break-even chart that will show contribution more clearly than the orthodox presentation.

Mention two other forms of break-even charts.

10. State the limitations of break-even charts.

11. Construct a profit graph with suitable data and obtain an equation of the profit line. Use this

equation to profit planning.

12. “The effect of a price reduction is always to reduce the P/V ratio to raise break-even point and to

shorten the margin of safety”. Explain and illustrate by numerical examples.

13. (a) What do you understand by break-even point?

(b) Explain the concept of break-even analysis.

14. (a) Distinguish between P/V ratio and break-even point?

(b) Explain the uses of profit volume analysis.

(c) What are the limitations of break-even analysis?

15. Kaku Ltd. produces one standards type of article. The results of the last four months of the year

2013 are as follows:

Output units

September, 2013 200

October, 2013 300

November, 2013 400

December, 2013 600

Prime cost is `10 per unit. Variable expenses are `2 per unit. Fixed expenses are `36,000 per

annum. Find out the cost per unit in each month.

[

Ans.:

September: `7.00, October: `22.00,

November: `19.50, December: `17.00].

EP-CMA

374

16. From the following data, which product would you recommend to be manufactured in a factory, time

being the key factor?

Per unit of Per unit of

Product A Product B

`

Direct material 24 14

Direct labour

(` 1 per hr.) 2 3

Variable overhead

(`2 per hr.) 4 6

Selling price 100 110

Standard time to produce 2 hrs. 3 hrs.

[

Ans.:

Contribution per hour: A: `35 per hr., B: `29 per hr.

Therefore product ‘A’ is recommended].

17. From the following information, find out the amount of profit earned during the year using the

marginal costing technique:

Fixed cost `5,00,000

Variable cost `10 per unit

Selling price `15 per unit

Output level 1,50,000 units

[

Ans.:

Profits: `2,50,000].

18. From the following data, recommend the most profitable product mix, presuming that direct labour

hours available are only 700:

Products

A B

Contribution per unit `30.00 `20.00

Direct labour per unit 10 hrs. 5 hrs.

The maximum production possible for each of the products A and B is 100 units. Fixed overheads

are `2,000. [

Ans.:

Product A - 20 units, Product B - 100 units; Net Profit - `600]

19. A new firm commenced production on 1st July. During the 6 months to 31st December, it produced

1,00,000 units, selling 80,000 out of these @ `20 per unit. The total costs were the following:

`

Materials 6,00,000

Labour 4,00,000

Production Overheads

Variable 3,00,000

Fixed 2,00,000

Administration and Selling expenses 1,50,000

Ascertain the profit under marginal costing and under absorption costing.

[

Ans.:

`2,10,000 and `2,50,000].

20. From the figures given below ascertain the marginal cost per unit:

October November

No. of units produced 10,000 9,000

Total cost of production `80,000 74,000 [`6 per unit]

Lesson 8

Marginal Costing

375

21. A factory produces 1,00,000 units and sells the whole quantity @ `25. The variable cost is `18 and

the fixed cost is `5 per unit. An order is received for 20,000 units @ `26 per unit. State the

circumstance(s) in which the order should be accepted.

(If there is idle capacity and if the order is from govt. or from abroad).

22. A company produces a component for its main product at a cost of `15 per unit  the operations

are heavily mechanised. An outsider offers to supply the component at `14, should the offer be

accepted? (No).

23. In a slump likely to last for one year, the available price is `20 per unit whereas the marginal cost is

`22. Should production be suspended? (No).

24. You are given the following data for the coming year of a factory:

Budgeted output 80,000 units

Fixed expenses `4,00,000

Variable expenses per unit `10

Selling price per unit `20

Draw a break even chart showing the break-even point. If the selling price is reduced to `16 per unit

what will be the new break-even point?

25. (a) Explain P/V ratio.

(b) The sales turnover and profit during two periods were as follows:

Period No. 1 Sales `20 lakhs Profit `2 lakhs

Period No. 2 Sales `30 lakhs Profit `4 lakhs

(i) Calculate P/V Ratio, (ii) The sales required to earn a profit of `5 lakhs.

26. What do you understand by the term ‘break-even point’? Mention the types of problems which an

accountant can expect to solve with the help of such analysis.

You are required to calculate the break-even point in the following case:

The fixed costs for the year are `80,000, variable cost per unit for the single product is `4.

Estimated sales for the period are valued at `2,00,000. The number of units involved coincides with

the expected volume of output. Each unit sells at `20.

27. From the following results of a company, determine by how much the value of sales must be

increased for the company to break-even?

Net sales `4,00,000

Fixed costs `2,00,000

Variable costs `2,40,000

Use a break-even chart to illustrate the case.

28. Golden Ltd. has annual fixed cost of `1,20,000. In the year 2010 sales amounted to `6,00,000 as

compared with `4,50,000 in 2012 and the profit for 2013 was `50,000 higher than in 2012. You are

required to:

(i) Estimates profits for 2014 on forecast sales volume of `8,40,000 on the assumption that this

would not involve any addition to the company’s capacity; and

(ii) Calculate the break-even sales volume (in rupees) [

Ans.:

(i) `1,50,000 (ii) `3,60,000]

EP-CMA

376

29. Following informations are available from the cost records of a manufacturing company:

Fixed expenses `4,000

Break-even point `10,000

You are required to calculate:

(i) P/V ratio

(ii) Profit where sales are `20,000

(iii) New break even point if selling price is reduced by 20%.

[

Ans.:

(i) 40%; (ii) `4,000; (iii) `16,000].

30. From the following information, calculate the break-even point and the turnover required to earn a

profit of `36,000.

`

Fixed overheads 1,80,000

Variable cost per unit 2.00

Selling price 20.00

If the company is earning a profit of `36,000 express the margin of safety available to it.

[

Ans.:

10,000 units; `2,40,000; `40,000].

31. Merry Manufacturers Ltd., has supplied you the following information in respect of one of its

products:

Total fixed costs 18,000

Total variable costs 30,000

Total sales 60,000

Unit sold 20,000

Find out:

(a) Contribution per unit,

(b) Break-even point,

(c) Margin of safety

(d) Profit and

(e) Volume of sales to earn a profit of `24,000.

[

Ans.:

(a) `1.50; (b) 12,000 units; (c) 8,000 units;

(d) `12,000; (e) 28,000 units].

Lesson 9

Standard Costing

•

Standard Costing

– Definition and Meaning

– Significance/ Advantage

– Applications

•

Various Types of Standards

•

Standard Costing System:

– Installations, Functions and Features of

a Standard Costing System

•

Standard Cost for Material, Labour &

Overhead

•

Variance Analysis

•

Two way analysis of variances

•

Material Variance

•

Labour Variance

•

Overhead Variance

– Variable overhead variance

– Fixed overhead variance

•

Accounting Treatment of Variances

•

Benchmarking for Setting of Standards

•

Variance Reporting to Management

•

Lesson Round Up

•

Self Test Questions

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

The term standard cost refers to the cost that

management believes should be incurred to produce

a goods or service under anticipated conditions.

Establishing a Standard costing system will be quite

useful to the Management in both planning and

control. In the planning stage, it can assist the

Management with necessary data; at the control

stage, it can be used to find the deviations between

the actuals vis-a-vis the standards. The

measurement of such deviations is carried out

through the technique of variance analysis.

This chapter examines the functional-based standard

costing systems in managing costs, improving

planning and control and facilitating decision making

and product costing. It provides detailed discussion

of cost variance analyses for all product cost

elements and considers their behavioral implications.

Mix and yield variance analyses are also presented

when it is possible to make input substitutions.

After studying this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Explain how standard costs are set.

2. Explain the concept of standard costing.

3. Identify and describe the purpose of a

standard costing system.

4. Practical applications of standard costing.

5. Compute and analyse the direct material,

direct labour and overhead variances and

explain how they are used for control.

6. Calculate mix and yield variances for direct

materials and direct labour.

“Standard costing discloses the cost of deviations from standard and classifies these as to their causes, so that

management is immediately informed of the sphere of operations in which remedial action is necessary.” –W.W. Bigg

LESSON

OUTLINE

EP-CMA

378

STANDARD COSTING

Cost control, leading to cost reduction, should always be the objective of any firm or institution where scarce

resources are used. Even if the firm can sell its goods of services at a very remunerative price, it should still

try to reduce the use of factors of production, without jeopardising the quality of the product or the services.

The best way of doing this is to constantly think as to whether the cost can be further reduced, but the first

step is to try to see that these do not go beyond a level determined beforehand. If this approach is adopted,

i.e., if an attempt is made to ascertain beforehand what costs should be and a further attempt is made to see

that actual costs do not go beyond this level, the approach will be that of standard costing. In fact, it is the

philosophy of standards which will bring the best results and not merely the mechanism of adopting the

standard costing techniques. The philosophy of standards, in a nutshell, means scrupulously separating all

types of wastages and losses and not allowing them to cloud the cost of production, at least for purposes of

internal consumption. Suppose, a worker normally working 8 hours should produce 20 units for a wage of

`20; the proper labour cost of production is `1 per unit. Suppose for any reason the worker produces only 12

units. Normally, the payment of `20 will be spread over 12 units and one would say that the labour cost per

unit is `1.67. But if the philosophy of standards is practised, one would say that the proper labour cost of 12

units will still remain `1 per unit of `12 in all; 8 units have not been produced and, therefore, at the rate or `1

per unit, there is loss of `8. This amount should be charged to a separate account. This account should be

shown as a separate item in the revenue accounts of the firm so that management would know, at the end of

each period, the extent of losses that have unnecessarily taken place. Of course, if extra efficiency has been

obtained, the effect of that efficiency should be credited to a separate account and shown as a separate item

in the revenue account.

This really is the essence of standard costing - to set targets of cost, to try to achieve those targets, to

compare the actual cost with the targets, to ascertain the reasons and to record the reasons in the books of

account, or if a regular record is not maintained, at least to bring the monetary effects of various factors that

have operated in the organisation, to the notice of the management. Thus standard costing is an excellent

system of control of costs and of measuring efficiency, and of improving upon it.

It may be noted in passing that usually standard costs are also given the name of pre-determined costs. This

means that before work is actually started an extremely careful estimate of cost is prepared to serve as the

standard against which the actual is to be measured. This term should not be confused with pre-production

costs since that would mean the cost to be incurred actually before production commences, such as on trial

runs. Further, standards should not be confused with estimates. Estimates connote rather loose forecasts of

anything and in fact one thinks of actuals being correct and tends to judge the accuracy of estimates on the

basis of actuals. In case of standard costs, the emphasis is that the figures of standard costs are correct and

that one must explain why the actuals differ from the standards. Standards are far more exact and exacting

than forecasts or estimates.

DEFINITION AND MEANING

Standard costs are the scientifically pre-determined costs of manufacturing a single unit or a number of units

of product or of rendering a service during a specified future period. The Chartered Institute of Management

Accountants, London, defines standard cost as “a standard expressed in money. It is built up from an

assessment of the value of cost elements. Its main uses are providing bases for performance measurement,

control by exception reporting, valuing stock and establishing selling prices.”

What is evident from the above definition is that standard costs are planned costs of a product under current

or anticipated operating conditions. The dictionary meaning of the word ‘standard’ is that it is a “thing serving

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

379

as a basis for comparison”, “thing recognised as model for imitation”. But it should be noted ‘standard’ is a

relative term. Admittedly, what is standard for one may be substandard for another and vice versa. However,

what is significant is that within an organisation, it serves as a desirable target.

The term ‘standard cost’ consists of two parts, viz., ‘standard’ and ‘cost’. ‘Standards’ can be established in

respect of quantities and qualities like materials and labour. Cost involves the expression of the standard so

established in values.

CIMA defines standard costing as “a control technique which compares standard costs and revenues

with actual results to obtain variances which are used to stimulate improved performance”. The

technique of standard costing may be summarised as follows:

(i) Pre-determination of technical data related to production, i.e. details of materials and labour

operations required for each product, the quantum of losses, level of activity, etc.

(ii) Pre-determination of standard costs, in full details for each element of cost viz. material, labour and

overhead.

(iii) Comparison of the actual performances and costs with the standards and working out the variances

i.e., the difference between the actuals and the standards.

(iv) Analysis of the variances in order to determine the reasons for deviations of actuals from the

standards, and

(v) Presentation of information to the appropriate level of management for suitable action.

SIGNIFICANCE/ADVANTAGE OF STANDARD COSTING

Though the advantages will be fully comprehended when on has gone through the whole study paper and

has studied the various implications of standard costing, we give below the important significance/

advantages:

1. To determine standards which are at once practicable and represent efficient performance, the

management will have to be fully aware of all the facilities that are available, the best way in which

work can be done (for example, time and motion study is essential if labour standards are to be

fixed properly) and will have to gather continuous and up-to-date information about all the

happenings; this exercise will enable the firm to locate many sources of wastages and losses and to

block them.

2. Human beings often work hard to achieve standards which are within their reach; therefore, setting

up of such standards will almost automatically mean greater efficiency in operations. Further, almost

everyone will think in terms of setting the targets and of achieving them. This will be specially so if

the system of rewards and punishment is also geared to the results.

3. If standards are themselves challenged periodically on a systematic basis, it will mean a constant

increase in efficiency.

4. Standard costing involves not only pre-determined quantity standards but also standards in respect

of prices and rates. This may mean that all materials issued and labour applied will be evaluated on

the basis of standard price and rates. This will itself reduce clerical labour. One can say that in

general standard costing is more economical than the ordinary system of costing where quantities

and prices vary day by day or week by week.

5. Standard costing will enable objective judgement of the people and to that extent the systems of

promotions, etc., will be more acceptable in the firm.

EP-CMA

380

6. The management’s own time can be saved to a large extent because the attention of management

will be invited only to those matters which really require their attention. This will be done through the

analysis of the deviation between the standard costs and actual costs. Management need pay

attention only to those factors which have meant efficiency or inefficiency. (Management by

Exception).

7. For the purpose of fixing prices, standard costs play a useful role; they exclude the day-to-day

fluctuations in cost resulting from inefficient use of resources and movement in prices. Standard

cost represent the long-term estimates; cost and price, therefore, can be fixed on a long-term basis.

8. Even for valuation of inventory, standard cost should be the proper basis. If actual costs are high

only because there has been a wastage of resources, it is not proper to capitalise those losses by

including them in the value of inventory. Nothing becomes more valuable simply because of

wastage and, therefore, inventory values should better be determined on the basis of standard

costs.

9. In short, one can day that if a firm practices standard costing on proper lines, i.e., standards are

themselves determined in a way which will not impose too great a burden on the worker or other

employees or the firm, it may infuse in the minds of the staff a desire to achieve the standards and

thus show greater efficiency.

10. At every stage of setting the standards, simplification and standardisation of productions, methods

and operations are effected and waste of time and material is eliminated. This assists in managerial

planning for efficient operation and benefits all the divisions of the concern.

11. Costing procedure is simplified. There is a reduction in paper work in accounting and less number of

forms and records are required. There is considerable saving in clerical time and expenditure

leading to reduction in the cost of the costing system.

12. This system facilitates delegation of authority and fixation of responsibility for each department or

individual.

13. Where constantly reviewed, the standards provides means for achieving cost reduction. This is

attained through, improved quality of products, better materials and men, effective selection and use

of capital resources etc.

14. Standard costs assist in performance analysis by providing ready means for preparation and

interpretation of information.

15. This facilitates the integration of accounts so that reconciliation between cost accounts and financial

accounts may be eliminated.

APPLICATIONS OF STANDARD COSTING

Standard costing is quite useful to the management in its function say planing, controlling etc and most

important in decision making and performance evaluation. Standard costing can be used for:

1. Projecting the profit level of the business at any level of production.

2. To help in execution of management’s function effectively i.e. planning and controlling of cost.

3. To analyse the impact of cost if sales volume increase/decrease by certain percentage.

4. To measure the efficiency of production.

5. To measure the performance of each segment.

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

381

6. To identify and measurement of variances between standards and actuals.

7. To design performance measurement systems to encourage employees to participate for the

betterment of the Organisation.

REVIEW QUESTIONS

VARIOUS TYPES OF STANDARDS

As ‘standard’ is a relative expression, one has to determine for oneself what one deems appropriate as a

‘standard’. However, one should not lose sight of the objective which normally should be avoidance of all

losses and wastages as far as possible. Management may certainly fix standards on the basis of maximum

possible efficiency, possibly with an assumption of no wastage, no idle time, etc. However, this is not

realistic; the standard will be the ‘Ideal Standard’ but impracticable - no one will even make an attempt to

achieve it.

Alternatively an average of past few years’ costs could be taken as basis but this will mean perpetuating past

inefficiencies, by making them the target. This will defeat the very purpose of standard costing. A target

should be such that it will induce the worker to give out his best. In order to make people believe in standards

and to induce them towards achieving them, standards should better be such as can be achieved but with an

effort; in other words, they should be somewhat idealistic.

Basic Standard: This is a “standard” which is established for use, unaltered over a long period of time.

Standards are fixed scientifically and hence it is more of a technical job. These standards are supposed to

remain unchanged so long as quality requirements are constant. Moreover, if forward contracts are entered

into regarding materials and labour pact signed for a certain period, the costs can be planned accordingly.

Such costs, i.e., basic standards may, however, have to be adjusted for changes in circumstances in a

period.

Current Standard: In practice, standards are fixed on the basis of scientific studies but adjusted for current

subjective factors. A standard, therefore, is made realistic to reflect the anticipated conditions affecting

operations; it is not too idealistic. Such a standard would bring to sharp focus the avoidable causes for

variances, leading to control action. A current standard is a standard for a certain period, for certain condition

and for certain circumstances. Basic standards are more idealistic whereas current standards are more

realistic. Most companies use current and not basic standards.

Expected or Attainable Standard: A standard though idealistic should also be realistic. If targets are fixed

for a certain budgeted period, taking into account the expected conditions, it can be known as “expected

standard” or “attainable standard”. It is defined by CIMA, London as “a standard which can be attained if a

standard unit of work is carried out efficiently, a machine properly operated or a material properly used.

Allowances are made for normal losses, waste and machine downtime.”

Re-write the following sentence after filling-in the blank spaces with

appropriate word:

_________ is a technique which uses standards for costs and revenues for

the purpose of control through variance analysis.

Correct answer: Standard costing

EP-CMA

382

Normal Standard: Yet another target is one which is intended to cover a longer period of time - a period

long enough to cover one trade cycle, i.e., roughly 7 to 10 years. This is defined as “the average standard

which it is anticipated can be attained over a future period of time, preferably, long enough to cover one trade

cycle”.

Ideal Standard: This standard refers to the target which can be attained under most ideal conditions. Hence,

it is more idealistic and less realistic. It is defined by the Terminology as: “The standard which can be

attained under the most favourable conditions, with no allowance for normal losses waste and machine down

time”.

STANDARD COSTING SYSTEM

Standard costing system provides standard cost for budgeting purpose to plan future performance.

Standards are pre-determined and it helps organisation to achieve its objectives in economic and efficient

manner. It can be used to motivate employee to achieve set standards of production/expenses level i.e. ideal

standards. It provides some allowances for wastage and idle time (attainable standards), it recognizes the

fact the labour are likely to waste some material and will become absent for various reasons like sickness.

A standard costing system initially records the cost of production at standard. Units of inventory flow through

the inventory accounts (work-in-process finished goods cost of goods sold) at their per-unit

standard cost. Standards are compared with actual outcomes to find deviations and reasons for these

deviations, so that corrective action can be taken. It helps in managing human resources by giving them

signal that their performances are being measured, compared and analysed.

Rewards can be given and Disciplinary action can be taken based on pre-defined criteria communicated to

them, so that decisions regarding whatever action taken can be justified to avoid resentment among

workforce. The management evaluates the performance of a company by comparing it with some

predetermined measures. Therefore, it can be used as a process of measuring and correcting actual

performance to ensure that the plans are properly set and implemented

INSTALLATION OF A STANDARD COSTING SYSTEM

The installation of a standard costing system involves the following steps:

• To Set the predetermined standards for sales margin and production costs

• To ascertain and collect the actual results

• To compare the actual performance with pre-determined standards

• To determine the variances

• To analyze and investigate the variances

• To ascertain the causes of variance

• To take corrective action where necessary.

• To adjust the budget in order to make the standards more realistic

FUNCTIONS OF STANDARD COSTING SYSTEM

• Valuation: Assigning the standard cost to the actual output.

• Planning: Use the current standards to estimate future sales volume and future costs.

• Controlling: Evaluating performance by determining how efficiently the current operations are

being carried out.

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

383

FEATURES OF A STANDARD COSTING SYSTEM

• The fact that standards are based on estimates.

• Standards will change according to conditions.

• It provides continual incentive for employee to keep costs and performance in line with

predetermined standard.

• A standard cost system helps focus management’s attention on the following questions and their

causes:

(a) Were materials purchased at prices above or below standard?

(b) Were materials used in quantities above or below standard?

(c) Is labour being paid at rates above or below standard?

(d) Is labour being used in amounts above or below standard?

STANDARD COSTS FOR MATERIAL, LABOUR AND OVERHEAD

It should be noted that though standards must be set for materials, labour and overheads, only an integrated

approach will bring the best results. There can be saving in labour, for example, if materials of certain quality

or size are purchased or if more automatic machines are introduced. When standards are to be laid down,

the exact process of production and the facilities that are to be used for the purpose should be decided and

taken into account. Then only the standards can be fixed properly.

The first step in the development of a standard costing system is to set standard cost, i.e., to predetermine

the standards in respect of each element of cost - direct material, direct labour and overheads. Extreme care

is essential in the fixation of standards as the success of a standard costing system depends largely upon

the accuracy of the standard costs used. While setting production cost standards, the following factors

should be considered:

(i) Technical and operational aspects of the concern.

(ii) Industrial engineering criteria for materials, labour, etc.

(iii) The type of standard to be used.

(iv) Proper classification of the accounts so that variance may be determined properly.

(v) Responsibility for setting standards. As definite responsibility for variances from standards is

ultimately to be laid on individuals or departments, it is obvious that all those individuals or

departments should be associated with setting of standards.

DIRECT MATERIALS STANDARDS

The standard cost of direct materials is closely related to the quantities and prices of materials to be used in

production. Hence, two related standards are set:

(i) Materials Usage Standard: The object of setting the materials usage standard is to achieve

maximum efficiency in materials usage. The first step in this connection lies in specifying the size

and quality of materials. This is followed by an analysis of the materials requirements. A list is

prepared showing the details of materials-size, grade, quantity etc. - for setting the standard. This is

known as a ‘Standard Materials Specification.’ The standard quantities of materials to be used per

unit of production can be laid down by one of the following means:

(a) By reference to the weight of materials in the final production.

EP-CMA

384

(b) On the basis of past performance with due allowance for change in conditions.

(c) By means of test runs conducted under different conditions and taking an average of quantities

used.

Due allowance must be made for normal wastage. This is generally based on an estimate wastage

which is unavoidable, e.g., normal loss through evaporation, off-cuts, broken parts, etc.

(ii) Materials Price Standard: Standards are set for material prices after due consideration of the

efficiency of purchasing and store-keeping functions. The aim of setting materials price standard is

to achieve maximum efficiency in these function, and thus minimise direct materials costs. The price

standard should provide for discount on purchases, economy of bulk purchasing and anticipated

changes in market price.

STANDARD COST FOR DIRECT LABOUR

Direct labour costs depends upon labour time and wage rates and therefore, setting standard cost for direct

labour involves setting two related standard:

(i) Standard Labour Time: This indicates the precise time (hours) that labour of a particular grade

should take to perform a given operation. The main object of setting standard labour time is to

derive maximum efficiency in the use of labour time. The standard time may be set on the basis of

past performance with adjustments for change of conditions. Time and motion studies are a great

help in setting standard time.

(ii) Labour Rate Standard: This refers to the wage rates expected to be paid to different grades of

labour employed in the organisation. The object is to plan for the actual wages to be paid. A variety

of factors should be considered and allowance made for them while setting standard wage rates,

principal of them are-future trend of wages which can be anticipated; collective agreement between

labour and management; guaranteed minimum wages; and overtime wages, if the level of activity

makes overtime inevitable.

Both these standards must be set after a detailed study of labour work involved. Besides, the workers

employed must be graded on a standard basis.

STANDARD OVERHEAD RATES

The principal object of setting standard overhead rates is to minimise the overhead costs chargeable to

production. Following steps are necessary for setting standard rates:

(i) The level of activity of production departments and the work to be done by the service departments

should be determined.

(ii) Overheads costs should be classified into fixed, variable and semi-variable overheads. The costs

expected to be incurred under each head for each of the production and service departments

should be calculated for a given period. The expected costs may be laid down in details in the form

of cost-budgets based on past experience, present conditions and future trends.

(iii) The standard overhead rates for each of the service departments should be calculated, and applied

to the producing departments.

(iv) The standard overhead rates for the producing departments may be determined as a direct labour

hour rate, or a machine hour rate, or as a percentage of direct wages. The rates may be computed

using the following ratios:

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

385

Direct Labour rate =

periodgivenaduringhoursLabour

overheadsofAmount

Machine hour rate =

periodgivenaduringhoursMachine

overheadsofAmount

Percentage of Direct Wages =

periodgivenaduringurCostDirectLabo

overheadsofAmount

STANDARD ADMINISTRATION COSTS

The object of setting standard administration cost is to secure the maximum quantity and quality of

administrative services at minimum cost. For this purpose, all administrative functions should be studied in

detail. O and M division by examining the office operations and suggesting simplification and standardisation

of methods and procedures may help a lot in this.

The standard quantity of work to be performed may be set by one or more of the following methods:

I. On the basis of past performance:

II. On the advice of organisation and methods team;

III. Time and motion studies; and

IV. Choosing appropriate ‘work units’ and fixing standard costs per work-unit.

Administrative costs should be classified into fixed, variable and semi-variable items before setting the

standard rates.

STANDARD COST FOR SELLING AND DISTRIBUTION

Since selling and distribution expenses are primarily related to volume of sales, a sales forecast is essential

before setting standards of selling and distribution costs. The classification of these costs into fixed, variable

and semi-variable items is necessary. Another pre-requisite for setting standards is a detailed examination of

the functions and determining standard units of operation.

VARIANCE ANALYSIS

The primary object of standard costing is to reveal the difference between actual cost and standard cost. A

‘variance’ in standard costing refers to the divergence of actual cost from standard cost. Variances of

different cost items provide the key to cost control. They indicate whether and to what extent standards set

have been achieved. This enables management to correct adverse tendencies.

After standard costs have been established, the next step is to ascertain the actual cost under each element

and compare them with the standard cost. The difference between these two is termed as cost variance.

Cost variance is the difference between a standard cost and the comparable actual cost incurred during a

given period.

The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants London, defines variance as

“the difference between planned, budgeted, or standard cost and actual cost; and similarly for

revenue”.

Variance analysis can be defined as “the analysis of performance by means of variances”. It is the process of

computing the amount of and isolating the cause of variances between actual costs and standard costs.

EP-CMA

386

Variance analysis involves:

(a) Computation of individual variances, and

(b) Determination of the cause(s) of each variance.

Actual cost which is higher than the standard costs would be a sign of inefficiency and the difference would

be termed as unfavourable or adverse. A variance that reduces profit is adverse or unfavourable. A variance

that increases profit is favourable. Variance are computed under each element of cost for which standards

have been established. Each variance is analysed to ascertain the causes so that the management can

exercise proper control. The cause is affixed to the variance, for example, materials price variance will show

that the variance arose due to change in the price of materials. Some of the variance are controllable while

others are not. The purpose of such classification is that proper emphasis can be placed on the controllable

variance. This follows the principle of management by exception.

Variances occurring in a period may be compared with variances on the same account expressed as a

percentage of the standard costs and compared with the percentage for the previous month. Comparison

may be made between the standard and actual or between basic standard and current standard.

As already stated, the origin and causes of the variances need to be traced by analysing the total variances

into their components parts in order to determine and isolate the causes giving rise to each variance.

Equal emphasis should be laid on favourable and unfavourable variances. An unfavourable variance points

out the inefficiency in use or waste of materials, labour, and resources. A favourable variance may be due to

improvement in efficiency or production of substandard products or an incorrect standard. An unfavourable

variance may be off-set by a favourable variance; hence the need for analysis and appropriate action.

A detailed probe into the variances, particularly the controllable variance, helps the management to

ascertain:

(a) the amount of variance;

(b) its occurrence;

(c) the factors responsible for it;

(d) the executive responsible for the variance;

(e) corrective action which should be taken to obviate or reduce the variance.

Favourable and Unfavourable Variance: If the actual cost is less than standard cost, the difference is

known as a favourable variance, credit variance or positive variance denoted by (F) or Cr. - it increases the

profit. on the other hand, if actual cost exceeds, standard costs, the divergence is known as an unfavourable

variance, debit variance, negative variance or adverse variance denoted by (A) or Dr. - it reduces the profit.

Controllable and Uncontrollable Variance: When the variance with respect to any cost item reflects the

degree of efficiency of an individual or department, i.e., a particular individual or departmental head is

responsible for the variance, the variance is known as a controllable variance. Obviously, such a variance is

amenable to control by suitable action. An uncontrollable variance is one which is not amenable to control by

individual or departmental action. Such a variance is caused by external factors like change in market

conditions, fluctuations in demand and supply, etc. No particular individual within the organisation can be

held responsible for it.

When variances are reported, attention of the management is particularly drawn towards controllable

variances. If a variance has been caused by multiple factors, the part of cost variance relevant to each factor

should be determined.

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

387

There are certain variances which may arise under material, labour or overhead due to change in the basic

condition on which the standards are established.

Revision Variance: This is amount by which a budget is revised but which is not incorporated in the

standard cost rate as a matter of policy. The standard costs may be affected by wage rate changes after

wage accords, fiscal policy etc. The standard costs are not disturbed to account for these uncontrollable

factors and to avoid the amount of labour and cost involved in revision, the basic standard costs are allowed

to stand. It is essential to isolate the variance arising out of non-revision in order to analyse the other

variances correctly.

Method Variance: It is the difference between the standard cost of the product manufactured or operation

performed by the normal methods and the cost of operation by alternative method. Standards usually take

into account the best method applicable, and any deviation will result in an unfavourable variance. Hence

such deviations should be as few as possible.

Variance analysis usually proceeds after amending the standards according to the revision variance and the

methods of variance.

Illustration 1

Standard cost of a product in a factory is predetermined as follows:

`

Material (5 units @ `4 each) 20

Labour (20 hours @ `1.50 per hour) 30

Overhead expenses 10

Total 60

During a period, 8,000 units were produced whose actual cost was as follows:

`

Material (40,500 units @ `5 each) 2,02,500

Labour (1,50,000 hours @ `1.60 each) 2,40,000

Overhead expenses 90,000

Total 5,32,500

Prepare a statement showing standard cost, actual cost and variances.

Solution:

Statement of Standard Cost, Actual Cost, and Variances

Particulars Standard cost (`) Actual cost (`) Variance (`)

Material 1,60,000 2,02,500 42,500 (A)

Labour 2,40,000 2,40,000 —

Overhead expenses 80,000 90,000 10,000 (A)

Total 4,80,000 5,32,500 52,500 (A)

EP-CMA

388

The above statement shows the variance in respect of each element of cost. Each such variance can be

further analysed. Before making such analysis it is necessary to recognise the two broad process in cost

accumulation. The cost is first incurred and then charged to production. For example, materials are

purchased first (normally) and then issued for production and wages are incurred first and then charged to

production on the basis of time spent on production. Thus, there are two stages in cost accumulation,

namely, (i) the incurring stage, (ii) the recovery stage. The recognition of these two stages is essential

because variances arise both at the incurring and recovery stages. Analysis involves identifying and

quantifying the variances at both these stages.

Before we proceed to analyse the variances, the following essential points should be noted regard to the

utility of the variance analysis:

(i) Variances should not be automatically applied for control purposes. They are just indicators of

where the reason for higher cost exists. It is upto the controlling authority to judge whether the

higher costs are well justified. The actual cost may be higher due to factors absolutely out of the

control of the responsible authority and perhaps the responsible authority had contributed in

preventing the actual cost from escalating too high. In such a situation applying controls implicit on

the basis of variances disclosed will lead to demoralisation of staff.

(ii) While comparing the actual costs with the standards, the level of activity should be checked up for

comparability. If standards have been evolved for a budgeted level of activity and if the actual level

is different, a simple comparison of actuals with budgets would be erroneous. The standards should

be revised in accordance with the actual level of activity attained. But, in doing so care should be

taken to distinguish between fixed costs and variable costs. The difference between the original

standard and revised standard is known as “Revision Variance”.

(iii) While working out the variance in respect of fixed costs (particularly fixed overheads), it should be

kept in mind that what is charged to cost is not the actual cost but an amount based on pre-

determined recovery rates multiplied by the output which may be expressed in standard hours.

TWO-WAY ANALYSIS OF VARIANCES

Each variance has to be analysed as (i) incurring variance, and (ii) recovery variance. Also, broadly, the

causes leading to a variance may be either efficiency or inefficiency in the use of resources or change in the

price paid for the resources. Accordingly, we have the following analysis:

(i) Material cost variance - Material price variance

- Material usage variance

(ii) Labour cost variance - Labour rate variance

- Labour time variance

(iii) Overheads cost variance - Overhead expenditure variance

- Overhead volume variance

As each element of cost is analysed into two broad groups. It is known as “Two- way Analysis”.

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

389

MATERIAL VARIANCE

Classification of material variances are as under:

Material Mix Variance (MMV)

Material Usage

Variance (MUV)

Material Cost

Variance (MCV)

Material Yield Variance

(MYV)

Or

Material Sub-usage Variance

(MSUV)

Material Price

Variance (MPV)

MATERIAL COST VARIANCES

Materials cost variance is the difference between the standard cost of materials specified and the actual cost

of materials used.

Material cost variances arise due to variation in the price of the material or in its usage. In accordance with

this, material cost variances may be analysed under two heads, viz. material price variance and material

usage variance.

MATERIAL PRICE VARIANCE

This is that portion of the material cost variance which is due to the difference between the standard price

specified and the actual price paid. Material price variance is that portion of the direct materials cost variance

which is the difference between the standard price specified and actual price paid for the direct materials

used. This is an “incurring” variance. This reflects the extra price paid on the units purchased. While making

this calculation standard consumption of units should not be given any consideration. It is computed by

Material Cost Variance= Standard Cost of Material for Actual Output – Actual Cost of Materials Used

OR

(TSC – TAC)

OR

(SQ × SP) – (AQ × AP)

EP-CMA

390

multiplying the actual quantity by the difference between the standard price and the actual price. The formula

is:

In other words, material price variance is the difference between ‘what it actually cost and what it would have

cost if the actual usage had been paid for at the standard price’.

Causes of Material Price Variance

The reasons for material price variance may be one or more of the following:

(i) Changes in market price of materials used;

(ii) Changes in quantity of purchase or uneconomical size of purchase order resulting in a different

price;

(iii) Failure to obtain cash and/or trade discounts which were provided while setting standards;

(iv) Rush order to meet shortage of supply;

(v) Failure to take advantage of off-season price, or failure to purchase when price is cheaper;

(vi) Emergency purchase on the request of production/sales manager;

(vii) Changes in issue price due to differences in changes related to store-keeping, materials handling,

carriage inward expenses etc.;

(viii) Changes in the amount of taxes and duties;

(ix) Changes in quality or specification of materials purchased;

(x) Use of substitute material having a higher or lower unit price;

(xi) Changes in the pattern or amount of taxes and duties.

The materials price variance is generally the responsibility of the purchase manager. However, the variance

may be ultimately traceable to factors beyond his control like changes in the market price.

MATERIAL USAGE VARIANCE

This is that portion of material cost variance which is due to the difference between the standard quantity of

materials specified and the actual quantity used. Material usage variance is that portion of the direct material

cost variance which is the difference between the standard quantity specified for the production achieved

and the actual quantity used both valued at standard prices. The difference of actual quantity of materials

used from the standard quantity set, multiplied by the standard price is known as the materials usage

variance. The formula for the calculation of this variance is:

Material Price Variance = Actual Quantity (Standard unit price – Actual unit price)

OR

AQ (SP – AP)

Material Usage Variance = Standard Price (Actual Quantity – Standard Quantity)

i.e. SP (AQ – SQ)

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

391

Causes of Material Usages Variance

The usage variance may have been caused by one or more of the undernoted factors:

(i) Lack of due care in the use of materials;

(ii) Defective production necessitating additional materials for correction;

(iii) Abnormal wastage through pilferage or other losses in the use of materials;

(iv) Inefficiency in production due to improper method or lack of necessary skill in workmen;

(v) Use of a material-mix other than the standard mix; and

(vi) Yield from materials in case excess of or less than that provided as the standard yield;

(vii) Purchase of inferior materials or change in quality of materials;

(viii) Rigid technical specifications and strict inspection leading to more rejections which require more

materials for rectifications;

(ix) Use of substitute material leading to poor quality;

(x) Improper maintenance of machine leading to breakdowns and more use of materials; and

(xi) Poor inspection of raw materials.

A favourable variance may not always be advantageous for the concern. For instance, a saving in material

usage may perhaps be effected by a reduction in wastage by slowing down the work but the resulting

increase in the labour and overhead costs may far exceed the favourable materials usage variance.

Material usage variance may further classified into:

MATERIAL MIX VARIANCE

One of the reasons for material usage variance is change in the composition of the materials mix. It results

from a variation in the material mix used in production. Thus, if a larger proportion of the more expensive

material is used than that laid down in the standard mix, materials usage will reflect a higher cost than the

standard. Contrarily, the use of cheaper materials in large proportions will indicate a lower cost of materials

usage than the standard.

It is that portion of the material usage variance which is due to the difference between the standard and

actual composition of a mixture of materials. In other words, this variance arises due to a change in the ratio

of actual material mix from the standard ratio of material mix. It is calculated as the difference between the

standard price of standard mix and the standard price of actual mix.

Suppose for producing an article the materials standard is 6 kg. of material A @ ` 5 per Kg. and 4 Kg. of

material B @ ` 6 per kg. and the actual quantities used are 5 kg. of material A and B each. The total quantity

used is still 10 kg. but the materials cost will increase as shown below:

` `

Standard: Material A 6 kg. @ ` 5 30.00

Material B 4 kg. @ ` 6 24.00 54.00

Actual: Material A 5 kg. @ ` 5 25.00

Material B 5 kg. @ ` 6 30.00 55.00

EP-CMA

392

Material Yield Variance = Standard cost per unit (Actual yield – Standard yield)

i.e. SC p.u. (AY-SY)

Due to the change in the relative proportions of the two materials, the total cost has risen; this is the nature of

the mix variance. It is calculated by comparing (revised) standard mix at standard prices and the actual mix

at standard prices.

Revised Standard Quantity (RSQ)

material each ofQuantity Standard

(TSQ) material of types all of quantities Standard of Total

(TAQ) material of types all of quantities Actualof Total

×=

REVIEW QUESTIONS

MATERIALS YIELD VARIANCE

Yield variance is the difference between the standard yield specified and the actual yield obtained. In other

words, the difference between actual yield of materials in manufacture and the standard yield (i.e. expected

yield from a given standard input) valued at standard output price is known as materials yield variance. This

variance is of great significance in processing industries, in which the output of one process becomes the

input of the next process till the finished product is obtained at the final stage. The analysis of this variance

helps effective control over usage. A low actual yield is unfavourable yield variance which indicates that

consumption of materials was more than the standard. A high actual yield indicates efficiency, but a constant

high yield is a pointer for the revision of the standard.

Note: AY will never change. SY will calculate for actual mix of quantity as under:

New SY=

TAQ

TSQ

SY Old

×

The yield variance may be caused by such factors as: defective methods of operation, sub-standard quality

of materials purchased, lack of due care in handling, lack of proper supervision etc.

Re-write the following sentence after filling-in the blank spaces with

appropriate word:

(i) _________ is the difference between planned, budgeted or standard

cost and actual costs and similarly in respect of revenue.

(ii) The difference between standard material cost of actual production

and the actual cost of direct material is ________

Correct answer: (i) Variance (ii) Material cost variance

Material Mix Variance = Standard Price (Revised Standard Quantity – Actual Quantity)

i.e. SP (RSQ - AQ)

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

393

Point to be noted:

(i) Ensure the Level of output (yield i.e. AY/SY) is the same for actual data and standard data, if same

are the different then calculate new SY)

(ii) Always prepare cost sheet or put all given figure in a table before starting question for both standard

data and actual data for same level of output.

(iii) Write formula before computing variances.

(iv) Mix variance is computed when any difference is found in actual input and standard input for same

level of output.

(v) Material Yield Variance (MYV) is also known as Material Sub Usage Variance.

(vi) For calculating the MYV actual yield (AY) will never change whereas standard yield may be

changed.

Illustration 2

For producing one unit of a product, the materials standard is:

Material X : 6 kg. @ `8 per kg., and

Material Y : 4 kg. @ `10 per kg.

In a week, 1,000 units were produced the actual consumption of materials was:

Material X : 5,900 kg. @ `9 kg., and

Material Y : 4,800 kg. @ `9.50 per kg.

Compute the various variances.

Solution:

Standard cost of materials of 1,000 units:

`

Material X: 6,000 kg. @ ` 8 48,000

Material Y: 4,000 kg. @ ` 10 40,000

Total 88,000

Actual cost: Material X 5,900 kg. @ ` 9 53,100

Material Y 4,800 kg. @ ` 9.50 45,600

Total 98,700

Total materials cost variance 10,700 (A)

Analysis

Material Price Variance: Actual Quantity (Standard Price - Actual Price)

X = 5900 (` 8 - ` 9) = `5,900 (A)

Y = 4800 (` 10 - ` 9.50) = `2,400 (F)

3,500 (A)

Material Usage Variance: Standard Price (Standard Quantity - Actual Quantity)

X = `8 (6,000 - 5,900) = ` 800 (F)

Y = `10 (4,000 - 4,800) = `8,000 (A)

7,200 (A)

EP-CMA

394

Verification

Material Cost Variance = Materials price variance [`3,500 (A)] + Material Usage Variance

10,700 (A) = 3500 (A) + 7200 (A)

Material Mix Variance = SP (RSQ – AQ)

For Material X = `8 (6420 – 5900)

= `4160 (F)

For Material Y = 10 (4280 – 4800)

= `5200 (A)

`4160 (F) + `5200 (A) = `1040 (A)

Note: RSQ =

SQ

TSQ

TAQ

×

For X =

6

10

10700

×

= 6420 kg.

For Y

4

10

10700

×

= 4280 kg.

Material Yield Variance = SC per unit × (AY – SY)

= 88(1,000 – 1,070)

= ` 6,160

SC per unit =

SY

TSC

=

1

88

= 88 per unit

TSC = Standard cost of material X and material Y

= (6 × `8) + (4 × `10)

= `48 + `40

= `88

AY given in question i.e. 1000 kg.

New SY =

TAQ

TSQ

SY Old

×

=

10700

10

1

×

= 1070 kg.

Illustration 3

In a manufacturing process, the following standards apply:

Standard Price: Raw material A `1 per kg.

Raw materials B `5 per kg.

Standard Mix 75% A; 25% B (by weight)

Standard Yield : 90%

In a period the actual costs, usage and output were as follows:

Used: 4,400 kgs. of A costing `4,650

1,600 kgs. of B costing `7,850

Output: 5,670 kgs. of products

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

395

Solution:

Standard yield from 6,000, i.e. (4,400 + 1,600) kgs. of output is

`

6,000 kgs. × 90%, i.e. 5,400 kgs.

Material A (75%) = 4,500 kgs. @ `1 4,500

Material B (25%) = 1,500 kgs. @ `5 7,500

6,000 kgs. 12,000

Less: 600 kgs. (loss) —

Output: 5,400 kgs. 12,000

Standard cost of actual output (5,670 kgs.)

5670

5400

12000

×

`

= `12,600

Actual cost

Kgs. `

Material A 4,400 4,650

Material B 1,600 7,850

6,000 12,500

Less: 330 (loss) _____

5,670 12,500

Variance Analysis

Material cost variance = Actual cost - Standard cost

= `12,500 - `12,600 = `100 (F)

Price Variance = AQ (SP - AP)

OR

= (AQ × SP) – (AQ × AP)

OR

= (AQ × SP) – AC

Material A = (4400 × `1) – `4650 = `250 (A)

Material B = (1600 × `5) – `7850 = `150 (F)

= `100 (A)

Mix Variance = SP (RSQ – AQ)

Material A = `1 (4500 – 4400) = `100 (F)

Material B = `5 (1500 – 1600) = `500 (A)

= `400 (A)

RSQ for A, B is computed above in start.

Yield Variance = Standard cost per unit (Actual yield - Standard yield)

5400

12000

`

(5670 – 5400) = `600 (F)

EP-CMA

396

Total Material Cost Variance

`

Price Variance 100 (A)

Mix Variance 400 (A)

Yield Variance 600 (F)

100 (F)

Reconciliation

`

Standard cost of materials 12,600

Price Variance 100 (A)

Mix Variance 400 (A)

Yield Variance 600 (F)

Actual Cost 12,500

Illustration 4

The standard material input required for 1,000 kgs. of a finished product are given below:

Material

Quantity (Kg.) St. Rate per Kg. (`)

P

450 20

Q

400 40

R

250 60

1,100

Standard loss

100

Standard output

1,000

Actual production in a period was 20,000 kg. of finished product for which the actual quantities of material

used and the prices paid therefore were as under:

Material Quantity (Kg.) Purchase price per Kg. (`)

P 10,000 19

Q 8,500 42

R 4,500 65

Calculate:

(i) Material cost variance;

(ii) Material price variance;

(iii) Material usage variance; and

(iv) Material yield variance.

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

397

Also show a reconciliation of the variances.

Solution

Material Standard for 20,000 kg. Output Actual for 20,000 kg. Output

Qty. (kg.)

Rate (

`

)

`

Qty. (kg.)

Rate (

`

)

`

P 9,000

20

1,80,000

10,000

19

1,90,000

Q 8,000

40

3,20,000

8,500

42

3,57,000

R 5,000

60

3,00,000

4,500

65

2,92,500

22,000

8,00,000

23,000

8,39,500

Less: Loss

2,000

3,000

20,000

Calculation of Variances

(i) Material Cost Variance = Standard Cost – Actual Cost

= ` 8,00,00 – `8,39,500 = ` 39,500 (A)

(ii) Material price variance = Actual quantity (Standard price – Actual price)

P = 10,000 (`20 – `19) = `10,000 (F)

Q = 8,500 (`40 – `42) = `17,000 (A)

R = 4,500 (`60 – `65) = `22,500 (A)

= `29,500 (A)

(iii) Material usage variance = Standard price (Standard price – Actual quantity)

P = `20 (9,000 – 10,000) = `20,000 (A)

Q = `40 (8,000 – 8,500) = `20,000 (A)

R = `60 (5,000 – 4,500) = `30,000 (F)

= `10,000 (A)

(iv) Material yield variance = Standard cost per unit (Actual yield – Standard yield)

Standard cost per unit

000,20

000,00,8`

=

= `40

New Standard Yield

909,20000,23

000,22

000,0

=×=

2

Material yield variance = ` 40 (20,000 – 20,909) = ` 36,360 (A)

Reconciliation:

Material Cost Variance = Material Price Variance + Material Usage Variance

` 39,500 (A) = `29,500 (A) + `10,000 (A)

EP-CMA

398

LCV = (Standard Hours x Standard Rate) - (Actual Hours x Actual Rate)

OR

LCV = (SH x SR) – (AH x AR)

Labour Rate Variance = Actual Hours (Standard Rate - Actual Rate)

OR

LRV = AH x (SR – AR)

LABOUR VARIANCE

Classification of labour variances as under:

Labour Mix Variance (LMV)

Labour Idle Time

Labour Efficiency Variance (LITV)

Variance (LEV)

Labour Cost

Variance (LCV)

Labour Yield Variance

(LYV)

Or

Material Revised Efficiency

Variance (LREV)

Labour Rate

Variance (LRV)

LABOUR COST VARIANCES

Labour cost variance (also termed as direct wage variance) is the difference between the standard direct

wages specified for the activity achieved and the actual direct wages paid. The formula for labour cost

variance is:

As the cost of labour is determined by labour time and wages, the labour cost variance is composed of either

or both of variances relating to labour time and labour rate. As such, labour cost variance is analysed into

two separate variances, viz., wages (labour) rate variance and labour efficiency variance.

LABOUR RATE VARIANCE

This is that portion of the wages variance which is due to the difference between the actual rate and standard

rate of any specified. It is calculated like the materials price variance.

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

399

Labour Efficiency Variance = Standard Wage Rate (Standard Hours of Production – Actual Hours Worked)

OR

LEV = SR x (SH – AHW)

CAUSES OF WAGES (LABOUR) RATE VARIANCE

Wage rate variance occurs due to the following causes:

(i) Change in basic wage structure or change in piece work rate.

(ii) Overtime work in excess of that provided in the standard rate.

(iii) Employment of one or more workers of a different grade than the standard grade.

(iv) Payment of guaranteed wages to workers who are unable to earn their normal wages if such

guaranteed wages form part of direct labour cost.

(v) New workers not being allowed full normal wage rates.

(vi) Use of different method of payment i.e. payment of day rates while standards are based on piece

work method of remuneration.

(vii) Higher wages paid on account of overtime for urgent work.

(viii) The composition of a gang as regards the skill and rate of wages being different from that laid down

in the standard.

Wage rates are usually determined by factors beyond the control of the personnel department such as

conditions in the labour market, wage awards by wage boards, etc. Wage rate variances are therefore,

mostly uncontrollable except for the portion which arises due to deployment of wrong grade of labour for

which the departmental executive may be held responsible.

LABOUR TIME OR EFFICIENCY VARIANCE

Also termed as labour efficiency variance, is that portion of the direct wages variance which is due to the

difference between the standard labour hours specified and the actual labour hours expended. Obviously,

this variance provides a key to the control of workers’ efficiency and labour cost. In effect, it is a usage

variance. The computation of variance is as follows:

CAUSES OF LABOUR EFFICIENCY VARIANCE

The causes giving rise to labour efficiency variance are as follows:

(i) Lack of proper supervision or stricter supervision than specified;

(ii) Poor working conditions;

(iii) Defective machinery and equipment;

(iv) Discontentment in workers due to unsatisfactory personnel relations;

(v) Increase in labour turnover;

(vi) Use of non-standard material requiring more or less operation time;

EP-CMA

400

LABOUR COST VARIANCE = LABOUR EFFICIENCY VARIANCE + LABOUR RATE VARIANCE

OR

LCV = LEV + LRV

(vii) Basic inefficiency of workers due to insufficient training, faulty instructions, incorrect scheduling of

jobs, etc.

(viii) Wrong selection of workers.

Calculation of wage variance is illustrated below:

Example:

Assuming

Actual hours worked 5,600

Actual wage paid `7,840

Standard rate per hour `2

Standard hours produced 4,000

Answer:

Wages variance = Standard cost – Actual cost

(4,000 × `2) = `8,000 – `7,840 = `160 (F)

Wages rate variance = Actual hours (Standard rate - Actual rate)

= 5600 (2-1.4)

= `3,360 (F)

Actual Rate =

1.4`

`

=

5600

7840

Labour efficiency rate variance

2 (4,000 – 5,600) = `3,200 (A)

Labour Cost Variance= Labour Rate Variance + Labour Efficiency Variance

= 3360 (F) + 3200 (A)

= `160 (F)

Labour efficiency variance is sub-divided into the following variances:

(i) Idle time variance

(ii) Labour mix variance

(iii) Labour yield variance (or Labour revised-efficiency variance)

IDLE TIME VARIANCE

This variance which forms a portion of wages efficiency variance, is represented by the standard cost of the

actual hours for which the workers remain idle due to abnormal circumstances.

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

401

Labour Idle Time Variance (LITV) =

(Actual hours paid for x Standard rate) – (Actual hours worked x Standard rate)

OR

Idle Hours x Standard rate.

Labour mix variance =

(Actual hours at standard rate of actual gang – Actual hours at standard rate of standard gang)

OR

Standard rate (Revised standard labour hours - Actual labour hours)

OR

LMV = (RSH – AHW) x SR

Labour yield variance =

Standard labour cost unit (Actual output – Standard output)

OR

(Standard loss of actual total input – Actual loss) x

Average standard rate per unit.

OR

LYV = SC p.u. (AY

–

SY)

It is always adverse. Suppose in the example given above the actual time includes 1,000 idle hours. The Idle

Time Variance will then be `2,000 (A); the efficiency variance will be then `1,200 (A), making a total of

`3,200 (A).

LABOUR MIX VARIANCE

It is also known as Gang Composition Variance. This is a sub-variance which arises due to change in the

composition of a standard gang or combination of labour force.

Revised labour hours

time Standard

time standard Total

time actual Total

×=

The calculation is just like that the materials. It is included in the efficiency or time variance discussed above.

LABOUR YIELD VARIANCE

This is due to the difference in the standard output specified and the actual output obtained. This is

computed as follows:

Note: AY will never change. SY will calculate for actual mix of hour as under:

New SY

TAH

TSH

SY Old

×=

If the actual output is more than standard output, it is favourable variance and vice versa.

EP-CMA

402

Point to be noted

(i) Ensure the Level of output (yield i.e. AY/SY) is the same for actual data and standard data, if same

are the different then calculate new SY)

(ii) Always prepare cost sheet or put all given figure in a table before starting question for both standard

data and actual data for same level of output.

(iii) Write formula before computing variances.

(iv) Mix variance is computed when any difference is found in standard hour and actual hour worked for

same level of output.

(v) Labour Yield Variance (LYV) is also known as Labour Sub Usage Variance. Computed on the basis

of actual hour worked irrespective of standard hour.

(vi) For calculating the LYV actual yield (AY) will never change whereas standard yield (SY) may be

changed.

Illustration 5

A factory, working for 50 hours a week, employs 100 workers on a job work.

The standard rate is `1 an hour and standard output is 200 units per gang hour.

During a week in June, ten employees were paid at 80 p. an hour and five at `1.20 an hour. Rest of the

employees were paid at the standard rate.

Actual number of units produced was 10,200

Calculate labour cost variances.

Solution:

(i) Cost Variance

Standard Cost – Actual Cost

`5,100 – `4,950 = `150 (F)

Workings:

(a) Calculation of Actual Cost:

`

85 workers for 50 hours @ `1 per hour = 4,250

10 workers for 50 hours @ 80 p. per hour = 400

5 workers for 50 hours @ `1.20 per hour = 300

Total actual cost 4,950

(b) Calculation of Standard Rate:

Standard cost per (gang hour)= 100 × 50 × `1 = `5000

Standard production (per gang hour)

= 100 × 200 × 50

= 10000 unit

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

403

Standard rate per unit =

10000

5000`

= 50 p. per unit.

(c) Calculation of Standard Cost:

Actual production × Standard rate

10,200 units × 50 p. per unit = `5,100

(ii) Rate Variance:

As the actual wage rate has deviated from the standard in respect of only 15 workers from out of a total of

100 workers, wages rate variance would be calculated only in respect of these 15 workers.

Actual Hours (Standard Rate – Actual Rate)

Therefore,

500 Hours (`1 – 80 p.) = `100 (F)

250 Hours (`1 – `1.20) = `50 (A)

Thus, the total rate variance is `50 (F).

(iii) Efficiency Variance:

Efficiency variance is indicated by the fact that, as compared with standard production of 10,000 units (200

units × 50 hours), the actual production is 10,200 units

Standard Rate (Standards Hours – Actual Hours)

`1 (5,100 - 5,000) = `100 favourable.

Calculation of Standard Hours=

10200

10000

5000

×

= 5,100 hours.

Yield Variance:

Standard labour cost per unit of output (SY – AY)

0.50 (10,000 – 10,200) = `100 (F)

Verification:

Cost Variance = Rate Variance + Efficiency Variance

`150 (F) = 50 (F) + `100 (F)

Illustration 6

The standard labour component and the actual labour component engaged during the month are given

below:

Skilled Semi-skilled Unskilled

(a) Standard number of workers in a group 30 10 10

(b) Standard wage rate (Rupees per hour) 20 12 8

(c) Actual number of workers employed during the month in the group 24 15 12

(d) Actual wage rate per hour (`) 24 10 8

EP-CMA

404

During the month of 200 working hours, the group produced 9,600 standard hours of work.

You are required to calculate:

(i) Wage rate variance; (ii) Labour efficiency variance; (iii) Labour mix variance and (iv) Total labour cost

variance.

Solution

Category of workers Standard Standard

Hours

Rate (

`

)

`

Hours

Rate (

`

)

`

Skilled 6,000

20

1,20,000

4,800

24

1,15,200

Semi-skilled 2,000

12

24,000

3,000

10

30,000

Unskilled 2,000

8

16,000

2,400

8

19,200

10,000

1,60,000

10,200

1,64,400

Standard Cost of Labour for Actual Output =

000,10

600,9000,60,1 ×

= ` 1,53,600

Labour Cost Variance = Standard Cost for Actual Output – Actual Cost

= ` 1,53,600 – 1,64,400 = ` 10,800 (A)

Labour Rate Variance = Actual Hours (Standard Rate – Actual Rate)

Skilled = 24 x 200 (`20 – `24) = ` 19,200 (A)

Semi-skilled = 15 x 200 (`12 – `10) = ` 6,000 (F)

Unskilled = 12 x 200 (`8 – `8) = Nil

` 13,200 (A)

Labour Efficiency Variance = Standard Rate (Standard Time for Actual Output – Actual Time)

Skilled = `20 (5,760 – 4,800) = ` 19,200 (F)

Semi-skilled = `12 (1,920 – 3,000)) = ` 12,960 (A)

Unskilled = ` 8 (1,920 – 2,400) = ` 3,840 (A)

` 2,400 (F)

Labour Mix Variance = Standard Rate (Revised Standard Hours – Actual Hours)

Skilled = `20 (6,120 – 4,800) = ` 26,400 (F)

Semi-skilled = `12 (2,040 – 3,000)) = ` 11,520 (A)

Unskilled = ` 8 (2,040 – 2,400) = ` 2,880 (A)

` 12,000 (F)

Revised standard hours have been calculated as under:

Revised Standard Hours =

×

Hrs. Standard Total

Hours ActualTotal

Standard Hrs. of the Grade

Skilled = 10,200/10,000 × 6,000 = 6,120 hours

Semi-skilled = 10,200/10,000 × 2,000 = 2,040 hours

Unskilled = 10,200/10,000 × 2,000 = 2,040 hours

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

405

[Actual Output × Standard Overhead Rate Per Unit] – Actual Overhead Cost

OR

[Standard Hours for Actual Output × Standard Overhead Rate Per Hour] – Actual Overhead Cost

Verification:

Labour Cost Variance = Labour Rate Variance + Labour Efficiency Variance

10,800 (A) = Rs. 13,200 (A) + Rs. 2,400 (F)

OVERHEAD COST VARIANCES

The total overhead cost variance is the difference between the standard cost of overhead allowed for the

actual output achieved and the actual overhead cost incurred. In other words, overhead cost variance is the

under or over absorption of overheads.

However before we proceed to study these variances, we should aware about the basic terms used in the

computation of overhead variance:

(i) Standard overhead rate (per unit)

units in output Budgeted

overhead Budgeted

=

(ii) Standard overhead rate (per hour)

hours Budgeted

overhead Budgeted

=

(iii) Standard hours for actual output

output Budgeted

output Actual hours Budgeted ×

=

(iv) Standard output for actual hours

hours Budgeted

hours Actual units) (in output Budgeted ×

=

(v) Absorbed (or Recovered) overhead = Standard Rate per hour × Actual Output

Or standard rate per unit × standard hours for actual output

(vi) Budgeted overhead = Budgeted output × Std. overhead rate per unit

Or Budgeted hours × Std. overhead rate per hour

(vii) Standard overhead = Std. output for actual time × Std. overhead rate per unit

Or Actual hours × Std. overhead rate per hour

(viii) Actual overhead = Actual output × Actual overhead rate per unit

Or Actual overhead = Actual output × Actual overhead rate per unit

OVERHEAD COST VARIANCE

Overhead cost variances can be classified as:

• Variable overhead variance

• Fixed overhead variance

EP-CMA

406

Variable Overhead Variance =

(Standard Variable Overhead Rate × Actual Output) - Actual Variable Overheads

OR

(Standard Hours for Actual Output × Standard Variable Overhead Rate) – Actual Variable Overheads

OR

(Standard Rate × Actual output) – (Actual Rate × Actual output)

(Actual Hours × Standard Variable Overhead Rate per Hour) – Actual Variable Overhead

OR

Actual Hours (Standard Variable Overhead Rate per Hour – Actual Variable Overhead Rate per Hour)

VARIABLE OVERHEAD VARIANCE

It is the difference between the standard variable overhead cost allowed for the actual output achieved and

the actual variable overheads. Normally this variance is represented by expenditure (cost) variance only

because variable overhead cost will vary in proportion to production so that only a change in expenditure can

cause such variance.

It is calculated as:

The variable overhead cost variance is usually calculated in total only since variable overheads vary

according to output and not according to time, hence, there is only one variance. However, some

accountants argue that certain variable overhead may vary according to time also, hence variable overhead

efficiency variance arise just like labour efficiency variance and it can be calculated if information relating to

actual time taken and allowed is given. In such case variable overhead variance can be segregated into two

parts.

Classification of labour variances as under:

Variable Overhead

Expenditure

Variance

Variable Overhead

Variance

Variable Overhead

Efficiency Variance

(i) Variable Overhead Expenditure Variance (VOExV) =

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

407

(Standard Time for Actual Production × Standard Variable Overhead Rate per Hour) – Actual Hours

Worked × Standard Variable Overhead Rate per Hour).

OR

Standard Variable Overhead on Actual Production – Standard Variable Overhead for actual time.

OR

Recovered Overheads – Standard Overheads

(ii) Variable Overhead Efficiency Variance (VOEfV) =

It is better to compute variance related to variable overhead on the basis of hours rather then on the basis of

units.

Illustration 7

The following data is obtained from the books of a manufacturing company regarding variable overheads:

Budgeted production for January 300 units

Budgeted variable overhead `7,800

Standard time for one unit 20 hours

Actual production for January 250 units

Actual hours worked 4,500 hours

Actual variable overhead `7,000

Solution

Variable Overhead Variance = Standard Cost – Actual Cost

= `6,500 – `7,000 = `500 (A)

Workings:

(a) Standard variable overhead cost of actual output

= 250 units × `26 per unit = `6,500

(b) Standard variable cost per unit

300

7800`

=

or `26 per unit

Sometimes, a little refinement is introduced in the calculation of variable overhead variance and, therefore,

the computation is as follows:

(i) Variable Overhead Expenditure Variance

= Actual Cost – Standard overheads on hours worked

`7,000 – `5,850 = `1,150 (A)

(a) Standard variable overhead on hours worked is—

4,500 hours × `1.30 per hour = `5,850

EP-CMA

408

FOCV= (Actual output × Standard fixed overhead rate) – Actual fixed overheads

OR

(Standard hours produced × Standard fixed overhead rate per hour) – Actual fixed overheads

OR

Recovered fixed overhead – Actual fixed Overhead

(b) Standard variable overhead per hour

30020

7800

×

=

`

= `1.3

(ii) Variable Overhead Efficiency Variance

= Standard variable overhead on hours worked – Standard variable overhead on actual output.

`5,850 – `6,500 = `650 (F)

(iii) Variable Overhead Total Variance

= Expenditure Variance + Efficiency Variance

`1,150 (A) + `650 (F) = `500 (A)

This is the same as variable overhead variance already arrived at.

FIXED OVERHEAD VARIANCE

Fixed overhead represents all items of expenditure which are more or less remain constant irrespective of

the level of output or the number of hours worked.

CLASSIFICATION OF FIXED OVERHEAD VARIANCES

Fixed Overhead

Cost Variance

Expenditure Variance Volume Variance

Efficiency Variance Capacity Variance

Revised Fixed Overhead Calendar or

Capacity Variance Idle Time Variance

FIXED OVERHEAD COST VARIANCE

Fixed overhead cost variance is the difference between the standard costs of fixed overhead allowed for the

actual output achieved and the actual fixed overhead cost incurred i.e.

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

409

Budgeted fixed overhead – Actual fixed overhead

OR

(Budgeted hours × Std. fixed overhead rate) – Actual fixed overhead

Standard overhead produced means hours which should have been taken for the actual output.

Fixed overhead variance may broadly be divided into:

(i) Expenditure variance and

(ii) Volume variance.

(i) EXPENDITURE VARIANCE

This is also known as budget variance. This is obtained by comparing the total overhead cost actually

incurred against the budgeted overhead cost i.e.

If the actual overheads are more, it shall result in an adverse variance and vice versa. This variance gives a

measure of efficiency of spending.

Illustration 8

The following information relates to the month of June, 2013

Budgeted Actual

Output 20,000 units 22,000 units

` `

Overheads - Variable 1,00,000 1,07,000

- Fixed 1,50,000 1,58,000

Compute the overheads variance.

Solution:

Variable overheads allowed or budgeted for actual output

`

Standard Overhead for actual output (10000/20000 × 22000) 1,10,000

Actual amount spent 1,07,000

Variable overhead variance 3,000 (F)

Fixed overheads for the period (change in output having no effect on expenditure) 1,50,000

Actual fixed overhead 1,58,000

Fixed overheads expenditure variance 8,000 (A)

Total overheads variance 5,000 (A)

(ii) VOLUME VARIANCE

The difference between overhead absorbed on actual output and those on budgeted output is termed as

volume variance. This variance shows the over or under absorption of fixed overheads during a particular

period. If the actual output is more than the standard output, there is over-recovery of fixed overheads and

volume variance is favourable and vice versa if the actual output is less than the standard output.

EP-CMA

410

Volume Variance (FOVV)= (Actual output × Standard rate) – Budgeted fixed overheads

OR

Standard rate (Actual output - Standard output)

OR

Standard rate per hour (Standard hours produced - Budgeted hours)

OR

(Absorbed overhead – Budgeted overhead)

VERIFY:-

F.O. COST VARIANCE = F.O. EXPENDITURE VARIANCE + F.O. VOLUME VARIANCE

Fixed Overhead Efficiency Variance (FOEfV)=

Standard Fixed Overhead Rate per hour [Standard Production – Actual Production]

F. O. Capacity Variance=

Standard rate ( Standard quantity – Budgeted quantity)

Fixed Overhead Revised Capacity Variance (FORCV) =

Standard Rate [Standard Quantity – Revised Budgeted Quantity]

N.B.: Standard hour produced means number of hours which should have been taken for the actual output

as per the standard laid down.

Volume variance can be further sub-divided into the following variances:

(a) EFFICIENCY VARIANCE

It arises due to the difference between the output actually achieved and the output which should have been

achieved in the actual hours worked. This variance will be favourable it the actual production is more than

the standard production in actual hours.

(b) CAPACITY VARIANCE

It is that portion of the volume variance which is due to working at higher or lower capacity than the standard

capacity. It is related to the under or over utilisation of plant and equipment. If the capacity utilization is more

than the budgeted capacity, the variance is favourable, otherwise it will be adverse. It is represented as:

(c) REVISED CAPACITY VARIANCE

This variance indicates the difference in capacity utilization due to working for more or less number of days

than the budgeted one. The computation of this variance is done by using the following formula.

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

411

FO Calender Variance = Standard rate (Revised budgeted units – Budgeted units)

OR

Increase or decrease in production due to more or less working days

at the rate of revised capacity × Standard rate per unit.

(d) CALENDAR (IDLE TIME) VARIANCE

It is that portion of the volume variance which is due to the difference between the number of working days

anticipated in the budget period and the actual working days in the period to which the budget is applied. If

the actual working days exceed standard days, the variance will be favourable and vice-versa.

It is calculated as:

Illustration 9

The budgeted capacity of a factory per month of 25 days was 2,00,000 hours and the budgeted fixed

overheads were `2,40,000. The management increased the capacity by 20% in the beginning of October,

2000, the actual number of working days in that month were 23. Compute the variance that emerge.

Solution:

Budgeted fixed overheads recovery rate `1.20 i.e. 2,40,000/2,00,000.

Actual production in terms of hours (2,00,000 + 20%) × 23/25 or 2,20,800

Volume Variance: Fixed overheads absorbed on 2,20,800

hours @ `1.20 per hours `2,64,960

Budgeted fixed overheads `2,40,000

Volume Variance 24,960 (F)

(or 20,800 hours @ `1.20)

Analysis

Capacity Variance: Production in terms of hours at new capacity - i.e. 2,00,000 + 20% Hrs. 2,40,000

Fixed overheads absorbed @ of `1.20 per hour ` 2,88,000

Fixed overheads, budgeted ` 2,40,000

` 48,000 (F)

Calendar Variance: Loss of hours due to 2 extra Holidays

2,40,000 × 2/26 19,200

Loss of fixed overheads absorbed

because of loss of hours

19,200 × 1.20 ` 23,040 (A)

EP-CMA

412

Illustration 10

From the following information extracted from the books of a manufacturing company, calculate Fixed and

Variable Overhead Variances.

Particulars Budgeted Actual

Production – Units 22, 000 24, 000

Fixed Overheads `44, 000 `49, 000

Variable Overheads `33, 000 `39, 000

Number of Days 25 26

Number of man hours 25, 000 27, 000

Capacity Variance ` 48,000 (F)

Calendar Variance ` 23,040 (A)

Volume Variance 24,960 (F)

Solution:

(A) Fixed Overhead Variances:

(I) Fixed Overhead Cost Variance:

Standard Fixed Overheads for Actual Production – Actual Fixed Overheads

= `48, 000 – `49, 000 = `1, 000 [A]

Note: Standard fixed overheads for actual production = Actual Production 24, 000 × standard rate `2 [`44,

000 budgeted fixed overheads / 22, 000 budgeted production = `2]

(II) Fixed Overhead Expenditure Variance

Budgeted Fixed Overheads – Actual Fixed Overheads

= `44, 000 – `49, 000 = `5, 000 [A]

(III) Fixed Overhead Volume Variance

Standard Rate [Budgeted Quantity – Actual Quantity] =

2 [22, 000 – 24, 000] = `4, 000 [F]

The variance is favourable as the actual quantity produced is more than the budgeted quantity.

Reconciliation I = Cost Variance = Expenditure Variance + Volume Variance

1, 000 [A] = `5, 000 [A] + `4, 000 [F]

(IV) Fixed Overhead Efficiency Variance

Standard Rate [Standard Quantity – Actual Quantity] = `2 [23, 760 – 24, 000] = `480 [F]

Note: Standard quantity of production is in reference to actual number of hours. If 22, 000 units are produced

in 25, 000 hrs [standard hours], in actual 27, 000 hours, 23, 760 units should have been produced. When

number of days and number of hours, both are given, the standard quantity is always to be computed in

relation to the actual hours. However, if only number of days is given, the standard quantity will have to be

computed in relation to number of days.

(V) Fixed Overhead Capacity Variance

Standard Rate [Standard Quantity – Budgeted Quantity] = `2 [23, 760 – 22, 000] = `3, 520 [F]

Reconciliation II = Volume Variance = Efficiency Variance + Capacity Variance

4, 000 [F] = `480 [F] + 3, 520 [F]

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

413

(VI) Fixed Overhead Revised Capacity Variance

= Standard Rate [Standard Quantity – Revised Budgeted Quantity]

= `2 [23,760 – 22,880] = `2 × 880 = `1760 [F]

Note: Standard quantity is computed as shown in the Efficiency Variance. Revised Budget Quantity is

computed as: in 25 days, the production is 22,000 so in 26 days the revised quantity is 22,880 units.

(VII) Fixed Overhead Calendar Variance

Standard Rate [Revised Budgeted Quantity – Budgeted Quantity]

= `2 [22,880 – 22,000] = `2 × 880 = `1,760 [F]

Reconciliation III = Capacity Variance = Revised Capacity Variance + Calendar Variance =

3, 520 [F] = `1760 [F] + `1760 [F] = 367

(I) Cost Variance: Standard Variable Overheads for Actual Production – Actual Variable Overheads:

36,000 – `39,000 = `3,000 [A]

Note: Standard Variable Overheads for Actual Production = Standard Rate Per Unit × Actual Production

Units = `1.5 [Budgeted variable overheads `33,000 /Budgeted production units

22,000 = `1.5] × 24,000 units = `36,000

(II) Expenditure Variance: Standard Variable Overheads for Standard Production – Actual Variable

Overheads: `1.5 × 23, 760 – `39,000 = `3360 [A]

(III) Efficiency Variance: Standard Rate [Standard Quantity – Actual Quantity]

1.5 [23,760 – 24,000] = `360 [F]

ACCOUNTING TREATMENT OF VARIANCES

The cost records maintained and entries made under a system of standard costing vary from company to

company depending upon the information that is desired from cost records, and the intended use of standard

cost and variance analysis. Variances which emerge in standard costing and recorded in the cost books may

be disposed of in any of the following ways:

(i) Transfer to costing profit and loss account

In this method, the stock of work-in-progress, finished goods and cost of sales are maintained at standard

cost and all variances are charged to costing profit and loss account at the end of the accounting period. This

method is favoured because standard costs facilities prompt inventory valuation and also variances are

separated out so as to attract the attention of the management.

(ii) Allocation of variances to finished stock, work-in-progress and cost of sales account

Under this method the variances are distributed over stocks of finished goods, work-in-progress and to cost

of sales account in proportion to the closing balances (value) of each account depending upon the type of

variance.

(iii) Transfer to reserve account:

In this method favourable variances are carried forward as deferred credits until they are set-off by adverse

variances. It is considered that controllable variances according to method (ii).

EP-CMA

414

BENCHMARKING FOR SETTING OF STANDARDS

First of all we should have knowledge what is benchmarking.

Benchmarking is the process of identifying "best practice" in relation to product and the processes by which

those products are created and delivered. The objective of benchmarking is to understand and evaluate the

current position of a business or organisation in relation to "best practice" and to identify areas and means of

performance improvement.

The Benchmarking Process

Benchmarking involves looking outward (outside a particular business, organisation, industry, region or

country) to examine how others achieve their performance levels and to understand the processes they use.

In this way benchmarking helps explain the processes behind excellent performance.

Application of benchmarking involves four key steps:

(1) Understand in detail existing business processes

(2) Analyse the business processes of others

(3) Compare own business performance with that of others analysed

(4) Implement the steps necessary to close the performance gap

Benchmarking should not be considered a one-off exercise. To be effective, it must become an ongoing,

integral part of an ongoing improvement process with the goal of keeping abreast of ever-improving best

practice.

In the same way benchmarking should be followed while determining the standard for costs. Production

manager and cost accountant must work together in setting the standards. Production manager should

determine the quantity standards and cost accountant should work out for price standards. While setting the

production cost standards, the following preliminaries should be considered:

1. To study the technical and operational aspects of the manufacturing processes and method etc (of

self business).

2. To analyse the process as discussed in (1.) of others.

3. To review of the existing costing system, cost records and forms in use. It should review while

considering of following:

(a) Quantities

(b) Prices

(c) Mix proportion of different grades

(d) Scrap and its value

(e) Yield

4. To implement the necessary step to close the performance gap say:

(a) Proper classification of accounts so that variance is also accounted for.

(b) Fixation of responsibility for every work should be there.

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

415

REPORTING OF VARIANCES TO MANAGEMENT

The primary purpose of reporting to management is to enable them to take corrective action and arrest

unfavourable variances to the extent possible. Therefore, timely and prompt reporting of the variance is of

utmost importance. The individual or department responsible for adverse controllable variance should be

located. For instance, a variation in the price paid for raw materials would be the responsibility of the

purchase manager and a variation in production efficiency is the responsibility of the production manager.

The board and the managing director would be concerned with the overall efficiency, with which their plans

have been operated by the lower levels of management. The profit and loss account should be prepared in a

special manner - staring with the standard or budgeted profit, the various variances would be put in two

columns, favourable and unfavorable, and the net results added to or deducted from the standard profit, thus

arriving at the actual profit. Management can easily see the factors that have contributed to the change in the

profit picture. While reporting the analysis of variances to management, graphs and charts might be used or

analysis may be reported in the form of statement and reports giving main details.

In order that variance reporting should be effective, it is essential that the following conditions are fulfilled:

(i) The variances arising out of each factor should be correctly segregated. If part of a variance due to

one factor is wrongly attributed to or merged with that of another, the analysis report submitted to

the management would be misleading and wrong inferences may be drawn from it;

(ii) Variances, particularly the controllable variances should be reported with promptness as soon as

they occur. This would enable corrective action being taken in time;

(iii) Analysis of uncontrollable variances should be made with the same care as for controllable

variances since the analysis of the off standard situation may reveal far reaching effects on the

economy of the concern; and

(iv) The forms of reports for the different types of variances should be designed keeping in view the

needs of the management and the size of the concern, and no standard forms can, therefore, be

suggested.

It is better to present the profit figures by way of reconciliation of budgeted (or standard) and actual profits on

the basis of variances.

LESSON ROUND-UP

•

Standard costs are pre-determined estimates of cost of a single unit or a number of units of a product service.

•

Standard costing is a method of preparation of standards and their uses for comparison with actual costs by

variance analysis.

•

All standards are established on the basis of absorption costing system.

•

Application of Standard Cost for:

•

Effective planning and controlling costs

•

Pricing decisions including submission of quotations, answering tenders etc

•

Identification and measurement of variances from standards

•

Designing performance measurement systems

•

Types of various standards are basic, current, expected, normal, ideal.

•

Standard costing system provides standard cost for budgeting purpose to plan future performance.

EP-CMA

416

•

Valuation, planning, controlling are the main function of standard costing system.

•

Variance is the difference between standard cost and actual cost incurred.

•

The examination of variances in detail and evaluation of them is known as variance analysis.

•

Variance can be divided into two part:

•

Variance related to cost

•

Variance related to sales.

•

Variance Related to Cost :- Cost can be divided into three part i.e. Material cost, Labour cost & Overhead cost. So

every business set standards for these three type of cost and analysis difference from standard established by them

to actual cost incurred.

•

Favourable variance is that variance which effect profit in a favourable manner which may be due to reduction in

cost.

•

Material cost variance is the difference between standard cost of direct material specified for output achived and the

actual cost of direct material used. . formulas of MCV as under:

•

MCV = (SQ*SP)- (AQ*AP)

•

MPV= AQ (SP - AP)

•

MUV= SP (AQ-SQ)

•

MMV= SP (RS-AQ)

•

MYV= SC p.u. (AY-SY)

•

For calculating the MYV actual yield (AY) will never change whereas standard yield may be changed

•

Labour cost variance is the difference between the standard direct wages specified for the activity achieved and the

actual direct wages paid. formulas of LCV as under:

•

LCV = (SH × SR) – (AH × AR)

•

LRV = AH × (SR – AR)

•

LEV = SR × (SH – AHW)

•

LITV= Idle hours × SR

•

LMV = (RSH – AHW) × SR

•

LYV = SC p.u. (AY – SY)

•

The total overhead cost variance is the difference between the standard cost of overhead allowed for the actual

output achieved and the actual overhead cost incurred. Formula as under:

•

[Standard Hours for Actual Output × Standard Overhead Rate Per Hour] – Actual Overhead Cost

•

Overhead cost variances can be classified as:

•

Variable overhead variance

•

Fixed overhead variance

•

Variable Overhead Variance (VOV) is the difference between the standard variable overhead cost allowed for the

actual output achieved and the actual variable overheads.

•

VOV= (Standard Rate × Actual output) – (Actual Rate × Actual output)

•

VOExV= (Actual Hours × Standard Variable Overhead Rate per Hour) – Actual Variable Overhead

•

VOEfV= Recovered Overheads – Standard Overheads

Lesson 9 Standard Costing

417

•

It is better to compute variance related to variable overhead on the basis of hours rather then on the basis of units.

•

Actual item represents actual figure of a particular period.

•

Budgeted item represents level of activity which business wants to achieve.

•

Standard item represents budgeted data which changes according to the level of actual activity or actual output.

•

Fixed overhead variance is the difference between the standard costs of fixed overhead allowed for the actual output

achieved and the actual fixed overhead cost incurred.

•

FOCV= Recovered fixed overhead – Actual fixed Overhead

•

FOExV= Budgeted fixed overhead – Actual fixed Overhead

•

FOVV= Standard rate (Actual output - Standard output)

•

FOEfV= Standard Fixed Overhead Rate per hour [Standard Production – Actual Production]

•

FO Capacity variance = Standard rate ( Standard quantity – Budgeted quantity)

•

FORCV= Standard rate ( Standard quantity – Revised Budgeted quantity)

•

FO Capacity variance= Standard rate (Revised budgeted hours - Budgeted hours)

SELF-TEST QUESTIONS

1. Define ‘Standard Cost’ and ‘Standard Costing’.

2. What are the applications of standard costing?

3. Discuss the importance and limitations of standard costing.

4. Discuss the various types of standards.

5. Explain the meaning, causes and disposal of labour variances.

6. Define ‘Variance analysis’. What are the ways of disposing of cost variances?

7. Variance analysis is an integral part of standard costing system.

8. The following information was obtained from the records of a manufacturing unit using standard

costing system :

Particulars Standards Actual

Production 12000 units 11400 units

Working days 20 21

Fixed overheads ` 1,20,000 ` 1,17,000

Variable overheads ` 12,000 ` 12,000

Calculate :

(a) Variable overhead variance;

(b) Fixed overhead expenditure variance;

(c) Fixed overhead volume variance;

(d) Fixed overhead efficiency variance;

(e) Fixed overhead calendar variance.

9. Sharda Courier Ltd. started trading on 1st April 2013, manufacturing and selling one product. The

standard cost per unit was:

Direct material: Standard price ` 10 per kilogram

Standard quantity: 20 kilogram per unit

EP-CMA

418

Direct labour: Standard rate of pay ` 5.50 per hour

Standard time allowance: 12 hours per unit

Production overhead costs, all classified as fixed, were budgeted at ` 9,00,000 per annum.

The standard time for producing one unit is 12 machine hours and normal capacity is 60,000

machine hours per annum. Production overhead is absorbed on machine hours. For the year ended

31st March 2014 the costs incurred and other relevant information is given below :

Direct material used— 1,00,000 kilograms at a cost of ` 10,50,000

Direct wages paid— ` 3,10,000 for 62,000 hours

Production overhead— ` 9,26,000

Machine capacity used— 60,000 hours

Actual output— 4,800 units

Assuming no stocks of work-in-progress or finished goods at year end.

You are required to:

Show the standard product cost for one unit.

Calculate variances for material (usage and price), labour (rate and efficiency) and overhead.

10. The following information is available from the cost records of Sushma & Co.. For the month of

March, 2014:

Material purchased 24,000 kg `1,05,600

Material consumed 22,800 kg

Actual wages paid for 5,940 hours `29,700

Unit produced 2160 units.

Standard rates and prices are:

Direct material rate is `4.00 per unit

Direct labour rate is `4.00 per hour

Standard input is 10 kg. for one unit

Standard requirement is 2.5 hours per unit.

Calculate all material and labour variances for the month of March, 2013.

11. Write short note on the following:

(i) Idle Time Variance

(ii) Overhead Variance

(iii) Material Mix Variance

(iv) Labour Yield Variance

Lesson 10

Budget, Budgeting and

Budgetary Control

•

Budget

•

Budgeting

•

Budgetary Control

•

Forecast and Budget

•

Objectives of Budgetary Control

•

Advantages of Budgetary Control

•

Limitations of Budgetary Control

•

Preliminaries for the Adoption of a System

of Budgetary Control

•

Installation of Budgetary Control

System



Organisation Chart



Budget Centre



Budget Manual



Budget Controller



Budget Committee



Budget Period



Budget Key Factor



Budget Reports

•

Preparation & Monitoring of Various Types

of Budgets:



Functional Budget

 Master Budget

 Fixed Budget

 Flexible Budget

 Basic Budget

 Current Budget

 Long Period

 Short Perio

d

•

Zero Base Budgeting

•

Programme Budgeting

•

Performance Budgeting

•

Lesson Round Up

•

Self Test Question

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

Budget is a precise statement of financial and

quantitative implications of the course of actions that

management has decided to follow in the immediate

next period of time.

Budget is a basis for the Management to see how the

organization has been functioning i.e. whether the

targets are set by management have been achieved

or not. It is a very effective control tool.

After studying the lesson one should be capable to-

1. Understand Budgeting process, benefits of

Budgeting, advantage of Budgetary control,

limitations of budget.

2. Prepare different types of Budget i.e. Cash

Budget, Flexible Budget etc.

3. Comparison of budgeted and actual

expenses.

4. Understand the meaning of zero base

budgeting, its benefits and limitations

5. Understand about Budget Manual, Budget

Period, Budget Period.

A budget fixes a target in terms of money or quantities against which the actual performance is measured.

LESSON

OUTLINE

EP-CMA

420

BUDGET

In “A Dictionary for Accountants”, Kohler defines budget as:

1. Any financial plan serving as an estimate of and a control over future operations.

2. Hence, any estimate of future costs.

3. Any systematic plan for the utilisation of manpower, material or other resources.

The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants, London, (terminology) defines a budget as

“A plan expressed in money. It is prepared and approved prior to the budget period and may show income,

expenditure and the capital to be employed. May be drawn up showing incremental effects on former

budgeted or actual figures, or be compiled by zero-based budgeting.”

A budget is a precise statement of the financial and quantitative implications of the course of action that

management has decided to follow in the immediate next period of time (usually a year).

Thus the essential features of a budget are as follows:

(i) It is a statement expressed in monetary and/or physical units prepared for the implementation of

policy formulated by the management.

(ii) It is laid down prior to the budget period during which it is followed.

(iii) It is prepared for the definite future period.

(iv) The policy to be followed to attain the given objective must be laid before the budget is prepared.

BUDGETING

Budgeting is the complete process of designing, implementing and operating budgets. The main emphasis in

this is short-term budgeting process involving the provision of resources to support plans which are being

implemented.

BUDGETARY CONTROL

Budgetary control is intimately connected with budgets. The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants,

London defines Budgetary control as “the establishment of budgets, relating the responsibilities of executive

to the requirements of a policy and the continuous comparison of actual with budgeted results either to

secure by individual action the objectives of that policy or to provide a firm basis for its revision”. A budgetary

control system secures control over performance and costs in the different parts of a business:

(i) by establishing budgets

(ii) by comparing actual attainments against the budgets; and

(iii) by taking corrective action and remedial measures or revision of the budgets, if necessary.

The budget is a blue-print of the projected plan of action expressed in quantitative terms and for a specified

period of time. The budgets put the plan in a concrete form and follow up action to see that plan is adhere to

complete the system of control. In other words, while budgeting is the art of planning, budgetary control is the

act of adhering to the plan. In fact, budgetary control involves continuous comparison of actual results with

the budgets and taking appropriate remedial action promptly.

Lesson 10 Budget, Budgeting & Budgetary Control

421

It is well recognised that a control system involves fixing of targets (in the form of specific tasks), collection of

information regarding actuals and continuous comparison of actuals with the targets with a view to reporting

for action. A budgetary control system, in this sense is also a control system. It is an excellent system for

decentralisation of authority without losing control over the operations of the firm.

One should not consider (budgets or) budgetary control as something rigid or strait-jacket. It is one of the

system whereby dynamism is infused into an organisation through the process of targets, the achievement of

which will mean progress; of allowing a good deal of freedom of action within the delegated field of

executives and of seeing to it that all concerned will work in a concerted manner for achieving the firm’s

objectives. There is always a good scope for initiative and drive but not for recklessness or too much caution.

De Paula has put the main idea of budgetary control through an analogy thus “the position may be linked to

the navigation of a ship across the sea. The log is kept written regarding happenings and position of the ship

from hour to hour and valuable lessons are to be learnt by the captain from a study of the factor that caused

the misadventures in the past. But to navigate his ship safely over the seven seas the captain requires his

navigating officer to work out the course ahead and constantly to check his ship’s position against the

predetermined one. If the ship is off its course, the navigating officer must report immediately so that the

captain may take prompt action to regain his correct course”.

“Exactly so it is with the industrial ship; the past records represent the log and the auditor is responsible for

verifying so far as he can that those records are correct and reveal a true and fair view of the financial

position of the concern. But what modern management requires for day-to-day operating purposes is

forecasts showing in detail anticipated course of business for (say) the coming year. During the course of the

years’ operations the management requires immediate reports of any material variance from the

predetermined course together with explanation of the reasons for variations”.

In short, budgetary control means laying down in momentary and quantitative term what exactly has to be

done and how exactly it has to be done over the coming period and then to ensure that actual results do not

diverge from the planned course more than necessary. The word “necessary” is not to be loosely interpreted.

Divergence due to inefficiency is not necessary.

Rowland and William in their book entitled Budgeting for Management Control has given the

difference between budget, budgeting and budgetary control as follows:

“Budgets are the individual objectives of a department, etc. whereas budgeting may be said to be the act of

building budgets. Budgetary Control embraces all this and in addition include the science of planning the

budgets themselves and the utilisation of such budgets to effect an overall management tool for the business

planning and control”.

Thus, a budget is a financial plan and budgetary control results from the administration of the financial plan.

FORECAST AND BUDGET

A forecast is an assessment of probable future events. Budget is an operating and financial plan of a

business enterprise. At planning stage it is necessary to prepare forecasts of probable course of action for

the business in future. Budget is a sort of commitment or a target which the management seek to attain on

the basis of the forecasts made. Forecasts are made regarding sales, production cost and financial

requirements of the business. A forecast denotes some degree of flexibility while a budget denotes a definite

target.

The following points of distinction can be noted between forecast and budget:

EP-CMA

422

Forecast Budget

(i)

Forecast is a mere estimate of what is likely to

happen. It is a statement of probable events

which are likely to happen under anticipated

conditions during a specified period of time.

Budget shows that policy and programme to be

followed in a future period under planned

conditions.

(ii)

Forecasts, being statements of future events,

do not connote any sense of control.

A budget is a tool of control since it represents

actions which can be shaped according to will so

that it can be suited to the conditions which may

or may not happen.

(iii)

Forecasting is a preliminary step for budgeting.

It ends with the forecast of likely events.

It begins when forecasting ends. Forecasts are

converted into budgets.

(iv)

Forecasts have wider scope, since it can be

made in those spheres also where budgets can

not interfere.

Budgets have limited scope. It can be made of

phenomenon non capable of being expressed

quantitatively.

OBJECTIVES OF BUDGETARY CONTROL

The objectives of budgetary control are the following :

(1) To use different levels of management in a co-operative endeavour for achievement of the

objectives of the firm.

(2) To facilitate centralised control with delegated authority and responsibility.

(3) To achieve maximum profitability by planning income and expenditure through optimum use of the

available resources.

(4) To ensure adequate working capital in other resources for efficient operation of business.

(5) To reduce losses and wastes to the minimum.

(6) To bring out clearly where effort is needed to remedy the situation.

(7) To see that the firm is not deflected from marching towards its long-term objectives without being

overwhelmed by emergencies.

(8) Various activities like production, sales, purchase of materials etc. are co-ordinated with the help of

budgetary control.

ADVANTAGES OF BUDGETARY CONTROL

Budgetary control makes all the differences between drifting in an unchartered sea and following a well

plotted course towards a predetermined distinction. It serves as a valuable aid to management through

planning, co-ordination and control.

The principal advantages of a budgetary control system are enumerated below:

(1) Budgetary control aims at maximisation of profits through effective planning and control of income

and expenditure - directing capital and resources to the best and most profitable channel.

(2) There is a planned approach to expenditure and financing of the business so that economy is

affected in the utilisation of funds to the optimum benefit of the concern.

Lesson 10 Budget, Budgeting & Budgetary Control

423

(3) It provides a clear definition of the objective and policies of the concern and a tool for objecting

these policies to periodic examination.

(4) The task of managerial co-ordination is facilitated through budgetary control.

(5) Since each level of management is aware of the task and is fully conscious as to the best way by

which it is to be performed, maximum effective utilisation of men, materials and resources can be

attained.

(6) Reports are furnished under the principles of management or control by exception. Only deviations

from budgets which point out the weak spots and inefficiencies are properly looked into.

(7) It cultivates in the management the habit of thinking ahead - making careful study of the problems in

advance before taking decisions.

(8) A budgetary control system assists delegation of authority and is a powerful tool of responsibility

accounting.

(9) Budgets are the fore-runners of standard costs in the sense that they create necessary conditions to

suit setting up of standard costs.

(10) The method of evaluating performance against budgets provides a suitable basis for establishing

incentive system of remuneration by results as also spotting people with exceptional qualities of

leadership and management.

(11) Since it involves foreseeing difficulties of various types, it will lead to their removal in time.

LIMITATIONS OF BUDGETARY CONTROL

(1) Budgetary control starts with the formulation of budgets which are mere estimates. Therefore, the

adequacy or otherwise of budgetary control system, to a very large extent, depends upon the

adequacy or accuracy with which estimates are made.

(2) Budgets are meant to deal with business conditions which are constantly changing. Therefore,

budgets estimates lose much of their usefulness under changing conditions because of their rigidity.

It is necessary that budgetary control system should be kept adequately flexible.

(3) The system of budgetary control is based on quantitative data and represent only an impersonal

appraisal to the conduct of business activity unless it is supported by proper management of

personal administration.

(4) It has often been found that in practice the organisation of budgetary control system become top

heavy and, therefore, costly specially from the point of view of small concern.

(5) Budgets and budgetary control have given rise to a very unhealthy tendency to be regarded as the

solvent of all business problems. This has resulted in a very luke-warm human effort to deal with

such problems and ultimately results in failure of budgetary control system.

(6) It is a part of human nature that all controls are resented to. Budgetary control which places

restrictions on the authority of executive is also resented by the employees.

The limitations stated above merely point to the need of maintaining the budgetary control system on a

realistic and dynamic basis rather than as a routine.

EP-CMA

424

PRELIMINARIES FOR THE ADOPTION OF A SYSTEM OF BUDGETARY CONTROL

For the successful implementation of a system of budgetary control certain pre-requisites are to be fulfilled.

They are summarised below:

(1) There should be an organisation chart laying out in clear terms the responsibilities and duties of

each level of executives and the delegation of authority to the various levels.

(2) The objectives, plans, and policies of the business should be defined in clear cut and unambiguous

terms.

(3) The budget factor or the key factor(s) which will be the starting point of the preparation of the

various budgets should be indicated.

(4) For formulation and efficient execution of the plan, a Budget Committee should be set up.

(5) There should be an efficient system of accounting to record and provide data in line with the

budgetary control system.

(6) There should be a proper system of communication and reporting between the various levels of

management.

(7) There should be a Budget Manual wherein all details regarding the plan and its procedure of

operation are given as also the length of the budget period.

(8) The budgets should primarily be prepared by those who are responsible for performance.

(9) The budgets should be comprehensive, complete, continuous and realistic to attain.

(10) There should be an assurance from the top management executives for co-operation and

acceptance of the budgetary control system.

(11) For the success of a budgetary control system, it is essential that there should be a sound

organisation for budget preparation, budget maintenance, and budget administration. The budgetary

control organisation is usually headed by a top executive who is known variously as the Budget

Controller, Budget Director, or Budget Officer, who may have under him a Budget Committee

constituted with the representatives of various departments like purchases, sales, production,

development, administration and accounts.

Unless the philosophy of budgeting and budgetary control is accepted by everyone in authority, the system

may work only haphazardly. The full and frank and active cooperation of all is required while framing

budgets. Then only they will feel committed to the achievements of targets set for them.

INSTALLATION OF BUDGETARY CONTROL SYSTEM

The following steps should be considered in detail for sound budgets and for successful implementation of

the budgetary control system.

(i) Organisation Chart: An organisational chart is a statement defining functional representatives of

executives responsible for accomplishment of organisational objectives. This chart shows:

(i) Functional responsibility of a particular executive.

(ii) Delegation of authority to various levels.

(iii) Relative position of a functional head with heads of other functions. An organisation chart for

budgetary control may be as follows:

Lesson 10 Budget, Budgeting & Budgetary Control

425

Chief Executive

Budget Officer

Purchase Personnel Sales Accountant

Manager Manager Manager

Purchase budget Labour Sales budget Cost budget

Material budget budget Advertising budget Master budget

Selling and

distribution budget

Production Manager

Production and plant

utilisation budget

(ii) Budget Centre: A budget centre is a section of the organisation of the undertaking defined for the

purpose of budget control. Budget centre should be established for cost control and all the budgets should

be related to cost centres. Budget centres will disclose the sections of the organisation where planned

performance is not achieved. Budget centre must be separately delimited because a separate budget has to

be set with the help of the head of the department concerned. To illustrate, production manager has to be

consulted for the preparation of production budget and finance manager for cash budget.

(iii) Budget Manual: A budget manual is a document which sets outstanding instructions governing the

responsibilities of persons and the procedures, forms and records relating to the preparation and use of

budgets and it is a booklet containing standing instructions regarding the procedures to be followed and the

time schedules to be observed. The following are some important matters dealt with in the budget manual:

(i) the dates by which preliminary forecasts and plans are to submitted;

(ii) the form in which these are to be submitted and the persons to whom these are to be forwarded;

(iii) the important factors that must be considered for each forecast or plan;

(iv) the categorisation of expenses, e.g., variable and fixed, and the manner in which each category is

to be estimated and dealt with;

(v) the manner of scrutiny and the personnel to carry it out;

(vi) the matters which must be settled only with the consent of the managing director, departmental

manager, etc.;

(vii) the finalisation of the functional budgets and their compilation into the master budget;

(viii) the form in which the various reports are to be made out, their periodicity and dates, the persons to

whom these and their copies are to be sent;

(ix) the reporting of the remedial action;

(x) the manner in which budgets, after acceptance and issuance, are to be revised or amended; and

EP-CMA

426

(xi) the matters, included in budgets, on which action may be taken only with the approval of top

management.

The main idea behind the budget manual is to inform line executives beforehand about procedures to be

followed rather than issuing frequent instructions from the controller’s office regarding procedures and forms

to be used. Such frequent instructions can be a source of friction between the line and staff management.

(iv) Budget Controller: To line up the various functions of Budget Committee, to bring them together and to

co-ordinate their efforts in the matter of preparation of target figures, there should be a person usually

designated as the Budget Controller, who can provide ready data relating to all the functions. He is more or

less the secretary to the budget committee. The Budget Controller does not control; he is staff man; he

advises but does not issue instructions. His duties will comprise mainly of:

(1) Helping in preparation of the various budgets and their coordination and compilation into the master

budget;

(2) Compiling of information about actual performance on a continuous basis comparing it against the

budget figures, ascertaining causes of deviation and preparing reports based thereon and sending

them to the appropriate executive;

(3) Bringing to the notice of the management the need for revision of budgets and assisting them in the

task; and

(4) Compiling information of all types for the purposes of efficient preparation of budgets and proper

reporting.

(v) Budget Committee: The budget committee is a group of representatives of various functions in an

organisation. As all functions are inter-related and as any change in one’s target will have its impact on that

of the other, it is necessary to discuss the targets so that a mutually agreed programme is determined. This

is the co-ordination in budget making. It is a powerful force in knitting together the various activities of the

business and enforcing real control over operations. The budget manual should specify the responsibilities

and duties of the budget committee, which should include the following:

(1) Receive and review budget estimates from the respective divisions or departments and make

recommendations.

(2) Recommend decisions or budget matters where there may be conflicts between departments or

divisions.

(3) Recommend changes and approval of the revised budget.

(4) Receive, study and analyse periodic reports comparing the budget with actual performance.

Consider policies with respect to follow-up procedures.

(5) Consider and make recommendations for revision of the budget when conditions warrant.

(6) Consider recommendations for changes in budget policies and procedures.

(7) Make recommendations for the budget manual.

(vi) Budget Period: CIMA defines budget period as “the period for which a budget is prepared and

used, which may then be sub-divided into control periods”. It refers to the period of time covered by a

budget. The broad classification in this regard has already been stated as “long-term budget” and “short-term

budget”.

The short-term budget itself could be bifurcated into yearly and quarterly budgets. Long-term budgets

provide the perspective, since one would be able to have a view of what is likely to be achieved and what the

Lesson 10 Budget, Budgeting & Budgetary Control

427

chief problems are likely to be, such as, competition from new products. Short-term budgets, say, for a year

are quite exact and those for a quarter even more so. These are particularly suitable for control purposes. A

short-term budget need not necessarily be for one year. It is generally long enough to cover one season or

business year.

In determining the length of the budget period the following factors should be considered:

(i) The budget period should be long enough to complete production of the various products.

(ii) For the business of a seasonal nature the budget period should cover at least one entire seasonal

cycle.

(iii) The budget period should be long enough to allow for the financing of production well in advance of

actual needs.

(iv) Major operations and drastic changes in plant lay-out or manufacturing methods must be planned

far in advance to determine financial requirements.

(v) The budget period should coincide with the financial accounting period to compare actual results

with budgeted estimates.

A budget period should be distinguished from “control period”. The letter indicates the periodicity with which

reports are sent to the various levels of management. It need not be the same as the budget period. Reports

are sent usually at shorter intervals so that corrective action may be taken within the budget period. This

would ensure that the overall variation between budget and actual is minimised. The periodicity of the reports

is also dependent upon the urgency and significance of the matter under report.

(vii) Budget Key Factor: A budget key factor or principal budget factor is described by the CIMA London

terminology as: “a factor which will limit the activities of an undertaking and which is taken into

account in preparing budgets”. The limiting factor is usually the level of demand for the products or

services of the undertaking but it could be a shortage of one of the productive resources, e.g. skilled labour,

raw material or machine capacity. In order to ensure that the functional budgets are reasonably capable of

fulfilment the extent of the influence of this factor must first be assessed. As noted already all the functions in

all organisations are interlinked. The target of one has influence on that of the other. If the sales department

could sell only 50,000 units, it is no use of producing 1,00,000 units. If the production department has the

capacity for 50,000 units, sales potential of 1,00,000 units is not of much consequence. Deliberations in the

budget committee would lead to a decision regarding steps to get over a limiting factor. If one limiting factor

is got over, another may creap up. Thus, there is a possibility of varying limiting factors under different

circumstances. Decision will have to be taken resulting in optimum production keeping in view the different

limiting factors. The basic issue is an enquiry into the future. All probabilities under different circumstances

are to be worked out to fix the target at the optimum level. This may sometimes involve lengthy mathematical

calculations.

The following is a list of principal budget factors which will influence the targets: (a) customer demand, (b)

plant capacity (c) availability of raw material, skilled labour and capital, (d) availability of accommodation for

plant, raw materials and finished goods and (e) governmental restrictions.

If a limiting factor cannot be got over by any means, then the whole budget involving all functions will have to

be built around that factor. For instance, if the production capacity is 50,000 units and it cannot be increased

in the short run, all budgets, say, the sales budget and raw materials purchase budget, will have to be based

on the production of 50,000 units. To achieve maximum profitability, a key factor must be overcome, if not, at

least efforts should be made to minimise its adverse effect.

EP-CMA

428

(viii) Budget Reports: Performance evaluation and reporting of variances is an integral part of all control

systems. Establishing budgets in itself is of no use unless a comparison is made regularly between the

actual expenditure and the budgeted allowances, and the results reported to the management. For this

purpose, budget reports showing the comparison between the actual and budgeted expenditure should be

presented periodically and promptly. The reports should be prepared in such a manner that they reveal the

responsibility of a department or an executive and give full reasons for the variances so that proper

corrective action may be taken. The reporting should be on the principle of exception and both favourable

and unfavourable variances should be shown and commented upon. In brief, a budget report is a

comparison of the actuals with the budgets both for the month and cumulative up to the current month. The

variations from budgets are worked out in respect of each items of expenses so as to locate the

responsibility and facilitate corrective action.

A budget report, to be effective in the purpose, must be:

(i) Simple in its form so as to be easily intelligible to the recipient concerned: It should bear a suitable

heading and make the period in which it relates;

(ii) Regularly and promptly presented;

(iii) Designed to give only the essential information required and avoid unnecessary details;

(iv) Expressed as far as possible in direct figures;

(v) Correlated to a “money value” wherever possible;

(vi) Free from personal bias of the person preparing it; and

(vii) Dated and signed by those who prepare and check it.

Every budget report should be followed up till the finally desired results are achieved. This follow-up would

require either a discussion with the individual responsible for taking the necessary action or whose action

alone can prevent recurrence of such variations; or revision in the budget itself arising out of errors of

changes in policy.

A specimen budget report for expenses is given below:

BUDGET REPORT

Department................................ Period.............................

Budgeted Actual Difference Cumulative

Expense Increase Decrease variance Reasons

` ` ` ` `

A. Controllable

Repairs

Mach. Maintenance

Elect. Maintenance

Power

Lighting

Lubrication etc.

B. Non-controllable

Expense

Lesson 10 Budget, Budgeting & Budgetary Control

429

Floorspace

General

Prorated

Total

Date of preparation......................................... Copies to:

Prepared by..................................................... 1................................

Checked by...................................................... 2................................

Submitted by................................................... 3................................

PREPARATION & MONITORING OF VARIOUS TYPES OF BUDGETS

Depending upon the various bases adopted, budgets may be classified into different categories. Budgets

may be classified on the basis of (i) the coverage or scope they encompass (ii) the capacity or efficiency to

which they are related (iii) the conditions on which they are based and (iv) the periods which they cover. This

is clearly shown with the help of the following diagram:

BUDGETS

Based on Based on Based on Based on

scope efficiency conditions period

Functional Master Fixed Flexible Basic Current

budget budget budget budget budget budget

Long Short

period period

budget budget

Sales Production Production Overheads Research Financial

budget budget cost budget budget & develop- budget

ment budget

Material Labour Plant Manufacturing Selling and

budget budget budget overheads distribution

budget budget

Cash Capital Exp.

Budget Budget

1. FUNCTIONAL BUDGETS

Budgets for a period are really classified according to the various activities in the organisation. All activities

are interrelated. The forecasts for individual activities are prepared and co-ordinated with those of other

EP-CMA

430

activities and then consolidated to show the total effect of all the activities as a whole. Approved targets for

individual functions are known as “functional budgets”. The consolidation of all functional budgets is known

as the “Master Budget”. This is nothing but the targeted profit and loss statement and balance sheet of the

organisation.

Principal functional budgets are:

(1.1) Sales Budget: The sales budget is a forecast of total sales, expressed in terms of money and quantity.

The first step in the preparation of the sales budget is to forecast as accurately as possible the sales

anticipated during the budget period. Sales forecasts are influenced by a variety of factors, external as well

as internal. External factors include general business conditions, Government policy, etc. Internal factors

consist of sales-prices, sales trend, new-products, etc. The sales-budget is based on sales forecasting which

is the responsibility of the sales manager and market research staff. The sales budget is regarded as the

keystone of budgeting.

(1.2) Production Budget: The production budget is a forecast of the production for budget period. It is

prepared in two parts, viz.., production value budget for the physical units of the products to be manufactured

and the cost of manufacturing budget detailing the budgeted costs. The main steps involving in the

preparation of a production budget are production planning; consideration of capacity; integration with sales

forecasts, inventory-policies, management’s overall policies. The operation of a production budget results in

various advantages, main being: optimum utilisation of productive resources of the enterprise, production of

goods according to schedule enabling the concern to adhere to delivery dates, proper scheduling of factors

of production.

(1.3) Production Cost Budget: It may be further classified as under:

(1.3.1) Materials Budget: Materials requirement budget, commonly known as materials budget, assist the

purchase department in suitably planning the purchases, fixing the maximum and minimum levels of

materials, components etc. The timing and amount of funds which will be needed to make purchases are

also known with the help of the materials budget.

(1.3.2) Labour Budget: The labour content of each item of production as per the production budget is

determined in terms of grades and trades of the workers required and the labour time for each job, operation

and process. The rates of pay, allowances, bonus, etc., of each category are then considered and labour

cost to be set for each budget centre is calculated by multiplying the wage rate with the labour hours for the

number of units of products budgeted.

(1.3.3) Plant Utilisation Budget: Plant Utilisation Budget is prepared for the estimation of plant capacity to

meet the budgeted production during the budgeted period. It is a forecast of plant capacities available for

fulfilling production requirements as specified in the production budget. This budget is expressed in working

hours or other convenient units.

Followings are the features of Plant Utilisation Budget:

1. It will be base for the requirement of machine for sale and production department.

2. It will provide the base of reasonable depreciation so that machine can be replaced in future.

3. It may be base for the new inventions in the context of plant & machinery.

4. It will indicate the budgeted machine load on departments or machines.

5. It reveals that overloading on some departments, so that sales volume may be increased by

providing after-sales service, advertisement campaign reducing selling price.

Lesson 10 Budget, Budgeting & Budgetary Control

431

(1.4) Overhead Budget: It may be further classified as under:

(1.4.1) Manufacturing Overhead Budget: The following steps are required to be taken up to prepare the

manufacturing overhead budget:

(i) Classification of expenditure into fixed, variable and semi-variable and collection thereof in

accordance with a schedule of standing order numbers;

(ii) Departmentalisation of expenditure;

(iii) Determining the level of activity for setting the overhead rates; and level of activity may be actual,

budgeted level or normal capacity; and

(iv) Establishing the variable overhead rates per unit of production or productive hour.

(1.4.2) Selling and Distribution Budget: The selling expenses include all items of expenditure on the

promotion, maintenance and distribution of finished products. This budget which is closely related to the

sales budget is the forecast of the cost of selling and distribution, for the budgeted period. Selling and

distribution expenses may be fixed or variable with regard to the volume of sales; separate budgets are

usually established for fixed or variable selling and distribution expenses.

(1.5) Research and Development Budget: This depends mostly on management decisions regarding the

research and development effort - the projects already in hand and the proposed projects.

(1.6) Financial Budget: It may be further classified as under

(1.6.1) Cash Budget: Cash forecast precedes a cash budget. A cash forecast is an estimate showing the

amount of cash which would be available in a future period. This budget usually of two parts giving detailed

estimates of (i) cash receipts and (ii) cash disbursements. Estimates of cash-receipts are prepared on a

monthly basis and depend upon estimated cash-sales, collections from debtors and anticipated receipts from

other sources such as sale of assets, borrowings etc. Estimates of cash disbursements are based on

estimated cash purchases, payment to creditors, employees remuneration, bonus, advances to suppliers,

budgeted capital expenditure for expansion etc.

The main objectives of preparing cash budget are as follows:

(i) The probable cash position as a result of planned operation is indicated and thus the excess or

shortage of cash is known. This helps in arranging short term borrowings in advance to meet the

situations of shortage of cash or making investments in times of cash in excess.

(ii) Cash can be co-ordinated in relation to total working capital, sales investment and debt.

(iii) A sound basis for credit for current control of cash position is established.

(iv) The effect of sudden and seasonal requirements, large stocks, delay in collection of receipts etc. on

the cash position of the organisation is revealed.

A cash budget can be prepared by any of the following methods:

(i) Receipts and payments method

(ii) Adjusted profit and loss account method

(iii) Balance sheet method.

(i) Receipts and Payments Method: In this method the cash receipts from various sources and cash

payments to various agencies are estimated. Delay in cash receipts and lag in payments are taken into

EP-CMA

432

account for making estimates. Since this method is based on the concept of cash accounting, accruals and

adjustments obviously cannot find place in the preparation of cash budgets. The opening balance of cash of

a period and the estimated cash receipts are added and from this, the total of estimated cash payments are

deducted to find out the closing balance.

Illustration 1

Prepare a cash budget of M/s Novan Television & Co. on the basis of the following information for the first six

months of 2014:

(a) Cost and prices unchanged.

(b) Cash sales - 25% and credit sales - 75%.

(c) 60% of credit sales are collected in the month after sales, 30% in the second month and 10% in the

third. No bad debts are anticipated.

(d) Sales forecasts are as follows:

` `

October 2013 12,00,000 March 2012 8,00,000

November 2013 14,00,000 April 2012 12,00,000

December 2013 16,00,000 May 2012 10,00,000

January 2014 6,00,000 June 2012 8,00,000

February 2014 8,00,000 July 2012 12,00,000

(e) Gross profit margin 20%.

(f) Anticipated purchases:

`

January 2014 6,40,000

February 2014 6,40,000

March 2014 9,60,000

April 2014 8,00,000

May 2014 6,40,000

June 2014 9,60,000

(g) Wages and Salaries to be paid:

January 2014 1,20,000

February 2014 1,60,000

March 2014 2,00,000

April 2014 2,00,000

May 2014 1,60,000

June 2014 1,40,000

(h) Interest on `10,00,000 @ 12% on debentures is due by the end of March and June.

(i) Excise deposit due in April `2,00,000.

(j) Capital expenditure on plant and machinery planned for June `1,20,000.

(k) Company has a cash balance of `4,00,000 at 31.12.2013.

(l) Company can borrow on monthly basis.

(m) Rent is `8,000 per month.

Solution:

M/s Novan Television Company

Cash Budget for six months, January to June, 2014

January February March April May June

` ` ` ` ` `

Receipts:

Cash sales 1,50,000 2,00,000 2,00,000 3,00,000 2,50,000 2,00,000

Collections from debtors 11,25,000 7,35,000 6,15,000 5,85,000 7,80,000 7,80,000

Total Receipts (A) 12,75,000 9,35,000 8,15,000 8,85,000 10,30,000 9,80,000

Payments:

Purchases 6,40,000 6,40,000 9,60,000 8,00,000 6,40,000 9,60,000

Rent 8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000

Wages and Salaries 1,20,000 1,60,000 2,00,000 2,00,000 1,60,000 1,40,000

Excise Deposit    2,00,000  

Capital Expenditure      1,20,000

Interest   30,000   30,000

Total Payment (B) 7,68,000 8,08,000 11,98,000 12,08,000 8,08,000 12,58,000

Balance:

Net Cash Receipts (A - B) 5,07,000 1,27,000 (3,83,000) (3,23,000) 2,22,000 (2,78,000)

Cash balance at the beginning

of the month 4,00,000 9,07,000 10,34,000 6,51,000 4,00,000 5,50,000

Total 9,07,000 10,34,000 6,51,000 3,28,000 6,22,000 2,72,000

Borrowing/(Surplus)    72,000 (72,000) 1,28,000

Cash balance at the close _______ ________ _______ _______ _______ _______

of the month 9,07,000 10,34,000 6,51,000 4,00,000 5,50,000 4,00,000

Note: It is assumed that the company will maintain cash balance of `4,00,000 as in the beginning of the budget period, resorting to borrowing, if necessary. The company could

also place substantial amounts on short duration deposits, of 15 to 30 days during the first three months.

Lesson 10

Budget, B

udgeting & Budgetary Contro

l

43

3

Working Note:

Oct. 2013 Nov. 2013 Dec. 2013 Jan. 2014 Feb. 2014 March 2014 April 2014 May 2014 June 2014

`

` ` ` ` ` ` ` `

Total Sales 12,00,000

14,00,000

16,00,000

6,00,000

8,00,000

12,00,000

10,00,000

8,00,000

Credit Sales 9,00,000

10,50,000

12,00,000

4,50,000

6,00,000

9,00,000

7,50,000

6,00,000

Collections:

1st month, 60%

7,20,000

2,70,000

3,60,000

5,40,000

4,50,000

2nd month, 30%

3,15,000

3,60,000

1,35,000

1,80,000

2,70,000

3rd month, 10%

90,000

1,05,000

1,20,000

45,000

60,000

*11,25,000

7,35,000

6,15,000

5,85,000

7,80,000

* For example: 60% of credit sales in December 2013;

30% of credit sales in November 2013; and

10% of credit sales in October 2013.

434 EP-CMA

Lesson 10 Budget, Budgeting & Budgetary Control

435

(ii) Adjusted Profit and Loss Account Method: In this method the opening balance is adjusted with the

anticipated increases or decreases in current assets and liabilities, provision for depreciation, special

receipts and the net profit for the year before taxation and appropriations. From the aggregate amount of

these, the estimated taxation and dividends payable, expenditure on fixed assets and special payments if

any are deducted . The resulting balance is the estimated cash in hand at the end of the budget period.

The vital point of difference between receipts and payments method and adjusted profit and loss method is

that the former takes into account only cash transactions while the latter considers non cash items as it

reverses all accruals. Further, adjusted profit and loss method gives only a broad idea of the cash position

but receipts and payments method furnishes the maximum possible details.

Illustration 2

Following are the Balance Sheets of Metal Engineering Limited one actual as on 31st December, 2013 and

other forecast as on 31st December, 2014:

2013 2014

(Actuals) (Forecast)

`

Cash 18,400 1,36,800

Debtors 49,000 83,200

Stock 61,900 92,500

Investments 1,00,000 90,000

Plant (at cost) 2,20,000 2,40,000

4,49,300 6,42,500

Accounts Payable 67,300 1,00,000

Debentures 73,500 50,000

Accumulated Depreciation 50,000 30,000

Equity Share Capital 1,25,000 1,75,000

Profit and Loss Account 1,33,500 2,87,500

4,49,300 6,42,500

The forecast Profit and Loss Account in a summarised form for the budget year ended 31st December, 2014

is as follows:

`. `

To Accumulated depreciation 22,000 By Gross profit 2,00,000

“ Administration and selling ” Profit on the sale of investments 2,000

expenses 10,000 ” Interest 10,000

“ Income-tax 5,000

“ Interest charges 3,000

“ Loss on sale of plant 8,000

“ Net profit 1,64,000 _______

2,12,000 2,12,000

To Dividend (including CDT) 10,000 By Net profit 1,64,000

“ Balance c/d 1,54,000 _______

1,64,000 1,64,000

Additional information:

(i) New plant costing `80,000 was purchased during the year.

EP-CMA

436

(ii) An old plant, costing `60,000 and with accumulated depreciation of ` 42,000 was sold for `10,000.

(iii) Investments costing `10,000 were sold for `12,000.

Prepare a cash budget for the management of the company by Adjusted Profit and Loss method.

Solution:

Cash Budget (Adjusted Profit and Loss)

(for the Budget period ended 31st December 2014)

` `

Opening Balance of Cash 18,400

Add: Additions to Cash:

Issue of share capital 50,000

Sale of plant 10,000

Sale of investments 12,000

Depreciation written back 22,000

Loss on sale of plant 8,000

Increase in creditors 32,700

Profit of the year 1,64,000 2,98,700

3,17,100

Less: Reduction in Cash:

Redemption of debentures 23,500

Purchase of plant 80,000

Payment of dividend (including CDT) 10,000

Profit on sale of investments taken back 2,000

Increase in stock 30,600

Increase in debtors 34,200 1,80,300

Closing balance of cash 1,36,800

(iii) Balance Sheet Method: Under this method of preparing cash budget a forecast balance sheet is

prepared as at the end of the budget period with all items of assets and liabilities except cash balance which

is arrived at as a balancing figure. The magnitude of the two sides of the balance sheet excluding cash

balance would determine whether the bank account would show a debit or credit balance i.e. cash balance at

bank or bank overdraft.

(1.6.2) Capital Expenditure Budget: Capital expenditure budget is the plan of the proposed outlay on fixed

assets and is very closely related to the cash budget. Capital expenditure forecasting is a continuous

process and by nature it is a long-term function. Capital forecasts should be made for a number of years.

Alongwith the long-term forecast, there should also be a short-term forecast to cover the general budget

period under consideration. It is also essential that the capital expenditure budget be properly co-ordinated

with all the operational budgets of the concern so as to form an integral part of the overall plan.

2. MASTER BUDGET

Master budget is a consolidated summary of the various functional budgets. A master budget is the summary

budget incorporating its component functional budget and which is finally approved, adopted and employed.

It is the culmination of the preparation of all other budgets like the sales budget, production budget, purchase

budget etc. It consists in reality of the budgeted profit and loss account, the balance sheet and the budgeted

funds flow statement.

Lesson 10 Budget, Budgeting & Budgetary Control

437

The master budget is prepared by the budget committee on the basis of co-ordinated functional budgets and

becomes the target of the company during the budget period when it is finally approved. This budget acts as

the company’s individualised key to successful financial planning and control. It provides the basis of computing

the effect of any changes in any phase of operations, such as sales volume, product mix, prices, labour costs,

material costs or change in facilities. It segregates income, costs and profits by areas of responsibility. Master

budget presents all this information to the depth appropriate for the top management action.

In the master budget, costs are classified and summarised by types of expenses as well as by departments.

This information extends the range of usefulness of master budget. It is considered as the best mode of

understanding the company’s micro- economic position relating to the forthcoming budget period. Master

Budget is not merely a compendium of theoretical calculations. The figures that it contains, are the reflection

of the actual intentions of the company relating to different areas for the forthcoming budget period.

3. FIXED BUDGETS

A budget may be established either as a fixed budget or a flexible budget. A fixed budget is a budget

designed to remain unchanged irrespective of the level of activity actually attained. A fixed budget is one

which is designed for a specific planned output level and is not adjusted to the level of activity attained at the

time of comparison between the budgeted and actual costs. Obviously, fixed budgets can be established

only for a small period of time when the actual output is not anticipated to differ much from the budgeted

output. However, a fixed budget is liable to revision if due to business conditions undergoing a basic change

or due to other reasons, actual operations differ widely from those planned in the fixed budget. These

budgets are most suited for fixed expenses but they have only a limited application and is ineffective as a

tool for cost control.

4. FLEXIBLE BUDGETS

The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants, London defines flexible budget as a budget which by

recognising different cost behaviour patterns, is designed to change as volume of output changes. It is a

budget prepared in a manner so as to give the budgeted cost for any level of activity. It is a budget which by

recognising the difference between fixed, semi-fixed and variable cost is designed to change in relation to

the activity attained. It is designed to furnish budgeted cost at any level of activity attained. Flexible

budgeting is desirable in the following cases:

(i) Where the level of activity during the year varies from period to period, either due to the seasonal

nature of the industry or to variation in demand.

(ii) Where the business is a new one and is difficult to foresee the demand.

(iii) Where the undertaking is suffering from shortage of a factor of production such as materials, labour,

plant capacity, etc.

The main characteristic of flexible budget is that it shows the expenditure appropriate to various levels of

output. If the volume changes the expenditure appropriate to it can be established from the flexible budget

for comparison with actual expenditure as a means of control. It provides a logical comparison of budget

allowances with actual cost. When flexible budget is prepared, actual cost at actual activity is compared with

budgeted cost at actual activity i.e. two things to a like base. For preparation of flexible budget, items of cost

have to be analysed individually to determine how different items of cost behave to change in volume.

Therefore, in-depth cost analysis and cost identification is required for preparation of flexible budget.

Following are the striking features of flexible budgets:

(i) They are prepared for a range of activity instead of a single level.

EP-CMA

438

(ii) They provide a very dynamic basis for comparison because they are automatically geared to

changes in volume.

(iii) They provide a tailor-made budget for a particular volume.

(iv) These are based upon adequate knowledge of cost behaviour pattern.

Flexible budgets may be prepared in the following method:

(i) Tabular method or multi-activity method

(ii) Formula method or ratio method and

(iii) Graphic method.

Illustration 3

Following information is available from the records of Jay Ltd. for the year end 31st March 2014.

` (lakhs)

Fixed Expenses

Wages and salaries 9.5

Rent, rates and taxes 6.6

Depreciation 7.4

Sundry administrative expenses 6.5

Semi-Variable Expenses

(at 50% of capacity)

Maintenance and repairs 3.5

Indirect labour 7.9

Sales department salaries 3.8

Sundry administrative expenses 2.8

Variable Expenses

(at 50% of capacity)

Materials 21.7

Labour 20.4

Other expenses 7.9

98.0

Assuming that the fixed expenses remain constant for all levels of production, semi-variable expenses

remain constant between 45% and 65% of capacity increasing by 10% between 65% and 80% and by 20%

between 80% and 100%.

Sales at various levels are :

` (lakhs)

50% capacity 100

60% “ 120

75% “ 150

90% “ 180

100% “ 200

Prepare a flexible budget for the year and forecast the profits at 60%, 75%, 90% and 100% of capacity.

Lesson 10 Budget, Budgeting & Budgetary Control

439

Solution:

Flexible Budget

Period.......................

50% 60% 75% 90% 100%

` ` ` ` `

(lakhs) (lakhs) (lakhs) (lakhs) (lakhs)

Sales 100 120 150 180 200

Variable expenses

Materials 21.70 26.04 32.55 39.06 43.40

Labour 20.40 24.48 30.60 36.72 40.80

Other expenses 7.90 9.48 11.85 14.22 15.80

Semi-variable expenses

Maintenance and repairs 3.50 3.50 3.85 4.20 4.20

Indirect labour 7.90 7.90 8.69 9.48 9.48

Sales Deptt. salary, etc. 3.80 3.80 4.18 4.56 4.56

Sundry administrative

expenses 2.80 2.80 3.08 3.36 3.36

Fixed expenses

Wages and salaries 9.50 9.50 9.50 9.50 9.50

Rent, rates and taxes 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60

Depreciation 7.40 7.40 7.40 7.40 7.40

Sundry administrative

Expenses 6.50 6.50 6.50 6.50 6.50

_____ _____ _____ _____ _____

Total 98.00 108.00 124.80 141.60 152.60

Profit 2.00 12.00 25.20 38.40 47.40

Illustration 4

A firm at present operates at 60% of its capacity. At this level and at the level of 50% utilisation of capacity,

the figures relating to its operations could be summarised as stated below:

50% 60%

` `

Materials 10,00,000 12,00,000

Labour 8,00,000 9,00,000

Manufacturing overheads 6,00,000 6,60,000

Administrative overheads 3,50,000 3,50,000

Selling and distribution overheads 4,50,000 5,00,000

Research and development 1,50,000 2,00,000

Total 33,50,000 38,10,000

Profit 1,50,000 3,90,000

Sales 35,00,000 42,00,000

Draw up the budget at 80% utilisation of capacity assuming that -

(i) sales at this level can be maintained only by a flat 5% reduction in the selling price;

EP-CMA

440

(ii) economy in purchase of material will equal to 2-1/2% of the current amounts;

(iii) the research and development expenditure will be pegged at `2,50,000 per annum; and

(iv) administrative overheads will require 10% increase.

Solution:

Budget at 80% capacity utilisation

60% 80%

` `

Materials 12,00,000 15,60,000

Labour 9,00,000 11,00,000

Manufacturing overheads 6,60,000 7,80,000

Administrative overheads 3,50,000 3,85,000

Selling and distribution overheads 5,00,000 6,00,000

Research and development 2,00,000 2,50,000

Total 38,10,000 46,75,000

Profit 3,90,000 6,45,000

Sales 42,00,000 53,20,000

Working Notes:

` `

(1) Materials at 60% capacity 12,00,000

at 80% capacity 16,00,000

Less: 2-1/2% 40,000 15,60,000

(2) Variable fixed portions of various expenses

50% 60% Increase Total Fixed

for 10%

` ` (variable) variable

Labour 8,00,000 9,00,000 1,00,000 6,00,000 3,00,000

Mfg. overhead 6,00,000 6,60,000 60,000 3,60,000 3,00,000

Selling overheads 4,50,000 5,00,000 50,000 3,00,000 2,00,000

(3) At 80% Capacity:

Labour: Fixed 3,00,000

Variable (`1,00,000 for every 10%) 8,00,000 11,00,000

Mfg. overheads: Fixed 3,00,000

Variable (`60,000 for every 10%) 4,80,000 7,80,000

Selling overheads: Fixed 2,00,000

Variable (`50,000 for every 10%) 4,00,000 6,00,000

(4) Sales: at 60% Capacity 42,00,000

at 80% Capacity 56,00,000

Less: 5% 2,80,000 53,20,000

Lesson 10 Budget, Budgeting & Budgetary Control

441

Illustration 5

ABC Ltd. produces and sells a single product. Sales budget for the calendar year 2014 for each quarter is as

under:

Quarter No. of Units to be Sold

I 12,000

II 15,000

III 16,500

IV 18,000

The year 2014 is expected to open with an inventory of 4,000 units of finished product and close with an

inventory of 6,500 units. Production is customarily scheduled to provide for two-thirds of the current quarter’s

demand plus one-third of the following quarter’s demand. Thus production anticipates sales volume by about

one month. The standard cost details for one unit of the product is as follows:

— Direct materials 10 Kgs. @ 50 paise per kg.

— Direct labour 1 hour 30 minutes @ `4 per hour.

— Variable overheads 1 hour 30 minutes @ `1 per hour.

— Fixed overheads 1 hour 30 minutes @ `2 per hour based on a budgeted production volume of

90,000 direct labour hours for the year.

Answer the following:

(i) Prepare a production budget for the year 2014 by quarters, showing the number of units to be

produced.

(ii) If the budgeted selling price per unit is `17, what would be the budgeted profit for the year as a

whole?

(iii) In which quarter of the year the company is expected to break-even?

Solution:

Number of units to be sold during the year 2014

Quarter I 12,000 units

Quarter II 15,000 units

Quarter III 16,500 units

Quarter IV 18,000 units

Sales during the year 61,500 units

(i) Production Budget (for the year 2014 by quarters)

Quarter I

Units

Quarter II

Units

Quarter III

Units

Quarter IV

Units

Total

Units

Units to be produced in

each quarter :

EP-CMA

442

8,000 10,000 11,000 12,000 41,000 2/3rd of the current

quarter’s sales demand













× 000,12

3

2













× 000,15

3

2













× 500,16

3

2













× 000,18

3

2

5,000

5,500

6,000

6,500

23,000

Add : 1/3 of the following

quarter’s sales demand in

first 3 quarters and

closing inventory in the

4th quarter













× 000,15

3

1













× 500,16

3

1













× 000,18

3

1













× 500,19

3

1

Total 13,000 15,500 17,000 18,500 64,000

(1) Variable Cost per unit

` `

Direct Material : 10 kgs. @ 50 paise per kg. 5.00

Direct labour : 1-½ hours @ `4 per hour 6.00

Variable overheads: 1-½ hours @ `1 per hour 1.50 12.50

(2) Fixed overhead per annum: 90,000 hrs. @ `2 = `1,80,000

(ii) Statement of Budgeted Profit for the year (as a whole)

`

Total Sales : 61,500 units @ `17 per unit 10,45,000

Less : Total Variable Cost : 61,500 units @ 12.50 per unit

7,68,750

Contribution 2,76,750

Less : Fixed cost for the year

1,80,000

Profit for the year 2014 as a whole 96,750

Fixed Overheads

(iii) Beak Even Point =

Selling Price per unit – Variable Cost per unit

`1,80,000

= = 40,000 units.

(`17 – `12.50)

Total sales (in units) by the end of 3rd quarter will be 43,500 (i.e. 12,000 + 15,000 + 16,500).

Therefore, the company will break-even in the later part of the 3rd quarter.

5. BASIC BUDGETS

Basic budget has been defined as a budget which is prepared for use unaltered over a long period of time.

This does not take into consideration current conditions and can be attainable under standard conditions.

6. CURRENT BUDGETS

A current budget can be defined as a budget which is related to the current conditions and is prepared for

use over a short period of time. This budget is more useful than basic budget, as the target it lays down will

be corrected to current conditions.

Lesson 10 Budget, Budgeting & Budgetary Control

443

7. LONG-TERM BUDGETS

A long-term budget can be defined as a budget which is prepared for periods longer than a year’. These

budgets help in business forecasting and forward planning. Capital expenditure budgets and research

developments budgets are just examples of long-term budgets.

8. SHORT-TERM BUDGETS

This budget is defined as a budget which is prepared for a period less than a year and is very useful to lower

levels of management for control purposes. In an ideal situation a short-term budget should perfectly fit into a

long-term budget.

ZERO BASE BUDGETING

Zero base budgeting is a revolutionary concept of planning the future activities and there is a sharp

contradiction from conventional budgeting. Zero base budgeting, may be better termed as “De nova budgeting”

or budgeting from the beginning without any reference to any base-past budgets and actual happening. Zero

base budgeting may be defined as “a planning and budgeting process which requires each manager to justify

his entire budget request in detail from scratch (hence zero base) and shifts the burden of proof to each

manager to justify why he should spend any money at all. The approach requires that all activities be analysed

in decision packages which are evaluated by systematic analysis and ranked in order of importance”.

CIMA defines zero base budgeting as “a method of budgeting whereby all activities are re-evaluated

each time a budget is set. Discrete levels of each activity are valued and a combination chosen to

match funds available.”

It is a technique which complements and links the existing planning, budgeting and review processes. It

identifies alternative and efficient methods of utilising limited resources in effective attainment of selected

benefits. It is a flexible management approach which provides a credible rationale for reallocating resources

by focusing on systematic review and justification of the funding and performance levels of current

programmes of activities.

The concept of zero base budgeting was developed in U.S.A. Under zero-base budgeting, each programme

and each of its constituent part is challenged for its very inclusion in each years budget. Programme

objectives are also re-examined with a view to start things afresh. It requires review analysis and evaluation

of each programme in order to justify its inclusion or exclusion from final budget. Following steps are usually

involved:

(i) Describing and analysing all current or proposed programmes usually called “decision packages”.

This consists of identification, analysis and formulation assists an evaluation in terms of purposes,

consequence, performance measures, alternatives and cause and benefits. Decision units are the

lowest level programmes or organisational entity for which budgets are prepared.

(ii) Ranking of decision packages alongwith documents in support of these packages.

(iii) The sources are allocated in accordance with the ranking.

Zero-base budgeting is based on the premise that every rupee of expenditure requires justification. The

traditional budgeting approach includes expenditures of previous year which are automatically incorporated in

new budget proposals and only increments are subjected to debate. Zero base budgeting assumes that a

responsibility centre manager has had no previous expenditure. Important features of zero-base budgeting are:

(i) Concentration of efforts is not simply on “how much” a unit will spend but “why” it needs to spend.

EP-CMA

444

(ii) Choices are made on the basis of what each unit can offer for a specific cost.

(iii) Individual unit’s objects are linked to corporate targets.

(iv) Quick budget adjustments can be made if, during the operating year costs are required to maintain

expenditure level.

(v) Alternative ways are considered.

(vi) Participation of all levels in decision-making.

Difference between Traditional Budgeting and Zero Base Budgeting

(i) Traditional budgeting is accounting-oriented. Main stress happens to be on previous level of

expenditure. Zero base budgeting makes a decision oriented approach.

(ii) In traditional budgeting, first reference is made to past level of spending and then demand is made

for inflation and new programmes. In zero base budgeting a decision unit is broken into

understandable decision packages which are ranked according to importance to enable top

management to focus attention only on decision packages which enjoy priority to others.

(iii) In traditional budgeting, some managers deliberately inflate their budget request so that after the

cuts they still get what they want. In zero base budgeting, a rational analysis of budget proposal is

attempted.

(iv) Traditional budgeting is not as clear and responsive as zero base budgeting.

(v) In traditional budgeting, it is for top management to decide why a particular amount should be spent

on a particular decision unit. In zero base budgeting this responsibility is shifted from top

management to the manager of decision unit.

(vi) Traditional budgeting makes a routing approach while zero base budgeting makes a very straight-

forward approach and immediately spotlights the decisions packages enjoying priority over others.

Advantages of Zero Base Budgeting:

(i) Zero base budgeting is not based on incremental approach, so it promotes operational efficiency

because it require managers to review and justify their activities or the fund requested.

(ii) Since this system requires participation of all managers, preparation of budgets, responsibility of all

levels at management in successful execution of budgetary system can be ensured.

(iii) This technique is relatively elastic because budgets are prepared every year on a zero base. This

system makes it obligatory to develop financial planning and management information system.

(iv) This system weeds out inefficiency and reduces the cost of production because every budget

proposal is evaluated on the basis of cost benefit analysis.

(v) It provides the organisation with a systematic way to evaluate different operations and programmes

undertaken by the management. It enables management to allocate resources according to priority

of the programmes.

(vi) It is helpful to the management in making optimum allocation of scarce resources because a unique

aspect of zero base budgeting is the evaluation of both current and proposed expenditure and

placing it some order of priority.

Lesson 10 Budget, Budgeting & Budgetary Control

445

Criticism against zero base budgeting:

(1) Defining the decision units and decision packages is rather difficult.

(2) Zero base budgeting requires a lot of training for managers.

(3) Cost of preparing the various packages may be very high in large firms involving large number of

decision packages.

(4) It may lay more emphasis on short term benefits to the detriment of long-term objectives of the

organisation.

(5) It will lead to enormous increase in paper work created by the decision packages. The assumptions

about costs and benefits in each package must be continually up dated and new packages

developed as soon as new activities emerge.

(6) Where objectives are very difficult to quantify as in research and development, zero base budgeting

does not offer any significant control advantage.

PROGRAMME BUDGETING

A program budget is a budget designed for a specific activity or program. This budget includes only revenue

and expenses for a specific program. Program budgets are used in many organizations including businesses

and schools. Establishing a budget by grouping expenditures and revenues into functional activities, or

programs. Rather than having a budget item for capital equipment that might be spread over many different

programs (as is done in line-item budgeting), a program budget would include only proposed capital

expenditures for a specific program.

The program budget allocates money to major program areas, focusing on the expected results of services

and activities to be carried out. Program areas often utilized by government entities include public safety,

public works, human services, leisure services, and general government. The emphasis of program project’s

is on the attainment of long-term local community goals.

PERFORMANCE BUDGETING

The concept of performance budgeting relates to greater management efficiency specially in government

work. With a view to introducing a system’s approach, the concept of performance budgeting was developed

and as such there was a shift from financial classification to ‘cost’ or ‘objective’ classification. Performance

budgeting, is therefore, looked upon as a budget based on functions, activities and projects and is linked to

the budgetary system based on objective classification of expenditure.

According to National Institute of Bank Management, Bombay performance budgeting technique is, the

process of analysing identifying, simplifying and crystallising specific performance objectives of a job to be

achieved over a period in the frame work of the organisational objectives, the purpose and objectives of the

job. The technique is characterised by its specific direction towards the business objectives of the

organisation. Thus, performance budgeting lays immediate stress on the achievement of specific goals over

a period of time. It requires preparation of periodic performance reports. Such reports compare budget and

actual data and show any existing variances.

The purpose of performance budgeting is to focus attention upon the work to be done, services to be

rendered rather than things to be spent for or acquired. In performance budgeting, emphasis is shifted from

control of inputs to efficient and economic management of functions and objectives. Performance budgeting

takes a system view of activities by trying to associate the inputs of the expenditure with the output of

accomplishment in terms of services, benefits etc. In performance budgeting, the objectives of the budget

EP-CMA

446

makers and setting the task and sub-task for accomplishment of the defined objectives are to be clearly

decided well in advance before budgetary allocations of inputs are made. Each homogenous function is

broken down into a number of subordinate functions.

The main purposes of performance budgeting are:

1. To review at every stage, and at every level of the organisation, so as to measure progress towards

the short-term and long-term objectives.

2. To inter-relate physical and financial aspects of every programme, project or activity.

3. To facilitate more effective performance audit.

4. To assess the effects of the decision-making of supervisor to the middle and top-managers.

5. To bring annual plans and budgets in line with the short and long-term plan objectives.

6. To present a comprehensive operational document showing the complete planning fabric of the

programmes and prospectus their objectives inter-woven with the financial and physical aspects.

A performance budget presents estimate for expenditure and earnings in terms of functions, programmes,

activities and projects. For introducing performance budgeting financial requirements are put up in relation to:

(a) Programmes and outlay indicating the range of work to be done by each categorised agency.

(b) Object-wise classification showing objects of expenditure, e.g. office establishment, etc. is usually

shown in the conventional budgets.

(c) Sources of financing.

However, performance budgeting has certain limitations such as difficulty in classifying programmes and

activities, problems of evaluation of various schemes, relegation to the background of important

programmes. Moreover, the technique enables only quantitative evaluation scheme and sometimes the

needed results cannot be measured.

LESSON ROUND UP

•

A budget is a precise statement of the financial and quantitative implications of the course of action that

management has decided to follow in the immediate next period of time (usually a year).

•

Budgetary control is the establishment of budgets, relating the responsibilities of executive to the requirements of a

policy and the continuous comparison of actual with budgeted results either to secure by individual action the

objectives of that policy or to provide a firm basis for its revision.

•

Budget manual is a document which sets out the responsibilities of the persons engaged in the routine of and the

forms and records required for budgetary control.

•

Budget key factor also known as limiting factor, governing factor or principal budget means the factor which limits the

size of output. It is the factor the extent whose influence must first be assessed in order to ensure that functional

budgets are capable of fulfillment. The influencing factors are: (a) customer demand, (b) plant capacity (c) availability

of raw material, skilled labour and capital, (d) availability of accommodation for plant, raw materials and finished

goods and (e) governmental restrictions, etc.

•

Fixed budget is a budget designed to remain unchanged irrespective of the level of activity actually attained.

•

A flexible budget is a budget which is designed to change in relation to the level of activity attained.

•

Zero base budgeting is a method of budgeting whereby all activities are re-evaluated each time a budget is set.

Lesson 10 Budget, Budgeting & Budgetary Control

447

Discrete levels of each activity are valued and a combination chosen to match funds available. It is a system

whereby each budget item, regardless of whether it is new or existing must be justified in its entirety each time a new

budget is prepared.

•

Performance budgeting involves evaluation of performance of an organization in the context of both specific as well

as overall objectives of the organization. Performance budgeting lays emphasis on achievement of physical targets.

SELF TEST QUESTIONS

1. What is budgetary control? Discuss the various preliminaries required for adoption of a system of

budgetary control.

2. What are the main steps in budgetary control? State the main objectives of budgetary control.

3. What factors generally determine a budget period? Give examples?

4. Distinguish between ‘fixed budget’ and ‘flexible budget’.

5. What do you understand by master budget? Into what sections is it usually divided, and what are

the purposes of the divisions?

6. Name the different types of budgets that are built up for effective control.

7. What is a budget report? State the matters that should be incorporated in a good report. How does

it assist the management?

8. What is a principal budget factor? Give a list of such ‘principal budget factors’ and state the effect of

the existence of two or more budget factors in a business.

9. Write a note on (i) zero base budget and (ii) performance budget.

10. ABC Ltd. a newly started company wishes to prepare cash budget from January. Prepare a cash

budget for the first six months from the following estimated revenue and expenses.

Overheads Month Total Sales

`

Materials

`

Wages

`

Production

`

Selling &

Distribution

`

Jan. 20,000 20,000 4,000 3,200 800

Feb. 22,000 14,000 4,400 3,300 900

March 28,000 14,000 4,600 3,400 900

April 36,000 22,000 4,600 3,500 1,000

May 30,000 20,000 4,000 3,200 900

June 40,000 25,000 5,000 3,600 1,200

Cash balance on Ist January was `10,000. New machinery is to be installed at `20,000 on credit, to

be repaid by two equal instalments in March and April.

Sales commission at @ 5% on total sales is to be paid within a month following actual sales.

`10,000 being the amount of 2nd call may be received in March. Share premium amounting to

`2,000 is also obtainable with the 2nd call.

Period of credit allowed by suppliers - 2 months

Period of credit allowed to customers - 1 month

EP-CMA

448

Delay in payment of overheads - 1 month

Delay in payment of wages - 1/2 month

Assume cash sales to be 50% of total sales.

[Ans. Closing balances: Jan. `18,000; Feb. `29,800; March `27,000; April `24,700; May `33,100;

June `36,000].

11. The cost of an article at capacity level of 5,000 units is given under A below. For a variation of 25%

in capacity above or below this level, the individual expenses vary as indicated under B below:

A B

`

Material cost 25,000 (100% varying)

Labour cost 15,000 (100% varying)

Power 1,250 (80% varying)

Repairs and maintenance 2,000 (75% varying)

Stores 1,000 (100% varying)

Inspection 500 (20% varying)

Depreciation 10,000 (100% fixed)

Administration overheads 5,000 (25% varying)

Selling overheads 3,000 (50% varying)

62,750

Cost per unit 12.55

Find the unit cost of the product under each individual expense at production levels of 4,000 units

and 6,000 units.

[Ans. Total cost per unit - 4,000 units - `13.37; 5,000 units `12.55; 6,000 units - `12].

12. Case Study

X is an employee of Zero Financial Corporation Ltd. He has been assigned the task of preparing

budget for the company. He observed that in previous year budget was prepared on the basis of

previous year figures and in various cases either the budgeted amount was lying unutilized or it fell

short.He wants to avoid such a situation in future Budgetary Process.

Explain the reason of over budgeting/short fall in the above listed case. Which of the budgetary

technique should be used by `X’ so as to avoid Over Budgeting/Short Budgeting.

Lesson 11

Cost Accounting Records and Cost Audit

•

Cost audit

•

Provisions of Companies Act, 2013

pertaining to cost accounting records

•

Provisions of Companies Act, 2013

pertaining to cost audit

•

Purpose of cost audit

•

Scope of cost audit

•

Advantages of cost audit

•

Appointment & Remuneration of cost

auditor

•

Rights and responsibilities of cost auditor

•

Penalties

•

Cost audit techniques

•

Cost audit programme.

•

Cost audit report

•

Lesson Round Up

•

Self-Test Questions

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

Section 2(13)(iv) of the Companies Act 2013,

contains the provisions relating to maintenance of

cost accounting records and Section 148 of the Act

contains the provisions relating to Cost Audit.

Introducing statutory requirement of maintenance of

cost accounting records and audit thereof as

applicable by a qualified cost accountant, the

Government has the objectives and reasons for

ensuring that the companies keep proper records

was to inculcate a culture of cost consciousness

among industries for better resource management, to

make the efficiency audit possible, and to make cost

data available to the Government.

The objectives of this lesson are to enable the

student to understand the meaning of cost

accounting records, the purposes for which cost

records are being maintained, meaning of cost audit,

various techniques used in cost audit etc. The study

of this lesson will help one to understand the nature,

scope and utility of cost accounting records and cost

audit.

Cost audit is an independent examination of cost records and other related information of an entity including a

non‐profit entity, when such an examination is conducted with a view to expressing an opinion thereon.

(As per definition of CAAS 101)

LESSON

OUTLINE

EP-CMA

450

COST AUDIT

Cost audit is an independent examination of cost records and other related information of an entity including

a non-profit entity, when such an examination is conducted with a view to expressing an opinion thereon.

Cost audit comprises of the followings:

(a) Verification of the cost accounting records for the accuracy of the cost accounts, cost reports, cost

statements and cost data and

(b) Examination of these records to ensure that they adhere to the cost accounting principles, plans,

procedures and objectives.

It, therefore, means that the cost auditors’ approach should be to ensure that the cost accounting plan is in

consonance with the objectives set by the organisation and the system of accounting is geared towards the

attainment of these objectives. The cost auditor should also establish the correctness or otherwise of the

figures by the processes of vouching verification, reconciliation etc.

PROVISIONS OF COMAPNIES ACT, 2013 PERTAINING TO COST ACCOUNTING RECORDS

Section 2(13) and section 128 of the Companies Act, 2013 deals with the books of accounts to be kept by a

company. According to section 2(13) on the Companies Act, 2013 “books of account” includes records

maintained in respect of-

(i) all sums of money received and expended by a company and matters in relation to which the

receipts and expenditure take place;

(ii) all sales and purchases of goods and services by the company;

(iii) the assets and liabilities of the company; and

(iv) the items of cost as may be prescribed under section 148 in the case of a company which belongs

to any class of companies specified under that section;

Section 128 on the Companies Act, 2013 provides that every company shall prepare and keep at its

registered office books of account and other relevant books and papers and financial statement for every

financial year which give a true and fair view of the state of the affairs of the company, including that of its

branch office or offices, if any, and explain the transactions effected both at the registered office and its

branches and such books shall be kept on accrual basis and according to the double entry system of

accounting.

Further all or any of the books of account aforesaid and other relevant papers may be kept at such other

place in India as the Board of Directors may decide and where such a decision is taken, the company shall,

within seven days thereof, file with the Registrar a notice in writing giving the full address of that other place.

Provided further that the company may keep such books of account or other relevant papers in electronic

mode in such manner as may be prescribed.

In exercise of powers conferred by section 469(1) and (2) read with section 2(13)(iv), section 128 and section

148 of the Companies Act, 2013, the Central Government prescribes the Companies (Cost Records and

Lesson 11

Cost Accounting Records and Cost Audit

451

Audit) Rules, 2014 for the maintenance of cost records relating to the utilization of materials, labour and

other items of cost, in the manner as prescribed by specified class of companies, including foreign

companies defined in section 2(42) of the Companies Act, 2013, engaged in the production of such goods or

providing such services as may be prescribed.

PROVISIONS OF COMPANIES ACT, 2013 PERTAINING TO COST AUDIT

Section 148 of the Companies Act, 2013 deals with the audit of Cost Accounting records. The section

provides as follows:

(1) Notwithstanding anything contained in Chapter X of Companies Act 2013, the Central Government may,

by order, in respect of such class of companies engaged in the production of such goods or providing such

services as may be prescribed, direct that particulars relating to the utilisation of material or labour or to other

items of cost as may be prescribed shall also be included in the books of account kept by that class of

companies:

Provided that the Central Government shall, before issuing such order in respect of any class of companies

regulated under a special Act, consult the regulatory body constituted or established under such special Act.

(2) If the Central Government is of the opinion, that it is necessary to do so, it may, by order, direct that the

audit of cost records of class of companies, which are covered under sub-section (1) and which have a net

worth of such amount as may be prescribed or a turnover of such amount as may be prescribed, shall be

conducted in the manner specified in the order.

(3) The audit under sub-section (2) shall be conducted by a Cost Accountant in practice who shall be

appointed by the Board on such remuneration as may be determined by the members in such manner as

may be prescribed:

Provided that no person appointed under section 139 as an auditor of the company shall be appointed for

conducting the audit of cost records:

Provided further that the auditor conducting the cost audit shall comply with the cost auditing standards.

Explanation.—for the purposes of this sub-section, the expression “cost auditing standards” mean such

standards as are issued by the Institute of Cost and Works Accountants of India, constituted under the Cost

and Works Accountants Act, 1959, with the approval of the Central Government.

(4) An audit conducted under this section shall be in addition to the audit conducted under section 143.

(5) The qualifications, disqualifications, rights, duties and obligations applicable to auditors under this

Chapter shall, so far as may be applicable, apply to a cost auditor appointed under this section and it shall be

the duty of the company to give all assistance and facilities to the cost auditor appointed under this section

for auditing the cost records of the company:

Provided that the report on the audit of cost records shall be submitted by the cost accountant in practice to

the Board of Directors of the company.

(6) A company shall within thirty days from the date of receipt of a copy of the cost audit report prepared in

pursuance of a direction under sub-section (2) furnish the Central Government with such report along with

full information and explanation on every reservation or qualification contained therein.

(7) If, after considering the cost audit report referred to under this section and the information and

explanation furnished by the company under sub-section (6), the Central Government is of the opinion that

EP-CMA

452

any further information or explanation is necessary, it may call for such further information and explanation

and the company shall furnish the same within such time as may be specified by that Government.

(8) If any default is made in complying with the provisions of this section,—

(a) the company and every officer of the company who is in default shall be punishable in the manner

as provided in sub-section (1) of section 147;

(b) the cost auditor of the company who is in default shall be punishable in the manner as provided in

sub-sections (2) to (4) of section 147.

PURPOSE OF COST AUDIT

The primary purpose of Cost audit is to express an opinion on the cost accounts of the company whether

these have been properly maintained and compiled according to the cost accounting system followed by the

enterprise or not. However the purposes of cost audit may be segregated into general and social objectives.

The general objectives can be described to include the following:

(1) Verification of cost accounts with a view to ascertaining that these have been properly maintained

and compiled according to the cost accounting system followed by the enterprise.

(2) Ensuring that the prescribed procedures of cost accounting records rules are duly adhered to.

(3) Detection of errors and fraud.

(4) Verification of the cost of each “cost unit” and “cost centre” to ensure that these have been properly

ascertained.

(5) Determination of inventory valuation.

(6) Facilitating the fixation of prices of goods and services.

(7) Periodical reconciliation between cost accounts and financial accounts.

(8) Ensuring optimum utilization of human, physical and financial resources of the enterprise.

(9) Detection and correction of abnormal loss.

(10) Inculcation of cost consciousness.

(11) Advising management, on the basis of inter-firm comparison of cost records, as regards the areas

where performance calls for improvement.

(12) Promoting corporate governance through various operational disclosures.

Social purposes of cost audit

The following deserve special mention

1. Facilitate in fixation of reasonable prices of goods and services produced by the enterprise.

2. Improvement in productivity of human, physical and financial resources of the enterprise.

3. Channelise enterprise resources to most optimum, productive and profitable areas.

4. Availability of audited cost data as regards contracts containing escalation clauses.

5. Facilitate in settlement of bills in the case of cost-plus contracts entered into by the Government.

Lesson 11

Cost Accounting Records and Cost Audit

453

6. Pinpointing areas of inefficiency and mismanagement, if any for the benefit of shareholders,

consumers, etc., such that necessary corrective action could be taken in time.

APPLICABILITY FOR COST AUDIT

Every such class of company and with such threshold limit as may be prescribed in the Companies (Cost

Records and Audit) Amendment Rules, 2014, shall be required to get such cost records audited by a cost

auditor.

Cost Audit

Every company covered under Rule 3 of the Companies (Cost Records and Audit) Amendment Rules, 2014

and with such threshold limits as specified in the Rules shall within one hundred and eighty days of the

commencement of every financial year appoint a cost auditor. The company shall inform the cost auditor

concerned of his or its appointment as such and file a notice of such appointment with the Central

Government within a period of thirty days of the Board meeting in which such appointment is made or within

a period of one hundred and eighty days of the commencement of the financial year, whichever is earlier,

through electronic mode, in form CRA-2, alongwith the fee as specified in Companies (Registration Offices

and Fees) Rules, 2014.

Further every cost auditor appointed as such shall continue in such capacity till the expiry of one hundred

and eighty days from the closure of the financial year or till he submits the cost audit report, for the financial

year for which he has been appointed. The cost auditor, who conducts an audit of the cost records of a

company, shall submit the cost audit report along with his or its reservations or qualifications or observations

or suggestions, if any, in form CRA-3.

The cost auditor shall forward his report to the Board of Directors of the company within a period of one

hundred and eighty days from the closure of the financial year to which the report relates and the Board of

directors shall consider and examine such report particularly any reservation or qualification contained

therein.

Every company covered above shall, within a period of thirty days from the date of receipt of a copy of the

cost audit report, furnish the Central Government with such report alongwith full information and explanation

on every reservation or qualification contained therein, in form CRA-4 alongwith fees specified in the

Companies (Registration Offices and Fees) Rules, 2014.

The provisions of section 143(12) of the Companies Act, 2013 and the relevant rules made thereunder shall

apply mutatis mutandis to a cost auditor during performance of his functions under section 148 of the

Companies Act, 2013 and the Companies (Cost Records and Audit) Rules, 2014.

Exemptions

The requirement of Cost Audit is not applicable for the following categories of companies even if they are

covered under applicable class of companies:

• whose revenue from exports, in foreign exchange, exceeds 75 per cent of its total revenue or

• which is operating from a special economic zone

ADVANTAGES OF COST AUDIT

Cost audit provides numerous benefits to the management, society, shareholders and the government. The

advantages are as under:

EP-CMA

454

Advantages to Management

(i) Management gets reliable data for its day-to-day operations like price fixing, control, decision-

making, etc.

(ii) A close and continuous check on all wastages will be kept through a proper system of reporting to

management.

(iii) Inefficiencies in the working of the company will be brought to light to facilitate corrective action.

(iv) Management by exception becomes possible through allocation of responsibilities to individual

managers.

(v) The system of budgetary control and standard costing will be greatly facilitated.

(vi) A reliable check on the valuation of closing stock and work-in-progress can be established.

(vii) It helps in the detection of errors and fraud.

Advantages to Society

(i) Cost audit is often introduced for the purpose of fixation of prices. The prices so fixed are based on

the Audit Cost data and so the consumers are saved from exploitation.

(ii) Since price increase by some industries is not allowed without proper justification like increase in

cost of production, inflation through price hikes can be controlled and consumers can maintain their

standard of living.

Advantages to Shareholder

Cost audit ensures that proper records are kept as to purchases and utilisation of materials and

expenses incurred on wages, etc. It also makes sure that the valuation of closing stocks and work-

in-progress is on a fair basis. Thus the shareholders are assured of a fair return on their investment.

Advantages to Government

(i) Where the Government enters into a cost-plus contract, cost audit helps government to fix the price

of the contract at a reasonable level.

(ii) Cost audit helps in the fixation of ceiling prices of essential commodities and thus undue profiteering

is checked.

(iii) Cost audit enables the government to focus its attention on inefficient units.

(iv) Cost audit enables the government to decide in favour of giving protection to certain industries.

(v) Cost audit facilitates settlement of trade disputes brought to the government.

(vi) Cost audit and consequent management action can create a healthy competition among the various

units in an industry. This imposes an automatic check on inflation.

APPOINTMENT AND REMUNERATION OF COST AUDITOR

As per the Companies (Cost Records and Audit) Rules, 2014, cost audit will be performed by a Cost auditor

who shall be a Cost Accountant in practice. “Cost Accountant in Practice” means a cost accountant as

defined in section 2(1)(b) of the Cost and Works Accountants Act, 1959, who holds a valid certificate of

Lesson 11

Cost Accounting Records and Cost Audit

455

practice under section 6(1) of that Act and who is deemed to be in practice under section 2(2) thereof, and

includes a firm or limited liability partnership of cost accountants.

The companies covered under the Cost audit category shall within 180 days of the commencement of every

financial year, appoint a cost auditor at remuneration to be determined in accordance with provisions of

section 148(3) of the Companies Act, 2013 and rules made thereunder.

Provided that before such appointment is made, written consent of the cost auditor to such appointment, and

a certificate that the appointment, if made, shall be in accordance with the provisions of section 139, section

141 and section 148 of the Companies Act, 2013 and the rules made thereunder, as applicable shall be

obtained from the cost auditor.

For the purpose of sub-section (3) of section 148 of the Companies Act, 2013—

(a) in the case of companies which are required to constitute an audit committee

*

—

(i) the Board shall appoint an individual, who is a cost accountant in practice, or a firm of cost

accountants in practice, as cost auditor on the recommendations of the Audit committee, which

shall also recommend remuneration for such cost auditor;

(ii) the remuneration recommended by the Audit Committee under (i) shall be considered and

approved by the Board of Directors and ratified subsequently by the shareholders;

(b) in the case of other companies which are not required to constitute an audit committee, the Board

shall appoint an individual who is a cost accountant in practice or a firm of cost accountants in

practice as cost auditor and the remuneration of such cost auditor shall be ratified by shareholders

subsequently.

RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF COST AUDITOR

Section 148 of the Companies Act, 2013 gives the cost auditor same powers as the financial auditor has

under section 143 of the Companies Act, 2013, which requires that the company and every officer thereof,

shall make available to the cost auditor, such information and explanation as he may consider necessary for

the performance of his duties as cost auditor and submit his report within the prescribed time limit.

Rights of Cost Auditor

The powers of the cost auditor under sub-Section (1) of Section 143 are as under:

- Right to access at all times the books of account and vouchers of the company, whether kept at the

head office of the company or elsewhere.

- Entitled to require from the officers of the company such information and explanations as he may

think necessary for the performance of his duties as an auditor.

* [An Audit committee shall be constituted by the Board of directors of every listed company and the following classes of companies-

(i) all public companies with a paid up capital of ten crore rupees or more;

(ii) all public companies having turnover of one hundred crore rupees or more;

(iii) all public companies, having in aggregate, outstanding loans or borrowings or debentures or deposits exceeding fifty crore

rupees or more.

Explanation.- The paid up share capital or turnover or outstanding loans, or borrowings or debentures or deposits, as the case may be,

as existing on the date of last audited Financial Statements shall be taken into account for the purposes of this rule.]

EP-CMA

456

PUNISHMENT FOR CONTRAVENTION

(1) For Cost Auditor

If default is made by the cost auditor in complying with the provisions of section 139, section 143, section

144 or section 145 of the Companies Act, 2013 then he shall be punishable in the manner as provided in

sub-section (2) to (4) of section 147 of the Companies Act, 2013. According to section 147 (2) of the

Companies Act, 2013, the auditor shall be punishable with fine which shall not be less than twenty-five

thousand rupees but which may extend to five lakh rupees:

Provided that if an auditor has contravened such provisions knowingly or willfully with the intention to deceive

the company or its shareholders or creditors or tax authorities, he shall be punishable with imprisonment for

a term which may extend to one year and with fine which shall not be less than one lakh rupees but which

may extend to twenty-five lakh rupees.

According to section 147 sub-section (3) of the Companies Act, 2013, where an auditor has been convicted

under section 147 (2) above, he shall be liable to—

(i) refund the remuneration received by him to the company; and

(ii) pay for damages to the company, statutory bodies or authorities or to any other persons for loss

arising out of incorrect or misleading statements of particulars made in his audit report.

According to section 147 sub-section (4) of the Companies Act, 2013, the Central Government shall, by

notification, specify any statutory body or authority or an officer for ensuring prompt payment of damages to

the company or the persons under clause (ii) of sub section (3) and such body, authority or officer shall after

payment of damages to such company or persons file a report with the Central Government in respect of

making such damages in such manner as may be specified in the said notification.

The provision of section 143 of the Companies Act, 2013 applies mutatis-mutandis to Cost Accountants in

practice conducting Cost Audit under section 148 of the Companies Act, 2013. If any cost accountant in

practice fails to comply with the provisions of section 143(12) of the Companies Act, 2013, for reporting of an

offence involving fraud, they will be punished with a fine of minimum Rs. 1 lakh and upto Rs. 25 lakhs.

(2) For Company

If a company contravenes any provisions of section 139 to 146 of the Companies Act, 2013, the company

and every officer thereof who is in default shall be punishable in the manner as provided in sub-section (1) of

section 147 of the Companies Act, 2013, wherein the company shall be punishable with fine which shall not

be less than twenty-five thousand rupees but which may extend to five lakh rupees and every officer of the

company who is in default shall be punishable with imprisonment for a term which may extend to one year or

with fine which shall not be less than ten thousand rupees but which may extend to one lakh rupees, or with

both.

COST AUDIT TECHNIQUES

There are no specific techniques being used by cost auditor in carrying out the cost audit assignments.

Techniques employed by a Cost auditor in effectively carrying out his audit are –

(i) Accounting or economic techniques

1. Vouching.

2. Physical Verification.

Lesson 11

Cost Accounting Records and Cost Audit

457

3. Comparison of data with Peer.

4. Break-even analysis.

5. Budgetary control including flexible budget system.

6. Cost management techniques indicating how an organization’s assets should be allocated over

competing projects or to decide whether it is worth proceeding with the investment, keeping in view

proportionate value of expenditure on such projects.

7. Discounted cash flow and net present value methods.

8. Cost benefit analysis.

9. Standard costing and marginal costing.

10. Activity based costing to test the relevance of cost to activities.

11. Quality analysis of company transactions.

(ii) Scientific Techniques

(a) Computer Models: There are many types of problems which can be solved on a computer e.g.

decision on material mix, product mix, make or buy decisions etc.

(b) Network analysis: To analyse strings of tasks to arrange them in sequential or parallel order so that

the project is completed in a shortest possible time.

(c) Mathematical Programme solving by heuristic (trial and error) techniques to determine the best

material mix, best use of organization’s transport fleet, the best mix of products to obtain or to

maximize profits and optimum use of labour, finance, equipments, etc.

(Iii) Statistical Techniques

(a) Activity Sampling: It is one of the many ways in which the present workloads can be measured to

obtain controls to be exercised by management.

(b) Monte Carlo Simulation: In this a number of variables are drawn from large statistical population

which have equal choice of being selected and obtain the best sample possible.

(c) Exponential smoothing

(d) Inter firm comparison

(iv) Personnel Techniques

(a) Attitude survey

(b) Ergonomic (Man-machine relationship)

(c) Training methods

(d) Profitability and productivity measurement

(v) General techniques

(a) Statistical theory of management is an attempt to emphasize what should be the practical approach

to a problem by –

• Analyzing the problem to establish the basic difficulties and factors involved.

• Establish management by objectives.

EP-CMA

458

• Identifying the likely ways of tackling the problems in the light of objectives to develop a

solution.

• Determine the key factors affecting management decision-making.

• Evaluating alternative courses of action.

• Evaluating each alternative in terms of economy, efficiency and best fit.

• Specifying the action required to exploit the situation to the best advantage of the

organization.

(b) Brain storming

(c) Transfer pricing

(d) Management by objectives

(e) Management by exception

(f) Corporate planning

(g) Information theory

COST AUDIT PROGRAMME

Cost audit programme is an essential prerequisite for conducting an audit. It is a plan of action drawn in

advance before taking up the audit, and to help the auditor to cover the entire area of his function thoroughly.

The audit programme should include all the usual broad steps that a financial auditor include in his audit

programme. However, the significant things that should not be missed are: proper vouching of expenses,

capital and revenue character determination, allocation of expenses, apportionment of overheads,

arithmetical accuracy, the statutory requirements, examination of contracts and agreements, review of the

Board’s and shareholders’ minute books to trace important decisions having bearing on costs, verification of

title deeds and documents relating to properties and assets, etc. Cost audit, in order to be effective, should

be completed at one time as far as practicable. The exact content of cost audit largely depends on the size of

the organisation, range of products, production process, the existence of a well organised costing

department and of a well designed costing system, and the existence of a capable internal auditing system.

Other relevant considerations may be:

(A) Review of Cost Accounting Records

This will include:

1. Method of costing in use - batch, process or unit.

2. Method of accounting for raw materials; stores and spares, wastages, spoilage, defectives, etc.

3. System of recording wages, salaries, overtime and spares, wastages, etc.

4. Basis of allocation of overheads to cost centres and apportionment of service department’s

expenses.

5. Treatment of interest, recording of royalties, research and development expenses, etc.

6. Method of accounting of depreciation.

7. Method of stock-taking and its valuation including inventory policies.

8. System of budgetary control.

9. System of internal auditing.

Lesson 11

Cost Accounting Records and Cost Audit

459

(B) Verification of cost statements and other data

This will include the verification of:

(i) Licensed, installed and utilised capacities.

(ii) Financial ratios.

(iii) Production data.

(iv) Cost of raw material consumed, wages and salaries, stores, power and fuel, overheads, provision

for depreciation etc.

(v) Sales realisation.

(vi) Abnormal, non-recurring and special costs.

(vii) Reconciliation with financial books.

COST AUDIT REPORT

Cost audit report means the report duly audited and signed by the cost auditor including attachment,

annexure, qualifications or observations etc. to cost audit report. Every cost auditor, who conducts an audit

of the cost records of the company, shall within 180 days from the close of the company’s financial year to

which the report relates, submit the cost audit report along with his reservations or qualifications or

observations or suggestions in the Form CRA-3 to the Board of Directors of the company.

Every cost auditor shall forward his report to the Board of Directors of the company within a period of 180

days from the closure of the financial year to which the report relates and the Board of Directors shall

consider and examine such report particularly any reservation or qualification contained therein.

LESSON ROUND UP

•

Cost audit involves-checking up the arithmetical accuracy of cost accounts and verifying whether the principles laid

down have been followed or not.

•

Cost audit detects and prevents errors and frauds in preparation of cost records.

•

The auditing of cost accounts acts as an effective tool in the hands of management for the detection of errors,

frauds, inconsistencies and irregularities.

•

Audited cost accounts are helpful in making inter-firm comparison.

•

Section 148 of the Companies Act 2013 deals with the audit of Cost Accounting records.

SELF TEST QUESTIONS

1. What do you mean by Cost Audit?

2. the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013 with respect to Cost Accounting Records.

4. State the provisions of the Companies Act, 2013 with respect to Audit of Cost Accounts.

5. Write short What are the rights and responsibilities of a Cost Auditor?

3. State notes on:

(a) Scope of Cost Audit

(b) Purpose of Cost Audit

(c) Advantages of Cost Audit

EP-CMA

460

(d) Responsibilities of Cost Auditor

(e) Appointment of Cost Auditor

(f) Cost Audit Programme

(g) Cost Audit Report

Lesson 12

Analysis and Interpretation of

Financial Statements

•

Financial Statements and its Nature,

Attributes, Objectives, Importance,

Limitations

•

Recent Trends in Presenting Financial

Statements

•

Financial Statements Analysis and its

Types, Methods, Objectives and

Limitations

•

Ratio Analysis and its Accounting, Uses,

Classification, Advantages, Limitations

•

Cash Flow Statement and its

Classification

•

Preparation of cash flow (Direct & Indirect

Method)

•

Usefulness of Cash Flow Statement

•

Fund Flow Statement and its Definition

and features

•

Steps for preparation of fund flow

statement

•

Difference between Cash Flow and Fund

Flow Statement

•

Management Reporting

•

Lesson Round Up

•

Self Test Question

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

Financial statements are formal records of the

financial activities of a business, person, or other entity

and provide an overview of a business or person's

financial condition in both short and long term. They

can give an accurate picture of a company’s condition

and operating results in a condensed form. Financial

analysis is helpful in assessing the financial position

and profitability of a organization.

Ratio analysis establishes meaningful relationship

between individual items or group of items which

shown in the financial statements prepared by the

organization. It shows the relationship between two

inter-related accounting figures as current assets to

current liabilities, debtors to sales, debt to equity etc.

Cash flow statement is useful in providing users of

financial statements with a basis to assess the ability

of the organization to generate cash and the needs

of the organization to utilize those cash flows.

Fund flow statement revels the movement of funds

during the year i.e. how organization got funds and

how it used its fund.

After reading this lesson, the user should be able to:

1.

Understand, analyze and interpret the basic

concepts of financial statements

2.

Interpretate financial ratios and their

significance.

3.

Understand preparation of cash flow statement

and fund flow statement.

“Financial Statements Analysis is largely a study of relationship among the various financial factors in a business as

disclosed by a single set of statements and a study of the trend of these factors as shown in a series of statements.”

– Myer

LESSON

OUTLINE

EP-CMA

462

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Financial statements, as used in corporate business houses, refer to a set of reports and schedules which an

accountant prepares at the end of a period of time for a business enterprise. The financial statements are the

means with the help of which the accounting system performs its main function of providing summarised

information about the financial affairs of the business. These statements comprise Balance Sheet or Position

Statement and Statement of Profit & Loss or Income Statement. Of course to give a full view of the financial

affairs of an undertaking, in addition to the above, the business may also prepare a Statement of Retained

Earnings and a Cash Flow Statement. In India, every company has to present its financial statements in the

form and contents as prescribed under Section 2(2), 129 & 133 of the Companies Act 2013. The significance

of these statements are given below:

(i) Balance Sheet or Position Statement: Balance sheet is a statement showing the nature and

amount of a company’s assets on one side and liabilities and capital on the other. In other words,

the balance sheet shows the financial position on a particular date usually at the end of one year

period. Balance sheet shows how the money has been made available to the business of the

company and how the money is employed in the business.

(ii) Statement of Profit & Loss or Income Statement: Earning profit is the principal objective of all

business enterprises and Statement of Profit & Loss or Income Statement is the document which

indicates the extent of success achieved by a business in meeting this objective. Profits are of

primary importance to the Board of directors in evaluating the management of a company, to

shareholders or potential shareholders in making investment decisions and to banks and other

creditors in judging the loan repayment capacities and abilities of the company. It is because of this

that the profit and loss or income statement is regarded as the primary statement and commands a

careful scrutiny by all interested parties. It is prepared for a particular period which is mentioned

alongwith the title of these statements, which includes the name of the business firm also.

(iii) Cash Flow Statement: This is a statement which summarises for the period, the cash available to

finance the activities of an organisation and the uses to which such cash have been put. A

statement of cash flow reports cash receipts and payments classified according to the

organisation’s major activities i.e., operating activities, investing activities and financing activities.

This statement reports the net cash inflow or outflow for each activity and for the overall business.

The cash flow statement is to be prepared according to the Accounting Standard 3 (Revised) “Cash

Flow Statement”. The details of this statement have been discussed in a separate study.

NATURE OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Financial statements are prepared for the purpose of presenting a periodical review or report on the progress

by the management and deal with the (a) status of the investments in the business and (b) results achieved

during the period under review. The data exhibited in these financial statements are the result of the

combined effect of (i) recorded facts; (ii) accounting conventions; (iii) postulates or assumptions made to

implement conventional procedures; (iv) personal judgements used in the applications of conventions and

postulates and (v) accounting standards and guidance notes. These factors are explained below:

(i) Recorded Facts: The term ‘recorded facts’ means, facts which have been recorded in the

accounting books such as cash in hand, cash at bank, bills receivables, bills payable, debtors,

creditors, fixed assets, sales, purchases, wages, capital and so forth. These items are listed on the

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

463

basis of historical records of the transactions and valued at the price at which such transactions

took place. Facts which have not been recorded in the accounting books are not depicted in the

financial statements, however, material they might be.

(ii) Accounting Conventions: Accounting conventions have reference to certain fundamental

accounting principles, the applications of which has been sanctified by long usage. For example, on

account of the convention of conservation, provision is made for expected losses but expected

profits are ignored. These conventions are applied for the valuation of inventory, allocation of

expenditure between capital and revenue for the purpose of assets valuations etc.

(iii) Postulates: Accountants make various assumptions for the conventions adopted. One of these

assumptions or postulates is to the effect that the enterprise will continue in business beyond the

period which is covered by the financial statements, i.e., business is a going concern. This

assumption is referred to as the permanency postulate, and the assets of the business are valued

under this assumption at cost less depreciation. In absence of this assumption, the assets may

have to be valued at realisable value which may be negligible if the business is not a going concern.

Another postulate which accountants make is the monetary postulate. It is the tacit assumption that

the value of money, that is its purchasing power, remains constant over different periods. The

accountants do not take into consideration the price-level changes while valuing various assets in

different periods. Of late, however, accountants in the west have shown growing consciousness for

incorporating price-level changes while preparing financial statements. A third postulate is the

realisation postulate which takes cognizance of the time lag between production and sales affected.

Under this postulate entire revenue is considered to be earned at the moment the sales take place

and not at the time when the production took place. This postulates forms the basis for the

convention of matching costs with revenues, whereunder, the costs incurred in the past period are

brought forward to be accounted for against the revenues earned at a later period.

(iv) Personal Judgements: It may be noted that the application of conventions, assumptions or

postulates depends on the personal judgements of the accountant. For example, the choice of

selecting methods of depreciation, the mode of amortisation of fictitious assets, the method of

valuation of stock, calculation of provision for doubtful debts etc. depend on the personal

judgements of the accountant. However, the existence of consistency principle serves as a check

on the power of the accountant to use his personal judgement. Since the accountant is guided by

the past practices, the area of application of his personal judgement is reduced.

(v) Accounting Standards and Guidance Notes: Accountants are guided by various accounting

standards and guidance notes in preparing the financial statement.

ATTRIBUTES OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Financial Statements prepared for an enterprise should possess the following attributes if they are to serve

meaningfully the purpose and objectives for which they are meant:

(a) Relevance: The financial statements prepared must be relevant for the purpose they are supposed

to serve. While irrelevant and confusing disclosures should be avoided, nothing relevant and

material should be held back from the public. The accountant so compiles such statements should

be clear about relevancy and materiality or otherwise of the various information on the basis of

which these statements are prepared. The Companies Act in various countries provide for non-

disclosure of certain material information.

(b) Accuracy and Freedom from Bias: Financial Statements should convey a full and correct idea

EP-CMA

464

about the progress, position and prospects of an enterprise. For this purpose they must be

accurately prepared. Inaccuracy, besides invoking legal consequences, may also defeat the

objectives for which the statements are meant. It may, however, be noted that absolute accuracy is

not always possible, but this does not mean that rash and inaccurate data be deliberately provided,

The least one can expect is that those who prepare and present financial statements should not

allow their personal prejudices to colour the facts.

(c) Comparability: Comparability increases the utility of financial statements. Comparison with

previous statements helps in assessing the performance and in localising the trends in the progress

and position of the business enterprise. Comparisons with other similar concerns or the industry

reveals the strength of the enterprise vis-a-vis other firms and industry.

(d) Analytical Presentation: The financial statements should be prepared in a classified form so that a

better and meaningful analysis can be made. Proper classification helps in tracing and

understanding in causes of the results as shown in these statements. Detailed and classified

information helps to reveal inefficient performance and wasteful activities. Such classification helps

in speedier analysis of these documents.

(e) Promptness: No doubt, that the preparation of financial statement is somewhat complicated, but an

undue delay in their preparation would reduce the significance and utility of these statements. They

should be prepared as soon as possible, after the end of the period for which they are meant.

Undue delay, the time lag between the end of the period and the preparation of these statements,

may present difficulty in training the causes of the results as disclosed by the statements. Such

delays and the delayed action thereon, may do more harm than good to the enterprise.

(f) Generally Accepted Principles: Since the financial statements are meant for the use of a wider

clientele, they must have general acceptability and understandability. This acceptability and

understandability can come only when these statements are prepared in accordance with the

“Generally Accepted Accounting Principles”. This also increases the reliability of these statements

and adds to the confidence of the users.

(g) Consistency: The financial statements for a certain period are affected by the judgment and

procedural choices exercised by the accountant. Opinions and procedures other than those

employed generally, might cause the statement data to differ materially. Rules of accounting require

that having made a selection of procedures, the accountant must strictly follow them in successive

periods, unless the situation demands otherwise. Consistency has a direct bearing upon

comparability. If inventories are valued on different basis in different periods (LIFO to FIFO to

Replacement Cost) the results disclosed, generate doubt and comparison becomes difficult.

(h) Authenticity: The financial statements in order to be accepted as reliable must be reviewed and

authenticated by an independent and capable person, generally known as auditor. Statements,duly

audited and certified by recognised and established auditors are accepted at their face value and

are deemed to be more reliable. Unaudited statements give room to doubt and unreliability.

(i) Compliance with Law: Financial statements must meet the requirements of law, if any, in the

matter of form, contents and disclosures, procedures and methods. Non-compliance with legal

provisions, besides invoking penalties, impairs the confidence of the public investors. In India,

companies are required to present their financial statements according to the provisions of Section

129 of the Companies Act, 2013.

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

465

OBJECTIVES OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The number and types of people interested in financial statements have changed radically in recent times.

Financial statements are necessary for shareholders and potential shareholders, in addition to management

and creditors.

The following groups have a direct interest in the financial statements of companies: Suppliers and potential

suppliers of funds, i.e., shareholders, debentureholders, employees, customers, suppliers of goods and

services on credit, tax authorities, etc. In addition, there are groups which have an indirect interest in these

statements: Financial analysts and advisors, stock exchanges, academicians, lawyers, regulatory authorities,

trade associations, and labour unions.

It is to be readily conceded that firstly it is not feasible to prepare sets of financial statements for the different

parties interested in them and secondly, it is virtually impossible to prepare such a financial statement as will

provide all the information required by all the interested parties. There has to be a compromise in the

preparation of financial statements - there will be and can be only one set and it will have to be oriented

towards the needs of the shareholders but it must give such significant and material information as is

practicable for the benefit of the other parties specially those who have to make decisions about the future of

the concerned firm, specially debenture-holders, institutional lenders, operators on the stock exchange etc.

Fortunately, the needs of information may be grouped under the heads (i) profit and profitability; (ii) short-

term financial position (liquidity); and (iii) long-term financial position. Every one interested in a firm directly

wants to know the extent of cash flows, as far as he is interested, expected in the time-span of interest to

him. For example, a shareholder wants to estimate the cash dividend that his shares will bring as well as the

amount that he can realise on sale of the shares - for the dividend, his time-span is one year; a supplier of

goods on credit wants whether his dues will be paid within say a month or two. These broad needs of

information can well be satisfied by a single set of financial statements.

The objectives of financial statements can be summarized as follows:

1. To provide reliable financial information about economic resources and obligations of a business

enterprise.

2. To provide reliable information about the net resources (resources less obligations) of an enterprise

that results from its activities.

3. To provide financial information that assists in estimating the earning potentials of a business.

4. To provide other needed information about changes in economic resources or obligation.

5. To disclose, to the extent possible, other information related to the financial statements that is

relevant to the needs of the users of these statements.

In order to meet the above objectives and to suit the needs of the varied users, the accountant entrusted with

the task of compiling and presenting financial statements must follow a set of guidelines to ensure

consistency, completeness, and fairness of the statements. These guidelines are called “generally accepted

accounting principles”. In absence of these ‘generally accepted accounting principles’ statements prepared

may be un-understandable and misleading for the various groups of users. In addition to this, the financial

statements prepared must also be authenticated as to their accuracy and fairness so that the confidence of

the users is invoked. For this purpose it is necessary that these statements be reviewed and certified by an

independent reviewer, commonly known as auditor.

EP-CMA

466

IMPORTANCE OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The most important objective of financial statements is to present information for the use of different

categories of persons as mentioned below:

1. The Management: The scope of modern business and the multiplicity of factors affecting the

business operations call for an increasingly scientific and analytical approach in the management of

such businesses. This is possible only when up-to-date, accurate and systematic financial records

are available to the management team. Financial accounts and statements are of a very great help

in understanding the progress, position and prospects of the business vis-a-vis the industry.

Financial statements, by helping the management to be acquainted with the causes of the business

results, enable them to formulate appropriate policies and courses of action for the future. Not only

such financial statements - which are generally made public, but unpublished subsidiary accounts

and statements also play an important role in policy-making and planning. Such subsidiary records

provide more detailed, frank and revealing information than the financial statements. A comparative

analysis of financial statements should enable management to see the trends in the progress and

position of the enterprise and make suitable modifications in policies to avert unfavourable

situations. It is through the release of such financial statements that the managements

communicate their performance to various parties and justify their existence, and activities.

2. The Public: Business is a social entity. Various groups of the society, though not directly connected

with business, are interested in the progress, position and prospects of a business enterprise.

These groups are financial analysts, lawyers, trade associations, labour unions, financial press,

students and teachers, etc. It is only through the published financial statements that these people

can analyse, judge and comment upon the business enterprise. It should be noted that these

financial statements are available to the public in case of joint stock companies. In case of

proprietorships or partnerships, and other form of ownership no such statements are published or

made available to the public.

3. The Shareholders and the Lenders: The financial statements serve as a useful guide for the

shareholders and probable shareholders, the suppliers, and the lenders and probable lenders of a

company. It is through a critical examination of the financial statements that these groups can come

to know about the efficiency and effectiveness of the management and position, progress and

prospects of the company. For this purpose, it is necessary that the financial statements should

contain accurate, complete and systematic facts and figures so that these people can get a full and

accurate idea regarding the present position and future of the company. Since published financial

statements are the main bases available to such group of people to judge the affairs of the

company, it has been found that some managements have been resorting to ‘window dressing’ in

the presentation of these statements, to project a “better” than “what is” the position of the company.

4. The Labour and Trade Unions: In India, workers are entitled to bonus under the Payment of

Bonus Act, depending upon the size of the profit as disclosed by audited Statement of Profit & Loss.

Thus, Statement of Profit & Loss becomes greatly important to the workers. In wage negotiations

also, the size of profits and the profitability achieved are greatly relevant.

5. The Country and Economy: Economic progress of country is to a great extent, associated with the

rise and growth of joint stock companies. But unscrupulous acts affect the industry and people in

the region in which the company operates, to a significant extent. Such fraudulent activities impair

the confidence of the general public in joint stock companies as forerunner of economic progress,

and thus retard economic growth of the country. The solution lies in raising the level of business and

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

467

financial morality of the promoters and managements and in imparting knowledge about financial

statements to the public so that they can examine and assess the real worth of the company and

avoid being cheated by unscrupulous persons. The law endeavours to raise the level of business

morality by compelling the companies to draw up financial statements in a clear systematic form

and disclose certain minimum information. Such provisions increase the confidence of the public in

joint stock companies, thus enabling faster economic progress of the country. This has all the more

greater significance in under developed and developing countries. In such countries, capital is not

only scarce but also shy. Malpractices on the part of promoters and managements, only help to

increase the scarcity and shyness of capital, thus blocking economic progress. Published financial

statements provide an opportunity for the critical assessment of the worth of company and thus

protect innocent public, increase their confidence, and help faster economic progress.

Financial statements are also valuable for the various regulatory authorities. They can judge whether the

regulations are being followed in word and spirit, and also whether the regulations are producing the desired

effect or not, by evaluating the financial statements submitted by the companies.

LIMITATIONS OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Financial statements are the result of the accounting process which begins with recording of transactions.

Accounting process involves recording, classifying and summarising business transactions. Financial

statements are the result of the third process viz. summarising. The financial statements are based on

certain accounting concepts and conventions which can not be said to be foolproof.

The following are the limitations of the financial statements:

(i) Financial statements are essentially interim reports and therefore, cannot be final because the final

gain or loss can be computed only at the termination of the business. Financial statements only

reflect the progress and position of the business at frequent intervals during its life. The decision

regarding the period of these statements is a matter of personal judgement and it gives rise to the

problem of allocating expenditures over various periods. Again the existence of contingent liabilities,

deferred revenue expenditure make them more imprecise.

(ii) Financial statements though expressed in exact monetary terms, are not absolutely final and

accurate. As the balance sheet is prepared on the basis of a going concern asset valuation

represents neither the realisable value nor replacement costs. Further, they depend on the

judgement of the management in respect of various accounting policies.

(iii) The values ascribed to the assets presented in the statements depend upon the standards of the

persons dealing with them. For instance, the method of depreciation, mode of amortisation of fixed

assets, treatment of deferred revenue expenditure, all depend on the personal judgement of the

accountant. The soundness of such judgement will necessarily depend upon his competence and

integrity.

(iv) Financial statements take into consideration only the financial factors. They fail to bring out the

significance of non-financial factors which may have considerable bearing on the operating results

and financial conditions of an enterprise. For example, public image of the enterprise, the calibre of

its management, efficiency and loyalty of its workers etc.

(v) It is not always possible to discover false figures in financial statements. Unscrupulous

managements generally resort to ‘window dressing’ in the preparation of such statements.

EP-CMA

468

(vi) Financial statements are prepared primarily for shareholders. Other interested parties have to

generally make many adjustments before they use them profitably.

(vii) Quite often, financial statements do not disclose current worth of the business. Only historical facts

are presented and the true current worth is not reflected.

(viii) Owing to the fact that financial statements are compiled, on the basis of historical costs, while there

is a marked decline in the value of the monetary unit and resultant rise in prices, the balance sheet

losses its function as an index on current economic realities. Again the financial statements contain

both historical and current costs items, hence figures are distorted. It is seen that holding gains and

operating gains are added together, no differentiation is made between these two.

RECENT TRENDS IN PRESENTING FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

In India every company has to present its financial statements in the form and contents as prescribed under

Section 129 of the Companies Act, 2013. Keeping in view the complicacies of statutory forms in the

Companies Act, now-a-days it is common practice to add the Statement of Profit & Loss and balance sheet

drawn in statutory forms, some voluntary supplementary information in a simple manner as would be easily

understood by a layman. This voluntary information may include the following:

(i) Statement of Profit and Loss and Balance Sheet: Every company registered under the

Companies Act shall prepare its Balance Sheet, Statement of Profit and Loss and notes thereto in

accordance with the manner prescribed in Schedule III to the Companies Act, 2013. The

requirements of the Schedule III however, do not apply to companies as referred to in the proviso to

Section 129 (1) of the Act, i.e., any insurance or banking company, or any company engaged in the

generation or supply of electricity or to any other class of company for which a form of Balance

Sheet and Statement of Profit & Loss has been specified in or under any other Act governing such

class of company.

(ii) Highlights: Highlights are usually shown at the beginning of the annual report so that the users

may come across the important facts of the company immediately as he opens the report. It may

usually cover information about sales, production, profit before and after tax, capital projects,

working capital, fixed assets, share capital, important landmarks of the year, etc.

(iii) Cash flow statements: The preparation of cash flow statement has become mandatory now-a-

days. A statement of cash flow, reports the cash receipts, cash payments and net changes in cash

resulting from operating, investing and financing activities of an enterprise during a period in a

format that reconciles the beginning and ending cash balances. It reports a net cash inflow or

outflow for each activity and for the overall business.

(iv) Provision of important accounting ratios: Accounting ratios show the inter- relationship which

exists among various accounting data. Balance sheet is substantiated by the important ratios of the

current year and of the last two years.

(v) Disclosure of accounting policies: Presently, progressive companies disclose accounting policies

in their published accounts on the basis of which they have prepared their financial statements. This

is done with a view to giving better understanding of the financial statements to the public.

(vi) Use of charts, graphs and diagrams: Many companies incorporate charts, graphs and diagrams

in their published accounts. It is known as graphic method of presentation of information. It attracts

the attention of the users more quickly and forcibly. Recently, graphs and diagrams have been

becoming very popular because they are considered to be the most effective media for disclosing

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

469

trends and making comparisons over fairly long periods within a short space. The method of

presenting information can effectively depict production costs, fluctuations in output and sales,

components of cost of production and income, use of divisible profits as taxes, dividends, other

appropriations and retained profits etc.

(vii) Use of schedules: In order to make the balance sheet and Statement of Profit & Loss as compact

as possible, separate schedules for different heads (e.g. share capital, reserves and surplus,

secured loans, unsecured loans, current liabilities and provisions, fixed assets, investments, current

assets, loans and advances, miscellaneous expenditure, etc.) are prepared and details regarding

these heads as prescribed in the Companies Act are given in these schedules. This is done to make

the balance sheet and Statement of Profit & Loss manageable within limited space. These

schedules are properly numbered and reference of these is given in the balance sheet and

Statement of Profit & Loss.

(viii) Impact of price level changes: Since prices go on changing every day, financial statements based

on historical costs do not reflect the effect of price level changes on the financial position and

profitability of the company. In order to accommodate the effect of price level changes in the

financial statements now-a-days many companies have started showing this effects on financial

statements in a supplementary statement in addition to the conventional statements prepared on

historical basis.

(ix) Rounding off of figures: The Sachhar Committee has recommended that companies should be

given the option to round off the figures of financial statements to the nearest thousand and/or

hundred or ten rupees. This recommendation has been accepted and companies are now-a-days

making use of rounding off of figures.

ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Published financial statements are the only source of information about the activities and affairs of a

business entity available to the public, shareholders, investors and creditors, and the governments. These

various groups are interested in the progress, position and prospects of such entity in various ways. But

these statements howsoever, correctly and objectively prepared, by themselves do not reveal the

significance, meaning and relationship of the information contained therein. For this purpose, financial

statements have to be carefully studied, dispassionately analysed and intelligently interpreted. This enables

a forecasting of the prospects for future earnings, ability to pay interest, debt maturities both current as well

as long-term, and probability of sound financial and dividend policies. According to Myers, “financial

statement analysis is largely a study of relationship among the various financial factors in business as

disclosed by a single set of statements and a study of the trend of these factors as shown in a series of

statements”.

Thus, analysis of financial statements refers to the treatment of information contained in the financial

statement in a way so as to afford a full diagnosis of the profitability and financial position of the firm

concerned.

The process of analysing financial statements involves the rearranging, comparing and measuring the

significance of financial and operating data. Such a step helps to reveal the relative significance and effect of

items of the data in relation to the time period and/or between two organisations.

Interpretation, which follows analysis of financial statements, is an attempt to reach to logical conclusion

regarding the position and progress of the business on the basis of analysis. Thus, analysis and

interpretation of financial statements are regarded as complimentary to each other.

EP-CMA

470

OBJECTIVES OF FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS

Financial statement analysis is very much helpful in assessing the financial position and profitability of a

concern. The main objectives of analysing the financial statements are as follows:

(i) The analysis would enable the present and the future earning capacity and the profitability of the

concern.

(ii) The operational efficiency of the concern as a whole as well as department wise can be assessed.

Hence the management can easily locate the areas of efficiency and inefficiency.

(iii) The solvency of the firm, both short-term and long-term, can be determined with the help of financial

statement analysis which is beneficial to trade creditors and debenture holders.

(iv) The comparative study in regard to one firm with another firm or one department with another

department is possible by the analysis of financial statements.

(v) Analysis of past results in respects of earning and financial position of the enterprise is of great help

in forecasting the future results. Hence it helps in preparing budgets.

(vi) It facilitates the assessments of financial stability of the concern.

(vii) The long-term liquidity position of funds can be assessed by the analysis of financial statements.

LIMITATIONS OF FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS

(i) Owing to the fact that financial statements are compiled on the basis of historical costs, while there

is a market decline in the value of the monetary unit and resultant rise in prices, the figures in the

financial statement loses its functions as an index on current economic realities. Again the financial

statements contain both items. So an analysis of financial statements can not be taken as an

indicator for future forecasting and planning.

(ii) Analysis of financial statements is a tool which can be used profitably by an expert analyst but may

lead to faulty conclusions if used by unskilled analyst. So the result can not be taken as judgements

or conclusions.

(iii) Financial statements are interim reports and therefore can not be final because the final gain or loss

can be computed only at the termination of the business. Financial statement reflects the progress

of the position of the business so analysis of these statements will not be a conclusive evidence of

the performance of the business.

(iv) Financial statements though expressed in exact monetary terms are not absolutely final and

accurate and it depends upon the judgement of the management in respect of various accounting

methods. If there is change in accounting methods, the analysis may have no comparable basis and

the result will be biased.

(v) The reliability of analysis depends on the accuracy of the figures used in the financial statements.

The analysis will be vitiated by manipulations in the income statement or balance sheet and

accounting procedure adopted by the accountant for recording.

(vi) The results for indications derived from analysis of financial statements may be differently

interpreted by different users.

(vii) The analysis of financial statement relating to a single year only will have limited use. Hence the

analysis may be extended over a number of years so that results may be compared to arrive at a

meaningful conclusion.

(viii) When different firms are adopting different accounting procedures, records, policies and different

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

471

items under similar headings in the financial statements, the comparison will be more difficult. It will

not provide reliable basis to access the performance, efficiency, profitability and financial condition

of the firm as compared to industry as a whole.

(ix) There are different tool of analysis available for the analyst. However, which tool is to be used in a

particular situation depends on the skill, training, and expertise of the analyst and the result will vary

accordingly.

TYPES OF FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS

A distinction may be drawn between various types of financial analysis either on the basis of material used

for the same or according to the modus operandi or according to the objective of the analysis.

1. According to Nature of the Analyst

1.1. External Analysis: It is made by those who do not have access to the detailed records of the

company. This group, which has to depend almost entirely on published financial statements,

includes investors, credit agencies and governmental agencies regulating a business in nominal

way. The position of the external analyst has been improved in recent times owing to the

governmental regulations requiring business undertaking to make available detailed information to

the public through audited accounts.

1.2. Internal Analysis: The internal analysis is accomplished by those who have access to the books of

accounts and all other information related to business. While conducting this analysis, the analyst is

a part of the enterprise he is analysing. Analysis for managerial purposes is an internal type of

analysis and is conducted by executives and employees of the enterprise as well as governmental

and court agencies which may have regulatory and other jurisdiction over the business.

2. According to Modus Operandi of Analysis

2.1. Horizontal Analysis: When financial statements for a number of years are reviewed and analysed,

the analysis is called ‘horizontal analysis’. As it is based on data from year to year rather than on

one date or period of time as a whole, this is also known as ‘dynamic analysis’. This is very useful

for long term trend analysis and planning.

2.2. Vertical Analysis: It is frequently used for referring to ratios developed for one date or for one

accounting period. Vertical analysis is also called ‘Static Analysis’. This is not very conducive to

proper analysis of the firm’s financial position and its interpretation as it does not enable to study

data in perspective. This can only be provided by a study conducted over a number of years so that

comparisons can be effected. Therefore, vertical analysis is not very useful.

3. According to the Objective of the Analysis

On this basis the analysis can be long-term and short-term analysis:

3.1. Long-term Analysis: This analysis is made in order to study the long-term financial stability,

solvency and liquidity as well as profitability and earning capacity of a business. The objective

of making such an analysts is to know whether in the long-term the concern will be able to earn

a minimum amount which will be sufficient to maintain a reasonable rate of return on the

investment so as to provide the funds required for modernisation, growth and development of

the business.

EP-CMA

472

3.2. Short-term Analysis: This analysis is made to determine the short-term solvency, stability, liquidity

and earning capacity of the business. The objective is to know whether in the short-run a business

enterprise will have adequate funds readily available to meet its short-term requirements and

sufficient borrowing capacity to meet contingencies in the near future.

METHODS OF ANALYSING FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The analysis of financial statements consists of a study of relationship and trends, to determine whether or

not the financial position and results of operations as well as the financial progress of the company are

satisfactory or unsatisfactory. The analytical methods or devices, listed below, are used to ascertain or

measure the relationships among the financial statements items of a single set of statements and the

changes that have taken place in these items as reflected in successive financial statements. The

fundamental objective of any analytical method is to simplify or reduce the data under review to more

understandable terms.

Analytical methods and devices used in analysing financial statements are as follows:

1. Comparative Statements

2. Common Size Statements

3. Trend Ratios

4. Ratio Analysis

5. Cash Flow Statements

6. Fund Flow Statement.

1. Comparative Statements

These financial statements are so designed as to provide time perspective to the various elements of

financial position contained therein. These statements give the data for all the periods stated so as to show:

(a) Absolute money values of each item separately for each of the periods stated.

(b) Increase and decrease in absolute data in terms of money values.

(c) Increase and decrease in terms of percentages.

(d) Comparison expressed in ratios.

(e) Percentages of totals.

Such comparative statements are necessary for the study of trends and direction of movement in the

financial position and operating results. This calls for a consistency in the practice of preparing these

statements, otherwise comparability may be distorted. Comparative statements enable horizontal analysis of

figures.

(a) Comparative Balance Sheet: A comparative balance sheet shows the balance of accounts of

assets and liabilities on different dates and also the extent of their increases or decreases between

these dates throwing light on the trends and direction of changes in the position over the periods. This

helps in predicting about the position of the business in future. A specimen of the comparative balance

sheet is given below:

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

473

Ram & Sons.

Comparative Balance Sheet

(as on 31st March, 2013 and 2014)

Particulars 31.3.2013 31.3.2014 Increase (+) Increase (+)

or or

Decrease (–) Decrease (–)

in amounts in %age

` ` `

Current Assets

Cash in hand and at bank 1,18,000 10,000 (–)1,08,000 (–) 92

Receivable on customer’s accounts and bills 2,09,000 1,90,000 (–) 19,000 (–) 9

Inventory of materials, goods in process and

finished stock 1,60,000 1,30,000 (–) 30,000 (–) 19

Prepaid expenses 3,000 3,000  

Other current assets 29,000 10,000 (–) 19,000 (–) 66

Total Current Assets 5,19,000 3,43,000 (–)1,76,000 (–) 34

Fixed Assets

Land and buildings 2,70,000 1,70,000 (–) 1,00,000 (–) 37

Plant and machinery 3,10,000 7,86,000 (+) 4,76,000 (+) 150

Furniture and fixtures 9,000 18,000 (+) 9,000 (+) 100

Other fixed assets 20,000 30,000 (+) 10,000 (+) 50

Total Fixed Assets 6,09,000 10,04,000 (+) 3,95,000 (+) 65

Investments 46,000 59,000 (+) 13,000 (+) 28

Total Assets 11,74,000 14,06,000 (+) 2,32,000 (+) 20

Liabilities and Capital

Current Liabilities

Accounts payable (sundry trade

creditors and bills payable) 2,55,000 1,17,000 (−)1,38,000 (−) 54

Other short-term liabilities 7,000 10,000 (+) 3,000 (+) 43

Total Current Liabilities 2,62,000 1,27,000 (–)1,35,000 (–) 52

Debentures 50,000 1,00,000 (+) 50,000 (+) 100

Long-term loans on mortgage 1,50,000 2,25,000 (+) 75,000 (+) 50

Total Liabilities 4,62,000 4,52,000 (–) 10,000 (–) 2

Capital

Equity share capital 4,00,000 6,00,000 (+)2,00,000 (+) 50

Reserve and surplus 3,12,000 3,54,000 (+) 42,000 (+) 13

Total Liabilities and Capital 11,74,000 14,06,000 (+)2,32,000 (+) 20

An analysis and interpretation of the above balance sheet reveals:

1. Current assets have decreased by `1,76,000 between 2013 and 2014, while current liabilities have

EP-CMA

474

decreased only by `1,35,000. But this has no adverse affect on current ratio because the

percentage decrease in current assets (34%) is much less than the percentage decrease in current

liabilities (52%).

2. Non current assets have increased by `3,95,000, major increase being a plant and machinery of

`4,76,000, which amounts to the increase in production and profit earning capacities. Increase in

fixed assets appears to have been partly financed by an increase in equity capital (`2,00,000),

partly by release of working capital, and partly by increase in debentures and long-term borrowings

(`1,25,000).

3. The increase in reserves and surpluses (`42,000) may be the result of profits retained, and has

gone to account for increase in long-term loans and fixed assets.

4. There has been a drastic fall in cash balance (`1,08,000). This reflects an adverse cash position.

(b) Comparative Statement of Profit and Loss or Income Statement: Comparative income statement

shows the operating results for a number of accounting periods and changes in the data significantly in

absolute periods and changes in the data significantly in absolute money terms as well as in relative

percentage. A specimen income statement is given below:

Ram & Sons

Comparative Statement of Income

(for year ended 31st March, 2013 and 2014)

31.3.2013 31.3.2014 Amount of Percentage

(+) increase (+) increase

or or

decrease (-) decrease (-)

during 2013-14 during 2013-14

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

` ` `

Net sales 8,50,000 9,52,000 (+) 1,02,000 (+) 12

Cost of goods sold 5,25,000 6,00,000 (+) 75,000 (+) 14.3

Gross Profit on Sales 3,25,000 3,52,000 (+) 27,000 (+) 8.3

Operating Expenses:

Selling Expenses

Advertising 15,000 20,000 (+) 5,000 (+) 33.3

Delivery expenses 20,000 18,000 (–) 2,000 (–) 10

Salesmen salaries and

Commission 1,50,000 1,53,000 (+) 3,000 (+) 2

Packing and freight expenses 14,000 15,000 (+) 1,000 (+) 7

Other selling expenses 20,000 23,000 (+) 3,000 (+) 15

Total Selling Expenses 2,19,000 2,29,000 (+) 10,000 (+) 4.5

General and Administrative Expenses

Office salaries 58,000 63,800 (+) 5,800 (+) 10

Office expenses 2,000 4,000 (+) 2,000 (+) 100

Stationery and postage 1,000 2,000 (+) 1,000 (+) 100

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

4

75

Insurance 2,000 1,000 (–) 1,000 (–) 100

Doubtful debts 3,000 4,000 (+) 1,000 (+) 33

Total administrative and general expenses 66,000 74,800 (+) 8,800 (+) 13.3

Total Operating Expenses 2,85,000 3,03,800 (+) 18,800 (+) 6.6

Operating Profit 40,000 48,200 (+) 8,200 (+) 20.5

Other Incomes

Interest income 12,000 12,000 − −

Rent income 8,000 16,000 (+) 8,000 (+) 100

Discount received 12,000 18,000 (+) 6,000 (+) 50

Total Other Incomes 32,000 46,000 (+) 14,000 (+) 43.7

Total of Operating Profit and Other Income 72,000 94,200 (+) 22,200 (+) 30.8

Other Expenses

Interest expense 26,000 17,000 (–) 9,000 (–) 34.6

Sales discount 8,000 7,000 (–) 1,000 (–) 12.5

Total Other Expenses 34,000 24,000 (–) 10,000 (–) 29.4

Income before income tax 38,000 70,200 (+) 32,200 (+) 84.7

Income tax 19,000 31,000 (+) 12,000 (–) 63.1

Income after Income Tax 19,000 39,200 (+) 20,200 (+) 106.3

A study of the income statements reveals that there has been an increase of `1,02,000 in sales, but at the

same time cost of goods sold has also increased by `75,000. In relative terms sales increased by 12% while

cost of goods sold by 14.3%. It means either the addition in sales has been due to lowering of sales price or

the increase in cost is due to operational inefficiency. Similarly, increase in advertising has been much more

(33%) than the increase in sales (12%). But in absolute terms the amount of increase is only `5,000.

Operating profits have shown an increase of 20.5% over 2013-14 but in absolute terms profits have

increased only by `8,200.

There has been a substantial increase in other incomes both in relative (43.7%) as well as absolute terms

(`14,000). Similarly, there has been substantial decrease in other expenses (29.4% and `10,000). These

items have gone to increase the total income before tax for the year by `32,200, thus reflecting that the

management has been more concerned for the other incomes than the operating profits.

2. Common-Size Statements

In the comparative financial statements it is difficult to comprehend the changes over the years in relation to

total assets, total liabilities and capital or total net sales. This limitation of comparative statements make

comparison between two or more firms of an industry impossible because there is no common base of

comparison for absolute figures. Again, for an interpretation of underlying causes of changes over time

period a vertical analysis is required and this is not possible with comparative statements.

Common size financial statements are those in which figures reported are converted into percentages to

some common base. For this, items in the financial statements are presented as percentages or ratios to

total of the items and a common base for comparison is provided. Each percentage shows the relation of the

individual item to its respective total.

EP-CMA

476

(a) Common-size Income Statement: In a common size income statement the sales figure is

assumed to be equal to 100 and all other figures of costs or expenses are expressed as

percentages of sales. A comparative income statement for different periods helps to reveal the

efficiency or otherwise of incurring any cost or expense. If it is being prepared for two firms, it shows

the relative efficiency of each cost item for the two firms.

(b) Common-size Balance Sheet: In a common size balance sheet, total of assets or liabilities is

taken as 100 and all the figures are expressed as percentage of the total. Comparative common

size balance sheets for different periods help to highlight the trends in different items. If it is

prepared for different firms in an industry, it facilitates to judge the relative soundness and helps in

understanding their financial strategy.

A comparative common-size income statement and balance sheet for two firms in an industry is illustrated

below:

Old Guards and Young Ones Companies

Comparative Income Statement

Period ending 31st March, 2014

Old Guards Co. Young Ones Co.

Amount % of Amount % of

` sales ` sales

Net sales 25,38,000 100.0 9,70,000 100.0

Cost of goods sold 14,22,000 56.0 4,75,000 49.0

Gross Profit on Sales 11,16,000 44.0 4,95,000 51.0

Selling expenses 7,20,000 28.4 2,72,000 28.0

General and administrative Expenses 1,84,000 7.2 97,000 10.0

Total Operating Expenses 9,04,000 35.6 3,69,000 38.0

Operating profit 2,12,000 8.4 1,26,000 13.0

Other income 26,000 1.0 10,000 1.0

2,38,000 9.4 1,36,000 14.0

Other expenses 40,000 1.6 29,000 3.0

Income before tax 1,98,000 7.8 1,07,000 11.0

Income-tax 68,000 2.7 28,000 2.9

Net Income after tax 1,30,000 5.1 79,000 8.1

Comparative Balance Sheets

As on 31st March, 2014

Old Guards Co. Young Ones Co.

Amount % of Amount % of

` total ` total

Assets

Current Assets:

Cash 54,000 2.7 72,000 7.0

Sundry debtors 4,40,000 22.0 2,26,000 22.0

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

477

Trading stock 2,00,000 10.0 1,74,000 17.0

Prepaid expenses 22,000 1.0 21,000 2.0

Other current assets 20,000 1.0 21,000 2.0

Total Current Assets 7,36,000 36.7 5,14,000 50.0

Fixed Assets (less accumulated depreciation) 12,70,000 63.3 5,13,000 50.0

Total 20,06,000 100.0 10,27,000 100.0

Liabilities and Capital:

Current Liabilities:

Sundry creditors 84,000 4.2 1,34,000 13.0

Other current liabilities 1,56,000 7.8 62,000 6.0

Total Current Liabilities 2,40,000 12.0 1,96,000 19.0

Mortgage debentures 4,50,000 22.4 3,18,000 31.0

Total Liabilities 6,90,000 34.4 5,14,000 50.0

Capital and reserves 13,16,000 65.6 5,13,000 50.0

Total Liabilities and Capital 20,06,000 100.0 10,27,000 100.0

The following conclusions can be drawn from a careful analysis of the above financial statements:

(1) Old Guards company has a better and efficient credit and collection system because its debtors and

trading stock amounts to 32% of total assets as compared to 39% in case of Young Ones

Company.

(2) The cash position of Young Ones Company (7% of total assets) compares favourably with that of

Old Guards (2.7%).

(3) The turnover of Old Guards is larger (`25,38,000) than Young Ones Company (`9,70,000), but the

cost of goods absorbs a larger i.e. 56% of net sales compared to 49% in case of Young Ones

Company. This reflects a better pricing mark-up by Young Ones.

(4) The selling, and administrative and general expenses are 35.6% of net sales in case of Old Guards

while 38% in case of Young Ones. Administration costs in Young Ones is higher as compared to

Old Guards, reflecting a highly paid or over staffed administrative function.

(5) Old Guards appear to be more traditionally financed with shareholders equity of 65.6% of total

liabilities as against 50% in case of Young Ones. This reflects the financial value ability of Young

Ones.

(6) The fixed assets of Old Guards company is larger (`12,70,000) than of Young Ones Company

(`5,13,000). But, if this is compared with turnover that of the two companies, we find that Old

Guards has a lower asset turnover (50%) than that of Young Ones Company (53%). This reflects a

better asset utilisation by Young Ones Company.

3. Trend Ratios

Trend ratios can be defined as index numbers of the movements of the various financial items in the financial

statements for a number of periods. It is a statistical device applied in the analysis of financial statements to

reveal the trend of the items with the passage of time. Trend ratios show the nature and rate of movements

in various financial factors. They provide a horizontal analysis of comparative statements and reflect the

behaviour of various items with the passage of time. Trend ratios can be graphically presented for a better

EP-CMA

478

understanding by the management. They are very useful in predicting the behaviour of the various financial

factors in future. However, it should be noted that conclusions should not be drawn on the basis of a single

trend. Trends of related items should be carefully studied, before any meaningful conclusion is arrived at.

Since trends are sometimes significantly affected by externalities, i.e. reasons extraneous to the

organisations, the analyst must give due weightage to such extraneous factors like government policies,

economic conditions, changes in income and its distribution, etc.

Computation of Trend Percentages: For calculation of the trend of data shown in the financial statements,

it is necessary to have statements for a number of years, and then proceed as under:

(1) Take one of the statements as the base with reference to which all other statements are to be

studied. In selection of the best statement, it should be noted that it belongs to a ‘normal’ year of

business activities. Statement relating to an ‘abnormal’ year should not be selected as base,

otherwise the trend calculated will be meaningless.

(2) Every item in the base statement is stated as 100.

(3) Trend percentage of each item in other statement is calculated with reference to same item in the

base statement by using the following formula:

Absolute V

alue of it

em (say ca

sh) in oth

er stateme

nts

Absolute Value of same item (cash) in base statement

× 100

Limitations of Trend Ratios: It should be noted that trend ratios are not calculated for all items. They are

calculated only for logically connected items enabling meaningful analysis. For example, trend ratios of sales

become more revealing when compared with the trend ratios of fixed assets, cost of goods sold and

operating expenses. Trend ratios have the following limitations:

(a) If the accounting practices have not been consistently followed year after year, these ratios become

incomparable and thus misleading.

(b) Trend ratios do not take into consideration the price level charges. An increasing trend in sales

might not be the result of larger sales volume, but may be because of increased sales price due to

inflation. In order to avoid this limitation, figures of the current year should be first adjusted for price

level changes from the base year and then the trend ratios be calculated.

(c) Trend ratios must be always read with absolute data on which they are based, otherwise the

conclusions drawn may be misleading. It may be that a 100% change in trend ratio may represent

an absolute change of `1,000 only in one item, while a 20% change in another item may mean an

absolute change of `1,00,000.

(d) The trend ratios have to be interpreted in the light of certain non-financial factors like economic

conditions, government policies, management policies etc.

Illustration 1

From the following information extracted from the Balance Sheets of Star Ltd. for four previous financial

years, calculate the trend percentages taking 2010-11 as the base year:

2010-11 2011-12 2012-13 2013-14

(` in lakhs)

Current Assets:

Cash 200 240 400 220

Bank 260 300 200 240

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

479

Debtors 400 600 1,000 1,600

Stock 800 1,200 1,800 2,000

Non-Current Assets:

Building 1,000 1,200 1,200 1,200

Plant and Machinery 2,000 2,400 2,400 2,800

4,660 5,940 7,000 8,060

Solution:

Trend Percentages

2010-11

2011-12 2012-13 2013-14 2010-11

2011-12 2012-13 2013-14

(

`

in lakhs) (Trend percentage)

Current assets:

Cash 200 240 400 220 100 120.00 200.00 110.00

Bank 260 300 200 240 100 115.38 76.92 92.30

Debtors 400 600 1,000 1,600 100 150.00 250.00 400.00

Stock 800 1,200 1,800 2,000 100 150.00 225.00 250.00

Fixed Assets:

Building 1,000 1,200 1,200 1,200 100 120.00 120.00 120.00

Plant and

Machinery

2,000

2,400

2,800

100

120.00

140.00

4,660 5,940 7,000 8,060 100 127.46 150.21 172.96

4. RATIO ANALYSIS

Ratio analysis is used to evaluate relationships among financial statement items. The ratios are used to

identify trends over time for one organisation or to compare two or more organisations at one point in time.

Ratio analysis focuses on three key aspects of a business: liquidity, profitability, and solvency.

Ratio Analysis is a important tool for any business organisation. The computation of ratios facilitates the

comparison of firms which differ in size. Ratios can be used to compare a firm's financial performance with

industry averages. In addition, ratios can be used in a form of trend analysis to identify areas where

performance has improved or deteriorated over time.

Ratio are the symptoms like the blood pressure, the pulse or the temperature of an individual. Just as in the

case of an individual, a doctor or a valid by reading the pulse of a patient or by studying the blood pressure

or the temperature of a patient can diagnose the cause of his ailment, so also a financial analyst through

ration analysis of the employment of resources and its overall financial position. Just as in medical science

the symptoms are passive factors, to diagnose them properly depends upon the efficiency and the expertise

of the doctor, so also to derive right conclusions from ratio analysis will depend upon the efficiency and depth

of understanding of the financial analyst.

ACCOUNTING RATIOS

An absolute figure often does not convey much meaning. Generally, it is only in the light of other information

that significance of a figure is realised. A weighs 70 kg. Is he fat? One cannot answer this question unless

one knows A’s age and height. Similarly, a company’s profitability cannot be known unless together with the

EP-CMA

480

amount of profit and the amount of capital employed. The relationship between the two figures expressed

arithmetically is called a ratio. The ratio between 4 and 10 is 0.4 or 40% or 2:5. “0.4", ”40%" and “2:5" are

ratios. Accounting ratios are relationships, expressed in arithmetical terms, between figures which have a

cause and effect relationship or which are connected with each other in some other manner.

Accounting ratios are a very useful tool for grasping the true message of the financial statements and

understanding them. Ratios naturally should be worked out between figures that are significantly related to

one another. Obviously no purpose will be served by working out ratios between two entirely unrelated

figures, such as discount on debentures and sales. Ratios may be worked out on the basis of figures

contained in the financial statements.

Ratios provide clues and symptoms of underlying conditions. They act as indicators of financial soundness,

strength, position and status of an enterprise.

Interpretation of ratios form the core part of ratio analysis. The computation of ratio is simply a clerical work

but the interpretation is a taste requiring art and skill. The usefulness of ratios dependent on the judicious

interpretations.

USES OF RATIO ANALYSIS

A comparative study of the relationship, between various items of financial statements, expressed as ratios,

reveals the profitability, liquidity, solvency as well as the overall financial position of the enterprises.

Ratio analysis helps to analyse and understand the financial health and trend of a business, its past

performance makes it possible to have forecast about future state of affairs of the business. Interfirm

comparison and intrafirm comparison becomes easier through the analysis. Past performance and future

projections could be reviewed through the ratio analysis easily. Management uses the ratio analysis in

exercising control in various areas viz. budgetary control, inventory control, financial control etc. and fixing

the accountability and responsibility of different departmental heads for accelerated and planned

performance. It is useful for all the constituents of the company as discussed under:

1. Management: Management is interested in ratios because they help in the formulation of policies,

decision-making and evaluating the performances and trends of the business and its various

segments.

2. Shareholders: With the application of ratio analysis to financial statements, shareholders can

understand not only the working and operational efficiency of their company, but also the likely

effect of such efficiency on the net worth and consequently the price of their shares in the Stock

Exchange. With the help of such analysis, they can form opinion regarding the effectiveness or

otherwise of the management functions.

3. Investors: Investors are interested in the operational efficiency, earning capacities and ‘financial

health’ of the business. Ratios regarding profitability, debt-equity, fixed assets to net worth, assets

turnover, etc., are some measures useful for the investors in making decisions regarding the type of

security and industry in which they should invest.

4. Creditors: Creditors can reasonably assure themselves about the solvency and liquidity position of

the business by using ratio-analysis. Such analysis helps to throw light on the repayment policy and

capability of an enterprise.

5. Government: The Government is interested in the ‘financial health’ of the business. Carefully

worked ratios will reflect the policy of the management and its consistency or otherwise with the

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

481

overall regional and national economic policies. Such ratios help in better understanding of cost-

structures and may justify price controls by the Government to save the consumers.

6. Analysts: Ratio analysis is the most important technique available to the financial analysis to study

the financial statements to compare the progress and position of various firms with each other and

vis-a-vis the industry.

CLASSIFICATION OF RATIOS

Different ratios calculated from different financial figures carry different significance for different purposes.

For example, for the creditors liquidity and solvency ratios are more significant than the profitability ratios,

which are of prime importance for an investor. This means that ratios can be grouped on different basis

depending upon their significance. The classification is rather crude and unsuitable to determine the

profitability or financial position of the business. In general, accounting ratios may be classified on the

following basis leading to overlap in many cases.

1. ACCORDING TO THE STATEMENT UPON WHICH THEY ARE BASED

Ratios can be classified into three groups according to the statements from which they are calculated:

1.1 Balance Sheet Ratios: They deal with relationship between two items appearing in the balance

sheet, e.g., current assets to current liability or current ratio. These ratios are also known as

financial position ratios since they reflect the financial position of the business.

1.2 Operating Ratios or Profit and Loss Ratios: These ratios express the relationship between two

individual or group of items appearing in the income or profit and loss statement. Since they reflect

the operating conditions of a business, they are also known as operating ratios, e.g., gross profit to

sales, cost of goods sold to sales, etc.

1.3 Combined Ratios: These ratios express the relationship between two items, each appearing in

different statements, i.e., one appearing in balance sheet while the other in income statement, e.g.,

return on investment (net profit to capital employed); Assets turnover (sales) ratio, etc. Since both

the statements are involved in the calculation of each of these ratios, they are also known as inter-

statement ratios.

Since the balance sheet figures refer to one point of time, while the income statement figures refer to events

over a period of time, care must be taken while calculating combined or inter-statement ratios. For example

while computing assets turnover ratio, average assets should be taken on the basis of opening and ending

balance sheets.

2. CLASSIFICATION ACCORDING TO “IMPORTANCE”

This classification has been recommended by the British Institute of Management for inter-firm comparisons.

It is based on the fact that some ratios are more relevant and important than others in the process of

comparisons and decision-making. Therefore, ratios may be treated as primary or secondary.

2.1 Primary Ratio: Since profit is primary consideration in all business activities, the ratio of profit to

capital employed is termed as ‘Primary Ratio’. In business world this ratio is known as “Return on

Investment”. It is the ratio which reflects the validity or otherwise of the existence and continuation

of the business unit. In case if this ratio is not satisfactory over long period, the business unit cannot

justify its existence and hence, should be closed down. Because of its importance for the very

existence of the business unit it is called ‘Primary Ratio’.

EP-CMA

482

2.2 Secondary Ratios: These are ratios which help to analyse the factors affecting “Primary Ratio”.

These may be sub-classified as under:

2.2.1 Supporting Ratios: These are ratios which reflect the profit-earning capacities of the business

and thus support the “Primary Ratio”. For example sales to operating profit ratio reflects the

capacity of contribution of sales to the profits of the business. Similarly, sales to assets

employed reflects the effectiveness in the use of assets for making sales, and consequently

profits.

2.2.2 Explanatory Ratios: These are ratios which analyse and explain the factors responsible for the

size of profit earned. Gross profit to sales, cost of goods sold to sales, stock-turnover, debtors

turnover are some of the ratios which can explain the size of the profits earned. Where these

ratios are calculated to highlight the effect of specific activity, they are termed as ‘Specific

Explanatory Ratios’. For example, the effect of credit and collection policy is reflected by

debtors turnover ratio.

3. FUNCTIONAL CLASSIFICATION

The classification of ratios according to the purpose of its computation is known as functional classification.

On this basis ratios are categorised as follows:

3.1 Profitability Ratios: Profitability ratios gives some yardstick to measure the profit in relative terms

with reference to sales, assets or capital employed. These ratios highlight the end result of business

activities. The main objective is to judge the efficiency of the business.

3.2 Turnover Ratios or Activity Ratios: These ratios are used to measure the effectiveness of the use

of capital/assets in the business. These ratios are usually calculated on the basis of sales or cost of

goods sold and are expressed in integers rather than as percentages.

3.3 Financial Ratios or Solvency Ratios: These ratios are calculated to judge the financial position of

the organisation from short-term as well as long-term solvency point of view. Thus, it can be sub-

divided into: (a) Short-term Solvency Ratios (Liquidity Ratios) and (b) Long-term Solvency Ratios

(Capital Structure Ratios).

3.4 Market Test Ratios: These are of course, some profitability ratios, having a bearing on the market

value of the shares.

The classification of the structure of ratio analysis cuts across the various bases on which it has been made.

The determination of activity and profitability ratios are drawn partly from the balance sheet and partly from

the Statement of Profit & Loss. Ratios satisfying the test of liquidity or solvency partake the items of both the

balance sheet and income statement, some activity ratios coincide with those satisfying the test of liquidity,

some leverage ratios belong to the category of income statement. This clearly indicates that one basis of

classification crosses into other category. However, for the purpose of consideration of individual ratios, a

classification of ratio on functional basis is discussed hereunder:

3.1 Profitability Ratios

A measure of ‘profitability’ is the overall measure of efficiency. In general terms efficiency of business is

measured by the input-output analysis. By measuring the output as a proportion of the input, and comparing

result of similar other firms or periods the relative change in its profitability can be established.

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

483

The income (output) as compared to the capital employed (input) indicates profitability of a firm. Thus the

chief profitability ratio is:

Operating

Profit (ne

t margin)

Operating Capital Employed

× 100

Once this is known, the analyst compares the same with the profitability ratio of other firms or periods. Then,

when he finds some contrast, he would like to have details of the reasons. These questions are sought to be

answered by working out relevant ratios. The main profitability ratio and all the other sub-ratios are

collectively known as ‘profitability ratios’.

Profitability ratio can be determined on the basis of either investments or sales. Profitability in relation to

investments is measured by return on capital employed, return on shareholders’ funds and return on assets.

The profitability in relation to sales are profit margin (gross and net) and expenses ratio or operating ratio.

3.1.1 Return on Investment

This ratio is also known as overall profitability ratio or return on capital employed. The income (output) as

compared to the capital employed (input) indicates the return on investment. It shows how much the

company is earning on its investment. This ratio is calculated as follows:

Return on Investment =

100

Employed Capital

Profit Operating Net

×

Operating profit means profit before interest and tax. In arriving at the profit, interest on loans is treated

as part of profit (but not the interest on bank overdraft or other short-term finance) because loans themselves

are part of the input, i.e., the capital employed and hence, the interest on loans should also be part of the

output. All non-business income or rather income not related to normal operations of the company should be

excluded. Thus net operating profit figure shall be IBIT, i.e., Income Before Interest and Taxation (excluding

non-business income).

The income figure is reckoned before taxation because the amount of tax has no relevance to the

operational efficiency. Both interest and taxation are appropriations of profit and do not reflect operational

efficiency. Moreover, to compare the profitability of two different organisations having different sources of

finance and different tax burden, the profit before interest and taxation is the best measure.

Capital employed comprises share capital and reserves and surplus, long-term loans minus non-

operating assets and fictitious assets. It can also be represented as net fixed assets plus working

capital (i.e. current assets minus current liabilities).

Capital employed = Share Capital + Reserve and Surplus + Long-

term Loans − Non-Operating Assets − Fictitious Assets

OR

Capital employed = Net fixed assets + working capital

In using overall profitability ratio as the chief measure of profitability, the following two notes of caution

should be kept in mind. First, the figure of operating profit shows the profit earned throughout a period. The

figure of capital employed on the other hand refers to the values of assets as on a balance sheet date. As

the values of assets go on changing throughout a business period it may be advisable to take the average

EP-CMA

484

assets throughout a period, so that the profits are compared against average capital employed during a

period.

Secondly, in making comparison between two different units on the basis of the overall profitability ratio, the

time of incorporation of the two units should be taken care off. If a company incorporated in 2000 is

compared with that incorporated in 2010, the first company’s assets will be appearing at a much lower figure

than those of second company. Thus the former will show a lower capital base and if profits of both the

companies are the same, the former will show a higher rate of return. This does not indicate higher

efficiency; only the capital employed is lower because of the reason that it started 10 years earlier. Hence, in

such cases the present value of the fixed assets should be considered for calculating the capital employed.

“Return on capital employed” should be used cautiously with clear understanding of its limitations. The

‘profits’ and “capital employed” figures are the result of a number of approximations (example, depreciation)

and human judgement (valuation of assets). Therefore, the purpose of calculation of the ratio should be kept

in view and appropriate figures should be selected having regard to impact of changing price levels.

Suppose a company has the following items on the liabilities side and it shows underwriting commission of

`1,00,000 on the assets side:

`

13% Preference capital 10,00,000

Equity capital 30,00,000

Reserves 26,00,000

Loans @ 15% 30,00,000

Current Liabilities 15,00,000

Its profit, after paying tax @ 50% is `14,00,000. Profit before interest and tax will be `32,50,000 which can

be calculated as shown below:

`

Profit after tax 14,00,000

Tax 14,00,000

Interest @ 15% on `30,00,000 4,50,000

32,50,000

The operating capital employed is `95,00,000 i.e. total of all the items on liabilities side (excluding current

liabilities) less `1,00,000, a fictitious asset (underwriting commission).

The ROI comes to

=

000,00,95

000,50,32

× 100 or 34.21%

The overall profitability ratio has two components. These are the net profit ratio (operating profit/sales x 100)

multiplied by turnover ratio (sales/capital employed). Therefore, ROI, in terms of percentage:

100

Employed Capital

Profit Operating

×

Employed Capital

Sales

Profit Operating

100

××=

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

485

If a management wants to maximize its profitability, it could do so by improving its net profit ratio and

turnover ratio. The former refers to the margin made in each sale in terms of percentage whereas, the latter

shows the utilization, i.e., rotation of the capital in making the sale. If the selling price of an article is `10

whose cost is `6, there is a margin of `4 or 40%. This shows the gap between selling price and cost price in

the percentage form. The overall profitability is also dependent upon the effectiveness of employment of

capital. If in this case, sales `200 were made with a capital of `100 then the rotation, i.e. the turnover is

200/100 or 2 times. Thus the business has earned a total profit of `80 with a capital of `100, profitability ratio

being 80%, i.e., Net profit ratio x Turnover ratio = 40% x 2 = 80%.

Illustration 2

Determine which company is more profitable:

X Ltd. Z Ltd.

Net Profit Ratio 3% 4%

Sales/Capital Employed 5 times 3 times

Solution:

Judging from the net margin ratio Z Ltd. appears to be more profitable. But the criteria for determining

profitability is return on capital employed which in this case works out to 15% and 12% respectively for X Ltd.

and Z Ltd. Hence X Ltd. is undoubtedly more profitable.

Return on investment is a good measure of profitability in as much as it is an extension of the input-output

analysis. Moreover, it aids in comparing the performance efficiency of dissimilar enterprises.

3.1.2 Return on Shareholders’ Funds

It is also referred to as return on net worth. In this case it is desired to work out the profitability of the

company from the shareholders’ point of view and it is computed as follows:

100

Funds rs'Shareholde

Tax and Interest after Profit Net

×

Modifications of the ‘return on capital employed’ can be made to adopt it to various circumstances. Thus if it

is required to work out the profitability from the shareholders’ point of view, then the profit figure should be

after interest and taxation and the capital employed should be after deducting the long-term loans. This ratio

would reflect the profitability for the shareholders. To extend the idea further, the profitability from equity

shareholders’ point of view can also be worked out by taking the profits after preference dividend and

comparing against capital employed after deducting both long-term loans and preference capital.

3.1.3 Return on Assets

Here the profitability is measured in terms of the relationship between net profits and assets. It shows

whether the assets are being properly utilised or not. It is calculated as:

100

AssetsTotal

Tax after Profit Net

×

This ratio is a measure of the profitability of the total funds or investment of the organisation.

EP-CMA

486

3.1.4 Profit Ratios

3.1.4.1 Gross Profit Ratio or Gross Margin

Gross profit ratio expresses the relationship of gross profit to net sales or turnover. Gross profit is the excess

of the proceeds of goods sold and services rendered during a period over their cost, before taking into

account administration, selling and distribution and financing charges. Gross profit ratio is expressed as

follows:

100

Sales Net

Profit Gross

×

This ratio is important to determine general profitability since it is expected that the ratio would be quite high

so as to cover not only the remaining costs but also to allow proper returns to owners.

Any fluctuation in the gross profit ratio is the result of a change either in ‘sales’ or the ‘cost of goods sold’ or

both. The rise or fall in the selling price may be an external factor over which the management may have little

control, specially when prices are controlled. The management, however, must try to keep the other end of

the margin (i.e., cost) at least steady, if not reduce it. If the gross profit ratio is lower than what it was

previously, when the selling price has remained steady, it can be reasonably concluded that there is an

increase in the manufacturing cost. Since manufacturing overheads include a fixed element as well, a fall in

the volume of sales will also lower the rate of gross profit and vice-versa.

3.1.4.2 Net Profit Ratio

One of the components of return on capital employed is the net profit ratio (or the margin on sales)

calculated as:

Net Profit Ratio =

Operating

Profit

Sales

× 100

It indicates the net margin earned in a sale of `100. Net profit is arrived at from gross profit after deducting

administration, selling and distribution expenses; non-operating incomes, such as dividends received and

non-operating expenses are ignored, since they do not affect efficiency of operations.

3.1.4.3 Operating Ratio

The ratio of all operating expenses (i.e., materials used, labour, factory overheads, office and selling

expenses) to sales is the operating ratio.

A comparison of the operating ratio would indicate whether the cost content is high or low in the figure of

sales. If the annual comparison shows that the sales has increased, the management would be naturally

interested and concerned to know as to which element of the cost has gone up.

It is not necessary that the management should be concerned only when the operating ratio goes up. If the

operating ratio has fallen, though the unit selling price has remained the same, still the position needs

analysis as it may be the sum total of efficiency in certain departments and inefficiency in others. A dynamic

management should be interested in making a fuller analysis.

It is, therefore, necessary to break up the operating ratio into various cost ratios. The major components of

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

487

cost are: material, labour and overheads. Therefore, it is worthwhile to classify the cost ratio as:

Material cost ratio =

Material c

onsumed

Sales

× 100

Labour cost ratio =

Labour cos

t

Sales

× 100

Factory overheads cost ratio =

Overheads

cost

Sales

× 100

Administrative expenses ratio =

Administra

tive expen

ses

Sales

× 100

Selling and distribution expenses ratio =

Selling an

d distribu

tion expen

ses

Sales

× 100

Generally all these ratios are expressed in terms of percentage. They total upto the Operating Ratio. This,

deducted from 100 will be equal to the Net Profit Ratio.

If possible, the total expenditure for effecting sales should be divided into two categories, viz., fixed and

variable-and then ratios should be worked out. The ratio of variable expenses to sales will be generally

constant; that of fixed expenses should fall if sales increase; it will increase if sales fall.

3.2 Activity Ratios or Turnover Ratios

The ratios used to measure the effectiveness of the employment of resources are termed as activity ratios.

Since these ratios relate to the use of assets for generation of income through turnover they are also known

as turnover ratios, as we have seen already, the overall profitability of the business depends on two factors

i.e. (i) the rate of return on sales and (ii) the rate of return on capital employed i.e. the speed at which the

capital employed in the business relates. More efficient the operations of an undertaking, the quicker and

more number of times the rotation is. Thus the overall profitability ratio is calculated as - Net Profit Ratio x

Turnover Ratio. The net profit ratio has already been discussed. Now the important turnover ratios as

regards capital employed and assets are discussed below:

3.2.1 Capital Turnover (Sales to Capital Employed) Ratio

This ratio shows the efficiency of capital employed in the business and is calculated as follows:

Capital Turnover Ratio =

Net Sales

Capital Employed

The higher the ratio the greater are the profits.

3.2.2 Total Assets Turnover Ratio

This ratio is ascertained by dividing the net sales by the value of total assets. Thus,

Total Assets Turnover Ratio =

Net Sales

Total Asse

ts

A high ratio is an indicator of overtrading of total assets while a low ratio reveals idle capacity. The total

Assets Turnover Ratio can be segregated into:

EP-CMA

488

3.2.2.1 Fixed Assets Turnover Ratio

This ratio indicates the number of times fixed assets are being turned over in a stated period. It is calculated

as:

Fixed Assets Turnover Ratio =

Net Sales

Fixed Asse

ts

This ratio is an indicator of the extent to which investment in fixed assets contributes to generate sales. The

fixed assets are to be taken net of depreciation. The higher is the ratio the better is the performance.

3.2.2.2 Working Capital Turnover Ratio

This ratio shows the number of times working capital is turned-over in a stated period. This ratio is calculated

as:

Working Capital Turnover Ratio =

Net Sales

Working Capital

It indicates to what extent the working capital funds have been employed in the business towards sales.

3.2.3 Stock Turnover Ratio (Inventory Turnover Ratio)

This ratio is an indicator of the efficiency of the use of investment in stock. It is calculated as:

Stock Turnover Ratio =

Cost of Go

ods Sold

Average Inventory

or

Sales

Average Inventory

Mostly opening and closing stock figures are given and these should be averaged. If monthly figures are

available, then these figures should be averaged. In case stock level fluctuates violently, then monthly

average should be calculated as under:

Opening stock + 12 months figures – Closing stock

12

In this case stock turnover ratio should be as under:

Cost of goods sold

Average stock

Too large an inventory will depress the ratio; control over inventories and active sales promotion will increase

the ratio. If desired this ratio may be split into two ratios, for raw materials and for finished goods:

(i)

Material c

onsumed

Average raw material stocks

; and

(ii)

Sale or Co

st of good

s sold

Average stocks of finished goods

This analysis will throw a better light on the inventory position.

Average inventory is calculated on the basis of the average inventory at the beginning and at the end of the

accounting period.

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

489

3.2.4 Debtors Turnover Ratio (Debtors’ Velocity)

These days some amount of sales always locked up in the form of book debts. Efficient credit control and

prompt collection of amounts due will mean lower investments in book debts. This ratio measures the net

credit sales of a firm to the recorded trade debtors thereby indicating the rate at which cash is generated by

turnover of receivable or debtors. This ratio is calculated as:

Debtors Turnover Ratio =

Net Sales

Average Debtors

Average debtors refer to the average of opening and closing balance of debtors for the period. Debtors

include bills receivables but exclude debts which arise on account of transactions other than sale of goods.

While calculating debtors turnover, it is important to note that provision for bad and doubtful debts are not

deducted from total debtors in order to avoid the impression that a larger amount of receivables have been

collected.

Debt Collection Period: This ratio indicates the extent to which the debts have been collected in time. This

ratio is infact, interrelated with and dependent upon the debtors turnover ratio. It is calculated by dividing the

days in a year by the debtors turnover. This ratio can be computed as follows:

(i)

Months

/

Days in a

Year

Debtors Tu

rnover

OR

Average De

btors

Months

/

Days in a

Year

Net Credit

Sales for

the Year

×

OR

Average De

btors

Average Monthly / Daily Credit Sales

Debtors’ collection period shows the quality of debtors since it measures the speed with which money is

collected from them. It is rather difficult to specify a standard collection period for debtors. It depends upon

the nature of the industry, seasonal character of the business and credit policy of the firm etc.

Illustration 3

From the following information, calculate, debtors turnover ratio and average collection period.

`

Total debtors (opening balance) 2,00,000

Cash sales 1,50,000

Credit sales 10,00,000

Cash collected 7,80,000

Sales returns 60,000

Bad debts 40,000

Discount allowed 20,000

Provision for bad debts 25,000

No. of days in a year – 360

EP-CMA

490

Solution:

Total Debtors Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Balance b/d 2,00,000 By Cash 7,80,000

To Credit sales 10,00,000 By Sales returns 60,000

By Bad debts 40,000

By Discount allowed 20,000

________ By Balance c/d 3,00,000

12,00,000 12,00,000

Debtors Turnover Ratio =

Credit Sal

es

Average Debtors

Average Debtors =

Opening De

btors

+

Closing D

ebtors

2

=

2

000,00,3000,00,2

``

+

= `2,50,000

Debtors Turnover Ratio =

000,50,2

000,00,10

`

= 4 times

Average Collection Period =

Days in th

e Year

Debtors Tu

rnover Rat

io

=

360

4

= 90 days.

3.2.5 Creditors Turnover Ratio (Creditors’ Velocity)

Like debtors’ turnover ratio, this ratio indicates the speed at which the payments for credit purchases are

made to creditors. This ratio is computed as follows:

Creditors Turnover Ratio =

Credit Pur

chases

Average Creditors

The term ‘creditors’ include, trade creditors and bills payable. In case the details regarding credit purchases,

opening and closing balances of creditors are not available, then instead of credit purchases, total purchases

may be taken and in place of average creditors, the balance available may be substituted.

Debt Payment Period: This ratio gives the average credit period enjoyed from the creditors. It can be

computed as under:

Months

/

Days in a

Year

Creditors

Turnover

OR

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

491

Average Cr

editors

Months

/

Days in a

Year

Credit Pur

chases in

the Year

×

OR

Average Cr

editors

Average Monthly / Daily Credit Purchases

Both above ratios determine the average age of payables, on the basis of which it can be compensated as to

how prompt or otherwise the company is making payments for credit purchases effected by it. A high

creditors’ turnover ratio or a low debt payment period shows that creditors are being paid promptly, hence

enhancing the credit worthiness of the company. However, a very favourable ratio to this effect also shows

that the business is not taking full advantage of credit facilities allowed by the creditors.

3.3 Financial Ratios

Financial statements of a firm are analysed for ascertaining its profitability as well as financial position. A firm

is said to be financially sound provided if it is capable of meeting its commitments both short-term and long-

term. Accordingly, the ratios to be computed for judging the financial position are also known as solvency

ratios and those ratios which are computed for short-term solvency are known as liquidity ratios.

3.3.1 Liquidity Ratio

In a short period, a firm should be able to meet all its short-term obligations i.e. current liabilities and

provisions. It is current assets that yield funds in the short period - current assets are those assets which the

firm can convert into cash within one year or in short run. Current assets should not only yield sufficient funds

to meet current liabilities as they fall due but also enable the firm to carry on its day to day activities. The

ratios to test the short-term solvency or liquidity position of an enterprise are mainly the following:

3.3.1.1 Current Ratio

Current ratio also known as the working capital ratio, is the most widely used ratio. It is the ratio of total

current assets to current liabilities and is calculated by dividing the current assets by current liabilities.

Current Ratio =

Current As

sets

Current Li

abilities

Current assets are those assets which can be converted into cash in the short-run or within one year.

Likewise, current liabilities are those which are to be paid off in the short run. Current assets normally include

cash in hand or at bank, inventories, sundry debtors, loans and advances, marketable securities, pre-paid

expenses, etc. while current liabilities consist of sundry creditors, bills payable, outstanding and accrued

expenses, provisions for taxation, proposed and un-claimed dividend, bank overdraft etc.

Current ratio indicates the firms’ commitment to meet its short-term obligations. It is a measure of testing

short-term solvency or in other words, it is an index of the short-term financial stability of an enterprise

because it shows the margin available after paying off current liabilities.

Generally 2:1 ratio is considered ideal for a concern. If the current assets are two times of the current

liabilities, there will be no adverse effect on the business operations when the payment of liabilities is made.

In fact a ratio much higher than 2:1 may be unsatisfactory from the angle of profitability, though satisfactory

EP-CMA

492

from the point of view of short-term solvency. A high current ratio may be taken as adverse on account of the

following reasons:

(i) The stock might be piling up because of poor sales.

(ii) The amount might be looked up in debtors due to slack collection policy.

(iii) The cash or bank balances might be lying idle because of no proper investment.

3.3.1.2 Liquid Ratio

This ratio is also known as Quick Ratio or Acid Test Ratio. This ratio is calculated by relating liquid or

quick assets to current liabilities. Liquid assets mean those assets which are immediately converted into

cash without much loss. All current assets except inventories and prepaid expenses are categorised as liquid

assets. The ratio can be computed as:

Liquid Ratio =

Liquid Ass

ets

Current Li

abilities

Liquidity ratio may also be computed by substituting liquid liabilities in place of current liabilities. Liquid

liabilities mean those liabilities which are payable within a short period. Bank overdraft and cash credit

facilities, if they become a permanent mode of financing are to be excluded from current liabilities to arrive at

liquid liabilities. Thus:

Liquid Ratio =

Liquid Ass

ets

Liquid Liabilities

This ratio is an indicator of the liquid position of an enterprise. Generally, a liquid ratio of 1:1 is considered

as ideal as the firm can easily meet all current liabilities. The main difference in current ratio and liquid

ratio is on account of inventories and therefore a comparison of two ratios leads to important conclusions

regarding inventory holding up.

3.3.2 Long-term Solvency Ratios

Long-term sources and uses of funds form the basic input for computation of long-term solvency ratios. The

investors i.e. shareholders and debenture holders both present and prospective are interested in knowing the

financial status of the company so that they can take decisions for long-term investment of their funds. The

following are the main ratios in this category.

3.3.2.1 Debt-Equity Ratio

Debt-equity ratio is the relation between borrowed funds and owners’ capital in a firm, it is also known as

external-internal equity ratio. The debt-equity ratio is used to ascertain the soundness of long-term financial

policies of the business. Debt means long-term loans i.e. debentures or long-term loans from financial

institutions. Equity means shareholders’ funds i.e., preference share capital, equity share capital, reserves

less loss and fictitious assets like preliminary expenses. It is calculated in the following ways:

(i)

Debts

Equity (Shareholders' Funds)

OR

(ii)

Debts

Long - term Funds (Shareholders' Funds + Debts)

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

493

The main purpose of this ratio is to determine the relative stakes of outsiders and shareholders.

Normally in India an ideal debt equity ratio is considered to be 2:1 if it is calculated as (i) above or 0.67:1 if

calculated as (ii) above. This means that a company may borrow upto twice the amount of its capital and

reserves or it may raise two-thirds of its long-term funds by way of loans. Generally loans are very profitable

for shareholders since interest at a fixed rate only is payable whereas the yield generally is much higher and

income-tax authorities allow interest as a deductible expenses, thus effectively reducing the interest burden

of the company. A higher proportion would be risky because loans carry with them for obligation to pay

interest at a fixed rate which may become difficult if profit is reduced. However a lower proportion of long-

term loans would indicate an undue conservation and unwillingness to take every normal risk. Both these

affect the image of the company and the value placed by the market on shares.

3.3.2.2 Proprietary Ratio

This ratio is a variant of debt-equity ratio which establishes the relationship between shareholders funds and

total assets. Shareholders’ fund means, share capital both equity and preference and reserves and surplus

less losses. This ratio is worked out as follows:

Proprietary Ratio =

Shareholde

rs'

Funds

Total Asse

ts

This ratio indicates the extent to which shareholders’ funds have been invested in the assets.

3.3.2.3 Fixed Assets Ratio

The ratio of fixed assets to long-term funds is known as fixed assets ratio. It focusses on the proportion of

long-term funds invested in fixed assets. The ratio is expressed as follows:

Fixed Assets Ratio =

Fixed Asse

ts

Long - term Funds

Fixed assets refer to net fixed assets (i.e. original cost-depreciation to date) and trade investments including

shares in subsidiaries. Long-term funds include share capital, reserves and long-term loans.

This ratio should not be more than 1. It is the principle of financial management that not merely fixed assets

but a part of working capital also should be financed by long-term funds. As such it is desirable to have the

ratio at less than one i.e. say, 0.67 to indicate the fact that the entire fixed capital plus a portion of the

working capital are financed by long-term funds.

3.3.2.4 Debt-Service Ratio

This ratio is also known as Fixed Charges Cover or Interest Cover. This ratio measures the debt servicing

capacity of a firm in so far as fixed interest on long-term loan is concerned. It is determined by dividing the

net profit before interest and taxes by the fixed charges on loans. Thus:

Debt Service Ratio =

Net Profit

before In

terest and

Tax

Interest Charges

This ratio is expressed as ‘number of times’ to indicate that profit is number of times the interest charges. It is

also a measure of profitability. Since higher the ratio, higher the profitability. The ideal ratio should be 6 to 7

times.

EP-CMA

494

3.3.2.5 Capital Gearing Ratio

The proportion between fixed interest or dividend bearing funds and non-fixed interest or dividend bearing

funds in the total capital employed in the business is termed as capital gearing ratio. Debentures, long-term

loans and preference share capital belong to the category of fixed interest/dividend bearing funds. Equity

share capital, reserves and surplus constitute non-fixed interest or dividend bearing funds. This ratio is

calculated as follows:

Capital Gearing Ratio =

Fixed Inte

rest Beari

ng Funds

Equity Shareholders' Funds

In case the fixed income bearing funds are more than the equity shareholders’ funds, the company is said to

be highly geared. A low capital gearing implies that equity funds are more than the amount of fixed interest

bearing securities. This ratio indicates the extra residual benefits accruing to equity shareholders. Whether

the concern is operating on trading on equity can be judged by this ratio.

3.4 Market Test Ratios

These ratios are calculated generally in case of such companies whose shares and stocks are traded in the

stock exchanges. Shareholders, present and probable, are interested not only in the profits of the company

but also in the appreciation of the value of their shares in the stock market. The value of shares in the stock

market, besides other factors, also depends upon factors like dividends declared, earning per share, the

payout policy, etc., of the companies. The following ratios reflect the effect of these factors on the market

value of the shares.

3.4.1 Earning Per Share (EPS)

This is calculated as under:

EPS =

Net profit

No. of equity shares

This ratio measures the profit available to the equity shareholders on a per share basis. Suppose, the net

income of company after preference dividend is `40,000 and the number of equity shares is 6,000 then,

EPS =

000,6

000,40

`

= `6.66 per share.

It should be noted that net income here is the net income in income statement for the period, after taking into

consideration operating, non-operating, and other items like income-tax. It should be remembered that if any

dividend is payable to the preference shareholders, it has to be deducted before arriving at net income for

this purpose. This ratio is of considerable importance in estimating the market price of the shares. A low

E.P.S. means lower possible dividends and so lower market value, while a high EPS has a favourable effect

on the market value of the shares.

However, the EPS alone does not reflect the effect of various financial operations of the business. Also, its

calculation may be affected, to a considerable extent, by different accounting practices and policies relating

to valuation of stocks, depreciation, etc. Therefore, this ratio should be cautiously interpreted.

3.4.2 Price Earning Ratio

This ratio establishes relationship between the market price of the shares of a company and it’s earning per

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

495

share (EPS). It is calculated as under:

Price Earning Ratio (P/E) =

Market val

ue per equ

ity share

Earning per share

Assuming the market value of a share to be `40 and the EPS `6.66 per share as calculated in (i) above, then

the PER comes to

66.6

40`

or 6 times. This ratio helps in predicting the future market value of the shares within

reasonable limits. It also helps in ascertaining the extent of under and over-valuation in the market price, thus

pointing to the effect of factors generated by the company’s financial position. This can be illustrated by the

following illustration:

Suppose, the actual market value per share is `45 while on the basis of PER and EPS it should be 6 times of

EPS, i.e., `6.66 x 6 = `40. The excess of `5 between anticipated and actual market price reflects the effect of

general economic and political conditions, the image of the company, etc.... which cannot be made out from

company’s financial statements. A reciprocal of this ratio gives the capitalisation rate of current earnings per

share.

3.4.3 Pay-out Ratio

This ratio expresses the relationship between what is available as earnings per share and what is actually

paid in the form of dividends out of available earnings. It is a good measure of the dividend policy of the

company. A higher payout ratio may mean lower retention and ploughing back of profits, a deteriorating

liquidity position and little or no increase in the profit-earning capacity of the company. This ratio is calculated

with the help of the following formula:

Pay-out Ratio =

Dividend p

er equity

share

Earnings per share

3.4.4 Dividend Yield Ratio

This ratio establishes the relationship between the market price and the dividend paid per share. It is

expressed as a percentage and gives the rate of return on the market value of the shares and helps in the

decision of investors who are more concerned about returns on their investment rather than its capital

appreciation. This ratio is calculated as under:

Dividend p

er share

Market price per share

× 100

Since dividends are declared on paid-up value of shares, they do not reflect the actual rate of earning if the

shares are purchased at market price, which is generally different from paid-up value. This ratio removes this

ambiguity by relating the dividends to the market value of shares. For example, if a company declares 20%

dividend on its share of `20 each, having a market value of `40 each, then the real rate of return is not 20%

but is 10% as calculated below:

Dividend p

er share

Market value per share

× 100

= × =

4

40

100 10%

It should be noted that in the calculation of all the above four ratios (market test) preference shares are

ignored and their dividend is adjusted against income, before it is considered for these ratios.

EP-CMA

496

ADVANTAGES OF RATIO ANALYSIS

Ratio analysis is a powerful tool of financial analysis. An absolute figure generally conveys no meaning. It is

seen that mostly figure assumes importance only in background of other information. Ratios bring together

figures which are significantly allied to one another to portray the cause and effect relationship.

From a study of the various ratios and their practical applications, the following advantages can be attributed

to the technique of ratio analysis:

1. It helps to analyse and understand financial health and trend of a business, its past performance,

and makes it possible to forecast the future state of affairs of the business. They diagnose the

financial health by evaluating liquidity, solvency, profitability etc. This helps the management to

assess the financial requirements and the capabilities of various business units. It serves as a

media to link the past with the present and the future.

2. It serves as a useful tool in management control process, by making a comparison between the

performance of the business and the performance of similar types of business.

3. Ratio analysis play a significant role in cost accounting, financial accounting, budgetary control and

auditing.

4. It helps in the identification, tracing and fixing of the responsibilities of managerial personnel at

different levels.

5. It accelerates the institutionalisation and specialisation of financial management.

6. Accounting ratios summarise and systematise the accounting figures in order to make them more

understandable in a lucid form. They highlight the inter-relationship which exists between various

segments of the business expressed by accounting statements.

LIMITATIONS OF RATIO ANALYSIS

Ratio analysis is a widely used technique to evaluate the financial position and performance of a business.

But these are subject to certain limitations:

(i) Usefulness of ratios depend on the abilities and intentions of the persons who handle them. It will be

affected considerably by the bias of such persons.

(ii) Ratios are worked out on the basis of money-values only. They do not take into account the real

values of various items involved. Thus, the technique is not realistic in its approach.

(iii) Historical values (specially in balance sheet ratios) are considered in working out the various ratios.

Effects of changes in the price levels of various items are ignored and to that extent the

comparisons and evaluations of performance through ratios become unrealistic and unreliable.

(iv) One particular ratio, in isolation is not sufficient to review the whole business. A group of ratios are

to be considered simultaneously to arrive at any meaningful and worthwhile opinion about the affairs

of the business.

(v) Since management and financial policies and practices differ from concern to concern, similar ratios

may not reflect similar state of affairs of different concerns. Thus, comparisons of performance on

the basis of ratios may be confusing.

(vi) Ratio analysis is only a technique for making judgements and not a substitute for judgement.

(vii) Since ratios are calculated on the basis of financial statements which are themselves affected

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

497

greatly by the firm’s accounting policies and changes therein, the ratios may not be able to bring out

the real situations.

(viii) Ratios are at best, only symptoms; they may indicate what is to be investigated - only a careful

investigation will bring out the correct position.

(ix) Ratios are only as accurate as the accounts on the basis of which these are established. Therefore,

unless the accounts are prepared accurately by applying correct values to assets and liabilities, the

statements prepared therefrom would not be correct and the relationship established on that basis

would not be reliable.

Illustration 4

From the following statements, calculate the various ratios:

Extract from statement of Profit and Loss of Juliet & Company

for year ending March 31, 2014

(in

`

‘000)

`

% sales

Net Sales 600 100.0

Less: Cost of goods sold 360 60.0

Gross Profit 240 40.0

Operating expenses 156 26.0

Operating Profit 84 14.0

Interest 8 1.3

Income before tax 76 12.7

Income tax provision 38 6.4

Net Income after tax for the year 38 6.3

Balance Sheet of Julient & Co.

(as on March 31, 2012 and 2013)

(in ` ‘000)

March 31, March 31,

2013 2014

Assets:

Current Assets:

Cash 60 80

Account receivables (net) 60 60

Inventories 100 120

Pre-paid expenses 20 20

Total Current Assets 240 280

Fixed Assets:

Land 60 60

Building and structures 240 240

Less: Accumulated depreciation 120 140

Net Buildings structures 120 100

Total Fixed Assets 180 160

EP-CMA

498

Other Assets:

Goodwill and patents − 20

Total Assets 420 460

Liabilities and Equities

Current Liabilities:

Accounts payable 50 60

Wages and taxes outstanding 30 20

Income-tax payable 20 40

Total Current Liabilities 100 120

Long-term Liabilities:

10% Mortgage Debentures 80 80

Total Liabilities 180 200

Shareholders’ Equity:

Share capital (6,000 shares of `20 each fully paid) 120 120

Retained earnings 120 140

Total Shareholders’ Equity 240 260

Total Liabilities and Equities 420 460

Solution:

(i) Current Ratio

=

Current As

sets

Current Li

abilities

2012-13 =

000,00,1

000,40,2

`

= 2.4:1

2013-14 =

000,20,1

000,80,2

`

= 2.3:1

It is clear from the above calculations that liquidity has slightly deteriorated in 2013-14. However, it is still

above the ideal current ratio which is suggested as 2:1.

(ii) Debt-Equity Ratio (Debt/Equity)

2012-13 =

000,40,2

000,80

`

= 0.33

2013-14 =

000,60,2

000,80

`

= 0.31

The position has improved.

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

499

(iii) Acid Test Ratio or Quick Ratio

=

Liquid or

Quick Asse

ts

Current Li

abilities

2012-13 =

000,00,1

000,20,1

`

= 1.2

2013-14 =

000,20,1

000,40,1

`

= 1.17

This means that there has been a slight change in the quick ratio for the two periods. The ideal or standard

acid test ratio is often taken to be 1:1 (or 100%) for a safe current financial position.

(iv) Debtors’ Turnover Ratio

=

Debtors Average

Sales Net

=

000,60

000,00,6

`

= 10 times

It means that 10% of sales effected always remain to be realised.

Debt Collection Period:

=

×

Average De

btors

Days in a

year

Net Credit

Sales

000,00,6

365000,60

`

×

=

= 36.5 days

This shows that the company’s debts are collected after an average of 36.5 days.

(v) Inventory Turnover Ratio

This ratio is an important indication of the speed with which inventories are converted into sales. In other

words, it reflects the degree of liquidity of inventories and their relationship with the turnover. It is calculated

as:

Cost of Go

ods Sold

Average Inventory at Cost

Average inventory is calculated by adding opening and closing inventory figures and dividing the total by 2.

Thus, inventory turnover for 2013-14.

000,10,1

000,60,3

`

= 3.27 times.

EP-CMA

500

(vi) Sales Ratios

(i) Sales to fixed assets or fixed assets turnover ratio:

Net Sales

Net Fixed

Assets

000,60,1

000,00,6

`

= 3.75 times.

(ii) Sales to net worth:

Sales

Capital Net Worth

000,60,2

000,00,6

`

= 2.3 times.

(iii) Sales to working capital or working capital turnover ratio:

Sales

Working Capital

000,60,1

000,00,6

`

= 3.75 times.

(vii) Operating Ratio

Operating Ratio =

100

Sales

Expenses Operating Sold Goods of Cost

×

+

000,00,6

000,56,1000,60,3

`

``

+

× 100 = 86%.

(viii) Profit Ratios

(i) Gross Profit Ratio =

%40100

000,00,6

000,40,2

100

Sales Net

Profit Gross

=×=×

`

(ii) Net Profit Ratio =

%14100

000,00,6

000,84

100

Sales Net

Profit Operating Net

=×=×

`

It should be noted that fixed interest charges are not considered as a charge against net operating profits.

Some writers calculate this ratio with net income (including non-operating items). In both cases income-tax is

ignored.

Illustration 5

You are given the following figures:

Current ratio 2.5

Liquidity ratio 1.5

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

501

Net working capital `3,00,000

Fixed assets turnover ratio (on cost of sales) 2 times

Average debt collection period 2 months

Stock turnover ratio (cost of sales/closing stock) 6 times

Gross profit ratio 20%

Fixed assets/shareholders net worth 0.80

Reserve and surplus/capital 0.50

Draw up the balance sheet of the company XYZ Ltd.

Solution:

Balance Sheet as on.............

` `

Share capital 5,00,000 Fixed assets 6,00,000

Reserves and surplus 2,50,000 Stock 2,00,000

Long-term borrowings (balancing figure) 1,50,000 Debtors 2,50,000

Current liabilities 2,00,000 Bank 50,000

11,00,000 11,00,000

Workings

If current liabilities = 1

Current assets = 2.5

It means the difference or working capital = 1.5

Working capital or 1.5 = `3,00,000

∴ Current assets = `5,00,000

Current liabilities = `2,00,000

Liquidity ratio = 1.5

And current liabilities = `2,00,000

Liquid assets (bank and debtors) (2,00,000 x 1.5) = `3,00,000

Stock (5,00,000 - 3,00,000, i.e.

current assets - liquid assets) = `2,00,000

Cost of sales (as stock turnover ratio is 6) = `12,00,000

Sales as G.P. ratio is 20%,













×+

0000012 ,,

80

20

12,00,000

= `15,00,000

Fixed assets,

2

000,00,12`

as fixed assets turnover is 6 = `6,00,000

Debtors,

2

000,00,15`

Debt collection period

being 2 months = `2,50,000

EP-CMA

502

Shareholders’ net worth,

80.0

1000,00,6

×

`

= `7,50,000

Out of shareholders’ net worth, reserves and surplus = `2,50,000

Share capital = `5,00,000

Illustration 6

From the following information prepare balance sheet:

` `

Current ratio 2.5 Working capital 60,000

Liquidity ratio 1.5 Reserves and surplus 40,000

Proprietary ratio (fixed assets/proprietory fund) 0.75 Bank overdraft 10,000

There is no long-term loan or fictitious asset.

Solution:

Working Notes:

(1) Current Ratio =

Current As

sets

Current Li

abilities

=

2 5.

Current Asset = 2.5 (Current liabilities)

Working Capital = Current assets – Current liabilities

`60,000 = 2.5 (Current liabilities) – Current liabilities

`60,000 = 1.5 (Current liabilities)

Current liabilities = `40,000

Therefore, Current assets = `1,00,000

(2) Proprietary funds + Current liabilities = Current assets + Fixed assets

Fixed Asse

ts

Proprietary Funds

= 0.75 (Given)

Fixed assets = 0.75 (Proprietary funds)

Substituting in the equation above

Proprietory funds + `40,000 = `1,00,000 + 0.75 (Proprietary funds)

0.25 Proprietary funds = `60,000

Proprietary funds = `2,40,000

Hence,

Fixed assets = 0.75 (2,40,000)

Fixed assets = `1,80,000

Share capital = Proprietary funds − Reserve and surplus

= `2,40,000 − `40,000 = `2,00,000

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

503

(3) Liquid ratio =

51.

sLiabilitieCurrent

AssetsLiquid

=

Liquid assets = `60,000 i.e. 1.5 (Current liabilities)

Therefore, stock = `1,00,000 − `60,000 = `40,000

(i.e. Stock = Current assets − Liquid assets)

Balance Sheet as at.............

Liabilities ` Assets `

Capital 2,00,000 Fixed assets 1,80,000

Reserves and surplus 40,000 Stock 40,000

Bank overdraft 10,000 Other current assets 60,000

Other current liabilities 30,000 _______

2,80,000 2,80,000

Note: *Alternatively liquid ratio can be interpreted as:

Liquid ratio =

(

)

( )

overdraftBanksliabilitieCurrent

Stocks ssetsaCurrent

−

Then the value of stock and other current assets will be changed accordingly.

Illustration 7

From the final accounts of Prudent Ltd. given below, calculate the following:

(i) gross profit ratio; (ii) current ratio;

(iii) liquid ratio; and (iv) return on investment ratio.

Trading and Profit & Loss Account

for the year ended 31st March, 2014

` `

To Material consumed: By Sales 8,50,000

Opening stock 90,500 By Profit 6,000

Purchases 5,45,250 By Interest on investment 3,000

6,35,750

Less: Closing stock 1,40,000 4,95,750

To Carriage inwards 14,250

To Office expenses 1,50,000

To Sales expenses 30,000

To Financial expenses 15,000

To Loss on sales of fixed assets 4,000

To Net profit 1,50,000 _______

8,59,000 8,59,000

EP-CMA

504

Balance Sheet as on 31st March, 2014

Liabilities

`

Assets

`

Share capital: Fixed assets:

20,000 equity shares of Buildings 1,50,000

`10 each, fully paid 2,00,000 Plant 80,000 2,30,000

General reserve 90,000

Profit & Loss Account 60,000 Current assets:

Bank overdraft 30,000 Stock-in-trade 1,40,000

Sundry creditors Debtors 70,000

For expenses 20,000 Bills receivable 10,000

For others 80,000 1,00,000 Bank balance 30,000 2,50,000

4,80,000 4,80,000

Solution:

(i) Gross Profit Ratio =

100

×

Sales

ofitPrGross

Gross Profit = Sales − Material consumed − Carriage inwards

= `8,50,000 − `4,95,750 − `14,250

= `3,40,000

Sales = `8,50,000

Gross Profit Ratio =

%40100

000,50,8

000,40,3

=×

`

(ii) Current Ratio =

sLiabilitieCurrent

AssetsCurrent

Current Assets = Stock + Debtors + Bills Receivable + Bank Balance

= `(1,40,000 + 70,000 + 10,000 + 30,000)

= `2,50,000

Current Liabilities = Sundry Creditors + Bank Overdraft

= `(1,00,000 + 30,000)

= `1,30,000

Current Ratio =

1:92.1

000,30,1

000,50,2

=

`

(iii) Liquid Ratio =

sLiabilitieCurrent

AssetsLiquid

Liquid Assets = Debtors + Bills Receivable + Bank Balance

= `(70,000 + 10,000 + 30,000)

= `1,10,000

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

505

Current Liabilities = Sundry Creditors + Bank Overdraft

= `(1,00,000 + 30,000)

= `1,30,000

Liquid Ratio =

000,30,1

000,10,1

`

= 0.84 : 1

N.B. Bank overdraft is treated as current liability.

(iv) Return on Investment

Ratio =

EmployedCapital

Profit Operating 100

×

Operating Profit = Net Profit + Non-operating expense/loss − Non-operating income

= Net Profit + Loss on sale of fixed assets + Financial expenses − (Profit + Interest on investment)

= 150,000 + 4,000 + 15,000 − 9,000 = `160,000

Capital Employed = Share Capital + General Reserve + Profit & Loss Account

= (2,00,000 + 90,000 + 60,000) = `3,50,000

=

%71.45100

000,50,3

000,60,1

=×

`

Note: Its assumed that ‘profit’ `6,000 as an item of non-operating income and financial expenses’ as an item

of non-operating expense. Since details are not given, these two items are excluded while calculating

operating profit.

Illustration 8

Syntex Limited’s financial statements contain the following information:

31.3.2013 31.3.2014

Cash 2,00,000 1,60,000

Sundry debtors 3,20,000 4,00,000

Temporary investments 2,00,000 3,20,000

Stock 18,40,000 21,60,000

Prepaid expenses 28,000 12,000

Total current assets 25,88,000 30,52,000

Total assets 56,00,000 64,00,000

Current liabilities 6,40,000 8,00,000

10% debentures 16,00,000 16,00,000

Equity share capital 20,00,000 20,00,000

Retained earnings 4,68,000 8,12,000

Statement of Profit for the year ended 31st March, 2014

`

Sales 40,00,000

Less: Cost of goods sold − 28,00,000

EP-CMA

506

Less: Interest − 1,60,000

Net profit 10,40,000

Less: Taxes @ 50% − 5,20,000

Profit after taxes 5,20,000

Dividends declared on equity shares 2,20,000

From the above, appraise the financial position of the company from the points of view of: (i) liquidity, (ii)

solvency, (iii) profitability, and (iv) activity.

Solution:

2012-2013 2013-14

(i) Liquidity ratios:

(a) Current ratio:

81.3

000,00,8

000,52,30

04.4

000,40,6

000,88,25

sLiabilitie Current

AssetsCurrent

===

`

(b) Acid test ratio:

10.1

000,00,8

000,80,8

13.1

000,40,6

000,20,7

sLiabilitie Current

AssetsQuick

===

`

(ii) Solvency ratios:

(a) Debt equity ratio:

(i)

85.0

000,12,28

000,00,24

91.0

000,68,24

000,40,22

fundsEquity

debts outsiders' Total

===

`

(ii)

57.0

000,12,28

000,00,16

65.0

000,68,24

000,00,16

fundsEquity

debts term-Long

===

`

(b) Interest coverage ratio:

times5.7

000,60,1

000,00,12

charges Interest

EBIT

==

`

(iii) Profitability ratios:

(a) Gross profit ratio =

Sales

100 Profit Gross

×

=

×

000,00,40

100000,00,12

`

30%

(b) Net profit ratio =

Sales

100 Profit Net

×

=

×

000,00,40

100000,20,5

`

13%

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

507

(c) Return on total assets =

Sales

100 Profit Net

×

=

×

000,00,64

100000,20,5

`

8.13%

(d) Return on capital employed

=

×

Net profit

before in

terest and

taxes

100

Total capital employed

Capital Employed:

`

Equity Capital 20,00,000

Retained Earnings 8,12,000

10% Debentures 16,00,000

44,12,000

=

%2.27

000,12,44

100000,00,12

=

×

`

(e) Return on equity funds

=

Net profit

after tax

es

100

Equity funds

×

=

%5.18

000,12,28

100000,20,5

=

×

`

(iv) Activity ratios:

(a) Debtors turnover ratio

=

Credit sal

es

Average accounts receivable

=

%13

000,60,3

000,00,40

=

`

= 11.11 times

Note: In the absence of any information, all sales have been treated as credit sales.

(b) Stock turnover ratio

=

Cost of sa

les

ockAverage St

=

000,00,20

000,00,28

`

= 1.4 times

(c) Total asset-turnover ratio

=

Cost of go

ods sold

*

Total asse

ts

=

000,00,64

000,00,28

`

= 0.4375 times

(*The sales figure can also be used).

EP-CMA

508

The company’s position is quite sound from the point of view of liquidity, solvency and profitability. However,

its activity ratios particularly in terms of the utilisation of total assets and holding of stock do not seem to be

adequate.

Illustration 9

The balance sheet of Major Ltd. as on 31st March, 2013 is as under:

Liabilities ` Assets `

Share capital: Fixed assets:

2,000 equity shares of At cost 5,00,000

`100 each fully paid 2,00,000 Less: Depreciation 1,60,000 3,40,000

8% preference shares 1,00,000

General reserve 60,000 Current assets:

12% debentures 60,000 Stock 60,000

Current liabilities: Debtors 80,000

Sundry creditors 80,000 Bank 20,000

5,00,000 5,00,000

The company wishes to forecast balance sheet as on 31st March, 2014. The following additional particulars

are available:

(i) Fixed assets costing `1,00,000 have been installed on 1st April, 2013 but the payment will be made

on 31st March, 2014.

(ii) The fixed assets turnover ratio on the basis of gross value of fixed assets would be 1.5.

(iii) The stock turnover ratio would be 14.4 (calculated on the basis of average stock).

(iv) The break up of cost and profit would be as follows:

Material 40%

Labour 25%

Manufacturing expenses 10%

Office and selling expenses 10%

Depreciation 5%

Profit 10%

100%

The profit is subject to interest and taxation at 50%.

(v) Debtors would be 1/9 of sales.

(vi) Creditors would be 1/5 of material consumed.

(vii) In March 2014 a dividend @ 10% on equity capital would be paid.

(viii) 12% debentures for `25,000 have been issued on 1st April, 2013.

Prepare the forecast balance sheet as on 31st March, 2014 and show the following resultant ratios:

(a) Current ratio;

(b) Fixed assets/net worth ratio; and

(c) Debt equity ratio.

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

509

Solution:

Forecast Balance Sheet of Major Ltd. as on 31.3.2014

Liabilities

`

Assets

`

Share Capital: Fixed Assets:

2,000 Equity shares of`100 each 2,00,000 Cost 6,00,000

7-1/2% preference shares 1,00,000 Less: Depreciation 2,05,000 3,95,000

Reserves and Surplus: Current Assets:

General Reserve 60,000 Stock 40,000

Profit & Loss A/c 7,700 Debtors 1,00,000

Secured Loans: Cash at bank 29,600

12% Debentures 85,000

Current Liabilities and Provisions:

Sundry creditors 72,000

Provision for taxation 39,900 _______

5,64,600 5,64,600

Ratios:

(a) Current Ratio =

52.1

900,11,1

300,70,1

sLiabilitieCurrent

AssetsCurrent

==

`

(b) Fixed Assets/Net Worth Ratio =

07.1

400,68,3

000,95,3

WorthNet

AssetsFixed

==

`

(c) Debt/Equity Ratio =

23.0

400,68,3

000,85

Equity

Debts

==

`

(OR) =

19.0

400,53,4

000,85

EquityDebt

Debt

==

+

`

Working Notes:

(1) Fixed Assets as on 31.3.2014

` `

Balance as on 31.3.2013 5,00,000

Additions during the year 1,00,000 6,00,000

(2) Sales = Fixed assets x Fixed assets turnover ratio

Sales = `6,00,000 x 1.5 (turnover stands for sales) 9,00,000

(3) Cost of goods sold:

Material 40% 3,60,000

Labour 25% 2,25,000

Manufacturing expenses 10% 90,000

Depreciation 5% 45,000 7,20,000

EP-CMA

510

(4) Total Depreciation

Opening `1,60,000 + `45,000 = 2,05,000

(for the year)

(5) Average Stock =

Cost of go

ods sold

Stock turn

over ratio

=

4.14

000,20,7`

= `50,000

(6) Stock as on 31.3.2014 = (2 x Average stock) − Opening stock

= (2 x 50,000) − 60,000 = `40,000

(7) Debtors on 31.3.2014 = 1/9th of sales =

9

000,00,9`

= `1,00,000

(8) Creditors on 31.3.2014 = 1/5th of material consumed

=

5

000,60,3`

= `72,000

(9) Cash and Bank Balance

Cash and Bank Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Opening Balance 20,000 By Debtors (increase) 20,000

“ Debentures 25,000 ” Creditors (decrease) 8,000

“ Profit - 15% on sale ” Interest-debentures 10,200

before depreciation “ Fixed assets 1,00,000

(Depreciation 45,000 “ Preference-dividend 8,000

Profit 90,000) 1,35,000 “ Equity-dividend 20,000

“ Stock (decrease) 20,000 “ Tax on distributed profit (@15%) 4,200

_______ “ Closing balance (balancing figure) 29,600

2,00,000 2,00,000

(10) Provision for Taxation:

` `

Profit - 10% of Sales 90,000

Less: Debenture interest 10,200

79,800

Provision @ 50% 39,900

(11) Profit and Loss A/c:

Profit - 10% of Sales 90,000

Less: Debenture interest 10,200

Provision for tax 39,900

10% dividend on equity shares 20,000

8% Dividend on preference shares 8,000

Tax on distributed profit @15% 4,200 82,300

Net profit to Balance Sheet 7,700

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

511

Note:

(i) Stock turnover ratio has been calculated with reference to cost of goods sold.

(ii) Debenture interest has been assumed to be paid.

(iii) Tax on distributed profit has been assumed to be paid @ 15% on dividend paid.

Illustration 10

From the following information, prepare the projected trading and Profit & Loss Account for the next financial

year ending 31st March, 2014 and the projected balance sheet as on that date:

Gross profit ratio 25%

Net profit to equity capital 10%

Stock turnover ratio 5 times

Average debt collection period 2 months

Creditors velocity 3 months

Current ratio 2

Proprietary ratio (Fixed assets to capital employed) 80%

Capital gearing ratio (Preference shares and debentures

to total long-term funds) 30%

General reserve and profit and loss to equity shareholders’ fund 20%

Preference share capital to debentures 2

Cost of sales consists of 40% for materials and balance for wages and overheads. Gross profit is `6,00,000.

Solution:

Projected Trading and Profit & Loss Account for the year ending March 31, 2014

Dr. Cr.

Particulars ` Particulars `

To Material used 7,20,000

By Sales 24,00,000

To Wages and overheads 10,80,000

To Gross profit c/d 6,00,000

________

24,00,000

To Expenses (balancing figure) 4,93,600

By Gross profit b/d 6,00,000

To Net profit 1,06,400

________

6,00,000

Projected Balance Sheet as on March 31, 2014

Liabilities ` Assets `

Share Capital :

Fixed Assets 15,20,000

Equity Share Capital 10,64,000

Current Assets :

Preference Share Capital 3,80,000

Stock 3,60,000

Reserves and Surplus :

Debtors 4,00,000

General Reserve 1,59,600

Profit & Loss a/c 1,06,400

Secured Loans :

Debentures 1,90,000

Current Liabilities :

Trade Creditors 1,80,000

Bank Overdraft 2,00,000

________

22,80,000

EP-CMA

512

Working Notes :

`

(i) Gross Profit 6,00,000

Gross Profit being 25% of sales

Sales = 6,00,000 x 100/25 = `24,00,000

(ii) Cost of Sales = Sales − Gross profit

= 24,00,000 – 6,00,000 = `18,00,000

(iii) Material used = 40% of Cost of sales

= 40/100 x 18,00,000 = `7,20,000

(iv) Wages and overheads = 18,00,000 – 7,20,000 = `10,80,000

(v) Stock = Cost of sales / Stock turnover ratio = 18,00,000 / 5 = `3,60,000

(vi) Debtors = Sales for 2 months = 24,00,000 x 2/12 = `4,00,000

(vii) As current ratio is 2, Current liabilities are half of current assets

Hence, current liabilities = ½ x (3,60,000 + 4,00,000) = `3,80,000

(viii) Trade Creditors = 3 months of material consumed

= 7,20,000 x 3/12 = `1,80,000

(ix) Bank overdraft = `3,80,000 – 1,80,000 = `2,00,000

(x) Fixed assets to capital employed = 80%

Hence, working capital to capital employed = 20%

Working Capital = Current assets – Current liabilities

= (3,60,000 + 4,00,000) – 3,80,000 = 3,80,000

Fixed assets = 3,80,000 x 80/20 = `15,20,000

(xi) Total long term funds = Fixed Assets + Working Capital

= 15,20,000 + 3,80,000 = `19,00,000

(xii) Capital gearing ratio being 30% (Preference share capital plus debentures to Total Long Term Funds)

= 30% of 19,00,000 = `5,70,000

Preference share capital = 5,70,000 x 2/3 = `3,80,000

(xiii) Debentures = 5,70,000 x 1/3 = `1,90,000

(xiv) Equity Shareholders’ Fund = 19,00,000 – 5,70,000 = `13,30,000

General reserve and Profit & Loss Account

= 20% of equity shareholders’ fund = 20% of 13,30,000 = `2,66,000

Equity share capital = 13,30,000 – 2,66,000 = `10,64,000

(xv) Net profit = 10% of Equity share capital = `1,06,400

(xvi) General Reserve = `2,66,000 – 1,06,400 = `1,59,600

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

513

Illustration 11:

From the following information on 31st March, 2014 prepare balance sheet of Zebra Ltd.

(i) Current Ratio 2.5

(ii) Liquid Ratio 1.5

(iii) Proprietory Ratio 0.75

(iv) Working Capital `60,000

(v) Reserves and surplus `40,000

(vi) Bank overdraft `10,000

There are no long term loan or fixed assets.

Solution:

Zebra Ltd.

Balance Sheet as at 31

st

March, 2014

Liabilities ` Assets `

Capital 2,00,000 Fixed assets 1,80,000

Reserves and surplus 40,000 Stock 40,000

Bank overdraft 10,000 Other current assets 60,000

Other current liabilities 30,000 _______

2,80,000 2,80,000

Working Notes:

(1) Current Ratio =

Current As

sets

Current Li

abilities

=

2 5.

Current Asset = 2.5 (Current liabilities)

Working Capital = Current assets – Current liabilities

`60,000 = 2.5 (Current liabilities) – Current liabilities

`60,000 = 1.5 (Current liabilities)

Current liabilities = `40,000

Therefore, Current assets = `1,00,000

Other current Liabilities = `40,000 – Bank overdraft = `30,000

(2) Proprietary funds + Current liabilities = Current assets + Fixed assets

Fixed Asse

ts

Proprietary Funds

= 0.75 (Given)

Fixed assets = 0.75 (Proprietary funds)

Substituting in the equation above

Proprietory funds + `40,000 = `1,00,000 + 0.75 (Proprietary funds)

0.25 Proprietary funds = `60,000

EP-CMA

514

Proprietary funds = `2, 40,000

Hence,

Fixed assets = 0.75 (2, 40,000)

Fixed assets = `1, 80,000

Share capital = Proprietary funds − Reserve and surplus

= `2, 40,000 − `40,000 = `2, 00,000

(3) Liquid ratio =

51.

sLiabilitieCurrent

AssetsLiquid

=

Liquid assets = `60,000 i.e. 1.5 (Current liabilities)

Therefore, stock = `1,00,000 − `60,000 = `40,000

(i.e. Stock = Current assets − Liquid assets)

Note: Alternatively liquid ratio can be interpreted as:

Liquid ratio =

(

)

( )

overdraftBanksliabilitieCurrent

Stocks ssetsaCurrent

−

Then the value of stock and other current assets will be changed accordingly.

5. CASH FLOW STATEMENT

When it is desired to explain to management the sources of cash and its uses during a particular period of

time, a statement known as cash flow statement is prepared. A statement of cash flows reports the inflows

(receipts) and outflows (payments) of cash and its equivalents of an organisation during a particular period. It

provides important information that compliments Statement of Profit & Loss and balance sheet. A statement

of cash flow reports cash receipts and payments classified according to the entities’ major activities -

operating, investing and financing during the period. This statement reports a net cash inflow or net cash

outflow for each activity and for the overall business. It also reports from where cash has come and how it

has been spent. It explains the causes for the changes in the cash balance. In substance, the cash flow

statement summarises a myriad of specific cash transactions into a few categories for a business entity. The

statement of cash flows reports the cash receipts, cash payments, and net changes in cash resulting from

operating, investing and financing activities of an enterprise during a period in a format that reconciles the

beginning and ending cash balances.

In view of the significant contribution of the statement of cash flows, the Institute of Chartered Accountants of

India has issued in March, 1997 Accounting Standard-3 (Revised) (AS-3 Revised) ‘Cash Flow Statements’ in

suppression of Accounting Standard-3 “Changes in Financial Position” issued in June 1981. It is in tune with

the trends in other countries where cash flow statement has replaced the “Statement of Changes in Financial

Position”. As such cash flow statement should be prepared in line with the stipulations given in AS-3

(Revised). According to the revised Accounting Standard-3, an organisation should prepare a cash flow

statement and should present it for each period.

Meaning of certain terms used in this context:

Cash: Cash comprises cash in hand and demand deposits with banks. Demand deposits mean those

deposits which are repayable by bank on demand by the depositor.

Cash equivalents: Cash equivalents are short term, highly liquid investments that are readily convertible

into known amounts of cash and which are subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value. Cash

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

515

equivalents are held for the purpose of meeting short term cash commitments rather than for investments or

other purposes. Examples of cash equivalents are treasury bills, commercial paper etc. Investments in

shares are excluded from cash equivalents unless they are in substance cash equivalents, for example

preference shares of a company acquired shortly before their specified redemption date (provided there is

only an insignificant risk of failure of the company to repay the amount at maturity).

Cash flows: Cash flows are inflows and outflows of cash and cash equivalents. It means the movement of

cash into the organisation and movement of cash out of the organisation. The difference between the cash

inflows and outflows is known as net cash flow which can be either net cash inflow or net cash outflow. Cash

flows exclude movements between items that constitute cash or cash equivalents because these

components are part of the cash management of an enterprise rather than part of its operating, investing and

financing activities. Cash management includes the investment of excess cash in cash equivalents.

CLASSIFICATION OF CASH FLOWS STATEMENT

The cash flow statement during a period is classified into three main categories of cash inflows and cash

outflows i.e. operating, investing and financing activities.

(i) Cash Flows from Operating Activities

Operating activities are the principal revenue-producing activities of the enterprise and other activities that

are not investing and financing activities. Operating activities include cash effects of those transactions and

events that enter into the determination of net profit or loss.

A business’s normal operations result in both cash receipts and cash payments. Cash receipts result from

selling goods and providing services. The cost of goods sold and other operative expenses result in cash

disbursements. The revenues and expenses reported in the income statement, however, do not coincide

with the cash receipts and payments as we prepare the income statement on an accrual basis. The receipts

and payments of cash for these revenues and expenses may occur in either an earlier or later period than

the period we report the revenues and expenses.

Following are examples of cash flows from operating activities:

(a) cash receipts from the sale of goods and the rendering of services;

(b) cash receipts from royalties, fees, commissions, and other revenues;

(c) cash payments to suppliers for goods and services;

(d) cash payments to and on behalf of employees;

(e) cash receipts and payments of an insurance enterprise for premiums and claims, annuities and

other policy benefits;

(f) cash payments or refunds of income taxes unless they can be specifically identified with financing

and investing activities; and

(g) cash receipts and payments relating to future contracts, forward contracts, option contracts, and

swap contracts when the contracts are held for dealing or trading purposes.

(ii) Cash Flows from Investing Activities

Investing activities are the acquisition and disposal of long term assets and other investments not included in

cash equivalents. In other words, investing activities include transactions and events that involve the

purchase and sale of long-term productive assets (e.g. land, building, plant and machinery etc.) not held for

EP-CMA

516

resale and other investments. The following are examples of cash flows arising from investing activities:

(a) cash payments to acquire fixed assets (including intangibles). These payments include those

relating to capitalised research and development costs and self-constructed fixed assets;

(b) cash receipts from disposal of fixed assets (including intangibles);

(c) cash payments to acquire shares, warrants, or debt instruments of other enterprises and interests in

joint ventures (other than payments for those instruments considered to be cash equivalents and

those held for dealing or trading purposes);

(d) cash receipts from disposal of shares, warrants, or debt instruments of other enterprises and

interests in joint ventures (other than receipts from those instruments considered to be cash

equivalents and those held for dealing or trading purposes);

(e) cash advances and loans made to third parties (other than advances and loans made by a financial

enterprise);

(f) cash receipts from the repayment of advances and loans made to third parties (other than advances

and loans of a financial enterprise);

(g) cash receipts and payments relating to future contracts, forward contracts, option contracts, and

swap contracts except when the contracts are held for dealing or trading purposes, or the

transactions are classified as financing activities.

(iii) Cash Flows from Financing Activities

Financing activities are activities that result in changes in the size and composition of the owners’ capital

(including preference share capital in the case of a company) and borrowings of the enterprise. Following are

the examples of cash flows arising from financing activities:

(a) cash proceeds from issuing shares or other similar instruments;

(b) cash proceeds from issuing debentures, loans notes, bonds and other short term borrowing.

(c) cash repayments of amounts borrowed i.e. redemption of debentures, bonds etc.

(d) cash payments to redeem preference shares.

(e) payment of dividend.

SPECIAL ITEMS

In addition to the general classification of three types of cash flows, Accounting Standard-3 (Revised)

provides for the treatment of the cash flows of certain special items as under:

(a) Foreign Currency Cash Flows

Cash flows arising from transactions in a foreign currency should be recorded in an enterprise’s reporting

currency by applying to the foreign currency amount the exchange rate between the reporting currency and

foreign currency at the date of cash flow. A rate that approximates actual rate may be used if the result is

substantially the same as would arise if the rates at the date of cash flows were used. Unrealised gains and

losses arising from changes in foreign exchange rates are not cash flows. However, the effect of exchange

rate changes on cash and cash equivalents held or due in foreign currency is reported in the cash flow

statement in order to reconcile cash and cash equivalents at the beginning and the end of the period. This

amount is presented separately from cash flows from operating, investing and financing activities and

includes the differences, if any, had those cash flows been reported at the end of period exchange rates.

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

517

(b) Extraordinary Items

The cash flows associated with extra-ordinary items such as bad debts recovered, claims from insurance

companies, winning of a law suit or lottery etc. are disclosed separately as arising from operating, investing

or financing activities as the case may be, in the cash flow statement.

(c) Interest and Dividends

According to Accounting Standard-3 (Revised), the treatment of interest and dividends, received and paid,

depends upon the nature of the enterprise, that is, financial enterprises and other enterprises.

(i) In the case of financial enterprises: Cash flows arising from interest paid and interest and dividends

received, should be classified as cash flows from operating activities.

(ii) In the case of other enterprises:

— cash flows arising from interest paid should be classified as cash flows from financing activities.

— cash flows arising from interest and dividends received should be classified as cash flows from

investing activities;

— dividends paid should be classified as cash flows from financing activities.

In all cases, cash flows from interest and dividends received and paid should be disclosed separately. Also

the total amount of interest paid during the period is disclosed in the cash flow statement whether it has been

recognised as an expense in the Statement of Profit & Loss or capitalised in accordance with AS-10,

Accounting for Fixed Assets.

(d) Taxes on Income

Cash flows arising from taxes on income should be separately disclosed and should be classified as cash

flows from operating activities unless they can be specifically identified with financing and investing activities.

Taxes on income arise on transactions that give rise to cash flows that are classified as operating, investing

or financing activities in a cash flow statement. While tax expense may be readily identifiable with investing

or financing activities, the related tax cash flows are often impracticable to identify and may arise in a

different period from the cash flows of the underlying transactions. Therefore taxes paid are usually treated

as cash flows from operating activities. However, in case it is possible to identify the tax cash flow with an

individual transaction that gives rise to cash flows that are classified as investing or financing activities, it is

appropriate to classify the tax cash flow as an investing or financing activity.

(e) Acquisition and Disposals of Subsidiaries and other Business Units

The aggregate cash flows arising from acquisitions and from disposals of subsidiaries or other business units

should be presented separately and classified as investing activities.

(f) Non-cash Transactions

Investing and financing transactions that do not require the use of cash or cash equivalents should be

excluded from a cash flow statement. Such transactions should be disclosed elsewhere in the financial

statements in a way that provides all the relevant information about these investing and financing activities.

The exclusion of non-cash transactions from the cash flow statement is consistent with the objective of a

cash flow statement as these do not involve cash flows in the current period. Following are examples of non-

cash transactions:

(i) the acquisition of assets by assuming directly related liabilities.

EP-CMA

518

(ii) the acquisition of an enterprise by means of issue of shares.

(iii) conversion of debt into equity.

PREPARATION OF A CASH FLOW STATEMENT

The following basic informations are required for the preparation of a cash flow statement:

(i) Comparative Balance Sheets: Balance sheets at the beginning and at the end of the accounting

period indicate the amount of changes that have taken place in assets, liabilities and capital.

(ii) Statement of Profit & Loss: The Statement of Profit & Loss of the current period enables to

determine the amount of cash provided by or used in operations during the accounting period after

making adjustments for non-cash, current assets and current liabilities.

(iii) Additional data: In additions to the above statements additional data are collected to determine

how cash has been provided or used e.g. sale or purchase of assets for cash.

The following procedure may be used for the preparation of a cash flow statement:

(i) Calculation of net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents accounts. The difference

between cash and cash equivalents for the period may be computed by comparing these accounts

given in the comparative balance sheets. The results will be cash receipts and payments during the

period responsible for the increase or decrease in cash and cash equivalent items.

(ii) Calculation of the net cash provided (used) by operating activities. It is by the analysis of Statement

of Profit & Loss, comparative balance sheet and selected additional information.

(iii) Calculation of the net cash provided (used) by investing and financing activities. All other changes in

the balance sheet item must be analysed taking into account the additional information and effect

on cash may be grouped under the investing and financing activities.

(iv) Preparation of a cash flow statement. It may be prepared by classifying all cash inflows and

outflows in terms of operating, investing and financing activities. The net cash flow provided by

(used) in each of the three activities may be highlighted.

(v) Ensure that the aggregate of net cash flows from operating, investing and financing activities is

equal to net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents.

(vi) Report any significant investing/financing transactions that did not involve cash or cash equivalents

in a separate schedule to the cash flow statement.

REPORTING OF CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES

Net profit/loss as reported in the Statement of Profit & Loss is different from the net cash flow from operating

activities as the financial statements are generally prepared on accrual basis of accounting under which the

net income will not indicate the net cash provided by or net loss will not indicate the net cash used in

operating activities. In order to calculate the net cash flows in operating activities, it is necessary to replace

revenues and expenses with actual receipts and payments in cash. This is done by eliminating the non-cash

revenues and/non-cash expenses from given earned revenues and incurred expenses. There are two

methods of converting net profit into net cash flows from operating activities:

(i) Direct method, and

(ii) Indirect method.

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

519

1. Direct Method

Under direct method, cash receipts from operating revenues and cash payments for operating expenses are

arranged and presented in the cash flow statement. The difference between cash receipts and cash

payments is the net cash flow from operating activities. It is in effect a cash basis Statement of Profit & Loss.

In this case each cash transaction is analysed separately and the total cash receipts and payments for the

period is determined. The summarised data for revenue and expenses can be obtained from the financial

statements and additional information. We may convert accrual basis of revenue and expenses to equivalent

cash receipts and payments. Make sure that a uniform procedure is adopted for converting accrual base

items to cash base items.

The following are some examples of usual cash receipts and cash payments resulting from operating

activities:

(i) Cash sales of goods and services;

(ii) Cash collected from debtors (customers);

(iii) Cash receipts of interest or dividends;

(iv) Cash receipts of royalties, fees, commission and other revenues;

(v) Cash payments to suppliers (creditors);

(vi) Cash payments for various operating expenses i.e. rent, rates, power etc.

(vii) Cash payments for wages and salaries to employees;

(viii) Cash payments for income tax etc.

Under direct method, information about major classes of gross cash receipts and gross cash payments may

be obtained either:

(a) from the accounting records of the enterprise; or

(b) by adjusting sales, cost of sales and other items in the statement of profit and loss for:

— Changes during the period in inventories and operating receivables and payables;

— Other non-cash items, and

— Other items for which the cash effects are investing or financing cash flows.

Some of the items to be shown in the cash flow statement are illustrated below:

Collections from Customers: If a business has only cash sales, the amount of sales revenue in the income

statement is the amount of cash collected from the customers. However, when the business has credit sales

we have to adjust the amount of sales revenue for changes in debtors and bills receivable. The opening

balance of debtors or bills receivable represents uncollected amount from a previous period and it is

presumed that cash has been collected during the current accounting period. The closing balance of debtors

or bills receivable represents uncollected amount in the current accounting period. Therefore in order to

calculate the cash received from debtors, the opening balance (debtors/bills receivable) should be added to

the amount of credit sales and closing balance should be subtracted therefrom.

EP-CMA

520

Alternatively, Cash Collected from Debtors can also be calculated as given below:

Cash Collected from Debtors = Credit Sales + Decrease in

Accounts Receivable or – Increase in Accounts Receivable.

Payment to Suppliers: The analysis of cash payments to suppliers begins with cost of goods sold from the

Statement of Profit & Loss. The amount of purchases is calculated by adding closing stock and subtracting

opening stock form the cost of goods sold. The cash payment made to suppliers is calculated by making

adjustments for change in sundry creditors/bills payable.

Purchases = Cost of Goods Sold + Closing Stock - Opening Stock

OR

Purchases = Cost of Goods Sold + Increase in Stock or - Decrease in Stock

Cash Paid to Suppliers = Purchases + Opening Balance of Creditors (Bills Payable)

- Closing Balance of Creditors (Bills Payable).

OR

Cash Paid to Suppliers = Purchases + Decrease in Accounts Payable or –

Increase in Accounts Payable.

Payment to Employees:

Cash Paid for Wages and Salaries = Wages and Salaries Expenses + Opening

Balance of Outstanding Wages and Salaries - Closing Balance of Outstanding

Wages and Salaries.

OR

Cash Paid for Wages and Salaries = Wages and Salaries Expenses + Decrease in

Wages and Salaries Payable or - Increase in Wages and Salaries Payable.

Rent Received: The analysis of rent received is similar to cash collected from customers.

Rent Received = Rent Revenue + Opening Balance of Rent Receivable –

Closing Balance of Rent Receivable.

OR

Rent Received = Rent Revenue + Decrease in Rent Receivable or –

Increase in Rent Receivable.

Interest Paid: The analysis of interest paid is similar to the analysis of payments to employees.

Interest Paid = Interest Expenses + Opening Balance of Outstanding Interest –

Closing Balance of Outstanding Interest.

OR

Interest Paid = Interest Expenses + Decrease in Interest Payable, or –

Increase in Interest Payable.

A similar treatment is applied for various other income and expenses to find out the cash inflows or

outflows.

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

521

Insurance: Different procedure is adopted for insurance expense because insurance is usually purchased

(and recorded as an asset) before it becomes an expense. The treatment is as follows:

Cash Paid for Insurance = Insurance Expenses + Closing Balance of Unexpired

Insurance - Opening Balance of Unexpired Insurance.

OR

Cash Paid for Insurance = Insurance Expenses + Increase in Unexpired Insurance

or - Decrease in Unexpired Insurance.

A similar treatment is applied for other prepaid expenses also.

In direct method of calculating cash flow from operations, the following points should be noted:

(i) The necessary adjustments should be made for bad debts, sales returns, purchases returns,

discount allowed, discount received etc. while calculating the amount received from the customers

or paid to suppliers, as the case may be.

(ii) Items like depreciation, amortisation of intangible assets (such as goodwill, patent, trade mark etc.) or

of debenture discount, preliminary expenses, premium on redemption of debentures and preference

shares are ignored from the cash flow statement since the method analyses and includes only cash

transactions and therefore, non-cash items are omitted from a statement of cash flows.

(iii) No adjustment is made for loss or gain on the sale of fixed assets and investments since operating

cash receipts and payments are reported directly on the cash flow statement.

2. Indirect Method

In this method the net profit (loss) is used as the base to calculate net cash provided by or used in operating

activities. Non-cash and non-operating charges in the Statement of Profit & Loss are added back to the net

profit while non-cash and non-operating credits are deducted to calculate operating profit before working

capital changes. It is a partial conversion of accrual basis profit to cash basis profit. Then necessary

adjustments are made for increase/decrease in current assets and current liabilities to obtain net cash from

operating activities.

A summary of adjustments required to convert the net profit to net cash flow from operating

activities through indirect method is as follows:

A. Net profit before tax and extraordinary item

B. Adjustments for non-cash and non-operating items:

Add: Amount written off in respect of depreciation, goodwill, preliminary expenses, underwriting

commission etc.

Add/Less: Other non-operating items

C. Adjustment for gains and losses on sale of fixed assets and investments:

Add: Loss on sale of fixed assets/investments

Less: Profit on sale of fixed assets/investments

D. Adjustments for changes in current assets (except cash and cash equivalents) and current

liabilities (except bank overdraft)

Add: Decrease in accounts of current assets e.g. debtors, bill receivable, stock, prepaid expenses etc.

Less: Increase in accounts of current assets.

Add: Increase in accounts of current liabilities; e.g., creditors, bills payable, outstanding expenses, etc.

Less: Decrease in accounts of current liabilities.

EP-CMA

522

E. Cash generated from operations

Less: Income tax paid.

F. Adjustments for extra-ordinary items if any

G. Net cash from (used in) operating activities

The computation of net cash inflow or cash outflow from operating activities by the indirect method takes a

path that is very different from the computation by the direct method. However, the two methods arrive at the

same amount of net cash flow from operations.

The logic behind the treatment of various items are explained as follows:

Adjustment for Depreciation and other Non-cash and Non-operating items

Depreciation, depletion and amortisation of expenses (amortisation of goodwill, preliminary expenses,

premium on redemption of debentures, underwriting commission, etc.) do not affect cash and thus should be

added back to the net profit in the cash flow statement. When depreciation is provided it has no effect on

cash. However, depreciation is deducted from revenues for the computation of income. Therefore, in going

from net profit to cash flow from operations, we add depreciation back to net profit. Likewise, all expenses

with no cash effects are added back to net profit in the cash flow statement. In the same manner, revenues

that do not provide cash are substracted from net profit.

Adjustment for Gains and Losses on Sale of Fixed Assets/Investments

When fixed assets or investments are sold, there may be either profit or loss on sale. Such profit or loss

affects the amount of net profit. For instance, when fixed assets, with a book value of `75,000 was sold for

`90,000 the actual inflow of cash is `90,000 which would be reflected in the cash flow statement including a

profit of `15,000. But this profit on sale of fixed asset has already increased the net profit indicating an inflow

of cash from operating activities. In order to avoid this duplication, this profit of `15,000 must be deducted

from the net profit. Moreover sale of fixed assets is an investing activity and therefore effect of this profit on

sale must be removed from cash flow from operations. Likewise, a loss on sale of fixed assets or investment

also require an adjustment to the net profit in the cash flow from operations. This loss is added back to the

net profit to compute cash flow from operations.

Changes in Current Assets and Liabilities

Most current assets and current liabilities result from operating activities. Sundry debtors and bills receivable

result from sales, inventory generates revenues and prepaid expenses are used in operations. On the

liabilities side sundry creditors and bills payable are ordinarily incurred to buy inventory and outstanding

liabilities relate to salaries, utilities and other expenses. Changes in these current assets and liabilities are

reported as adjustments to net profit on the cash flows statement. The following rules apply:

(a) An increase in current assets other than cash is deducted from net profit to calculate cash flow from

operations: For example, when sundry debtors (net) increase during the year, this means that

revenues on accrual basis are higher than revenues on cash basis since goods sold on credit are

treated as revenues on accrual basis. In other words, the business operations in the period covered

resulted in more revenues but not all these revenues resulted in corresponding increase in cash.

Some of the revenues resulted in an increase in debtors only. In order to convert the net profit to net

cash provided by operating activities the increase in debtors must be deducted from the reported

net profit. However, a decrease in current assets has opposite effect and has to be added back to

net profit to determine cash provided for the period.

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

523

(b) An increase in current liability is added to net profit to arrive at the cash from operation. For example

when, sundry creditors increase during the period covered, it means that expenses on accrual basis

are more than they are on cash basis because expenses are incurred for which no payment has

been made. So this increase must be added to net profit. However, a decrease in a current liability

is subtracted from net profit, since more cash has been paid than the expenses recorded on accrual

basis.

FORMAT OF CASH FLOW STATEMENT

Accounting Standard-3 (Revised) has not provided any specific format for the preparation of cash flow

statements, but a general idea can be had from the illustration appearing thereof. There seems to be

flexibility in the presentation of cash flow statements. However, a widely accepted format under direct

method and indirect method is given below:

Cash Flow Statement (Direct Method)

A. Cash flows from operating activities

Cash receipts from customers

Cash paid to suppliers and employees

Cash generated from operations

Income taxes paid

Cash flow before extraordinary item

Proceeds from earthquake disaster settlement

Net Cash from Operating Activities

B. Cash flows from investing activities

Purchase of fixed assets

Proceeds from sale of equipment

Interest received

Dividend received

Net Cash from Investing Activities

C. Cash flows from financing activities

Proceeds from issuance of share capital

Proceeds from long-term borrowings

Repayments of long-term borrowings

Interest paid

Dividend paid

Net Cash from Financing Activities

Net Increase (Decrease) in Cash and Cash Equivalents (A + B + C)

Cash and Cash Equivalents at Beginning of Period

Cash and Cash Equivalents at End of Period

EP-CMA

524

Cash Flow Statement (Indirect Method)

A. Cash flows from operating activities

Net profit before tax and extraordinary items

Adjustments for:

Depreciation

Foreign exchange

Investments

Gain or loss on sale of fixed assets

Interest/dividend

Operating profit before working capital changes.

Adjustments for:

Trade & other receivables

Inventories

Trade payables

Cash generation from operations

Interest paid

Direct taxes

Cash before extraordinary items

Deferred revenue

Net Cash from Operating Activities.

B. Cash flows from investing activities

Purchase of fixed assets

Sale of fixed assets

Sale of investments

Purchase of investments

Interest received

Dividend received

Loans to subsidiaries

Net Cash from Investing Activities

C. Cash flows from financing activities

Proceeds from issue of share capital

Proceeds from long term borrowings

Repayment to finance/lease liabilities

Dividend paid

Net Cash from Financing Activities

Net Increase (Decrease) in Cash and Cash Equivalents (A + B + C)

Cash and Cash Equivalents at the Beginning of the Period

Cash and Cash Equivalents at the End of the Period

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

525

Alternatively the Cash Flows from Operating Activities (Indirect Method) may be summarised as

below:

Net profit before tax and extra-ordinary items

Adjustments for non-cash and non-operating items

(+) Depreciation

(+) Amortization of intangible assets, preliminary expenses, debenture discount and the like.

(+) or (–) Other non-cash and non-operating items included in net profit

Adjustments for gains and losses on sale of fixed assets and investments

(–) Gains on sale of fixed assets and investments

(+) Loss on sale of fixed assets and investments

Adjustments for changes in current assets and current liabilities

(–) Increases in current assets

(+) Decreases in current assets

(+) Increases in current liabilities

(–) Decreases in current liabilities

(–) Income-tax paid

(–) Extraordinary items

Net Cash Flows from Operating activities

We can summarize the all activities while preparing the cash flow as under:

Investing Activities

Operating Activities Financing Activities

Cash Flow Statement

USEFULNESS OF CASH FLOW STATEMENT

The purpose of cash flow statement is to provide information about the cash flows associated with the

periods of operations and also about the entity’s investing and financing activities during the period. This

information is important to shareholders, part of whose investment return (dividends) is dependent on cash

flows and to lenders, whose interest payment and principal repayment require the use of cash. The welfare

of other constituents of a company including its employees, its suppliers, and the local bodies that may levy

taxes on it, depends to varying degrees on the company’s activity to generate adequate cash flows to fulfil its

EP-CMA

526

financial obligations. The usefulness of cash flow statement can be summarised as follows:

(i) Predict future cash flows: The cash flow statement makes it possible to predict the amounts, timing

and uncertainty of future cash flows on the basis of what has happened in the past. This approach is

better than accrual basis data presented by Statement of Profit & Loss and the balance sheet.

(ii) Determine the ability to pay dividends and other commitments: A cash flow statement indicates

the sources and uses of cash under suitable headings such as operating, investing and financing

activities. Shareholders are interested in receiving dividends on their investments in the shares.

Creditors want to receive their interest and principal amount on time. The statement of cash flows

helps investors and creditors to predict whether the business can make these payments.

(iii) Show the relationship of net income to changes in the business cash: Usually cash and net

income move together. High levels of income tend to lead to increase in cash and vice-versa.

However, a company’s cash balance can decrease when its net income is high, and cash can

increase when income is low. The users want to know the difference between the net profit and net

cash provided by operations. The net profit shows the progress of the business during the year

while cash flow relates more to the liquidity of the business. The users can assess the reliability of

net profit with the help of cash flow statement.

(iv) Efficiency in cash management: Cash flow analysis helps in evaluating financial policies and cash

position. It facilitates the management to plan and co-ordinate the financial operations properly. The

management can estimate how much funds are needed, from which source they will be derived,

how much can be generated internally and how much should be arranged from outside.

(v) Discloses the movement of cash: A comparison of cash flow statement for the previous year with

the budget for that year would indicate to what extent the resources of the enterprise were raised

and applied. A comparison of the original forecast with actual result may highlight trend of

movement that might otherwise remain undetected.

(vi) Discloses success or failure of cash planning: A success or failure of cash planning can be

known by comparing the projected cash flow statement with the actual cash flow statement and

necessary remedial measures can be taken. Moreover it provides a better measure for inter-period

and inter-firm comparison.

(vii) Evaluate management decisions: The statement of cash flows reports the companies’ investing

and financing activities and thus gives the investors and creditors about cash flow information for

evaluating managers’ decisions.

Illustration 12.

From the information as contained in the income statement and the balance sheet of Ashok Ltd., you are

required to prepare a cash flow statement using (i) Direct Method and (ii) Indirect Method.

A. Income Statement and Reconciliation of Earnings for the year ended 31.3.2014

`

Net Sales 25,20,000

Less: Cost of sales 19,80,000

Depreciation 60,000

Salaries and wages 2,40,000

Operating expenses 80,000

Provision for taxation 88,000 24,48,000

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

527

Net operating profit 72,000

Non-recurring income:

Profit on sale of equipment 12,000

84,000

Retained earnings (balance in Profit & Loss Account brought forward) 1,51,800

2,35,800

Dividend declared and paid during the year 72,000

Profit & Loss Account balance as on 31.3.2014 1,63,800

B. Comparative Balance Sheets

As at As at

31.3.2013 31.3.2014

` `

Capital 3,60,000 4,44,000

Surplus in profit and loss A/c 1,51,800 1,63,800

Sundry creditors 2,40,000 2,34,000

Outstanding expenses 24,000 48,000

Income tax payable 12,000 13,200

Accumulated depreciation on building and equipments 1,20,000 1,32,000

9,07,800 10,35,000

Fixed assets

Land 48,000 96,000

Building and equipments 3,60,000 5,76,000

Current assets

Cash 60,000 72,000

Debtors 1,68,000 1,86,000

Stock 2,64,000 96,000

Advances 7,800 9,000

9,07,800 10,35,000

Cost of equipment sold was `72,000.

Solution:

Direct Method

Ashok Limited

Cash Flow Statement for the year ended 31.3.2014

` `

Cash Flows from Operating Activities:

Cash receipts from customers 25,02,000

Cash paid to suppliers and employees 21,15,200

Cash generated from operations 3,86,800

Income tax paid (86,800)

Net Cash from Operating Activities 3,00,000

Cash Flows from Investing Activities:

Purchase of land (48,000)

EP-CMA

528

Purchase of building and equipment (2,88,000)

Sale of equipment 36,000

Net Cash used in Investing Activities (3,00,000)

Cash Flows from Financing Activities:

Issue of share capital 84,000

Dividend paid (72,000)

Net Cash from Financing Activities 12,000

Net Increase in Cash and Cash Equivalents 12,000

Cash and Cash Equivalents at the beginning 60,000

Cash and Cash Equivalents at the end 72,000

Working Notes:

(i) Cash receipts from customers:

`

Sales revenue 25,20,000

Add: Debtors at the beginning 1,68,000

26,88,000

Less: Debtors at the end 1,86,000

25,02,000

(ii) Cash paid to suppliers and employees:

Cost of goods sold 19,80,000

Add: Operating expenses 80,000

Salaries and wages 2,40,000

23,00,000

Add: Creditors at the beginning 2,40,000

Stock at the end 96,000

Advances at the end 9,000

Outstanding expenses at the beginning 24,000 3,69,000

26,69,000

Less: Creditors at the end 2,34,000

Stock at the beginning 2,64,000

Advances at the beginning 7,800

Outstanding expenses at the end 48,000 5,53,800

21,15,200

(iii) Income tax paid

Tax payable at the beginning 12,000

Add: Provision for taxation 88,000

1,00,000

Less: Tax payable at the end 13,200

Tax paid during the year 86,800

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

529

(iv) Accumulated depreciation written off on equipments (sold)

Accumulated depreciation at the beginning 1,20,000

Add: Depreciation for the year 60,000

1,80,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation at the end 1,32,000

48,000

(v) Sale price of equipment

Cost price 72,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation 48,000

24,000

Add: Profit on sale 12,000

36,000

(vi) Purchase of building and equipments

Balance at the beginning 3,60,000

Less: Cost of equipment sold 72,000

Balance 2,88,000

Balance at the end 5,76,000

Purchased during the year 2,88,000

Indirect Method

Ashok Limited

Cash flow statement for the year ended 31.3.2014

` `

Cash Flows from Operating Activities:

Net profit before taxation and extra-ordinary item 1,60,000

Adjustments for:

Depreciation 60,000

Operating profit before working capital changes 2,20,000

Increase in debtors (18,000)

Decrease in stock 1,68,000

Increase in advances (1,200)

Decrease in creditors (6,000)

Increase in outstanding expenses 24,000

Cash generated from operation 3,86,800

Income tax paid (86,800)

Net Cash from Operating Activities 3,00,000

Cash Flows from Investing Activities:

Purchase of land (48,000)

Purchase of building and equipments (2,88,000)

Sale of equipment 36,000

Net Cash Used in Investing Activities (3,00,000)

EP-CMA

530

Cash Flows from Financing Activities:

Issue of share capital 84,000

Dividend paid (72,000)

Net Cash from Financing Activities 12,000

Net Increase in Cash and Cash Equivalents 12,000

Cash and Cash Equivalents at the beginning 60,000

Cash and Cash Equivalents at the end 72,000

Illustration 13

From the following information of XYZ Ltd., for the year ended 31st March, 2013 and 2014, prepare a cash

flow statement.

31.3.2013 31.3.2014

` `

Equity Share of `20 each 3,00,000 4,00,000

Share premium  10,000

Profit and loss appropriation A/c 1,00,000 1,00,000

Profit for the year  2,00,000

6% Debentures 1,50,000 1,00,000

Profit on Redemption of Debentures  2,000

Sundry creditors 1,40,000 1,10,000

Provision for taxation 50,000 1,00,000

Proposed dividend 15,000 20,000

7,55,000 10,42,000

Property 2,00,000 2,50,000

Plant and machinery 4,00,000 4,50,000

Less: Depreciation 1,40,000 2,60,000 1,50,000 3,00,000

Loans to subsidiary Co.  15,000

Share in subsidiary Co. 20,000 20,000

Stock in trade 1,40,000 1,50,000

Debtors 1,00,000 1,50,000

Bank 35,000 1,57,000

7,55,000 10,42,000

Additional information:

During the year plant costing `50,000 was sold for `10,000. Accumulated depreciation on this plant was

`30,000. Loss on sale of plant was charged to Profit & Loss Account. Income-tax paid during the year was

`60,000.

Solution:

XYZ Limited

Cash Flow Statement for the year ended 31.3.2014

Cash Flows from Operating Activities

`

Net profit before tax and extraordinary items 2,00,000

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

531

Adjustments for:

Depreciation 40,000

Provision for taxation 1,10,000

Proposed dividend 20,000

Loss on sale of machinery 10,000

Operating profit before working capital changes 3,80,000

Adjustments for:

Increase in debtors (50,000)

Increase in stock-in-trade (10,000)

Decrease in creditors (30,000)

Cash generated from operations 2,90,000

Tax paid (60,000)

Net Cash from Operating Activities 2,30,000

Cash Flows from Investing Activities

Purchase of property (50,000)

Sale of plant 10,000

Purchase of machinery (1,00,000)

Loans to subsidiaries (15,000)

Net Cash used in Investing activities (1,55,000)

Cash Flows from Financing Activities

Issue of equity share capital at premium 1,10,000

Redemption of debentures (48,000)

Dividends paid (15,000)

Net Cash from Financing Activities 47,000

Net Increase in Cash and Cash Equivalents

(`2,30,000 − `1,55,000 + `47,000) 1,22,000

Cash and Cash Equivalents at the beginning of the year 35,000

Cash and Cash Equivalents at the end of the year 1,57,000

Working Notes:

Property Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Balance b/d 2,00,000 By Balance c/d 2,50,000

To Bank (purchases)

(balancing figure) 50,000 _______

2,50,000 2,50,000

EP-CMA

532

Plant and Machinery Account

` `

To Balance b/d 4,00,000 By Bank (plant sold) 10,000

To Bank (purchases) 1,00,000 By Accumulated depreciation 30,000

(balancing figure) (on plant sold)

By Loss on plant sold 10,000

_______ By Balance c/d 4,50,000

5,00,000 5,00,000

Accumulated Depreciation Account

` `

To Plant and machinery A/c 30,000 By Balance b/d 1,40,000

(on plant sold) By Dep. for the year 40,000

To Balance c/d 1,50,000 (balancing figure) _______

1,80,000 1,80,000

Loans to Subsidiary Account

` `

To Bank (balancing figure) 15,000 By Balance c/d (closing) 15,000

15,000 15,000

Equity Share Capital Account

` `

To Balance c/d 4,00,000 By Balance b/d 3,00,000

_______ By Bank (balancing figure) 1,00,000

4,00,000 4,00,000

Share Premium Account

` `

To Balance c/d 10,000 By Bank (balancing figure) 10,000

10,000 10,000

6% Debentures Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Bank (balancing figure) 48,000 By Balance b/d 1,50,000

To Profit on redemption A/c 2,000

To Balance c/d 1,00,000 _______

1,50,000 1,50,000

Profit on Redemption Account

` `

To Balance c/d 2,000 By 6% Debentures A/c 2,000

2,000 2,000

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

533

Provision for Taxation

` `

To Bank (tax paid) 60,000 By Balance b/d 50,000

To Balance c/d 1,00,000 By Transfer from P & L A/c 1,10,000

1,60,000 1,60,000

Proposed Dividend

` `

To Bank (dividends paid) 15,000 By Balance b/d 15,000

To Balance c/d 20,000 By Transfer from P & L A/c 20,000

35,000 35,000

Illustration 14

From following information of Mahendra Ltd. prepare cash flow statement for the year ended 31.3.2014 by

Indirect Method.

31.3.2013 31.3.2014

` `

Equity share capital 3,00,000 4,00,000

8% Preference shares 1,50,000 1,00,000

Capital reserve — 20,000

General reserve 40,000 50,000

Profit & Loss Account 30,000 48,000

Proposed dividend 42,000 50,000

Sundry creditors 25,000 47,000

Bills payable 20,000 16,000

Liability for expenses 30,000 36,000

Provision for taxation 40,000 50,000

6,77,000 8,17,000

Goodwill 1,00,000 80,000

Land and building 2,00,000 1,70,000

Plant 80,000 2,00,000

Investment 20,000 30,000

Sundry debtors 1,40,000 1,70,000

Stock 77,000 1,09,000

Bills receivable 20,000 30,000

Cash in hand 15,000 10,000

Cash at bank 10,000 8,000

Preliminary expenses 15,000 10,000

6,77,000 8,17,000

EP-CMA

534

Additional informations:

(i) A piece of land has been sold during the year and the profit on sale has been credited to capital

reserve. Depreciation charged on building during the year is `5,000; no additions under this head

during the year.

(ii) A machine was sold for `10,000. The written down value of the machine was `12,000. Depreciation

of `10,000 is charged on plant in 2013-14.

(iii) Investments are trade investments. `3,000 by way of dividend is received including `1,000 from pre-

acquisition profit which has been credited to investment account.

(iv) An interim dividend of `20,000 has been paid in 2013-14.

Solution:

Mahendra Limited

Cash Flow Statement for the year ended 31.3.2014

Cash Flows from Operating Activities:

`

Net profit before tax and extraordinary items 1,08,000

Adjustments for:

Depreciation:

Building 5,000

Plant & Machinery 10,000 15,000

Preliminary expenses 5,000

Loss on sale of plant 2,000

Goodwill written off 20,000

Dividend received (2,000)

Operating profit before working capital changes 1,48,000

Adjustments for:

Increase in debtors (30,000)

Increase in stock (32,000)

Increase in bills receivable (10,000)

Decrease in bills payable (4,000)

Increase in sundry creditors 22,000

Increase in liability for expenses 6,000

Net Cash from Operating Activities 1,00,000

Cash Flows from Investing Activities:

Sale of proceeds of land 45,000

Sale proceeds of machine 10,000

Purchase of plant (1,42,000)

Purchase of investment (11,000)

Dividend received 3,000

Net Cash Used in Investing Activities (95,000)

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

535

Cash Flows from Financing Activities:

Issue of share capital 1,00,000

Redemption of preference shares (50,000)

Interim dividend paid (20,000)

Dividend paid (assumed) (42,000)

Net Cash Used in Financing Activities (12,000)

Net Increase in Cash and Cash Equivalents (7,000)

Cash and Cash Equivalents on 31.3.2013 (Opening balance) 25,000

Cash and Cash Equivalents on 31.3.2014 (Closing balance) 18,000

Working Notes:

(i) Net profit before tax and extra-ordinary items:

Profit & Loss Account as on 31.3.2014 48,000

Less: Profit & Loss Account as on 31.3.2013 30,000

Profit earned during the year after appropriation

and provision for tax 18,000

Add: Transfer to general reserve 10,000

Proposed dividend 50,000

Interim dividend 20,000

Provision for taxation 10,000 90,000

Profit before tax and extraordinary items 1,08,000

(ii) Land and Building Account

` `

To Balance b/d 2,00,000 By Depreciation A/c 5,000

To Capital reserve 20,000 By Bank (purchases)

(balancing figure) 45,000 By Balance c/d 1,70,000

2,20,000 2,20,000

(iii) Plant and Machinery Account

` `

To Balance b/d 80,000 By Bank (sales) 10,000

To Bank (purchases) 1,42,000 By Profit & Loss Account (loss) 2,000

By Depreciation 10,000

_______ By Balance c/d 2,00,000

2,22,000 2,22,000

(iv) Investment Account

` `

To Balance b/d 20,000 By Dividend 1,000

To Bank (purchases) 11,000 By Balance c/d 30,000

31,000 31,000

EP-CMA

536

Illustration 15

The following are the summary of cash transactions extracted from the books of Happy Ltd.:

(` in ’000)

Balance as on 1st April, 2013 140

Receipts from customers 11,132

Issue of shares 1,200

Sale of fixed assets 512

12,984

Payments to suppliers 8,188

Payments for fixed assets 920

Payments for overheads 460

Wages and salaries 276

Taxation 972

Dividends 320

Repayment of bank loans 1,000

12,136

Balance as on 31st March, 2014 848

You are required to prepare a cash flow statement of the company for the period ended 31st March, 2014 in

accordance with the Accounting Standard- 3 (Revised).

Solution:

In the books of Happy Limited

Cash Flow Statement for the period ending 31st March, 2014

(` in ‘000s)

A. Cash Flow from Operating Activities

Receipts from customers 11,132

Payment to suppliers (8,188)

Payment of Wages and Salaries (276)

Payment of Overheads (460)

Payment of Taxes (972)

Net Cash from Operating Activities(A) 1236

B Cash Flow from Investing Activities

Proceeds on sale of fixed assets 512

Acquisition of (payments) fixed assets (920)

Net Cash Used in Investing Activities (B) (408)

C Cash Flow from Financing Activities

Proceeds on issue of shares 1200

Payments of dividends (320)

Repayments of bank loans (1000)

Net Cash Used in Investing Activities (C) (120)

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents (A)+(B)+(C) 708

Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the period 140

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the period 848

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

537

FUND FLOW STATEMENT

Fund flow statement also referred to as statement of “source and application of funds” presents the

movement of funds and helps to understand the changes in the structure of assets, liabilities and equity

capital. Whereas the balance sheet provides only a summary of the assets and liabilities at a

particular point of time. It reveals the financial state of any organisation the assets side of a balance sheet

shows the deployment of resources while the liabilities side indicates its obligations. The statement of profit

and loss shows the operating result of the business during a specified period. Both the statement provide the

essential basic information on the financial activities of the business, but their usefulness is limited for

analysis and planning process. From the management point of view, the usefulness of information provided

by these income statements functions effectively and efficiently. In the true sense they do not disclose the

nature of all transactions. Management, Creditors and Investors etc. want to determine or evaluate the

sources and application of funds employed by the firm for the future course of action. Based on these

backgrounds, it is essential to analyse the movement of assets, liabilities, funds from operations and capital

between the components of two year financial statements. The analysis of financial statements helps to the

management by providing additional information in a meaningful manner. The information required for the

preparation of funds flow statement is drawn from the basic financial statements such as the Balance Sheet

and statement of profit and loss .The most commonly accepted form of fund flow is the one prepared on

working capital basis.

Meaning of Fund

Fund means working capital. If current assets of company is more than current liability of business, it is

called working capital and working capital’s other name is Fund.

Fund = Working capital = Current assets – Current liability

Meaning of Flow of Funds

Flow of funds include both “inflow” and “outflow”. The term “ flow of funds” means “Transfer of economic

values from one assets to another and one liability to another.” Flow of fund takes place whenever there is

change in working capital. This change may be either inflow or outflow of funds.

If fixed assets are converted into current asset or fixed liability is converted into current liabilities, these are

the flow of fund. But if current assets are changed with current assets or current assets are changed into

current liabilities, then, there is no flow of fund because there is no change working capital. Suppose, we get

the money from debtor, this is not flow of fund because, working capital is not changed. Both items of current

assets and when current assets change into current assets, there will not be change in working capital.

Flow of Fund =

Fixed asset changes into current asset or current asset changes into fixed assets

Or

Fixed liability changes into current liability or current liability changes into fixed liability.

Or

Any transaction which attract one current account and one non-current account then it is only flow of fund.

EP-CMA

538

For example:

Machinery a/c Dr. (Non-current)

To share capital a/c (Non-current)

(Machinery purchase in consideration of share)

In the above transaction both accounts are non current accounts which do not affect working capital and

same will remain unaffected i.e. there will be no flow of fund.

Machinery a/c Dr. (Non-current)

To Bank a/c (Current)

(Machinery purchase in cash)

In the above transaction one account is non-current and other is current which effect working capital i.e.

there will be flow of fund.

There are a few examples of inflow and outflow of funds:

Inflow of Funds

Issue of Equity Share Capital

Issue of Preference Share Capital

Issue of Debentures/Long term Loans

Premium on issue of shares/debentures

Sale of Investments

Sale of Fixed Assets

Outflow of Funds

Redemption of Preference Share Capital

Redemption of Debentures

Repayment of Long term Loans

Premium on redemption of preference shares/debentures

Purchase of Investments/Fixed Assets

Dividend Paid

Taxes Paid

Drawings by proprietor/partner

MEANING AND DEFINITION OF FUNDS FLOW STATEMENT

“Funds flow statement is a method by which we study changes in the financial position of a business

enterprise between beginning and ending financial statement dates. It is a statement showing sources and

uses of funds fora period of time.”

Definition

“A statement of sources and application of funds is a technical device designed to analyses the

changes in the financial condition of a business enterprise between two dates.” —By Foulke

“The funds flow statement describes the sources from which additional funds were derived and the

use to which these sources were put”. —By Anthony

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

539

Features of funds flow statement are as under:

— Shows sources of funds during a specified period.

— Shows uses of that funds during a specified period.

— “funds” used here means working capital, i.e. the excess of current assets over current liabilities.

— It is also known as

• Sources and Application of funds;

• statement of changes in financial position:

• sources and uses of funds:

• summary of financial operations:

• where got, where gone statement

Professor Anthony in his book “Management Accounting-Text and Cases” has explained the fund

flow by way of ‘where got where gone statement’.

Where got = Sources of fund

Where gone = Application of fund

So we can say fund flow item will be summarized as under:

NO

YES

YES YES

YES

NO

STEPS FOR PREPARATION OF FUND FLOW STATEMENT

FIRST STEP

To prepare statement of Changes of Working Capital

It is very necessary to make statement of changes of working capital. Because net increase in working

capital is use of fund and net decrease in working capital is source of fund.

We take two balance sheets, one is current year balance sheet and other is previous year balance sheet.

Then we separate current assets and current liabilities.

Flow of Funds ?

Current Assets Current Liabilities

Non-Current

Assets

Non-Current

Liabilities

EP-CMA

540

If current assets are more than previous year current assets, it means increase in working capital.

If current assets are less than previous year current assets, it means decrease in working capital. Because

relationship between current assets and working capital is positive and if any changes in current assets,

working capital will change in same direction.

If current liabilities are more than previous year current liabilities, it means decrease in working capital.

If current liabilities are less than previous year current liabilities, it means increase in working capital.

Relationship between working capital and current liabilities are inverse.

We can summarise the above as under:

Working Capital increase/decrease when Change in current assets or current liabilities

• Increase working capital • Increase in current assets

• Decrease in current liabilities

• Decrease in working capital • Decrease in current assets

• Increase in current liabilities

• No change in working capital • Realisation from debtors/Bills Receivable

• Payment to creditors/Bills Payable

• Goods sold on credit

• Goods purchased on credit

Net working capital increase or decrease when a transaction involves a current account and non-current

account.

Statement or schedule of changes in working capital

Effect on working capital Particulars Previous

Year

`

Current

Year

`

Increase

`

Decrease

`

(a) CURRENT ASSETS

Cash in hand

Debtor

Inventory

Bills Receivable

Total Current Assets (A)

(b) CURRENT LIABILITIES

Trade Creditors

Bills Payable

(c) Total Current Liabilities (B)

Total Working Capital (A-B)

(d) Change in Working Capital

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

541

SECOND STEP

Ascertain the funds from operation

Funds from the operation may be ascertained from following two methods as under:

(i) In statement form

(ii) In account form

Fund from operation is required for preparation of fund flow statement for source of fund side. It can be

shown on application of fund side when there is negative fund from operation. Operation means business

activity and fund from operation means profit from business activity.

Statement of fund from operations

The fund flow statement is prepared as per the following proforma:

Statement of Funds from operations for the _______________

Particulars ` `

Net Profit after tax for the year XXX

Add: Non-Current/Non-Operating Expenses (E.G.)

Depreciation

XX

Loss on Sale of Fixed Assets XX

Interest on Debentures XX

Goodwill Written Off XX

Provision for Tax XX

Proposed Dividend XX

Interim Dividend XX

Transfer from Statement of Profit & Loss (Profit & Loss Account) XX

Other Non-Current & Non-Operating items debited XX XXX

Less: Non-Current & Non Operating Incomes (e.g.)

Interest on Investment XX

Dividend Received XX

Profit on Sale of Fixed Assets XX

Interest on Bank Deposit XX

Refund of Tax XX

Other Non-Current & Non-Operating items credited XX XXX

Net Fund Flow From Operation

XXX

Fund Flow Statement in Account Form

Adjusted Profit & Loss Account for the period_____________

Dr. Cr.

Particulars

Amount `

Particulars

Amount `

To Non-Current & Non-Operating

Items Charged:

By Balance b/d XX

Transfer to General Reserve XX By Non-Current & Non-Operating

Items credited

EP-CMA

542

Proposed Dividend XX Profit on Sale of Fixed Assets XX

Goodwill Written Off XX Income from Investment XX

Preliminary Expenses XX Other Non-Current & Non

Operating Items

XX

Depreciation XX By Net Fund Flow from Operation

(Balancing Figure)

XX

Provision for Taxation XX

Other Non-Current & Non

Operating Items

XX

To Balance c/d XX

Illustration 16

Form the following details prepare a statement showing changes in working capital during 2012:

Balance sheet of Surya as on 31st December

Liabilities 2012 2013 Assets 2012 2013

` ` ` `

Share capital 5,00,000 6,00,000 Fixed assets 10,00,000 11,20,000

Reserves 1,50,000 1,80,000 Less: Depreciation 3,70,000 4,60,000

Profit and Loss A/c 40,000 65,000 6,30,000 6,60,000

Debentures 3,00,000 2,50,000 Stock 2,40,000 3,70,000

Creditors for goods 1,70,000 1,60,000 Book Debts 2,50,000 2,30,000

Provision for tax 60,000 80,000 Cash in hand 80,000 65,000

________ ________ Preliminary expenses 20,000 15,000

12,20,000 13,35,000 12,20,000 13,35,000

Solution:

The first step is to prepare the schedule of changes in working capital.

Schedule of changes in working capital

2012 2013 Increase in Decrease in

working working

capital capital

` ` ` `

Current Asset:

Stock 2,40,000 3,70,000 1,30,000 —

Book debts 2,50,000 2,30,000 — 20,000

Cash in hand 80,000 60,000 — 20,000

(A) 5,70,000 6,60,000 1,30,000 40,000

Current Liability: _______ _______

Creditors for goods (B) 1,70,000 1,60,000 10,000 ____—

Working capital (A – B) 4,00,000 5,00,000 1,40,000 40,000

Increase in working capital 1,00,000 — — 1,00,000

5,00,000 5,00,000 1,40,000 1,40,000

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

543

Illustration 17

From the following two balance sheet of M/s Ram Traders as at December 31, 2012 and 2013. Prepare the

statement of sources and uses of funds.

2012 2013 2012 2013

` ` ` `

Liabilities

Share capital 80,000 90,000

Trade creditors 20,000 46,000

Profit & Loss a/c 4,60,000 5,00,000

Assets

Cash 60,000 94,000

Debtors 2,40,000 2,30,000

Stock in trade 1,60,000 1,80,000

Land _______ _______ 1,00,000 1,32,000

5,60,000 6,36,000 5,60,000 6,36,000

Solution:

The first step is to prepare the schedule of changes in working capital.

Schedule of changes in working capital

2012 2013 Increase in Decrease in

working working

capital capital

` ` ` `

Current Asset:

Cash 60,000 94,000 34,000 —

Debtors 2,40,000 2,30,000 — 10,000

Stock in trade 1,60,000 1,80,000 20,000 —

(A) 4,60,000 5,04,000 — —

Current Liability: ______ ______

Trade creditors (B) 20,000 46,000 ___— 26,000

Working capital (A – B) 4,40,000 4,58,000 54,000 36,000

Increase in working capital 18,000 — — 18,000

4,58,000 4,58,000 54,000 54,000

The next step is to prepare the non current accounts of the firm.

Land ACCOUNT

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Balance b/d 1,00,000 By Balance c/d 1,32,000

To Cash(Purchase) balancing figure 32,000 _______

1,32,000 1,32,000

EP-CMA

544

Share capital Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Balance c/d 90,000 By Cash (Issue of shares) 10,000

Balancing figure

______ By Balance b/d 80,000

90,000 90,000

Adjusted Profit & Loss Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Balance c/d 5,00,000 By Balance b/d 4,60,000

By Funds from operation 40,000

_______ Balancing figure _______

5,00,000 5,00,000

Fund flow statement

Sources ` Applications `

Issue of Shares 10,000 Purchase of Land 32,000

Funds from operation 40,000 Increase in working capital 18,000

50,000 50,000

Illustration 18

From the following relating to Relox Limited, prepare funds flow statement.

Balance sheet of Relox Limited as on 31st December

Liabilities 2012 2013 Assets 2012 2013

` ` ` `

Share capital 6,00,000 8,00,000 Fixed assets 3,80,000 4,20,000

Reserves 2,00,000 1,00,000 Accounts receivable 2,10,000 3,00,000

Retained earnings 60,000 1,20,000 Stock 3,00,000 3,90,000

Accounts payable 90,000 2,70,000 Cash 60,000 1,80,000

9,50,000 12,90,000 9,50,000 12,90,000

Additional information:

• The company issued bonus shares for `1,00,000 and for cash `1,00,000

• Depreciation written off during the year `30,000

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

545

Solution

Schedule of changes in working capital

2012 2013 Increase in Decrease in

working working

capital capital

` ` ` `

Current Asset:

Cash 60,000 1,80,000 1,20,000 —

Stock in trade 3,00,000 3,90,000 90,000 —

Accounts receivable 2,10,000 3,00,000 90,000 —

(A) 5,70,000 8,70,000

Current Liability: _______ _______

Accounts payable (B) 90,000 2,70,000 — 1,80,000

Working capital (A – B) 4,80,000 6,00,000 3,00,000 1,80,000

Increase in working capital 1,20,000 — — 1,20,000

6,00,000 6,00,000 3,00,000 3,00,000

Fixed Assets Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Balance b/d 3,80,000 By Depreciation 30,000

(Adjusted Profit & Loss A/c )

To Cash (Purchase) 70,000 By Balance c/d 4,20,000

Balancing figure _______ _______

4,50,000 4,50,000

Share Capital Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Balance c/d 8,00,000 By Balance b/d 6,00,000

By Cash (Issue of shares) 1,00,000

_______ By General reserve 1,00,000

8,00,000 8,00,000

General Reserve Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Share capital 1,00,000 By Balance b/d 2,00,000

To Balance c/d 1,00,000 _______

2,00,000 2,00,000

EP-CMA

546

Adjusted Profit & Loss Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To (Fixed Assets) depreciation 30,000 By Balance b/d (Retained Earnings) 60,000

To Balance c/d 1,20,000 By Funds from operation 90,000

_______ Balancing figure _______

1,50,000 1,50,000

Fund flow statement

Dr. Cr.

Sources ` Applications `

Issue of Shares 1,00,000 Purchase of Land 70,000

Funds from operation 90,000 Increase in working capital 1,20,000

1,90,000 1,90,000

Illustration 19

Balance sheets of M/s Black and White as on 1-1-2013 and 31-12-2013 were as follows:

Liabilities 1-1-13 31-12-13 Assets 1-1-13 31-12-13

` ` ` `

Creditors 40,000 44,000 Cash 10,000 7,000

Mrs. Whites’ Loan 25,000 — Debtors 30,000 50,000

Loan from P.N. B. Bank 40,000 50,000 Stock 35,000 25,000

Capital 1,25,000 1,53,000 Machinery 80,000 55,000

Land 40,000 50,000

_______ _______ Building 35,000 60,000

2,30,000 2,47,000 2,30,000 2,47,000

Additional information

During the year machine costing `10,000 (accumulated depreciation `3,000) was sold for `5,000 . The

provision for depreciation against machinery as on 1-1-2013 was `25,000 and on 31-12-2013 `40,000 Net

profit for the year 2013 amounted to `45,000. You are required to prepare funds flow statement.

Solution:

Changes in working capital in between the various current assets and current liabilities are as follows:

Statement of changes in working capital

1-1-2013 31-12-2013 Increase in Decrease in

working working

capital capital

` ` ` `

Current Asset:

Cash 10,000 7,000 — 3,000

Debtors 30,000 50,000 20,000 —

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

547

Stock 35,000 25,000 — 10,000

(A) 75,000 82,000 — —

Current Liability: ______ ______

Sundry creditors (B) 40,000 44,000 ____— 4,000

Working capital (A – B) 35,000 38,000 20,000 17,000

Increase in working capital 3,000 — — 3,000

38,000 38,000 20,000 20,000

The next step is to determine the cost of the machinery before the charge of depreciation i.e., to find out the

Gross value of the assets, in other words Original cost of the assets to be found out at the moment of

purchase.

1-1-2013 31-12-2013

` `

Written down value of the machinery extracted

from the balance sheet as on dated ` 80,000 ` 55,000

Add: Accumulated depreciation or

Provision for depreciation 25,000 40,000

Original Cost of Machinery 1,05,000 95,000

The ultimate aim is to find out the original cost of the machinery for the preparation of the machinery account:

Before preparing the Machinery account, the worth of the sale transaction of the machinery should be found

out.

Original cost of the Machinery `10,000

(–)Depreciation ` 3,000

Machinery worth for sale ` 7,000

(–)Machinery sold ` 5,000

Loss on sale of the portion of the machinery sold ` 2,000

Machinery Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Balance b/d 1,05,000 By Cash (Sales) 5,000

By Provision for depreciation 3,000

By Loss on sale (Adjusted profit

and loss account) 2,000

_______ By Balance c/d 95,000

1,05,000 1,05,000

Provision for Depreciation Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Machinery A/c 3,000 By Balance b/d 25,000

To Balance c/d 40,000 By Adjusted Profit and Loss A/c

______ (Depreciation of Current Year) 18,000

43,000 43,000

EP-CMA

548

Capital Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Drawings (Balancing figure) 17,000 By Balance b/d 1,25,000

To Balance c/d 1,53,000 By Net profit 45,000

1,70,000 1,70,000

Loan from P.N. B. Bank Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Balance c/d 50,000 By Balance b/d 40,000

______ By Cash (Balancing figure) 10,000

50,000 50,000

Mrs. White's Loan Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Cash (Loan paid) 25,000 By Balance b/d 25,000

_____ ______

25,000 25,000

Adjusted Profit & Loss Account

` `

To Machinery (Loss on sale) 2,000 By Balance b/d —

To Provision for depreciation 18,000 By Fund from operations 65,000

To Balance c/d (Net profit) 45,000 ______

65,000 65,000

Fund flow statement

Dr. Cr.

Sources ` Applications `

Sale of machinery 5,000 Purchase of land (50,000 – 40,000) 10,000

Loan from P.N. B. Bank 10,000 Purchase of Building (60,000 – 35,000) 25,000

Fund from operation 65,000 Drawings 17,000

Repayment of Mrs. White’s Loan 25,000

______ Increase working capital 3,000

80,000 80,000

Illustration 20

From the following balance sheets of A on 31st December 2012 and 2013, you are required to prepare Fund

flow statement.

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

549

The followings are additional information has also been given:

• Depreciation charged on plant was Rs.4,000 and on building Rs.4,000

• Provision for taxation of Rs.19,000 was made during the year 2013

• Interim Dividend of Rs.8,000 was paid during the year 2013

Balance sheet

Liabilities 2012 2013 Assets 2012 2013

` ` ` `

Share capital 1,00,000 1,00,000 Goodwill 12,000 12,000

General Reserve 14,000 18,000 Building 40,000 36,000

Profit & Loss A/c 16,000 13,000 Plant 37,000 36,000

Sundry creditors 8,000 5,400 Investments 10,000 11,000

Bills payable 1,200 800 Stock 30,000 23,400

Provision for taxation 16,000 18,000 Bills receivable 2,000 3,200

Provision for doubtful debts 400 600 Debtors 18,000 19,000

_______ _______ Cash 6,600 15,200

1,55,600 1,55,800 1,55,600 1,55,800

Solution:

Statement of changes in working capital

2012 2013 Increase in Decrease in

working working

capital capital

` ` ` `

Current Asset:

Stock 30,000 23,400 — 6,600

Bills receivable 2,000 3,200 1,200 —

Debtors 18,000 19,000 1,000 —

Cash 6,600 15,200 8,600 —

(A) 56,600 60,800

Current liability

Sundry creditors 8,000 5,400 2,600 —

Bills payable 1,200 800 400 —

Provision for doubtful debts 400 600 — 200

(B) 9,600 6,800

_____ _____

Working capital (A – B) 47,000 54,000 13,800 6,800

Increase in working capital 7,000 ______ _____ 7,000

54,000 54,000 13,800 13,800

EP-CMA

550

Building Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Balance b/d 40,000 By (Depreciation) Adjusted

Profit & Loss A/c 4,000

_____ By Balance c/d 36,000

40,000 40,000

Plant Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Balance b/d 37,000 By (Depreciation) Adjusted

To Cash (Purchase) Profit & Loss A/c 4,000

balancing figure 3,000 By Balance c/d 36,000

40,000 40,000

Investments Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Balance b/d 10,000 By Balance c/d 11,000

To Cash (purchase) Balancing figure 1,000 _____

11,000 11,000

General Reserve Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Balance b/d 18,000 By Balance b/d 14,000

By Adjusted Profit and Loss A/c 4,000

(Profit transferred during the

_____ current year) _____

18,000 18,000

Provision for Taxation Account

Dr. Cr.

` `

To Cash (Tax paid previous year taxation) By Balance b/d 16,000

Balancing figure 17,000 By Adjusted Profit & Loss A/c 19,000

To Balance b/d 18,000 (provision for taxation made

_____ during the year) _____

35,000 35,000

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

551

Adjusted Profit & Loss Account

` `

To Depreciation on Building 4,000 By Balance b/d 16,000

To Depreciation on Plant 4,000 By Funds from operations 36,000

To Transfer to General Reserve 4,000

To Provision for taxation 19,000

To Interim dividend 8,000

To Balance c/d 13,000 _____

52,000 52,000

The next step is to prepare the fund flow statement.

Fund Flow Statement

Sources ` Applications `

Funds from operations 36,000 Purchase of the plant 3,000

Purchase of the Investment 1,000

Increase working capital 7,000

Tax paid 17,000

______ Interim dividend 8,000

36,000 36,000

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN CASH FLOW AND FUND FLOW

Cash Flow Fund Flow

Cash flow statement based on narrow concept of

funds, which considers changes in cash.

Funds flow statement is based on the concept of

working capital

It does not contain any opening and closing balance.

It contains opening as well as closing balances of

cash and cash equivalents.

Cash flow statement is prepared on cash basis. Funds flow statement is prepared on accrual basis.

Cash flow statement is more useful in short term

analysis and cash planning

Funds flow statement is more useful in long-term

analysis of financial planning.

In cash flow statement cash from the operations are

calculated after adjusting the increases and

decreases in current assets and liabilities.

In funds flow statement such changes in current

items are adjusted in the changes of working capital.

Classification of current and non-current is not

relevant.

Such classification is required in this case.

MANAGEMENT REPORTING

Accounting is an information system and attempts to communicate information in the form of reports,

statements, charts and graphs to help the management in taking appropriate decisions. Reporting acts as a

‘media’ to helps the management to take its decision accordingly. Management reporting is that part of

management control system which provides various information to the management in the form of report and

statement at regular interval. Management reporting is the instrument for making control and decision

effective.

EP-CMA

552

It is difficult to list out the reports which will be suitable for every one. The reporting system suitable for a

business should be framed according to its individual requirements. Thus reporting system will vary in

different businesses according to their different requirements.

Management Information System (MIS)

The concept of the MIS has evolved over a period of time comprising many different facets of the

organizational function. MIS is a necessity of all the organizations.

Management Information System is a systematic process of providing relevant information in right time in

right format to all levels of users in the organization for effective decision making. MIS is also defined to be

system of collection, processing, retrieving and transmission of data to meet the information requirement of

different levels of managers in an organization.

According to CIMA MIS is a set of procedures designed to provide managers at different levels in the

organization with information for decision making, and for control of those parts of the business for which

they are responsible.

MIS is a necessity of all the organizations. The initial concept of MIS was to process data from the

organization but presently it is required for the reports at regular intervals. The system was largely capable of

handling the data from collection to processing. It was more impersonal, requiring each individual to pick and

choose the processed data and use it for his requirements. This concept was further modified when a

distinction was made between data and information. The information is a product of an analysis of data. This

concept is similar to a raw material and the finished product. What are needed are information and not a

mass of data. However, the data can be analyzed in a number of ways, producing different shades and

specifications of the information as a product.

The system should present information in such a form and format that it creates an impact on its user,

provoking a decision or an investigation. It was later realized then even though such an impact was a

welcome modification, some sort of selective approach was necessary in the analysis and reporting.

Feature of MIS

1. The MIS is a system which provides information support for decision making in the organization.

2. The MIS is an integrated system of man and machine for providing the information to support the

operations, the management and the decision making function in the organization.

3. The MIS is a system based on the database of the organization evolved for the purpose of providing

information to the people in the organization.

4. The MIS is a Computer based Information System.

ROLE OF THE MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM

The role of the MIS in an organization can be compared to the role of heart in the body. The information is

the blood and MIS is the heart. In the body the heart plays the role of supplying pure blood to all the

elements of the body including the brain. The heart works faster and supplies more blood when needed. It

regulates and controls the incoming impure blood, processes it and sends it to the destination in the quantity

needed. It fulfills the needs of blood supply to human body in normal course and also in crisis.

The MIS plays exactly the same role in the organization. The system ensures that an appropriate data is

collected from the various sources, processed, and sent further to all the needy destinations. The system is

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

553

expected to fulfill the information needs of an individual, a group of individuals, the management

functionaries: the managers and the top management.

The MIS satisfies the diverse needs through a variety of systems such as Query Systems, Analysis Systems,

and Decision Support Systems the

MIS helps in Strategic Planning, Management Control, Operational Control and Transaction Processing.

LESSON ROUND-UP

•

Financial statements generally refer to balance sheet or position statement and Statement of Profit and

Loss or income statement. Of course, a business may also prepare a statement of retained earnings and a

cash flow statement.

•

Financial statements are prepared on the basis of (i) recorded facts; (ii) accounting conventions; (iii)

postulates; (iv) personal judgements, and (v) accounting standards and guidance notes.

•

Attributes of financial statements cover – relevance, accuracy and freedom from bias, comparability,

analytical presentation, promptness, generally accepted principles, consistency, authenticity and

compliance with laws.

•

Financial statements are very much relevant to – the management, the public, the shareholders and the

lenders, the labour and trade unions, the country and economy.

•

In addition to the statutory requirements, the recent trends in presenting financial statements may include -

summarised Statement of Profit and Lossand balance sheet, highlights, cash flow statements, important

accounting ratios, disclosure of accounting policies, charts, graphs and diagrams, schedules, impact of

price level changes, rounding off of figures, etc.

•

According to modus operandi of analysis financial statement, analysis may be horizontal and vertical.

•

According to the objective of the analysis financial statement, analysis can be long-term and short-term.

•

Analytical methods and devices used in analysing financial statements include - comparative statements,

common size statements, trend ratios, ratio analysis and cash flow statements.

•

Accounting ratios are relationships, expressed in arithmetical terms, between figures which have a cause

and effect relationship or which are connected with each other in some other manner.

•

Ratios may be classified according to the statement upon which they are based, function and importance.

•

The functional ratios can be further classified into - profitability ratios, turnover ratios or activity ratios,

financial ratios or solvency ratios and market test ratios.

•

Fund flow statement also referred to as statement of “source and application of funds”

•

Fund = Working capital = Current assets – Current liability

•

Flow of funds include both “inflow” and “outflow”.

•

Where got, where gone statement

SELF-TEST QUESTIONS

1. Explain the concept of interpretation and criticism of financial statements?

2. What are the objectives of financial statements?

3. Discuss the limitations of financial statements and point out how these limitations can be removed

through management accounting.

4. Explain the various ways of presentation of financial statements.

EP-CMA

554

5. How will you interpret and analyse financial statement presented to you?

6. What is the common size balance sheet and income statement? Explain the technique of preparing

common size balance sheet.

7. What are the trend ratios? Explain the technique of computing trend ratios.

8. Explain the significance of ratio analysis in financial management.

9. Explain briefly the different ratios that are commonly used and show how they are useful in financial

analysis.

10. Explain different ratios coming under:

(a) Profitability ratios

(b) Overall measure of efficiency ratio

11. (a) Explain the uses of ratio analysis.

(b) What are the limitations of ratio analysis?

(c) What are the steps involved in the process of fund flow statement.

(d) What is fund?

(e) What is flow?

(f) What is fund flow?

12. Write short notes on:

(a) Liquidity test ratio

(b) Acid test ratio

(c) Profitability test ratios

(d) Turnover ratios.

13. “Inter-firm comparison is carried out with the help of ratios although they are not exclusive and

conclusive indicators of performance”. Examine.

14. Prepare a proforma income statement for the month of April, May and June for Eastern Ltd. from

the following informations:

(i) Sales are projected at `4,50,000, `4,80,000 and `4,30,000 for April, May and June respectively.

(ii) Cost of goods sold is `1,00,000 plus 30% of selling price per month.

(iii) Selling expenses are 4% of sales.

(iv) Rent `15,000 per month.

(v) Administrative expenses for April are expected to be `1,20,000 but are expected to rise 2% per

month over the previous month’s expenses.

(vi) The company has `5,00,000 of 12% loan, interest payable monthly.

(vii) Corporate tax expected is 40%.

15. The Newman Company Ltd. is in the midst of a promotional campaign to boost sales. In 2013-14 an

additional `70,000 was spent on advertising. Presented below are revenue and expense data for

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

555

the company.

2013-14 2012-13

` `

Sales 8,16,000 6,56,500

Sales returns and allowances 16,000 6,500

Cost of goods sold 4,00,000 3,12,000

Selling expenses 2,00,000 1,30,000

General expenses 1,20,000 78,000

Miscellaneous income 6,400 6,500

Income-tax 32,000 67,600

You are required to prepare a comparative statement for the year 2013-14 and 2012-13 for the

company. Also comment on the relationships revealed in the comparative income statements.

16. On the basis of the following figures derived from the accounts of a company, prepare a report on

the level of efficiency of financial and operational management of the company:

Years Capital Net Profit ROI Current

Turnover on Sales (%) Ratio

Ratio (%)

1 1.0 8 8 6.0

2 2.0 10 20 4.0

3 3.0 11.5 34.5 2.0

4 5.0 13 65 0.5

17. The profit and loss account and balance sheet of Happy Ltd. is given below:

Profit and Loss Account for the year ended 31st March, 2014

` `

To Opening stock 90,000 By Sales 9,00,000

To Purchases 5,60,000 By Closing stock 90,000

To Wages 2,14,000

To Gross profit 1,26,000 _______

9,90,000 9,90,000

‘

To Salaries 16,000 By Gross profit 1,26,000

To Electricity 10,000

To Miscellaneous expenses 10,000

To Depreciation 30,000

To Net profit 60,000 _______

1,26,000 1,26,000

Balance Sheet as on 31.3.2014

` `

Share capital: Fixed assets 5,40,000

Equity shares 1,80,000 Less: Depreciation 1,50,000 3,90,000

Reserve and surplus 1,20,000

Secured loans 2,10,000 Current assets:

Stock 90,000 Sundry debtors 1,05,000

EP-CMA

556

Current liabilities: Cash 15,000 2,10,000

Sundry creditors 90,000 _______

6,00,000 6,00,000

Discuss under the following important functional groupings the usual ratios and comment on the

financial strength of the company:

(i) Liquidity and solvency test ratios;

(ii) Profitability test ratios; and

(iii) Overall measures ratios.

18. Prepare Balance Sheet and Profit and Loss Account from the following information:

`

Capital 4,00,000

Working capital 1,80,000

Bank overdraft 30,000

There is no fictitious asset. Current assets contain only stock, debtors and cash. The following

additional data is also available:

(i) Closing stock is 20% higher than opening stock

(ii) Current ratio - 2.5

(iii) Quick ratio - 2.0

(iv) Proprietary ratio - 0.6 (Fixed assets: Proprietary fund)

(v) Gross profit ratio - 20% (of sales)

(vi) Stock velocity - 5

(vii) Debtor’s velocity - 73 days

(viii) Net profit ratio - 10% (to average capital employed).

19. The following are the summarised Profit & Loss Account and balance sheet of Waldo Company

Ltd., for the year ending 31st March, 2014.

Profit & Loss Account

` `

To Opening stock 9,950 By Sales 85,000

To Purchases 54,525 By Closing stock 14,900

To Incidental expenses 1,425

To Gross profit 34,000 ______

99,900 99,900

To Operating expenses: By Gross profit 34,000

Selling and distribution 3,000 By Non-operating

Administration 16,500 income-interest 300

To Non-operating expenses: By Profit on sale of shares 600

Loss on sale of assets 400

To Net profit 15,000 ______

34,900 34,900

Lesson 12 Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements

557

Balance Sheet

Issued Capital Land and building 15,000

2,000 equity shares of`10 each 20,000 Plant and machinery 8,000

Reserves 9,000 Stock in trade 14,900

Profit & Loss Account 6,000 Sundry debtors 7,100

Current liabilities 13,000 Cash and bank balance 3,000

48,000 48,000

You are required to calculate:

(a) Current ratio

(b) Operating ratio

(c) Stock turnover ratio

(d) Return on total resources

(e) Turnover of fixed assets.

20. From the following information you are required to calculate- (i) Sales; (ii) Sundry Debtors; (iii)

Sundry Creditors; (iv) Closing stock;

Debtors velocity ratio 3 months

Stock velocity ratio 6 months

Creditors velocity ratio 2 months

Gross profit ratio 25%

The gross profit for the year ended 31st March 2014 was `5,00,000. Stock for the same period was

`20,000 more than it was in the beginning of the year. Bills receivable and bills payable were

`1,50,000 and `83,333 respectively.

21. Calculate working capital turnover ratio from the following information:

Current ratio = 5:3

Quick ratio = 3:5

Inventory turnover ratio = 5 times

Closing Stock was `1,92,000 less than opening stock

Gross profit = 25% on cost

Average debt collection period = 3 months

Cash sales = 25% of Total sales

Opening debtors = `2,80,000

Closing debtors = `3,20,000

22. The following Balance Sheets of X and Y Ltd. for the year 2013 and 2014, you are required to

prepare (a) Funds from Operations (b) Statement of Changes in Working Capital and (c) Funds

Flow Statement:

Balance Sheet

Liabilities 2013 2014 Assets 2013 2014

` ` ` `

Share Capital 50,000 50,000 Good will 6,000 6,000

General Reserve 7,000 9,000 Buildings 20,000 18,000

Profit & Loss A/c 8,000 6,500 Machinery 18,500 18,000

EP-CMA

558

Trade Creditors 4,000 2,700 Investments 5,000 5,500

Bills Payable 600 400 Stock 15,000 11,700

Provision for Taxation 8,000 9,000 Bills Receivable 1,000 1,600

Provision for Doubtful Debts 200 300 Trade Debtors 9,000 9,50

______ ______ Cash Balance 3,300 7,600

77,800 77,900 77,800 77,900

Additional Information:

(1) Depreciation charged on machinery was `2,000 and on building was `2,000.

(2) Provision for taxation of `9,500 was made during the year 2014.

(3) Interim dividend of `4,000 was paid during the year 2014.

EXECUTIVE PROGRAMME

COST AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

EP-CMA

PRACTICE TEST PAPER

A Guide to CS Students

To enable the students in achieving their goal to become successful professionals, Institute has prepared a

booklet ‘A Guide to CS Students” providing the subject specific guidance on different papers and subjects

contained in the ICSI curriculum. The booklet is available on ICSI website and students may down load

from http://www.icsi.edu/Portals/0/AGUIDETOCSSTUDENTS.pdf

WARNING

It is brought to the notice of all students that use of any malpractice in Examination is misconduct as

provided in the explanation to Regulation 27 and accordingly the registration of such students is liable to be

cancelled or terminated. The text of regulation 27 is reproduced below for information:

“27. Suspension and cancellation of examination results or registration

In the event of any misconduct by a registered student or a candidate enrolled for any examination

conducted by the Institute, the Council or the Committee concerned may suo motu or on receipt of a

complaint, if it is satisfied that, the misconduct is proved after such investigation as it may deem necessary

and after giving such student or candidate an opportunity to state his case, suspend or debar the person

from appearing in any one or more examinations, cancel his examination result, or studentship registration,

or debar him from future registration as a student, as the case may be.

Explanation - Misconduct for the purpose of this regulation shall mean and include behaviour in a disorderly

manner in relation to the Institute or in or near an Examination premises/centre, breach of any regulation,

condition, guideline or direction laid down by the Institute, malpractices with regard to postal or oral tuition or

resorting to or attempting to resort to unfair means in connection with the writing of any examination

conducted by the Institute".

EP-CMA

560

EXECUTIVE PROGRAMME

COST AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

PRACTICE TEST PAPER

(This test paper is for practice and self study only and not to be sent to the institute)

Time allowed: 3 hours Maximum marks : 100

[Attempt all questions. Each question carries 1 mark. There is Negative marking in the ratio of 1:4, i.e.

deduction of one (1) mark for every four (4) wrong answers.]

Q.1. Which of these is not an objective of Cost Accounting?

(a) Ascertainment of Cost

(b) Determination of Selling Price

(c) Cost Control and Cost reduction

(d) Assisting Shareholders in decision making

Q.2. A profit centre is a centre

(a) Where the manager has the responsibility of generating and maximising profits

(b) Which is concerned with earning an adequate Return on Investment

(c) Both of the above

(d) Which manages cost

Q.3. Responsibility Centre can be categorised into:

(a) Cost Centres only

(b) Profit Centres only

(c) Investment Centres only

(d) Cost Centres, Profit Centres and Investment Centres

Q.4. Cost Unit is defined as:

(a) Unit of quantity of product, service or time in relation to which costs may be ascertained or

expressed

(b) A location, person or an item of equipment or a group of these for which costs are ascertained and

used for cost control.

(c) Centres having the responsibility of generating and maximising profits

(d) Centres concerned with earning an adequate return on investment

Q.5. Fixed cost is a cost:

(a) Which changes in total in proportion to changes in output

(b) which is partly fixed and partly variable in relation to output

(c) Which do not change in total during a given period despise changes in output

Test Paper

561

(d) which remains same for each unit of output

Q.6. Uncontrollable costs are the costs which be influenced by the action of a specified member of an

undertaking.

(a) can not

(b) can

(c) may or may not

(d) must

Q.7. Element/s of Cost of a product are:

(a) Material only

(b) Labour only

(c) Expenses only

(d) Material, Labour and expenses

Q.8. Abnormal cost is the cost:

(a) Cost normally incurred at a given level of output

(b) Cost not normally incurred at a given level of output

(c) Cost which is charged to customer

(d) Cost which is included in the cost of the product

Q.9. Conversion cost includes cost of converting……….into……..

(a) Raw material, WIP

(b) Raw material, Finished goods

(c) WIP, Finished goods

(d) Finished goods, Saleable goods

Q.10. Sunk costs are:

(a) relevant for decision making

(b) Not relevant for decision making

(c) cost to be incurred in future

(d) future costs

Q.11. Describe the method of costing to be applied in case of Nursing Home:

(a) Operating Costing

(b) Process Costing

(c) Contract Costing

(d) Job Costing

Q.12. Describe the cost unit applicable to the Bicycle industry:

EP-CMA

562

(a) per part of bicycle

(b) per bicycle

(c) per tonne

(d) per day

Q.13. Calculate the prime cost from the following information:

Direct material purchased: Rs. 1,00,000

Direct material consumed: Rs. 90,000

Direct labour: Rs. 60,000

Direct expenses: Rs. 20,000

Manufacturing overheads: Rs. 30,000

(a) Rs. 1,80,000

(b) Rs. 2,00,000

(c) Rs. 1,70,000

(d) Rs. 2,10,000

Q. 14. Total cost of a product: Rs. 10,000

Profit: 25% on Selling Price

Profit is:

(a) Rs. 2,500

(b) Rs. 3,000

(c) Rs. 3,333

(d) Rs. 2,000

Q.15. Calculate cost of sales from the following:

Net Works cost: Rs. 2,00,000

Office & Administration Overheads: Rs. 1,00,000

Opening stock of WIP: Rs. 10,000

Closing Stock of WIP: Rs. 20,000

Closing stock of finished goods: Rs. 30,000

There was no opening stock of finished goods.

Selling overheads: Rs. 10,000

(a) Rs. 2,70,000

(b) Rs. 2,80,000

(c) Rs. 3,00,000

(d) Rs. 3,20,000

Q.16. Calculate value of closing stock from the following:

Opening stock of finished goods (500 units) : Rs. 2,000

Test Paper

563

Cost of production (10000 units) : Rs. 50,000

Closing stock (1000 units):?

(a) Rs. 4,000

(b) Rs. 4,500

(c) Rs. 5,000

(d) Rs. 6,000

Q. 17. Which of these is not a Material control technique:

(a) ABC Analysis

(b) Fixation of raw material levels

(c) Maintaining stores ledger

(d) Control over slow moving and non moving items

Q.18. Out of the following, what is not the work of purchase department:

(a) Receiving purchase requisition

(b) Exploring the sources of material supply

(c) Preparation and execution of purchase orders

(d) Accounting for material received

Q.19. Bin Card is a

(a) Quantitative as well as value wise records of material received, issued and balance;

(b) Quantitative record of material received, issued and balance

(c) Value wise records of material received, issued and balance

(d) a record of labour attendance

Q.20. Stores Ledger is a:

(a) Quantitative as well as value wise records of material received, issued and balance;

(b) Quantitative record of material received, issued and balance

(c) Value wise records of material received, issued and balance

(d) a record of labour attendance

Q.21. Re-order level is calculated as:

(a) Maximum consumption x Maximum re-order period

(b) Minimum consumption x Minimum re-order period

(c) 1/2 of (Minimum + Maximum consumption)

(d) Maximum level - Minimum level

Q.22. Economic order quantity is that quantity at which cost of holding and carrying inventory is:

(a) Maximum and equal

EP-CMA

564

(b) Minimum and equal

(c) It can be maximum or minimum depending upon case to case.

(d) Minimum and unequal

Q.23. ABC analysis is an inventory control technique in which:

(a) Inventory levels are maintained

(b) Inventory is classified into A, B and C category with A being the highest quantity, lowest value.

(c) Inventory is classified into A, B and C Category with A being the lowest quantity, highest value

(d) Either b or c.

Q.24. Which one out of the following is not an inventory valuation method?

(a) FIFO

(b) LIFO

(c) Weighted Average

(d) EOQ

Q.25. In case of rising prices (inflation), FIFO method will:

(a) provide lowest value of closing stock and profit

(b) provide highest value of closing stock and profit

(c) provide highest value of closing stock but lowest value of profit

(d) provide highest value of profit but lowest value of closing stock

Q.26. In case of rising prices (inflation), LIFO will:

(a) provide lowest value of closing stock and profit

(b) provide highest value of closing stock and profit

(c) provide highest value of closing stock but lowest value of profit

(d) provide highest value of profit but lowest value of closing stock

Q.27. Calculate Re-order level from the following:

Consumption per week: 100-200 units

Delivery period: 14-28 days

(a) 5600 units

(b) 800 units

(c) 1400 units

(d) 200 units

Q.28. Calculate EOQ (approx.) from the following details:

Annual Consumption: 24000 units

Ordering cost: Rs. 10 per order

Test Paper

565

Purchase price: Rs. 100 per unit

Carrying cost: 5%

(a) 310

(b) 400

(c) 290

(d) 300

Q.29. Calculate the value of closing stock from the following according to FIFO method:

1st January, 2014: Opening balance: 50 units @ Rs. 4

Receipts:

5th January, 2014: 100 units @ Rs. 5

12th January, 2014: 200 units @ Rs. 4.50

Issues:

2nd January, 2014: 30 units

18th January, 2014: 150 units

(a) Rs. 765

(b) Rs. 805

(c) Rs. 786

(d) Rs. 700

Q.30. Calculate the value of closing stock from the following according to LIFO method:

1st January, 2014: Opening balance: 50 units @ Rs. 4

Receipts:

5th January, 2014: 100 units @ Rs. 5

12th January, 2014: 200 units @ Rs. 4.50

Issues:

2nd January, 2014: 30 units

18th January, 2014: 150 units

(a) Rs. 765

(b) Rs. 805

(c) Rs. 786

(d) Rs. 700

Q.31. Calculate the value of closing stock from the following according to Weighted Average method:

1st January, 2014: Opening balance: 50 units @ Rs. 4

Receipts:

5th January, 2014: 100 units @ Rs. 5

12th January, 2014: 200 units @ Rs. 4.50

Issues:

EP-CMA

566

2nd January, 2014: 30 units

18th January, 2014: 150 units

(a) Rs. 765

(b) Rs. 805

(c) Rs. 786

(d) Rs. 700

Q.32. Cost of abnormal wastage is:

(a) Charged to the product cost

(b) Charged to the profit & loss account

(c) charged partly to the product and partly profit & loss account

(d) not charged at all.

Q.33. Calculate re-order level from the following:

Safety stock: 1000 units

Consumption per week: 500 units

It takes 12 weeks to reach material from the date of ordering.

(a) 1000 units

(b) 6000 units

(c) 3000 units

(d) 7000 units

Q.34. From the following information, calculate the extra cost of material by following EOQ:

Annual consumption: = 45000 units

Ordering cost per order: = Rs. 10

Carrying cost per unit per annum: = Rs. 10

Purchase price per unit = Rs. 50

Re-order quantity at present = 45000 units

There is discount of 10% per unit in case of purchase of 45000 units in bulk.

(a) No saving

(b) Rs. 2,00,000

(c) Rs. 2,22,010

(d) Rs. 2,990

Q.35. Which of the following is an abnormal cause of Idle time:

(a) Time taken by workers to travel the distance between the main gate of factory and place of their

work

(b) Time lost between the finish of one job and starting of next job

(c) Time spent to meet their personal needs like taking lunch, tea etc.

Test Paper

567

(d) Machine break downs

Q.36. If overtime is resorted to at the desire of the customer, then the overtime premium:

(a) should be charged to costing profit and loss account;

(b) should not be charged at all

(c) should be charged to the job directly

(d) should be charged to the highest profit making department

Q.37. Labour turnover means:

(a) Turnover generated by labour

(b) Rate of change in composition of labour force during a specified period

(c) Either of the above

(d) Both of the above

Q.38. Which of the following is not an avoidable cause of labour turnover:

(a) Dissatisfaction with Job

(b) Lack of training facilities

(c) Low wages and allowances

(d) Disability, making a worker unfit for work

Q.39. Costs associated with the labour turnover can be categorised into:

(a) Preventive Costs only

(b) Replacement costs only

(c) Both of the above

(d) Machine costs

Q.40. Calculate workers left and discharged from the following:

Labour turnover rates are 20%, 10% and 6% respectively under Flux method, Replacement method and

Separation method. No. of workers replaced during the quarter is 80.

(a) 112

(b) 80

(c) 48

(d) 64

Q.41. Calculate workers recruited and joined from the following:

Labour turnover rates are 20%, 10% and 6% respectively under Flux method, Replacement method and

Separation method. No. of workers replaced during the quarter is 80.

(a) 112

(b) 80

EP-CMA

568

(c) 48

(d) 64

Q.42. Calculate the labour turnover rate according to replacement method from the following:

No. of workers on the payroll:

- At the beginning of the month: 500

- At the end of the month: 600

During the month, 5 workers left, 20 workers were discharged and 75 workers were recruited. Of

these, 10 workers were recruited in the vacancies of those leaving and while the rest were engaged

for an expansion scheme.

(a) 4.55%

(b) 1.82%

(c) 6%

(d) 3%

Q.43. Calculate the labour turnover rate according to Separation method from the following:

No. of workers on the payroll:

- At the beginning of the month: 500

- At the end of the month: 600

During the month, 5 workers left, 20 workers were discharged and 75 workers were recruited. Of these, 10

workers were recruited in the vacancies of those leaving and while the rest were engaged for an expansion

scheme.

(a) 4.55%

(b) 1.82%

(c) 6%

(d) 3%

Q.44. A worker is allowed 60 hours to complete the job on a guaranteed wage of Rs. 10 per hour. Under the

Rowan Plan, he gets an hourly wage of Rs. 12 per hour. For the same saving in time, how much he will get

under the Halsey Plan?

(a) Rs. 720

(b) Rs. 540

(c) Rs. 600

(d) Rs. 900

Q.45. Overhead refers to:

(a) Direct or Prime Cost

(b) All Indirect costs

(c) only Factory indirect costs

Test Paper

569

(d) Only indirect expenses

Q.46. Allotment of whole item of cost to a cost centre or cost unit is known as:

(a) Cost Apportionment

(b) Cost Allocation

(c) Cost Absorption

(d) Machine hour rate

Q. 47. Which of the following is not a method of cost absorption?

(a) Percentage of direct material cost

(b) Machine hour rate

(c) Labour hour rate

(d) Repeated distribution method

Q.48. Service departments costs should be allocated to:

(a) Only Service departments

(b) Only Production departments

(c) Both Production and service departments

(d) None of the production and service departments

Q.49. Most suitable basis for apportioning insurance of machine would be:

(a) Floor Area

(b) Value of Machines

(c) No. of Workers

(d) No. of Machines

Q. 50. Blanket overhead rate is:

(a) One single overhead absorption rate for the whole factory

(b) Rate which is blank or nil rate

(c) rate in which multiple overhead rates are calculated for each production department, service

department etc.

(d) Always a machine hour rate

Q.51. AT Co makes a single product and is preparing its material usage budget for next year. Each unit of

product requires 2kg of material, and 5,000 units of product are to be produced next year.

Opening inventory of material is budgeted to be 800 kg and AT co budgets to increase material inventory at

the end of next year by 20%

The material usage budget for next year is

(a) 8,000 Kg

EP-CMA

570

((b) 9,840 kg

((c) 10,000 Kg

(d) 10,160 Kg

Q.52. During a period 17, 500 labour hours were worked at a standard cost of Rs 6.50 per hour. The labour

efficiency variance was Rs 7,800 favourable.

How many standard hours were produced?

(a) 1,200

(b) 16,300

(c) 17,500

(d) 18,700

Q.53. Which of the following is not a reason for an idle time variance?

(a) Wage rate increase

(b) Machine breakdown

(c) Illness or injury to worker

(d) Non- availability of material

Q.54. During September, 300 labour hours were worked for a total cost of Rs 4800. The variable overhead

expenditure variance was Rs 600 (A). Overheads are assumed to be related to direct labour hours of active

working.

What was the standard cost per labour hour?

(a) Rs 14

(b) Rs 16.50

(c) Rs 17.50

(d) Rs 18

Q.55. Which of the following would explain an adverse variable production overhead efficiency variance?

1. Employees were of a lower skill level than specified in the standard

2. Unexpected idle time resulted from a series of machine breakdown

3. Poor Quality material was difficult to process

(a) (1), (2) and (3)

(b) (1) and (2)

(c) (2) and (3)

(d) (1) and (3)

Q.56. Budgeted sales of X for March are 18000 units. At the end of the production process for X, 10% of

production units are scrapped as defective. Opening inventories of X for March are budgeted to be 15000

units and closing inventories will be 11,400 units. All inventories of finished goods must have successfully

passed the quality control check. The production budget for X for March, in units is:

Test Paper

571

(a) 12,960

(b) 14,400

(c) 15,840

(d) 16,000

Q.57. CG Co manufactures a single product T. Budgeted production output of product T during June is 200

units. Each unit of product T requires 6 labour hours for completion and CG Co anticipates 20 per cent idle

time. Labour is paid at a rate of Rs7 per hour. The direct labour cost budget for March is

(a) Rs 6,720

(b) 8,400

(c) 10,080

(d) 10,500

Q.58. A Local Authority is preparing cash Budget for its refuse disposal department. Which of the following

items would not be included in the cash budget?

(a) Capital cost of a new collection vehicle

(b) Depreciation of the machinery

(c) Operatives wages

(d) Fuel for the collection Vehicles

Q.59. BDL Ltd. is currently preparing its cash budget for the year to 31 March 2014. An extract from its sales

budget for the same year shows the following sales values.

Rs

March 60,000

April 70,000

May 55,000

June 65,000

40% of its sales are expected to be for cash. Of its credit sales, 70% are expected to pay in month after sale

and take a 2% discount. 27% are expected to pay in the second month after the sale, and the remaining 3%

are expected to be bad debts. The value of sales budget to be shown in the cash budget for May 2013 is

(a) Rs 60,532

(b) Rs 61,120

(c) Rs 66,532

(d) Rs 86,620

Q.60. The actual output of 162,500 units and actual fixed costs of Rs. 87000 were exactly as budgeted.

However, the actual expenditure of Rs 300,000 was Rs. 18,000 over budget.

What was the budget variable cost per unit?

(a) Rs 1.20

EP-CMA

572

(b) Rs 1.31

(c) Rs1.42

(d) Rs 1.50

Q.61. CA Co manufactures a single product and has drawn up the following flexed budget for the year.

60% 70% 80%

Rs Rs Rs

Direct materials 120,000 140,000 160,000

Direct labour 90,000 105,000 120,000

Production overheads 54,000 58,000 62,000

Other overheads 40,000 40,000 40,000

Total Cost

304,000 343,000 382,000

What would be the total cost in a budget that is prepared at the 77% level of activity?

(a) Rs 330,300

(b) Rs 370,300

(c) Rs 373,300

(d) Rs 377,300

Q.62. A ltd is a manufacturing company that has no production resource limitations for the foreseeable

future. The Managing Director has asked the company mangers to coordinate the preparation of their

budgets for the next financial year. In what order should the following budgets be prepared?

(1) Sales budget

(2) Cash budget

(3) Production budget

(4) Purchase budget

(5) Finished goods inventory budget

(a) (2), (3), (4), (5), (1)

(b) (1), (5), (3), (4), (2)

(c) (1), (4), (5), (3), (2)

(d) (4), (5), (3), (1), (2)

Q.63. S produces and sells one product, P, for which the data are as follows:

Selling price Rs 28

Variable cost Rs 16

Fixed cost Rs 4

The fixed costs are based on a budgeted production and sales level of 25,000 units for the next period.

Due to market changes both the selling price and the variable cost are expected to increase above the

budgeted level in the next period.

Test Paper

573

If the selling price and variable cost per unit increase by 10% and 8% respectively, by how much must sales

volume change, compared with the original budgeted level, in order to achieve the original budgeted profit for

the period?

(a) 10.1% decrease

(b) 11.2% decrease

(c) 13.3% decrease

(d) 16.0% decrease

Q.64. In process costing, a joint product is

(a) a product which is later divided into many parts

(b) a product which is produced simultaneously with other products and is of similar value to at least

one of the other products.

(c) A product which is produced simultaneously with other products but which is of a greater value than

any of the other products.

(d) a product produced jointly with another organization

Q.65. Process B had no opening inventory. 13,500 units of raw material were transferred in at Rs 4.50 per

unit. Additional material at Rs1.25per unit was added in process. Labour and overheads were Rs 6.25 per

completed unit and Rs 2.50 per unit incomplete.

If 11,750completed units were transferred out, what was the closing inventory in Process B?

(a) Rs. 6562.50

(b) Rs. 12,250.00

(c) Rs. 14,437.50

(d) Rs. 25,375.00

Q.66. A process costing system for J Co used an input of 3,500Kg of materials at Rs20 per Kg and labour

hours of 2,750 at Rs25 per hour. Normal loss is 20% and losses can be sold at a scrap value of Rs5per Kg.

Output was 2,950 Kg. What is the value of the output?

(a) Rs 142,485

(b) Rs 146,183

(c) Rs 149,746

(d) Rs 152,986

Q.67. In process costing, if an abnormal loss arises, the process account is generally

(a) Debited with the scrap value of the abnormal loss units

(b) Debited with the full production cost of the abnormal loss units

(c) Credited with the scrap value of the abnormal loss units

(d) Credited with the full production cost of the abnormal loss units

EP-CMA

574

Q.68. Which of the following statements is/are correct?

1. A materials requisition note is used to record the issue of direct material to a specific job.

2. A typical job cost will contain actual costs for material, labour and production overheads, and non –

production overheads are often added as a percentage of total production cost

3. The job costing method can be applied in costing batches

(a) (1) only

(b) (1) and (2) only

(c) (1) and (3) only

(d) (2) and (3) only

Q.69. A job is budgeted to require 3,300 productive hours after incurring 25% idle time. If the total labour

cost budgeted for the job is Rs36,300. What is the labour cost per hour( to the nearest cent)?

(a) Rs 8.25

(b) Rs 8.80

(c) Rs 11.00

(d) Rs 14.67

Q.70. A company calculates the prices of jobs by adding overheads to the prime cost and adding 30% to

total costs as a profit margin. Job number Y256 was sold for Rs1690 and incurred overheads of Rs 694.

What was the prime cost of the job?

(a) Rs 489

(b) Rs 606

(c) Rs 996

(d) Rs 1300

Q.71. State which of the following are the characteristics of service costing.

1. High levels of indirect costs as a proportion of total costs

2. Use of composite cost units

3. Use of equivalent units

(a) (1) only

(b) (1) and (2) only

(c) (2) only

(d) (2) and (3) only

Q.72. Which of the following organisations should not be advised to use service costing?

(a) Distribution service

(b) Hospital

(c) Maintenance division of a manufacturing company

Test Paper

575

(d) A light engineering company

Q.73. Calculate the most appropriate unit cost for a distribution division of a multinational company using the

following information.

Miles travelled 636,500

Tonnes carried 2,479

Number of drivers 20

Hours worked by drivers 35,520

Tonnes miles carried 375,200

Cost incurred 562,800

(a) Rs .88

(b) Rs 1.50

(c) Rs 15.84

(d) Rs28, 140

Q.74. The following information is available for the W hotel for the latest thirty day period.

Number of rooms available per night 40

Percentage occupancy achieved 65%

Room servicing cost incurred Rs. 3900

The room servicing cost per occupied room-night last period, to the nearest Rs, was:

(a) Rs 3.25

(b) Rs 5.00

(c) Rs 97.50

(d) Rs 150.00

Q.75. A company makes a single product and incurs fixed costs of Rs. 30,000 per annum. Variable cost per

unit is Rs. 5 and each unit sells for Rs. 15. Annual sales demand is 7,000 units. The breakeven point is:

(a) 2,000 units

(b) 3,000 units

(c) 4,000 units

(d) 6,000 units

Q.76. A company manufactures a single product for which cost and selling price data are as follows:

Selling price per unit - Rs. 12

Variable cost per unit - Rs. 8

Fixed cost for a period - Rs. 98,000

Budgeted sales for a period - 30,000 units

The margin of safety, expressed as a percentage of budgeted sales,is:

(a) 20%

EP-CMA

576

b) 25%

(c) 73%

(d) 125%

Information for Q.77 to Q.79:

Information concerning A Ltd.'s single product is as follows:

Selling price - Rs. 6 per unit

Variable production cost - RS. 1.20 per unit

Variable selling cost - Rs. 0.40 per unit

Fixed production cost - Rs. 4 per unit

Fixed selling cost - Rs. 0.80 per unit.

Budgeted production and sales for the year are 10,000 units.

Q.77. What is the company's breakeven point:

(a) 8,000 units

b) 8,333 units

(c) 10,000 units

(d) 10,909 units

Q.78. How many units must be sold if company wants to achieve a profit of Rs. 11,000 for the year?

(a) 2,500 units

(b) 9,833 units

(c) 10,625 units

(d) 13,409 units

Q.79. It is now expected that the variable production cost per unit and the selling price per unit will each

increase by 10%, and fixed production cost will rise by 25%. What will be the new break even point?

(a) 8,788 units

(b) 11,600 units

(c) 11,885 units

(d) 12,397 units

Q.80. A company's break even point is 6,000 units per annum. The selling price is Rs. 90 per unit and the

variable cost is Rs. 40 per unit. What are the company's annual fixed costs?

(a) Rs. 120

(b) Rs. 2,40,000

(c) Rs. 3,00,000

(d) Rs. 5,40,000

Test Paper

577

Q.81. Capital gearing ratio is ___________.

(a) Market test ratio

(b) Long-term solvency ratio

(c) Liquid ratio

(d) urnover ratio

Q.82. After inviting tenders for supply of raw materials, two quotations are received as follows—

Supplier P Rs. 2.20 per unit, Supplier Q Rs. 2.10 per unit plus Rs. 2,000 fixed charges irrespective of the

units ordered. The order quantity for which the purchase price per unit will be the same—

(a) 22,000 units

(b) 20,000 units

(c) 21,000 units

(d) None of the above.

Q.83. In case of joint products, the main objective of accounting of the cost is to apportion the joint costs

incurred up to the split off point. For cost apportionment one company has chosen Physical Quantity Method.

Three joint products ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ are produced in the same process. Up to the point of split off the total

production of A, B and C is 60,000 kg, out of which ‘A’ produces 30,000 kg and joint costs are Rs. 3,60,000.

Joint costs allocated to product A is

(a) Rs. 1,20,000

(b) Rs. 60,000

(c) Rs. 1,80,000

(d) None of the these

Q.84. A transport company is running five buses between two towns, which are 50 kms apart. Seating

capacity of each bus is 50 passengers. Actually passengers carried by each bus were 75% of seating

capacity. All buses ran on all days of the month. Each bus made one round trip per day.

Passenger kms are:

(a) 2,81,250

(b) 1,87,500

(c) 5,62,500

(d) None of the above

Q.85. The cost per unit of a product manufactured in a factory amounts to Rs. 160 (75% variable) when the

production is 10,000 units. When production increases by 25%, the cost of production will be Rs. per unit.

(a) Rs. 145

(b) Rs. 150

(c) Rs. 152

(d) Rs. 140

EP-CMA

578

Q.86. In ‘make or buy’ decision, it is profitable to buy from outside only when the supplier’s price is below the

firm’s own ______________.

(a) Fixed Cost

(b) Variable Cost

(c) Total Cost

(d) Prime Cost

Q.87. A budget which is prepared in a manner so as to give the budgeted cost for any level of activity is

known as:

(a) Master budget

(b) Zero base budget

((c) Functional budget

(d) Flexible budget

Q.88. _________ is also known as working capital ratio.

(a) Current ratio

(b) Quick ratio

((c) Liquid ratio

(d) Debt-equity ratio

Q.89. ___________ is a summary of all functional budgets in a capsule form.

(a) Functional Budget

(b) Master Budget

(c) Long Period Budget

(d) Flexible Budget

Q.90. _____________ is a detailed budget of cash receipts and cash expenditure incorporating both

revenue and capital items.

(a) Cash Budget

(b) Capital Expenditure Budget

(c) Sales Budget

(d) Overhead Budget

Q.91. Statutory cost audit are applicable only to:

(a) Firm

(b) Company

(c) Individual

(d) Society

Test Paper

579

Q.92. For the financial year ended as on March 31, 2013 the figures extracted from the balance sheet of

Xerox Limited as under:

Opening Stock Rs. 29,000; Purchases Rs. 2,42,000; Sales Rs. 3,20,000; Gross Profit 25% of Sales. Stock

Turnover Ratio will be :-

(a) 8 times

(b) 6 times

(c) 9 times

(d) 10 times

Q.93. If credit sales for the year is Rs. 5,40,000 and Debtors at the end of year is Rs. 90,000 the Average

Collection Period will be

(a) 30 days

(b) 61 days

(c) 90 days

(d) 120 days

Q.94. The summarized balance sheet of Rakesh udyog Limited shows the balances of previous and current

year of provision for taxation Rs. 50,000 and Rs. 65,000. If taxed paid during the current year amounted to

Rs. 70,000 then amount charge from Profit and Loss Account will be:

(a) Rs. 55,000

(b) Rs. 85,000

(c) Rs. 45,000

(d) Rs. 1,85,000

Q.95. The summarized balance sheet of Autolight Limited shows the balances of previous and current year

of retained earnings Rs. 25,000 and Rs. 35,000. If dividend paid during the current year amounted to Rs.

5,000 then profit earned during the year will be:

(a) Rs. 5,000

(b) Rs. 55,000

(c) Rs. 15,000

(d) Rs. 65,000

Q.96. Following information is available of XYZ Limited for quarter ended June, 2013

Fixed cost Rs. 5,00,000

Variable cost Rs. 10 per unit

Selling price Rs. 15 per unit

Output level 1,50,000 units

What will be amount of profit earned during the quarter using the marginal costing technique?

(a) Rs. 2,50,000

EP-CMA

580

(b) Rs. 10,00,000

(c) Rs. 5,00,000

(d) Rs. 17,50,000

Q.97. The P/v ratio of a company is 50% and margin of safety is 40%. If present sales is Rs. 30,00,000 then

Break Even Point in Rs. will be

(a) Rs. 9,00,000

(b) Rs. 18,00,000

(c) Rs. 5,00,000

(d) None of the above

Q.98. Following information is available of PQR for year ended March, 2013: 4,000 units in process, 3,800

units output, 10% of input is normal wastage, Rs. 2.50 per unit is scrap value and Rs. 46,000 incurred

towards total process cost then amount on account of abnormal gain to be transferred to Costing P&L will

be:-

(a) Rs. 2,500

(b) Rs. 2,000

(c) Rs. 4,000

(d) Rs. 3,500

Q.99. In element-wise classification of overheads, which one of the following is not included —

(a) Fixed overheads

(b) Indirect labour

(c) Indirect materials

(d) Indirect expenditure.

Q.100. When the sales increase from Rs. 40,000 to Rs. 60,000 and profit increases by Rs. 5,000, the P/V

ratio is —

(a) 20%

(b) 30%

(c) 25%

(d) 40%.

Test Paper

581

1. d

2. a

3. d

4. a

5. c

6. a

7. d

8. b

9. b

10. b

11. a

12. b

13. c

14. c

15. b

16. c

17. c

18. d

19. b

20. a

21. a

22. b

23. c

24. d

25. b

26. a

27. b

28. a

29. a

30. b

31. c

32. b

33. d

34. d

35. d

36. c

37. b

38. d

39. c

40. c

41. a

42. b

43. a

44. b

45. b

46. b

47. d

48. c

49. b

50. a

51. c

52. d

53. a

54. a

55. d

56. d

57. d

58. b

59. a

60. a

61. b

62. b

63. b

64. b

65. c

66. a

67. d

68. c

69. a

70. b

71. b

72. d

73. b

74. b

75. b

76. a

77. d

78. d

79. c

80. c

81. b

82. b

83. c

84. c

85. c

86. b

87. d

88. a

89. b

90. a

91. b

92. a

93. b

94. b

95. c

96. a

97. b

98. a

99. a

100. c

ANSWERS

h

There is negative marking in the ratio of 1:4 for wrong answers.

582 EP-CMA

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES (CONTD........)

1.

Candidate should write his/her Roll Number in words in the allotted space. The Roll

Number should also be written in figures in the boxes and appropriate circles be

darkened.

2.

Before signing the Attendance Sheet, candidate should remove the "Barcode Sticker" of

that particular paper from the Attendance Sheet and affix the same vertically in the

space provided on the OMR Answer Sheet.

3.

Candidates are required to fill-up relevant particulars and

I

darken the relevant circles

such as Date of Examination, Subject, Question Paper Booklet No. and Question Paper

Booklet Code (A, B, C or D) as printed on the Question Paper Booklet, Subject Code,

Examination Centre Code and Medium of Examination at the appropriate boxes/space

on the OMR Answer Sheet. Candidates wrongly/not filling-in or darkening any of the

information as stated above, their answer sheet shall be liable to be rejected.

4.

Candidates shall use only blue or black ball point pen for writing the particulars and

darkening the circles.

5.

Candidates should not change, alter or erase their answers once darkened. Hence before

darkening the circles corresponding to the question number, they are advised to ensure

the correctness/authenticity of the answer.

6.

Candidates must duly handover the OMR Answer Sheet to the lnvigilator before leaving

the Examination Hall and the invigilator's signature be obtained in the Admit Card as an

acknowledgement of the same.

7.

Carrying mobile phones, pagers, any kind of communication device(s), books, printed

or handwritten materials,

etc.

are totally banned inside the Examination

Hall/Room/Premises.

8.

Any candidate found in possession of any banned item(s) (as stated above) inside the

Examination Hall/Room/Premises will be deemed to have willfully infringed the

"Instructions to Examinees" amounting to misconduct and liable to be expelled.

9.

Candidate's eligibility to appear in any paper(s) and

I

or examinations shall be subject to

the provisions of the Company Secretaries Regulations, 1982, as in force.

10.

Subject and their codes are as under:

SUBJECT

SUBJECT CODE

MODULE

(i)

Cost and Management Accounting

(ii)

Tax Laws and Practice

(iii) Industrial, Labour and General Laws

CMA-322

TLP-324

ILGL-327

I

II

583

EP-CMA

584